EcoStruxure™ Control Expert

Operating Modes
Original instructions

33003101.26
06/2022

www.se.com
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its
subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its
subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and furnished for
informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), for any
purpose, without the prior written permission of Schneider Electric.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide or its
content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as is" basis.
Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and
maintained only by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information contained in
this guide may be subject to change without notice.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by
Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational
content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the
information contained herein.

As part of a group of responsible, inclusive companies, we are updating our communications

that contain non-inclusive terminology. Until we complete this process, however, our content
may still contain standardized industry terms that may be deemed inappropriate by our
customers.
Table of Contents
Safety Information ..................................................................................................31
Before You Begin..............................................................................................32
Start-up and Test ..............................................................................................33
Operation and Adjustments ...............................................................................34
About the Book ......................................................................................................35
General ....................................................................................................................39
General Presentation of Control Expert ....................................................................40
Capabilities of Control Expert ............................................................................40
User Interface ..................................................................................................45
Programming Language Editors ..............................................................................49
Function Block Diagram FBD.............................................................................49
Ladder Diagram (LD) Language ........................................................................52
General Information about SFC Sequence Language..........................................54
Instruction List IL ..............................................................................................58
Structured Text ST............................................................................................59
Connecting a terminal to a PLC ...............................................................................62
Methodology for connecting from a PC to a PLC .................................................62
Global project management ....................................................................................65
Access security management ............................................................................65
Access security management ......................................................................65
Project management.........................................................................................66
Access to Control Expert Software ...............................................................66
Services in Offline Mode..............................................................................68
Services in Online Mode..............................................................................77
Allowed Online Modifications .......................................................................79
Connection / disconnection..........................................................................85
Accessing a PLC via a Network....................................................................87
Overview of Types of Connection Possible With Schneider PLCs ...................92
Accessing communication parameters .........................................................95
Project comparison .....................................................................................99
Conversion of Legacy Applications/Projects................................................ 101
Importing an LL984 Application .................................................................. 102

33003101.26 3
 Transferring the project between the terminal and the PLC........................... 112
Update of Upload Information .................................................................... 116
Sending a command to the PLC................................................................. 117
Project Backup Management for Modicon M340.......................................... 118
Project backup for Premium....................................................................... 120
Save/Restore Data Between a File and the PLC.......................................... 122
Compatibility Rules for Restore Using a *.DTX File ...................................... 127
Transferring Current Values ....................................................................... 134
Memory usage.......................................................................................... 134
Data Memory Protection............................................................................ 140
Function Pack for Memory ......................................................................... 145
Memory Card Access for Modicon M340..................................................... 147
FTP and Memory Card for Modicon M340................................................... 148
Project Management with DTMs ................................................................ 150
Project browser .................................................................................................... 155
Introduction to the project browser ................................................................... 155
Introduction to the project browser.............................................................. 155
Structural view and functional view of the project ......................................... 158
The Zoom In and Zoom Out commands...................................................... 160
The commands Contract all and Expand all ................................................ 163
The Goto command .................................................................................. 168
User Directory .......................................................................................... 171
Project Properties ..................................................................................... 172
Application Protection ............................................................................... 174
Safe Area Password Protection.................................................................. 181
Firmware Protection .................................................................................. 185
Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection ........................................ 187
Data Storage/Web Protection .................................................................... 189
Loss of Password ..................................................................................... 191
Introduction to the various directories of the project browser .............................. 198
Project Directory ...................................................................................... 198
Configuration Directory.............................................................................. 199
Derived data types (DDT) directory ............................................................ 201
Derived FB (DFB) types directory ............................................................... 202
Variables Directory.................................................................................... 203

4 33003101.26
 Motion Directory ....................................................................................... 205
Communication Directory .......................................................................... 207
Ethernet Network Directory ...................................................................... 208
Programs Directory .................................................................................. 208
Animation Tables Directory ........................................................................ 212
Operator Screens Directory ....................................................................... 215
Documentation Directory ........................................................................... 217
Conversion Report Directory...................................................................... 218
Summaries of the utilities associated with the structure view and function
view............................................................................................................... 220
Summary of the services associated with the structural view ........................ 220
Functional modules .............................................................................................. 232
Introduction to the functional view .................................................................... 232
Functional modules................................................................................... 232
Project directory of the functional view ........................................................ 234
Functional Module Directory .................................................................... 235
Functional Module Program Directory......................................................... 236
Functional Module Animation Tables Directory ............................................ 237
Functional Module Operator Screens Directory ........................................... 238
Summary of the services associated with the functional view........................ 239
The functional modules and their associated utilities ......................................... 246
Properties of a functional module ............................................................... 246
Creating a functional module ..................................................................... 247
Programming a functional module .............................................................. 248
Protecting program elements of the functional module ................................. 250
Debugging a functional module .................................................................. 250
Detaching/Deleting a functional module ...................................................... 251
Functional module export .......................................................................... 255
Functional module import .......................................................................... 255
Creating, Deleting, Locating, Dragging-and-Dropping an Animation Table
in a Functional Module .............................................................................. 255
Creating, Deleting, Locating and Dragging-and-Dropping an Operator
Screen in a Functional Module ................................................................... 258
FDT Container ..................................................................................................... 263
FDT Container ............................................................................................... 263

33003101.26 5
 Introduction to the Control Expert FDT Container ........................................ 263
FDT Container User Rights........................................................................ 264
DTM Hardware Catalog .................................................................................. 266
Introduction to the Hardware Catalog ......................................................... 266
Description of DTM Hardware Catalog........................................................ 267
Adding a DTM to the Control Expert Hardware Catalog................................ 271
Adding an EDS File to the Hardware Catalog .............................................. 272
Removing an EDS File from the Hardware Catalog...................................... 274
Export / Import EDS Library ....................................................................... 276
DTM Browser ................................................................................................. 279
DTM Browser ........................................................................................... 279
Ethernet Ready Equipment........................................................................ 284
Ready, Built, Connected and Installed DTMs............................................... 285
DTM Browser Contextual Menus................................................................ 289
Field Bus Discovery Service ...................................................................... 297
Store Device Configurations ...................................................................... 301
Renaming DTMs....................................................................................... 302
Profibus DTMs.......................................................................................... 304
DTM Properties Tabs ...................................................................................... 305
DTM Properties Dialog .............................................................................. 305
Type Library Manager........................................................................................... 310
Libset (Set of Libraries) ................................................................................... 310
Overview of the Type Library Manager ............................................................. 313
Type Library Manager ..................................................................................... 314
Description of the Type Library Manager .......................................................... 317
Loading an object from the library into the project ............................................. 323
Transferring an object from the project into the library........................................ 326
Creating a new library and family ..................................................................... 328
Creating an installable family ........................................................................... 330
Updating a family of a library ........................................................................... 332
Consistency Check Assistant .......................................................................... 334
Library Version Management........................................................................... 337
Using the type library of an older Unity Pro/Control Expert Version ..................... 341
Data Editor ............................................................................................................. 344
Description of the Data Editor................................................................................ 345

6 33003101.26
 Data Editor Access ......................................................................................... 345
Description of Data Editor tabs ........................................................................ 347
Creating derived data types (DDT)......................................................................... 352
Access to derived data types (DDT) ................................................................. 352
Creation of a derived data type (DDT) .............................................................. 353
Administration of derived data types and their elements..................................... 364
Creating Nested Derived Data Types ............................................................... 366
Save Derived Data Types (DDT)...................................................................... 371
Creating data types of user function blocks (DFB)................................................... 374
Creation and Management of Data Types and Function Blocks (DFB) ................ 374
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family of function blocks (EF) ........... 376
Creating / Deleting a variable instance of function blocks (EFB/DFB) .................. 376
Displaying function block variable instances in the editor ................................... 379
Changing the attribute for variable instances in a function block ......................... 382
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/DDT/IODDT/Device DDT
families................................................................................................................ 386
Creation of EDT instances............................................................................... 386
Creation of DDT instances............................................................................... 390
Creating an IODDT instance............................................................................ 396
Managing a Device DDT instance .................................................................... 399
Managing an IODDT, DDT or an Array type instance ......................................... 403
Creation of multiple variable instances ............................................................. 409
Displaying the variable instances in the editor ................................................... 411
Changing attributes of variable instances ......................................................... 414
Creation of a Reference Type Instance............................................................. 418
General Functions ............................................................................................... 421
Configuring the Data Editor columns ................................................................ 421
Description of the Data Editor: Variable type selection ....................................... 425
Filtering of Data .............................................................................................. 430
Exporting a subset of variables ........................................................................ 434
Analyze DDT and DFB Data Types................................................................... 435
Purge of Unused Instances ............................................................................. 436
Local printing of data....................................................................................... 437
Save the context of the Data Editor .................................................................. 438
Communication ..................................................................................................... 441

33003101.26 7
 Presentation of the communication editors ............................................................. 442
Presentation of the communication editors of the project browser....................... 442
Network Configuration .......................................................................................... 445
Network Configuration Principle Using Control Expert ....................................... 445
Creating a Logic Network ................................................................................ 446
Configuring a Logic Network............................................................................ 448
Associating a Logic Network with Network Hardware......................................... 449
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations ................................................. 453
Configuration ................................................................................................. 454
Configuration of Multi-Network Services ........................................................... 455
Configuring an X-Way Router Module .............................................................. 456
Examples of X-Way Routing Stations ............................................................... 460
Examples of Partial Routing ............................................................................ 463
Programming ......................................................................................................... 468
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections ....................................................... 469
Access to Tasks.............................................................................................. 469
Create and Configuration of a Task ............................................................ 469
Displaying and Modifying Task Properties ................................................... 471
Accessing Program Units ................................................................................ 472
Creating Program Units ............................................................................. 472
Properties Dialog Box for Program Units..................................................... 474
Program Unit Data Scope .......................................................................... 479
Program Unit Data Editor Access ............................................................... 482
Description of Program Unit Data Editor Tabs.............................................. 483
Program Unit Variables.............................................................................. 488
Program Unit Management........................................................................ 496
Accessing Sections ........................................................................................ 499
Creating an FBD, LD, IL, or ST Section....................................................... 499
Properties Dialog Box for FBD, LD, IL, or ST Sections ................................. 502
Creating SFC sections .............................................................................. 507
Properties Dialog Box for SFC Sections...................................................... 510
Creating action, transition and macro sections ............................................ 515
Action, transition and macro sections properties dialog box .......................... 516
Create a Sub-Program Section (SR)........................................................... 519
Property Dialog of the Sub-Program Sections ............................................. 521

8 33003101.26
 Creating a Timer Event Section.................................................................. 523
Properties dialog box for Timer Event Sections ........................................... 526
Create an I/O Event Section ...................................................................... 529
Property Dialog of I/O Event Sections......................................................... 531
Opening a Section .................................................................................... 534
Deleting sections ...................................................................................... 535
Execution order of sections........................................................................ 535
Creating LL984 Segments and Networks .................................................... 536
Modifying LL984 Segment Properties ......................................................... 540
Modifying LL984 Network Properties .......................................................... 541
Scheduling LL984 Segments and Network.................................................. 543
Deleting, Cutting, Copying and Pasting LL984 Segments and
Network ................................................................................................... 544
Control Expert Software Options ........................................................................... 546
Project Settings .............................................................................................. 546
General Description ................................................................................. 547
General Project Settings............................................................................ 548
Variables .................................................................................................. 562
Program................................................................................................... 566
Maintain Output Links on Disabled EF (EN=0)............................................. 574
Configuration Settings for Operator Screens ............................................... 583
Options.......................................................................................................... 587
General Description ................................................................................. 587
General Options ....................................................................................... 588
Data and Languages................................................................................. 590
Connection Options .................................................................................. 592
The Operator Screens Option .................................................................... 594
Converters ............................................................................................... 596
Customize Dialog Box..................................................................................... 602
Customize Dialog Box ............................................................................... 602
Common Function for graphical language .............................................................. 607
Using Bookmarks in Graphical Languages Sections.......................................... 607
Display grid in a FBD/LD/SFC section .............................................................. 613
Zoom in a FBD/LD/SFC section ....................................................................... 613
Tracking links in a FBD/LD/SFC section ........................................................... 616

33003101.26 9
 Print Current Section in a FBD/LD/SFC section................................................. 617
Undo and redo changes in a FBD/LD section.................................................... 618
Using connectors in a FBD/LD section ............................................................. 619
Inspect windows in a FBD/LD section............................................................... 624
Tooltips for Variables in a FBD/LD/SFC Section ................................................ 628
Replace Variables in a FBD/LD Section............................................................ 630
Initialize search in a FBD/LD section ................................................................ 635
Initialize Animation Table in a FBD/LD section................................................... 636
Go to in a FBD/LD section ............................................................................... 637
Go to dialog box in a FBD/LD section ............................................................... 639
FBD Editor........................................................................................................... 643
Creating a program with FBD programming language ....................................... 643
Structure of an FBD program (function block language) ............................... 643
Creating an FBD Program ......................................................................... 645
Syntax and Semantics Check during programming...................................... 646
Navigating with the keyboard ..................................................................... 647
Selecting objects ...................................................................................... 648
Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting, duplicating, and moving objects .............. 650
Copying, pasting and adjusting pin variables............................................... 655
Inserting Rows and Columns ..................................................................... 656
Deleting Rows and Columns...................................................................... 657
Displaying the properties ........................................................................... 658
Refining DFBs and subroutines.................................................................. 659
Editing FFBs .................................................................................................. 661
General information about calling an FFB ................................................... 661
Calling an FFB via the FFB Input Assistant. ................................................ 663
Calling an FFB via the data selection .......................................................... 666
Assign actual parameters .......................................................................... 671
Using Public Variables............................................................................... 683
Expanding Functions................................................................................. 684
Negating FFB Pins.................................................................................... 685
EN and ENO Show and Hide ....................................................................... 686
Modifying the execution order .................................................................... 687
Replacing an FFB ..................................................................................... 691

10 33003101.26
 Properties dialog box for elementary functions, procedures and sub-routine
blocks. ..................................................................................................... 693
Properties dialog box for elementary and derived function blocks
(FBs) ....................................................................................................... 695
Returning from a Subroutine or DFB ................................................................ 698
Returning from a Subroutine or DFB........................................................... 698
Return object properties dialog box ............................................................ 700
Calling a Subroutine ....................................................................................... 700
Calling a subroutine .................................................................................. 701
Jumps within the Current Section..................................................................... 705
Jump within the current section .................................................................. 705
Jump object properties dialog box .............................................................. 708
Definition of the Jump Target (Jump Labels) ..................................................... 710
Definitions of Jump Labels......................................................................... 710
Jump label objects properties dialog box..................................................... 713
Editing Links .................................................................................................. 715
Links........................................................................................................ 715
Placing a Link ........................................................................................... 716
Editing Links............................................................................................. 721
Entering Comments ........................................................................................ 729
Entering comments ................................................................................... 729
Online functions ............................................................................................. 731
Online functions........................................................................................ 731
FBD Reference Data Type .............................................................................. 731
Reference Data Type in FBD ..................................................................... 731
Export/Import ................................................................................................. 732
Export/Import FBD Sections ...................................................................... 733
Customize FBD Editor .................................................................................... 733
Customize FBD Editor Colors .................................................................... 733
FBD Favorite Bar..................................................................................... 735
LD Editor ............................................................................................................. 737
Creating a program with LD programming language .......................................... 737
Structure of an LD program (ladder diagram) .............................................. 738
Creating an LD program ............................................................................ 740
Syntax and Semantics Check during programming...................................... 744

33003101.26 11
 View for variables ..................................................................................... 745
Navigating with the Keyboard .................................................................... 750
Selecting objects ...................................................................................... 752
Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting, duplicating, and moving objects .............. 755
Copying, and pasting variables .................................................................. 759
Insert Mode .............................................................................................. 760
Using Mnemonics ..................................................................................... 761
Displaying the properties ........................................................................... 762
Refining DFBs and subroutines.................................................................. 763
Inserting, Deleting, and Copying Rows ....................................................... 765
Columns Management .............................................................................. 766
Editing Contacts ............................................................................................. 767
Select contacts ......................................................................................... 768
Placing contacts ....................................................................................... 769
Property dialog box for contacts ................................................................. 773
Editing Coils................................................................................................... 775
Selection of coils....................................................................................... 776
Placing coils ............................................................................................. 778
Property dialog box for coils....................................................................... 783
Editing compare blocks ................................................................................... 786
Placing compare blocks............................................................................. 787
Compare block properties dialog box.......................................................... 790
Editing operation blocks .................................................................................. 792
Placing Operate Blocks ............................................................................. 792
Operate block properties dialog box ........................................................... 796
Editing FFBs .................................................................................................. 798
General information on calling an FFB ........................................................ 799
Calling an FFB via the FFB input assistant .................................................. 800
Calling an FFB via the data selection .......................................................... 804
Connection of FFBs to the Left Power Rail .................................................. 808
Assigning Actual Parameters ..................................................................... 809
Using Public Variables............................................................................... 822
Expanding Functions................................................................................. 824
Negating FFB Pins.................................................................................... 826
EN and ENO Show and Hide ....................................................................... 827

12 33003101.26
 Properties dialog box for elementary functions, procedures and sub-routine
blocks. ..................................................................................................... 827
Properties dialog box for elementary and derived function blocks
(FBs) ....................................................................................................... 830
Returning from a Subroutine or DFB ................................................................ 832
Returning from a subroutine or DFB ........................................................... 832
Return object properties dialog box ............................................................ 834
Jumps within the Current Section..................................................................... 835
Jumps within the current section ................................................................ 835
Jump object properties dialog box .............................................................. 838
Definition of the Jump Target (Jump Labels) ..................................................... 840
Definitions of jump targets (jump labels) ..................................................... 840
Jump label properties dialog box ................................................................ 843
Editing Links .................................................................................................. 845
Select links............................................................................................... 845
Combining Links ....................................................................................... 847
Placing links ............................................................................................. 849
Editing links .............................................................................................. 864
Entering Comments ........................................................................................ 872
Entering comments ................................................................................... 872
Online functions ............................................................................................. 874
Online Functions....................................................................................... 874
LD Reference Data Type................................................................................. 874
Reference Data Type in LD........................................................................ 874
Export/Import ................................................................................................. 875
Export/Import LD Sections ......................................................................... 876
Customize LD Editor ....................................................................................... 876
Customize LD Editor Colors....................................................................... 876
LD Instruction Bar................................................................................... 878
LD Favorite Bar ....................................................................................... 879
SFC Editor........................................................................................................... 882
Creating a program with the SFC programming language .................................. 882
Structure of an SFC Program (Sequential Function Chart) ........................... 883
Creating an SFC Program ......................................................................... 885
Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming ..................................... 886

33003101.26 13
 Navigating with the keyboard ..................................................................... 887
Selecting Objects...................................................................................... 889
Undo and Redo Changes .......................................................................... 891
Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting and moving objects................................. 892
Inserting Rows and Columns ..................................................................... 897
Deleting Rows and Columns...................................................................... 899
Displaying the object properties ................................................................. 900
Initialize Search ........................................................................................ 901
Initialize Animation Table ........................................................................... 902
Refining steps, macro steps and transitions ................................................ 904
Go to ....................................................................................................... 905
Go to dialog.............................................................................................. 907
List and display jumps ............................................................................... 911
Go to Step................................................................................................ 912
General Information about Steps ..................................................................... 913
Selecting steps ......................................................................................... 913
Placing steps............................................................................................ 915
Editing "normal" steps ..................................................................................... 916
Defining the properties of steps.................................................................. 917
Steps properties dialog box ....................................................................... 924
Editing macro steps ........................................................................................ 929
Defining the properties of macro steps........................................................ 930
Macro Steps Properties Dialog Box ............................................................ 937
Editing input steps .......................................................................................... 940
Defining the properties of InSteps .............................................................. 940
InSteps properties dialog box..................................................................... 942
Editing Output Steps ....................................................................................... 946
Defining the properties of OutSteps ............................................................ 947
OutStep properties dialog box.................................................................... 948
Editing actions................................................................................................ 950
Assigning actions to a step ........................................................................ 951
Display modes for actions.......................................................................... 960
Editing Transitions .......................................................................................... 961
Placing transitions..................................................................................... 961
Defining transition properties ..................................................................... 963

14 33003101.26
 Properties dialog box for transitions............................................................ 968
Editing Jumps ................................................................................................ 970
Placing jumps ........................................................................................... 971
Defining jump properties............................................................................ 972
Jump properties dialog box........................................................................ 974
Editing Branches and Joints ............................................................................ 976
Selecting Branches and Joints ................................................................... 977
Placing branches and joints ....................................................................... 978
Modifying the Properties of Branches and Joints ......................................... 979
Branches properties dialog box .................................................................. 982
Joints properties dialog box ....................................................................... 983
Inserting Alternative Strings and Simultaneous Strings ...................................... 984
Selecting Alternative Sequences and Parallel Sequences ............................ 984
Placing alternative sequences and parallel sequences................................. 985
Inserting Step-Transitions and Transition-Step-Sequences ................................ 988
Selecting Step-Transition and Transition-Step Sequences ........................... 988
Placing step-transition and transition-step sequences.................................. 989
Editing Links .................................................................................................. 992
Links........................................................................................................ 993
Placing a Link ........................................................................................... 994
Editing links .............................................................................................. 998
Entering Comments ...................................................................................... 1003
Entering comments ................................................................................. 1003
Online functions ........................................................................................... 1005
Online functions...................................................................................... 1005
Export/Import ............................................................................................... 1005
Export/Import SFC Sections .................................................................... 1005
Customize SFC Editor Colors ........................................................................ 1005
Customize SFC Editor Colors .................................................................. 1006
Common Function for Textual Language .............................................................. 1009
Selecting Text............................................................................................... 1009
Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting and moving text.......................................... 1012
Undoing and redoing changes ....................................................................... 1014
Match case .................................................................................................. 1015
Zoom (font size) ........................................................................................... 1016

33003101.26 15
 Using Bookmarks ......................................................................................... 1017
Go to ........................................................................................................... 1019
Go to dialog box ........................................................................................... 1021
Searching text .............................................................................................. 1023
Searching and replacing text ......................................................................... 1025
Call a subroutine .......................................................................................... 1027
Refine DFBs and subroutines ........................................................................ 1028
Inspect windows ........................................................................................... 1030
Enter comments .......................................................................................... 1034
Printing the Current Section........................................................................... 1035
Initialize search ............................................................................................ 1036
Initialize Animation table ............................................................................... 1037
Displaying the section properties ................................................................... 1039
Fullscreen .................................................................................................... 1039
Customize IL and ST Editor Colors ................................................................ 1040
IL Editor............................................................................................................. 1044
Structure of an IL program............................................................................. 1044
Creating an IL Program ................................................................................. 1046
Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming ......................................... 1047
Navigating with the keyboard......................................................................... 1052
Data input .................................................................................................... 1053
Calling an FFB ............................................................................................. 1059
Using Public Variables .................................................................................. 1070
Online functions ........................................................................................... 1072
Reference Data Type in IL ............................................................................. 1072
Export/Import IL Sections .............................................................................. 1073
ST Editor ........................................................................................................... 1075
Structure of an ST program ........................................................................... 1075
Creating an ST Program ............................................................................... 1077
Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming ......................................... 1078
Navigating with the keyboard......................................................................... 1082
Data input .................................................................................................... 1083
Calling an FFB ............................................................................................. 1090
Using public variables ................................................................................... 1101
Calling a statement ....................................................................................... 1103

16 33003101.26
 Online functions ............................................................................................1110
Reference Data Type in ST ............................................................................1111
Export/Import IL Sections ...............................................................................1111
LL984 Editor .......................................................................................................1113
Creating a Program with LL984 Programming Language ..................................1113
Project Settings for LL984 Programs .........................................................1113
Structure of an LL984 Program .................................................................1114
Creating an LL984 Program......................................................................1117
Syntax and Semantics Check During Programming....................................1119
Network Display...................................................................................... 1122
Navigating with the Keyboard .................................................................. 1123
Selecting Objects.................................................................................... 1125
Deleting, Cutting, Copying, Pasting and Moving Objects ............................ 1127
Displaying the Properties......................................................................... 1130
Inserting and Deleting Rows/Columns ...................................................... 1130
Editing Contacts ........................................................................................... 1132
Selecting Contacts .................................................................................. 1132
Placing Contacts..................................................................................... 1134
Properties Dialog for Contacts ................................................................. 1137
Editing Coils................................................................................................. 1139
Selecting Coils........................................................................................ 1140
Placing Coils .......................................................................................... 1142
Property Dialog for Coils.......................................................................... 1145
Editing Function Blocks................................................................................. 1147
Editing Function Blocks ........................................................................... 1147
Using Mnemonics ................................................................................... 1150
Editing Links ................................................................................................ 1151
Selecting Links ....................................................................................... 1151
Combining Links ..................................................................................... 1152
Placing Links .......................................................................................... 1153
Editing Links........................................................................................... 1155
Editing Equation Network Blocks ................................................................... 1156
Editing Equation Network Blocks.............................................................. 1156
Editing the ST Assignment Expression ..................................................... 1158
Assigning Variables to LL984 Objects ............................................................ 1163

33003101.26 17
 Assigning Variables to LL984 Objects....................................................... 1163
Calling Subroutines ...................................................................................... 1166
Calling Subroutines................................................................................. 1166
Entering Comments ...................................................................................... 1168
Entering Comments ................................................................................ 1168
Customize LL984 Editor Colors ..................................................................... 1170
Customize LL984 Editor Colors................................................................ 1170
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box ............................................ 1174
Instance selection dialog box......................................................................... 1174
FFB Selection Dialog box .............................................................................. 1179
FFB Type Selection Dialog box ...................................................................... 1183
Data selection dialog box............................................................................. 1185
Function Input Assistant ................................................................................ 1192
Data Properties ............................................................................................ 1195
Generate variables ....................................................................................... 1197
I/O Objects tab ................................................................................................... 1200
Introduction to the I/O Object Tab................................................................... 1200
I/O Objects Tab for a Processor ..................................................................... 1202
I/O Objects Tab for a Module ......................................................................... 1204
Details of Areas in the I/O Objects Tab ........................................................... 1206
I/O Objects Tab for a Bus Device ................................................................... 1212
How to Use the I/O Objects Tab ..................................................................... 1212
Memory Tab....................................................................................................... 1218
Memory Tab ................................................................................................. 1218
Type Library Browser.......................................................................................... 1224
Access to the Type Library Browser ............................................................... 1224
Description of the Type Library Browser ......................................................... 1226
Configuration of Columns of the Type Library Browser..................................... 1228
Drag & Drop of FFBs in a program section...................................................... 1230
Search/Replace Tool .......................................................................................... 1232
Overview of the Search / Replace tool ............................................................ 1232
General Features for Search/Replace ............................................................ 1234
Searching for Data........................................................................................ 1235
Replacing Data............................................................................................. 1236
Search Toolbar ............................................................................................. 1237

18 33003101.26
 Data Search Dialog....................................................................................... 1239
Cross-References (Search Results) ............................................................... 1240
Cross-References (Replace) ......................................................................... 1243
Tracing Variables / Addresses ....................................................................... 1245
User's Function Blocks ....................................................................................... 1247
DFB Type..................................................................................................... 1247
DFB Type............................................................................................... 1247
Creating a DFB Type............................................................................... 1249
Configuration of a DFB Type .................................................................... 1250
Programming a DFB type ........................................................................ 1254
Deleting a DFB type element ................................................................... 1256
Archiving a DFB Type.............................................................................. 1257
How to Reinforce Protection of a DFB Type .............................................. 1258
Deleting a DFB Type ............................................................................... 1260
How to access the attributes of a DFB type ............................................... 1261
Authorized DFB Type Modifications.......................................................... 1262
DFB Instance ............................................................................................... 1266
DFB Instance ......................................................................................... 1266
Creating a DFB Instance ......................................................................... 1267
Creating several DFB Instances............................................................... 1269
Deleting a DFB instance .......................................................................... 1269
Operations on DFB Instances .................................................................. 1269
Modifying the Attributes of a DFB Instance................................................ 1272
Authorized DFB Instance Modifications .................................................... 1276
Searching / Animating DFB Instances....................................................... 1277
How to Create Nested DFBs.......................................................................... 1279
How to Create Nested DFBs .................................................................... 1279
Project Configuration ......................................................................................... 1280
Introduction to the configuration........................................................................... 1281
Proposed Services ....................................................................................... 1281
Services offered in offline mode ..................................................................... 1286
Services Offered In Online Mode ................................................................... 1287
Access to project configuration ...................................................................... 1288
Bus Editors ........................................................................................................ 1294
Rack configuration on local bus ..................................................................... 1294

33003101.26 19
 Organization of the Racks ....................................................................... 1294
How to configure the racks ...................................................................... 1299
Configuration of the power supply modules..................................................... 1300
How to configure the power supply modules ............................................. 1301
Configuration of the processor ....................................................................... 1303
Choice and replacement of the processor ................................................. 1303
Configuration of the modules in the PLC station .............................................. 1307
How to configure the modules in the PLC station ....................................... 1307
Configuration of devices on the field bus......................................................... 1311
Configuration of the CANopen Slaves for Modicon M340 ........................... 1311
How to access and create a Fipio field bus................................................ 1314
Creating and Accessing RIO\DIO Field Buses........................................... 1318
How to configure devices on the RIO/DIO bus........................................... 1324
Consumption management ........................................................................... 1329
Power consumption budget ..................................................................... 1329
Budget on the number of application-specific channels .............................. 1332
Bus editors in online mode ............................................................................ 1335
Online Information .................................................................................. 1336
Modules editor ................................................................................................... 1340
Configuration of Modicon M340 processors .................................................... 1340
Configuration of Modicon M340 Processors .............................................. 1340
Configuration of Premium processors............................................................. 1353
Configuration of Premium\Atrium processors ............................................ 1353
Access to PCMCIA memory cards of Premium processors......................... 1360
Access to control loop configuration for Premium processors ..................... 1361
Configuration of the Quantum processors....................................................... 1363
Configuration of Quantum processors ...................................................... 1363
Configuration of Modbus ports on Quantum .............................................. 1369
Configuration of the input\output modules for a Premium\Atrium, Quantum or
Modicon M340 station................................................................................... 1372
Access to the Modicon, Premium or Atrium I/O module configuration
editor ..................................................................................................... 1372
Access the Quantum input/output module configuration editor.................... 1374
General functionalities of the editor...................................................................... 1377
Analysis of the configuration .......................................................................... 1377

20 33003101.26
 Export\Import of the configuration .................................................................. 1378
Printing the configuration............................................................................... 1378
Debugging and adjustment ............................................................................... 1381
Debugging the program ...................................................................................... 1382
Safety precautions........................................................................................ 1382
Modification in RUN ................................................................................ 1383
Switch to STOP of a PLC in Debug mode ................................................. 1383
Setting a task to STOP ............................................................................ 1384
Task deactivation .................................................................................... 1385
Deactivation of Inputs/Outputs ................................................................. 1386
Use of the Step by Step mode and Breakpoint .......................................... 1387
Unwanted disconnection in Debug mode for Premium ............................... 1387
Debug Screen Via a Fipway, Fipio or Uni-Telway Network with a PCMCIA
Card ...................................................................................................... 1388
Behavior of Forced Variables between Modsoft/NxT/Concept and Control
Expert .................................................................................................... 1388
Program Animation....................................................................................... 1389
Introduction to animation ......................................................................... 1389
Section in textual languages (Structured Text or Instruction List)................. 1393
Section in a Ladder Diagram language ..................................................... 1394
Section in Function Block Diagram (FBD) language................................... 1397
Section in Sequential Function Chart language (SFC)................................ 1399
Display of Prepositioned steps, after an on-line modification....................... 1400
DFB instances (user function blocks)........................................................ 1401
Representation of forced variables ........................................................... 1404
Debugging in Ladder Language..................................................................... 1405
Inserting a breakpoint in Ladder Diagram language (LD)............................ 1405
Step by step execution mode in Ladder Diagram language (LD) ................. 1408
Inserting a Watchpoint in Ladder Diagram Language ................................. 1411
Debugging in Textual Languages (Structured Text, Instruction List) .................. 1413
Insertion of a breakpoint in textual languages (Structured Text or
Instruction List) ....................................................................................... 1414
Step by step execution mode in textual languages (Structured Text or
Instruction List) ....................................................................................... 1416

33003101.26 21
 Insertion of a Watchpoint in Textual Languages (Structured Text or
Instruction List) ....................................................................................... 1419
Debugging in Function Block Diagram (FBD) Language .................................. 1422
Inserting a breakpoint in Function Block Diagram language........................ 1422
Step by step execution mode in Function Block Diagram language
(FBD)..................................................................................................... 1425
Inserting a watchpoint in Function Block Diagram language (FBD).............. 1428
Debugging User Function Block (DFB) Instances............................................ 1431
Inserting a breakpoint in a DFB instance (user function block) .................... 1432
Step by step execution mode in a DFB instance (user function
block)..................................................................................................... 1433
Inserting a watchpoint in a user function block (DFB) ................................. 1434
Debugging in Sequential Function Chart Language (SFC) ............................... 1435
Inserting a breakpoint in Sequential Function Chart language
(SFC)..................................................................................................... 1435
Step by step execution mode in Sequential Function Chart language
(SFC)..................................................................................................... 1439
Inserting a watchpoint in Sequential Function Chart language .................... 1443
Information on Debugging ............................................................................. 1443
Tracing task execution ............................................................................ 1444
Task states during debugging .................................................................. 1446
Disconnection during the debug phase ..................................................... 1446
Operation of the alarm relay in Debug mode ............................................. 1447
PLC debug screen ........................................................................................ 1448
Overview of the CPU debugging screen ................................................... 1448
Description of the Task tab: Task checking field ......................................... 1450
Description of the Task tab: Operating mode field ...................................... 1451
Description of tab: Realtime Clock............................................................ 1454
Description of the Tab: Information ........................................................... 1455
Viewing and adjusting variables........................................................................... 1460
Introduction to variable animation .................................................................. 1460
Displaying variables in debug mode ......................................................... 1460
Variable Display Window............................................................................... 1461
Introduction to the Variable Output Window............................................... 1462
Variable Display Boxes ................................................................................. 1464

22 33003101.26
 Introduction to variable display boxes ....................................................... 1465
Animation Tables .......................................................................................... 1467
Permanent and Temporary Animation Tables ............................................ 1467
Introduction to Animation Tables .............................................................. 1469
Managing Animation Tables..................................................................... 1470
Multiple Modifications of Animation Table Variables ................................... 1473
Animation Table Properties ...................................................................... 1474
Basic functions ....................................................................................... 1475
Animation of Strings in the Animation Table............................................... 1479
Modification Mode................................................................................... 1481
Force Mode ............................................................................................ 1486
Multiple modification and forcing of Boolean variables ............................... 1491
Animation Table of Forced Bits................................................................. 1494
Instruction Editor (LL984) .............................................................................. 1495
Instruction Editor..................................................................................... 1495
Modifying values:.......................................................................................... 1498
Modifying values: .................................................................................... 1498
Machine-Process Simulator ................................................................................ 1502
Introduction .................................................................................................. 1502
Diagnostics .......................................................................................................... 1504
Introduction to diagnostics tools........................................................................... 1505
Diagnostics with Control Expert ..................................................................... 1505
Diagnostics screens ........................................................................................... 1508
Module and processor diagnostics screens .................................................... 1508
Viewing fault diagnostics ......................................................................... 1508
Lists of fault diagnostics .......................................................................... 1510
Diagnostics Viewer............................................................................................. 1514
Reminder of the Diagnostics Associated with the Viewer ................................. 1514
Operation of the diagnostics in Control Expert ................................................ 1516
Description of the Diagnostics Viewer ............................................................ 1517
How to find causes ....................................................................................... 1520
Configuring the display.................................................................................. 1522
Managing error messages............................................................................. 1524
Diagnostics Viewer Commands ..................................................................... 1526
DiagViewer Properties .................................................................................. 1528

33003101.26 23
 Archiving error messages.............................................................................. 1530
System diagnostics ............................................................................................ 1535
System diagnostic ........................................................................................ 1535
Project diagnostics ............................................................................................. 1539
How to Create a User Diagnostic DFB............................................................ 1539
Project diagnostic ......................................................................................... 1541
Operator screen .................................................................................................. 1545
General information............................................................................................ 1546
Introduction .................................................................................................. 1546
Creation of Runtime Screens......................................................................... 1547
First steps.......................................................................................................... 1549
Working principles ........................................................................................ 1549
How to access the operator screens ......................................................... 1549
Menus and tools in the runtime screen editor .................................................. 1550
Menus in the operator screen editor ......................................................... 1551
Edit toolbar............................................................................................. 1554
Configuring options from the runtime screen editor.......................................... 1557
General configuration of operator screens ................................................ 1558
Editing runtime screens ...................................................................................... 1559
Editing screens from the browser .................................................................. 1559
Editing operator screens.......................................................................... 1559
Operator screen editor functions .............................................................. 1561
Screen Family Editor Functions................................................................ 1565
Operator screen properties ...................................................................... 1567
Properties of Operator Screen Families .................................................... 1569
Creating an object ........................................................................................ 1571
Introduction of a graphic screen object...................................................... 1571
How to create standard objects ................................................................ 1571
How to insert an image in a screen ........................................................... 1573
How to create driving objects ................................................................... 1575
Operation of the driving objects................................................................ 1576
Default Properties screen.............................................................................. 1580
Default Properties screen ........................................................................ 1580
Modification of an object’s attributes............................................................... 1582
How to access an object’s attributes ......................................................... 1582

24 33003101.26
 Design tab.............................................................................................. 1583
Extended colors...................................................................................... 1584
Text tab .................................................................................................. 1585
Animation Tab......................................................................................... 1587
Animation type tab .................................................................................. 1589
Trend diagrams ...................................................................................... 1592
Bar chart ................................................................................................ 1593
Screen browse tab .................................................................................. 1595
Control tab ............................................................................................. 1597
Image Tab .............................................................................................. 1599
Explicit Exchanges Tab ........................................................................... 1601
Information on the objects ....................................................................... 1602
The data selection tool ............................................................................ 1604
Manipulation of objects in runtime screens ..................................................... 1607
How to select graphic objects................................................................... 1607
How to move and resize objects............................................................... 1608
How to delete and copy objects................................................................ 1610
How to position objects............................................................................ 1611
How to create compound objects ............................................................. 1613
Managing the runtime screens messages editor ............................................. 1615
Operator screens messages editor........................................................... 1615
How to manage messages linked to operator screens ............................... 1617
Find dialog box ....................................................................................... 1619
Replace dialog box ................................................................................. 1620
Message Renumbering Dialog Box .......................................................... 1621
Message editing and import/export function .............................................. 1622
Runtime screens in online mode.......................................................................... 1626
Basic functions in online mode....................................................................... 1626
How to select an animated object................................................................... 1627
How to use command objects to modify the variables associated with
objects......................................................................................................... 1628
How to view the variables associated with graphic objects ............................... 1629
How to modify the variables associated with objects from an animation
table ............................................................................................................ 1630
How to search for cross-references................................................................ 1631

33003101.26 25
 How to manage the display of operator screens .............................................. 1632
How to modify screen control......................................................................... 1634
How to obtain information on objects when in connected mode ........................ 1635
Runtime screens objects library........................................................................... 1637
Managing library objects ............................................................................... 1637
The Objects Library................................................................................. 1637
How to manage the list of graphic items in the library ................................. 1638
Properties of the object library and its elements......................................... 1641
Handling the Objects............................................................................... 1644
Dereferencing in Operator Screens .......................................................... 1647
Documentation, Import/export .......................................................................... 1650
Documentation................................................................................................... 1651
Creating Project Documentation .................................................................... 1651
Documentation Structure .............................................................................. 1652
Topics in Documentation ............................................................................... 1654
Creating Project Documentation .................................................................... 1663
Print Preview................................................................................................ 1666
Page Setup .................................................................................................. 1668
Print ............................................................................................................ 1669
Printout Setup .............................................................................................. 1672
Import / Export ................................................................................................... 1677
General information on the Import/Export function........................................... 1677
General Information on Import/Export....................................................... 1677
Import / Export Files ................................................................................ 1679
Type of dialog box for the export function .................................................. 1680
Type of dialog boxes for the import function .............................................. 1683
Managing Conflicts ................................................................................. 1685
Importing/Exporting the various elements of Control Expert ............................ 1687
Export of the input/output configuration..................................................... 1687
Import of the input/output configuration ..................................................... 1689
Exporting the program............................................................................. 1690
Importing the Program............................................................................. 1692
Exporting DFB types ............................................................................... 1694
Importing DFB types ............................................................................... 1695
Exporting DDTs ...................................................................................... 1696

26 33003101.26
 Importing DDTs....................................................................................... 1697
Exporting Variables ................................................................................. 1698
Importing Variables ................................................................................. 1701
Exporting the communication network configuration .................................. 1702
Importing the configuration of a communication network ............................ 1703
Exporting operator screens...................................................................... 1704
Importing operator screens ...................................................................... 1705
Exporting animation tables ...................................................................... 1707
Importing animation tables....................................................................... 1708
Exporting a functional module .................................................................. 1709
Importing a functional module .................................................................. 1710
Exporting a global project ........................................................................ 1711
Importing a global project ........................................................................ 1713
Exporting/Importing LL984 Segments/Networks ........................................ 1715
Wizard for importing the various elements of Control Expert ............................ 1717
Using the assistant.................................................................................. 1717
Variables tab of the wizard ....................................................................... 1722
DFB and DDT Tabs of the Wizard............................................................. 1724
SR, Sections, Events and Macro steps tabs of the wizard .......................... 1725
Wizard animation tables tab..................................................................... 1727
Wizard functional module tabs ................................................................. 1727
Correspondence file................................................................................ 1729
Conversion Wizard ............................................................................................. 1732
Conversion Wizard ............................................................................................. 1733
General Description of the Conversion Wizard ................................................ 1733
Introduction ............................................................................................ 1733
Access to Conversion Wizard .................................................................. 1735
General Representation .......................................................................... 1737
Conversion and Result ............................................................................ 1738
Structure Tab of the Conversion Wizard.......................................................... 1739
Introduction ............................................................................................ 1739
Selecting Application Parts to be Converted.............................................. 1741
I/O Remapping Tab of the Conversion Wizard................................................. 1743
Introduction ............................................................................................ 1743
Remapping Table.................................................................................... 1746

33003101.26 27
 Remapping Channels, Groups of Channels or Specific I/O Types ............... 1749
Clustering and Remapping of Memory Variables ....................................... 1752
Memory Area Tabs of the Conversion Wizard............................................ 1753
Concurrent Editing .................................................................................. 1755
Exclude, Communication -1, Type Restriction ........................................... 1757
CPU Configuration Tab of the Conversion Wizard ........................................... 1761
Introduction ............................................................................................ 1762
Appendices .......................................................................................................... 1764
Hyperlinks in Control Expert ............................................................................... 1765
General ....................................................................................................... 1765
Introduction to Hyperlinks ........................................................................ 1765
Representation and opening of a hyperlink ............................................... 1767
Principles..................................................................................................... 1768
Definitions .............................................................................................. 1768
Overview of operate-modes..................................................................... 1769
1-step mode ........................................................................................... 1769
2-step mode ........................................................................................... 1771
Description of the Hyperlink Comment Window ......................................... 1772
Properties .............................................................................................. 1775
List of barred characters .......................................................................... 1776
Hyperlinks in the project browser ................................................................... 1777
Creating a hyperlink in the project browser................................................ 1777
Editing the properties of a hyperlink in the project browser ......................... 1778
Opening a hyperlink from the project browser............................................ 1780
Deleting a hyperlink in the project browser ................................................ 1780
Hyperlink in the data editor ............................................................................ 1781
Creating a hyperlink in the data editor....................................................... 1781
Editing a hyperlink in the data editor ......................................................... 1783
Selecting a hyperlink in the data editor...................................................... 1785
Deleting a hyperlink in the data editor ....................................................... 1786
Hyperlinks in the DFB type attributes.............................................................. 1787
Creating a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes ......................................... 1787
Modifying a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes ........................................ 1789
Selecting a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes ........................................ 1791
Deleting a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes .......................................... 1793

28 33003101.26
 Hyperlinks in animation tables ....................................................................... 1795
Creating a hyperlink in an animation table................................................. 1795
Editing a hyperlink from an animation table ............................................... 1797
Selecting a hyperlink from an animation table............................................ 1798
Deleting a hyperlink from an animation table ............................................. 1799
Hyperlinks in runtime screens........................................................................ 1799
Creating a hyperlink from operator screens ............................................... 1800
Editing a hyperlink in the operator screens ................................................ 1801
Selecting a hyperlink in an operator screen ............................................... 1803
Deleting a hyperlink in an operator screen ................................................ 1803
Hyperlinks in the documentation folder ........................................................... 1805
Creating a hyperlink in the general information of the project folder ............ 1805
Editing a hyperlink in the documentation folder.......................................... 1807
Deleting a hyperlink in the documentation folder........................................ 1809
Hyperlinks and drag-and-drop ....................................................................... 1810
Drag/drop............................................................................................... 1811
User Interface .................................................................................................... 1816
Window ....................................................................................................... 1816
Anchored window ......................................................................................... 1818
Menus ......................................................................................................... 1821
Menu commands.......................................................................................... 1823
Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 1826
Output windows............................................................................................ 1832
Status bar .................................................................................................... 1834
Directory Structures ...................................................................................... 1837
Using the Mouse .......................................................................................... 1838
Using the Keyboard ...................................................................................... 1839
Data selection boxes .................................................................................... 1841
Dialog boxes ................................................................................................ 1842
Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................ 1848
General Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................... 1848
Bus Editor Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................ 1848
Control Expert Main Screen and Project Browser Keyboard
Shortcuts ............................................................................................... 1849
Configuring the Project.................................................................................. 1851

33003101.26 29
 PLC Configuration Screen Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................... 1851
Creating the Project ...................................................................................... 1852
ST/IL Editors Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................ 1852
FBD Editor Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................... 1854
SFC Editor Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................... 1855
LD Editor Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................. 1857
Data Editor Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................... 1859
Type Library Browser Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................ 1860
Type Library Manager Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................... 1861
Operating the Project .................................................................................... 1861
Search Replace Tool Screen Keyboard Shortcuts...................................... 1862
Diagnostic Viewer Screen Keyboard Shortcuts.......................................... 1862
PLC Screen Keyboard Shortcuts.............................................................. 1862
Animation Screen Keyboard Shortcuts ..................................................... 1863
Operator Screen Keyboard Shortcuts ....................................................... 1864
Documenting the Project ............................................................................... 1865
Documentation Screen Keyboard Shortcuts.............................................. 1865
Glossary ............................................................................................................... 1867
Index ..................................................................................................................... 1875

30 33003101.26
Safety Information

Safety Information
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the
device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of
potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of this symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not
followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury
hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.

! DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

! WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

! CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

33003101.26 31
 Safety Information

Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by
qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and
operation of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to
recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

Before You Begin

Do not use this product on machinery lacking effective point-of-operation guarding. Lack of
effective point-of-operation guarding on a machine can result in serious injury to the
operator of that machine.

WARNING
UNGUARDED EQUIPMENT
• Do not use this software and related automation equipment on equipment which does
not have point-of-operation protection.
• Do not reach into machinery during operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

This automation equipment and related software is used to control a variety of industrial
processes. The type or model of automation equipment suitable for each application will
vary depending on factors such as the control function required, degree of protection
required, production methods, unusual conditions, government regulations, etc. In some
applications, more than one processor may be required, as when backup redundancy is
needed.
Only you, the user, machine builder or system integrator can be aware of all the conditions
and factors present during setup, operation, and maintenance of the machine and,
therefore, can determine the automation equipment and the related safeties and interlocks
which can be properly used. When selecting automation and control equipment and related
software for a particular application, you should refer to the applicable local and national
standards and regulations. The National Safety Council's Accident Prevention Manual
(nationally recognized in the United States of America) also provides much useful
information.
In some applications, such as packaging machinery, additional operator protection such as
point-of-operation guarding must be provided. This is necessary if the operator's hands and

32 33003101.26
Safety Information

other parts of the body are free to enter the pinch points or other hazardous areas and
serious injury can occur. Software products alone cannot protect an operator from injury. For
this reason the software cannot be substituted for or take the place of point-of-operation
protection.
Ensure that appropriate safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks related to point-of-
operation protection have been installed and are operational before placing the equipment
into service. All interlocks and safeties related to point-of-operation protection must be
coordinated with the related automation equipment and software programming.
NOTE: Coordination of safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks for point-of-
operation protection is outside the scope of the Function Block Library, System User
Guide, or other implementation referenced in this documentation.

Start-up and Test

Before using electrical control and automation equipment for regular operation after
installation, the system should be given a start-up test by qualified personnel to verify
correct operation of the equipment. It is important that arrangements for such a check are
made and that enough time is allowed to perform complete and satisfactory testing.

WARNING
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
• Verify that all installation and set up procedures have been completed.
• Before operational tests are performed, remove all blocks or other temporary holding
means used for shipment from all component devices.
• Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Follow all start-up tests recommended in the equipment documentation. Store all equipment
documentation for future references.
Software testing must be done in both simulated and real environments.
Verify that the completed system is free from all short circuits and temporary grounds that
are not installed according to local regulations (according to the National Electrical Code in
the U.S.A, for instance). If high-potential voltage testing is necessary, follow
recommendations in equipment documentation to prevent accidental equipment damage.
Before energizing equipment:
• Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.

33003101.26 33
 Safety Information

• Close the equipment enclosure door.

• Remove all temporary grounds from incoming power lines.
• Perform all start-up tests recommended by the manufacturer.

Operation and Adjustments

The following precautions are from the NEMA Standards Publication ICS 7.1-1995 (English
version prevails):
• Regardless of the care exercised in the design and manufacture of equipment or in the
selection and ratings of components, there are hazards that can be encountered if such
equipment is improperly operated.
• It is sometimes possible to misadjust the equipment and thus produce unsatisfactory or
unsafe operation. Always use the manufacturer’s instructions as a guide for functional
adjustments. Personnel who have access to these adjustments should be familiar with
the equipment manufacturer’s instructions and the machinery used with the electrical
equipment.
• Only those operational adjustments actually required by the operator should be
accessible to the operator. Access to other controls should be restricted to prevent
unauthorized changes in operating characteristics.

34 33003101.26
About the Book

About the Book

Document Scope
This document describes programming a Modicon M340, Modicon M580, Momentum,
Premium, Atrium, or Quantum PLC using the IEC 61131-3 conforming programming
languages Function Block Diagram (FBD), Ladder Diagram (LD), Sequential Function Chart
(SFC), Instruction List (IL) and Structured Text (ST).

Validity Note
This document is valid for EcoStruxure™ Control Expert 15.1 or later.

Related Documents
Title of documentation Reference number
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages 35006144 (English), 35006145 (French), 35006146
and Structure, Reference Manual (German), 35013361 (Italian), 35006147 (Spanish),
35013362 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System Bits and Words, EIO0000002135 (English), EIO0000002136 (French),
Reference Manual EIO0000002137 (German), EIO0000002138 (Italian),
EIO0000002139 (Spanish), EIO0000002140
(Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Installation Manual 35014792 (English), 35014793 (French), 35014794
(German), 35014795 (Spanish), 35014796 (Italian),
35012191 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference EIO0000000549 (English), EIO0000000802 (French),
Manual EIO0000000803 (German), EIO0000000804 (Italian),
EIO0000000805 (Spanish), EIO0000000806
(Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Concept Application 33002515 (English), 33002516 (French), 33002517
Converter, User Manual (German), 33003676 (Italian), 33002518 (Spanish),
33003677 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, PL7 Application 35006148 (English), 35006149 (French), 35006150
Converter, User Manual (German), 35013967 (Italian), 35006151 (Spanish),
35012199 (Chinese)

Modicon M580, Hardware, Reference Manual EIO0000001578 (English), EIO0000001579 (French),

EIO0000001580 (German), EIO0000001582 (Italian),
EIO0000001581 (Spanish), EIO0000001583
(Chinese)

Modicon M580, Change Configuration on the Fly, User EIO0000001590 (English), EIO0000001591 (French),
Guide EIO0000001592 (German), EIO0000001594 (Italian),

33003101.26 35
 About the Book

Title of documentation Reference number

EIO0000001593 (Spanish), EIO0000001595
(Chinese)

Modicon M580 Hot Standby, System Planning Guide NHA58880 (English), NHA58881 (French),
for Frequently Used Architectures NHA58882 (German), NHA58883 (Italian), NHA58884
(Spanish), NHA58885 (Chinese)

Modicon M580, System Planning Guide for Complex NHA58892 (English), NHA58893 (French),
Topologies NHA58894 (German), NHA58895 (Italian), NHA58896
(Spanish), NHA58897 (Chjnese)

Modicon M580, Safety Manual QGH46982 (English), QGH46983 (French),

QGH46984 (German), QGH46985 (Italian),
QGH46986 (Spanish), QGH46987 (Chinese)

Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules 31007131 (English), 31007132 (French), 31007133
and Processors, User Manual (German), 31007494 (Italian), 31007134 (Spanish),
31007493 (Chinese)

Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control 35006216 (English), 35006217 (French), 35006218
Expert, Counter Modules, User Manual (German), 35013968 (Italian), 35006219 (Spanish),
35012200 (Chinese)

Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control 35006242 (English), 35006243 (French), 35006244
Expert, Process Control, User Manual (German), 35014013 (Italian), 35006245 (Spanish),
35012198 (Chinese)

Communication Services and Architectures, Reference 35010500 (English), 35010501 (French), 35006176
Manual (German), 35013966 (Italian), 35006177 (Spanish),
35012196 (Chinese)

Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control 35008155 (English), 35008156 (French), 35008157
Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual (German), 35013953 (Italian), 35008158 (Spanish),
35013954 (Chinese)

Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control 35006183 (English), 35006185 (French), 35006186
Expert, Fipway Network, User Manual (German), 35013955 (Italian), 35006187 (Spanish),
35013956 (Chinese)

Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control 35006192 (English), 35006193 (French), 35006194
Expert, Ethernet Network Modules, User Manual (German), 31007214 (Italian), 35006195 (Spanish),
31007102 (Chinese)

Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control 35006188 (English), 35006189 (French), 35006190
Expert, Modbus Plus Network, User Manual (German), 35013962 (Italian), 35006191 (Spanish),
35013963 (Chinese)

Communication Drivers, Installation Manual 35006152 (English), 35006153 (French), 35006154

(German), 35013950 (Italian), 35006155 (Spanish),
35012192 (Chinese)

Premium using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Motion 35010601 (English), 35010602 (French), 35010603
Function Blocks, Start-up Guide (German), 35010600 (Italian), 35010604 (Spanish),
35012309 (Chinese)

Modicon M340, Processors, Setup Manual 35012676 (English), 35012677 (French), 35013351
(German), 35013352 (Italian), 35013353 (Spanish),
35013354 (Chinese)

36 33003101.26
About the Book

Title of documentation Reference number

Modicon X80, Analog Input/Output Modules, User 35011978 (English), 35011979 (German), 35011980
Manual (French), 35011981 (Spanish), 35011982 (Italian),
35011983 (Chinese)

Modicon M340, CANopen, Setup Manual 35013944 (English), 35013945 (French), 35013946
(German), 35013948 (Italian), 35013947 (Spanish),
35013949 (Chinese)

Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, 35010529 (English), 35010530 (French), 35010531
Hardware Reference Manual (German), 35013975 (Italian), 35010532 (Spanish),
35012184 (Chinese)

Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Change S1A48967 (English), S1A48968 (French), S1A48969
Configuration On The Fly, User Guide (German), S1A48970 (Italian), S1A48972 (Spanish),
S1A48976 (Chinese)

Momentum for EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, 171 CBU HRB44124 (English)

78090, 171 CBU 98090, 171 CBU 98091 Processors,
User Guide
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Standard, Block Library 33002519 (English), 33002520 (French), 33002521
(German), 33003678 (Italian), 33002522 (Spanish),
33003679 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Diagnostics, Block 33002523 (English), 33002524 (French), 33002525
Library (German), 33003680 (Italian), 33002526 (Spanish),
33003681 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Communication, Block 33002527 (English), 33002528 (French), 33002529
Library (German), 33003682 (Italian), 33002530 (Spanish),
33003683 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block 33002531 (English), 33002532 (French), 33002533
Library (German), 33003684 (Italian), 33002534 (Spanish),
33003685 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System, Block Library 33002539 (English), 33002540 (French), 33002541
(German), 33003688 (Italian), 33002542 (Spanish),
33003689 (Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, UnityLL984, Block EIO0000000550 (English), EIO0000000807 (French),

Library EIO0000000808 (German), EIO0000000809 (Italian),
EIO0000000810 (Spanish), EIO0000000811
(Chinese)

System Time Stamping, User Guide EIO0000001217 (English), EIO0000001707 (French),

EIO0000001708 (German), EIO0000001710 (Italian),
EIO0000001709 (Spanish), EIO0000001711
(Chinese)

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Applicative Time EIO0000001268 (English), EIO0000001702 (French),

Stamping, User Guide EIO0000001703 (German), EIO0000001705 (Italian),
EIO0000001704 (Spanish), EIO0000001706
(Chinese)

You can download these technical publications, the present document and other technical
information from our website www.se.com/en/download/.

33003101.26 37
General
What’s in This Part
General Presentation of Control Expert......................................40
Programming Language Editors................................................49
Connecting a terminal to a PLC.................................................62
Global project management......................................................65
Project browser...................................................................... 155
Functional modules................................................................ 232
FDT Container....................................................................... 263
Type Library Manager ............................................................ 310

Subject of this Part

This part presents Control Expert services and describes the different tools used to manage
a project: access rights, save/restore, online/offline mode services, etc.

33003101.26 39
 General Presentation of Control Expert

General Presentation of Control Expert

What’s in This Chapter
Capabilities of Control Expert....................................................40
User Interface..........................................................................45

Overview
This chapter describes the general features of a project created using Control Expert.

Capabilities of Control Expert

Hardware Platforms
Control Expert supports the following hardware platforms:
• Modicon M340
• Modicon M580
• Quantum
• Momentum
• Premium
• Atrium

Programming Languages
Control Expert provides the following programming languages for creating the user program:
• Function Block Diagram FBD
• Ladder Diagram (LD) language
• Instruction List IL
• Structured Text ST
• Sequential Control SFC
• Ladder Logic 984 (LL984)
All of these programming languages can be used together in the same project.

40 33003101.26
General Presentation of Control Expert

All these languages (except LL984) conform to IEC 61131-3.

Block Libraries
The blocks that are included in the delivery of Control Expert extensive block libraries
extend from blocks for simple boolean operations, through blocks for strings and array
operations to blocks for controlling complex control loops.
For a better overview, the different blocks are arranged in libraries, which are then broken
down into families.
The blocks can be used in the programming languages FBD, LD, IL, and ST.

Elements of a Program
A program can be constructed from:
• a master task (MAST)
• a FAST task (not available for Momentum)
• one to 4 AUX tasks (not available for Modicon M340 and Momentum)
• Program Units which are assigned one of the defined tasks (available for Modicon
M580 and Modicon M340)
• sections, which are assigned one of the defined tasks
• sections for processing time controlled events (Timerx, not available for Momentum)
• sections for processing hardware controlled events (EVTx, not available for Momentum)
• subroutine sections (SR)

Software Licenses
There is one Control Expert installation setup (.iso file) and the license determines the
version that can be launched.
The following software versions are available:
• Control Expert S
• Control Expert L
• Control Expert XL
• Control Expert XL with M580 Safety

33003101.26 41
 General Presentation of Control Expert

The M580 Safety CPUs are included in a Safety add-on available for Control Expert L and
XL.
Two types of licenses are available to activate Control Expert:
• Node-locked license for single use on a local PC.
• Floating license for multiple uses of an authorized number of PCs in a network
connected to the Enterprise License Server.
For detailed information on license activation and/or registration, refer to EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Installation Manual.

Performance Scope
This table shows the main characteristics of the individual software versions:

Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
S L L + Safety add- XL XL + Safety
on add-on
Programming languages

Function Block + + + + +
Diagram FBD

Ladder Diagram (LD) + + + + +

language

Instruction List IL + + +(2) + +(2)

Structured Text ST + + +(2) + +(2)

Sequential Language + + +(2) + +(2)

SFC
Ladder Logic 984 + + + + +
(LL984)

Libraries(1)

Standard library + + +(2) + +(2)

Control library + + +(2) + +(2)

Communication + + +(2) + +(2)

library

Diagnostics library + + +(2) + +(2)

I/O management + + +(2) + +(2)

library

System library + + +(2) + +(2)

42 33003101.26
General Presentation of Control Expert

Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
S L L + Safety add- XL XL + Safety
on add-on
Motion control drive - + +(2) + +(2)
library

TCP Open library - optional optional(2) optional optional(2)

Obsolete library + + +(2) + +(2)

MFB library + + +(2) + +(2)

Safety library - - + - +

Memory card file + + +(2) + +(2)

management library

General information
Create and use data + + +(2) + +(2)
structures (DDTs)

Create and use + + + + +

Derived Function
Blocks (DFBs)

Project browser with + + + + +

structural and/or
functional view
Managing access + + + + +
rights

Operator screen + + + + +

Diagnostic viewer + + + + +

System diagnostics + + + + +

Project diagnostics + + +(2) + +(2)

Trending Tool + + + + +

Application converter PL7 converter PL7 converter PL7 converter PL7 converter PL7 converter

Concept Concept Concept Concept Concept

Converter Converter Converter Converter Converter

Partial
conversion
Managing multi- - - - - -
stations
Supported platforms

Modicon M340 All CPUs All CPUs All CPUs All CPUs All CPUs
Modicon M580 - BMEP5810•• BMEP5810•• BMEP5810•• BMEP5810••

33003101.26 43
 General Presentation of Control Expert

Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
S L L + Safety add- XL XL + Safety
on add-on

BMEP5820•• BMEP5820•• BMEP5820•• BMEP5820••

BMEP5830•• BMEP5830•• BMEP5830•• BMEP5830••

BMEH582040 BMEH582040 BMEP5840•• BMEP5840••

BMEP582040S BMEP585040 BMEP585040

BMEH582040S BMEP586040 BMEP586040

BMEH582040 BMEH582040

BMEH584040 BMEH584040

BMEH586040 BMEH586040

BMEP582040S

BMEP584040S

BMEH582040S

BMEH584040S

BMEH586040S
Momentum 171CBU78090 171CBU78090 171CBU78090 171CBU78090 171CBU78090

171CBU98090 171CBU98090 171CBU98090 171CBU98090 171CBU98090

171CBU98091 171CBU98091 171CBU98091 171CBU98091 171CBU98091

Premium - All CPUs All CPUs All CPUs All CPUs
except: except:

P57 554M P57 554M

P57 5634M P57 5634M

P57 6634M P57 6634M

Quantum - 140CPU31110 140CPU31110 140CPU31110 140CPU31110

140CPU43412 140CPU43412 140CPU43412 140CPU43412

U/A* U/A* U/A U/A

140CPU53414 140CPU53414 140CPU53414 140CPU53414

U/A* U/A* U/A U/A

* Upgrade using * Upgrade using 140CPU65150 140CPU65150

OS Loader OS Loader
140CPU65160 140CPU65160

140CPU65260 140CPU65260

140CPU65860 140CPU65860

140CPU67060 140CPU67060

44 33003101.26
General Presentation of Control Expert

Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert Control Expert
S L L + Safety add- XL XL + Safety
on add-on

140CPU67160 140CPU67160

140CPU67260 140CPU67260

140CPU67261 140CPU67261

140CPU67861 140CPU67861
Atrium - All CPUs All CPUs All CPUs All CPUs
Simulator + + + + +

Openness

Hyperlinks + + + + +

Control Expert Server + + + + +

(for OFS, UAG)

Software components contained in the software package

Documentation as + + + + +
context help and PDF

OS Loader tool + HW + + + + +
firmware
+ Available

- Not available

(1) Availability of the blocks depends on the hardware platforms.

(2) Available on all PLC except platforms M580 Safety.

Naming Convention
In the rest of this document, "Control Expert" is used as general term for "Control Expert S",
"Control Expert L", and "Control Expert XL", with or without Safety add-on.

User Interface
Overview
The user interface consists of several, configurable windows and toolbars.

33003101.26 45
 General Presentation of Control Expert

User interface:

Legend:

Number Description

1 Menu bar, page 1821

2 Toolbar, page 1826

3 Project Browser, page 155

4 Editor window (programming language editors, data editor, etc.)

46 33003101.26
General Presentation of Control Expert

Number Description

5 Register tabs for direct access to the editor window

6 Information window, page 1832 (provides information about errors which have occurred, signal
tracking, import functions, etc.)

7 Status bar, page 1834

33003101.26 47
48 33003101.26
Programming Language Editors

Programming Language Editors

What’s in This Chapter
Function Block Diagram FBD ....................................................49
Ladder Diagram (LD) Language................................................52
General Information about SFC Sequence Language .................54
Instruction List IL......................................................................58
Structured Text ST ...................................................................59

Overview
This chapter describes the different programming languages provided by Control Expert.

Function Block Diagram FBD

Introduction
The FBD editor is used for graphical function block programming according to IEC 61131-3.

33003101.26 49
 Programming Language Editors

Representation
Representation of an FBD section:

Objects
The objects of the FBD (Function Block Diagram) programming language help to divide a
section into a number of:
• Elementary Functions (EFs),
• Elementary Function Blocks (EFBs)
• Derived Function Blocks (DFBs)
• Procedures
• Subroutine calls
• Jumps
• Links
• Actual Parameters
• Text objects to comment on the logic

50 33003101.26
Programming Language Editors

Properties
FBD sections have a grid behind them. A grid unit consists of 10 coordinates. A grid unit is
the smallest possible space between 2 objects in an FBD section.
The FBD programming language is not cell oriented but the objects are still aligned with the
grid coordinates.
An FBD section can be configured in number of cells (horizontal grid coordinates and
vertical grid coordinates).
The program can be entered using the mouse or the keyboard.

Input Aids
The FBD editor offers the following input aids:
• Toolbars for quick and easy access to the desired objects
• Syntax and semantics are checked as the program is being written.
◦ Incorrect functions and function blocks are displayed in blue
◦ Unknown words (e.g. undeclared variables) or unsuitable data types are marked
with a red wavy line
◦ Brief description of errors in the Quickinfo (Tooltip)
• Information for variables and pins can be displayed in a Quickinfo (Tooltip)
◦ type, name, address and comment of a variable/expression
◦ type, name and comment of an FFB pin
• Tabular display of FFBs
• Actual parameters can be entered and displayed as symbols or topological addresses
• Different zoom factors
• Tracking of links
• Optimization of link routes
• Display of inspection windows

33003101.26 51
 Programming Language Editors

Ladder Diagram (LD) Language

Introduction
The LD editor is used for graphical ladder diagram programming according to IEC 61131-3.

Representation
Representation of an LD section:

Objects
The objects of the LD programming language help to divide a section into a number of:
• Contacts,
• Coils,
• Elementary Functions (EFs)
• Elementary Function Blocks (EFBs),
• Derived Function Blocks (DFBs)

52 33003101.26
Programming Language Editors

• Procedures
• Control elements
• Operation and compare blocks which represent an extension to IEC 61131-3
• Subroutine calls
• Jumps
• Links
• Actual Parameters
• Text objects to comment on the logic

Properties
LD sections have a background grid that divides the section into lines and columns.
The LD programming language is cell oriented, i.e. only one object can be placed in each
cell.
LD sections can be 11-63 columns and 17-3998 lines in size.
The program can be entered using the mouse or the keyboard.

Input Aids
The LD editor offers the following input aids:
• Objects can be selected from the toolbar, the menu or directly using shortcut keys
• Syntax and semantics are checked as the program is being written.
◦ Incorrect objects are displayed in blue
◦ Unknown words (e.g. undeclared variables) or unsuitable data types are marked
with a red wavy line
◦ Brief description of errors in the Quickinfo (Tooltip)
• Information for variables and for elements of an LD section, that can be connected to a
variable (pins, contacts, coils, operation and compare blocks), can be displayed in a
Quickinfo (Tooltip)
◦ type, name, address and comment of a variable/expression
◦ type, name and comment of FFB pins, contacts etc.
• Tabular display of FFBs
• Actual parameters can be entered and displayed as symbols or topological addresses

33003101.26 53
 Programming Language Editors

• Different zoom factors

• Tracking of FFB links
• Optimizing the link routes of FFB links
• Display of inspection windows

General Information about SFC Sequence

Language
Introduction
The sequence language SFC (Sequential Function Chart), which conforms to IEC 61131-3,
is described in this section.
IEC conformity restrictions can be lifted through explicit enable procedures. Features such
as multi token, multiple initial steps, jumps to and from parallel strings etc. are then possible.

54 33003101.26
Programming Language Editors

Representation
Representation of an SFC section:

Objects
An SFC section provides the following objects for creating a program:

33003101.26 55
 Programming Language Editors

• Steps
• Macro steps (embedded sub-step sequences)
• Transitions (transition conditions)
• Transition sections
• Action sections
• Jumps
• Links
• Alternative sequences
• Parallel sequences
• Text objects to comment on the logic

Properties
The SFC editor has a background grid that divides the section into 200 rows and 64
columns.
The program can be entered using the mouse or the keyboard.

Input Aids
The SFC editor offers the following input aids:
• Toolbars for quick and easy access to the desired objects
• Automatic step numbering
• Direct access to actions and transition conditions
• Syntax and semantics are checked as the program is being written.
◦ Incorrect objects are displayed in blue
◦ Unknown words (e.g. undeclared variables) or unsuitable data types are marked
with a red wavy line
◦ Brief description of errors in the Quickinfo (Tooltip)
• Information for variables and for transitions can be displayed in a Quickinfo (Tooltip)
◦ type, name, address and comment of a variable/expression
◦ type, name and comment of transitions
• Different zoom factors
• Show/hide the allocated actions

56 33003101.26
Programming Language Editors

• Tracking of links
• Optimization of link routes

Step Properties
Step properties:

The step properties are defined using a dialog box that offers the following features:
• Definition of initial steps
• Definition of diagnostics times
• Step comments
• Allocation of actions and their qualifiers

33003101.26 57
 Programming Language Editors

Instruction List IL
Introduction
The IL editor is used for instruction list programming according to IEC 61131-3.

Representation
Representation of an IL section:

Objects
An instruction list is composed of a series of instructions.
Each instruction begins on a new line and consists of:
• An operator
• A modifier if required
• One or more operands if required
• A label as a jump target if required
• A comment about the logic if required.

Input Aids
The IL editor offers the following input aids:

58 33003101.26
Programming Language Editors

• Syntax and semantics are checked as the program is being written.

◦ Keywords and comments are displayed in color
◦ Unknown words (e.g. undeclared variables) or unsuitable data types are marked
with a red wavy line
◦ Brief description of errors in the Quickinfo (Tooltip)
• Tabular display of the functions and function blocks
• Input assistance for functions and function blocks
• Operands can be entered and displayed as symbols or topological addresses
• Display of inspection windows

Structured Text ST
Introduction
The ST editor is used for programming in structured text according to IEC 61131-3.

Representation
Representation of an ST section:

33003101.26 59
 Programming Language Editors

Objects
The ST programming language works with "Expressions".
Expressions are constructions consisting of operators and operands that return a value
when executed.
Operators are symbols representing the operations to be executed.
Operators are used for operands. Operands are variables, literals, function and function
block inputs/outputs etc.
Instructions are used to structure and control the expressions.

Input Aids
The ST editor offers the following input aids:
• Syntax and semantics are checked as the program is being written.
◦ Keywords and comments are displayed in color
◦ Unknown words (e.g. undeclared variables) or unsuitable data types are marked
with a red wavy line
◦ Brief description of errors in the Quickinfo (Tooltip)
• Tabular display of the functions and function blocks
• Input assistance for functions and function blocks
• Operands can be entered and displayed as symbols or topological addresses
• Display of inspection windows

60 33003101.26
33003101.26 61
 Connecting a terminal to a PLC

Connecting a terminal to a PLC

What’s in This Chapter
Methodology for connecting from a PC to a PLC.........................62

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes how to connect a PC to a PLC.

Methodology for connecting from a PC to a PLC

At a Glance
To program a Modicon M340, Modicon M580, Premium, or Quantum PLC using Control
Expert software, observe the rules described below.

Cables References
Select a cable that conforms to your PLC type to physically connect your PLC to your
computer:

Platform Produce Product Reference

Quantum Modbus cable 990 NAA 263 20
Modbus Plus cable UNY XCA 42 020
crossed Ethernet cable 490 NTC 000 05(1)

USB cable UNY XCA USB 033(2)

Premium terminal port cable TSX PCX 1031 (RS 232/RS 485)

terminal port cable TSX PCX 3030 (USB/RS 485)

crossed Ethernet cable 490 NTC 000 05(1)

USB cable UNY XCA USB 033(2)

Modicon M340 Modbus cable TCS MCN 3M4F3C2

crossed Ethernet cable 490 NTC 000 05(1)

62 33003101.26
Connecting a terminal to a PLC

Platform Produce Product Reference

USB cable BMX XCA USBH •••(2)

Modicon M580 mini-USB to USB-A programming cable BMX XCA USBH •••(2)
(industrial use rated)

Ethernet straight-through Cat5E cable, CE 490 NTW 000 ••(U)

or UL standard (industrial use rated)

Ethernet straight-through Cat5E cable, CE TCSEC(E/U)3M3M••S4

or UL standard (industrial use/high demand
rating)

Ethernet straight-through Cat5E cable, 1 TCSECN3M3M1S4

meter
Ethernet crossed Cat5E cable (industrial 490 NTC 000 ••(U)
use rated), CE or UL standard. (3)

(1) Use a crossed cable for a PC-PLC link; whereas, use a straight-through cable for PC-Hub or PLC-Hub link.

(2) When connecting a PC to a PLC, the use of a USB 2.0 shielded cable following the USB international
standard is strongly recommended. The cables mentioned earlier avoid unexpected behavior of the PLC as they
are shielded and tested against electrical noises.

(3) This cable is usable but not recommended as all ports of a M580 system are Auto-MDIX capable and
crossed cables could be incompatible with future gigabit systems.

Procedure
The table below describes how to connect from a PC to a PLC.

Step Action

1 Physically connect your PLC to your computer using the appropriate cables, page 62.

2 Check that for the chosen communication protocol, the Driver corresponding to your operating
system is correctly installed.

Note: The documentation on drivers (see Communication Drivers, Installation Manual) describes
the various drivers available according to the operating system. For example, for the PC to be able
to use an X-Way address on an Ethernet network, you must install the XIP driver.

3 Verify in the toolbar that the simulator icon is unchecked.

4 Choose the address of the PLC, page 87 to which you want to connect and the type of link, page 92
using the PLC > Set Address... command.

5 Connect by selecting the command: PLC > Connection

Result: You can now perform all the operations available on line, set the PLC to RUN or to STOP,
download projects, or make program modifications, etc.

33003101.26 63
 Connecting a terminal to a PLC

64 33003101.26
Global project management

Global project management

What’s in This Chapter
Access security management ...................................................65
Project management ................................................................66

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter introduces the various tools used for project management: security and user
access rights management, project creation, project backup, transfer of the project to the
PLC, management of the user memory, etc.

Access security management

Subject of this Section
This section introduces the tools used to manage security for a project.

Access security management

Security Editor Tool
Refer to EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Security Editor, Operation Guide to manage security
for a project.

33003101.26 65
 Global project management

Project management
Subject of this Section
This section introduces the tools used for project management.

Access to Control Expert Software

At a Glance
It is possible to launch several instances of Control Expert simultaneously on the same
workstation. However, the access method is identical for all instances and depends on
whether the security option has been enabled:
• If security is active, clicking the Control Expert icon calls up a login dialog box which is
used to access Control Expert.
• If security is inactive, you have direct access to Control Expert.

Security Inactive or Active in No Login Mode

If security is inactive, execute the following commands to launch an instance of Control
Expert:

66 33003101.26
Global project management

Step Action

1 Click Start > Programs.

2 Select the group EcoStruxure Control Expert.

Result: A list appears

• Language selection
• OS Loader
• PLC Simulator
• Readme
• Registration Tool
• Types library update
• Control Expert

3 From the list, select Control Expert.

Result: Control Expert is launched in the selected language.

Special case:

If you have not yet activated the software, a message warns you of the number of days of use left,
and asks you whether you want to activate. For more information, refer to EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Installation Manual.

Other Cases
When security is active, page 65, execute the following commands to launch an instance of
Control Expert:

33003101.26 67
 Global project management

Step Action

1 Activate the Control Expert icon: see procedure below.

Result: The dialog box Enter your user name and password is displayed.

2 Enter your name and password (if necessary).

3 Confirm with OK.

NOTE: If you click Ignore Control Expert starts with access setting of user default defined in
Security Editor Policies.

Services in Offline Mode

At a Glance
The following operations can be carried out when accessing Control Expert software in off-
line mode:
• Creating,
• Opening,
• Converting,
• Analyzing,
• Generating,
• Saving,
• Closing.

Creating a Project
To create a new project, carry out the following actions:

68 33003101.26
Global project management

Step Action

1 Activate the New command in the File menu.

Result: The New Project screen appears.

2 To see all PLC versions, check Show all versions box.

3 Select the processor you wish to use from those proposed.

4 To create a project with specific values of project settings, check Settings File box and use the browser
button to localize the .XSO file (Project Settings file). It is also possible to create a new one.

If the Settings File box is not checked, default values of project settings are used.

5 Confirm with OK.

33003101.26 69
 Global project management

Open Dialog
Open project dialog

70 33003101.26
Global project management

Element Description

Look in The upper part of this dialog displays a standard Windows File Open
dialog.
File name

Files of type

Opening a legacy LL984 project Please refer to Importing an LL984 Application, page 102.

Open Options

Open the project in read-only Opens the project in read-only mode.

mode
Open import File with Wizard Select this check box to use the import, page 1677 wizard.

Libset version

Libset (set of libraries) contains all libraries, families, functions and variables (I/O data structures) that can be
used to develop an automation project.

In general, to open an existing project (.STU file) or an archived project (.STA file) the Libset version can be
selected.

To import a .ZEF or .XEF file, the latest Libset version must be selected.

More information on the default Libset version used to open a project according to the file type is provided in the
libset, page 311 section.

Keep project version Select this option to keep the Libset version used at file creation time.

If the respective Libset is not installed, the latest Libset version will be
used.
Update with latest version Select this option to update the project with the latest Libset version.
available
Select a specific target version Select this option to choose a specific Libset version. The Version box
can be used to select a version.
Project information

Type Target PLC.

Name / Version Project name and software package version.

Last modification Date and time of last modification of the project.

Comment Comment associated to the project.

Opening a Project
To open an existing project, carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 71
 Global project management

Step Action

1 Choose the Open command from the File menu.

2 Select the file related to the project (file *.STU).

3 Select one of the Libset version options.

4 Confirm with Open.

Opening a project also restores the Control Expert context, which was saved when the
project was closed. This involves:
• The list of open tools,
• For each tool: its window size, position, contents and animation status,
• taskbar and tool configuration.
The context file is a companion file to the <Project_name>.STU file. It is saved in the same
directory with the name <Project_name>.ZTX. The .ZTX file is not required to open an
application. If no .ZTX is provided the application is open with default context.
NOTE: When a project file is selected, the software provides a certain amount of
information: the project name, associated comment, version and date the project was
generated, target PLC, and date of last modification to the source code.
NOTE: The .STU file is a work file and it can not be used to switch from one version to
another of Control Expert software. In this case, you should use the archive format (.
STA file) or use the export function in the project and create a .ZEF or .XEF file.
NOTE: The .STU file contains the configuration of the TSX CPP 110 in the Project
Browser.
A The file not found message appears each time the configuration screen of the TSX
CPP 110 PCMCIA card is opened. Select the required .CO file to update the CANopen
configuration.

Opening an Archived Project

To open a project archived in STA format, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Choose the Open command from the File menu.

2 Select the file related to the project (file *.STA).

3 Select one of the Libset version options.

4 Confirm with Open.

72 33003101.26
Global project management

An STA file is a project archive file that can be accessed using the Archive command in the
File menu.
The properties of the .STA file are the following:
• The .STA file is very compressed (approximately 50 times more so than the STU). It is
used to transfer projects to networks (local or Internet, for example).
• The .STA file can be used to transfer projects between versions of Control Expert
software.
• The .STA file contains the entire project:
◦ The PLC binary,
◦ The Upload information: comments and animation tables,
◦ The operator screens.
NOTE: When a .STA file is selected, the software provides a certain amount of
information:
• The project name,
• Associated comment,
• Version and date the project was generated,
• Target PLC,
• Date of last modification to the source code,
• The version of Control Expert used to create this archive.
NOTE: As the file is compressed, loading takes much longer than for an .STU file. We
recommend using the .STA file to archive the project and the .STU file as the actual
work file.
NOTE: To Fully retrieve an application with Quantum Ethernet I/O system and/or 140
NOC 78• 00 topologies, The Upload information or Open an archive files must be
used.

Converting an Existing PL7 or Concept Project

To convert an existing PL7 or Concept project, carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 73
 Global project management

Step Action

1 Choose the Open command from the File menu.

2 Select the file related to the project:

• *.FEF or *.DFB, to launch the conversion procedure for a PL7 application (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, PL7 Application Converter, User Manual),
• *.ASC, to launch the conversion procedure for a Concept application (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Concept Application Converter, User Manual).

3 Confirm with Open.

Conversion Wizard
To convert a legacy project partially or as a whole the Conversion Wizard can be used.
The Conversion Wizard provides options to remap I/O objects (channels, variables etc.)
during conversion and to adapt the hardware configuration of the new project concurrently in
Control Expert.

Shortcuts to Recent Projects

To simplify access to the current project(s), the software provides a shortcut for accessing
the last 8 projects used. In the File menu, activate the shortcut to the project you would like
to open.

Archiving a Project
To archive a project in STA format, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the Save Archive command from the File menu.

2 If necessary, select the directory where the project will be stored (disk and path).

3 Enter the file name.

4 Confirm with Save.

74 33003101.26
Global project management

NOTE: Archiving is only possible after a Rebuild all project with the Upload
information, page 548 section of the Project Settings window set as follows:

• the Upload information and Comments check boxes are checked, with the
Animation tables check box unchecked
• the Upload information, Comments and Animation tables check boxes are
checked
• the Upload information, Comments and Animation tables check boxes are
unchecked
NOTE: The .STA file partially contains the TSX CPP 110 configuration. Do not forget to
backup the .CO file (Sycon) for CANopen after archiving of the project.

Analyzing a Project
To analyze the syntax of your project, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Activate the Analyze project command in the Build menu.

Result: the software analyzes the project.

2 Any errors detected are displayed in the information window at the bottom of your screen.

Analyzing and Generating a Project

To analyze and generate your project at the same time (generation of links between input/
output modules and declared objects in the project, etc.), carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Activate the Rebuild all Project command in the Build menu.

Result: the software analyzes and generates the project.

2 Any errors detected are displayed in the information window at the bottom of your screen.

Analyzing and Generating Modified Project Parts

To analyze and generate only the modified parts of your project, carry out the following
actions:

33003101.26 75
 Global project management

Step Action

1 Activate the Build Changes command in the Build menu.

Result: the software analyzes and generates the modified parts of your project.

2 Any errors detected are displayed in the information window at the bottom of your screen.

NOTE: The Build Changes analyses and displays only modified sections or sections
impacted by modifications. To display all warnings, a Rebuild all Project command is
needed.
NOTE: The Build Changes command can be executed only if the Rebuild all Project
command has been executed at least once previously.

Backing up a New Project

To back up a new project, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Activate the Save or Save As command in the File menu.

2 If necessary, select the directory where the project will be stored (disk and path).

3 Enter the file name.

4 Confirm with Save.

Backing up an Existing Project

To back up your modifications, select the Save command from the File menu.

Closing a Project
To close your project, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Activate the Close command in the File menu.

2 If you have modified your project, a dialog box is displayed with the message that you must save
your project.

3 Save your project or close it without saving changes.

76 33003101.26
Global project management

NOTE: Closing a project triggers saving the current context in the file <Project_name>.
ZTX, page 71.

Exiting Control Expert

To exit Control Expert, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Activate the Exit command in the File menu.

2 If you have modified your project, a dialog box is displayed with the message that you must save
your project.

3 Save your project or exit it without saving changes.

Services in Online Mode

Programming and monitoring modes
You can access the project in the PLC in Online Mode in the following two ways:
• Programming, the PLC is reserved by the terminal; it is possible to access all the
functions of the software. It is not possible to connect in programming mode to a PLC
that is already reserved.
• Monitoring, The PLC is not reserved by the terminal; it is not possible to modify
functions of the PLC, (the program), however it is possible to modify values of the
variable with the animation table.It is also possible to connect in monitoring mode to a
PLC that is already reserved. Links between EFs are not animated.
Note: The command Tools > Options...Connection tab lets you choose the default
operating mode, page 592.

Equal or Different Modes

On connection, the data in the PLC and the terminal is compared, page 548:
• if the data is identical, this determines an equal online mode, page 86,
• if the data is different, this determines a different online mode, page 86.

33003101.26 77
 Global project management

Information in the PLC

Two types of information are compared between the PLC and the terminal:
• Executable information is used to identify and execute the project in the PLC:
◦ identification of the project,
◦ configuration,
◦ code sections,
◦ DDT types,
◦ DFB types,
◦ EF and EFB codes,
◦ project options.
• Upload information:
◦ project upload information: graphic code for languages with LD contacts and chart of
FBD function blocks, symbols of static and dynamic variables,
◦ comments: variables, code sections, project, DFBs, etc.,
◦ animation tables.

User functions
The user functions provided in online mode that can be accessed from the PLC menu are
the following:

Function Description

Connection/Disconnection Connection (change to online mode) or disconnection (change to offline

mode).

Set Address Access to a PLC via the network.

Standard mode Choice of connection with a PLC.
Simulator mode Choice of connection with a PLC.
Compare Comparison of terminal/PLC projects.

Transfer Project to PLC Transfer of the program between the terminal and the PLC.

and Transfer Project from PLC

Save Data from PLC to File Transfer of data between a file and the PLC.

and Restore Data from File to PLC

Run/Stop Sending a command to the PLC.

and Init

78 33003101.26
Global project management

Function Description

Update Upload Information Update the Upload information in the PLC.

Update Init Values with Current The PLC forces the update of the initial values using current values (this
Values applies to the variables with the save attribute).

Project Backup Backs up the project in memory.

Memory Consumption Access to PLC memory usage statistics.

Diagnostics Access to the debug function.

Cancel/Repeat
The Cancel/Repeat commands in the Edit menu are not available in the following cases:
• Deletion of a step or macro-step in online mode.
• Switch from normal view to extended view in SFC debug mode and vice-versa.

Allowed Online Modifications

Overview
The following pages describe modifications that are allowed when Control Expert mode is
online.

General Rules Concerning Online Modifications

Online modification is a feature that concerns only the ‘online equal’ state.
If the application present in the PLC is different from the one opened in Control Expert, the
state is ‘online different’. One of both applications should be chosen and loaded to be in the
‘online equal’ state.
NOTE: To download the application from Control Expert into the PLC, it is mandatory to
stop the PLC. However, the PLC may stay in RUN mode while uploading the application
to the PC via Control Expert.
The ‘online equal’ state may only be reached if the connection mode is ‘programming’. To
configure the connection mode, use the command Tool > Options > Connection.
Two different connection modes are available:
• monitoring, page 77: state is ‘monitoring’ and no online modification is allowed,

33003101.26 79
 Global project management

• programming, page 77.

The distinction between executable code and upload information means that there are 2
kinds of modifications:
• those which truly modify the executable information (e.g., which add a new EFB call or
a new ST instruction)
• modifications that have an impact only on the Upload information (e.g. concerning
comments, graphical information of languages).
Consequently, these kinds of modifications may not need to be built depending on whether
upload information is loaded into PLC, comments and animation tables included in upload
information.
As a general rule, Control Expert prevents the user from doing actions by mistake that would
force them to stop the PLC and/or to perform a complete download:
• either by simply disabling the forbidden functions in online mode
• or by a warning message, as follows:

To know what parts have been modified, the application browser displays a specific mark for
the modified parts and in the title bar of the editors by character ‘*’.

Modify the Program

It is always possible to modify a section of the program in online mode. As soon as a section
has been modified, it is no longer animated until the next build and transfer to PLC.
Nevertheless, depending on the kind of modifications, a SFC graph may be reset after the
build and PLC update.
Some modifications performed in SFC might need a rebuild all command. In such cases, a
warning message appears in the editor. For example, deleting an action or a transition
section requires a ‘rebuild all’ command. However, removing an action or a transition section
from a step or a transition and keeping the section unused only requires an online build.

80 33003101.26
Global project management

NOTE: Adding an SFC section must be done offline, if the two following conditions are
fulfilled simultaneously:
• If the project contains at least one SFC section already.
• If the project has been designed with an earlier version than Unity Pro 3.0
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
This modification requires a rebuild all of the project and a PLC stop to download the entire
application.

Modify Data
In the data editor, there is no specific operating mode.
Generally, it is allowed to modify the type of a variable or a Function Block (FB) in online
mode.
Modifying a data, which is used in the program, may have consequences wherever it is
used, on the contrary to an unused variable. Therefore online actions are more restricted on
used data.
NOTE: Adding a variable without rebuilding increases the memory usage until next
rebuild.
For used EDT variable or used DDT/FB instance, only comments and the initial values can
be modified. Unused variable/instance may be deleted. It is allowed to create new variable/
instance online.
Concerning DDT type, it is only allowed to change comments if the type is used. It is
possible to create new DDT or to delete an unused one.
For DFB type, it is possible to:
• create, modify and delete sections
• change comments
• change initial values
• add a new public or private variable
If there is no instance of the DFB, there is no limitation. The DFB type may even be deleted.
Finally creating new DFB type(s) and instantiating it in online mode is straightforward.

Modify the Configuration

For Modicon M340, Premium and Atrium PLCs, it is not possible to add or remove any
module in online mode. Parameters of an existing module on the contrary may be
configured online. Once modified, the animated mode is no longer available until the next
build and PLC update.

33003101.26 81
 Global project management

For Modicon Quantum system PLCs, it is possible to add or delete a selection of modules
and change the parameters of an existing module in STOP and RUN mode. For more
information refer to Modicon Quantum, Change Configuration on the Fly, User Guide.
For Modicon M580 PLCs when the option CCTOF is selected, it is possible to add or delete
a selection of modules and change the parameters of an existing module in STOP and RUN
mode. For more information refer to Modicon M580, Change Configuration on the Fly, User
Guide.

Comment Concerning Offline Modifications

Modifications that are only possible offline and new application downloads require an offline
build and a rebuild all. In these cases, the modification is not possible online and a message
notifies the user.
The rebuild is needed:
• After application creation or import
• Once the application is already built:
◦ Changing some project settings
◦ CPU change
◦ Memory card change
◦ Memory card layout change
◦ Switching from real target to simulator and vice versa
Furthermore, if a flash PCMCIA card without additional SRAM (TSX MFPP •••M or TSX
MFPP •••K) is configured, no modification is allowed online. User is informed by a specific
message ‘This action is forbidden because: Flash Cartridge’.

Synthesis of Authorized and Unauthorized Modifications

The following table presents the main authorized and unauthorized online modifications.
The second column indicates which modifications have impact only to the upload
information and do not have any impact to the executable code:

Type of Modification Impacts Only Upload Allowed in Online Requires to Build the
Information Mode (RUN/STOP) Application in Offline
Mode
General
Name of Station, Programs, Yes Yes No
Sections

82 33003101.26
Global project management

Type of Modification Impacts Only Upload Allowed in Online Requires to Build the
Information Mode (RUN/STOP) Application in Offline
Mode
Comment of Station, Yes Yes No
Configuration, Programs,
Sections
Documentation Summary Yes Yes No

Animation Table Yes Yes No

Integrated Operator Screens Yes Yes No

Functional View Yes Yes No

Security Information: No Yes No
Passwords, Protection
Attributes,...

Switch Simulator <-> Real No No Yes

Target

Import/Export Project No Yes No

Program

Program elements (Sections, No Yes No

Program Units): Add,
Change Execution Order

Modify the Code of a Section Yes(1) Yes No

(Task Section, SR,
Transition, Action, DFB
Sections)

Modify the Code of EVT No Yes(2) Yes

Sections
Modify the Code of SFC No Yes No(1)
Chart
Configuration/
Communication
Premium Configuration: Add/ No No Yes
Delete a Module
Premium Configuration: No Yes No
Change Module Parameters

Quantum Configuration: Add/ No Yes No

Delete a Module
Quantum Configuration: No Yes No
Change Module Parameters

Changing Memory Sizes in No No Yes

Configuration Screen

33003101.26 83
 Global project management

Type of Modification Impacts Only Upload Allowed in Online Requires to Build the
Information Mode (RUN/STOP) Application in Offline
Mode
Global Variables (Used
Even in Animation Table or
Operator Screen)

Remove an Used Variable No No Yes

Symbol an Used Variable No Yes No

Type an Used Variable No No Yes

Topological Address of an No Yes No

Used Variable
Initial Value of an Used No Yes No
Variable
Comment of an Used Yes Yes No
Variable
Create, Remove or Modify No Yes No
Unused Variables (EDT,
DDT)

Create, Remove or Modify No Yes No

Unused Variables (FB)

Program Unit Variables

(Used Even in Animation
Table)

Remove an Used Variable No No Yes

Symbol an Used Variable No Yes No

Type an Used Variable No No Yes

Topological Address of an No Yes No

Used Variable
Initial Value of an Used No Yes No
Variable
Comment of an Used Yes Yes No
Variable
Effective Parameter of an Yes Yes No
Used Variable
Create, Remove or Modify No Yes No
Unused Variables (EDT,
DDT)

Create, Remove or Modify No Yes No

Unused Variables (FB)

Used DFB
Type Name of Used DFB No No Yes

84 33003101.26
Global project management

Type of Modification Impacts Only Upload Allowed in Online Requires to Build the
Information Mode (RUN/STOP) Application in Offline
Mode
All Comments Yes Yes No
Add a Parameter No No Yes
Add a Public or Private No Yes No
Variable
Delete or Change Unused No Yes No
Private Variable
Initial Value of Parameters No Yes No
and Variables
Other Attributes of No No Yes
Parameters and Variables
(Public and Private)

Modify the Code of a section No Yes No

Create a New DFB Type No Yes No

Delete an Unused DFB Type No Yes No

Used DDT
Create a New DDT Type No Yes No

Delete an Unused DDT Type No Yes No

(1) Modifying only the graphical layout or the free form comments does not impact code generation, but only
generation of the upload information.

(2) This is only available in the RUN mode for the Quantum modules.

Connection / disconnection
At a Glance
Connection enables you to change from offline to online mode. On connection, data in the
PLC and the terminal is compared:
• if the information is identical, the online mode is Equal,
• if the information is different, the online mode is Different,
By disconnecting, you can return to offline mode from an online mode.

33003101.26 85
 Global project management

Equal online mode

On connection to the PLC, Control Expert runs in Equal online mode when executable files
and the Upload information are identical in the PLC and in the terminal.
You can modify the project in the same way as for offline mode. Generating the executable
also automatically triggers loading of modifications to the PLC.
If the project program has been modified in the terminal without regenerating the
executable, only the non-modified parts of the project will be animated.
To animate the entire project once again, you must generate the executable and update the
PLC.

Different online mode

On connection to the PLC, Control Expert runs in Different online mode when executable
files and the Upload information are different in the PLC and in the terminal.
To run in Equal online mode, you must transfer the project between the terminal and the
PLC.
In Different online mode, the animation level is limited to access to located variables via their
topological address. Modification of the program is not authorized.

Connection procedure
You must execute the following actions to connect up:

Step Action

1 On first connection: Click , page 87 PLC > Set Address.

2 Choose the connection mode:
• PLC > Standard mode: to connect to a PLC
• PLC > Simulator mode: to connect to a simulator
3 Click PLC > Connection.

Disconnection procedure
You must execute the following actions to disconnect:

86 33003101.26
Global project management

Step Action

1 Click PLC > Disconnection.

Automatic disconnection
In order to avoid online mode switching automatically to offline mode, without your explicit
request (which is possible if the process executed by the processor is too large), you are
recommended to increase the Timeout communication parameter, page 95.

Accessing a PLC via a Network

Procedure
You must carry out the following actions to access a new PLC via the network:

Step Action

1 Activate the menu PLC > Set address command, which displays the Set address dialogue.
2 In the PLC Address field, enter the address of the new PLC.

3 In the PLC Media field, select the type of communication you wish to use, page 92. For Ethway
drivers, refer to the following note.

4 If you wish, modify:

• the communication parameters, page 95 using the Communication Parameters buttons
in the PLC and Simulator group boxes
• the connection bandwidths, page 97 using the Bandwidth button

5 To carry out a connection test click on the Test Connection button.

6 When you are finished, confirm with the OK button.

NOTE: In the Set Address dialogue, Ethway drivers are not available. To use this type
of communication, you must enter manually ETHWAY01 or ETHWAY02 in the Media
drop-down menu.
NOTE: By default the simulator is started on port number 502. To change the port
number (portnum), add in the Simulator Address box an unused port number (e.g.,
127.0.0.1:511 to use port number 511).

33003101.26 87
 Global project management

Description of Set Address Parameters

The following table describes the Set Address dialogue:

Group box Parameter Description

PLC Address PLC address (by default, the address of the PCL physically wired to the
terminal).

The drop-down menu lists any previous addresses entered. Clicking on the
trashcan clears the drop-down list

Media This drop-down selects the type of communication with the network for the
PCL.
Communication By clicking this button you access the PLC communication parameters,
Parameters page 95.

Simulator Address Simulator address

The drop-down menu lists any previous addresses entered. Clicking on the
trashcan clears the drop-down list

Media This drop-down selects the type of communication with the network for the
simulator.
Communication By clicking this button you access the simulator communication parameters,
Parameters page 96.

Bandwidth Click this button to display the Online Mode Services Bandwidth dialogue,
page 97.

Test Connection Click this button to execute a connection test without closing the Set
Address dialogue.

Speed rate auto- Choose this mode for applications which do not require a specific speed rate
adaptation at the end (e.g., Modems).
of download

Network Address Syntax

The network address syntax is documented in the Architecture and Communication
Services (see Communication Services and Architectures, Reference Manual) manual.
The following table describes the various authorized addresses according to the platforms
and media supports.

Platform Support Address syntax

Premium Uni-Telway SCP01 X-Way

Uni-Telway UNTLW01 X-Way Example: UNTLW01 0.2.1.4 access to

the Uni-Telway slave at address 4 which is

88 33003101.26
Global project management

Platform Support Address syntax

connected to rack 0, module 2, channel 1 of the

local PLC.
Fipway FIP01, FIP02, X-Way
FPP2001 (driver for
the TSX FPP20
card)

Fipio FIP01, FIP02, X-Way Example: FIP02 \2.55\SYS to access to

FPP2001 FIPIO connection point 55 through the privileged
terminal Fipio (address 63 for Premium)

Example: FIP01 SYS to access to Fipio Master

through the privileged terminal Fipio (address 63
for Premium).

PCIway PCIWAY01, X-Way

PCIWAY02
Ethway ETHWAY01, X-Way
ETHWAY02
XIP XIP01 to XIP05 X-Way Example: XIP01 {3.5}\2.55\SYS to
access a FIPIO connection point 55, through the
network 3 and station 5 PLC.

Example: XIP02 {3.5}0.2.0.4 access to a Uni-

Telway slave connection at address 4 which is
connected on the rack 0 module 2 channel 0 of
the network 3 and station 5 PLC.
Ethernet IP TCP/IP IP address
Ethernet IP TCP/IP** IP address;Index or

"DNS machine name;Index"

USB USB implicit; no address is necessary as the

connection is point to point. However, it is
possible to enter an X-Way address when the
PLC is acting as an X-Way router

Modbus Plus MBPLUS01 to Modbus Plus Address Example: MBPLUS01 2.1

MBPLUS04 access to Modbus Plus node address 1 which is
connected after the Modus Bridge address 2.

Quantum Serial Modbus MODBUS01 to Modbus Slave Number

MODBUS04
Modbus Plus MBPLUS01 to Modbus Plus Address
MBPLUS04
Ethernet TCP/IP IP Address Example: TCPIP 84.0.127.6 access
to an Ethernet TCP/IP station.
Ethernet IP TCP/IP*** IP address;Index or

"DNS machine name;Index"

33003101.26 89
 Global project management

Platform Support Address syntax

USB USB implicit; no address is necessary as the

connection is point to point

Modicon M340 Serial Modbus MODBUS01 to Direct Address: Modbus slave number
MODBUS04
Remote address: Link_address.Modbus Slave
number

Link_address = r.m.c. of Modbus link

Direct address example: 66

Bridging example:
• 66\\0.0.3{118.159.35.45} for Modbus slave
66 to PLC on Ethernet CPU.
• 66\\0.3.0{118.159.35.45} for Modbus slave
66 to PLC on Ethernet NOE on slot 3.
Ethernet TCP/IP Direct address: IP Address

Remote address: Netlink {IP address}

Netlink address = r.m.c. of Ethernet link

Direct address example: 84.0.127.6

Bridging example:
• 139.160.235.20\\0.3.0{118.159.35.45} for
Ethernet CPU to PLC on Ethernet NOE on
slot 3.
• 139.159.35.20\\0.0.0.66 for Ethernet to
Modbus slave 66.
Ethernet IP TCP/IP** IP address;Index or

"DNS machine name;Index"

USB USB SYS or empty

Bridging example: SYS\\0.0.0.66 for USB to

Modbus slave 66.
Modicon M580 Ethernet TCP/IP Direct address: IP Address

Remote address: Netlink {IP address}

Netlink address = r.m.c. of Ethernet link

Direct address example: 84.0.127.6

Bridging example:
• 139.160.235.20\\0.3.0{118.159.35.45} for
Ethernet CPU to PLC on Ethernet BMX
NOR on slot 3.
• 139.159.35.20\\0.4.0.66 for Ethernet to
Modbus slave 66 of channel 0 of a BMX
NOM 0200 on slot 4.

90 33003101.26
Global project management

Platform Support Address syntax

Ethernet IP TCP/IP** IP address;Index or

"DNS machine name;Index"

USB USB SYS or empty

Bridging example: SYS\\0.4.0.66 for USB to

Modbus slave 66 of channel 0 of a BMX NOM
0200 on slot 4.
Simulator Ethernet TCP/IP IP address;Index **

"localhost"

"DNS machine name;Index" **

Legend **: "Index" is the Modbus Plus or Modbus index stipulated in the bridge you want to cross.
This access only works in display mode: it cannot be used to modify the program or force
values.

***: "Index" is the Modbus Plus or Modbus index stipulated in the bridge you want to cross.

Note: You must use quotation marks when the address includes characters other than
figures, full stops or semi colons. These are used to avoid this address being analyzed
syntactically.

Accessing PLCs Behind a Router

When you need to communicate to several PLCs behind routers, configure a network
address translation table in Control Expert to handle different ports. You supply the router
address and different ports to reach PLCs behind the routers.
Example:
Suppose the router address is 139.160.39.12. The PLC addresses below are local:

PLC Number PLC Address

1 192.168.0.1:502
2 192.168.0.2:502
3 192.168.0.3:502
This example shows PLCs with different addresses, but the same port.

Network Address Translation Table

The network address translation table would look something like this:

33003101.26 91
 Global project management

Port Destination
TCP/IP 3501 192.168.0.1:502
TCP/IP 3502 192.168.0.2:502
TCP/IP 3503 192.168.0.3:502
This example shows the same router address with different ports, each port corresponding to a PLC address.

Notes:
• Control Expert can communicate with PLC 2 using the router address followed by port
3502.
• In the Set Address dialog, type 139.160.39.12:3502.
• The router sends the message to the address 192.168.0.2:502 (configured in the router
in the network address translation table).
• To communicate with other PLCs, use the same router address, but change the port
number.

Overview of Types of Connection Possible With

Schneider PLCs
At a Glance
Control Expert connects to Modicon M340, Modicon M580, Premium, Atrium, and Quantum
PLCs in different ways.
Each type of connection has its own characteristics. The following table provides an
overview of the different possibilities.

Connection Solutions

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Do not connect more than one PLC over USB on the same computer.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

The following table shows the different solutions that can be used to connect a PLC with
Control Expert software.

92 33003101.26
Global project management

Type of Connection M340 M580 Premium and Quantum

Atrium
USB All processors All processors On processors: On processors:
• TSX P57 4634 • 140 CPU 651
50
• TSX P57 554
• 140 CPU 651
• TSX P57 5634
60
• TSX P57 6634
• 140 CPU 651
60S
• 140 CPU 652
60
• 140 CPU 658
60
• 140 CPU 670
60
• 140 CPU 671
60
• 140 CPU 672
60
• 140 CPU 672
61
• 140 CPU 671
60S
• 140 CPU 678
61
Uni-Telway - - All processors, via -
terminal port and
PCMCIA cards
Modbus (1) On processors: - - All processors have a
Modbus connection
• BMX P34 1000
which can be used
• BMX P34 2000 by Control Expert.
• BMX P34 2010
• BMX P34
20102
• BMX P34 2020
XIP (2) - - Via the following -
modules:
• TSX ETY 110
• TSX ETY 4103
• TSX ETY 5103
• TSX ETY
PORT
• Ethernet
channel of TSX
P57 4634

33003101.26 93
 Global project management

Type of Connection M340 M580 Premium and Quantum

Atrium
• Ethernet
channel of TSX
P57 5634
• Ethernet
channel of TSX
P57 6634
Modbus Plus - - Via PCMCIA cards All processors
TSX MBP 100 (2)(3)(4)

Ethernet TCP/IP (2) Processors Ethernet All processors Processors Ethernet Processors Ethernet
channels: channels: channels:
• BMX P34 2020 • TSX P57 4634 • 140 CPU 651
• BMX P34 2030 • TSX P57 5634 50

• BMX P34 • TSX P57 6634 • 140 CPU 651

60
20302 Via the following
• 140 CPU 651
Via the following modules:
modules: 60S
• TSX ETY 4103
• BMX NOE
(3) • 140 CPU 652
0100 60
• TSX ETY 5103
(3)
• BMX NOE 0110 • 140 CPU 658
• TSX ETY 60
PORT (3) Via the following
modules:
• 140 NOE 211
x0
• 140 NOE 251
x0
• 140 NOE 771
00
• 140 NOE 771
01
• 140 NOE 771
10
• 140 NOE 771
11
• 140 NOE 771
20
PCI - - On Atrium -
processors only:
• TSX PCI 57
204
• TSX PCI 57
354
Fipio (2) - - All PLCs connected -
to the Fipio bus to
which the PC running
Control Expert is

94 33003101.26
Global project management

Type of Connection M340 M580 Premium and Quantum

Atrium
connected, as well as
all those accessible
via X-Way routers

Fipway (2) - - All PLCs connected -

to the Fipway
network to which the
PC running Control
Expert is connected,
as well as all those
accessible via X-Way
routers
(1) Bluetooth connection is limited to Diagnostics and Animation.

(2) Requires a valid application to be installed on the PLC and requires the communication cards or modules used to be
configured correctly.
NOTE: For Modicon M580 and M340 PLCs, the TCP/IP connection does not require a valid application inside the
PLC to work.
• For details on Modicon M580 default address configuration, refer to Control Expert Configuration Tabs (see
Modicon M580, Hardware, Reference Manual).
• For details on Modicon M340 default address configuration, refer to Methods for IP Addressing (see Modicon
M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and Processors, User Manual).
(3) Cannot be used to view application-specific screens in online mode.

(4) Programming mode, page 77 cannot be accessed via a Modbus Plus network.

Accessing communication parameters

Procedure for accessing PLC parameters
You must perform the following actions to access the communication parameters of the
PLC:

33003101.26 95
 Global project management

Step Action

1 Access the Set Address screen, page 87.

2
Click on the Communication Parameters button in the PLC field to display the following screen:

3 Modify the parameters you wish to change:

• Enter the number of attempts you wish to be made for failure recovery in the Number of
tries field.
• Enter the timeout delay to be used for failure recovery in the Timeout (ms) field:
◦ For Uni-Telway, the recommended value is: 4000 ms.
◦ For Modbus ASCII, the recommended value is: 6000 ms.
• Check the Speed at 115 KBds box to increase the project loading speed: from the
configured speed to 115 KBds. This option is only available in Uni-Telway mode for TSX
57 3•• and TSX 57 4•• processors. For all other types of processor the Speed at 115 KBds
option has no effect.
Note: Click on Driver Settings to display the driver management screen (see Communication
Drivers, Installation Manual).

4 Confirm with OK.

Note: Any modification to the communication parameters of the PLC will only actually be taken
into account if it is confirmed by clicking OK in the Set Address screen. Clicking Cancel cancels
acknowledgment of any modifications.

Procedure for accessing simulator parameters

You must perform the following actions to access the communication parameters of the
simulator: (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual)

96 33003101.26
Global project management

Step Action

1 Access the Set Address screen, page 87.

2
Click on the Communication Parameters button in the Simulator field to display the following
screen:

3 Modify the parameters you wish to change:

• enter the number of attempts you wish to be made for failure recovery in the Number of
tries field,
• enter the timeout delay to be used for failure recovery in the Timeout (ms) field.

4 Confirm with OK.

Note: Any modification to the simulator communication parameters will only actually be taken
into account if it is confirmed by clicking OK in the Set Address screen. Clicking Cancel cancels
acknowledgment of any modifications.

Procedure for accessing bandwidths

You may divide up the bandwidth quota allocated to Control Expert for the selected
communication medium between the different functions available in online mode.
This screen is used to define the percentage of bandwidth allocated to each of the 4
categories of functionality in online mode:
• Animation Support: animation tables, operator screens, animation of language
editors, application-specific screens. The higher the percentage allocated, the higher
the frequency with which the data in the PLC will be scanned.
• PLC Monitoring: monitoring of the overall operating mode of the PLC (Run or Stop), or
of its tasks for the "Program debugging" function. The higher the percentage allocated,
the higher the frequency with which the state of the PLC and its tasks will be scanned.
• PLC Screen (PLC debug screen): the higher the percentage allocated, the higher the
frequency with which the PLC and application information will be scanned.

33003101.26 97
 Global project management

• Diagnostics (Diagnostic Viewer). The higher the percentage allocated, the higher the
frequency with which the alarms in the PLC will be acquired.
This screen is used to optimize performance in online mode, by adjusting the parameters to
suit:
• the characteristics of the project loaded onto the PLC: numerous and frequent
diagnostics alarms, many animation screens open at once
• and the use made of online mode: the most frequently used functions.
Procedure:

Step Action

1 Access the Set Address screen, page 87.

2
Click on the Bandwidth button to display the following screen:

3 Using the sliders, adjust the parameter values to suit the characteristics of your project and the
functions you use most frequently in online mode.

4 Click on the Default button if you want to revert to the default values.

5 The Freeze option is used for fine adjustment (in increments) of the parameters to suit the
characteristics of the project loaded in the PLC.

It is used to retain the value of a parameter once the response time of the corresponding function
has been determined, and then adjust only the parameters corresponding to the other functions.

6 Confirm with OK.

Note: Any modification will only actually be taken into account if it is confirmed by clicking OK in
the Set Address screen. Clicking Cancel cancels acknowledgment of any modifications.

98 33003101.26
Global project management

Project comparison
At a Glance
Project comparison provides you with a concise overview of the possible differences
between a project embedded in the PLC and a project in the terminal. For each project, the
following information is displayed:
• Name,
• Version,
• Last build: date and time the executable was last generated.
• SourceSafeSignature: an SHA256 algorithmic fingerprint of the safe application.

Procedure
Perform the following actions to launch project comparison:

33003101.26 99
 Global project management

Step Action

1
Activate the PLC > Compare command, which displays the screen below.

NOTE: Both the project and the safe application SourceSafeSignature values are compared. The
combination of the two comparisons is displayed in an icon placed between the two
SourceSafeSignature values:
• The icon in the graphic, above, indicates both the Projects and the SourceSafeSignatures are
DIFFERENT.

• indicates both the Projects and the SourceSafeSignatures are EQUAL.

• indicates the Projects are DIFFERENT, but the SourceSafeSignatures are EQUAL.

2 Confirm with OK.

Different projects
If the projects are different, 2 commands let you carry out a transfer between the terminal
and the PLC or vice versa, thus changing to Equal online mode:
• Transfer Project to PLC, transfer the project from the terminal to the PLC,
• Transfer Project from PLC, transfer the project from the PLC to the terminal.
NOTE: When the transfer is not possible, the corresponding button is grayed out (for
example, the Transfer Project from PLC command is grayed out when the project
embedded in the PLC is invalid or when information required for uploading is missing or
invalid).

100 33003101.26
Global project management

Conversion of Legacy Applications/Projects

Introduction
There are 2 possibilities to convert legacy applications to Control Expert.
• Global conversion provides to convert a legacy application (PL7, Concept) to Control
Expert as a whole.
• Partial conversion with the conversion wizard provides to select parts of a legacy
application to be converted and to control the conversion result.
To convert a legacy application to Control Expert, you must at first export the application out
of the legacy software (PL7, Concept).
NOTE: In case of global conversion with a default hardware configuration (see below)
as well as in case of partial conversion, the hardware configuration must be edited and
completed by the user.

Global Conversion
To convert a legacy application as a whole you select the file exported out of the legacy
software in Control Expert via File > Open.
The respective converter (PL7 Converter, Concept Converter) automatically generates a
Control Expert application.
For detailed information on the converters, please refer to EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
PL7 Application Converter, User Manual or EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Concept
Application Converter, User Manual.
• Global conversion for Premium and Quantum contains also a hardware configuration.
• Applications with PLCs which do not have a direct equivalent in Control Expert
(Compact, Momentum, TSX Micro) should be converted using the partial conversion
with the conversion wizard.
However, if global conversion is chosen, a default hardware configuration is generated.
• For global conversion of Compact applications you can select either Quantum or
Modicon M340 as target PLC. Please refer to Importing an LL984 Application, page
102.
• Global conversion of Momentum applications contains only a default Quantum
hardware configuration with a CPU (140 CPU 534 14A/U) and a power supply (140
CPS 424 00). If needed the default CPU can be replaced.
• Global conversion of TSX Micro applications contains only a default Modicon M340
hardware configuration with a CPU (BMX P34 2020) and a power supply (BMX CPS
2000). If needed the default CPU can be replaced.

33003101.26 101
 Global project management

Partial Conversion
To convert a legacy application partially to Control Expert, use the conversion wizard.
You can launch the conversion wizard in Control Expert via Tools > Convert Partially.
With the conversion wizard you can:
• select the parts of the application to be converted
• remap I/O objects before conversion
• adapt concurrently the hardware configuration of the new application in Control Expert
• modify the amount of used memory in the CPU
The partial conversion is possible for TSX Micro, Premium, Quantum, Momentum and
Compact applications.
With partial conversion for Compact and Momentum applications it is recommended to
prepare a Modicon M340 hardware configuration.
For detailed information, please refer to chapter Conversion Wizard, page 1733.

Importing an LL984 Application

Introduction
When you import an application to Control Expert from other programming software, some
functions may behave differently.
For example:
• Cold start behavior of Control Expert LL984 applications is different from legacy LL984
applications.
• Imported Concept IEC coils behave differently than imported LL984 coils.
• Control Expert MATH functions might not behave the same as legacy LL984 (overflow,
underflow, etc.).

102 33003101.26
Global project management

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• After you imported an application program, edit the result carefully to check that all the
logic elements have been ported completely and are located correctly in the program.
• Test the application before running it to check that it performs as expected.
• If necessary, edit the program to add logic elements that are missing, remove code
that is not necessary, and replace logic elements that behave differently from their
intended purpose.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

General Message after Import

After the import check the log file, page 111 for error and warning messages.
You have to Analyze and Build the project.

Import
To import an LL984 application use the File > Open menu command.
Please refer to Open dialog, page 70.
You can import the following legacy LL984 applications:
• Concept Projects (*.ASC)
• Modsoft Projects (*.CFG)
• ProWORX32 Databases (*.PWX)
• ProWORX Nxt (*.DCF)
NOTE: Imported MSTR functions are not designed to work with the Modicon M340
CPUs. After an application is converted to Control Expert, it must be manually updated.
The MSTR function must be replaced by the READ_VAR and WRITE_VAR functions.
For further information please refer to Import / Export of LL984 Applications (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference Manual).

33003101.26 103
 Global project management

LL984 Options Dialog (-> Target PLC Quantum)

After selecting a legacy LL984 application file, the following LL984 Options dialog is
displayed. The following graphic shows an example with a legacy Quantum LL984 source
application and a Quantum selected as target PLC family.

Element Description

Application Displays the name of the legacy application to be imported.

Source PLC Family Displays the PLC family of the legacy application to be imported.

OK Starts the import.

Cancel Displays a message ...“Convert” step failed, no application is imported,

and the following message is generated in the import log file: “Conversion
terminated by User”.

Full Topological This check box is only used to convert applications to Modicon M340 PLCs.

104 33003101.26
Global project management

Element Description

Symbols

Original Select this option to use the original variable names of the legacy application in
your new Control Expert application.

_XYYYYY Select this option to automatically convert the legacy variable names.

The new variable names will be composed according to the following list:
• _: an underscore will be the leading sign of the converted variables.
• X: represents the data type in the memory area.
◦ 0: %M (memory bit)
◦ 1: %I (discrete input)
◦ 3: %IM (input word)
◦ 4: %MW (memory word)
• YYYYY: represents the address number.
For example _400001 stands for%MW1.

Target PLC Family

Quantum Select this option to use the Quantum as target PLC.

M340 Select this option to use the Modicon M340 as target PLC.

The Modicon M340-specific parameters for full topological addressing are listed in
a separate table below.

Momentum Select this option to use the Modicon Momentum under Control Expert as target
PLC.
Label causes SR Select this option to import a segment containing labels as an SR segment, even
if its scheduling does not express this.

Labels are allowed only in SR segments.

For details please refer to Calling Subroutines, page 1166.

33003101.26 105
 Global project management

Element Description

Shift 984 Remote This additional option appears if the legacy application CPU family is a 984 family.

If selected, a Quantum local rack is added to the application and all drop numbers
are increased by one until an unused drop number is reached, keeping the old
984 rack as the first remote rack (drop number 2) without the old CPU.

If the option is not selected, conversion attempts to translate the local rack and its
modules to Quantum, as far as possible. A common situation encountered is that
984 local drops often contain more racks than allowed with Quantum.

Long Comments are in This additional dialog box displays the path where the long comments are stored if
project and in directory the legacy application contains long comments.

This path is identical to the path where the legacy application is stored plus one
additional directory for the long comments.

Long comments appear twice in the conversion:

• Inside the internal project database of the data editor.
• As text files in the additional application path directory for long comments.
To back up all information of the application, only the files in the additional
application path directory are to be saved.

To achieve consistency between data editor and text files, comment in both places
must be edited together.

LL984 Options Dialog (-> Target PLC Modicon M340)

Converting a legacy LL984 application to a Modicon M340 application you can determine
the kind of addressing. By default Mixed topological / State RAM addressing is used (option
Full Topological not selected).
Mixed Topological / State RAM Addressing (-> Modicon M340)

106 33003101.26
Global project management

The following graphic shows an example for converting a legacy Compact application to a
Modicon M340 application with Mixed topological / State RAM addressing (option Full
Topological not selected).

NOTE:
If you want to import a legacy LL984 Compact application which uses Modbus request to
communicate with an HMI, you have to use State RAM addressing to preserve the
Modbus exchange between PLC and HMI.
Full Topological Addressing (-> Modicon M340)
To convert a legacy LL984 application to a Modicon M340 application with full topological
addressing, the option Full Topological has to be selected.

33003101.26 107
 Global project management

• All word variables get a declaration with a symbol and the topological address in the
data editor, if not already present.
• Input Words are copied to a mirror area of memory words, allowing SCADA access.
• Discrete words are directly addressed with topological addresses in the programs, if no
symbols are defined for them, showing in this way directly their hardware connection to
the controller.
• If SCADA access is required to discrete inputs, the input bits can be copied as well to a
mirror area of memory bits by checking Copy Input Bits.
• SCADA access for inputs with Full Topological checked needs modified addresses in
the SCADA system – the offsets in the dialog must be added to the original offsets and
the memory areas must be used instead of the input areas.

108 33003101.26
Global project management

The following graphic shows an example for converting a legacy Compact application to a
Modicon M340 application with full topological addressing.

For converting a legacy LL984 application to a Modicon M340 application with full
topological addressing, the following additional parameters are used:

33003101.26 109
 Global project management

Element Description

Full Topological Activate this option to convert input word addresses (3x) of the legacy LL984
application to a separate, mirrored area of the %MW areas of the target Modicon
M340 application.

If this option is not activated, the legacy LL984 application is converted into a
State RAM Modicon M340 application.

Input Word Offset Enter the offset for the input word addresses (3x) in the mirrored area of the %MW
area of the target Modicon M340 application.

Copy Input Bits Activate this option to additionally convert input bit addresses (1x) to the mirrored
area of the %M area of the target Modicon M340 application.

Input Bit Offset Enter the offset for the input bit addresses (1x) in the mirrored area of the %M area
of the target Modicon M340 application.

NOTE: With this Full Topological option activated you must manually change the
access to the %I and %IW addresses in the SCADA components.

Converting a Legacy Compact Application to Modicon M340 with

Full Topological Addressing
During conversion of a legacy Compact application to a Modicon M340 application with full
topological addressing, the import automatically creates separate ST code sections for input
and output operations with copying commands to transfer I/O data to the mirrored memory
areas.
Please refer to Module Emulation (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor,
Reference Manual).

Import Behavior
During import of a legacy LL984 application, problems may be detected:
• controller family not supported
• I/O family not supported
• I/O module not supported
• rack count exceeded
• instruction/function block not supported
• non-coil in column 11
Generally such an issue does not stop the import.

110 33003101.26
Global project management

Instead a message is displayed for each of these detected problems in the Import/Export
tab of the Output Window at the bottom of the Control Expert user interface.
Double-click such a message in the Output Window to access the respective dialog in your
application.
If detected problems occur the following is done during import:
• Not supported controllers or I/O families are replaced by a default Quantum/Modicon
M340 configuration.
• Not supported I/O modules are ignored in case of Quantum as target PLC family.
• Exceeding racks and their modules are ignored.
• Not supported instructions are represented by empty DFBs that look identical to the
LL984 instruction. In such a case proceed as described under Not Supported Legacy
LL984 Instructions and User Loadables (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984
Editor, Reference Manual).
• Equation networks with questionable conversions (for example implicit type cast) will
contain the imported equation statement and an additional message.
Equation networks which are not compliant with Modicon M340 variable alignment
rules, will cause a build error during Analyze.
For details please refer to Equation Networks (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984
Editor, Reference Manual).
• The import of a legacy application that contains duplicated identifiers is aborted. For
details please refer to Duplicated Identifiers (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984
Editor, Reference Manual).
If parts of a legacy application are not imported, after Analyze and Build of the project an
appropriate message is displayed. In this case you have to adapt the application manually.
(For example in case of Modicon M340 by selecting Mixed topological and State RAM in
the Memory Tab, page 1218 of the modules and subsequently fixing the related variables).

Import Log File

After import a message informs you that the conversion and import is finished and reminds
you to have a look at the import log file.
The import log file is stored in the root directory of your application.
You have to Analyze and Build the project.

33003101.26 111
 Global project management

Transferring the project between the terminal and the

PLC
At a Glance
Transferring a project enables you to:
• copy the current project from the terminal to the memory of the current PLC (PLC
whose address is selected)
• copy the embedded project from the current PLC to the terminal. It then becomes the
current Control Expert project
NOTE:
When you manage a PLC (controller) as part of a system project (Topology Manager),
you cannot transfer the project from the PLC to the terminal by using Control Expert
editor; the corresponding commands are disabled.
• For controllers of the M340, MC80, and Momentum platforms, transfer (upload) the
project from the controller to the system project by using the Topology Manager.
• For controllers of the M580, Quantum, and Premium platforms, transfer the project
from the PLC to the terminal by using Control Expert Classic.

Transfer from the terminal to the PLC

Perform these actions to transfer the current project to a PLC:

Step Action

1 Use the PLC > Set address command to define the current PLC to which you would like to
transfer your project, page 87.

2 Change to online mode, page 85.

3 Activate the PLC > Transfer Project to PLC command, which displays the corresponding screen,
page 114.

4 Check the PLC Run after Transfer box if you want the PLC to switch automatically to Run after the
transfer.
5 Activate the Transfer command.

112 33003101.26
Global project management

Step Action

6
If the project has not been generated in advance, the screen below allows you to generate it before
the transfer (Rebuild All then Transfer) or interrupt the transfer (Cancel Transfer).

7 The transfer progress is displayed on screen. At any moment, you can interrupt the transfer by
using the Esc key, which invalidates the PLC project.

Note: In the event that the project is transferred to a Flash Eprom memory card, the transfer can
take several minutes.

Transfer from the PLC to the terminal

Perform these actions to transfer the contents of the PLC to the terminal:

Step Action

1 Use the PLC > Set address command to define the current PLC to which you would like to
transfer your project, page 87.

2 Change to online mode, page 85.

3 Activate the PLC > Transfer Project from PLC command to display the corresponding screen,
page 115.

4 The transfer progress is displayed on screen. At any moment, you can interrupt the transfer by
using the Esc key.

33003101.26 113
 Global project management

Terminal to PLC transfer screen

The screen used to transfer the project from the terminal to the PLC is shown below:

Description of the parameters

The following table describes the parameters of the Terminal to PLC transfer screen.

Parameter Description

PC Project Identification field for the project in the terminal:

• Name
• Version
• Last Build (date and time the executable was last generated)
• SourceSafeSignature: an SHA256 algorithmic fingerprint of the safe
application (for safety PLCs).
NOTE: An icon located between the SourceSafeSignature entries in the PC
Project field and the Overwritten PLC Project field indicates a comparison
between the two values:

• indicates the values are DIFFERENT.

• indicates the values are EQUAL.

• No icon indicates there is no application in the PLC.

Overwritten PLC Identification field for the project in the embedded in the PL. This project will be
Project overwritten or updated by the transfer:
• Name
• Version
• Last Build (date and time the executable was last generated)

114 33003101.26
Global project management

Parameter Description

• SourceSafeSignature: an SHA256 algorithmic fingerprint of the safe

application (for safety PLCs).

PLC Run after Transfer If this box is checked, the PLC changes to Run after the transfer.

Transfer Transfer command.

Cancel Command used to cancel the transfer.

PLC to Terminal transfer screen

The screen used to transfer the project from the PLC to the terminal is shown below:

Description of the parameters

The following table describes the parameters of the PLC to terminal transfer screen.

Parameter Description

Overwritten PC Project Identification field for the project in the terminal: name, version, date and time the
executable was last generated. This project will be overwritten or updated by the
transfer.
PLC Project Identification field for the project embedded in the PLC: name, version, date and
time the executable was last generated.

Transfer Project from Transfer command: the project is transferred.

PLC
Cancel Command used to cancel the transfer.

33003101.26 115
 Global project management

Incompatibility during a transfer

During transfer from the terminal to the PLC, incompatibility between the current project and
the PLC configuration triggers display of a message.
During transfer from the PLC to the terminal, incompatibility between the project embedded
in the PLC and the version of Control Expert also triggers display of a message.

Update of Upload Information

Upload Information
Upload information consists of:
• Project upload information: graphic code for languages with LD contacts and chart of
FBD function blocks, symbols of located and unlocated variables,
• Comments: variables, code sections, project, DFBs, etc.,
• Animation tables.
These are always saved when a project backup is performed on the terminal (STU or STA
file), but may or may not be included with the executable code, page 548 when building the
project which is then transferred to the PLC.

Use of Upload Information

Upload information should only be loaded in the PLC where this is strictly necessary, in
order to optimize the available memory size and save this for the executable code, and also
to improve the performance of modifications in online mode.
In the coding and debug phase, this information is generally present on the workstation
and therefore does not need to be transferred to the PLC, thus achieving a real gain in
performance.
In the maintenance and operation phase, this information should be included in the PLC
where the application needs to be restored on empty terminals (i.e. that do not have the
project STU or STA file). However, in addition to the gain in memory space, the absence of
the Upload information also forms a protection against reading and writing.

Choice of Upload Information

By default, the upload information necessary to rebuild the project program is not embedded
in the PLC.

116 33003101.26
Global project management

You can choose the information to have embedded:

• The information necessary for uploading the project,
• Comments (variables and types),
• The animation tables.
To access the Upload information, page 548 select: Tools > Project Settings > PLC
Embedded data

Update
When making modifications in online mode, it is possible to choose between 2 modes of
updating the Upload information:
• Automatic update; in which case the update of Upload information is implicit on each
build,
• Update on user request; in which case the update is performed explicitly, by the clicking
PLC > Update Upload Information.
The way in which upload information is updated is chosen in the Project Settings screen,
page 588 and is accessible by: Tools > Project Settings > PLC Embedded data
NOTE: The upload information is updated implicitly whenever a terminal project is
transferred to the PLC (where this is included with the executable code).
On connection, a message asks you to confirm the update of the Upload information, if
this has not already been performed.

Sending a command to the PLC

At a Glance
The Run/Stop and Init commands enable the project to be controlled from the terminal
when it is stored on a target PLC:
• Run/Stop launches or stops execution of the project, (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
• Init initializes the project.

Procedure
You must perform the following actions to control the PLC:

33003101.26 117
 Global project management

Step Action

1 Use the PLC > Set address command to define the target PLC that you wish to control, page
87.
2 Change to online mode.

3 Activate the PLC > Run/Stop command to launch or stop execution of the project or the PLC >
Init command to initialize the project.

4 Confirm the command.

Project Backup Management for Modicon M340

At a Glance
Automatic and manual accesses are carried out between the Schneider BMX RMS •••••
memory card and Control Expert or the PLC to:
• restore a project in the PLC
• save the PLC project on the memory card
• compare the PLC project and the memory card project

NOTICE
INOPERABLE MEMORY CARD
Do not format the memory card with a non-Schneider tool. The memory card needs a
structure to contain program and data. Formatting with another tool destroys this
structure.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Restore Function
The restore function is carried out as follows:
• Automatically:
◦ after a power cycle
◦ on a warm start
◦ on a cold start
• Manually, using the Control Expert command PLC > Project Backup... > Backup
Restore.

118 33003101.26
Global project management

NOTE:
• When you insert the memory card in run or stop mode, power cycle to restore the
project on the PLC.
• If the application contained in the memory card includes the RUN AUTO option,
then the PLC will automatically restart in RUN mode with this application as soon as
the inserted memory card content is restored to the PLC.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED BEHAVIOUR OF APPLICATION
Ensure that the right user application is contained in the memory card before inserting it
into the PLC.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Save Function
The save function is carried out as follows:
• Automatically, after:
◦ a download, if the memory card is present and not write-protected
◦ online modification, if the memory card is present and not write-protected
◦ detection of a system bit %S66 rising edge
• Manually, using the command PLC > Project Backup... > Backup Save.
NOTE: If you remove the memory card when the backup is in progress, the program on
the memory card is lost. With system bit %S65 you can disable processor access to the
memory card.
If the memory card is not present or write-protected, the download in Processor memory
is allowed but the online modification is not allowed.

Compare Function
You can compare your project with the one contained on the memory card. To do so, use the
command PLC > Project Backup... > Compare.

33003101.26 119
 Global project management

Memory Card State and Diagnostic

Control Expert and the PLC front panel display the status of the memory card:

Display on Icon/LED Description

State
Status bar at Project on memory card is different from PLC project.
bottom of Control
Expert
Memory card is not present on the PLC or is inoperable.

no icon Project in memory card is equivalent to PLC project.

LED on bottom of On Access to the memory card is enabled.

memory card slot
Flashing Activity between the memory card and the PLC.

Off Access to the memory card is disabled. You can remove the memory card.

CARDERR LED on On Memory card is missing or memory card is not detected, or project on
PLC front panel memory card is different from PLC project.

Off Memory card is detected, and project in memory card is equivalent to PLC
project.

Project backup for Premium

At a Glance
Certain PLCs Premium allow you to save the project program contained in the executable
zone (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) (RAM) of the PLC in the backup memory zone.
The available backup memory card is the TSX MFP B 096K.
Control Expert enables the use of these functions:
• Comparison
• Automatic restore (shaded field) when the PLC powers up, if the project program is
different
• Save PLC program on the memory card
• Clearing of card data
NOTE: The backup function is not available when the project is already being executed
on a RAM or EPROM memory card.

120 33003101.26
Global project management

Comparison
You can compare your project with the one contained in the backup memory. To do this,
perform the following actions:

Step Action

1 Activate the command PLC > Project backup > Compare....

Result: A dialog box appears informing you of the result of the comparison.

Backup Memory Card → RAM Transfer

You Must Perform the Following Actions to Restore the Contents of the Backup Memory to
the Executable Zone of the PLC:

Step Action

1 Set the WP switch on the backup memory card to ON (lock).

2 Insert the backup memory card into the PLC.

3 Result: The memory card automatically transfers the contents of the backup memory to the
executable zone of the PLC.

NOTE: Inserting the memory card in its slot triggers a cold start of the PLC.

RAM → backup memory card transfer

You must perform the following actions to transfer the project program to the backup
memory:

Step Action

1 Set the WP switch on the backup memory card to OFF (unlock).

2 Insert the backup memory card into the PLC.

3 Activate the command PLC > Project backup > Save....

Result: A command confirmation screen is displayed.

4 Confirm with OK.

5 Remove the backup memory card from the PLC.

6 Set the WP switch on the backup memory card to ON (lock).

33003101.26 121
 Global project management

Clearing procedure
You must perform the following actions to clear the backup memory:

Step Action

1 Set the WP switch on the backup memory card to OFF (unlock).

2 Insert the backup memory card into the PLC.

3 Activate the command PLC > Project backup > Clear....

Result: A command confirmation screen is displayed.

4 Confirm with OK.

Save/Restore Data Between a File and the PLC

At a Glance
The data transfer function allows you to store the value of the following data (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in a
file:
• boolean-type located data: %Mi
• word-type located data: %MWi
• unlocated variables
• function block instances
There are 2 types of data files:
• DAT:
◦ Saving PLC data to a *.DAT file is allowed for all previous data types. *.DAT contains
only data blocks.
◦ Restoring all data blocks from a *.DAT file to the PLC is allowed if the project has not
been built since the Save was done.If a build was done, only BOOL and WORD
located data (%Mi and %MWi) are restored.

122 33003101.26
Global project management

• DTX:
◦ Saving PLC data to a *.DTX file is allowed for all previous data types. In addition,
application references (at the time of the Save) are saved.
NOTE: I/O and device DDT objects cannot be saved in DTX data files.
◦ Restoring data from a *.DTX file is allowed even if the application has been built and/
or data has been modified since the Save was done. Compatibility Rules for Restore
Using a *.DTX File, page 127 explains the restoration process and the types of data
that cannot be restored.
NOTE: It is recommended to convert any *.DAT files to *.DTX file by restoring the *.
DAT file and then saving using the *.DTX format.
NOTE: The data transfer function can be used for migrating from different PLC range.
You can save M340 or Premium data to a *.DTX file and restore to M580 PLC the *.DTX
file.

CAUTION
LOSS OF DATA
Before transferring unlocated variables and function block instances data to the PLC,
ensure that your application is in a compatible state with the saved data.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Procedure for Saving PLC Data

If the PLC is in RUN mode, the saving of data from the PLC to a file may need several
application cycles and the data, in the file, may be de-synchronized, which may affect
application execution during restoration.
NOTE: On forced bits, value is saved but the forcing status (F) is not saved.

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED BEHAVIOUR OF APPLICATION
Before saving the data, verify the impact of the save on the application execution.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

You must perform the following actions to save the data from the PLC to a file:

33003101.26 123
 Global project management

Step Action

1 To enable the menu item Save Data from PLC to File, the following must be true:
• The PLC is loaded with an application.
• The PLC is in RUN or STOP mode.
• Control Expert is running and is connected to the PLC.
• The Application built in Control Expert is equal to those in the PLC.
• The Application in Control Expert is in the built state.

2 Activate the PLC > Save Data from PLC to File command.
Result: The Save Data from PLC to File dialog (CPU in STOP mode) opens.

For more information, refer to the corresponding screen, page 125.

3 Using the check boxes, select the data type(s) to be transferred. For located data you must also
define the range of data to be transferred by entering the start and end address of the range.

4 Define the path and the name of the file to which the data is to be saved.

5 Confirm with OK.

124 33003101.26
Global project management

Data Transfer Dialog for Transfers to a File

The Save Data from PLC to File dialog (CPU in RUN mode) is shown below:

The following table shows the parameters of the Save Data from PLC to File dialog.

Parameter Description

Content This field is used to define the type and range of the data to be transferred.

The checkboxes are used to define the type of located data. From: and To: fields are
used to define the range for located data.

Default values:
• %M and %MW checkboxes are checked
• %M and %MW range is set to the PLC values
• Unlocated variables instances and Function block instances (DFB and
EFB) are not checked

To file This field is used to define the path and name of the file.

Browse This button can be used to browse the disk to define the file name and path.

Procedure for Restoring Data to PLC

If forced bits are detected in the PLC, forcing status (F) and value will not be updated in the
PLC.

33003101.26 125
 Global project management

If the PLC is in RUN mode, the restoring of data to the PLC from a file may need several
application cycles and the data may be de-synchronized, which may affect application
execution.

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED BEHAVIOUR OF APPLICATION
Before restoring the data, verify the impact of the store on the application execution.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

You must perform the following actions to restore the data from a file to the PLC:

Step Action

1 To enable the menu item Restore Data from File to PLC, the following must be true:
• The PLC is loaded with an application.
• The PLC is in RUN or STOP status.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended to do the transfer with the PLC in STOP mode.
• Control Expert is running and is connected to the PLC.
• The Application built in Control Expert may be different than those in the PLC.
• The Application in Control Expert is built state.

2 Activate the PLC > Restore Data from File to PLC command.
If the PLC is in RUN status, a message is displayed allowing to perform the transfer while the PLC
is still operating (Ok) or to cancel the transfer.

If forced bits are detected in the PLC, a message is displayed allowing to perform the transfer (Ok)
or to cancel the transfer.

126 33003101.26
Global project management

Step Action

Result: The Restore Data from File to PLC dialog opens.

3 Select the file to be restored to the PLC.

4 Confirm with Open.

5 A confirmation message is asking you if you want to proceed with the transfer.

Compatibility Rules for Restore Using a *.DTX File

At a Glance
The DTX file allows a restore even if there have been changes in the application since the
save was done.
When a restore is performed, if the build number of the application is greater than the
version of the DTX file, Control Expert analyses the content of the file to verify the
compatibility with variables of the PLC application.
The following tables present the rules followed for restoring variables when there is a
difference between the *.DTX file and the PLC application. This condition results from
building the application after the data was saved in the *.DTX file.

33003101.26 127
 Global project management

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED BEHAVIOR OF APPLICATION
Before restoring the data, verify the impact of the store on the application execution.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

PLC versions compatibility (Premium, Quantum , M340, M580)

As memory block allocation is different on PLCs version <= 2.0 or > 2.0:
• If the DTX file has been created from a PLC version 2.0 or < 2.0, data cannot be
restored on PLC version 2.1 or later.
• If the DTX file has been created from a PLC version 2.1 or later, data cannot be
restored on PLC version 2.0 or < 2.0.

Simple Variable Compatibilities

The following table presents the rules followed for restoring simple variables:

Cas- Data File Contents PLC Application Restore Behavior Control Expert Message
e Contents
1 Var1 Deleted Var1 is not restored Var1: this variable no
longer exists.

2 - New Var2 Var2 is kept in memory -

3 Var3 Var3 was renamed The restore CANNOT BE Var3: this variable no
into Var3-3 (name PERFORMED due to technical longer exists.
changed) limitations.

Var3 is deleted and Var3-3 is a

new variable.
4 Var4 is a simple Var4 was changed to The Var4 is converted into the Var4: type of the variable is
compatible type. a different simple new type, which has the same changed (from TYPE1 to
type. Source value is value as source. TYPE2). Types are
compatible with compatible.
target type.

128 33003101.26
Global project management

Cas- Data File Contents PLC Application Restore Behavior Control Expert Message
e Contents
5 Var5 is a simple Var5 was changed to The restore CANNOT BE Var5: type of the variable is
compatible type. a different simple PERFORMED. changed (from TYPE1 to
type. Source value is TYPE2) but value may not
not compatible with Var5 is converted into a different be compatible.
target type. type (the target) and its value is
either: +
• longer than target type Var5: value not compatible
• not compatible with target for conversion between
type TYPE1 and TYPE2.

6 Var6 is a simple Var6 was changed Restore of original value Var6: type of the variable is
incompatible type. into another type. CANNOT BE PERFORMED. changed (from TYPE1 to
Var6 retains its application value. TYPE2). But types are not
compatible.

Structured Variable Compatibilities

The following table presents the rules followed for restoring structured variables:

Cas- Data File Contents PLC Application Restore Behavior Control Expert Message
e Contents
DDT Types

7 Var7 is a DDT type. Var7 was changed to The restore CANNOT BE Var7: type of the variable is
a simple type. PERFORMED because type is changed (from TYPE1 to
not compatible. TYPE2). But types are not
compatible.

8 Var8 is a simple type. Var8 was changed to The restore CANNOT BE Var8: type of the variable is
a DDT type. PERFORMED because type is changed (from TYPE1 to
not compatible. TYPE2). But types are not
compatible.

9 Var9 is a DDT type. Var9 is changed to The restore CANNOT BE Var9: type of the variable is
another DDT type. PERFORMED because type is changed (from TYPE1 to
not compatible. TYPE2). But types are not
compatible.

10 Var10 is a DDT type. The DDT type has Make the mapping of the field Var10.SubField1: … (see
changed. (see the cases from 1 to 9 and cases 1 to 9 and 11 to 16).
cases from 11 to 16 for array
type sub-fields).

ARRAY Types

11 Var11 is an array. Var11 is an array of Transfer the data file values. The -
the same type, same rest of the longer application
starting index but array is kept.
longer.

33003101.26 129
 Global project management

Cas- Data File Contents PLC Application Restore Behavior Control Expert Message
e Contents
12 Var12 is an array. Var12 is an array of Transfer the data file values until Var12: length of ARRAY…
the same type, same target array is full. The rest of the array (range # 2) is shorter.
starting index but source array is lost. Last indexes will be lost.
shorter.
13 Var13 is an array. Var13 is an array of The restore CANNOT BE Var13: low bound of
the same type, but PERFORMED because starting ARRAY… array (range #2)
starting index is indexes must be identical. has changed. Cannot
lower or a different restore.
type. Ending index is
the same
14 Var14 is an array. Var14 is an array of The restore CANNOT BE Var14: high bound of
the same type, but PERFORMED because starting ARRAY… array (range #2)
starting index is indexes must be identical. has changed. Cannot
higher or a different restore.
type. Ending index is
the same
15 Var15 is an array. Var15 is an array of The restore CANNOT BE Var15: bounds of ARRAY…
the same type, but PERFORMED because starting array (range #2) have
the lower and upper indexes must be identical. changed. Cannot restore.
indexes are shifted.
The length is the
same.
16 Var16 is an array. The type of the array See cases 1 to 10 and 7 to 10. See cases 4 to 10 and 11 to
has changed 16.

Elementary Type Compatibilities

BOOL, BYTE, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, WORD, and DWORD are compatible types if no lost
of value are detected.
Examples are:
• a DINT variable can be changed into an INT variable if only the 2 first bytes of the DINT
are used
• an UINT or UDINT variable can be changed into an INT variable if the value is
compatible.
REAL, STRING, TOD, TIME, DATE, and DT are not compatible types.
The following table presents the compatibility between the elementary types:

130 33003101.26
Global project management

TOD

TIME

DATE
INT

UDINT

DWORD

REAL

DT
BOOL

EBOOL

BYTE

UINT

WORD

DINT

STRING
BOOL YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
EBOOL YES NO PDL PDL NO PDL PDL NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
BYTE NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
INT NO NO PDL PDL YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
UINT NO NO PDL PDL YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO

WORD NO NO PDL YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO

DINT NO NO PDL PDL PDL PDL PDL YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
UDINT NO NO PDL PDL PDL PDL PDL YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
DWORD NO NO PDL PDL PDL PDL YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
REAL NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

STRING NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
TOD NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
TIME NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
DATE NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
DT NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

NOTE: PDL means Possible Data Loss.

Compatibility of Aliases
The following table presents the rules followed for restoring aliases:

Cas- Data File Contents PLC Application Restore Behavior Control Expert Message
e Contents
1 Map1 is unlocated. Map1 is located on % Value of the data file for Map1 is Map1: restored at %
MW100. set to %MW100. MW100
%MW100 is used.
2 Map2 is located on % Map2 is no longer Value of data file for Map2 is set Map2: restored into
MW100. located on %MW100, at the new address of Map2 unlocated data area.
%MW100 is used. (unlocated data area).
%MW100: keeps current
%MW100 of the application value.
keeps its current value.

3 Map3 is located on % Map3 is located on % Restores the value of %MW100 Map2: restored from %
MW100. MW200. at address %MW 200. MW100 to %MW200.

%MW200 is used %MW100 is used.

33003101.26 131
 Global project management

Cas- Data File Contents PLC Application Restore Behavior Control Expert Message
e Contents

%MW100 of the application %MW100: keeps current

keeps its value. value.

4 Map4 is located on % Map4 is no longer Restore CANNOT BE Map4: value at address %

MW100, but %MW located on %MW100, PERFORMED because the MW100 is not available.
area not exported. %MW100 is used. source value is not in data file.

5 Map5 is unlocated Map5 is located on % Restore CANNOT BE Map5: value at address %

but in an area not MW100. PERFORMED because the MW100 is not available.
exported. source value is not in data file.

6 Map6 is located at % Map6 is now located Restore CANNOT BE Map6: value at address %
MW100 and % on %MW200 and % PERFORMED because the MW100 is not available.
MW200 is used, but MW100 is used. source value is not in data file.
%MW area is not
exported.

7 Map7 does not exist Map7 is located at % Restore CANNOT BE Map7: mapped variable
or is an alias. MW100. PERFORMED to avoid the lost of that didn't exist at the file
the current variable. generation or was an alias
%MW100 value not
restored.
8 Topological - - MapVar: variable mapped
addresses, %CH, % on an unauthorized
SW, etc. address (%CH0.2.0).

Restoration of FB Instances and Other Variables

The following table presents the rules followed for restoring certain special variables:

Type of Entity Control Expert Message

FB Instances: for all fields (input, output, I/O, private, -

public) that is not a pointer, the fields are restored or
not by using the rules above. If any field cannot be
restored, the FB Instance is not restored

SFC variables cannot be restored. Step1: SFC types (SFCSTEP_STATE) are not allowed
for restore

Step1: SFC types (SFCCHART_STATE) are not

allowed for restore
Hidden variables cannot be restored. -

IODDT variables cannot be restored. IOVar: IODDT types (T_ANA...) are unknown so not
allowed for restore.
Device DDTs cannot be restored. DevDDT: Device DDT types (T_...) are not allowed for
restore.

132 33003101.26
Global project management

Restoration of Forced Variables

NOTE: If forced bits are detected in the PLC before performing the restore data, forcing
status (F) and value are not updated in the PLC after the restore data is performed.
The following table presents the rules followed for restoring forced variables:

Variable Value when the save data Value before performing the Value in the application after
from PLC to file is restore data from file to PLC the restore data is
performed performed

Located 0 1 0
Located 0 forced to 1 forced to 1
Unlocated 0 1 0
Unlocated 0 forced to 1 forced to 1

Located 1 0 1
Located forced to 1 0 1(1)

Unlocated 1 0 1
Unlocated forced to 1 0 1(1)

Located 1 forced to 0 forced to 0

Located forced to 1 0 1(1)

Unlocated 1 forced to 0 forced to 0

Unlocated forced to 1 0 1(1)

Located forced to 0 1 0(1)

Located forced to 1 forced to 0 forced to 0

Unlocated forced to 0 1 0(1)

Unlocated forced to 1 forced to 0 forced to 0

(1) The restored value is not forced.

33003101.26 133
 Global project management

Transferring Current Values

At a Glance
The functions below apply to the following variables:
• Located and unlocated variables
• Public and Privates variables of DFBs

Update Init Value with Current Value

The Update Init value with Current Value function is used to replace the initial values in
the PLC of these variables with their current values if their Save attribute is checked.
When the initial values are updated in the PLC, a "*" is displayed in the status bar to indicate
that the initial values in the PLC are different from the initial values displayed in the variable
editor.
Use PLC > Update Init Values with Current Values to activate this function.

Update Local Init Values with PLC Init Values

When the Initial values have been modified by the function Update Init value with Current
Value or by using %S94 in the application, the Update Local Init Values with PLC Init
Values function updates the initial values on the PC in the variable editor.
After using this function "*" is no longer displayed in the status bar.
Use PLC > Update Local Init Values with PLC Init Values to activate this function.
NOTE: to be taken in account in the code a build change is needed.
NOTE: when disconnecting the PLC from Control Expert, to update the STU file with the
same values as the PLC, you have to answer Yes, confirm modification, backup the PLC
project, connect the PLC again, make a build changes and save the STU file.

Memory usage
At a Glance
The memory usage function is used to view:

134 33003101.26
Global project management

• the physical distribution of the PLC memory (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) (internal memory and memory
card)
• the space taken up in the memory by a project (data, program, configuration, system)
It can also be used to reorganize the memory where possible.
NOTE: The memory usage screen is not available in simulation mode. This screen is
only available in standard mode when you have built the application.
If the application has been built and if it is in NOT BUILT state due to a program
modification, the screen is accessible, but it corresponds to the application built
previously. Modifications will be taken into account at the next build.

Procedure
Perform these actions to access the memory usage details of the PLC:

Step Action

1 Activate the PLC > Memory Consumption... command, which displays the corresponding screen.
The memory usage statistics of a project can only be accessed if you have generated its
executable in advance.
2 If you want to reorganize the memory to optimize it, activate the Pack command.

33003101.26 135
 Global project management

Memory usage screen Modicon M580

The memory usage screen is shown below:

136 33003101.26
Global project management

Memory usage screen Modicon M340

The memory usage screen is shown below:

33003101.26 137
 Global project management

Memory usage screen Premium/Quantum

The memory usage screen of a PLC with a memory card and data storage is shown below. If the
PLC does not have a memory card, only the information relating to the internal memory is
displayed.

Description of the parameters

The following information fields are available:

138 33003101.26
Global project management

Parameter Description

User Data This field indicates the memory space (in words) taken up by user data (objects
relating to configuration):
• Data: located data associated with the processor (%M, %MW, %S, %SW, etc.)
or the input/output modules,
• Declared Data: unlocated data (declared in the data editor) saved after power
cut.
• Unsaved Declared Data: unlocated data (declared in the data editor) not saved
after power cut (available for the Hot Standby CPU BMEP586040).

User Program This field indicates the memory space (in words) taken up by the project program:
• Constants: static constants associated with the processor (%KW) and the input/
output modules; initial data values,
• Executable code: executable code of the project program, EFs, EFBs and DFB
types,
• Upload information: information for uploading a project (graphic code of
languages, symbols, etc.).

Other This field indicates the memory space (in words) taken up by other data relating to the
configuration and the project structure:
• Configuration: other data relating to configuration (Page0 for a Quantum PLC,
hardware configuration, software configuration),
• System: data used by the operating system (task stack, catalogs, etc.),
• Diagnostic: information relating to process or system diagnostics, diagnostics
buffer,
• Data Dictionary: Dictionary of symbolized variables with their characteristic
(address, type....)
• Data Storage: file and data storage (only for Premium and Quantum).

Internal Memory This field shows the organization of the PLC's internal memory. It also indicates the
memory space available (Total), the largest possible contiguous memory space
(Greatest) and the level of fragmentation (due to online modifications).

Cartridge A / Only for Premium and Quantum, this field shows the organization of the memory
Cartridge B cards. It also indicates the memory space available (Total), the largest possible
contiguous memory space (Greatest) and the level of fragmentation (due to online
modifications).

Pack This command is used to reorganize the memory structure.

Memory re-organization
Memory re-organization is activated using the Pack command, page 145.
Memory re-organization can be performed in online or offline mode (Even if the PLC is in
Run or in Stop).
NOTE: Certain blocks cannot be moved in online mode. You will attain a lower level of
fragmentation by re-organizing the memory in offline mode.

33003101.26 139
 Global project management

Data Memory Protection

Introduction
The data memory protection contributes to the protection of data from a modification request
in monitoring mode.
The data memory protection is effective:
• off-line, or
• in monitoring mode, or
• in programming mode when project status is DIFFERENT.
NOTE: Modification of a variable with the reinforced protection is only possible when
Control Expert is connected in programming mode and project status is EQUAL.
A variable with the reinforced protection can only be modified by the program. Any
modification of a variable with the reinforced protection in monitoring mode via Control
Expert language editor, animation table and so on is not possible. This is the same behavior
for external tools (HMI, SCADA, …).
NOTE: The data memory protection settings can only be modified off-line. Online
modification is not effective.
The data protection applies to the following data:
• Located data
◦ A range of %M and %MW
◦ System data %S and %SW
◦ Input / output data
• Unlocated data
◦ Elementary unlocated data
◦ Structured unlocated data
◦ Safety unlocated data

NOTICE
COMMUNICATION LIMITATION
Do not activate the data protection function on a variable or range if it needs to be written
by means other than the program.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

140 33003101.26
Global project management

CPU Firmware Limitation

The data memory protection feature is supported by:
• M580 CPU with OS version V3.20 or later
• M340 CPU with OS version V3.30 or later
NOTE: Replacing a CPU to an earlier version than respectively V3.20 for M580 and
V3.30 for M340 is only possible if the current project setting Data memory protect is not
activated.

Protection Activation
Before any action on the data memory protection, you must activate this feature in your
project settings.
In the Control Expert main window, click Tools > Project Setting > PLC embedded data.
Then select the Data memory protect box and click Apply.

Protection of Located Data

The data protection function applies to the following located data:
• A range of %M and %MW(1)
• System data %S and %SW
• Input / output data:
◦ Local I/O objects (LIO)
◦ Remote I/O objects (EIO)
◦ Distributed I/O objects (DIO): with a topological vision or with a DDT/DDDT vision
(1) Array variables which are mapped on a %MW range must be entirely inside or entirely
outside of the %MW range with the reinforced protection.
The data memory protection function is enabled in the CPU configuration window: Project >
Configuration > PLC Bus > CPU.
NOTE: The current project setting Data memory protect must be activated.
For the procedure of the located data protection enforcement, please refer to Protecting
Located Data, page 1351.

33003101.26 141
 Global project management

Mapping Address Protection

The properties of a located variable have priority on the properties of an unlocated variable.
Thus, the unlocated variable that is mapped on a located address, automatically takes the
protection of this address. The protection of this unlocated variable is reinforced the same
way as that of the located variable to which it is mapped.
Depending on the type of the located variable to which the unlocated variable is mapped,
the following protection enforcement of the mapping address is applied:
• On %MW/%M flat: the mapping address is not modifiable.
The attribute with the reinforced protection depends on the %MWi/%M protect
configuration
• On %SW/%S: the mapping address is not modifiable.
The attribute with the reinforced protection depends on the %SWi/%Si protect
configuration
• On a topological object: the mapping address is not modifiable.
The attribute with the reinforced protection depends on the I/O protect configuration
This is an automatic reinforced protection which cannot be modified in the Data Editor
window.

Data Protect Attribute

The Data Protect attribute is used to reinforce protection of an unlocated data in the Data
Editor window.
This attribute is enabled if:
• The variable is not mapped to any located address; and
• The variable is not managed; and
• The variable is not a subfield of a structure (DDT, array EFB instance, DFB instance);
and
• The variable is not a Device DDT; and
• The variable is not a constant
In all other cases the Data Protect attribute is disabled.

Protection of Unlocated Data

General Description
The data protection function applies to the following unlocated data:

142 33003101.26
Global project management

• Elementary
• Structured
• Safety
The unlocated data memory protection function is enabled in the Data Editor window. By
default, unlocated data are not protected.
NOTE: The current project setting Data memory protect must be activated.
The following particular cases must be considered when reinforcing protection of unlocated
data:
• An alias variable takes the same protection as the aliased variable
• A reference variable has always the reinforced protection; it is not affected by the
protection of the referenced variable
• The data protection can also be applied to DDT, Device DDT and IODDT data; and it is
enabled in the I/O protection check box in the CPU configuration window
The data memory protection function is also available for the Program Unit data:
• Input data:
◦ The data memory protection is applied to the input data if there is no effective
parameter on it
◦ Input data becomes “Read” when an effective parameter is set
• Output data:
◦ The data memory protection is not applied to the output data
◦ Output data becomes “Read” when an effective parameter is set
• Input/output data takes the protection of its effective parameter
Protecting Elementary Unlocated Data
The protection of unlocated elementary data can be reinforced individually. The required
modifications are done respectively for each element, one by one.
Protecting Structured Unlocated Data
The protection of structures of unlocated data can be reinforced globally. The required
modification is done once for the entire structure and applies to all its elements (all subfields
except subfields which are read-only by intrinsic access right).
The data protection function applies to the following structures of unlocated data:
• DDT
• Device DDT
• IODDT
• Array
• EFB instance

33003101.26 143
 Global project management

• DFB instance
NOTE: The protection enforcement of DDT, Device DDT and IODDT unlocated data can
be enabled in the I/O protection check box of the CPU configuration window.
Protecting Safety Unlocated Data
In safety applications, the data protection function applies to the following unlocated data:
• Global variables
• Process resource data:
◦ Input variables (with or without an effective parameter)
◦ Output variables (with or without an effective parameter)
◦ Private variables)
◦ FB Instances
◦ DDT and device DDT
• Safe resource data:
◦ Input variables (with or without an effective parameter)
◦ Output variables (with or without an effective parameter)
◦ Private variables)
◦ Safe FB Instances
◦ Safe DDT and device DDT

Procedure of Reinforcing Protection of Unlocated Data

Follow the procedure below to define unlocated data for which you need to reinforce the
protection:

Step Action

1 In the Control Expert main window, activate the data memory protection feature: click Tools > Project
Setting > PLC embedded data.

Then select the Data memory protect box and click Apply.

2 In the Control Expert Project Browser, double-click Variables & FB Instances to open the Data
Editor window, or click Tools > Data Editor in the Control Expert toolbar.

3 In the Data Protect column, select the boxes corresponding to data for which you need to reinforce
the protection.
NOTE: When you select the Data Editor attribute of a structured unlocated variable, this action
applies to all the subfields of the selected structure.

144 33003101.26
Global project management

NOTE: The unlocated variable that is mapped on a located address automatically takes
the protection of this address. Thus, the protection of this unlocated variable becomes
reinforced the same way as that of the located variable to which it is mapped.

Function Pack for Memory

At a Glance
With the Pack command it is possible to reorganize the memory so as to optimize it.
To avoid certain detected errors (Internal Memory full or Cartridge Memory full) when you do
a build after online modifications, the Pack command must be carried out before the online
modifications.
NOTE: When the MEM status of the Status bar becomes Red, it is recommended to
make a Pack command by clicking on the Pack button in the Memory usage screen,
page 138 of the PLC.
The necessity of Packing the internal (or cartridge) memory is evaluated by the PLC
operating system and recommended when:
• the degree of fragmentation (due to many online modifications for instance) of the
memory is becoming high,
• and/or the size of the largest contiguous block of available memory is becoming low
compared to the total size of available memory.
NOTE: for Quantum PLCs, the Pack command can be used for OS version 2.3 or later.

Elements that Require Large Amounts of Memory

Certain project elements and actions consume a large amount of memory:
• configuration with a Cartridge memory:
◦ with a large section,
◦ with several actions in the same SFC section.
• configuration with an internal memory:
◦ with a large DFB instances,
• configuration with an internal memory in a Hot StandBy project:
◦ several DFB instances,
◦ adding or deleting DFB instances,
◦ modifying an SFC section.

33003101.26 145
 Global project management

Procedure
Perform the following actions to use the Pack command:

Step Action

1 Activate the PLC > Memory Consumption: command, which displays the corresponding
screen.
2 In the Internal Memory or Cartridge area check the percentage values of:
• Memory available,
• Fragmentation,
• Greatest / total of Memory available.

3 Check if these values are in the ranges listed in the tables below.

4 If Yes, click on the Pack button.

5 Above the Pack button, if the warning Memory optimization is not terminated, please
continue to pack appears, the Pack button must be clicked again.

6 The Pack function is finished when:

• the Pack button is grayed,
• the Fragmentation field is equal to 0,
• the Greatest value is near the Total Memory available value.

How the PLC detects it’s recommended to make a Pack

command for Internal Memory
The following table shows how the PLC detects it’s recommended to make a Pack
command, regarding the field values in the Internal memory area:

If the Percentage of then if the Percentage of OR if

Memory available Fragmentation
Greatest (1) / Total Available Memory
is, is,
is:
>25% >15% <50%

[15% ... 25%] >10% <80%

<15% >5% <90%

(1) Greatest is the Largest free contiguous block of memory available, this information is given in the Memory
usage screen.

146 33003101.26
Global project management

How the PLC detects it’s recommended to make a Pack

command for Cartridge Memory
The following table shows how the PLC detects it’s recommended to make a Pack
command, regarding the field values in the Cartridge memory area:

If the Percentage of then if the Percentage of OR if

Memory available Fragmentation
Greatest (1) / Total Available Memory
is, is,
is:
>25% >10% <70%

[15% ... 25%] >5% <90%

<15% >3% <95%

(1) Greatest is the Largest free contiguous block of memory available, this information is given in the Memory
usage screen.

Memory Card Access for Modicon M340

Overview
BMX RMS ••••• memory cards are used to save projects, Web pages, and data in general.
They are mainly used when inserted into a PLC. They may also be read with an SD-card
drive or reader.

Memory Card in the PLC

When the memory card is in the Modicon M340, it may be accessed as follows:
• with the PLC, automatically
• with the Control Expert commands, page 118 PLC > Project Backup... > ....
• by programming with the Memory Card File Management EFBs (See Memory Card File
Management in the System library)
• with an FTP, page 148 client (for processors with an Ethernet connection) to manage
files on the memory card

33003101.26 147
 Global project management

Memory Card in an SD-card Drive or Reader

When the memory card is inserted into an SD-card drive or reader, it may be accessed as a
data storage medium (for example, a USB key or hard drive). The files on the memory card
may thus be viewed.
NOTE: In order to read the memory card in an SD-card drive or reader, install the
Reliance driver first. This driver is available on the Automation Device Maintenance CD-
ROM.

Tree Structure of Files on the Memory Card

When the memory card is used in an SD-card drive or reader, or via FTP, its contents are
accessible with a file explorer. The tree structure shown includes three directories:
• DataStorage, which includes all data files from Memory Card File Management EFBs
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System, Block Library)
• Firmware, which includes all files used by the Automation Device Maintenance software
• Web, which includes all Web pages (see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications
Modules and Processors, User Manual)
It is also possible to create directories for personal files.
NOTE: The memory zone for project files is not accessible by users.

FTP and Memory Card for Modicon M340

Overview
With an FTP client, it is possible to transfer files between the memory card in the Modicon
M340 PLC (with an embedded Ethernet port connection), a destination, and/or a source
such as a hard drive or server.
Any FTP client installed on your computer may be used. We recommend using Filezilla or
Microsoft Explorer.
You can transfer:
• data files used by the memory card file management EFBs
• web pages used by the HTTP server
• personal files that are useful for your project

148 33003101.26
Global project management

NOTE: Downloading write-protected files to the memory card can prevent the
Automation Device Maintenance software from properly upgrading the module. Some
FTP clients (for example, the Windows Explorer client) cannot remove write-protected
files from the card. You can delete write-protected files from the card with some FTP
clients (for instance, FileZilla) that are available for free download over the Internet.

Using FTP
The following table describes how to use FTP with Internet Explorer.

Step Action

1 Open Internet Explorer.

2 Input the FTP address in the Address field.

Example: ftp://login:password@FTP_Server_IP_Address
• Login: datastorage
• Password: datadownload
Result: The contents of the memory card are displayed.

3 Copy and/or paste the files between the memory card and your desired location.

The following modules have a time out value of 15 minutes and a maximum number of
eight sessions:
• BMX P34 20•0
• BMX NOE 01•0
• BMX NOC 0401
• BMX NOR 0200
• BME P58 ••••
• BME NOC 03•1
• TSX P57 •634
• TSX ETY •10••
• TSX ETY PORT
• 140 CPU 651 •0
• 140 NOE 771 ••
• 140 NOC 78• 00

33003101.26 149
 Global project management

Project Management with DTMs

At a Glance
The Control Expert Project and Archive files can be saved and opened even if DTMs are not
installed in the DTM Hardware Catalog, page 266.
Building a complete Control Expert project requires that all DTMs in the project are installed.
A DTM audit tool provides a comparison between the version of the project DTMs and the
PC DTMs.

Opening STU and STA Files

Opening the *.stu Project file and *.sta Archive files restores the DTM topology tree and
device configurations.
If there are DTMs in the restored project that are not installed on the host PC, there is no
warning message. Services such as Rebuild all or Check devices, page 290 must be used
to check for uninstalled DTMs.

Saving STU and STA Files

The DTM topology tree and device configurations are saved in these files.

ZEF Files
The DTM topology tree and device configurations is saved and restored in the *.zef import/
export files.

XEF Files
The DTM topology tree and device configurations cannot be saved nor restored in the *.xef
import/export files.

150 33003101.26
Global project management

DTM Audit Tool

A tool is provided to have a clear vision of the DTM versions embedded in a project and the
versions installed on the PC. Depending on the DTM versions compatibility, the tool informs
if the project can be opened and built.
File format compatible with the DTM audit tool:
• *.stu project file
• *.sta archive file
• *.zef import/export file
Launching the DTM audit tool:
• Start > Programs > EcoStruxure Control Expert > DTMAuditTool. The tool can be
launch even if Control Expert is not running.
• In Control Expert, select Tools > DTMAuditTool.
Opening a project (*.stu or *.sta) or an inport/export file (*.zef) in Control Expert: the DTM
audit tool analyzes the DTM versions compatibility.
• If they are compatible, the tool does not display any message.
• If one or more DTM versions are not compatible, the tool displays a table with the DTM
versions and compatibilities.
Then you can choose to cancel the project opening or continue, being informed that
DTM versions are not compatible and that the project cannot be built.
When DTMs are available on Schneider Electric DTM Catalog Server, a link is available to
download and install the required DTM versions. It is then possible to download and install
the DTM from this link.
After download and installation of the DTM, the Control Expert DTM catalog must be
updated following one of these procedures:
• close and open again Control Expert (the DTM catalog is then automatically updated).
• select Tools > Hardware Catalog, select the DTM catalog tab and click on the Update
button.
NOTE: Although DTM from EDS file is already installed on the PC, the DTM Audit tool
informs you to add the missing EDS file to the library and the project cannot be built.
This behavior results from a difference between the Device Name created during the
EDS file import to the DTM Hardware Catalog (with or without the setting New Naming
Convention) and the Device Name used in the DTM browser of your project.
To fix this mismatch:
• Remove the inconsistent EDS file from the DTM Hardware Catalog.
• close and open again Control Expert
• Re-import the EDS file to match the Device Name in the application (with or without the
setting New Naming Convention.

33003101.26 151
 Global project management

• Update the DTM catalog

For more detailed information about removing or importing EDS file, refer to chapter DTM
Hardware Catalog, page 266.

Complete Build Management

Rebuild all project, page 75 (DTM modifications or not) requires that all DTMs in the project
are installed on the PC because the Check devices service is part a complete build.
If any DTMs are not found, a detected error is displayed in 2 places:
• The Build tab in the Output Window
• DTM topology tree

Partial Build Management

The user can choose not to include the DTM configuration in a PCL binary:

A partial project build that does not take into account the DTM configurations does not call
the Check devices service, therefore, this build does not need to have all the DTMs
installed on the PC.

Upload Project
The Control Expert Transfer Project from PLC, page 78 (Upload project) function uploads
the current DTM topology tree and the device configurations stored in the PLC (but not the
information in the Profibus Remote Bus Master and the devices). This function is not the
same as the Load data from device DTM, page 293 service.
Some DTMs have a Compare function that allows comparing the configuration in the device
to the configuration in the PLC.

152 33003101.26
Global project management

Download Project
To use the Control Expert Transfer Project to PLC (Download project) function with DTMs:

Step Action

1 Construct a DTM topology tree.

2 Use the Store to device, page 293 service on each DTM that has a physical device on the
network.
3 Call the Transfer Project to PLC function to download the Control Expert project that includes a
DTM topology tree and device configurations.

33003101.26 153
154 33003101.26
Project browser

Project browser
What’s in This Chapter
Introduction to the project browser........................................... 155
Introduction to the various directories of the project
browser................................................................................. 198
Summaries of the utilities associated with the structure view
and function view ................................................................... 220

Subject of this chapter

This chapter introduces the Control Expert browser that allows you to move around your
project, via the structure view or function view of its directory tree.

Introduction to the project browser

About this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter provides general information on the project browser.

Introduction to the project browser

General points
The project browser allows you to display the contents of a Control Expert project and to
move around its various elements: configuration, data, program, etc. To do this you can
display your project in 2 different ways:
• Structural View,
• Functional View.

Structural view
The structural view displays the directory tree of the Control Expert project and allows you to
navigate within this with direct access:

33003101.26 155
 Project browser

• to the configuration,
• to the DDT and DFB types,
• to the variables (EDT, DDT, DFB and EFB instances),
• to motion functions,
• to communication functions,
• to the program,
• to the animation tables,
• to the operator screens,
• to the project documentation (title page, general information).
The following illustration shows the structural view of a project:

By default, the browser displays the second level of the directory tree. To access the other
levels, you need to expand the directories.
NOTE: The default project directory name is Project. You can change this name by
accessing the project properties dialog box using the Properties command from the
contextual menu.

Functional view
The functional view displays the directory tree of the project, broken down into functional
modules , page 232. This breakdown does not take into account the order of execution of
the program by the PLC.

156 33003101.26
Project browser

The following illustration shows the functional view of a project:

By default, the browser displays the first level of the directory tree. To access the other
levels, you need to expand the directories.

Navigating between the functional view and structural view.

In the toolbar of the project browser you will find the following icons that allow you to display
the various project views:

Allows you to display the structural view of the project.

Allows you to display the functional view of the project.

Allows you to display the structural view and the functional view in series, page 158.

Allows you to display the structural view and the functional view in parallel, page 159.

33003101.26 157
 Project browser

Structural view and functional view of the project

At a Glance
The project browser allows you to simultaneously display the structural view and functional
view of the project. You can choose to display these views:
• in series. Both views are displayed, one next to the other,
• in parallel. Both views are displayed, one above the other.

Display of both views in series

The following illustration shows a series display of the structural view and functional view:

158 33003101.26
Project browser

Display of both views in parallel

The following illustration shows a parallel display of the structure and functional views:

33003101.26 159
 Project browser

The Zoom In and Zoom Out commands

At a Glance
In the functional view and structural view of the project browser, you can display a specific
directory tree level by using the Zoom In command. You can apply this command in a level
below the one you are in. This command is no longer available once you cannot expand the
tree structure any further.
The Zoom Out command allows you to go back to the previous display of the project
browser.

NOTE: The following steps show how to use the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands
with a structural view. These steps can also be used with a functional view.

Displaying a specific level of the directory tree

The following table shows you how to use the Zoom in command in the structural view:

Step Action

1 In the project browser select the directory you wish to display (for example Program).

Result: The element selected appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Zoom In command from the Display menu or from the contextual menu.

160 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

Result: Only the directory selected appears in the structural view (for example Program):

3 From the directory (for example Program) select the directory (for example Sections) that you
wish to display.

Result: The element selected appears in reverse video.

4 Activate the Zoom In command from the Display menu or from the contextual menu.

Result: Only the directory selected appears in the structural view (for example Sections):

Returning to the structural view of the project

The following table shows you how to use the Zoom Out command in the structural view:

33003101.26 161
 Project browser

Step Action

1 In the project browser select the directory from the structural view.

Result: The element selected appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Zoom Out command from the Display menu or from the contextual menu or by

clicking on the icon.

Result: The structural view appears along with the directory tree of the project.

Returning to directory tree level

The following table shows you how to use Zoom Out command in a lower level of the
directory tree of the structural view:

162 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

1 In the project browser select the directory from the structural view (for example Sections).

Result: The element selected appears in reverse video.

Expand the menu using the arrow to the right of the icon.

Result: The menu with the choice of different views appears.

3 In the menu (for example Program) select the structural view to be displayed.

Result: The directory (for example Program) appears in the structural view:

Selecting None displays the entire structural view of the project.

The commands Contract all and Expand all

At a Glance
In the functional view and structural view of the project browser, you can display a specific
directory tree level and its sub-directories by using the Expand all command.
The command Contract all allows you to contract an entire directory.

33003101.26 163
 Project browser

NOTE: The following steps show how to use the Contract all and Expand all
commands with a structural view. These steps can also be used with a functional view.

How to expand a directory

The following table shows you how to use the Expand all command in the structural view:

164 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

1 In the project browser select the directory you wish to expand (for example Program).

Result: the element selected appears in reverse video:

2 Activate the Expand all command from the Display menu or from the contextual menu.

Result: the selected directory is expanded completely:

33003101.26 165
 Project browser

How to contract a directory

The following table shows you how to use the Contract all command in the structural view:

166 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

1 In the project browser select the directory you wish to contract (for example Program).

Result: the element selected appears in reverse video:

2 Activate the Contract all command from the Display menu or from the contextual menu.

Result: the selected directory is contracted:

33003101.26 167
 Project browser

The Goto command

At a Glance
The Goto command allows you to access a desired location in the project browser.
In the functional view or structural view, the levels are not always expanded. The Goto
command allows you to go directly to what you are looking for.

Finding an element
The following table shows you how to use the Goto command in the structural view of the
browser:

Step Action

1 Click the right mouse button on the background of the structural view.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

2 Select the Goto command from the menu.

168 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

Result: The Go to window appears.

3 In the window, double-click the element you want to go to.

Result: The element appears shaded in the structural view (Configuration in the example).

4 In the Goto window confirm your choice with OK.

Elements with the same name

Where one or more elements have the same name (examples: sections). In the Go to
window the element appears with a marker. . The Next command in the Go to window is
unshaded. This allows you to pinpoint one by one the different elements with the same
name when the Go to window is active.

33003101.26 169
 Project browser

Fast access to an element

In order to access an element in the window more quickly in the Go to window, you can use
the Location function. Typing in the first letter of the element gives you access to the
elements beginning with these letters. The following table shows you how to use the
Location function in the structural view of the browser:

Step Action

1 Click the right mouse button on the background of the structural view.

2 Select the Goto command from the menu.

Result: The Go to window appears.

3 In the Location field type the first letter of the element you want to go to.

Result: The element appears in reverse color in the Go to window.

4 In the Go to window confirm your choice with OK.

170 33003101.26
Project browser

User Directory
At a Glance
In the Project directory and in all the directories of the project browser, you can create
hyperlinks, page 1765 and user directories for grouping of hyperlinks.
NOTE: You cannot nest a user directory in a user directory and a hyperlink in a
hyperlink.
The following illustration shows a hyperlink and a user directory in the directory
Program :

33003101.26 171
 Project browser

Creating a User Directory

The following table shows you how to create a user directory in the structural view of the
browser:

Step Action

1 In the project browser select the directory in which you wish to create a user directory.

Result: The element selected appears in reverse video.

2 Select the Add User Directory.. command from the popup menu..

Result: the User Directory Properties window appears:

3 Give the user directory a name in the General tab.

4 In the Comment tab enter the comment associated with the user directory.

5 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Result: The user directory appears in the project browser.

6 You can now create hyperlinks, page 1765 in the directory provided for this purpose.

Project Properties
At a Glance
Whichever view is displayed, you can access the project properties by using the Properties
command from the contextual menu (which can be reached by right-clicking the mouse on
the Project folder). This gives you access to a dialog box which allows you to:
• access information on the current project,
• define certain parameters of the project.

172 33003101.26
Project browser

Description of the Tabs

The dialog box includes the following tabs and actions:

Tab Description

General Name: allows you to define the name of the project.

Type: indicates the type of Control Expert software used.

Libset version: indicates the FB library version used for your current project.

Program & Safety Password setting applies to the following:

Protection • Sections & Program Units: sections password settings, page 187
• Safety(1): safety password settings, page 181

Project & Controller Password setting applies to the following:

Protection
• Application(2): application password settings, page 174
• Firmware(3): firmware password settings, page 185
• Data Storage(4) or Web Diagnostics / Data Storage(5): data storage
password settings, page 189

Identification Allows you to identify the project:

• current version with the option of automatic increment
• creation date
• generation date
• Last rebuild all
• Last partial build
• SourceSafeSignature (safety PACs)
When Automatically incremented is set:
• Major and Minor counters are not active
• Build counter is incremented at build
• Last rebuild All date is updated at Rebuild All
• Last partial build date is updated at Rebuild All and Build Change
When Automatically incremented is not set:
• Major, Minor and Build counters can be incremented manually by the user
• Last rebuild All date is updated at Rebuild All
• Last partial build date is updated at Rebuild All and Build Change
NOTE: Automatically incremented is set by default at project creation. It can
be deactivated by default when the option Auto incrementation of project
version is deselected (menu: Tools > Options > General).

33003101.26 173
 Project browser

Tab Description

Comment Allows a comment to be associated with the project.

1 Only for Modicon M580 Safety CPUs.

2 Except for Modicon Momentum.

3 Only for Modicon M580 CPUs with OS version ≥ 2.00, BME NOC 03••, and BME CXM 0100 modules.

4 Only for Modicon M580 CPUs.

5 Only for Modicon M580 CPUs with firmware version ≥ 4.01.

NOTE: By default, the dialog box is called Properties of Project. If you give the project
another name (myproject for example), this dialog box is called Properties of
myproject.

Application Protection
Overview
Control Expert provides a password mechanism to help guard against unauthorized access
to the application.
Control Expert uses the password when you:
• Open the application in Control Expert.
• Connect to the PAC in Control Expert.
Setting an application password helps prevent unwanted application modification,
download, or opening of application files. The password is stored encrypted in the
application.
In addition to setting the password, you can encrypt the .STU, .STA and .ZEF files. The file
encryption feature in Control Expert helps prevent modifications by any malicious person
and reinforces protection against theft of intellectual property. The file encryption option is
protected by a password mechanism.
NOTE: When a controller is managed as part of a system project, the application
password and file encryption are disabled in Control Expert editor and need to be
managed by using the Topology Manager.

Password Construction
The password construction is based on IEEE Standard 1686–2013 recommendations.

174 33003101.26
Project browser

A password should contain at least 8 characters and should combine as a minimum one
upper-case (A, B, C, …), one lower-case (a, b, c, …), one number, and one non–
alphanumeric character (!, $, %, &, …).
NOTE: when exporting a project not encrypted to a .XEF or a .ZEF file, the application
password is cleared.

New Project Creation

By default a project is not password-protected and application files are not encrypted.
At project creation, the Security enforcement window allows you to:
• Set an application password, or
• Set an application password and apply encryption to your application files. Applying file
encryption also requires setting a password and we recommend setting two different
passwords.
If no password is entered the encryption of application files is not possible. In this case, the
next time you open your Control Expert project, the Password dialog opens. To access your
project, enter no password text, thereby accepting the empty string, and click OK.
Thereafter, you can follow the steps set forth below to set an application password and
enable file encryption.
NOTE: It is possible to create or change an application password at any time.
Setting an application password is mandatory for enabling file encryption.
When file encryption is enabled:
• Changing the application password is allowed.
• Clearing the application password is not allowed.

Setting an Application Password

Procedure for setting the application password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the Application field, click Change password ....

Result: The Modify Password window appears.

33003101.26 175
 Project browser

Step Action

5 Enter the new password in the Entry field.

6 Enter the confirmation of the new password in the Confirmation field.

7 Click OK to confirm.
8 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Changing the Application Password

Procedure for changing the application protection password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the Application field, click Change password ....

Result: The Modify Password window appears.

5 Enter previous password in the Old password field.

6 Enter the new password in the Entry field.

7 Enter the confirmation of the new password in the Confirmation field.

8 Click OK to confirm.
9 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Deleting the Application Password

Clearing the application password is not allowed while file encryption is enabled.
Procedure for clearing the application protection password:

176 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the Application field, click Clear password....

Result: The Password window appears.

5 Enter the password in the Password field.

6 Click OK to confirm.
7 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Auto-Lock Feature
There is an optional auto-lock feature that limits access to the Control Expert software
programming tool after a configured time of inactivity. You can activate the auto-lock feature
with the check box Auto-lock and select the time-out for the time of inactivity via Minutes
before lock.
The default values are:
• Auto-lock is not activated
• Minutes before lock is set to 10 minutes (possible values: 1...999 minutes)
If the auto-lock feature is enabled and the configured inactivity time elapses, a modal dialog
box is displayed requiring the entry of the application password. Behind the modal dialog
box, all opened editors remain open in the same position. As a result, anybody can read the
current content of the Control Expert windows but cannot continue to work with Control
Expert.
NOTE: If you have not assigned a password to the project, the modal dialog box is not
displayed.

Password Request Condition

Open an existing application (project) in Control Expert:

33003101.26 177
 Project browser

Password Management

When an application file is opened, an Application Password dialog box opens.

Enter the password.

Click OK. If the password is correct, the application opens.

If the password is wrong, a message box indicates an incorrect password was entered, and a
new Application Password dialog box opens.

If you click Cancel, the application is not opened

Accessing the application in Control Expert after an auto-lock, when Control Expert is not
connected to the PAC or when the project in Control Expert is EQUAL to the project in the
PAC:

Password Management

When auto-lock time is elapsed, an Application Password dialog box opens:

Enter the password.

Click OK. If the password is correct, Control Expert becomes active again.

If the password is wrong, a message box indicates an incorrect password was entered, and a
new Application Password dialog box opens.

If you click Close, the application is closed without being saved.

Accessing the application in the PAC after an auto-lock, when Control Expert is connected to
the PAC and the application in Control Expert is DIFFERENT from the application in the
PAC:

Password Management

On connection, if Control Expert software application and the CPU application are not equal, an Application
Password dialog box opens:

Enter the password.

Click OK. If the password is correct, the connection is established.

If the password is wrong, a message box indicates an incorrect password was

entered, and a new Application Password dialog box opens.

If you click Cancel, the connection is not established.

NOTE: On connection, if Control Expert software application and the CPU applications are equal, there is
no password request. If no password has been initially entered (left empty on project creation), click OK to
establish the connection on password prompt.

178 33003101.26
Project browser

NOTE: After three attempts with a wrong password, you will have to wait an increasing
amount of time between each subsequent password attempt. The wait period increases
from 15 seconds to 1 hour, with the wait increment increasing by a factor of 2 after each
successive attempt with a wrong password.
NOTE: In case of password loss, refer to the procedure described in chapter Loss of
Password, page 191.

Enabling File Encryption Option

NOTE: You need to set an application password before enabling file encryption.
Procedure for enabling the file encryption option:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 Select File encryption active check-box.

Result: The Create Password window appears.

5 Enter the password in the Entry field.

6 Enter the confirmation of the password in the Confirmation field.

7 Click OK to confirm.
8 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Disabling File Encryption Option

Procedure for disabling the file encryption option:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

33003101.26 179
 Project browser

Step Action

4 De-select File encryption active check-box.

Result: The File Encryption Password window appears.

5 Enter the password and click OK to confirm.

NOTE: The application is no longer encrypted.

6 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Changing the File Encryption Password

Procedure for changing the file encryption password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the File encryption field, click Change password ....

Result: The Modify Password window appears.

5 Enter previous password in the Old password field.

6 Enter the new password in the Entry field.

7 Enter the confirmation of the new password in the Confirmation field.

8 Click OK to confirm.
9 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Clearing the File Encryption Password

Procedure for clearing the file encryption password:

180 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the File encryption field, click Clear password....

Result: The Password window appears.

5 Enter the password in the Password field.

6 Click OK to confirm.
7 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

NOTE: In case of file encryption password loss, refer to the procedure described in
chapter Loss of Password, page 191.

Compatibility Rules
Encrypted application files (.STA, and .ZEF) can not be opened in Control Expert 15.0
Classic or earlier versions and encrypted files (.ZEF) cannot be imported in Control Expert
with Topology Manager.
The compatibility rules between application version and Control Expert/Unity Pro version
apply to .ZEF files exported without encryption option.
NOTE: When file encryption option in your project is enabled, archived application files
(.STA) cannot be saved without encryption.

Safe Area Password Protection

At a Glance
Safety CPUs include a safe area password protection function, which is accessible from the
Properties screen of the project. This function is used to help protect project elements
located within the safe area of the safety project.
NOTE: When the safe area password protection function is active, the safe parts of the
application cannot be modified

33003101.26 181
 Project browser

Modifications to the following safe area parts are not permitted when safe area password
protection is enabled:

Safe Part Forbidden action (offline AND online)

Configuration Modify CPU characteristics

Add, Delete, Modify a Safety module in the rack

Modify Safety Power supply

Types Create, Delete, Modify a Safe DDT

Change a DDT attribute: from not safe->safe

Change a DDT attribute: from safe->not safe

Create, Delete, Modify a Safe DFB

Change a DFB attribute: from not safe->safe

Change a DFB attribute: from safe->not safe

Program-SAFE Any Change under the Variables an FB instances node

Create Task
Import Task

Modify Task

Create Section
Delete Section
Import Section

Modify Section

Project Settings Modify SAFE project settings

Modify COMMON project settings

Encryption
The safe area password uses the standard encryption SHA-256 with a salt.

Safe Area Password Function versus Safety Project User Rights

The activation of the safe area password and the implementation of user rights created in
the Security Editor are mutually exclusive security functions, as follows:

182 33003101.26
Project browser

• If the user launching Control Expert has been assigned a user profile, that user can
access the safe areas of the safety application if the user knows the safe area
password and has been granted access rights in the Security Editor.
• If user profiles have not been assigned, a user can access the safe areas of the safety
application by knowing the safe area password.

Visual Indicators in Control Expert

The state of the safe area protection function can be visibly detected by viewing the
Program-SAFE node in the Project Browser:
• A locked padlock indicates a safe area password has been created and activated.
• An unlocked padlock indicates a safe area password has been created but not
activated.
• No padlock indicates a safe area password has not been created.
NOTE: If a safe area password has been created but not activated, and the safety
application is closed then re-opened, the safe area password is automatically activated
on re-opening. This behavior serves as a precaution if the safe are password was
unintentionally not re-activated.

Compatibility
The safe area password function exists for Control Expert V14.0 or later, for M580 safety
CPUs with firmware 2.80 or later.
NOTE:
• Application program .STU, .STA, and .ZEF files, which are created in Control
Expert V14.0 or later, cannot be opened in Unity Pro V13.1 and earlier.
• Replacing an M580 safety CPU in a Control Expert v14.0 application has the
following effect:
◦ Upgrading from firmware 2.70 to 2.80 (or later) adds the safe area password
functionality to the Program & Safety Protection tab of the Project >
Properties window.
◦ Downgrading from firmware 2.80 (or later) to 2.70 removes the safe area
password functionality.

Activating Protection and Creating Password

Procedure for activating the protection of sections and creating the password:

33003101.26 183
 Project browser

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select the Program & Safety Protection tab.

4 In the Safety area, activate the protection by checking the Protection active box.

Result: The Modify Password dialog box appears.

5 Enter a password in the Entry field.

6 Enter the confirmation of the password in the Confirmation field.

7 Click OK to confirm.
8 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Changing the Password

Procedure for changing the project sections protection password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select the Program & Safety Protection tab.

4 In the Safety area, click Change password ....

Result: The Modify Password dialog box appears:

5 Enter previous password in the Old password field.

6 Enter the new password in the Entry field.

7 Enter the confirmation of the new password in the Confirmation field.

8 Click OK to confirm.
9 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

184 33003101.26
Project browser

Deleting the Password

Procedure for deleting the project sections protection password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select the Program & Safety Protection tab.

4 In the Safety area, click Clear password....

Result: The Access control dialog box appears:

5 Enter the previous password in the Password field.

6 Click OK to confirm.
7 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Firmware Protection
Overview
Firmware protection by a password helps prevent unwanted access to the module firmware.

Password
The password is case-sensitive and contains 8 to 16 alphanumeric characters. The
password robustness is increased when it contains a mix of upper and lower case,
alphabetical, numerical, and special characters.
NOTE: When importing a ZEF file, the firmware password is stored inside the module
only if the File encryption option is selected.

Changing the Password

It is possible to change a password at any time.

33003101.26 185
 Project browser

NOTE: Firmware password default value in the Control Expert application is:
fwdownload.
• For firmware V4.01 and later, you need to change the firmware password default
value, otherwise it will not be possible to build the Control Expert application.
• For firmware versions earlier than V4.01 it is not mandatory but strongly advised to
change firmware password default value.
Procedure for changing the firmware protection password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the Firmware field, click Change password ....

Result: The Modify Password window appears.

5 Enter previous password in the Old password field.

6 Enter the new password in the Entry field.

7 Enter the confirmation of the new password in the Confirmation field.

8 Click OK to confirm.
9 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Resetting the Password

Resetting the password assigns its default value to the firmware password in the Control
Expert application if the current password is confirmed.
To reset the password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the Firmware field, click Reset password....

186 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

Result: The Password window appears.

5 Enter current password in the Password field.

6 Click OK to confirm.
7 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes. The new password
is the default password: fwdownload.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection

At a Glance
The protection function is accessible from the Properties screen of the project in offline
mode.
This function is used to protect the program elements (sections, Program Units).
NOTE: The protection is not active as long as the protection has not been activated in
the project.
NOTE: The project protection is effective to the marked program elements only. This
does not prevent from:
• Connecting to the CPU
• Uploading application from the CPU
• Changing the configuration
• Adding new Program Units and/or sections
• Changing the logic in a new (not protected) section

Activating Protection and Creating Password

Procedure for activating the protection and creating the password for sections and Program
Units:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

33003101.26 187
 Project browser

Step Action

3 Select Program & Safety Protection tab.

4 In the Sections & Program Units field, activate the protection by checking the Protection active
box.

Result: The Modify Password dialog box appears:

5 Enter a password in the Entry field.

6 Enter the confirmation of the password in the Confirmation field.

7 Select Crypted check box if an enhanced password protection is required.

NOTE: A project with a crypted password cannot be edited with Unity Pro V4.0 and earlier.

8 Click OK to confirm.
9 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Notes
If a program element is configured with a protection (read or read/write), when protection
has been activated this will be indicated by a locked padlock at the program element level.
If the program element is configured with a protection but the protection is disabled, an open
padlock is displayed at the program element level.

Changing the Password

Procedure for changing the project protection password for sections and Program Units:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Program & Safety Protection tab.

4 In the Sections & Program Units field, click Change password ....

Result: The Modify Password dialog box appears:

5 Enter previous password in the Old password field.

6 Enter the new password in the Entry field.

188 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

7 Enter the confirmation of the new password in the Confirmation field.

8 Select Crypted check box if an enhanced password protection is required.

NOTE: A project with a crypted password cannot be edited with Unity Pro V4.0 and earlier.

Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.

9 Click OK to confirm.
10 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Deleting the Password

Procedure for deleting the project protection password for sections and Program Units:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Program & Safety Protection tab.

4 In the Sections & Program Units field, click Clear password....

Result: The Access control dialog box appears:

5 Enter the previous password in the Password field.

6 Click OK to confirm.
7 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Data Storage/Web Protection

Overview
Protection by a password helps prevent unwanted access to the data storage zone of the
SD memory card (if a valid card is inserted in the CPU).
For Modicon M580 CPUs in a project created by Control Expert with version:

33003101.26 189
 Project browser

• Earlier than version 15.1, you can provide password protection for data storage access.
• Version 15.1 or later, you can provide password protection for both web diagnostics and
data storage access.

Password
The password is case-sensitive and contains 8 to 16 alphanumeric characters. The
password robustness is increased when it contains a mix of upper and lower case,
alphabetical, numerical, and special characters.
NOTE: When importing a ZEF file, the Data Storage/Web password is stored inside the
module only if the File encryption option is selected.

Changing the Password

It is possible to change a password at any time.
NOTE: Data Storage/Web password has a default value in Control Expert application.
This default value depends on the version of Control Expert, and is:
• datadownload for Control Expert versions earlier than V15.1.
• webuser for Control Expert versions V15.1 and later.
Changing the default password is mandatory, or not, depending on the module firmware
version:
• For firmware V4.01 and later, you need to change the Data Storage/Web password
default value, otherwise it will not be possible to build the Control Expert application.
• For firmware versions earlier than V4.01 it is not mandatory but strongly advised to
change Data Storage/Web password default value.
Procedure for changing the Data Storage/Web password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the Data Storage (or Web Diagnostics / Data Storage) field, click Change password ....

Result: The Modify Password window appears.

5 Enter previous password in the Old password field.

6 Enter the new password in the Entry field.

190 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

7 Enter the confirmation of the new password in the Confirmation field.

8 Click OK to confirm.
9 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Resetting the Password

Resetting the password assigns its default value to the Data Storage/Web password in the
Control Expert application if the current password is confirmed.
To reset the password:

Step Action

1 In the project browser right-click Project.

2 Select Properties command from the popup menu.

Result: The Properties of Project window appears.

3 Select Project & Controller Protection tab.

4 In the Data Storage (or Web Diagnostics / Data Storage) field, click Reset password....

Result: The Password window appears.

5 Enter current password in the Password field.

6 Click OK to confirm.
7 Click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project window to confirm all changes. The new password
is the default password: datadownload.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Loss of Password
Overview
If you forget your password, proceed as indicated in the following procedures and contact
Schneider Electric support.
NOTE: The application password recovery procedure differ depending on whether the
file encryption option is enabled or disabled.

33003101.26 191
 Project browser

Control Expert Application Password without File Encryption

Option
The following procedure for resetting the application password is valid when file encryption
option is disabled or for application file managed with Control Expert 15.0 Classic or earlier
versions.
Schneider Electric support needs a string of alphanumeric characters displayed in the
Password forgotten pop-up window as soon as you press SHIFT+F2 in the Password
dialog box.
The following conditions must be met in order to reach the Password dialog box:
• At open time, select the application and the Password dialog box is displayed.
• At auto-lock time, the Password dialog box is displayed. If you do not remember the
password, select Close. Open the application again and the Password dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE: When the application is closed without entering a password after an auto-
lock, all modifications are lost.
Procedure for resetting the application password:

Step Action

1 Condition: The Password dialog box is displayed.

2 Press SHIFT+F2.

Result: The Password forgotten pop-up window is open and a string of alphanumeric characters is
displayed.

3 Copy this string and give it to Schneider Electric support.

4 Receive the generated password from Schneider Electric support.

NOTE: The password is a temporary password, available as long as you do not modify the
application.

5 Enter this password.

6 Modify the password (old password = password provided by Schneider Electric support).

7 Click Build > Build Changes.

8 Save the application.

192 33003101.26
Project browser

Control Expert Application Password with File Encryption Option

If you forget your application password when file encryption is enabled, you need to send
the application file to Schneider Electric support. Then you receive back the encrypted
application file with a new file application password from Schneider Electric support.
NOTE: We highly recommend to change the application password.

CPU Application Password

Procedure for resetting the CPU application password if the respective *.STU file is
available:

Step Action

1 Open the respective *.STU file.

2 When the Password dialog box is displayed press SHIFT+F2.

Result: The Password forgotten pop-up window is open and a string of alphanumeric characters is
displayed.

3 Copy this string and give it to Schneider Electric support.

4 Receive the generated password from Schneider Electric support.

Note: The password is a temporary password, available as long as you do not modify the application.

5 Enter this password.

6 Modify the password (old password = password provided by Schneider Electric support).

7 Connect to the PLC.

8 Click Build > Build Changes.
9 Save the application.

Procedure for resetting the CPU application password if the respective *.STU file is not
available:

Step Action

1 Condition: At connection time, the Password dialog box is displayed.

2 Press SHIFT+F2.

Result: The Password forgotten pop-up window is open and a string of alphanumeric characters is
displayed.

3 Copy this string and give it to Schneider Electric support.

4 Receive the generated password from Schneider Electric support.

33003101.26 193
 Project browser

Step Action

Note: The password provided by Schneider Electric support is a temporary password, available as
long as you do not modify the application.

5 Enter this password.

6 Upload the application from CPU.

7 Save the application.

8 Modify the password (old password = the one provided by Schneider Electric support).

9 Click Build > Build Changes.

10 Save the application.

File Encryption Password

Schneider Electric support needs a string of alphanumeric characters displayed in the
Password forgotten pop-up window as soon as you press SHIFT+F2 in the Password
dialog box.
To reach the Password dialog box:
• Go to Project > Properties of Project > Project & Controller Protection
• In the File encryption field, click Clear password.... The Password dialog box is
displayed.
Procedure for resetting the file encryption password:

Step Action

1 Condition: The Password dialog box is displayed.

2 Press SHIFT+F2.

Result: The Password forgotten pop-up window is open and a string of alphanumeric characters is
displayed.

3 Copy this string and give it to Schneider Electric support.

4 Receive the generated password from Schneider Electric support.

Note: The password is a temporary password, available as long as you do not modify the application.

5 Enter this password and click OK to close the Password dialog.

194 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

6 Click Change Password and change the password (the old password = password provided by
Schneider Electric support).

7 Click OK to close the Modify Password dialog, then click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project
window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Safe Area Password

Schneider Electric support needs a string of alphanumeric characters displayed in the
Password forgotten pop-up window as soon as you press SHIFT+F2 in the Password
dialog box.
To reach the Password dialog box:
• Go to Project > Properties of Project > Program & Safety Protection
• In the Safety field, click Change password.... The Password dialog box is displayed.
Procedure for resetting the safe area password:

Step Action

1 Condition: The Password dialog box is displayed.

2 Press SHIFT+F2.

Result: The Password forgotten pop-up window is open and a string of alphanumeric characters is
displayed.

3 Copy this string and give it to Schneider Electric support.

4 Receive the generated password from Schneider Electric support.

Note: The password is a temporary password, available as long as you do not modify the application.

5 Enter this password and click OK to close the Password dialog.

6 Click Change Password and change the password (the old password = password provided by
Schneider Electric support).

7 Click OK to close the Modify Password dialog, then click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project
window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

33003101.26 195
 Project browser

Firmware Password
Schneider Electric support needs a string of alphanumeric characters displayed in the
Password forgotten pop-up window as soon as you press SHIFT+F2 in the Password
dialog box.
To reach the Password dialog box:
• Go to Project > Properties of Project > Project & Controller Protection
• In the Firmware field, click Reset password.... The Password dialog box is displayed.
Procedure for resetting the firmware password:

Step Action

1 Condition: The Password dialog box is displayed.

2 Press SHIFT+F2.

Result: The Password forgotten pop-up window is open and a string of alphanumeric characters is
displayed.

3 Copy this string and give it to Schneider Electric support.

4 Receive the generated password from Schneider Electric support.

Note: The password is a temporary password, available as long as you do not modify the application.

5 Enter this password and click OK to close the Password dialog.

6 Click Change Password and change the password (the old password = password provided by
Schneider Electric support).

7 Click OK to close the Modify Password dialog, then click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project
window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

Data Storage/Web Password

Schneider Electric support needs a string of alphanumeric characters displayed in the
Password forgotten pop-up window as soon as you press SHIFT+F2 in the Password
dialog box.
To reach the Password dialog box:
• Go to Project > Properties of Project > Project & Controller Protection
• In the Data Storage field, click Reset password.... The Password dialog box is
displayed.
Procedure for resetting the data storage password:

196 33003101.26
Project browser

Step Action

1 Condition: The Password dialog box is displayed.

2 Press SHIFT+F2.

Result: The Password forgotten pop-up window is open and a string of alphanumeric characters is
displayed.

3 Copy this string and give it to Schneider Electric support.

4 Receive the generated password from Schneider Electric support.

Note: The password is a temporary password, available as long as you do not modify the application.

5 Enter this password and click OK to close the Password dialog.

6 Click Change Password and change the password (the old password = password provided by
Schneider Electric support).

7 Click OK to close the Modify Password dialog, then click OK or Apply in the Properties of Project
window to confirm all changes.

If you click Cancel in the Properties of Project window, all changes are canceled.

33003101.26 197
 Project browser

Introduction to the various directories of the

project browser
About this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter describes the various directories of the project browser.

Project Directory
At a Glance
The Project directory of the structural view allows you to access the structure of the project
and the associated services.
The following illustration shows the Project directory:

Associated services
The Project directory allows you to access the following services, which can be reached via
the contextual menu:

198 33003101.26
Project browser

Directory Services

Project Export Project: allows you to access export of the global project, page 1711.

Project Settings: allows you to access the project specific settings, page 548.

Properties: allows you to access the properties of the global project.

Configuration allows you to access the hardware configuration, page 199 and the parameter
settings of the modules.

Derived Data Types allows you to access the DDTs, page 201.

Derived FB Types allows you to access the DFB, page 202 types.

Variables & FB allows you to access the variables, page 203 and function block instances.
instances
Motion allows you to access the declaration, page 205 and configuration of the
servodrives.
Communication allows you to access the configuration of the networks, page 207.

Ethernet Network allows you to access the Ethernet Network configuration, page 208.

Programs allows you to access the project programs, page 208.

Animation Tables allows you to access the animation tables, page 212.

Operator Screens allows you to access the operator screens, page 215.

Documentation allows you to access the documentation, page 217.

Configuration Directory
At a Glance
The Configuration directory of the structural view of the project allows you to access the
hardware configuration and the parameter settings of the following modules: bus, rack,
module.

33003101.26 199
 Project browser

The following illustration shows an example of a directory tree of the Configuration

directory:

Accessible Services
The Configuration directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

Configuration Open: used to access the bus editor, X Bus in the above example.

Import: used to import the configuration, page 1689 of the project inputs/outputs (offline
mode only).

Import SIS: used to import the configuration, page 1378 of a project created using the SIS
Automation tool.

Export: used to export the configuration, page 1687 of the project inputs/outputs (offline
mode only).

Bus Open: used to access the bus editor, X Bus in the above example.

Go to Bus Master: displays the processor in reverse video in the project navigator, TSX
57304M in the above example.

Rack Open: used to access the bus editor, TSX RKY 6EX in the above example.

Module Open: used to access the input/output editor (module settings).

Export: used to export the configuration, page 1687 of the module(offline mode only and
depending on the module).

Empty slot Import: used to import the configuration of a BMENOC03•1 module with all devices
configured behind the NOC master DTM.

import the configuration, page 1689 of a module (offline mode only).

200 33003101.26
Project browser

Access
From the Configuration directory, you can:
• Configure the PLC rack, page 1294 with:
◦ a power supply, page 1300,
◦ a processor, page 1303,
◦ one or more modules, page 1307.
• Configure field bus devices, page 1311,
• Access the configuration of the rack elements:
◦ Premium, page 1353 and Quantum, page 1363 processors,
◦ modules, page 1372.

Derived data types (DDT) directory

At a Glance
The Derived data types (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) directory of the structural view of the project allows you to
access the DDT types.
The following illustration shows an example of a directory tree of the Derived data types
directory:

Associated services
The Derived Data Types directory allows you to access the following services, which can
be reached via the contextual menu:

33003101.26 201
 Project browser

Directory Services

Derived Data Types Open: allows you to access the DDT types tab of the data editor, page 345, from
which you can:
• create, page 353 a DDT,
• manage, page 364 a DDT,
Get from Library: allows you read access to one or more DDT types from a library,
page 310.

Put in Library: used to archive, page 371 all the DDTs in a library, page 310.

Export: allows you to access export of all DDT types, page 1696.

Import: allows you to access import of one or more DDT types, page 1697.

DDT Open: allows you to access the DDT in the DDT types tab of the data editor.

(Input, Output, .etc.) Delete: allows you to delete the DDT.

Put in Library: allows you write access to the DDT in a library.

Analyze: allows you to analyze, page 435 the DDT.

Properties: allows you to access the DDT properties.

Export: allows you to access export of all DDT types, page 1696.

Derived FB (DFB) types directory

At a Glance
The Derived FB types (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) directory of the structural view of the project allows you to
access the DFB types.
The following illustration shows an example of a directory tree of the Derived FB types
directory:

202 33003101.26
Project browser

Associated services
The Derived FB types directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

FB Type Open: allows you to access the DFB tab of the data editor, page 1249.

Get from Library: allows you read access to one or more DFB types from a library,
page 310.

Put in Library: allows you write access to all DFB types in a library.

Export: allows you to access export of all DFB types, page 1694 of the project.

Import: allows you to access import of one or more DFB types, page 1695.

DFB Type (Counter, etc.) Open: allows you to access the DFB type in the DFB tab of the Data Editor, page
1249.

Delete: allows you to delete the DFB type.

Put in Library: allows you write access to the DFB type in a Library, page 310.

Analyze: allows you to analyze, page 435 the DFB type.

Properties: allows you to access the properties, page 1261 of the DFB type.

Export: allows you to access export of the DFB type, page 1694.

Sections New Section: allows you to create a new section, page 499 in the DFB type.

Section XX Open: allows you to access the section, page 499 program language editor.

Delete: allows you to delete the section.

Properties: allows you to access the properties, page 502 of the section.

Variables Directory
At a Glance
The Variables & FB instances directory of the structural view of the project is used to
access the variables (EDT, (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual)DDT, IODDT) (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)and the function block instances(EFB, DFB).
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)

33003101.26 203
 Project browser

The following illustration shows an example of the Variables & FB instances directory:

Accessible Services
The Variables & FB instances directory allows you access to the following services, which
can be reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

Variables & FB instances Open: used to access the variables editor,

Export: used to access the export of all variables, page 1698 of the
project,

Import: used to access the import of all variables, page 1701 of the
project.

Elementary variables Open: used to access the tab corresponding to the variables editor,

Derived variables Export: used to access the export of all variables, page 1698 of the
family selected (EDT, DFB, etc.) .
Decice DDT variables

I/O derived variables

Elementary FB instances

Derived FB instances

Access
From the Variables & FB instances directory, you can access the different tabs of the data
editor:

204 33003101.26
Project browser

• Variables tab,
◦ Create, page 386 a data instance,
◦ Create, page 396 an IODDT type data instance,
◦ Create, page 399 a Device DDT type data instance,
◦ Modify, page 414 attributes of data instances.
• DDT Types tab,
◦ Create, page 353 a data instance,
◦ Archive, page 371 DDTs in a library, page 310,
• Function blocks tab,
◦ Create, page 376 a data instance,
◦ Modify, page 382 attributes of data instances.
• DFB Types tab,
◦ Create, page 1249 a DFB type,
◦ Configure settings, page 1250 of a DFB type.

Motion Directory
At a Glance
The Motion directory of the structural view of the project allows you to access the
declaration and configuration of the servodrives.
When declaring a servodrive, various information is required, such as:
• the name given to the servodrive
• the type of servodrive
• the CANopen address of the servodrive
• the reference of the servodrive
• the version of the servodrive
• the input of variable names associated to the axis.

33003101.26 205
 Project browser

The following diagram shows an example of a tree structure for the Motion directory:

In this diagram, the name given to the servodrive is ‘Axis_Z’.

A recipe is linked, by default, each time an axis is created. It is possible to create several
recipes (see Premium using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Motion Function Blocks, Start-up
Guide).

Accessible Services
The Motion directory gives you access to the following services, which can be reached via
the contextual menu:

Directory Service

Motion New axis: allows you to create a new axis.

Axis New recipe: allows you to create a new recipe.

Delete: allows you to delete an axis.

Properties: allows you to access the axis properties.

Recipe Delete: allows you to delete a recipe.

Properties: allows you to access the recipe properties.

206 33003101.26
Project browser

Communication Directory
At a Glance
The Communication directory of the structural view of the project allows you to access the
configuration of the networks.
The following illustration shows an example of a directory tree of the Communication
directory:

Associated services
The Communication directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

Communication Export: allows you to access export of all networks, page 1702.

Import: allows you to access import of one or more networks, page 1703.

Network New Network: allows you to add a network, page 445 to your project.

33003101.26 207
 Project browser

Directory Services

Network Open: allows you to access the corresponding network editor: Ethernet,
Modbus Plus, Fipway.
(Network_1, Modbus Plus_A,
etc.) Export: allows you to access export of one network, page 1702.

Delete: allows you to delete a network.

Properties: allows you to access the network properties.

Routing Table Open: allows you to access the configuration, page 453 of a bridge between 2
networks (routing tables).

Ethernet Network Directory

At a Glance
Double-click the Ethernet Network directory of the project structural view provides access
to the Ethernet Network Manager tool.
This directory is available in a Modicon M580 configuration.

Ethernet Network Window

The Ethernet Network window displays configuration information on the PAC networks and
allows you to edit some parameters for specific communication adapter modules.
More information on the Ethernet Network Manager tool is provided in Modicon M580
topology guides (see Modicon M580, System Planning Guide for, Complex Topologies).

Programs Directory
At a Glance
The Programs directory of the structural view of the project allows you to define the
structure of the program and to access the language editors of the program elements:
Program Units, sections, program modules and event processing.

208 33003101.26
Project browser

The following illustration shows an example of a directory tree of the Programs directory:

NOTE: When Program Units in the application are not allowed, the Logic folder is
replaced by the Sections folder in the directory tree. For more detailed information refer
to the chapter Description of the Available Functions for Each Type of PLC (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

Services associated with the sequential Tasks directories.

The sequential Tasks directories (MAST, FAST, etc.) allow you to access the following
services, which can be reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

Tasks New Task ...: allows you to create a new sequential task, page 469 (FAST, AUX, AUX0,
AUX1). The MAST task is created by default.

Import ...: allows you to import a task, page 1692.

MAST, FAST, etc. Delete: allows you to delete the task. The MAST task cannot be deleted.

Clear: allows you to clear the contents of the task. This clears all the sections of the
task.

33003101.26 209
 Project browser

Directory Services

Export: allows you to export the sequential task, page 1690.

Properties: allows you to access the properties of the sequential task.

Logic New Program Unit...: allows you to create a new “empty” Program Unit.

New Section ...: allows you to create a new “empty” section, page 499.

Import ...: allows you to import a program unit or a section, page 1692.

Create builded Activation Conditions Table: allows you to initialize an animation

table, with the activation condition variables associated with the sections.

Or
Sections New Section ...: allows you to create a new "empty" section, page 499.

Import ...: allows you to import a section, page 1692.

Create section activation conditions table: allows you to initialize an animation table,
with the activation condition variables associated with the sections.

Services associated with the Program Unit

The structure of a Program Unit allow you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

Program Element Services

For each Program Analyze: allows you to analyze the Program Unit.
Unit
Delete: allows you to delete the Program Unit.

Copy: allows you to copy the Program Unit.

Paste After: allows you to paste after a duplication of the copied Program Unit, page
497.

Paste Special after...: allows you to paste after a duplication of the copied Program
Unit with effective parameters, page 498.

Import after: allows you to import a Program Unit or a section, page 1692.

Export ...: allows you to export the Program Unit, page 1690.

Properties: allows you to access the properties of the Program Unit.

For the Interface & Open: allows you to access the Program Unit data editor.
Variables
Sections directory New Section ...: allows you to create a new “empty” section, page 499.
(under Program Unit)
Import ...: allows you to import a section, page 1692

210 33003101.26
Project browser

Program Element Services

For each section, Refer to services associated, page 211 with the section.
section Macro-step,
action, or transition

Animation Tables Refer to services associated, page 213 with the Animation Tables Directory.
directory (under
Program Unit)

For each animation

table

Services associated with the section

The section allow you to access the following services, which can be reached via the
contextual menu:

Program Element Services

For each section Open: allows you to access the section, page 499 language editor.

Delete: allows you to delete the section.

Detach: allows you to detach the section of the functional module.

Export: allows you to export the section, page 1690.

Import after ...: allows you to import a section, page 1692

Forcing to 0, allows you to choose Force to 0 as the activation condition of the section
(in online mode).

Forcing to 1, allows you to choose Force to 1 as the activation condition of the section
(in online mode).

Unforce: allows you to choose cancel forcing as the activation condition of the section
(in online mode).

Properties: allows you to access the properties of the section.

For each Section Open: allows you to access the section language editor.
Macro-step, action,
or transition Delete: allows you to delete the section.

Properties: allows you to access the properties of the section.

NOTE: Only the MAST task can contain one or more sections in SFC language.

33003101.26 211
 Project browser

Services associated with the program modules directories

The program modules directories (SR Sections) allow you to access the following services,
which can be reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

SR Sections New SR Section ...: allows you to create a new “empty” program module, page 519.

Import ...: allows you to access import of program module, page 1692.

For each program Open: allows you to access the program module language editor.
module
Delete: allows you to delete the program module.

Export: allows you to access export program module, page 1690.

Properties: allows you to access the properties of the program module.

Services associated with the event processing directories

The event processing (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) directories allow you to access the following services, which
can be reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

Timer Events, I/O New Event Section: allows you to create a new “empty” event processing, page 523.
Events
Import: allows you to access import of event processing, page 1692.

For each event Open: allows you to access the event processing language editor.
processing
Delete: allows you to delete the event processing.

Detach: allows you to detach the event processing of the functional module.

Export: allows you to access export of event processing, page 1690.

Properties: allows you to access the event processing properties.

Animation Tables Directory

At a Glance
The Animation Tables Directory of the structural view of the project allows you to access
the animation tables.

212 33003101.26
Project browser

The following illustration shows an example of a directory tree of the Animation Tables
directory:

Associated services
The Animation Tables directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

33003101.26 213
 Project browser

Directory Services

Animation tables New Animation Table: allows you to create a new animation table, page 1469.

Paste: used to paste an animation table into the clipboard or the animation tables
directory.

Delete all: allows you to delete all the animation tables.

Detach all: allows you to detach all the animation tables from the functional
modules.

Export: allows you to access export of all animation tables, page 1707.

Import: allows you to access import of one or more animation tables, page 1708.

Make All Tables Permanent: allows you to change all temporary animation tables
to permanent animation tables (see also Permanent and Temporary Animation
Tables, page 1467).

Purge Temporary Tables: allows you to delete all temporary animation tables (see
also Permanent and Temporary Animation Tables, page 1467).

Open Forced Bits Table: allows you to create the animation table that includes all
forced bits of a project (see also Animation Table of Forced Bits, page 1494).

For each animation table Open: allows you to access the animation table.

Copy: allows you to duplicate an animation table.

Paste: allows you to add a copy of an animation table to the clipboard or the
animation tables directory.

Delete: allows you to delete the animation table.

Detach: allows you to Detach the animation table from the functional module.

Export: allows you to access export of the animation table, page 1707.

Properties: allows you to access the animation table properties.

Access
The Animation Tables Directory is used to create an animation table. From this table, you
can:
• add, page 1475 data,
• switch to modification, page 1481 mode,
• switch to forcing, page 1486 mode,
• modify or force, page 1491 several variables.

214 33003101.26
Project browser

Operator Screens Directory

At a Glance
The Operator Screens Directory of the structural view of the project are used to access the
operator screens.
The following diagram shows an example of a directory tree of the Operator Screens
directory:

Associated services
The Operator Screens directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

33003101.26 215
 Project browser

Directory Services

Operator Screens New screen: allows you to create a new operator screen.

New family: allows you to create a new family of screens.

Paste: allows you to paste an operator screen into the clipboard or the operator
screen directory.

Delete all: allows you to delete all the operator screens.

Detach all: allows you to detach all the operator screens from the functional
modules.

Clean unuse image: allows you delete all the created images that are not used.

Import: allows you to access import of one or several screens, page 1705 and/or
family of screens.

Export: allows you to access export of all screens, page 1704.

Messages list: allows you to access the message list for the operator screens.

For each family of screens New screen: allows you to create a new operator screen.

Copy: allows you to duplicate the family of screens and its associated operator
screens.

Paste: allows you to add a copy of a screen family and its operator screens to the
clipboard or the operator screens directory.

Delete: allows you to delete the family of screens.

Detach: allows you to detach the functional module family.

Export: allows you to access export of the family of screens, page 1704.

Family Properties: allows you to access the properties of the family of screens.

For each operator screen Open: allows you to access the operator screens editor.

Copy: allows you to duplicate the operator screen.

Paste: allows you to add a copy of an operator screen to the clipboard or the
operator screen directory.

Delete: allows you to delete the operator screen.

Detach: allows you to detach the operator screen from the functional module.

Export: allows you to access export of the operator screen, page 1704.

Screen properties: allows you to access the properties of the operator screen.

Access
The Operator Screens directory is used to create screens. From these screens, you can:

216 33003101.26
Project browser

• create, page 1571 objects,

• insert objects from a library, page 1637,
• modify the attributes, page 1582 of the objects,
• manipulate, page 1607 the objects that make up the screen,
• use the screens in online mode, page 1626.

Documentation Directory
At a Glance
The Documentation directory of the structural view of the project allows you to access the
documentation.
The following illustration shows an example of a Documentation directory:

Associated services
The Documentation directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

33003101.26 217
 Project browser

Directory Services

Documentation Open: allows you to access the documentation, page 1651 tool.

Title Page Print Configuration: also gives access to the print configuration settings.

General information Open: this heading allows you to specify various information about the project. A
dialog box allows you to enter the information and to create hyperlinks, page 1805.

Conversion Report Directory

At a Glance
The Conversion Report directory is displayed in the structural view of the project when
opening a PL7 (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, PL7 Application Converter, User Manual)
project with a .FEF extension or a Concept (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Concept
Application Converter, User Manual) project with an .ASC extension. This directory enables
you to access a conversion report for a project.
The following illustration shows an example of a directory tree of the Conversion Report
directory:

Services
The Conversion Report directory provides you with:
• general information (application name, source file, PLC type, etc.),

218 33003101.26
Project browser

• warnings,
• errors.

33003101.26 219
 Project browser

Summaries of the utilities associated with the

structure view and function view
About this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter provides summaries of the utilities associated with the function view and
structure view.

Summary of the services associated with the structural

view
At a Glance
The following tables summarize the services associated with the structural view of the
project and indicate the operating modes in which you can use them.

Project Directory
The Project directory, page 198 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Project Export Project Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Configuration Directory
The Configuration directory, page 199 allows you to access the following services.

220 33003101.26
Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Configuration Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Import SIS Yes No No

Bus Open Yes Yes Yes

Go to Bus Master Yes Yes Yes

Rack Open Yes Yes Yes

Module Open Yes Yes Yes

Derived FB Types Directory

The Derived FB Types directory, page 202 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

FB Type Open Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Put in Library Yes No No

Get from Library Yes No No

For each type of DFB Open Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Put in Library Yes No No

Delete Yes(1) Yes(1) Yes(1)

Analyze Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

33003101.26 221
 Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Section Open Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

(1) Only if the DFB type is not instantiated in the project.

Derived Data Types Directory

The Derived Data Types directory, page 201 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Derived Data Types Open Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Put in Library Yes No No

Get from Library Yes No No

For each DDT Open Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes Yes No

Put in Library Yes No No

Delete Yes(1) Yes(1) Yes(1)

Analyze Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

(1) Only if the DDT type is not instantiated in the project.

Variables & FB instances Directory

The Variables & FB instances directory, page 203 allows you to access the following
services.

222 33003101.26
Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Variables Open Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

EDT, DDT, EFB, DFB Open Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Motion Directory
The Motion directory, page 203 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Motion New axis Yes No No

Axis New recipe Yes No No

Delete Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Recipe Delete Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Communication Directory
The Communication directory, page 207 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Communication Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Network New Network Yes No No

33003101.26 223
 Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

For each network Open Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Routing Table Open Yes Yes Yes

Programs Directory
The Programs directory, page 208 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Tasks New Task Yes No No

Import Yes No No

For each task, (MAST, Clear Yes Yes No

FAST, AUX•)
Delete Yes(1) No No

Export Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Sections(3) Refer to the tables below for services availability according to the operating mode.

or

Logic(3)

SR Sections New SR Section Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

For each program Open Yes Yes Yes

module
Delete Yes(2) Yes(2) Yes(2)

Export Yes No No

Import after Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

224 33003101.26
Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Timer Events, I/O Events New Event Section Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

For each event Open Yes Yes Yes

processing
Delete Yes(2) No No

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

(1) Except for MAST task.

(2) Only if the program module or the event processing is not called.

(3) Depends on the CPU.

The Sections directory under each task allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Sections New Section Yes Yes Yes

Create section activation conditions table Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

For each section Open Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import after Yes No No

Force to 0 No Yes Yes

Force to 1 No Yes Yes

Unforce No Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

The Logic directory under each task allows you to access the following services.

33003101.26 225
 Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Logic New Program Unit Yes Yes Yes

New Section Yes Yes Yes

Create builded activation conditions table Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

For each Program Unit Analyze Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste After Yes Yes Yes

Paste Special after Yes Yes Yes

Import after Yes No No

Export Yes No No

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Sections (under Program New Section Yes Yes Yes

Unit)
Import Yes No No

For each section of the Open Yes Yes Yes

Program Unit
Delete Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import after Yes No No

Force to 0 No Yes Yes

Force to 1 No Yes Yes

Unforce No Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Animation tables (under New Animation Table Yes Yes Yes

Program Unit)
Paste Yes Yes Yes

Detach All Yes Yes Yes

Delete All Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

226 33003101.26
Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Export Yes No No

Make All Tables Permanent Yes Yes Yes

Purge Temporary Tables Yes Yes Yes

Open Forced Bits Table No Yes Yes

For each animation table Open Yes Yes Yes

of the Program Unit
Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

For each section (under Open Yes Yes Yes

Logic)
Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import after Yes No No

Force to 0 No Yes Yes

Force to 1 No Yes Yes

Unforce No Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Animation tables Directory

The Animation tables directory, page 212 allows you to access the following services.

33003101.26 227
 Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Animation tables New Animation Table Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Detach All Yes Yes Yes

Delete All Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

Export Yes No No

Make All Tables Permanent Yes Yes Yes

Purge Temporary Tables Yes Yes Yes

Open Forced Bits Table No Yes Yes

For each animation table Open Yes Yes Yes

Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Operator Screens Directory

The Operator Screens directory, page 215 allows you to access the following services.

228 33003101.26
Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Operator Screens New screen Yes Yes Yes

New family Yes Yes Yes

Detach All Yes Yes Yes

Delete All Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Messages list Yes Yes Yes

For each family of New screen Yes Yes Yes

screens
Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Family Properties Yes Yes Yes

For each screen Open Yes Yes Yes

Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Screen properties Yes Yes Yes

Documentation Directory
The Documentation directory, page 217 allows you to access the following services.

33003101.26 229
 Project browser

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Documentation Open Yes Yes Yes

Title Page Print Setup Yes Yes Yes

General Information Open Yes Yes Yes

230 33003101.26
33003101.26 231
 Functional modules

Functional modules
What’s in This Chapter
Introduction to the functional view ........................................... 232
The functional modules and their associated utilities................. 246

Aim of this Chapter

This chapter introduces the functional modules incorporated in a Control Expert project.

Introduction to the functional view

About this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter provides general information on the functional modules and their
associated utilities.

Functional modules
Definition
A functional module is a group of program elements intended to perform a PLC function.
A functional module is comprised:
• Program Units (only for Modicon M580 and M340)
• program or event processing sections,
• animation tables associated with the functional module,
• runtime screens associated with the functional module,
• a comment (max. 1024 characters),
• interleaved functional modules, with these modules, in relation to the main function,
performing one or more PLC sub-functions.
NOTE: a functional module does not necessarily have a program section, an animation
table or runtime screens.
The other elements that make up a project are not incorporated into the functional modules:

232 33003101.26
Functional modules

• the configuration,
• the global variables of a project,
• the DFB and DDT types, which are global to a project,
• the SR program modules, which are global to a task,
• the documentation.

At a glance
All the functional modules of the project can be found in the Functional Project directory of
the function view.
The following illustration shows the Functional Project directory:

NOTE: When Program Units are allowed in the application (Modicon M580 and M340),
the Program folder is replaced by the Logic folder in each functional module directory.
As the default the browser displays the first level of the directory tree. To access the other
levels, you need to expand the directories.
NOTE: This breakdown does not take into account the order of execution of the program
by the PLC.

33003101.26 233
 Functional modules

Project directory of the functional view

At a Glance
The Functional Project directory of the functional view allows you to access all the
functional modules of the project and the associated services.
The following illustration shows the Functional Project directory:

Associated services
The Functional Project directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

Directory Services

Functional Project New Functional Module: allows you to create a new functional module.

Detach all: allows you to detach all elements included in the functional modules
(sections and animation tables) without deleting them.

Export: allows you to access export of the global project, page 1711.

Import: allows you to access import of a functional module, page 1710.

Project Settings: allows you to access the project specific settings, page 548.

Properties: allows you to access the properties of the global project.

For each functional allows you to access all the elements of the functional module: program,
module animation tables, operator screens, nested functional modules.

234 33003101.26
Functional modules

Functional Module Directory

At a Glance
The Functional Module directory of the functional view allows you to access all the
elements of a functional module (program, animation tables and operator screens) and the
nested modules.
The following illustration shows an example of a Functional Module directory:

Associated services
The functional module directory allows you to access the following services, which can be
reached via the contextual menu:

33003101.26 235
 Functional modules

Directory Services

Functional module: New Functional Module...: allows you to create a new nested functional module.
Processing
Create...: allows you to create a new program element in the functional module.

Delete: allows you to delete the functional module.

Detach all: allows you to detach all elements included in the functional module
(sections and animation tables) without deleting them.

Export: allows you to access export of the functional module, page 1709.

Import: allows you to access import of a functional module, page 1710.

Create builded Activation Conditions Table (CTRL+T): allows you to initialize an

animation table, with the activation conditions associated with the program elements of
the functional module (sections, program modules and event processings).

Protection of Included Section(s)...: allows you to define the protection of the

program elements (sections, program modules and event processings) of the function
module (no protection, write-protection, read/write-protection).

Properties: allows you to access the functional module properties.

Program allows you to access the functional module programs, page 236.

or

Logic

Table allows you to access the animation tables of the functional module, page 237.

Screen allows you to access the operator screens of the functional module, page 238.

Functional Module Program Directory

At a Glance
The program directory of a functional module (Program or Logic) allows you to access the
program elements of this module: Program Units (when available), sections, program
modules, and event processing.

Associated services
The program directory of a functional module allows you to access the following services,
which can be reached via the contextual menu:

236 33003101.26
Functional modules

Directory Services

Program Create...: allows you to create a new program element in the functional module:
Program Unit, section, program module or event processing.
or
Detach all: allows you to detach all elements included in the functional module
Logic (Program Units, sections, and animation tables) without deleting them.

Import...: allows you to import a program element to the functional module: Program
unit, section, program module, event processing (see also topic on program import,
page 1692).

Create builded Activation Conditions Table (CTRL+T): allows you to initialize an

animation table, with the activation conditions associated with the program elements of
the functional module: sections.

Protection of Included Section(s)...: allows you to define the protection of the

program elements of the functional module: Program Units, sections, program modules
and event processing.

Program Unit, See Programs Directory, page 208 for a description of the associated services.
Section, SR
section, event
processing

Functional Module Animation Tables Directory

At a Glance
The Table directory of a functional module allows you to access the animation tables of this
module.

Associated services
The Table directory of a functional module allows you to access the following services,
which can be reached via the contextual menu:

33003101.26 237
 Functional modules

Directory Services

Table New Animation Table: allows you to create a new animation table.

Detach all: allows you to detach all the animation tables from the functional
module, without deleting them.

Import: allows you to access import of the animation tables, page 1708 in the
functional module.
For each animation Open: allows you to access the animation table.
table
Copy: allows you to duplicate the animation table.

Paste: allows you to add a copy of an animation table into the animation tables
directory in the functional module and the project browser.

Export: allows you to access export of the animation table, page 1707.

Delete: allows you to delete the animation table.

Detach: allows you to detach the animation table from the functional module,
without deleting it.

Properties: allows you to access the animation table properties.

Functional Module Operator Screens Directory

At a Glance
The Screen directory of a functional module allows you to access the operator screens of
this module.

Associated services
The Screen directory of a functional module allows you to access the following services,
which can be reached via the contextual menu:

238 33003101.26
Functional modules

Directory Services

Screen Import: allows you to access import of one or more screens, page 1705 and/or
families of screens.

New family: allows you to create a new family of screens.

New screen: allows you to create a new operator screen.

Detach all: allows you to detach all the screen elements from the functional
module, without deleting them.

For each family of See Operator Screens Directory, page 215 for a description of the screen families
screens services.
For each operator See Operator Screens Directory, page 215 for a description of the services
screen available from the screen.

Summary of the services associated with the functional

view
At a Glance
The following tables summarize the services associated with the functional view of the
project and indicate the operating modes in which you can use them.

Functional Project Directory

The Functional Project directory, page 234 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Functional New Functional Module Yes Yes Yes

Project
Detach All Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Project Settings Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

33003101.26 239
 Functional modules

Functional Module Directory

The Functional Module directory, page 235 allows you to access the following services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

For each New Functional Module Yes Yes Yes

functional
module Detach All Yes Yes Yes

Create Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Protection of Included Sections Yes Yes Yes

Create builded Activation Conditions Table Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Functional Module Program Directory

The program directory, page 236 of a functional module allows you to access the following
services.

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Program(1) Create Yes Yes Yes

or Import Yes No No

Logic(1) Detach All Yes Yes Yes

Protection of Included Sections Yes Yes Yes

Create builded Activation Conditions Table Yes Yes Yes

For each Refer to the table below for services availability according to the operating mode.
Program Unit

240 33003101.26
Functional modules

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

For each section, Open Yes Yes Yes

event processing
Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Import After Yes No No

Force to 0 No Yes Yes

Force to 1 No Yes Yes

Unforce No Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

(1) Depends on the CPU

The Program Unit directory, page 236 of a functional module allows you to access the
following services.

33003101.26 241
 Functional modules

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

For each Analyze Yes Yes Yes

Program Unit
Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste After Yes Yes Yes

Paste Special after Yes Yes Yes

Import After Yes No No

Export Yes No No

Force to 0 No Yes Yes

Force to 1 No Yes Yes

Unforce No Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Sections (under New Section Yes Yes Yes

a Program unit
Import Yes No No

For each section Open Yes Yes Yes

of the Program
Unit Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Import After Yes No No

Export Yes No No

Force to 0 No Yes Yes

Force to 1 No Yes Yes

Unforce No Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

242 33003101.26
Functional modules

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Animation tables New Animation Table Yes Yes Yes

(under Program
Unit) Paste Yes Yes Yes

Detach All Yes Yes Yes

Delete All Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

Export Yes No No

Make All Tables Permanent Yes Yes Yes

Purge Temporary Tables Yes Yes Yes

Open Forced Bits Table No Yes Yes

For each Open Yes Yes Yes

animation table
of the Program Copy Yes Yes Yes
Unit
Paste Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Functional Module Animation Tables Directory

The Table directory, page 237 of a functional module allows you to access the following
services.

33003101.26 243
 Functional modules

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Table New Animation Table Yes Yes Yes

Import Yes No No

Detach All Yes Yes Yes

For each Open Yes Yes Yes
animation table
Export Yes No No

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Properties Yes Yes Yes

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Functional Module Operator Screens Directory

The Screen directory, page 238 of a functional module allows you to access the following
services.

244 33003101.26
Functional modules

Directory Services Mode

Off-line On-line On-line

Stop Run

Screen New family Yes Yes Yes

New screen Yes No No

Import Yes No No

Detach All Yes Yes Yes

For each family New screen Yes Yes Yes
of screens
Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Family Properties Yes Yes Yes

For each Open Yes Yes Yes

operator screen
Copy Yes Yes Yes

Paste Yes Yes Yes

Export Yes No No

Detach Yes Yes Yes

Delete Yes Yes Yes

Screen properties Yes Yes Yes

33003101.26 245
 Functional modules

The functional modules and their associated

utilities
About this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter is a guide on how to use the utilities associated with the functional
modules.

Properties of a functional module

Properties to define
List of different properties to define:
• the name comprising 32 characters. This name must be unique for modules positioned
on the same level.
• the comment comprising 256 characters.
NOTE: The activation condition and the protection of the program elements (Program
Units, sections, program modules and event processing) are defined under program
element properties.

Displaying or editing properties

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the functional view, right-click the functional module, in the Functional Project directory.

2 Click Properties.

3 Perform the editing.

4 Confirm with OK.

NOTE: The Apply button confirms the editing without closing the window.

246 33003101.26
Functional modules

Creating a functional module

At a Glance
A functional module can be created off-line, with the PLC at Stop or in Run.
It can be created at the Project level or at the level of each existing functional module.

Creating a new functional module

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the functional view, right-click the Functional Project directory.

2 Select New Functional Module.

3 Enter the name and comment and confirm with OK.

Creating a lower level functional module

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the functional view, right-click the module "above", in the Functional Project directory.

2 Select New Functional Module.

3 Enter the name and comment and confirm with OK.

Moving a functional module

A functional module can be moved off-line, with the PLC at Stop or in Run (this has no
effect on the execution of the project). The movement corresponds only to a modification of
the functional architecture of the project (a module is directly attached to the Functional
Project directory level or to another functional module).
Moving a functional module:

33003101.26 247
 Functional modules

Step Action

1 Left-click on the module to be moved (holding down the mouse button),

2 Move the module to the desired position.

Programming a functional module

Introduction to programming a functional module
A functional module has a program directory (Program or Logic) that may contain program
elements:
• Program Unit (only for Modicon M580 an M340)
• LD, ST, FBD, IL sections
• event processing
• SFC sections
For more detailed information, refer to chapter Application Program structure (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).
Various cases may arise when programming a functional module:
• Case 1: the program element already exists in the structural view
• Case 2: creating the program element using the functional view
• Case 3: importing a program element using the functional view

Case 1: the program element already exists in the structural view

The program element has already been created in the structural view:

Step Action

1 Select the program element.

2 Move the program element to the functional module.

Case 2: creating the program element using the functional view

The following table shows how to create a program element:

248 33003101.26
Functional modules

Step Action

1 In the Functional view, right-click the Program or Logic directory in the functional module
directory.

2 Select the Create ... command from the contextual menu.

3 Select either New Program Unit ..., New Section ..., New Timer Event ... or New IO Event ....

4 Enter the various headings in exactly the same way as for creating a program element from the
structural view. The name of the functional module is shown again at the structural view level.

Case 3: importing a program element using the functional view

The following table shows how to import a program element:

Step Action

1 In the Functional view, right-click the Program or Logic directory in the functional module
directory.

2 Select the Import ... command from the contextual menu.

3 In the Import dialog select the file to be imported.

4 Click on the Import button to finish the import.

When using the functional view to import a program element that does not have its task in
the importing application, the program element is attached to the MAST task.

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Verify that an imported program element operates correctly while attached to the MAST
task if it was originally running in a non-MAST task.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Rules
Take into account the following notes:

1 An SFC section can only be created off-line and then only in the MAST task.

2 A macro-step or an event can only be created off-line.

33003101.26 249
 Functional modules

3 The other actions are authorized in off-line mode, with the PLC at Stop or in Run.

4 The protection of a module applies to all the program elements attached to the functional module
and to the lower level modules.

Protecting program elements of the functional module

At a Glance
In a functional module you are able to define the protection, page 187 of the program
elements contained in the module.

Protection
Procedure:

Select from Then...

the functional module • with the mouse right-click the functional module in the Functional Project
directory of the functional view,
• select Protection of Included Section(s) ...,
• select Read only or No read & write.
Result: All the program elements of the module are protected.

from the Program or Logic • with the mouse right-click on the Program or Logic directory in a functional
directory module of the functional view,
• select Protection of Included Section(s) ...,
• select Read only or No read & write.
Result: All the program elements of the module are protected.

Debugging a functional module

At a Glance
The organization of a functional module, and the distribution of the Program Units, sections,
event processing and SFC sections in the various modules has no impact on the execution
of the program. The program is executed in the order shown in the structural view. To help
you debug a functional view, the following are available:
• basic debugging functions,
• the animation table initialization function.

250 33003101.26
Functional modules

Initializing an animation table

This action allows you to initialize an animation table, with the activation conditions
associated with the program elements of the functional module.

Select from Then...

the functional module • right-click with the mouse on the directory of a functional module in the
functional view.
• select Create builded Activation Conditions Table.
from the Program or • with the mouse right-click on the Program or Logic directory in a functional
Logic directory module of the functional view.
• select Create builded Activation Conditions Table.

NOTE: All the activation conditions that are displayed in the animation table are the
conditions used during the last build (partial or total).

Detaching/Deleting a functional module

At a Glance
Detaching elements from a functional module consists of cutting the links between a
functional module and the associated elements (program elements, animation table and
screen).
• the Program Units and/or sections contained in the module are not deleted, they are
merely detached,
• the animation tables associated with the modules are not deleted, they are merely
detached from the module,
• the screens associated with the modules are not deleted, they are merely detached
from the module.
NOTE: These actions are authorized off-line and on-line, with PLC at Stop or in Run.

Detaching Functional Modules

To detach functional modules carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 251
 Functional modules

Step Action

1 Select the Functional Project directory.

2 Select Detach All from the contextual menu.

3 Confirm with Yes.

Detaching a functional module

To detach a functional module carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the functional module from the Functional Project directory.

2 Select Detach All from the contextual menu.

3 Confirm with Yes.

Detaching all the elements in a directory from a functional

module
To detach all the elements in a directory (Program, Logic, Table, Screen) from a functional
module, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Select the Program or Logic or Table or Screen directory from the functional module.

2 Select the Detach All command from the contextual menu.

Result: All the elements in the chosen directory are detached from the functional module.

Detaching one element in a directory from a functional module

To detach one element in a directory (Program, Logic, Table, Screen from a functional
module, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Select the element to be detached in the Program or Logic or Table or Screen directory.

2 Select Detach from the contextual menu.

Result: The element in the chosen directory is detached from the functional module.

252 33003101.26
Functional modules

Introduction to deleting a functional module

Deletion can be carried out in a number of ways:
• deleting one or more functional modules without deleting the program elements,
animation tables and screens,
• deleting one functional module with deletion of the program elements, animation tables
and screens,
• deleting all the functional modules with deletion of the program elements, animation
tables and screens,
• deleting one section, a macro-step or an event processing in a functional module.

Deleting one or more functional modules without deleting the

program elements, animation tables and screens
To delete a functional module without deleting the program elements and animation tables,
you must proceed as follows:

Step Action

1 From the functional module, detach the module with the Detach all command in the contextual
menu.

Result: All the elements of the module and the lower level modules are detached.
2 Delete the module(s) by right-clicking (contextual menu) and selecting the Delete command.

Note: You must be in off-line mode.

33003101.26 253
 Functional modules

Deleting one functional module with deletion of the modules,

animation tables and screens

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Before deleting a module, ensure that the deletion of the subsequent elements:
• the Program Units contained in the module,
• the sub-modules contained in the module,
• the sections contained in the module,
• the associated animation tables,
• the associated screens,
has no adverse consequence on the application behavior.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the module.

2 Select Delete.
3 Confirm with Yes.

NOTE: This action is authorized for the SFC sections and the events in off-line mode,
with the PLC at Stop. The other elements may be deleted in Run.

Deleting a Program Unit, or a section, or an event in a functional

module

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
A Program Unit, or a section, or an event may be deleted in a functional module. They are
then deleted in the module and in the associated task.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Carry out the following actions:

254 33003101.26
Functional modules

Step Action

1 Select the desired Program Unit, or section, or event.

2 Select Delete.
3 Confirm with Yes.

Rules
Take into account the following rules:

1 In order not to delete the contents of a module, you must detach its elements before deleting.

2 An SFC section or an event can only be deleted in off-line mode.

Functional module export

Exporting a functional module
You can export, page 1709 a functional module.

Functional module import

Importing a functional module
You can import, page 1710 a functional module.

Creating, Deleting, Locating, Dragging-and-Dropping an

Animation Table in a Functional Module
At a Glance
In a functional module you are able to create, delete, locate and drag-and-drop an animation
table.

33003101.26 255
 Functional modules

Creating an Animation Table

Procedure:

If the table Then...

already exists • select the animation table in the Functional Project directory of the
functional view or the Animation tables directory of the structural view,
• drop the animation table to a functional module in the Table directory level.

needs to be created from • with the mouse right-click the Table directory of the module,
the functional view • select New Animation Table.

Accessing the Properties of an Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the table.

2 Select Properties from the contextual menu.

3 You can edit the name or the comment of a table and its assignment to a module.

Copying an Animation Table.

Procedure:

If the table Then...

needs to be copied from the • with the mouse right-click the source table in the Functional Project
functional view. directory of the functional view,
• select Copy,
• select the source table in the Functional Project directory of the functional
view,
• select Paste.
Result: The copy of the table is created in the source table directory.

Opening an Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

256 33003101.26
Functional modules

Step Action

1 Select the table.

2 Select Open from the contextual menu.

Deleting an Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the table.

2 Select Delete from the contextual menu.

Moving an Animation Table

Procedure:

If using Then...

the drag-and-drop function • left-click on the table to be moved (holding down the mouse button),
• drop the table at the desired position.
Note: The insertion point of the table is represented by a line.

Properties from the • select the table,

contextual menu • select Properties from the contextual menu,
• select the name of the module in the Functional Module zone.

Detach all Animation Tables

Procedure:

If using the contextual Then...

menu
Detach all • select the Table directory of the functional module,
• select Detach All from the contextual menu,
• confirm with Yes.

33003101.26 257
 Functional modules

Detaching an Animation Table

Procedure:

If using the contextual Then...

menu
Detach • select the animation table,
• select Detach from the contextual menu,
• confirm with Yes.
Properties • select the table,
• select Properties from the contextual menu,
• select "none" in the Functional Module zone.

Creating, Deleting, Locating and Dragging-and-Dropping

an Operator Screen in a Functional Module
At a Glance
In a functional module you are able to create, delete, locate and drag-and-drop an operator
screen.

Creating an Operator Screen

Procedure:

If the screen Then...

already exists • select the operator screen in the Functional Project directory of the
functional view or the Operator Screens directory of the structural view,
• in any language editor window, select Open Operator Screen. in the
function block contextual menu.
• drop the operator screen in a functional module at the Screen directory
level.
NOTE: With the Open Operator Screen menu if multiple operator screens
exist with the same name, the editor opens the first one found.

needs to be created from • with the mouse right-click the Screen directory of the functional module,
the functional view
• select New screen.

258 33003101.26
Functional modules

Accessing the Operator Screen Properties

Procedure:

If selected at the level of Then...

the
a family of screens • select the family of screens in the Screen directory of the structural view,
• Select Family Properties from the contextual menu.

a specific screen • select a screen in the Screen directory of the structural view,
• Select Screen Properties from the contextual menu.

Creating a Family of Operator Screens

Procedure:

If the family Then...

already exists • select the family of operator screens in the Functional Project directory of
the functional view or the Operator Screen directory of the structural view,
• drop the family of operator screens in a functional module at the Screen
directory level.

needs to be created from • with the mouse right-click the Screen directory of the functional module,
the functional view • select New family.

Opening an Operator Screen

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the operator screen in the Functional Project directory of the functional view or the
Operator Screens directory of the structural view.

2 Select Open from the contextual menu.

Deleting an Operator Screen

Procedure:

33003101.26 259
 Functional modules

If the screen Then...

does not belong to a family • with the mouse right click the operator screen in the Operator Screen
of screens directory,
• select Delete.
belongs to a family of • from the Screen directory, right-click the operator screen belonging to the
screens family,
• select Delete.

Moving an Operator Screen

Procedure:

If using Then...

the drag-and-drop function • left-click on the operator screen to be moved (holding down the mouse
button),
• move the operator screen to the desired location.
NOTE: The insertion point of the operator screen is represented by a line.

Screen Properties from • select the operator screen,

the contextual menu • select Screen Properties from the contextual menu,
• select the name of the module in the Location zone.

Detaching All Screens and Families of Screens

Procedure:

If you have chosen to Then...

detach
the operator screens and • select the Screen directory of the functional module,
the families of screens
• select Detach All from the contextual menu,
• confirm with Yes.
the family of screens • in the Screen directory of the functional module, select the family of
screens,
• select Detach from the contextual menu,

a specific screen • select the operator screen in the Screen directory of the functional module,
• select Detach from the contextual menu,

260 33003101.26
Functional modules

Accessing the Messages List

The following table shows the procedure for accessing the operator screens messages list.

Step Action

1 Select the Operator Screens directory from the structural view.

2 Select Messages list from the contextual menu.

33003101.26 261
262 33003101.26
FDT Container

FDT Container
What’s in This Chapter
FDT Container....................................................................... 263
DTM Hardware Catalog.......................................................... 266
DTM Browser ........................................................................ 279
DTM Properties Tabs ............................................................. 305

Object of the Chapter

This chapter introduces the FDT Container and explains how it is used.

FDT Container
Object of this Section
This section is an introduction to using DTMs in Control Expert.

Introduction to the Control Expert FDT Container

At a Glance
The FDT/DTM (Field Device Tool/Device Type Manager), an open-standard, in Control
Expert integrates the configuration tools needed to build projects, with a mix of Schneider
and Third Party intelligent devices, on heterogeneous networks.
Control Expert is now a FDT Container (Field Device Tool Container) for DTMs and,
therefore, is a Generic Fieldbus Intergrater.
NOTE: Schneider-Electric is not responsible for the correct functioning of non-
Schneider-Electric DTMs under Control Expert.

33003101.26 263
 FDT Container

FDT Concept
The FDT defines the interfaces between device-specific software components (DTMs) and
Control Expert. The focus of the current version of FDT is on engineering, commissioning,
diagnostics and documentation of fieldbus based control systems.
The device-specific software component is called a DTM (Device Type Manager), which are
supplied by the device manufacturer together with the device. Because the FDT technology
used in Control Expert is based on an open standard, Control Expert accepts compliant
DTM products from any DTM/device vendor.
NOTE: The DTMs are installed/uninstalled on the PC (like most other Windows®
programs) that runs Control Expert and information about the DTMs is kept in the
Windows Registry.
NOTE: The DTM Browser displays the DTM connectivity configuration, but does not
create any topological variables (%I or %Q) in the application.

Components
To create a Fieldbus network with Control Expert, its FDT Container uses:
• The DTM Hardware Catalog, page 267
• The DTM Browser, page 279
• The DTM Editor, which uses vendor supplied GUIs to configure the DTMs
NOTE: The DTM vendor is responsible for the DTM Configuration on-line Help, it is
not available through the Control Expert on-line Help.

FDT Container User Rights

At a Glance
With 2 exceptions, a FDT Container user has unlimited access to the installed DTMs.

User Rights
The FDT Container user has all rights of access for the DTM connectivity tree (add, delete,
configure, save DTMs) unless:
1. The Control Expert profile is set to Read Only for the user
2. The user has opened Control Expert in the Read Only mode

264 33003101.26
FDT Container

Control Expert Online/Offline and Device Connections

For the user to load and store DTM device parameters from/to its physical device, the device
must be connected to its DTM through the Host PC.
This connection:
• Requires that the DTM be installed on the Host PC.
• Is independent of the Control Expert - PLC connection status. A DTM can connect to
its device and transfer configuration information over the network in either direction
under both conditions: Control Expert off-line or Control Expert on-line.

Limitation
If the user opens a project in Read Only mode, the DTM user right remains in Read-Only as
long as the project is still opened (even if the user removes the Read-Only opened mode by
performing the service Save As).

33003101.26 265
 FDT Container

DTM Hardware Catalog

Object of the Section
This section explains the DTM Hardware Catalog.

Introduction to the Hardware Catalog

Introduction
The Control Expert Hardware Catalog contains a list of modules and devices that you can
add to a Control Expert project. EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP devices are located in the
DTM Catalog tab at the bottom of the Hardware Catalog. Each module or device in the
catalog is represented by a DTM that defines its parameters.

EDS Files
Not all devices in today’s market offer device-specific DTMs. Some devices are defined by
device-specific EDS files. Control Expert displays EDS files in the form of a DTM. In this
way, you can use Control Expert to configure devices that are defined by an EDS file in the
same way you would configure a device defined by its DTM.
Other devices lack both a DTM and an EDS file. Configure those devices by using the
generic DTM on the DTM Catalog page.

View the Hardware Catalog

Open the Control Expert Hardware Catalog:

Step Action

1 Open Control Expert.

2 Find the PLC bus in the Project Browser.

3 Use one method to open the catalog:

• Use the pull-down menu (Tools > Hardware Catalog).
• Double-click an empty slot in the PLC bus.

266 33003101.26
FDT Container

Description of DTM Hardware Catalog

At a Glance
The DTM Hardware Catalog displays all the DTMs installed on the PC.
The DTM tab of the Hardware Catalog is divided into 3 parts:
• The Filter area
• The Device List Area
• The Update button

The DTM Catalog Tab

The following illustration is an example of the DTM Hardware Catalog:

33003101.26 267
 FDT Container

Add DTMs to Connectivity Tree

There are 2 ways to add DTMs to a DTM connectivity tree:
• By using the Add device, page 293 procedure in the DTM Browser
• By using the mouse to drag a DTM from the Hardware Catalog and dropping it on an
appropriate DTM in the connectivity tree

The Filter Area

The browser in the Filter Area has 4 types of filters with sub-filters. The actual sub-filters
available depend on the type of DTMs installed on the PC:
• Devices
There are 3 device type sub-filters:
◦ Communication
◦ Gateway or Modular
◦ (Other) Devices
• Vendors
Selecting a vendor name displays only the installed DTMs from that vendor.
• Groups
Selecting a group type displays only the installed DTMs corresponding to that type of
DTM.
• Protocols
Selecting a protocol displays only the installed DTMs corresponding to that type of
protocol.
When a protocol is selected as the filter, a DTM is only shown if this protocol is required
and/or supported by the DTM.
When a filter is selected, only the DTMs corresponding to that filter are displayed in the
Device List Area.

The Device List Area

The Device List Area columns give information about each DTM. They are:
• Device (name)
• Type
• Vendor (name)
• Version

268 33003101.26
FDT Container

• Date
Clicking on a column heading sorts the DTMs alphabetically according the contents of the
column.

DTM Properties
To display the properties of a DTM from the Device List Area:

Step Action

1 Click anywhere on the line of the DTM.

Result: The DTM is selected.

2 Right-click on the DTM.

Result: The Properties menu opens.

3 Use the tabs, page 305 to see additional information about the DTM:

4 When finished with the window, click on OK or Cancel.

NOTE: When installing or modifying a DTM, update the Hardware Catalog, page 270 to
update its properties information.

33003101.26 269
 FDT Container

Update Hardware Catalog

The DTM catalog is fully embedded in the Control Expert software and requires to be up to
date whenever a DTM is installed or unistalled. It can be done:
• automatically when the Control Expert software is launched in closed project mode
• or manually, from the Hardware Catalog window, anytime the customer requests an
update.
When the Control Expert software is launched, in closed project mode, and DTMs are
installed or uninstalled on/from the PC, the DTM catalog must be updated using the
following procedure:

Step Action

1 When DTMs are installed or uninstalled and the Control Expert software is launched.

Results: The dialog box update opens:

2 Click on the Yes button.

Results: When the update is completed, a message box appears:

NOTE: Only a V1.2.1 FDT/DTM version or higher provides the detection service.
The DTM catalog can be updated manually update can be done using the following
procedure:

270 33003101.26
FDT Container

Step Action

1 From the hardware Catalog, page 270, click on the Update button.

Results: The dialog box update opens:

2 Click on the Yes button.

Results: The standard Control Expert progress control dialog is displayed:

Updating the Hardware Catalog does not modify the build status of the DTM. It creates an
internal catalog file based on the installed DTMs existing in the Windows® registry.
The time necessary for an update depends on the number for DTMs installed and their
sizes.

DTM Version Compatibility

The compatibility of DTM versions is managed by the vendor. They cannot be managed in
Control Expert.
During an update no check is made if a DTM missing from the Hardware Catalog is used in
an application.
There are 2 methods to check and display any inconsistencies:
• Build the whole Control Expert application
• Run the Check devices, page 289 service from the HostPS contextual menu

Adding a DTM to the Control Expert Hardware Catalog

A Manufacturer-Defined Process
Before a DTM can be used by the Control Expert Hardware Catalog, install the DTM on the
host PC (the PC that is running Control Expert).

33003101.26 271
 FDT Container

The installation process for the DTM is defined by the device manufacturer. Consult the
documentation from the device manufacturer to install a device DTM on your PC.
NOTE: After a device DTM is successfully installed on your PC, update the Control
Expert Hardware Catalog to see the new DTM in the catalog. The DTM can then be
added to a Control Expert project.

Adding an EDS File to the Hardware Catalog

Introduction
You may want to use an EtherNet/IP device for which no DTM is in the catalog. In that case,
use these instructions to import the EDS files into the catalog to create a corresponding
DTM.
Control Expert includes a wizard you can use to add one or more EDS files to the Control
Expert Hardware Catalog. The wizard presents instruction screens to execute these
commands:
• Simplify the addition of EDS files to the Hardware Catalog.
• Provide a redundancy check when you add duplicate EDS files to the Hardware
Catalog.
NOTE: The Control Expert Hardware Catalog displays a partial collection of DTMs and
EDS files that are registered with the ODVA. This library includes DTMs and EDS files
for products that are not manufactured or sold by Schneider Electric. The non-Schneider
Electric EDS files are identified by vendor in the catalog. Please contact the identified
device’s manufacturer for inquiries regarding the corresponding non-Schneider Electric
EDS files.

Adding EDS Files

Open the EDS Addition dialog box:

Step Action

1 Open a Control Expert project that includes an Ethernet communication module.

2 Open the DTM Browser (Tools > DTM Browser).

3 In the DTM Browser, select a communication module.

4 Right-click on the communication module and scroll to Device menu > Additional functions > Add
EDS to library.

5 In the EDS Addition window, click Next.

272 33003101.26
FDT Container

You can now see this page:

Add one or more EDS files to the library:

Step Action

1 Use these commands in the Select the Location of the EDS File(s) area of the EDS Addition dialog
box to identify the location of the EDS files:
• Add File(s): Add one or more EDS files that are individually selected.
• Add all the EDS from the Directory: Add all files from a selected folder. (Check Look in
Subfolders to add EDS files from the folders within the selected folder.)

2 Click Browse to open a navigation dialog box.

3 Select the location of the EDS file(s):

• Navigate to at least one EDS file.
• Navigate to a folder that contains EDS files.
NOTE: Keep the location selected (highlighted).

4 Click Select to close the navigation window.

NOTE: Your selection appears in the Directory or File Name field.

33003101.26 273
 FDT Container

Step Action

5 Choose the naming convention rule for the EDS DTM name creation.

The new naming convention is based on Model Name / Product Name and Revision. A random
character is automatically suffixed when Model Name / Product Name and Revision of an EDS file in
the library is identical. The new naming convention is irrespective of the order in which EDS files are
added to device library.

By default, the New Naming Convention check box is selected and the new naming rule applies.
NOTE: To keep backward compatibility with Unity Pro/Control Expert versions, unchecked the
New Naming Convention check box and the naming rule is based on Model Name / Product
Name.
6 Click Next to compare the selected EDS files to the files in the library.
NOTE: If one or more selected EDS files is a duplicate, a File Already Exists message appears.
Click Close to hide the message.

7 The next page of the EDS Addition wizard opens. It indicates the status of each device you
attempted to add:

• check mark (green): The EDS file can be added.

• informational icon (blue): There is a redundant file.

• exclamation point (red): There is an invalid EDS file.

NOTE: You can click View Selected File to open and view the selected file.

8 Click Next to add the non-duplicate files.

Result: The next page of the EDS Addition wizard opens to indicate that the action is complete.

9 Click Finish to close the wizard.

Result: The hardware catalog automatically updates.

Removing an EDS File from the Hardware Catalog

Introduction
You can remove a module or device from the list of available devices in the Control Expert
Hardware Catalog by removing its EDS file from the library.
When you remove an EDS file from the library, the device or module disappears from the
DTM Catalog. However, removing the file from the library does not delete the file from its
stored location, so you can import the file again later.

274 33003101.26
FDT Container

Removing an EDS File from the Catalog

Use these steps to remove an EDS file from the catalog:

Step Action

1 Open the Control Expert DTM Browser (Tools > DTM Browser).
2 In the DTM Browser, select an Ethernet communication module.

3
Right-click the module and scroll to Device menu > Additional functions > Remove EDS from
library to open the EDS Deletion from Device Library window:

4 Use the selection lists in the heading of this window to specify how EDS files are displayed:

Display Choose criteria to filter the list of EDS files:

• All EDS (no filtering)
• Only Devices
• Only Chassis
• Only Modules

Sort by Choose criteria to sort the list of displayed EDS files:

• File Name
• Manufacturer
• Category
• Device Name
Displayed Name Choose the identifier for each device:
• Catalog Name
• Product Name

33003101.26 275
 FDT Container

Step Action

5 Expand (+) the Device Library navigation tree and select the EDS file you want to remove.
NOTE: Click View Selected File to see the read-only contents of the selected EDS file.

6 Click the Delete Selected File(s) button to open the DeleteEDS dialog box.

7 Click Yes to remove the selected EDS file from the list.
8 Repeat these steps for each EDS file you want to delete.

9 Click Finish to close the wizard.

Result: The hardware catalog automatically updates.

Export / Import EDS Library

Introduction
To use the same project on two Control Expert installations (for example a source, and a
target Host PCs), you may have to update the DTM Hardware Catalog of the target Host
PC.
Instead of adding one by one the missing EDS files in the target Host PC, you can update
the DTM Hardware Catalog in two steps:
• Exporting the EDS library from the source Host PC.
• Importing the EDS library in the target Host PC.
NOTE: When you export the EDS library, the software generates an .DLB file which
contains all the DTM created form EDS files.

Exporting EDS Library

Open the Export EDS Library dialog box:

Step Action

1 Open a Control Expert project that includes an Ethernet communication module.

2 Open the DTM Browser (Tools > DTM Browser).

3 In the DTM Browser, select a communication module.

276 33003101.26
FDT Container

Step Action

4
Right-click on the communication module and scroll to Device menu > Additional functions >
Export EDS library to open the Export EDS library window:

5 For the archived EDS library you want to create:

• Enter the full folder path along with the file name in the Enter / Select EDS Library File Name
field, or
• Click Browse to open a navigation dialog box:
◦ Select the location, and
◦ Enter the file name, and
◦ Click Save to close the navigation window and your selection appears in the Enter / Select
EDS Library File Name field.

6 Click Export to create the archived EDS library.

Result: A new wizard opens to indicate that the export is complete. Click Ok to close the wizard.

7 In the Export EDS library window, click Close.

Importing EDS Library

Use these steps to import an archived EDS library:

Step Action

1 Open the Control Expert DTM Browser (Tools > DTM Browser).
2 In the DTM Browser, select an Ethernet communication module.

33003101.26 277
 FDT Container

Step Action

3
Right-click the module and scroll to Device menu > Additional functions > Import EDS library to
open the Import EDS library window:

4 For the archived EDS library you want to import:

• Enter the full folder path along with the file name in the Enter / Select EDS Library File Name
field, or
• Click Browse to open a navigation dialog box:
◦ Select the location, and
◦ Enter the file name, and
◦ Click Save to close the navigation window and your selection appears in the Enter / Select
EDS Library File Name field.

5 Click Import.

Result: A new wizard opens to indicate that the export is complete. Click Ok to close the wizard.

6 In the Import EDS library window, click Close.

278 33003101.26
FDT Container

DTM Browser
About this Section
This section describes the DTM Browser, which enables the user to select the different
DTMs that make up the DTM connectivity tree on the host PC.

DTM Browser
At a Glance
The DTM Browser is the main component of the Control Expert FDT Container. The DTM
devices are managed from the browser.

DTM Browser
To open the DTM Browser use the Tools menu -> DTM Browser:

33003101.26 279
 FDT Container

The root of the DTM Browser is HostPC, which is the PC platform for the Control Expert
project.

DTM Browser DTM Types

The DTM Browser displays the configured DTMs added to the connectivity tree HostPC with
hierarchical levels (nodes).
There are 3 types of DTMs:
• Communication DTMs (drivers)
◦ Any COM DTM can be plugged directly under the root node (HostPC) and must be
at the 1st level
◦ A COM DTM can support Gateway DTMs or Device DTMs as children if their
protocols are compatible
• Gateway DTMs
A Gateway DTM can support other Gateway DTMs or Device DTMs as children if their
protocols are compatible.
• Device DTMs
A Device DTM does not support any child DTMs

280 33003101.26
FDT Container

The following illustration is a connectivity tree:

The following table describes the different hierarchical nodes of the connected DTMs in the
above example connectivity tree:

Number Description of Level

1 The First Level is the root node, HostPC, which is where the PC is connected to the physical
network.
2 The Second Level devices are communication DTMs (drivers) that connect to their physical
communication devices on the network.
3 The Third Level devices are connected to a communication device.

Copy Paste feature

Each device DTM configured can be copied and pasted to easily create configuration.

33003101.26 281
 FDT Container

NOTE: Only Device DTMs can be copy and pasted.

Operating mode to make a Copy/Paste:
• Make a right click on the Device DTM you want to Copy/Paste
• Select Copy
• Make a right click on the Communication DTM or Gateway DTM in which you want to
paste the Device DTM
• Select Paste.
NOTE: If protocols are matching only device DTM can be paste under Communication
DTM, only if protocols are matching. Communication DTM has to be in off-line mode.
NOTE: If protocols are matching, only device DTM can be paste under Gateway DTM,
only if protocols are matching. Gateway DTM has to be in off-line mode.
NOTE: When a DTM is pasted in the connectivity Tree, the General tab, page 306 is
displayed. By default, the copied DTM alias is based on a valid DTM alias name.
NOTE: A default address is automatically created after the paste of a device DTM. The
address can be modified when entering in the father DTM configuration screen. Copy/
Paste feature has limitation, it can only be done inside an application and can not be
done between two applications.

Tree View Naming

Each DTM has a default name when inserted into the browser. The syntax is the following:
<Channel: Bus Address> User Name:
• Channel
This is the name of the channel communication media where the DTM is plugged in.
This name is read from the DTM and is set by the device vendor.
• Bus Address of the device. It can be either:
◦ The connection point on its parent gateway network
◦ The slot number in the modular device parent internal bus
This information is supplied by the parent DTM and can be modified in Control Expert if
the DTM supports this modification.
• User Defined Name
This name is set by default to the vendors name for the DTM name (which is the default
vendor name), but can be reset, page 302.
Examples:
• For a communication DTM
<1> My =S= PRM COMM, where 1 is the references number.

282 33003101.26
FDT Container

• For a Device or a Gateway

<Profibus:1> Tank1Sond1 means that the DTM is connected to the Profibus channel of
its “parent” at connection point 1.

Example Connectivity Tree

The following illustration is a connectivity tree:

Number Node Level Description

1 This Second Level PRM Comm Master communication DTM connects to the HostPC for
communication with a PRM device via the Ethernet for DPV0 and DPV1 exchanges.

2 This Second Level PRM Comm communication DTM connects to the HostPC for communication
with a PRM device via the Ethernet for DPV1 exchanges.

3 This Third Level Profibus Gateway DTM connects simple or Gateway devices to the higher
communication DTM.
4 The Simple or Compact DTMs are connected to communication DTMs that allow them to
communicate with their physical devices on the network. These tree leaves do not allow any
sub-connectively.

33003101.26 283
 FDT Container

Ethernet Ready Equipment

Definition
An Ethernet Ready equipment is an Ethernet equipment that provides additional services
compared to standard EIP or Modbus equipment.

Applicability
This concept of Ready equipment applies to:
• Standalone devices connected to the Ethernet I/O
• Modules plugged on the Ethernet backplane
NOTE: The only Ready module that exists is the BME CXM 0100.

Representation

In Control Expert, such devices are identified with a specific green label in the DTM
browser:

Services
Ready services are related to the software integration of the products into Control Expert. It
is based on DTM technology.
This table presents the services available for Ethernet Ready equipment:

284 33003101.26
FDT Container

Service Description

Single parameter entry Any device parameter that you enter is shared into the entire configuration
environment.
Bus editor declaration Declaration is done from the Ethernet I/O bus editor or PLC bus editor in the
Control Expert browser. It uses products that belong natively to the Control Expert
Hardware Catalog.

System transfer You can transfer all the system in a single operation: the Ready device
configuration is transferred to the PLC with the PLC application.
NOTE: The PLC acts as a configuration server for all the Ready devices.

Scanning capacity Scanned in a deterministic way (from the CPU RIO scanner(1)): you can attach the
Ready equipment to any PLC task. It is refreshed within the task scan.
NOTE: This Ready equipment is called remote equipment to differentiate it
from distributed equipment, which is scanned from the DIO scanner (RPI can
be changed and is not linked to the task period).

Alert message Inform you when a modification done from the device DTM impacts the PLC
application and can lead to stop the PLC.

Online help integration –

Shared user rights User rights are automatically shared between Control Expert and the device DTM.

(1) Scanners that accept Ready devices (M580 CPU) are also identified with this green label .

Ready, Built, Connected and Installed DTMs

At a Glance
The status of a DTM is indicated in the DTM Browser: Ready, Not-Built, Connected and
Installed.

Ready
Ready devices or modules are devices or modules that are used by DTMs and fully
integrated in the Control Expert software, they mainly bring two particularities:
• They use new Control Expert mechanisms to be integrated into the Control Expert
hardware catalog.
• They are managed by Control Expert Ethernet I/O bus editors as for any X80 I/O
modules.
A green “R” icon indicates that the device or module is a Ready one.

33003101.26 285
 FDT Container

Built or Not-Built DTMs

Build status:
• Not-Built: A blue check marks indicated that a node or one of its sub-nodes have
changed, the information stored in the physical device is no longer consistent with the
local project.
• Built: After building the Control Expert project, the blue check mark is no longer in front
of browser nodes that were changed before the build.

Connected or Non-Connected DTMs

Connecting a DTM to its physical device automatically connects all higher level parent
nodes up to the root node (all DTMs that the DTM being connected depends on.
Disconnecting a DTM from its physical device automatically disconnects all its lower level
child nodes (all DTMs that depend on the DTM being disconnected).
Connection status:
• Connected: Connected nodes are represented by bold text in the browser. A node can
be connected without all its sub-nodes being connected.
• Non-Connected: Non-connected nodes are represented by normal text.
NOTE: Connecting a fieldbus or device is not linked the Control Expert connection
to a PLC (Off-line or On-line). DTMs can be connected/disconnected while Control
Expert is either Off-line or On-line.

Installed DTMs
Installation status:
A red X on the icon of a DTM indicates that the DTM software is not installed on the PC.
• This status is updated (red X added) when devices are detected but no DTM software
is installed on the Host PC when the user:
◦ Updates the Hardware Catalog
◦ Tries to build the application
◦ Tries to use a service in one of the 2 right-click contextual menus in the DTM
Browser
◦ Tries to use the Open service by left-clicking twice on a DTM in the DTM Browser
• This status is updated (red X removed) when the user updates the Hardware Catalog
with the missing DTM.
A right-click on an invalid or non-installed DTM opens a 2-item contextual menu:

286 33003101.26
FDT Container

Function Description

Delete This removes the selected DTM (and its sub-nodes) from the DTM project.

Properties
To help identify the non-installed DTMs, this function displays one tab (Device information) in
the Properties of dialog box:

33003101.26 287
 FDT Container

DTM Browser
The following illustration gives examples of built/non-built, connected/non-connected and
non-installed statuses:

The following table explains how a DTM Browser indicates if the DTMs are built, connected
and non-installed:

Number Status Number Status

1 Not-Built 4 Not-Built
2 Non-installed 5 Connected
3 Built

288 33003101.26
FDT Container

DTM Browser Contextual Menus

At a Glance
The (right-click) contextual menu of the DTM Browser offers functions that depend on item
clicked on.
NOTE: The contextual menu items are also available via the Edit and View menus.
The DTM Browser Contextual Menu accesses:
• Adding and deleting DTMs
• Connecting and disconnecting DTMs to their physical devices
• Displaying and printing the properties of a DTM
• Transferring DTM configuration information to and from the physical device
• DTM-specific functions (via the Device menu function)
• Field Bus Discovery used to scan the physical devices in a fieldbus network

Host PC
The Host PC contextual menu:

The HostPC contextual menu has the following items:

Name Description

Add...(1) The Add dialog box opens, a version of the Hardware Catalog, allowing the
selection of a Communication DTM.
Check DTM devices(1) This function checks the current project for invalid or non-PC-installed DTMs. Refer
to Check DTM devices, page 290 below.

DTM Services(1) This function allows the users to select/unselect all the DTMs added in the project
and performed actions on the selected DTMs. Refer to DTM Services, page 291
below.

33003101.26 289
 FDT Container

Name Description

DTM Hardware Catalog This function open the DTM catalog tab in the Hardware Catalog.
(1)

Expand all(2) All DTMs in the project are shown.

Collapse all(2) Only the Commutation DTMs in the project are shown.

(1) This function is available via the Edit menu.

(2) This function is similar to Project Browser Expand/Collapse all, page 163.

Check DTM Devices

If the results of the check include invalid or non-installed DTMs, they are displayed in the
User errors tab in the bottom information window and a Red X is placed over their icons in
the DTM Browser:

NOTE: Check DTM devices only detects installed DTMs, for GSDs verify the GSD
library.

290 33003101.26
FDT Container

DTM Services
The users can select/unselect DTMs added in the project and performed actions on the
selected DTMs:

The DTMs services dialog box menu contains the following group boxes:

Name Description

Communication Dtms The user can select or unselect all communication DTMs and attached DTMs
selection currently added in the project.

Topology The Topology area lists all DTMs added in the project. The set of selected DTMs
can be modified by selecting or unselecting the DTMs in the Structure tree control.

Actions The user can perform actions for each DTMs contained in the set of DTMs
previously selected in the Structure tree control.

On errors The user can select to Continue or Stop the process if an error is detected. A
dialog box is displayed whatever options is selected.

Selection To select either all DTMs added in the project or none.

33003101.26 291
 FDT Container

The dialog box below is an example when the user selects either Continue or Stop in the
On errors group box:

NOTE: The entire process can be cancelled any time by using control button Cancel.

292 33003101.26
FDT Container

Communication and Other DTMs

The available DTM Browser contextual menu items differ according to the DTM selected:

The DTM contextual menu has the following items:

33003101.26 293
 FDT Container

Name Description

Open(1) This opens the “<device name> - DTM Configuration” window with the
Configuration and Device Description information supplied by the device vendor.

A double-click on the DTM in the DTM Browser also opens this window.

Add...(1) This opens the Add dialog box, a version of the Hardware Catalog, allowing the
instantiation of a DTM.

The DTMs are filtered, that is, the Add window only displays DTMs compatible with
the DTM selected in the DTM Browser.

To add a device refer to Add device, page 296 below

Delete(1) If the selected DTM allows this function, this deletes the selected DTM and its sub-
node DTMs from the DTM connectivity tree.

Deletion from the DTM connectivity tree does not effect the DTMs link to the I/O
Scanning table.
NOTE: If the DTM you want to delete is a Gateway, and is not installed on the
Host PC:
• It is possible to delete the DTM only if no devices are configured under
the Gateway.
• If devices are configured under the Gateway, it is not possible to delete
these devices nor the DTM Gateway.

Field Bus Discovery This scans the connected physical devices to create the corresponding field bus
connection topology. This item is only available in the contextual menu if a device
connected.

Refer to Field Bus Discovery, page 297 service.

NOTE: The DTM to scan has to be installed in the PC and the Hardware
Catalog must be up to date.

Sort by address This displays the DTMs sorted under their parent DTMs according to the bus
address of its physical device in ascending order.

Connect(1) This connects the DTM to its physical device on the network. This connection does
not depend on the PLC online/offline status of the Control Expert project
application.

Connecting a Gateway- or Device-DTM implicitly connects its parent DTM.

While the device is connected, Connect is not available.

Disconnect(1) This disconnects the DTM from its physical device. This disconnection does not
depend on the PLC online/offline status of the Control Expert project application.

Disconnecting a DTM implicitly disconnects all its child DTMs.

While the device is disconnected, Disconnect is not available.

Load data from device(1) This uploads the configuration parameters from the physical device to the local
DTM, but not from the application (binary) in the PLC.

While the device is disconnected, Load data from device is not available.

294 33003101.26
FDT Container

Name Description

Store data to device(1) This downloads the local DTM parameters to the physical device. Each DTM must
be stored manually (one by one).

While the device is disconnected, Store data to device is not available.

To make an application in the PLC consistent with the stored DTM, the user must
build the Control Expert application and download the new version of the
application to the PLC

Device Menu The functions in this menu are vendor dependent, such as:
• Compare (the online and offline parameters)
• Diagnostic (displays a diagnostic screen)
• Print (HTML)
• Observe
• Additional functions available when selecting the communication DTM:
◦ EDS file (add, or remove)
◦ EDS library (export, or import)
◦ Online Action
◦ Explicit Message (Ethernet or Modbus)
◦ Store configuration of devices to the FDR server
◦ About
◦ Advanced Mode(4)
When configuring a DTM, the changes are validated in Control Expert in 2 ways,
depending on the changes:
• Automatically as the changes are made.
• You must click on a OK, Apply or Validate button after making the changes.

Properties Refer to the DTM Properties Tabs, page 305 section.

Print device If this optional function is supported by a DTM, it opens the vendor device
documentation in Internet Explorer, which can then be printed.

Only one DTM information can be printed out at time. A print of the whole network
is not available.
Zoom in(1),(2) This displays only the selected DTM node and its child DTMs.

While zoomed-in, Zoom in is not available.

Zoom out(1),(2) This returns to the full display of the DTM connectivity tree.

While there is a full display, Zoom out is not available.

Expand all(3) This displays all DTMs below the selected DTM.

33003101.26 295
 FDT Container

Name Description

Collapse all(3) This displays only the selected DTM.

(1) This function is available via the Edit menu.

(2) This function is similar to Project Browser Zoom in/out, page 160.

(3) This function is similar to Project Browser Expand/Collapse all, page 163.

(4) Advanced option are available DTM configuration screen

Add a DTM Device

To add a new DTM to the connectivity tree in the DTM Browser:

Step Action

1 Make sure that the DTM appears in the Hardware Catalog.

If it is not in the catalog, perform an update, page 270 of the Hardware Catalog using the Update
button.

If it still does not appear in the Hardware Catalog, the DTM must be installed on the PC, page 268.

2 In the DTM Browser select the node where the DTM is to be added.
3 Right-click and select Add...

4 In the Add window select the DTM to be added to the DTM connectivity tree.

5 Either:
• Click on the Add DTM button
• Double-click on the selected DTM
Results: The 4-tab DTM Properties of dialog opens.

6 Using the 4 tabs, verify that the correct DTM has been added to the DTM connectivity tree and verify its
configuration.

7 If the DTM Alias name does not meet the Control Expert (or the user application) naming rules, it must
be changed before closing the dialog.

8 Click on the OK button to finish adding the DTM to the network tree or click on the Cancel button to
close the dialog without adding anything.

296 33003101.26
FDT Container

Field Bus Discovery Service

At a Glance
The Field Bus Discovery service is available for Communication and Gateway DTMs that:
• Support device scanning
• Are connected to their physical devices
Only the first level devices below the Communication and Gateway DTMs are detected
(there is no recursive scanning).

Field Bus Discovery Use

The results of the scanning process is compared to the registered DTMs in the DTM catalog
of the computer. If a match is found in the DTM catalog for a scanned device, the results are
accompanied with a matching type that gives the accuracy of the match.
The three available matching types are:
• Exact Match:
All identification attributes are matching. The correct device type was found.
• Generic Match:
At least the Manufacturer ID and Device Type ID attributes match. The support level of
DTM is “Generic Support”.
• Uncertain Match:
At least the Manufacturer ID and Device Type ID attributes match. The support level of
DTM is not “Generic Support”.
The following procedure explains how to use the Field Bus Discovery service:

Step Action

1 In the DTM Browser select an appropriate DTM.

2 Right click to open the Contextual menu Field Bus Discovery.

3 If necessary, select the channel and protocol:

• If the DTM has more than one channel
• If the channel supports more than one protocol

4 Click on OK in the message box to have this service detect all devices on the selected channel.

5 If at least one matched device has been found, the Field Bus Discovery dialog, page 299 is
displayed listing the scanned and matched devices. Select the matched devices to be created in the
Control Expert project.

33003101.26 297
 FDT Container

NOTE: a device that is connected on the bus can be detected if:

• Its DTM is installed on the PC.

• Its GSD is added into the GSD library (if not a DTM device).
• The DTM hardware catalog is up-to-date (with the DTM installed and the GSD in the
library).

298 33003101.26
FDT Container

Field Bus Discovery Dialog

If at least one matched device has been found, the Field Bus Discovery dialog box is
displayed listing the scanned and matched devices. Select the matched devices to be
created in the Control Expert project (which then shows up in the Selected Devices list:

33003101.26 299
 FDT Container

This dialog has three lists:

List Description

Scanned Devices This list displays all the devices (matched and unmatched) found during the scan.

Matched Devices This list displays the matched DTM found in the workstation DTM catalogue for the
selected device in the Scanned Devices list.

Each time a scanned device is selected in the Scanned Devices list, the contents
of the Matched Devices list is updated to display the matched device DTM found
for the selected scanned device.

The matching process can yield one or more matched devices for a given scanned
device. In this case, select one among the matched DTMs found.

Selected Devices This list displays the device DTMs selected to be added to the Control Expert
project.

The lists use colored icons:

Color Description

Green Indicates that the device has been selected

Yellow Indicates that the device has been matched
Red Indicates that the device has not been matched
Black Indicates information about the address of the scanned device:
• In the Scanned Devices list, the device has an address identical to one of the DTMs in the
Control Expert project
• In the Matched Devices list, the device will be assigned an address identical to one of the
DTMs in the Control Expert project

This dialog has five buttons:

Button Use this button to...

1 automatically add the best matched (according to the matching types listed above) device DTM
for each found device in the Matched Devices list to the Selected Devices list.
2 add the matched device DTM selected in the Matched Devices list.
3 remove one or more devices from the Selected Devices list.
OK insert the device DTMs in the Selected Devices list into the Control Expert project.

If there are one or more devices in the Selected Devices list that have the same address in the
Control Expert project, a message box opens asking if you want to continue.

If you click OK, all devices in the Control Expert project that have identical addresses as the
selected devices is deleted and replaced by the DTMs selected in the Selected Devices list.

Cancel cancel the Field Bus Discovery scan and do nothing. All information in the three lists is lost

300 33003101.26
FDT Container

Store Device Configurations

Introduction
After configuring or modifying a configuration of a DTM, the changes must be downloaded to
its physical device using Store data to device, page 289.

Connectivity Tree
For a connectivity tree it is necessary to:
• Store the configuration for each DTM into the corresponding device so that the device
works correctly
• Build or Rebuild all the Control Expert application and download it to the PLC be able
to upload the complete application including all DTM configurations from the PLC binary
The total number of operations equals the number of DTMs stored + 1 download of rebuilt
application.

Recovering Connectivity from the PLC Application

If the complete application has been stored in the PLC (ETS option checked), it includes the
connectivity of the DTMs.
Uploading the application from the PLC provides the connectivity stored in the PLC. For this,
the PC used for uploading must have the corresponding DTMs, page 282 installed.
Verify that the corresponding configuration is stored in the devices to avoid de-
synchronization of the project..

De-synchronization of Project
If a DTM configuration is changed and stored to its device, the application running in the
PLC is not updated.
To synchronize the PLC application with the device configuration, rebuild the Control Expert
application to take into account the changes and download it to the PLC.
Uploading a binary from a PLC overwrites the configurations of all DTMs in Control Expert
applications retrieved from the PLC. Any modifications of the DTM configurations that are
not stored in the PLC binary are overwritten by the configuration in the PLC binary and lost.

33003101.26 301
 FDT Container

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not upload a project from the PLC if any changes have been made in any devices
connected to the PLC since the last build and download of the project.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Renaming DTMs
At a Glance
According to the FDT standard, the official name of a DTM is its Tag name assigned by the
DTM vendor.
Unfortunately, some DTMs have Tag names that do not:
• Allow the Tag name to be changed
• Meet the Control Expert naming rules
The solution is to choose the DTM Alias name that meets these rules (and any special user
defined application naming rules).

Alias Name
The Alias name is the DTM reference name in Control Expert and must be unique in an
application.
If possible, the default, the Alias name is the same as the DTM Tag name. But if necessary,
the Alias name can be changed in 3 places:
• Directly in the General tab, page 306
• In the DTM Browser by clicking on the selected DTM or using the F2 shortcut with the
selected DTM.

302 33003101.26
FDT Container

I/O Vision in Communication DTMs

For device DTMs attached to certain Schneider Electric Communication DTMs (such as the
SE_Master_PRM_DTM), the default names of the DTM Input/Output Types (a structure)
and the Variable instances of the Type are based on the default DTM Alias/Tag name:

Changing the Alias name automatically changes the names of the Input/Output Types and
Variables:

33003101.26 303
 FDT Container

Profibus DTMs
Configuration of Profibus Field Devices
Using vendor-supplied Profibus DTMs, users are able to remotely:
• Configure Profibus devices associated with the DTM
• Adjust the parameters of these devices while they are off-line
• Adjust the parameters of these devices while they are on-line

PRM Master Bus Module and its DTMs

Control Expert uses a Profibus Remote Master (PRM) Gateway module (the bus master
physical device) and its PRM configuration tools (software):
• The PRM Master DTM that allows the PRM Gateway to carry out:
◦ Explicit DPV0 functions (control and diagnostics of the Profibus slaves on the
network).
◦ Communication functions (implicit DPV1 exchanges with the Profibus slaves). It also
provides access to the Profibus slaves from the Control network to HMI, SCADA or
ASSET management tools.
• The PRM Comm DTM that only allows the PRM Gateway module to carry out
communication of implicit DPV1 exchanges and access to management tools.
The Modbus TCP I/O scanning link between the PLC and the (PRM) Gateway module
connected to the Profibus network is provided by a Quantum, Premium, M340, or M580
module with an Ethernet port.

304 33003101.26
FDT Container

DTM Properties Tabs

About this Section
This section explains the different versions of the Properties of dialogs.

DTM Properties Dialog

At a Glance
The number of tabs in a Properties dialog varies according where the dialog is called from.

Properties Tabs
The Properties dialog is called when a DTM is selected:
• To be added to connectivity tree in the DTM Browser from the Hardware Catalog:
• For the Contextual Menu Properties service in the Hardware Catalog:
• It opens with 4 tabs:
◦ General
◦ Device Information
◦ DTM Information
◦ Protocol Information

33003101.26 305
 FDT Container

General
The General tab:

NOTE: The Alias name (and the DTM Tag name if the vendor allows it) can be changed,
page 302 here or in the DTM Browser.

306 33003101.26
FDT Container

Device Information
The Device Information tab:

33003101.26 307
 FDT Container

DTM Information
The DTM Information tab:

308 33003101.26
FDT Container

Protocol information
The Protocol Information tab:

Item Description

Supported protocols These are the protocols available for the child nodes of this DTM.

Required protocols These are the protocols that must be supported by the parent DTM of this
DTM.

33003101.26 309
 Type Library Manager

Type Library Manager

What’s in This Chapter
Libset (Set of Libraries) .......................................................... 310
Overview of the Type Library Manager..................................... 313
Type Library Manager ............................................................ 314
Description of the Type Library Manager.................................. 317
Loading an object from the library into the project .................... 323
Transferring an object from the project into the library ............... 326
Creating a new library and family............................................. 328
Creating an installable family .................................................. 330
Updating a family of a library................................................... 332
Consistency Check Assistant.................................................. 334
Library Version Management .................................................. 337
Using the type library of an older Unity Pro/Control Expert
Version ................................................................................. 341

Object of this section

This chapter describes the main functions of the Type Library Manager.

Libset (Set of Libraries)

At a Glance
Libset (set of libraries) comprises all libraries, families, functions and variables (I/O data
structures) that can be used to develop an automation project.
You can only modify the Libset version in the Open project dialog.

Libset Versions
The Libset V10.0 and later are automatically installed with Control Expert.
To install previous Libset versions, start Programs > EcoStruxure Control Expert >
Install libset tool.

310 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Creating a New Project

Creating a new project, the latest Libset version is automatically selected for this project.
To modify the Libset version of your project, you have to save your project and open it again
with the version of Libset you want to use.

Opening a Project
In general, opening an existing project (STU file) or an archived project (STA file), you can
select the Libset version.
NOTE: At opening time, if the Libset version is missing, a pop-up message appears.
You can use the Installer libset tool to setup one or several Libsets.
Importing a ZEF or XEF file, the latest Libset version is always selected.
The following table describes the default Libset version used to open a project according to
the file type.

File Type Project before Unity Pro 4.0 Project from Unity Pro 4.0 Project from Unity Pro 6.0
to Unity Pro 5.1

STU file Not applicable The Libset version used to build the project is automatically
selected. If the respective Libset version is not installed, the
latest version will be used.
STA file The Libset version used to The Libset version used to generate the STA file is
generate the STA file is automatically selected. If the respective Libset version is not
automatically selected. If the installed, the latest version will be used.
respective Libset version is not
installed, the latest version will be
used.
XEF file The latest Libset version is The latest Libset version is selected.
selected.
ZEF file Not applicable Not applicable The latest Libset version is
selected.

Modifying the Libset Version

Opening an existing project, page 71 (STU file) or an archived project (STA file) you can
select the Libset version.
The Open dialog provides the following options.

33003101.26 311
 Type Library Manager

Element Description

Keep project version Select this option to keep the Libset version used to build the
project.

If the respective Libset is not installed, the latest Libset

version will be used.
Update with latest version available Select this option to update the project with the latest Libset
version.
Select a specific target version Select this option to choose a specific Libset version. You can
select the version by means of the Version box below.

If the Libset version is modified, the project is in modified state.

Upgrade/Downgrade

• Upgrading the Libset does not update the project with the newly chosen libset
automatically.
EF/EFB differences will be displayed during opening the project in the LIBRARY
Version Management dialog, where you can update the project.
You can update the project later as well, using the contextual menu command in the
Type Library Manager dialog, page 337.
If you have updated the project, you have to start a Rebuild All. A Rebuild All needs to
stop the PLC and to perform a global download.
• You can also downgrade the Libset version.
There is no consistency check when downgrading the Libset while opening a project.
So you may not be able to rebuild the project (using a block created in an earlier Libset
version, not available in the latest Libset version).
If the rebuild is unsuccessful, you have to save your project and to open it again with an
appropriate Libset.
• If you want to add an FFB which is not yet contained in the current version of the
Libset, you have to upgrade the whole Libset.
• A change of Libset version in the Open dialog is memorized in the project.

Libset Information
If no project is opened, information is displayed on the latest Libset.

312 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

If a project is opened, information is displayed on the Libset used for the project.
Information on the Libset version used for your current project is provided in the General
tab of the Properties of Project dialog.
In the Project Browser of Control Expert right-click Project and select Properties from the
context menu. In the General tab you find the FFB Library version.
Further on the following dialogs provide information on the Libset version (e.g. LibsetV3.0):
• Types Library Manager
• Types Library Browser
• Data Selection
• Data Editor: Variable Type Selection
• Function Input Assistant: FFB Type Selection
• Data Properties
• PLCScreen > Information tab > APPLICATION > IDENTIFICATION

Types Library Manager

In the Types Library Manager click the Information button to get the following information:
• Current library
◦ Library status
◦ Diagnostic
• Library contents
◦ Families
◦ Libraries
◦ FFBs
For the Libset Information window please refer to information, page 316.

Overview of the Type Library Manager

Principle
The Control Expert Library contains all available objects to develop an automation project.
These objects may be the following functions or variables:

33003101.26 313
 Type Library Manager

• EF (Functions),
• EFB (Function blocks),
• DFB (user function blocks),
• DDT (Variables)
• ...
The Type Library Manager provides functions to edit the contents of the library and execute
transfers between the library and the project you are working on.
Simple operations are automatically executed or you will be asked to confirm. An Assistant,
page 334 will support complex operations. This Assistant becomes available during loading,
transfers, or deletions.

List of available functions

The Control Expert context menus provide access to the library management functions
below:
• Creating a family or library
• Deleting a family or library
• Cutting a family or object
• Inserting a family or object
• Showing and hiding a tree structure for an object, family, or library
• Renaming the current entry in the tree structure
• Displaying the Assistant to load an object
• Fit columns
• Deleting types not used in the project
• Version check: Consistency between different versions of the objects of the library and
project Library Version Management, page 337.

Type Library Manager

At a Glance
Control Expert software provides a manager to edit objects in the library providing access to
all managing functions of the library.
• Loading an object into the project from the library, page 323.

314 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

• Transferring an object of the project into the library, page 326.

• Deleting a library object
• Updating and managing library versions
• ...

Accessing the Manager

Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Manager option.

Result: The following window appears.

Areas of the Type Library Manager

Area Description

Tabs The tabs enable you to display the following according to your selection:
• All Types
• Variable types
• FFB Types (Functions)

The left sub-window His sub-window shows the tree structures of the objects of the project, library of
functions (division of functions by family), and the IODDT.

33003101.26 315
 Type Library Manager

Area Description

The right sub-window This sub-window displays the list of objects included in the selection made in the
left sub-window.

The check boxes above it are used to define this list.

Buttons • Information
Click this button to get information on the current library.
See paragraph below.
• Close
Click this button to close the dialog box without accepting changes.
• Access Assistant
Click this button to open a window to copy objects into a project (Loading an
object from the library into the project , page 323).
• Help
Click this button to call up the dialog help.

Information
Click the Information button to open the Libset Information window.

The table below describes the various functions offered.

316 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Fields Description

Current library Library status: information on the status of the custom library
• available
• not available
Diagnostics: information on the validity of the library
• OK (valid)
• not valid.
Library contents Families: indicates the number of families available

Libraries: indicates the number of libraries available

FFBs: indicates the number of function blocks available

Custom Library: indicates whether or not user libraries exist

Description of the Type Library Manager

Dialog structure
The dialog box to select objects has three tabs:
• All Types
Under this tab, you can select variables and FFBs.
• Variable types
Under this tab, you can select the variables.
• FFB Types
Under this tab, you can select FFBs.

33003101.26 317
 Type Library Manager

Tab All Types tab

Elements of the All Types tab:

Element Description

Click this button to update the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Button Name field.

Click this button to open a dialog box, page 430 for defining the filters.
Button

318 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Element Description

Click this button to invert the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.
Button

Name (Text Box) The name of the object to search for can be entered in this text box. You can also
use the joker * and ?.

EF When you enable this check box, Elementary Function types (EFs) are displayed.

EFB When you enable this checkbox, Elementary Function Block types (EFBs) are
displayed.

DFB When you enable this checkbox, Derived Function Blocks (DFBs) are displayed.

DDT When you enable this checkbox, multi-element variables (derived variables) are
displayed.

Device DDT When you enable this checkbox, multi-element variables (derived variables) are
displayed.

Name (Column) This column displays the names of the function types and function block types and
their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Type This column displays the types of the function types and function block types and the
data types of their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Comment This column displays comments about the function types and function block types
and their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

For information on the buttons at the bottom of the dialog please refer to Areas of the Type Library Manager,
page 315.

NOTE: Help on Type:

Hold down the SHIFT+F1 keys and then click on the function block type for which you
wish to access Help.

33003101.26 319
 Type Library Manager

Variable Types tab

Elements of the Variable Types tab:

Element Description

Click this button to update the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Button Name field.

Click this button to open a dialog box, page 430 for defining the filters.
Button

Click this button to invert the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.
Button

Name (Text Box)) The name of the object to search for can be entered in this text box. You can also
use the joker * and ?.

DDT When you enable this checkbox, multi-element variables (derived variables) are
displayed.

Device DDT When you enable this checkbox, multi-element variables (derived variables) are
displayed.

Name (Column) This column displays the names of the function types and function block types and
their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

320 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Element Description

Type This column displays the types of the function types and function block types and the
data types of their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Comment This column displays comments about the function types and function block types
and their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

For information on the buttons at the bottom of the dialog please refer to Areas of the Type Library Manager,
page 315.

Tab FFB Types

Elements of the FFB Types tab:

Element Description

Click this button to update the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Button Name field.

Click this button to open a dialog box, page 430 for defining the filters.
Button

33003101.26 321
 Type Library Manager

Element Description

Click this button to invert the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.
Button

Name (Text Box) The name of the object to search for can be entered in this text box. You can also
use the joker * and ?.

EF When you enable this check box, Elementary Function types (EFs) are displayed.

EFB When you enable this checkbox, Elementary Function Block types (EFBs) are
displayed.

DFB When you enable this checkbox, Derived Function Blocks (DFBs) are displayed.

Name (Column) This column displays the names of the function types and function block types and
their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Type This column displays the types of the function types and function block types and the
data types of their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Comment This column displays comments about the function types and function block types
and their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

For information on the buttons at the bottom of the dialog please refer to Areas of the Type Library Manager,
page 315.

NOTE: Help on Type:

Hold down the SHIFT+F1 keys and then click on the function block type for which you
wish to access Help.

Shortcut menu structure

Additional commands can be executed via the shortcut menu of the Type Library Manager.
Shortcut menu commands:

Menu command Description

Delete Use this menu command to delete a selected user-defined library.

Expand All Use this menu command to show the directory structure of a selected
library. The same function is also available via the + symbol.

Collapse Use this menu command to hide the directory structure of a selected
library. The same function is also available via the - symbol.

Create New Library Use this menu command to create a new user-defined library. Compare
also Creating a new library and family, page 328.

322 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Menu command Description

Rename Use this menu command to rename a user-defined library.

Local Print Use this menu command to print a list of the FFBs of a selected library.

Display Get Assistant Use this menu command to open a window to copy objects into a project.
(Loading an object from the library into the project , page 323).

Customize Columns... Using this menu command you can:

• define the columns, page 1228 to be displayed and
• define the sequence, page 1228 for the columns shown.

Purge unused Types Use the menu command to delete all unused FFBs from the project.
NOTE: When a FFB is not available for a kind of PLC (after a
section import for instance) but still in the application (removed from
the section but still in the list of the Application FFBs), the purge
feature should be used before building the application.

Compare Project with Library This menu command enables you to compare all FFB types of a project
with the FFB types of the libraries and update them, if necessary.
Compare to Library Version Management, page 337

Loading an object from the library into the project

At a Glance
Loading objects from the library into the projects makes the objects used in a project
available quicker without having to run the list of all other objects in the library.
Loading is automatically executed during the first use of a Logic section. You can also load
the objects manually from the Type Library Manager.

33003101.26 323
 Type Library Manager

Loading an object into the project

Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Manager option.

Result: The following window appears.

2 Click on Access Assistant to open the Help window for loading.

324 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Step Action

Result: The following area is added on the right of the previously displayed window:

3 Use this area to create a list of objects to be loaded by selecting them in sequence beginning in the two
sub-windows of Step 1 and then transfer the objects by clicking on the button (double arrows).

4 Click on Copy to project to execute the loading process.

Result: The objects are now loaded into the project and will be displayed in the tree structure for the
project.

33003101.26 325
 Type Library Manager

Loading requirements
If the name of the object in the project ... then...

does not exist, the object will be transferred automatically.

exists, but the types are different. the transfer will be stopped and not performed, and a
message listing the causes will be displayed.

Note: To load this object you must rename it and restart the
loading process.

exists and the types are identical. loading will be executed after you confirm.

Note: The Consistency Check Assistant, page 334 will ask

you to confirm before loading.

Transferring an object from the project into the

library
At a Glance
The transfer of an object from the project into the library enables the use of the objects of a
project with another project without having to import or export between applications.
Objects transferred to the library can be accessed from all projects.

326 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Transferring an object to the library

Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Manager option.

Result: The following window appears.

2 Select the object of the project to be transferred.

3 Click the right mouse button to open the context menu and select the Copy to Library option.

4 Select the library and target family and click on OK to confirm your selection.

Result: The transfer will be performed automatically.

Note: If the transfer is not performed automatically, a help window will be displayed to help you correct the
problem.

Transfer requirements from

If the name of the object in the library ... then...

does not exist, the object will be transferred if you have specified the family
and the library to which the object is to be transferred.

exists, but the types are different. the transfer will be stopped and not performed, and a
message listing the causes will be displayed.

Note: To load this object you must rename it and restart the
loading process.

33003101.26 327
 Type Library Manager

If the name of the object in the library ... then...

exists and the objects are identical. no action is required because the objects are identical.

exists and only the codes of the objects are the transfer will only be executed if the version of the object to
different. be transferred matches or is higher than the version of the
object that currently exists in the library.

Note: The Consistency Check Assistant, page 334 will ask for
a confirmation before executing the transfer.

exists and only the prototypes of the objects are the transfer will be stopped and not performed, and a
different. message listing the causes will be displayed.

Note: To load this object you must rename it and restart the
loading process.

Creating a new library and family

At a Glance
You can create a user-defined library. It contains objects that are available for the
development of automation projects, such as:
• Derived Data Types (DDT),
• Function Block Types (EFB/DFB),
• Elementary Functions (EF).
The library is linked to a programming device. This library can access all projects created
with this programming device. You can save the Family of the Library, page 330 to reuse,
page 332 it on another programming device.
The following steps are required:
• Creating a library,
• Creating one or more families in the new library,
• Linking objects (EF, EFB, DFB, DDT) to each family.
Control Expert provides a User-defined Library. This library contains the family custom
FAMILY; however, it does not contain objects at this time.

328 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Create a new library

Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Manager option.

Result: The following window will be displayed.

2 Under Name select the Libset directory.

3 Select the Create New Library command in the context menu.

4 Enter the name and confirm with Enter.

Create a new family

Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Manager option.

2 Under Name select User-defined Library or a self-created library.

3 Select the Create New Family command in the context menu.

4 Enter the name and confirm with Enter.

33003101.26 329
 Type Library Manager

Link the object to the family

Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Manager option.

Result: The following window will be displayed.

2 Under Name select User-defined Library or a self-created library.

3 In the user-defined library, select Custom FAMILY or a self-created family.

4 Select the object on the right side in the Name area.

5 Drag the object onto Custom FAMILY or a self-created family.

Result: The selected object is located in Custom FAMILY or the new family.

Creating an installable family

Introduction
The user-defined library can be saved in a file. It can then be imported into another
programming device.

330 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Procedure
Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Manager option.

2 In the Name area, display the contents of the Libset directory.

3 Select a family in the User-defined Library or a self-created library.

4 Select the Create Install-Ready Familycommand from the shortcut menu.

Result: The following window will be displayed.

Note: Enable the Include Sub-Types checkbox when the family contains sub-types that are not
defined in the new project.

5 Select the directory where the family is to be stored (installed).

Use Search to select the directory.

6 Click OK.

Notes for EF/EFBs

NOTE: When you try to create an installable family from a family that contains EF/EFBs,
a warning will be displayed that the EF/EFBs will not be exported. For more information
about using families with EF/EFBs in other Control Expert installations, refer to Updating
a family of a library, page 332.

33003101.26 331
 Type Library Manager

Updating a family of a library

Introduction
You can update the type library on a programming device. You can add new EF, EFB, DFB,
DDT to use in your program.
NOTE: Close Control Expert before updating.

Procedure
Step Action

1 Select Start > Programs > EcoStruxure Control Expert > Types Library Update.
The Types Library Update window will be displayed.

2 Select the directory where the family is stored using the ... button.

3 Select the Libset version (e.g. V14.0) you want to update.

(To change the Library path please refer to Library configuration options, page 589.)

4 Click on Install Family.

5 Answer Yes to the displayed question.

6 Answer OK to the displayed warning and click on Exit.

NOTE: If you want to use a family in several Libset versions of Control Expert, you must
proceed as described above for each Libset version.

332 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Family with EF/EFBs

You have created a user defined family (e.g. toolkit family) with the EFB tool kit and installed
it in Control Expert.
You have also copied DFBs and/or DDTs into the family in Control Expert.
If you now want to create an installable family, the EF/EFBs from this family will not be
exported.

Using families with EF/EFBs in other Control Expert

installations
If you want to use user-defined families with EF/EFBs in other Control Expert installations,
proceed as follows:

Step Action

1 Use your user-defined family (e.g. ToolKit family) to create an installable family, page 330.

Result: The DFB/DDTs of the family will be exported, the EF/EFBs will not be exported. A warning
will advise you.

2 Install the user-defined family with the EF/EFBs you originally created with the EFB toolkit in the
new Control Expert installation.

3 Install the family you exported in Step 1via Start > Programs > EcoStruxure Contro lExpert >
Types Library Update.

Result: Since the original family from the EFB toolkit and the installable family from Control
Expert have the same name, a message will appear that this family already exists and you will be
asked if you want to replace it.

4 Answer No to the displayed question.

Result: Another question is displayed whether you want to add the additional types to the existing
family instead.

5 Answer Yes to the displayed question.

Result: All other types (DFB/DDTs) will be added to the family. No existing types will be replaced.

NOTE: If you want to use a family in several Libset versions of Control Expert, you must
proceed as described above for each Libset version.

33003101.26 333
 Type Library Manager

Consistency Check Assistant

At a Glance
An Assistant will automatically be displayed for complex or multiple operations to check the
library or any objects of the projects for consistency to enable easy executing of required
processes.
When nested objects are loaded or transferred the Assistant will help you select the objects
to be transferred. It will show you the available operations, and which operations do or do
not require preparation (renaming, updating, etc.).
NOTE: Depending on the complexity of your action, the Assistant will present the
objects in a flat or hierarchical format. In some cases a partial list of objects may be
selected for processing, and other cases require confirming or canceling the entire
operation. The following sections list some examples and meanings.
NOTE: The illustrations below show the windows with different columns. This results
from the option to configure the columns differently, just like in the Data Editor, page
423.

Unchecked elements
When using the Type Library Manager, some elements are not considered during the
compatibility check of DFB and EFB types.
These elements are:
• Initial value elements that contain the initial value of data.
• The Save option showing whether a data element accepts or doesn’t accept the backup
/ restore mechanism.
• The RW program option showing whether a public variable can or cannot be written
from the DFB and EFB program.
• The RW program instance option showing whether a public variable can or cannot be
written from the program launcher.
• The Pin Number of the parameter. (Note: This check is only not considered with DFBs)

334 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Libset Version 2.2

NOTE: Upgrading the Libset version of the project may lead to have a list of differences
during the comparison of EFs, EFBs, DFBs used in the application with the library. In
case of a project build with a Libset version 2.2, the version number (V1.0) may be
identical with the selected Libset, even if differences are existing. Upgrading the project
with the new Libset requires a rebuild of the project and a download in the PLC.

Example of a hierarchal illustration with global

confirmation.
The following illustration shows an example of the assistant for a hierarchal view with required
global confirmation. The window shows that certain object types already exist in the library and you
are asked to confirm whether the types should remain in the library.

33003101.26 335
 Type Library Manager

Example of a flat illustration with global confirmation.

The following illustration shows an example of the assistant for a flat (non-hierarchal) view with
required global confirmation. The window shows that certain object types already exist in the
library and you are asked to confirm whether the types should remain in the library.

Example of a hierarchal illustration with selective

confirmation.
The following illustration shows an example of the assistant for a hierarchal view with a selective
confirmation option. The window shows that certain object types already exist in the library and you
are asked to confirm whether certain types should remain in the library.

336 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Example of a flat illustration with selective confirmation.

The following illustration shows an example of the assistant for a flat (non-hierarchal) view with a
selective confirmation option. The window shows that certain object types already exist in the
library and you are asked to confirm whether certain types should remain in the library.

Library Version Management

At a Glance
The Type Library Manager enables you to compare all FFB types of a project with the FFB
types of the libraries.
If there are differences between the FFB types in the project and FFB types in the library, the
LIBRARY Version Management dialog will be displayed showing the relevant information.
This dialog box has two buttons to updated the FFB types of the project with the FFB types
of the libraries.

Compare project to library

The Compare Project to Library command... Begin via the context menu of the Type
Library Manager (right-click).

33003101.26 337
 Type Library Manager

LIBRARY Version Management tab.

The LIBRARY Version Management consists of three tabs:
• Check new versions
• Other types that can be updated
• Types cannot be updated
The first two tabs have buttons to update the FFB types of the project with the FFB types of
the libraries.

Register: Check new versions

This tab displays FFB types of the project that are older than the types of the libraries.

Elements of the Check New Versions tab:

Element Description

Name Name of the FFB type

V. Library Version of the FFB type in the library

V. Project Version of the FFB type in the project

Difference Determined difference between the two versions

Comment Comment about the version difference
Button Updates the selected FFB type with the FFB type from the library.

Update

Button Updates all FFB types shown in this tab with the FFB types from the
library.
Update All

338 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Element Description

Button Closes the window.

OK
Button Opens Control Expert Help

Help

NOTE: Updating FFB types leads to Rebuild All Project. The PLC must be stopped
and a global download of the project must be performed.

Register: Other types that can be updated

This tab shows FFB types of the project that are different from those in the libraries, but can
be updated.

Elements of the Other types that can be updated tab:

Element Description

Name Name of the FFB type

V. Library Version of the FFB type in the library

V. Project Version of the FFB type in the project

Difference Determined difference between the two versions

Comment Comment about the version difference
Button Updates the selected FFB type with the FFB type from the library.

Update

Button Updates all FFB types shown in this tab with the FFB types from the
library.
Update All

33003101.26 339
 Type Library Manager

Element Description

Button Closes the window.

OK
Button Opens Control Expert Help

Help

NOTE: Updating FFB types leads to Rebuild All Project. The PLC must be stopped
and a global download of the project must be performed.

Register: Types cannot be updated

This tab shows FFB types of the project with differences from those in the libraries that are
so great that they cannot be updated. In this case you could updated FFB types only after
you did an export/import of your project.

Elements of the Types that cannot be updated tab:

Element Description

Name Name of the FFB type

V. Library Version of the FFB type in the library

V. Project Version of the FFB type in the project

Difference Determined difference between the two versions

Comment Comment about the version difference

340 33003101.26
Type Library Manager

Element Description

Button Closes the window.

OK
Button Opens Control Expert Help

Help

Using the type library of an older Unity Pro/Control

Expert Version
At a Glance
NOTE:
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
If you have already used an older version of Unity Pro/Control Expert, and if you have
created your own type library and families to store DFBs or DDTs, you have to provide this
own type library and family for the new version of Control Expert.

Providing the type library and families

Follow the steps below to install a new version of Control Expert:

Step Action

1 Start the Unity Pro/Control Expert software.

2 Use Tools to open the Type Library Manager.

3 Create a ready-to-install family for each family containing your own DFBs or DDTs (via the
context menu for the applicable family). Save these families on your hard drive (but not in the
Schneider Electric directories).

4 Install the new version of Control Expert.

5 Go to Programs > Schneider Electric > EcoStruxureControlExpert > Control Expert and
start the Tool Type Library Update and install all of your families.

Note: If you want to use your families in several Libset versions, you must repeat this step for
every Libset version.

6 Start the Control Expert software.

33003101.26 341
 Type Library Manager

Step Action

7 Make sure that all of your families have been installed.

8 Create an application.

9 Copy each DFB that belongs to your own type library from the library into your application.

10 Then copy each DFB from the application into the library family that it came from.

11 All of your libraries and families are now ready for the new Control Expert Version.

342 33003101.26
33003101.26 343
Data Editor
What’s in This Part
Description of the Data Editor ................................................. 345
Creating derived data types (DDT) .......................................... 352
Creating data types of user function blocks (DFB) .................... 374
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family of
function blocks (EF) ............................................................... 376
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/DDT/
IODDT/Device DDT families ................................................... 386
General Functions ................................................................. 421

Object of this part

It guides the user through the general features available in the data editor in order to:
• Create data types,
• Create data type instances,
• search for data types or instances.

344 33003101.26
Description of the Data Editor

Description of the Data Editor

What’s in This Chapter
Data Editor Access ................................................................ 345
Description of Data Editor tabs................................................ 347

Object of this chapter

This chapter gives an overview of the data editor.

Data Editor Access

Introduction
The project can be accessed from the structural view in the data editor. It has features which
support the following:
• Creating data types,
• Archiving or using function block data types in a library,
• Creating data type instances,
• Displaying data structures in hierarchical manner,
• Searching/sorting/filtering data.

33003101.26 345
 Description of the Data Editor

Accessing the Data Editor

Structural view of a project:

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 With the right mouse-button click on the Variables and FB instances directory.

2 Select the Opencommand in the shortcut menu.

Result: The data editor opens. The Variables tab is shown by default.

346 33003101.26
Description of the Data Editor

Data Editor:

NOTE: You can open the editor directly via data instances which belong to a family
defined by you. If you want to do this open the editor from one of the subdirectories in
the Variables and FB instances directory. The variables to be displayed will be listed in
the selected subdirectory.

Description of Data Editor tabs

Data Editor Elements
Appearance:

Description:

Element Description

Filter
Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Button name field.

33003101.26 347
 Description of the Data Editor

Element Description

Clicking on this button opens a dialog box, page 430 for defining the filters.
Button

Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.
Button

Name Column where you enter the name (symbol) of the instance or the data type you want to
display. You can use the place holders (* or ? for this.).

EDT Displaying elementary data types

DDT Displaying derived data types

IODDT Display the derived data types (DDT) that reference inputs/outputs

Device DDT Display the device derived data types

Properties

Name Column where you enter the name (symbol) of the instance or data type

Type Column where you select the variable type.

Address Column where you reference the variable instance with an address in the controller (located
instance).

Value Column where you initialize the variable.

Comment Column where you enter the comment for the variables.

NOTE: The different fields can be assigned parameters, page 421.

348 33003101.26
Description of the Data Editor

Tab: Variables
The Variables tab enables the administration of variable instances that belong to the
families EDT/ DDT/ IODDT/ Device DDT

Tab: DDT Types

The DDT Types tab is used to manage derived data types (structures or arrays):

33003101.26 349
 Description of the Data Editor

Tab: Function blocks

The Function Blocks tab enables the management of the variable instances of type EFB or DFB
that belong to the function block family.

Tab: DFB Types

The DFB Types tab enables the administration of data types of derived function blocks (DFB).

350 33003101.26
33003101.26 351
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Creating derived data types (DDT)

What’s in This Chapter
Access to derived data types (DDT) ........................................ 352
Creation of a derived data type (DDT)...................................... 353
Administration of derived data types and their elements ............ 364
Creating Nested Derived Data Types....................................... 366
Save Derived Data Types (DDT) ............................................. 371

Object of this chapter

This chapter guides the user through the creation and management of derived data types
(DDT).

Access to derived data types (DDT)

Procedure
You have the following two options to access the Data Editor to create derived data types:
• from the project structure view via the Variables and FB Instances directory,
• from the project structure view via the Derived Data Types directory,

Access via the "Variables and FB Instances" directory.

Step Action

1 In the project structure view, switch to the Variables and FB Instances directory.

2 Select the Open command in the shortcut menu and the Data Editor will open.

3 Select the DDT Types tab in the Data Editor.

352 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Example:

Access via the "Derived Data Types" directory.

Step Action

1 Switch to the Derived Data Types directory in the project structure view.

2 Select the Open command in the shortcut menu, which will open the Data Editor that is
automatically shown in the DDT Types tab.

Creation of a derived data type (DDT)

Introduction
A derived data type corresponds with:
A derived data type is one of the following
• a structure type:
◦ Structure for input/output data, the type is not created by the user in this case, but by
the manufacturer (IODDT),
◦ Structure for other data; in this case the type is created by user.
• an array type.
• a reference type.

33003101.26 353
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Memory Structure
The different PLC families vary in memory structure.

Creating a Structure Type

Step Action

1 Double click in the Data Editor in the DDT Types tab on the empty field (marked by an arrow
Name, and enter the name of the structure type (e.g. IDENTITY); the default type is <Struct>.
Enter a comment (optional).

2 Call up the newly created structure by clicking on +.

Example:

3 Double-click on the corresponding Name field and enter the name of the first element of the
structure (e.g. Name, Age) and its type and comment (optional).

Example:

354 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

4 Double-click on the next cell (marked with an arrow) to enter the name of the next element etc.

5 Go to the name of the structure type (IDENTITY) and select Analyze Type in the shortcut menu.

Result: The structure was successfully analyzed (the symbol in front of the structure type
has changed):

Result: The IDENTITY structure is created in the structure view of the project:

NOTE: Using the shortcut menu and the Open command you can access the
IDENTITY structure.

33003101.26 355
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Creating a Structure Type with an Extracted Bit

The user can create structure type using extracted bit.
The Bit Rank dialog box is accessible by right clicking on the instance or data type which
type must be:
• WORD
• UINT
• INT
• BYTE
• an extracted bit with a compatible parent

Step Action

1 Double click in the Data Editor in the DDT Types tab on the empty field (marked by an arrow Name,
and enter the name of the structure type (for example, MyDDT); the default type is <Struct>. Enter
a comment (optional).

2
Call up the newly created structure by clicking on +:

356 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

3
Double-click on the corresponding Name field and enter the name of the first element of the
structure (e.g. Extract, Extract1) and its type and comment (optional):

4 Double-click on the next cell (marked with an arrow) to enter the name of the next element etc.

5 Select the variable to create the extracted bit and right-click on the variable.

The Edit Bit Rank is available in the contextual menu list:

33003101.26 357
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

Here below is the Bit Rank dialog box:

6 Within the Bit Rank menu, the user can select to named each variable manually or automatically
using the Generate button.
NOTE: The Bit name can be edited manually directly in the Data Editor.

7 Go to the name of the structure type (MyDDT) and select Analyze Type in the shortcut menu.

358 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Result: The structure was successfully analyzed (the symbol in front of the array type has
changed):

33003101.26 359
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Result: The MyDDT structure is created in the structure view of the project:

NOTE: Using the shortcut menu and the Open command you can access the
IDENTITY structure.

Creating an Array Type

Use this procedure to create an array type:

Step Action

1 Double click in the Data Editor in the DDT Types tab on the empty field (marked by an arrow Name,
and enter the name of the array type (e.g. SERIAL_NUMBER); the default type is <Struct>. Enter a
comment (optional).

2 Double click on the Type field, select <Array>, and confirm by pressing Enter.

Result: The Variable Type Selection dialog appears.

3 The ARRAY checkbox is automatically checked:

• Enter the size of the array in the corresponding field (for example, 1..6)
• In the libraries/families area select the types that should be displayed:
◦ the <Application> directory for a derived type already in the application
◦ the <EDT> directory for an elementary type
◦ the <GDT> directory (displayed but not applicable here)
◦ the <Libset> directory for a derived type archived in a library

360 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

4 Confirm with OK.

5 Change to the name of the array type and go to the shortcut menu and select Analyze Type.

Result: The array was successfully analyzed (the symbol in front of the array type has changed):

NOTE: Comments cannot be entered for the sub elements of the array type.
The array type SERIAL_NUMBERS is created in the project structure view:

NOTE: You can access the array of the SERIAL_NUMBER type in the context menu
using the Open command.

33003101.26 361
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Creating a Reference Type

Step Action

1 Double click in the Data Editor in the DDT Types tab on the empty field (marked by an arrow
Name, and enter the name of the reference type (e.g. MyRefInt); the default type is <Struct>.
Enter a comment (optional).

2 Double click on the Type field, select <Reference>, and confirm by pressing Enter.

Result: The Variable Type Selection dialog appears.

3 The REF_TO checkbox is automatically checked. Select the reference data type, in this example:
INT.
4 Confirm with OK.
5 In the Data Editor, right-click the name MyRefInt and select Analyze Type.

Result: The reference was successfully analyzed (the symbol in front of the reference type has
changed).

The reference type MyRefInt is created in the Project Browser Structure view.
NOTE: You can access the reference of the MyRefInt type using the contextual menu
using the Open command.

Array of References
You cannot make directly, for example, an Array of REF_TO INT. You must first make a
reference DDT with type REF_TO INT as in the figure above. Then you make a new DDT
type, an array of the references.

362 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

In <Application>, select MyRefInt:

After confirming with OK and performing an Analyze Type, you obtain an array of
references:

Structure with References

This example shows the creation of an array of reference type variables:

33003101.26 363
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

1 Double click DDT Types tab in the Data Editor on the empty field (marked by an arrow Name,
enter the name of the structured type and press ENTER. The default type is <Struct>.

2 Double click Types and select <Array> in the drop-down menu.

3 Press ENTER to open the Variable Type Selection dialog.

4 Set the size of the array.

5 Select <Application>.

6 Select MyDDTRefINT.

The array of reference types example:

Administration of derived data types and their

elements
Inserting an element into a derived data type
Execute the following steps:

364 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Steps Action

1 Display the desired data type in the data editor in the DDT Types tab.

2 Place the cursor on the element in front of which you want to insert another element and select the
Insert new command in the shortcut menu.

Inserting an element into an address element

3 Enter the attributes of the element into the newly created row.

Deleting an element belonging to a derived data type

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Display the desired data type in the data editor in the DDT Types tab from which you wish to delete the
element.
2 Select the desired element.
3 Use the shortcut menu to select the Delete command.

NOTE: Elements belonging to protected data types cannot be deleted.

33003101.26 365
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Deleting a derived data type:

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the desired data type in the data editor in the DDT Types tab.

2 Using the context menu select the Delete command.

NOTE: Data types that exist as an instance in the application cannot be deleted.

Creating Nested Derived Data Types

Introduction
Data types that are part of the DDT family can be nested. The nesting can be organized as
follows:
• in structures that contain arrays or structures
• in arrays that contain arrays or structures
• in a combination of these different nestings

Array, that contains structures

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double click in the Data Editor in the DDT Types tab on the empty field (marked by an arrow Name, and
enter the name of the array type (e.g. PERSONNEL); the default type is <Struct>. Enter a comment
(optional).

2 Double click on the Typefield, select <Array>, and confirm by pressing Enter.

Result: The Variable Type Selection appears.

3 The ARRAY checkbox is automatically checked:

• enter the size of the array in the corresponding field

366 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

• In the libraries/families area select the following:

◦ the <EDT> directory for an elementary type
◦ the <Applications> directory for a type already in the application
◦ the <Library> directory for an already archived type
See the following window:

4 Enable the DDT checkbox, which will display the derived data types.

5 Select the desired structure in the Name column and confirm with OK.
6 Change to the name of the array type and go to the context menu and select Analyze Type.

NOTE: Comments cannot be entered for the sub elements of the array type.
NOTE: Changing the boundaries of an anonymous array lead to the lost of the initial
values of that array. Those values must be re-entered after the modification.

33003101.26 367
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Array of the type PERSONNEL that contains structures of the type IDENTITY:

Structure containing a structure

Execute the following actions (provided a structure exists):

Step Action

1 Click on + to display the type of the structure in the DDT Types tab in the data editor, to which you want
to add an element.
2 Double click on the empty Namefield and enter the name of the new structure type element. Enter a
comment (optional).

3 Double-click on the corresponding Type field and click on

368 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

The following window appears.

4 In the libraries/families area select:

• the <EDT> index for an elementary type
• the <Applications> directory for a type that already exists in the application
• the <Library> for an already archived type
See the following example:

33003101.26 369
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

5 Enable the DDT checkbox, which will display the derived data types.

6 Select the desired structure in the Name column and confirm with OK.
7 Switch to the name of the structure type and select the Analyze Typeentry in the context menu.

Example: IDENTITY structure that contains an INFORMATION structure of the STATUS

type.

Combination of the different nestings.

The following example shows:
• a PERSONNEL array consisting of IDENTITY type structures
• IDENTITY structures containing STATUS type structures
• STATUS structures containing arrays of the NAME_CHILD type

370 33003101.26
Creating derived data types (DDT)

Example:

Save Derived Data Types (DDT)

Description of how to save
You can copy the data types you created into your library to reuse them in another project.

Filing a data type in the library

Carry out the following steps:

33003101.26 371
 Creating derived data types (DDT)

Step Action

1 Select the DDT Types tab in the Data Editor.

2 Select the data type that you want to save in the library.

3 Using the shortcut menu select the Copy into Library command.

The following dialog box opens:

4 Show the desired family to select the directory where you want to archive the data type.

5 Confirm with OK.

NOTE: This procedure can also be started from the project browser in the Derived Data
Types directory.

Restoring a data type in the library

See loading an object from the library., page 323

372 33003101.26
33003101.26 373
 Creating data types of user function blocks (DFB)

Creating data types of user function blocks

(DFB)
What’s in This Chapter
Creation and Management of Data Types and Function
Blocks (DFB) ......................................................................... 374

Object of this chapter

This chapter guides the user through the creation and management of user function block
data types.

Creation and Management of Data Types and

Function Blocks (DFB)
At a Glance
See Derived Function Blocks (DFB), page 1247.
This chapter explains the DFB Types tab modes of the Data Editor with the following
descriptions:
• accessing the DFB Types
• creating a DFB Type
• programming a DFB Type
• managing the elements of a DFB Type
• nestling of the DFB Types
• saving DFB Types

374 33003101.26
33003101.26 375
 Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

Managing of instances of data belonging to

the family of function blocks (EF)
What’s in This Chapter
Creating / Deleting a variable instance of function blocks
(EFB/DFB) ............................................................................ 376
Displaying function block variable instances in the
editor .................................................................................... 379
Changing the attribute for variable instances in a function
block..................................................................................... 382

Object of this chapter

This chapter guides the user through the creation and management of data instances
belonging to block function types such as:
• Elementary function blocks (EFB),
• Derived function blocks (DFB).

Creating / Deleting a variable instance of function

blocks (EFB/DFB)
Creating a function block instance
Carry out the following steps:

Steps Actions

1 In the Data Editor select the function blocks tab.

2 Double-click the empty cell for Name (marked with an arrow), enter the name of the instance and
confirm by pressing the Enterbutton.

3 Double-click on the corresponding Type field and click on

376 33003101.26
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

Steps Actions

The following window appears:

4 In the libraries/families area select the following:

• the <Applications> directory for a type already in the application,
• the <Library> directory for an already archived type.

33003101.26 377
 Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

Steps Actions

Example: Select an EFB type archived in the Diagnostics library:

5 In the Name column select the EFB or DFB type and confirm with OK.

378 33003101.26
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

Example:

Deleting a function block instance

Instances that are accessed at least once cannot be deleted in the data editor.
Example from an ST section:
FBI_1(IN:=TRUE, OUT=>VarA);
The application explained above will block the deletion because FBI_1 is accessed.
VarA:=FBI_1.OUT
The application explained above will not block the deletion because FBI_1 is not accessed.

Displaying function block variable instances in the

editor
Display sequence in a column
The variable instances can be displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
This sequence will be used in a column chosen by you.

33003101.26 379
 Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

To do this, click on the area that contains the name of the column in question and the arrow
will turn blue.
Sorting in descending alphabetical order in the column Name

Sorting in ascending alphabetical order in the column Type

Displaying elements from one function block instance

To show the elements that belong to an instance of the function block type, carry out the
following actions:

380 33003101.26
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

Step Action

1 In the Data Editor select the function blocks tab.

2 Click on the + beside the instance of the desired function block type and the elements will then
be shown on screen.
3 Carry out the procedure again if you want to display the interface data or the internal data for the
function block on the screen.

Example: Display the instance Control_Process of the type EFB

Displaying the attributes

For an unopened window Data Properties:

Step Action

1 In the Data Editor select the function blocks tab.

2 Select the variable instance.
3 From the context menu select the command Data Properties and the attributes will be displayed
in a window.

33003101.26 381
 Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

Example:

For a window that is already open Data Properties:

After the instance has been chosen, the window Data properties is updated automatically
with the display for the attribute in question.

Sorting the variable instances

See Filtering of Data, page 430.

Changing the attribute for variable instances in a

function block
Detailed information
The internal organization of a variable instance of function blocks (input / output parameters,
public / private variables, code) cannot be changed from the instances, but must be
performed from the type of the instance DFB Types) tab.
The changes listed below do not effect the internal organization of the function block, but
rather its instantiation.

382 33003101.26
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

Changing the name of an instance

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the Data Editor select the function blocks tab.

2 Double-click on the instance name, enter the new name, and confirm with Enter.

NOTE: the instance name can only be used once.

Changing the type of an instance

There are three options.
In the Data Editor Function blocks tab:

Double-click on the variable type and ... then...

-
enter the desired type,

depending on the input, an automatic search is carried out.

use the type field select the desired type.

select the type in the "FB type selection", page 425

click the button window.

Reactions to type changes of an instance.

If the type of an FB instance is changed in the Data Editor, the access will be adjusted to the
instance.
The access is adjusted as follows:
• The connections are mapped with pin positions.
Note: Compatibility of data types will not be checked, which means that errors may
occur during the analysis following the adjustment.
• Excess pins of the new type remain unused.

33003101.26 383
 Managing of instances of data belonging to the family
of function blocks (EF)

• The connections of pins that no longer exist in the new type are lost.
IL and ST sections:
If necessary, formal parameters in IL and ST sections will be renamed according to the new
block during formal access. The number of actual parameters will be adjusted during
informal access.
NOTE: Instance access in IL or ST sections will only be adjusted if required by the type
change. However, if an adjustment is made, the old access will be removed and
replaced with a generated access. This means that all comments and formatting
contained in the old access will be lost.
FBD and LD sections
The new type will be displayed in the FBD and LD sections following the adjustment.

384 33003101.26
33003101.26 385
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Managing variable instances belonging to the

EDT/DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families
What’s in This Chapter
Creation of EDT instances ...................................................... 386
Creation of DDT instances ...................................................... 390
Creating an IODDT instance ................................................... 396
Managing a Device DDT instance ........................................... 399
Managing an IODDT, DDT or an Array type instance................. 403
Creation of multiple variable instances..................................... 409
Displaying the variable instances in the editor .......................... 411
Changing attributes of variable instances................................. 414
Creation of a Reference Type Instance .................................... 418

Object of this chapter

This chapter guides the user through the creation and management of variable instances
belonging to the following families:
• Elementary data types (EDT)
• Derived Data Types (DDT)
• Derived Data Types that reference IODDT inputs/outputs (input / output data types)
• Device Derived Data Types (Device DDT)

Creation of EDT instances

Instance of an Unlocated Variable
Creating the instance of an unlocated variable:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance.

3 Double-click the Type cell and enter the type of the instance.

4 Enter a comment if necessary.

386 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example:

Instance of a Referenced Variable

Creating an instance of a Referenced variable:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance.

3 Double-click the Type cell and enter REF_TO and the type referenced for this instance.

4 Enter the initial value, page 388 of the variable instance.

Example:

33003101.26 387
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Initial Value of a Reference Type Variable

To set an initial value to a variable of reference type

Step Action

1 In the Variables tab of the Data Editor, select the reference type variable to be initialized.

2 Double-click Value.
3 Enter REF(VarName), where VarName is the variable referenced by the Instance of the
Referenced Variable.

Example:

Instance of a Located Variable

Creating an instance of a located variable:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance.

3 Double-click on the Type cell and enter the type of the instance.

4 Double-click on the Address cell and enter the storage address for the controller.

5 Enter a comment if necessary.

388 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

NOTE: Several different instances can be assigned to one address (multiple

assignment).
Example:

Instance with Direct Addressing

Creating an instance with direct addressing

Step Action

1 Double-click on the empty Address cell and enter the storage address for the controller.

2 Enter a comment if necessary.

Example:

33003101.26 389
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Creation of DDT instances

Structure type instance
Creating a Structure type instance:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance. Enter a
comment (optional).

3 Double-click on the corresponding Type field and click on

The following window appears.

4 In the libraries/families area select the following:

• the <Application> directory for an existing type in the application.
• the <Libset> directory for an already archived type.

5 Enable the DDT checkbox, which will display the derived data types.

390 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

6 Select the desired structure type in the Name column and confirm with OK.

7 Fill out the Value column to initialize the elements of the structure. To carry out this task, click on + to show
the structure.

Example:

NOTE: The comments will be transferred to the selected structure type, but they may be
changed for the applicable instance.

Instance of a non-typical array.

What is a non-typical array?

NOTE: My_Tab1 and My_Tab2 are two identical instances. The difference is that the
type of the My_Tab1 instance was previously defined (the name of the Type is Tab) while
the type of the My_Tab2 instance was defined during instancing.
Creating an instance for a non-typical array:

33003101.26 391
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance. Enter
a comment (optional).

3 Double-click on the corresponding Type field and click on

The following window appears.

392 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

4 Enable the Array check box and

• fill in the field with the size of the array (example 1..6),
• In the libraries/families area select the types that should be displayed:
◦ the <EDT> directory for an elementary type,
◦ the <Application> directory for an existing derived type in the application,
◦ the <Libset> directory for a derived type archived in a library.
• Select the type for the elements of the array in the Name column (Example: STRING for an EDT).
Example:

Confirm with OK.

5 Fill out the Value column to initialize the elements of the array as needed. To carry out this task, click on
+ to show the elements.

33003101.26 393
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example:

NOTE: Enter comments for the sub-elements of this instance of a non-typical array.

Type Array instance

Creating an Array type instance:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance. Enter
a comment (optional).

3 Double-click on the corresponding Type field and click on

394 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

The following window appears.

4 In the libraries/families area select the following:

• the <Applications> directory for a type already in the application,
• the <Libset> directory for a derived type archived in a library.

5 Enable the DDT checkbox, which will display the derived data types.

6 Select the desired array type in the Name column and confirm with OK.

7 Fill out the Value column to initialize the elements of the array as needed. To carry out this task, click on
+ to show the elements.

33003101.26 395
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example:

NOTE: Comments cannot be entered for the sub elements of this instance of an array.
NOTE: If you resize an array variable type, you will lose the comments and the initial
values of the elements of the array.

Creating an IODDT instance

Type IODDT instance
The data types (structures) have been predefined by the manufacturer and contain I/O
language objects belonging to the channel of an application specific module (or the module
itself).
Perform the following steps to create an IODDT instance:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance.

3 Double-click on the corresponding Type field and click on it

396 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

The following window appears.

4 In the Library/Family area, display the <Catalog> index.

The following window appears.

33003101.26 397
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

5 Select the Type of Controller, Function and the corresponding IODDT Type.

Confirm with OK.

Example: Instance ENTRY_PRESSURE of Type T_ANA_IN_BMX:

Linking to the application specific module

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Enable the IODDT checkbox, which will display instances of Type IODDT.

398 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

3 Select the IODDT instance based on which the link will be created.
4 Enter the address of the module or its future storage location in the Address column (it is not necessary
to configure the module during this phase).

Example:

Rules
Follow the rules below:
• An IODDT data type cannot be nestled in a DDT data type.
• An IODDT data type cannot be nestled in another IODDT data type.
• A public or private variable of a DFB cannot be an IODDT type.
• An input / output parameter of a DFB may be of Type IODDT. However, you can only
use those IODDT types that are listed in the Variable Type Selection menu.
• An IODDT instance cannot be accessed from a DFB section.

Managing a Device DDT instance

Device DDT Instance
When adding a module to a rack, Control Expert software instantiates the associated device
DDT structure. The main family of modules concerned by device DDT is the I/O modules
family, some specific modules are also concerned. The device DDT name syntax is
explained in the section on Device DDT Naming Rule (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).
Each module is associated with one implicit device DDT instance.

33003101.26 399
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Implicit Device DDT instances are created by default on device insertion and refreshed
automatically by the PLC. They contain the modules status, modules and channels health
bits, values of the modules inputs, values of the modules outputs, etc.
NOTE: Optional explicit DDT types are proposed in the data editor to support status or
command data used by explicit exchanges on a channel of I/O modules in a remote I/O
drop. Explicit DDT instances are created manually by the user in the data editor and
used as input or output parameter with the function block managing the explicit
exchange (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library).

Renaming a Device DDT

The following table describes a way to rename a module device DDT:

Step Action

1 In the Project Browser, double-click the module that contains the device DDT to rename.

2 In the module window, select the Device DDT tab.

3 Select the module (not the channel).

4 Modify the device DDT name.

NOTE: The total name length is limited to 32 characters.
NOTE: A name needs to be unique in an application.

5 Validate the name changes in the advice window. This advice window appears when selecting
another tab or view.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT BEHAVIOR
• Always verify that the Control Expert configuration is consistent with the hardware
installation.
• If you attempt to change the default names of your devices, manage the naming to
prevent from addressing the wrong device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Copying and Pasting a Module

During a module copy/paste action, the pasted module respects the default naming rule
linked to its topological location.

400 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Moving a Module
Moving a module does not modify its name.
If the same module type is inserted in the slot freed by the module shifting, the new inserted
module should get the same topological name. In order to keep the naming uniqueness,
_rrrrrr is added at the end of the string (rrrrrr being a random character series).

Replacing a Hot Standby CPU

Replacing a Hot Standby CPU does not modify the device DDT name of the CPU.

Checking the Device DDT Owner

When a module is moved or a Device DDT is renamed, it may be difficult to locate the
module in the architecture. This information is provided in the Owner column of the Data
Editor. Displayed columns are configured, page 421 as needed.

Creating a Device DDT Instance

Perform the following steps to create a Device DDT instance:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click the empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance.

3 Double-click the corresponding Type field and click the following button:

Results: The Variable Type Selection dialog appears.

4 In the Libraries/Families area, display the <Libset vx.y> index.

Where x.y indicates the Control Expert software version.

5 Select the family (I/O Management for example) and the corresponding Device DDT type.

6 Confirm with OK.

33003101.26 401
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example: Instance ANA_OUT of type T_U_ANA_STD_OUT_8:

Linking a Device DDT Instance to a Module

Use the following procedure:

Step Action

1 Create a Device DDT as explained previously.

2 In the Project Browser, double-click the module to be associated to the created device DDT.
NOTE: The created device DDT can only be linked to a module of the same type. For
example, an 8 analog input module can only be linked to an 8 analog input device DDT.

3 In the module window, select the Device DDT tab.

4 Select the module (not the channel).

5 In the Implicit device DDT > Name : list, select the name of the device DDT created (instead
of the current name).

402 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

6 Validate the name changes in the advice window. This advice window appears when selecting
another tab or view.
NOTE: Once a module is linked to a new device DDT, the variables that were linked to
former device DDT name do not address the module anymore.

7
The previously created Device DDT instance is now linked to the module. It is displayed as
follows in the data editor:

NOTE: A variable linked to a module shows a lock in front of its name in the data
editor.

Managing an IODDT, DDT or an Array type instance

Adding an alias
An alias name can be given to all elements of an IODDT, DDT or an Array type instance of
application.
The aliases can be created with the following rules:
• The alias descriptions are only allowed for elements of type IODDT, DDT or an Array.
• The type and address for an alias cannot be changed as these attributes are defined
by the IODDT, DDT or an Array
• Name and Comment can be changed.
• The alias displays the initial value of a DDT or Array element.
This procedure below is used for customizing elements used to make up a DDT instance,
however the procedure is the same for an IODDT or Array instance.

33003101.26 403
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

1 Create one or more variable instances you want to customize that are identical with the elements of the
IODDT / DDT / Array.

For example AliasValue and AliasValid:

2 Select an element of the DDT_Inst1 instance (for example Value) that you want to assign to the
previously created AliasValue instance.

Alternatively, the user can also assign a new symbol as alias. In this case the alias variable is
automatically be created with the type of the current element.

404 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

3 Using the shortcut menu select the Properties command.

The Data properties field opens:

4 In the Alias area enter the element AliasValue and then do the same for all elements that you want to
assign.

Along with the alias names and the elements of the DDT a symbol is shown.

NOTE: The user can directly enter the AliasValue in the Alias column.

The "Data Properties" window

The Data properties window can be opened from the IODDT structure, DDT structure or
an Array element. In such a case Alias is the structure attribute; it contains the names of
the variables.

33003101.26 405
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example:

The Data properties window can also be opened from the Alias instance. In such a case
Alias of is an instance attribute; it contains the names of the elements of the IODDT
structure, DDT structure or an Array element.
Example:

406 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Disconnecting an alias
Step Action

1 Select the element from the appropriate IODDT structure, DDT structure or Array element.

2 From the shortcut menu select the command Properties, and the following dialog box will appear.

Dialog box:

3 Double-click on the target alias, delete the element in edit mode (AliasValue) and confirm.

The symbols shown on the element disappear:

NOTE: Alternatively, the user can directly delete the name in the column Alias or
AliasOf.
NOTE: The alias instance returns to being a normal EDT instance and the attributes for
the element to which the instance is assigned are retained. The element for the IODDT
structure, DDT structure or an Array element contains the original manufacturer-defined
name again.

33003101.26 407
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Alias on sub fields of existing Alias

The user can set the alias on a sub field of an IODDT structure, DDT structure or an Array
element that is already an alias.
Example: AliasComplement is alias of DDT_Inst1.Complement and AliasTestNr is alias
of AliasComplement.TestNr.

Management of initial value for an alias

The initial value of an alias is the initial value on the sub field of DDT or Array. This sub field
path is given by attribute Alias OF. So when you get or set the initial value on an Alias in fact
you get it or set it on the sub field path given by attribute Alias OF.
Example: Initial value of alias "AliasValue" is the initial value given on path "DDT_Inst1.
Value". (12 in the following example screen)

Additionaly if we get or set initial value of “ DDT_Inst1.Complement.Errors” you will get or

set initial value on “ AliasComplement.Errors”, because “ AliasComplement” is an alias on “
DDT_Inst1.Complement” (see following figure).

408 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Creation of multiple variable instances

Procedure
There are two possibilities for this:
• using the Copy/Paste function,
• using the Import function.

Copying / pasting of instances.

The following procedure shows the method to create and rename an instance, following
defined rules, using the Copy/Paste function:

33003101.26 409
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

1 Select the Variablestab in the data editor.

2
Select the desired instances (rows).

3 Using the context menu select the Copy command.

4 Select an open position (row) from which the instances will be copied.

5 From the context menu select the command Insert and the new instances will be created and renamed.

Example:

410 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

NOTE: Renaming Rules:

• From a name of the instance <Name>_<Number> or <Name> results after

renaming <Name>_<Number+1> or <Name_0>.

Importing instances
See "Importing Variables", page 1701.

Displaying the variable instances in the editor

Display sequence in a column
The variable instances can be displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
This sequence will be used in a column chosen by you.
For this, click on the area that contains the name of the column in question which
determines the sorting order. After that the corresponding arrow will turn blue.
Sorting in descending alphabetical order in the column Name

33003101.26 411
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Sorting in ascending alphabetical order in the column Type

Display the elements of an instance of the "derived" type

To show the elements that belong to an instance of the "derived" type (structure or array),
carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Enable the DDT check box.
2 Click on the + beside the instance of the desired structure or array type and this will then be
shown on screen.
3 Run the operation again if you want to display an interlaced element.

412 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example: Display the instance Person_1 of the structure type IDENTITY.

Displaying the instance attributes

For anunopened field Data Properties:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Select the desired instance.
3 Select the Properties command from the shortcut menu and the attributes will be displayed in a
window.

33003101.26 413
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example:

For a window that is already open Data Properties:

After the instance has been chosen, the window Data properties is updated automatically
with the display for the attribute in question.

Sorting the variable instances

See Filtering of Data, page 430

Changing attributes of variable instances

Changing the name of an instance
Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the instance name and enter the new name.

NOTE: The instance name can only be used once.

414 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Changing the type of an instance

There are three options.
In the Data Editor select the Variables tab:

Double-click on the variable type and ... then...

enter the desired type

select the desired type

use a Type from the list

select the appropriate

type in the "Variables type
click the button selection", page 425
window

Changing the address of an instance

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the instance address and enter the new address.

NOTE: Several different instances can be assigned to one address (multiple

assignment).

Changing an attribute in the "Data Properties" field

Carry out the following steps:

33003101.26 415
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Select the desired instance.
3 Use the shortcut menu to select the Properties command.

4 In the Data properties field select the desired attribute.

5 Change the attribute.

Assigning an address for the CD_MOTOR1 instance (the variable is located):

Changing the attribute in several instances

Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the data editor.

2 Select the desired instances.
3 Use the shortcut menu to select the Properties command.

4 Select the desired attribute in the Data Properties window.

5 Change the attribute.

416 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

NOTE: For this functionality the following restrictions apply:

• names and addresses cannot be changed,
• the contents of the attribute to be changed must be the same for all selected
instances,
• the change must be tolerated by all the instances selected,
• for sub-element instances with different superior elements, multiple selections are
not possible.
Example: As can be seen in the following graphic, the three instances have the same type
and can be changed from Bool to Ebool.

Rule for instances of the type Structure

The internal organization of an instance of type structure (type, that belongs to the DDT
family) cannot be changed via the instance, but rather via the type of the instance (DDT
type tab).

33003101.26 417
 Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

In contrast, the changes listed above (instance name, type, address) are applied directly
to the instances and do not affect the internal organization, only the instantiation of the type.

Creation of a Reference Type Instance

Reference Type Instance
The reference type is used to create references to EDT, DDT and Device DDT variables.

Creating a Reference to a Variable

Creating a reference type instance:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the Data Editor.

2 Double-click on an empty cell Name (marked with an arrow) and enter the name of the instance.
Enter a comment (optional).

3 Double-click on the corresponding Type field and click

The Data Editor: Variable Type Selection dialog opens.

4 Click the REF_TO checkbox.

5 Enable the EDT, DDT or Device DDT checkbox.

6 Select the desired type in the Name column and confirm with OK.

7 Fill out the Value column to initialize the variable by typing the name of the variable to be
referenced.

418 33003101.26
Managing variable instances belonging to the EDT/
DDT/IODDT/Device DDT families

Example of the Data Editor with a reference to a variable:

33003101.26 419
420 33003101.26
General Functions

General Functions
What’s in This Chapter
Configuring the Data Editor columns ....................................... 421
Description of the Data Editor: Variable type selection............... 425
Filtering of Data ..................................................................... 430
Exporting a subset of variables ............................................... 434
Analyze DDT and DFB Data Types .......................................... 435
Purge of Unused Instances..................................................... 436
Local printing of data .............................................................. 437
Save the context of the Data Editor ......................................... 438

Object of this chapter

This chapter guides the user through the use of the general features available in the data
editor.

Configuring the Data Editor columns

Introduction
In every Data Editor tab you can configure the column display (a default configuration is
suggested). This lets you:
• Define the columns you want to display.
• Define the sequence for the columns shown.

Columns Available
The following table shows the different columns available in the Data Editor:

Column Name Description

Name Name of the instance or data type.

Type Data type. By default this attribute is checked.

Value Initial value for the variables. By default this attribute is checked.

33003101.26 421
 General Functions

Column Name Description

Comment Comment for the variables. By default this attribute is checked.

Alias Name selected by the user which makes it possible to change an IODDT, DDT, or an Array
element to a name defined by the manufacturer or the user. By default this attribute is
checked.
NOTE: An Alias value cannot be set for a variable if the Bit rank attribute has been set,
page 356 for that variable.

Alias of Complete path of the variable subfield on which user sets Alias attribute. By default this
attribute is checked.
Constant Kind of variable, the variable is a constant or not.

Custom Free text for use of an external tool or for special user requirements.

Used Number of times the variables are used in the program and in other parts of the project
(animation tables, user windows).

Owner Only for Device DDT, it displays the address of the modules which owns this variable.

Address Address in the controller for referencing the variables. By default this attribute is checked.

Global data Shows if the variable is a variable that was swapped between different stations via the
network.
+ Group Number of the group (the variables) in which the variable is transported.

ID Number for the unique display of a variable in the group (the variables).

Save Define if the variable accepts the mechanism for updating initial values with current values.

HMI variable When General Project Settings > Data Dictionary > Only HMI variables is checked, this
reduces memory usage. By default this attribute is checked.

Time stamping Select if a variable is time stamped or not and the kind of time stamping, see the System
time stamping variables (see System Time Stamping, User Guide) or Applicative time
stamping variables (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Applicative Time Stamping, User
Guide).

+ Source Gives the source of the time stamping.

TS ID Gives the ID of the time stamped variable.

Scanned Variables Attribute that you can use to tag a variable to be a scanned variable by the PLC, through
Ethernet for instance.
R/W Rights of Access rights of a reference type instance, used when the reference dereferences a read
Referenced Variable only variable, see the Reference Access rights (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual). By default this attribute is checked.

Data Protect Use this attribute to protect your data from modification request in monitoring mode.

When Data Protect is checked, it is not possible to modify the protected variable. By default
this attribute is unchecked.
NOTE: The project setting Data memory protect must be enabled: Tools > Project
Settings > PLC embedded data.

422 33003101.26
General Functions

Column Name Description

Exchange On STBY Only for M580 Hotstandby systems (see Modicon M580 Hot Standby, System Planning
Guide for, Frequently Used Architectures), if checked, the variable or the function block
instance is automatically exchanged between Primary PLC and Standby PLC. By default
this attribute is checked.
+ Task Give the task in which a Variable, EFB instance, or DFB instance is used.

Retain BME•586040 CPUs present this variable attribute, which determines whether the variable
value will persist after a warm start of the CPU. If the attribute is:
• Selected: Variable data persists and is applied to the variable after a warm start.
• De-selected: Variable data is lost after a warm start; the variable value is reset.
For other Modicon M580 CPUs, this attribute is read-only. It is selected by default and
cannot be de-selected.
no. Order number of a function block.
984 Address LL984 address of the variable (%Mx = 00000x, %Ix = 10000x, %IWx = 30000x, %MWx =
40000x)

This column is only available for Quantum PLCs (but not for Quantum Safety PLCs).

RW program Access rights of the variable, read only or read and write by the program.

Descriptor x Descriptors (1 to 9) of variables.

Descriptor 1 is displayed after selecting this column in the Column Configuration dialog.
Descriptors 2 to 9 can be displayed using the + sign in the Descriptor column header.

Version Type version.

Bit rank Gives the bit rank of the variable in its structure type.

Nature Only for the Program Unit data editor. Define if the Program Unit variable is an input, output
or Input/output parameter, a public or private variable. By default this attribute is checked.

Effective Parameter Only for the Program Unit data editor. Variable assignment to the program unit parameters
(input, output and input/output parameters).

Defining Columns
Step Action

1 Select the desired tab in the Data Editor.

2 Via the context menu, open the Column Configuration dialog using Customize Columns.

33003101.26 423
 General Functions

Step Action

The following dialog appears.

3 Check the check boxes that correspond to the columns you wish to display.

4 Confirm the changes using the command OK.

NOTE: The Name and Type columns are required.

Description of the buttons

Button Description

OK Confirms the configuration and exits the dialog.

Cancel Discards the changes and exits the dialog.

Default Restores the default configuration.

Help Opens the Help of the Column Configuration dialog.

424 33003101.26
General Functions

Changing the Columns Sequence

Step Action

1 Select the desired tab in the Data Editor.

2 Via the context menu, open the Column Configuration dialog using Customize Columns.

3 Place the cursor on the chosen attribute and move it to the desired location by clicking the two
buttons to the right of the window.

4 Confirm by clicking OK.

NOTE: The first column must always correspond with the attribute Name.

Description of the Data Editor: Variable type

selection
Introduction
The Data Editor: Variable Type Selection provides the following options:
• Selection:
◦ of derived data types (typical structures/arrays),
◦ the function block data types (EFB\DFB),
• Creating non-typical arrays.

At a Glance
Data Editor: You can access the variables type selection by double-clicking on the Type

column and clicking on in the Data Editor.

Depending on the tab used to start the editor for the selection of the data type, one of the
following windows is displayed:

33003101.26 425
 General Functions

Variables:

DDT Types:

426 33003101.26
General Functions

Function blocks:

NOTE: Access to the editor for the selection of the data types is not possible via the
DFB types tab.

Description of the area Libraries/Families

This area contains directories and subdirectories where various selectable data types are
classified.
If you choose one of the directories or subdirectories, the types for the right-hand side of the
columns Name/Type/Comment are shown.
• The directory <Application> shows the data types used in the project:
◦ the Derived Data Types (DDT); the checkbox DDT must be enabled.
◦ the Derived Function Block (DFB); the DFB checkbox must be enabled.
◦ the Derived Data Types that refer to the inputs/outputs (IODDT); the IODDT
checkbox must be enabled.
◦ the data types for the elementary function blocks (EFB); the EFB checkbox must be
enabled,
◦ the Device Derived Data Types (DDDT); the Device DDT checkbox must be
enabled.
• the <EDT> directory shows the types for the elementary data,
• the <GDT> directory shows the types for the generic data,

33003101.26 427
 General Functions

• the <Libset> directory that is organized into special libraries contains the families
made available by the manufacturer or the functions archived by the user:
◦ the Derived Data Types (DDT); the DDT checkbox must be enabled.
◦ the data types for the sequence controls (SFC); the DDT checkbox must be
enabled,
◦ the data types for the derived function blocks (DFB); the DFB checkbox must be
enabled,
◦ the elementary function blocks (EFB); the EFB checkbox must be enabled,
◦ the Device Derived Data Types (DDDT); the Device DDT checkbox must be
enabled.
• the <Catalog> directory that shows the derived data types that reference inputs/outputs
(IODDT) from the manufacturer; the IODDT checkbox must be enabled.

ARRAY checkbox
If this checkbox is enabled, you can use the editor to select the array types to have a single
size or several sizes (maximum six dimensions).
Example: Array with two dimensions 10x4 DINT

428 33003101.26
General Functions

REF_TO checkbox
If this checkbox is enabled, you can use the editor to create a reference type instance.
Example: REF_TO BOOL

Filtering
You can create filters in the data editor to display the data types according to your
requirements.
The Name field is used to enter the name of the data type that you want to display in the
Name/Type/Comment area. You can use place holder symbols (* or ?) to carry out multiple
search operations.

Clicking on the button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in
the field Name.

Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you
can define various filter attributes.

Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice
versa.

33003101.26 429
 General Functions

Filtering of Data
Introduction
You can create filters in the data editor to display the data according to your requirements.
A filter is the sum of the conditions applied to various attributes.
In every tab, it is standard for all variable instances or data types to be shown.
The various filters you have defined are saved when the data editor is closed and restored
when it is opened again.

At a Glance
The filter parameterization in the data editor is determined depending on the tab chosen.
Description of the Data editor different fields depending on the tab:

Area In which table is it Purpose

available ?
All tabs Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term
Button defined in the name field.

All tabs Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data dialog box where you can
Button define the conditions for the individual attributes.

All tabs Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <>
Button and vice versa.

Name All tabs Field where the name (symbol) of the instance or the data type you want to
display can be entered. You can use the place holder (* or ?) for this.

EDT Variables tab The enabled check box authorizes the display of the Elementary Data
Types (EDT).

EFB Function Blocks tab The enabled check box authorizes the display of the Elementary Function
Blocks (EFB).

DDT Variables tab The enabled check box authorizes the display of the Derived Data Types
(DDT).

430 33003101.26
General Functions

Area In which table is it Purpose

available ?
DFB Function Blocks tab The enabled check box authorizes the display of the Derived Function
Blocks (DFB).

IODDT Variables tab The enabled check box authorizes the display of the Derived Data Types
(DDT) that reference inputs/outputs (IODDT).

Device DDT Variables tab The enabled check box authorizes the display of the Derived Data Types
(DDT).

The dialog box Filtering data

The dialog box Filtering data makes it possible to:
• view the current filter conditions,
• change the current filter conditions,
• define new filter conditions.
NOTE: The contents of the Filtering data dialog box depends on the tab from which it
was called.

Description of the dialog box columns Filtering data

Description:

Column Description

Name This column contains the attributes for the (Variables, DDT Types, Function Blocks or
DFB Types) tab used to open the dialog box.

Check the box for the attributes that you want to filter.

Condition The column allows you to define the filter condition for every attribute.

Inverted Using this checkbox you can invert the filter condition for the attribute in question.

Options for defining a filter for Variables:

Name Condition inverted disabled inverted enabled

Comment Free text All variables whose comment All variables whose comment
attribute contains the word attribute does not contain the
e.g. *motor* Motor are filtered. word Motor are filtered.

Type Free text All variables of data type Int All variables not of data type
are filtered. Int are filtered.

33003101.26 431
 General Functions

Name Condition inverted disabled inverted enabled

e.g. Int

Alias of Yes All variables defined as an alias All variables not defined as an
are filtered. alias are filtered.
Value User defined All variables defined with an All variables not defined with
initial value are filtered. an initial value are filtered.
Constant Yes All variables defined as All variables not defined as
constants are filtered. constants are filtered.
Custom Free text All variables are filtered if their All variables whose user-
user-defined text (free text for defined text does not contain
e.g. *HMI* use in an external tool or for the word HMI are filtered.
special user requirements)
contains the word HMI.
Used >0 All variables used in the project All variables not used in the
are filtered. project are filtered.

Owner Free text All variables which owner begins All variables which owner
with \2.1\ are filtered. doesn’t begin with \2.1\ are
e.g. \2.1\* filtered.

Address Free text All variables with the address % All variables that do not have
MW1 are filtered. the address %MW1 are filtered.
e.g. %MW1

Global data Yes All variables defined as global All variables not defined as
data are filtered. global data are filtered.

Save Accept All variables that accept saving All variables that do not accept
and restore operations are saving and restore operations
filtered. are filtered.
HMI variable Yes All variables defined as HMI All variables not defined as
variable are filtered. HMI variable are filtered.
Time stamping Free text All variables which Time All variables which Time
stamping attribute is Both stamping attribute is not Both
e.g. Both edges edges are filtered. edges are filtered.

Scanned Variables Yes All variables defined as Scanned All variables not defined as
Variables are filtered. Scanned Variables are filtered.
Exchange On STBY Yes All variables defined as All variables not defined as
Exchange On STBY are filtered. Exchange On STBY are
filtered.
Retain Yes All variables defined as Retain All variables not defined as
Variables are filtered. Retain are filtered.

Options for defining a filter for DDT types:

432 33003101.26
General Functions

Name Condition inverted disabled inverted enabled

Comment Free text All DDT types whose comment All DDT types whose comment
attribute contains the word attribute does not contain the
e.g. *Motor* Motor are filtered. word Motor are filtered.

Options for defining a filter for Function Blocks:

Name Condition inverted disabled inverted enabled

Comment Free text All function blocks whose All function blocks whose
comment attribute contains the comment attribute does not
e.g. *Motor* word Motor are filtered. contains the word Motor are
filtered.
Diag Accept All function blocks that accept All function blocks that do not
the attribute Diag are filtered. accept the attribute Diag are
filtered.
Type Free text All function blocks of type TON All function blocks not of type
are filtered. TON are filtered.
e.g. TON

Custom Free text All function blocks are filtered if All function blocks whose user-
their user-defined text (free text defined text does not contain
e.g. *HMI* for use in an external tool or for the word HMI are filtered.
special user requirements)
contains the word HMI.
Used >0 All function blocks used in the All function blocks not used in
project are filtered. the project are filtered.

Owner Free text All function blocks which owner All function blocks which owner
begins with \2.1\ are filtered. doesn’t begin with \2.1\ are
e.g. \2.1\* filtered.

HMI variable Yes All function blocks defined as All function blocks not defined
HMI variable are filtered. as HMI variable are filtered.
Exchange On STBY Yes All function blocks defined as All function blocks not defined
Exchange On STBY Variables as Exchange On STBY are
are filtered. filtered.
Retain Yes All function blocks defined as All function blocks not defined
Retain Variables are filtered. as Retain are filtered.

Options for defining a filter for DFB types:

33003101.26 433
 General Functions

Name Condition inverted disabled inverted enabled

Comment Free text All DFB types whose comment All DFB types whose comment
attribute contains the word attribute does not contain the
e.g. *Motor* Motor are filtered. word Motor are filtered.

Diag Accept All DFB types that accept the All DFB types that do not
attribute Diag are filtered. accept the attribute Diag are
filtered.
Protection Protected All protected DFB types are All non-protected DFB types
filtered. are filtered.

Exporting a subset of variables

Introduction
The chapter Import / Export, page 1677 explains how to export variables.
However, all variables and FB instances, and subsets, were always exported (EDT, DDT,
IODDT, EFB, DFB).
In addition, a subset of variables may be filtered out and/or selected via the Data Editor and
only this subset will then be exported.

Filter
Filter the variables as described in the chapter Filtering of Data, page 430.

Selecting
Click on a variable to select it in the Data Editor. You can select multiple variables by holding
down the Alt or Ctrl keys.

Export
Export the filtered or selected variables via the context menu (right-click).

434 33003101.26
General Functions

Analyze DDT and DFB Data Types

At a Glance
DDT (Derived Data Types) and DFB (Derived Function Block) will have one of the following
status after setup:
• Status "in Process",
• Status "after the analysis".
This means that the data are instantiated with a type that is in process. The created instance
has characteristics of the prior type that was analyzed prior to processing.
After the analysis, to the extent that the type has no errors, the applicable instances within
the application will be updated..

Local analysis of data

Running the local analysis checks the selected data type for compatibility with the
corresponding instances throughout the entire project.
For DFB types, each section of the type is analyzed separately..
Perform the following steps to start a local analysis:

Step Action

1 Select the desired data type in the DDT Types or DFB Types tab.

2 Select the Analyze Typecommand from the shortcut menu.

3 Check the result of the analysis in the Display Window on the lower part of the window.

NOTE: Double-click on an error row in the display window to go to the source of the
error.

Global analysis of data

Running the global analysis checks all selected data types for compatibility with the
corresponding instances throughout the entire project.
Perform the following steps to start a global analysis:

33003101.26 435
 General Functions

Step Action

1 Select the Generate> Analyze Project command in the menu.

2 Check the result of the analysis in the display window on the lower part of the window.

NOTE: Double-click on an error row in the display window to go to the source of the
error.

Purge of Unused Instances

Overview
To purge unused instances of EDTs, EFBs and DFBs the Data Editor tabs provide the
respective context menus.

Purge Unused Variable

The purge depends on the check boxes (EDT, DDT, IODDT and Device DDT), i.e. only the
visible data (of checked types) will be purged.

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab of the Data Editor.

2 Right-click any column of the tab.

3 Select the menu command Purge Unused Variables from the context menu.

4 Confirm with Yes.

Result: The unused data will be purged.

Purge DDT Types

NOTE: The purge feature is not available for DDT types.

436 33003101.26
General Functions

Purge Unused FB Instances

The purge depends on the check boxes (EFB, DFB), i.e. only the visible data (of checked
types) will be purged.

Step Action

1 Select the Function Blocks tab of the Data Editor.

2 Right-click any column of the tab.

3 Select the menu command Purge Unused FB Instances from the context menu.

4 Confirm with Yes.

Result: The unused data will be purged.

NOTE: When a FFB is not available for a kind of PLC (after a section import for
instance) but still in the application (removed from the section but still in the list of the
Application FFBs), the purge feature should be used before building the application.

Purge Unused Private Variables/DFB Types

From the context menu of the DFB Types tab two purge operations are accessible.

Step Action

1 Select the DFB Types tab of the Data Editor.

2 Right-click any column of the tab.

3 Select one of the two menu commands Purge Unused Private Data Instances or Purge
unused Types from the context menu.

4 Confirm with Yes.

Result: The unused data will be purged.

Local printing of data

Introduction
Printing is a user-defined process and is executed using the following items:
• selected tab,

33003101.26 437
 General Functions

• Filtering variables,
• Sorting variables,
• Using certain variables

How to print
Carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the user-defined adjustment of the printing process in the Data Editor:
• Select the tab,
• Select the filter, page 430:
• Select the sorting order (alphabetically ascending or descending),
• Using structured variables

2 Select the File > Print menu command

or

use the key combination Ctrl+P

or

use the toolbar icon .

NOTE: Local printing takes the access security into consideration. Only information
appearing in the window is printed.
NOTE: If an IODDT, a DDT or an Array element of an instance has an alias, the instance
is displayed with the alias of the element as in the Data Editor.

Save the context of the Data Editor

Principles
When you leave the Data Editor, the configuration of the editor (visual aspect) will be saved.
This includes:
• the size and position of the Editor window,
• the selected tab,

438 33003101.26
General Functions

• the filter of the variables display,

• The configuration of the columns in each tab.
The following information will not be saved:
• An instance or variable type will be hidden when the Editor is reopened.
• The selection of single or multiple variables.

33003101.26 439
440 33003101.26
Communication
What’s in This Part
Presentation of the communication editors............................... 442
Network Configuration............................................................ 445
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations ................... 453

Subject of this Part

This part describes the communication editors.

33003101.26 441
 Presentation of the communication editors

Presentation of the communication editors

What’s in This Chapter
Presentation of the communication editors of the project
browser................................................................................. 442

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes the communication editors.

Presentation of the communication editors of the

project browser
At a Glance
The communication editors allow you to configure and manage the different communication
entities at project level.
They are accessible through the project browser by clicking the Communication tab.

442 33003101.26
Presentation of the communication editors

Illustration
The figure below shows an example of the project browser

33003101.26 443
444 33003101.26
Network Configuration

Network Configuration
What’s in This Chapter
Network Configuration Principle Using Control Expert .............. 445
Creating a Logic Network ....................................................... 446
Configuring a Logic Network ................................................... 448
Associating a Logic Network with Network Hardware ................ 449

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter presents the tools for configuring a network at the global level and at the station
level.

Network Configuration Principle Using Control

Expert
At a Glance
With Control Expert, the installation of a network takes place from the application browser
and from the hardware configuration editor.
The method involves the following four steps:
• creation of a logic network,
• configuration of the logic network,
• declaration of the module or of the PCMCIA card (for Premium),
• association of the card or of the module with the logic network.
These four methods are presented further on in this documentation.
NOTE: The advantage of this method is that from the second step onwards, you can
design your communication application (you do not need the hardware to start working)
and use the simulator for functional testing of it.
NOTE: The first two steps are carried out in the project browser and the following two in
the hardware configuration editor.
This manual introduces the method. For details of the various network configurations,
please refer to the following documentation:

33003101.26 445
 Network Configuration

• Ethernet configuration for Premium (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Ethernet Network Modules, User Manual), Ethernet configuration for
M340 (see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and Processors,
User Manual), and Ethernet configuration for Modicon M580 (see Modicon M580,
Hardware, Reference Manual),
• Modbus Plus configuration (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Modbus Plus Network, User Manual),
• Fipway configuration (see Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Fipway Network, User Manual).

Creating a Logic Network

At a Glance
The first step in implementing a communication network is to create a logic network.

Creating a Logic Network

The following table describes how to create a network using the project browser.

Step Action

1 Expand the Communication directory in the project browser.

Result::

2 Right-click in the Networks sub-directory and select the New network option.

Result::

446 33003101.26
Network Configuration

Step Action

3 Select the network that you want to create from the list of available networks and give it a
meaningful name.

Result: Example of an Ethernet network:

Note: You can also add a comment, if you so desire, by clicking on the Comment tab.

33003101.26 447
 Network Configuration

Step Action

4 Click OK and a new logic network is created.

Result: We have just created the Ethernet network that appears in the project browser

Note: As you can see, a small icon indicates that the logic network is not associated with any
PLC hardware. Furthermore, the small blue "v" sign indicates that the project needs to be rebuilt
before it can be used in the PLC.

Configuring a Logic Network

At a Glance
The second step in implementing a communication network is to configure a logic network.
This manual introduces the access to network configuration. For information on how to
configure the various networks, please refer to the following documentation:
• Ethernet configuration for Premium (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Ethernet Network Modules, User Manual), Ethernet configuration for
M340 (see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and Processors,
User Manual), and Ethernet configuration for Modicon M580,
• Modbus Plus configuration (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Modbus Plus Network, User Manual),
• Fipway configuration (see Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Fipway Network, User Manual).

Configuring a Logic Network

The table below describes how to access the configuration of a network from the project
browser.

448 33003101.26
Network Configuration

Step Action

1 In the project browser, expand the directory tree under the Networks sub-tab located in the
Communication tab of the tree directory to display all the project networks.

Example::

2 Double-click the network you want to configure to obtain the network configuration window.

Note: The windows differ according to the network family selected. However, for all networks,
from this window it is possible to configure the Global Data, IPO scanning, Peer Cop utilities,
common words, etc.

Note: For Ethernet networks, an intermediate step is necessary, which involves selecting the
family of the module that will be used in the hardware configuration.

Associating a Logic Network with Network

Hardware
At a Glance
The final step in implementing a communication network is to associate a logic network with
a network module, Modbus Plus card or Fipway card. Although the screens differ, the
procedure is the same for each network device.

How to Associate a Logic Network

The following table describes how to associate a logic network to a network device declared
in the hardware configuration editor.

Step Action

1 Open the hardware configuration editor.

2 Right-click the device (Ethernet module, Fipway PCMCIA card or Modbus Plus PCMCIA card)
that you wish to associate with a logical network.

33003101.26 449
 Network Configuration

Step Action

3 Select the channel and function.

Result: For a TSX ETY 4103 module:

4 In the Network link field, select the network to be associated with the card.

Result:

5 Confirm your choice and close the window.

Result: The logic network is associated with the device. The icon associated with this logic
network changes and indicates the existence of a link with a PLC. Furthermore, the rack, module
and channel numbers are updated in the logic network configuration screen. In our example we
obtain the following project browser:

450 33003101.26
Network Configuration

Step Action

33003101.26 451
452 33003101.26
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium

Stations
What’s in This Chapter
Configuration......................................................................... 454
Configuration of Multi-Network Services .................................. 455
Configuring an X-Way Router Module...................................... 456
Examples of X-Way Routing Stations ...................................... 460
Examples of Partial Routing.................................................... 463

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter presents the operating modes required for configuring X-Way routing Premium
stations.

33003101.26 453
 Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Configuration
At a Glance
In an intermediate station, the management of several network couplers requires a
configuration phase in order to distribute the functional characteristics to the various network
entities.

NOTE: Multi-network routing information is constructed at the station level at the time of
configuration of each bridge. No consistency check is done on routing data for the same
network architecture.

454 33003101.26
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Configuration of Multi-Network Services

At a Glance
In a station that supports various network modules, each network connection point is
considered as an address for the station. When configuring each module, it is necessary to
define the list of network numbers that are accessible for each connection point.
Depending on the processor selected during hardware configuration, a bridge station can
only manage 3 or 4 network modules. The table will therefore have a maximum of 4
elements.

Illustration
A specific screen allows entry of routing data for all the network modules of a station.

33003101.26 455
 Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Elements and Functions

The following table describes the various zones in the configuration screen:

Label Field Function

1 Logical network Used to display the logical network name.

2 Network type Used to display the network type.

3 Accessible Used:
networks
• for the unshaded Logical Network zone, to enter the list of networks
accessible by this module,
• for the shaded Logical Network zones, to display the list of networks
accessible by these modules.

4 Available Used to select the networks accessible by a module configured as a bridge.

networks
A list of numbers from 1 to 127 shows the networks available for a
connection point. Each network number selected as being accessible is
removed from the list of available networks in order to avoid configuration
errors.

Configuring an X-Way Router Module

At a Glance
Before configuring the module as an X-Way router, the station’s logical networks must be
created.

Procedure
The following procedure is used to access, and then configure the station’s module as an X-
Way router.

456 33003101.26
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Step Action

1 Open the Communication tab in your project browser and in the Routing table tab, click the X-
Way table tab.

Result: The following window appears.

If the list of accessible module networks is empty, the window appears automatically (without
double-clicking).

2 Double-click the highlighted field in order to configure the first network.

Result: The Selection of accessible networks window appears.

3 Double-click the number of the required network from the Available networks scroll list.

33003101.26 457
 Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Step Action

Result: The network number is assigned in the Access networks scroll list.

4 Perform operation 3 as many times as necessary to define all the networks accessible by the
module.

Once finished, proceed to step 5.

5 Confirm the selection by clicking OK.

6 Confirm the configuration of the X-Way router by closing the window or clicking the Enable
button in the toolbar.

Removing the Bridge Function

It is possible to remove the bridge function from the module.

Step Action

1
Access the following X-Way window.

2 Click Delete network list.

3 Confirm the configuration

458 33003101.26
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Removing Access to a Network

It is possible to remove access to a single network.

Step Action

1
Access the following X-Way window of the accessible networks.

2 Double-click the numbers of the accessible networks to be removed (left column).

Result: The network number is reassigned in the Available networks scroll list.

3 Confirm the selection by clicking OK.

4 Confirm the router configuration.

33003101.26 459
 Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Examples of X-Way Routing Stations

At a Glance
Each station must be configured in order to define the list of accessible networks.

Configuration of Station R1
The module at slot 2 can only access network 12.
The module at slot 4 can only access network 1 and 11.
The module at slot 5 can access networks 13 and 21.

460 33003101.26
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

The bridge configuration of the station is therefore as follows:

Configuration of Station R2
The module at slot 0 can only access network 11.
The module at slot 5 can access networks 1, 12, 13 and 21.
The bridge configuration of the station is therefore as follows:

Configuration of Station R3
The module at slot 0 can access networks 13, 12, 1 and 11.
The module at slot 5 can only access network 21.

33003101.26 461
 Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

The bridge configuration of the station is therefore as follows:

Messaging
To use the communication function (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Communication,
Block Library) such as Read_VAR for ethernet exchange between stations, configure the
TCP/IP Messaging in the Ethernet network configuration (see Premium and Atrium Using
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Ethernet Network Modules, User Manual) screen. In the
Messaging tab, for each exchange set the IP address and target XWay address.
For example if station R3 needs to communicate with station B, in R1Messaging tab:
• set the R2 IP address (139.255.255.4) in the field IP address, and
• set the B XWay address (11.4) in the field XWay address.
The following illustration shows the R1 Messaging tab:

For another example if station B needs to communicate with station A, in R2, Messaging
tab:
• set the R1 IP address (139.255.255.5) in the field IP address, and
• set the A XWay address (21.7) in the field XWay address.

462 33003101.26
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

The following illustration shows the R2 Messaging tab:

Examples of Partial Routing

At a Glance
When configuring a module as a bridge, it is possible to assign to it only a part of the
available networks, instead of all of them. This selection is used to define a partial routing.

33003101.26 463
 Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

Illustration
Each station must be configured in order to define the list of accessible networks.

Configuration of Station R1
The module at slot 2 is not involved in the routing of data.
The module at slot 4 can access networks #1 and #11.
The module at slot 5 can access networks #13 and #21.

464 33003101.26
Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

The bridge configuration of the station is therefore as follows:

Configuration of Station R2
The module at slot 0 can only access network #11.
The module at slot 5 can access networks #1, #13 and #21. Network #12 is inaccessible.
The bridge configuration of the station is therefore as follows:

Configuration of Station R3
The module at slot 0 can access networks #13, #1 and #11. Network #12 is no longer
accessible.
The module at slot 5 can only access network #21.

33003101.26 465
 Configuration of X-Way Routing Premium Stations

The bridge configuration of the station is therefore as follows:

466 33003101.26
33003101.26 467
Programming
What’s in This Part
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections ......................... 469
Control Expert Software Options ............................................. 546
Common Function for graphical language................................ 607
FBD Editor ............................................................................ 643
LD Editor............................................................................... 737
SFC Editor ............................................................................ 882
Common Function for Textual Language................................ 1009
IL Editor .............................................................................. 1044
ST Editor............................................................................. 1075
LL984 Editor.........................................................................1113
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box .............. 1174
I/O Objects tab..................................................................... 1200
Memory Tab ........................................................................ 1218
Type Library Browser ........................................................... 1224
Search/Replace Tool ............................................................ 1232
User's Function Blocks ......................................................... 1247

Subject of this part

This part describes the programming editors.

468 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Accessing Tasks, Program Units and

Sections
What’s in This Chapter
Access to Tasks ..................................................................... 469
Accessing Program Units ....................................................... 472
Accessing Sections................................................................ 499

Overview
This section describes how to access tasks, Program Units and sections.
NOTE: Program Units are not available for Momentum, Quantum, Premium and Atrium.

Access to Tasks
Subject of this Section
This section covers the creation and modification of program tasks.

Create and Configuration of a Task

General
The first operation you need to perform to create an application program is to define the
tasks.
By default, only the master task is proposed. It is possible to create the following tasks:
the FAST task and the auxiliary tasks AUX0 to 3.
NOTE: For a fipio (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio
Bus, Setup Manual) configuration, the window displayed is different.

33003101.26 469
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Creating a Task
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, double-click on the program directory.

The MAST directory appears in the Tasks directory.

2 Right-click on the Tasks directory, and then execute the New task... command from the contextual
menu.
3 Click on New task..., and the following dialog box appears:

4 Select the task:

• FAST: Fast task
• AUX 0, AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3: Auxiliary tasks (for processors with auxiliary tasks)

5 Select the type of scanning:

• Periodic
• or cyclic (for master task only)

6 Set the task period.

7 Set the Watchdog value which must be greater than the period value. We recommend to set it at twice
the logic execution time.

8 The Comment tab can be used to add a comment to describe the role of the task for example.

470 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Displaying and Modifying Task Properties

General
This procedure should be followed to display and/or modify the properties of an existing
task.
NOTE: For a fipio (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio
Bus, Setup Manual) configuration, the window displayed is different.

Task Properties
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, double-click on the program directory.

The MAST directory (as well as the FAST and AUX directories if they have been created) appears in
the Tasks directory.

2 Right-click on the MAST, FAST, or AUX directory, and then execute the Properties command from the
contextual menu.
3 Click on Properties, and the following dialog box appears:

4 Select the type of task:

• Periodic
• or cyclic

5 If you have selected a periodic task, set the task period.

33003101.26 471
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

6 Set the Watchdog value which must be greater than the period value. We recommend to set it at twice
the logic execution time.

7 The Comment tab can be used to add a comment to describe the role of the task for example.

Accessing Program Units

Overview
This section describes accessing Program Units for Modicon M580 and M340.

Creating Program Units

Introduction
Create Program Units for Modicon M340:
• in the MAST and FAST tasks
• in offline and online mode
Create Program Units for Modicon M580:
• in the MAST, FAST, AUX0, and AUX1 tasks
• in offline and online mode

Creating a Program Unit

Creating a Program Unit:

Step Action

1 Left-click the Logic directory of the desired task, or place the cursor using the arrow keys on this
directory.

2 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select New Program Unit... in the context menu.

Result: The New dialog box for the Program Unit opens.

3 Enter the name of the Program Unit. It must be unique in the entire project and conform to the
general naming conventions.

472 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

4 Select the type of access protection if necessary from the Protection list box:
• None
No protection
• Read only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Project Protection, page 187.

5 Select the functional module to which the section is allocated from the Localization tab if
necessary.

See also section Functional module, page 232.

6 Define a variable of BOOL or EBOOL type in the Condition tab with which the Program Unit can be
activated/deactivated (section active when variable=1) if required.

You have the following options to select variables:

• You can enter the name of the variable/address directly or copy it from the clipboard.
• Use the command button ... to open an instance selection dialog box, page 1174.
Only for EBOOL variable, activate the Can be forced check box when you want to force the
variable.
7 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.
8 Confirm the entries with OK and the Program Unit is automatically created in the Logic directory
with the following structure:
• Interface & Variables
• Sections folder
• Animation Tables folder
You can refer to the chapter Animation Tables, page 1467, which refers to the global project,
for the implementation of animation tables in the Program Unit.
NOTE: For the animation tables the accessible variable scope is limited to the Program Unit
scope.

9 Declare the parameters and variables for the Program Unit.

10 Create sections in FBD, LD, IL, ST, page 499 or SFC, page 507.

Displaying or modifying Program Unit properties

Displaying or modifying Program Unit properties:

33003101.26 473
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

1 Left-click on the desired Program Unit, or place the cursor on this Program Unit with the arrow
keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the Properties menu command from the shortcut
menu.

Result: The Properties of dialog box for the Program Unit opens.

3 Implement the desired changes.

4 Confirm all entries with OK.

Importing/exporting Program Units

See:
• Importing programs, page 1692
• Exporting programs, page 1690

Properties Dialog Box for Program Units

Structure of the properties dialog box
The properties dialog box consists of four tabs:
• General
Enter the name and the type of access protection of the Program Unit in this tab.
• Localization
You can enter the functional module of the Program Unit in this tab.
• Condition
You can enter a BOOL or EBOOL variable which can enable/disable the Program Unit
in this tab.
• Comment
You can enter a comment in this tab.

474 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Name Enter the name of the Program Unit in this text box.

The name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general naming
conventions.
Protection Select the type of access protection from this list box.
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

33003101.26 475
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Localization tab
Representation of the Localization tab:

Elements of the Localization tab:

Element Description

Task The task of the Program Unit is displayed in this field.

Functional module Select the functional module to which the Program Unit is to be allocated to in this list
box.

For detail, refer to chapter Functional Modules, page 232.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

476 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Condition tab
Display of the Condition tab:

Elements of the Condition tab:

Element Description

Variable You can enter variable of BOOL or EBOOL type which can conditionally enable/disable
the Program Unit in this tab. The scope to select the variable is a either a global variable,
or a public variable or an output parameter of another Program Unit.

In this area, you can enter the following:

• Name
◦ You can directly enter the name of the variable/address or paste it from the
clipboard.
◦ Use the command button ... to open an instance selection dialog box, page
1174.
• Comment
The comments about the selected variables are displayed in this text box.

Can be forced This check box indicates whether the selected variable can be forced or not.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

The animation of the activation condition behavior is provided in the project browser. The
Program Unit and its sections have activation conditions, page 505.
In the project browser, the flag (green for activate, red for inactivate) of the Program Unit and
the sections reflect the variable value of the variable used for their activation.

33003101.26 477
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

A section under a Program Unit is executed only if the section is activated and the Program
Unit is activated.

Case: Description

The section Start_process is executed and the

section Weighing_Material is not executed.

The Program1 is not activated, Start_process

and Weighing_Material sections are not
executed.

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

478 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Element Description

Text box A comment about the Program Unit can be entered in this text box.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Program Unit Data Scope

Introduction
When Program Units are allowed in programming your application (Modicon M580 and
M340), variables are determined by the scope to which they belong to:

Global variables: They refer to the application wide - or global - scope of data in a project which are:
• Unlocated variable
• Located variable (mapped at %M flat address)

Program Unit variables: They refer to the Program Unit data scope and have one of the following attributes:
• Private: can only be R/W in the scope of this Program Unit.
• Public: can be R/W out of the scope of this Program Unit.
• Parameter (Inputs, Outputs, and Inputs/Outputs): linked to Public variables
(from other Program Units) or Global variables.
• External: Global variables used in this Program Unit.

NOTE: The management of topological variable is only supported in the data editor,
refer to parameter assignment, page 489 to map a variable of a Program Unit to a
topological variable.

33003101.26 479
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Data Scope in Project Browser

1 Global variables, managed via the Data Editor

2 Variables under Program0 scope, managed via the Program Unit Data Editor of the
Program0.
3 Variables under Program1 scope, managed via the Program Unit Data Editor of the
Program1.

480 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Variables Accessibility
The variable accessibility is dependent to the scope (Global, Program Unit):

NOTE: System behavior of the PLC is accessible using the system bits and system
words into the Program Unit.

33003101.26 481
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Program Unit Data Editor Access

Introduction
The variables under the scope of a Program Unit can be accessed from the structural view
in the Program Unit data editor. It has features which support the following:
• Creating and declaring variables of different natures,
◦ Parameters (Inputs, Outputs, and Inputs/Outputs)
◦ Public, which can be accessible also from an other Program Unit
◦ External, for global variables used in the Program Unit
◦ Private, only accessible in scope of the Program Unit
• Assigning variables to Program Unit parameters (via effective parameter attribute),
• Searching/sorting/filtering variables.
• Managing of instances of data belonging to the family of function blocks (EFB/DFB).

Accessing the Program Unit Data Editor

Structural view of a project:

Carry out the following steps:

482 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

1 Click the left mouse button on the selected Interface & Variables directory, or place the cursor on
this directory with the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 combination) the Open command from the shortcut menu.

or

Double click on the Interface & Variables.

or

Select Edit > Open.

Result: The Program Unit data editor opens. The Variables tab is shown by default.

Program Unit Data Editor:

Description of Program Unit Data Editor Tabs

Introduction
NOTE: The different fields can be assigned parameters, page 421.

33003101.26 483
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Tab: Variables
The Variables tab enables the management of all the variables that belong to the Program
Unit:

Description:

Element Description

Filter
Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the name
Button field.

Clicking on this button opens a dialog box, page 430 for defining the filters.
Button

Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.
Button

Name Column where you enter the name (symbol) of the variable you want to display. You can use the
place holders (* or ? for this.).

EDT Displaying variables with elementary data types

DDT Displaying variables with derived data types

IODDT Display the variables with derived data types (DDT) that reference inputs/outputs

Device DDT Display the variables with device derived data types

Properties

Name Column where you enter the name (symbol) of the variable.

484 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Element Description

Type Column where you select the variable type.

Value Column where you initialize the variable.

Comment Column where you enter the comment for the variable.

Alias Column where you can change the name of a variable. Only for <private> variables.

Alias of Column where you enter the complete path of the variable subfield on which you set Alias
attribute.
HMI variable Column where you check if the variable is embedded in the data dictionary.

R/W Rights Column where you set the access rights of a reference type variable.
of
Referenced
variable
Effective Column where you can assign a variable to the Program Unit parameter.
Parameter
Nature Column where you set the nature of the Program Unit variable.

The above properties are displayed by default, for customized properties, refer to Configuring the Data Editor
columns, page 421.

NOTE: For more detailed information, refer to chapter Managing of variables belonging
to the Program Unit, page 488.

Tab: Function Blocks

The Function Blocks tab enables the management of the instance of elementary and
derived function blocks used in the sections of the Program Unit:

Description:

33003101.26 485
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Element Description

Filter
Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the name
Button field.

Clicking on this button opens a dialog box, page 430 for defining the filters.
Button

Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.
Button

Name Column where you enter the name (symbol) of the instance or the data type you want to display.
You can use the place holders (* or ? for this.).

EFB Displaying elementary data types

DFB Displaying derived data types

Properties

Name Column where you enter the name (symbol) of the function block instance.

no. Order number of the inputs and outputs of the function block.

Type Column where you select the function block type.

Value Column where you enter the initial value for the variable.

Comment Column where you enter the comment for the variable.

HMI variable Column where you check if the variable is embedded in the data dictionary.

R/W Rights Column where you set the access rights of a reference type variable.
of
Referenced
variable
The above properties are displayed by default, for customized properties, refer to Configuring the Data Editor
columns, page 421.

NOTE: For more detailed information, refer to chapter Managing of instances of date
belonging to the family of function blocks (EF), page 376.

486 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Tab: Interface
The Interface tab enables the management of the Program Unit variables sorted by Nature:

NOTE: The <inputs>, <outputs>, <inputs/outputs>, <public> and <external>

variables that belong to the Program Unit are displayed in this tab. These variables can
be declared in this tab and they automatically added in the Variables tab and vice versa.
Description:

Element Description

Properties

Name This column contains the Column where you set the nature of the Program Unit variable.

Column where you enter the name (symbol) of the variable.

Type Column where you select the variable type.

Value Column where you initialize the variable.

Comment Column where you enter the comment for the variable.

Effective Column where you can assign a variable to the Program Unit parameter.
Parameter
HMI variable Column where you check if the variable is embedded in the data dictionary.

The above properties are displayed by default, for customized properties, refer to Configuring the Data Editor
columns, page 421.

33003101.26 487
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Program Unit Variables

Naming Rule
The duplication of a variable name is possible when the variables belong to different scopes:
• Two Program Unit scopes, or
• The global scope and a Program Unit scope.
NOTE: In the same Program Unit scope, the variable name duplication is not allowed.

Variables Definition and Attributes

The following table

Program Definition and access Nature Type allowed

Unit
Variables
Input These parameters are read-only access in <inputs> EDT, DDT, ARRAY, References
parameters the Program Unit. They are used to (REF_TO), Device DDT
transfer values to the Program Unit.

Output These parameters are read/write access in <outputs> EDT, DDT, ARRAY, References
parameters the Program Unit. They are used to (REF_TO), Device DDT
transfer values from the Program Unit.

Input/Output These parameters are read/write access in <inputs/ EDT, DDT, ARRAY, Device
parameters the Program Unit. They are used to outputs> DDT, IODDT
transfer values to and from the Program
Unit.
Public These local variables are accessible from <public> EDT, DDT, ARRAY
variables another Program Unit using the effective
parameter assignment.

Private These local variables are only accessible <private> EDT, DDT, ARRAY, References
variables inside the scope of the Program Unit to (REF_TO), DFB, EFB
which they belong.
NOTE: A REF_TO can be
initialized with a variable of
the Program Unit which
Nature is <private> or
<public>.

External The global variables are accessible in the <external> EDT, DDT, ARRAY, References
variables sections of the Program Unit. (REF_TO)

These variables must be declared with the

same name and data type as the ones
defined in the global project.

488 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Parameter Assignment
The following table gives the rule for assigning to parameters of a Program Unit:

Program Unit Parameters Assignment

Input parameters Optional except for ARRAY, DDT, Device DDT, STRING, and REF_TO

Output parameters

Input/Output parameters Compulsory

The way to assign variable for Program Unit parameter (formal parameter) is done via the
attribute Effective Parameter. The assigned variable is a global variable or a public variable
of another Program Unit.
The Program Unit parameters and the variables which are assigned to must be of the same
data type. For example, if the data type INT is defined for the input parameter, then you
cannot assign to this parameter a variable of the data type DINT nor REAL.
The only exceptions are for BOOL and EBOOL data types which can be mixed. For
example, a %Mi internal bit of data type EBOOL can be assigned to an input parameter
defined as BOOL.
You have the following options to enter the variable in the Effective parameter field:
• You can enter the variable name.
or
• Using the button ... you can open a Data selection dialog box and confirm the selected
variables there with OK.
Example of a Data selection dialog box according to the scope:

33003101.26 489
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

NOTE: As the management of topological variable is only supported in the data editor of
the application (Address attribute of the variable), to map an interface variable of a
Program Unit to a topological variable, you have to:
• define a global located variable in the Data editor, then
• assign the global variable as an effective parameter of the Program Unit.

Program Unit Execution

The copy of the data from effective parameter to input formal parameter is performed before
the Program Unit execution.
The copy of the data from output formal parameter to the effective parameter is performed
after the Program Unit execution.
The following figure shows how a Program Unit is executed:

(1) Under the global scope.

(2) Under the scope of another Program Unit.

490 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Example of Program Unit Variable Usage

The following example defines two Program Units and a section under a task:

This is a variable belonging to the global scope (declared in the Data Editor):

Name Type

Glob1 BOOL

This is the definition of the variables belonging to the Prog1 scope (declared in the
Program Unit Data Editor):

Name Type Nature

Glob1 BOOL <external>

Input1 BOOL <inputs>

Output1 BOOL <outputs>

InOut1 BOOL <inputs/outputs>

Pub1 BOOL <public>

Priv1 BOOL <private>

The following table shows the syntax, the usage, and the access rights of the variables
according to their nature and scope:

33003101.26 491
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Variable Usage in Prog1 Usage in the code Usage in Prog2 Usage in Sect1
of Prog2 as Effective
Parameter
Glob1 Glob1 (R/W) No Glob1 (R/W) Glob1 (R/W)

PROG1.Input1 Input1 (R) No No PROG1.Input1 (R)

PROG1.Output1 Output1 (R/W) No No PROG1.Output1

(R/W)

PROG1.InOut1 InOut1 (R/W) No No PROG1.InOut1 (R/

W)

PROG1.Glob1 No No No PROG1.Glob1 (R/

W)

PROG1.Pub1 Pub1 (R/W(1)) No PROG1.Pub1 (R/W PROG1.Pub1 (R/W

(2)) (1))

PROG1.Priv1 Priv1 (R/W) No No No

%S6 %S6 (R/W(3)) %S6 (R/W(3)) No %S6 (R/W(3))

%M23 %M23 %M23 No %M23

%MW17 %MW17 %MW17 No %MW17

No: The variable could not be used

R: Read only

R/W: Read and write

(1) The write access can be restricted if Pub1 has the attribute RW program set to read only.

(2) The write access can be restricted in external usage if Pub1 has the attribute RW program external use set
to read only.

(3) The write access depends on the write access of the system bit or system word.

Purge of Unused Variables

To purge unused variables, the Program Unit data editor tabs provide the context menu
Purge Unused Variables.
The purge depends on the check boxes (EDT, DDT, IODDT, and Device DDT), i.e. only the
visible data (of checked types) will be purged:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab of the Program Unit data editor.

2 Right-click any column of the tab.

492 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

3 Select the menu command Purge Unused Variables from the context menu.

4 Confirm with Yes.

Result: The unused variables will be purged.

NOTE: This action can also be done from the Interface tab and Function Blocks tab.

Export a Subset of Variables and FB Instances

A subset of variables or FB instances may be filtered out and/or selected via the Program
Unit Data Editor.
Program Unit variables and FB instances are saved in source format .XPU.
Whatever the variables or FB instances you export, you can choose two options:
• export with or without the content of all the DDTs used,
• export with or without the content of all the DFB types used.
By default, the two "export with" options are selected.
To export filtered variables:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the Program Unit data editor.

2 Filter the variables as described in the chapter Filtering of Data, page 430.

3 Select the menu command Export Filtered from the context menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

4 Select the target folder for the export (directory tree) then enter the file name.

5 Select the export mode (with or without DDT, DFB type).

Result: When a "with" option is selected, the corresponding box is checked.

6 Activate the Export command.

Result: A progress indicator shows how the export is progressing.

7 A message is displayed in the display window to indicate that the export is finished.

To export selected variables:

33003101.26 493
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the Program Unit data editor.

2 Click on a variable to select it in the Program Unit data editor. You can select multiple variables by
holding down the Alt or Ctrl keys.

3 Select the menu command Export Selected from the context menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

4 Select the target folder for the export (directory tree) then enter the file name.

5 Select the export mode (with or without DDT, DFB type).

Result: When a "with" option is selected, the corresponding box is checked.

6 Activate the Export command.

Result: A progress indicator shows how the export is progressing.

7 A message is displayed in the display window to indicate that the export is finished.

NOTE: The above export procedures can be also performed for the FB instances
defined under the Program Unit by selecting the Function Blocks tab of the Program
Unit data editor instead of the Variables tab.

Import a Subset of Variables and FB Instances

A subset of variables or FB instances may be imported via the Program Unit Data Editor.
NOTE: If the DDTs or associated DFB types have been exported (options selected on
export), they are imported with the list of variables.
If the list of variables already exists in the current Program Unit, the software asks you to
choose between the following options:
• keep the component of the current Program Unit,
• replace the Program Unit component by the one from the import file,
• rename the imported component, allowing you to keep both components.
To import variables:

Step Action

1 Select the Variables tab in the Program Unit data editor.

2 Activate the Import command from the contextual menu (by clicking the right mouse button).

Result: a dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Choose the source folder for the import (directory tree) then select the file to be imported (XPU or
XSY).

494 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

Result: the name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: a progress indicator shows how the import is progressing.

5 A message tells you when the import is complete.

If errors occur during the import, they are indicated by a message in the display window.

NOTE: The above import procedure can be also performed for the FB instances defined
under the Program Unit by selecting the Function Blocks tab of the Program Unit data
editor instead of the Variables tab.

Access Right for Animation Tables in a Program Unit

The access right for object of an Animation table in a Program Unit depends on the nature of
the variable:

Nature Type Access Right

With Effective Without

Parameter Effective
Parameter
<inputs> BOOL, EBOOL, and INT R R/W

ARRAY, DDT, STRING, and REF_TO R N/A

<outputs> BOOL, EBOOL, and INT R R

ARRAY, DDT, STRING, and REF_TO R N/A

<inputs/outputs> BOOL, R R

EBOOL, EDT, ARRAY, DDT, STRING, and REF_ R N/A

TO
R: Read only

R/W: Read and write

N/A: Not applicable

Nature Type Access Right

<public> EDT, DDT, and ARRAY R/W

Constant R
<private> EDT, DDT, ARRAY, DFB, and EFB R/W

33003101.26 495
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Nature Type Access Right

REF_TO, and constant R

R: Read only

R/W: Read and write

NOTE: In the animation table dedicated to a Program Unit (sub folder Animation
Tables under Program Unit directory), only variables that belong to this Program Unit
can be added.
The implementation of animation tables dedicated to a Program Unit and its management is
similar to the ones in the Animation Tables folder in the Project directory. For detailed
information refer to chapter Animation Tables, page 1467.

HMI Access
The following Program Unit variables are accessible from HMI/SCADA:

Parameters: They have read only access by default.

NOTE: <inputs> parameter without assigned Effective parameter have read
and write access by default.

Public: They are read and write access by default.

Using the attribute RW program external used, you can restrict the default access as:
• Read only for public variables.
• No access for public variables and parameters.
In the Program Unit data editor, select the attribute HMI variable to embed the variable in
the data dictionary. These variables will be visible for HMI/SCADA.
To access the Program Unit variable from HMI/SCADA, use the variable syntax: <Program
Unit name>.<variable name>. For example: Program1.MyVar

Program Unit Management

Introduction
There are two ways to duplicate a Program Unit:
• Copy of the Program Unit without copy of the effective parameters.
• Copy of the Program Unit with copy of the effective parameters.

496 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

You can use the menu command, shortcut menu or drag-and-drop to duplicate a Program
Unit.

Moving a Program Unit

The execution order of programs elements can be changed exclusively in the structural
view.
Process the following steps to move a Program Unit:

Step Action

1 Click on the desired Program Unit with the left mouse button and hold the mouse button down.

2 Move the Program Unit to the required position within the current task or into another task.

NOTE: A Program Unit containing an SFC section can not be moved form the MAST
task to another task.

Duplication Without Effective Parameters

Process the following steps to duplicate a Program Unit without copying the effective
parameters:

Step Action

1 Select the desired Program Unit.

2 Copy the Program Unit by:

• Click Copy from the shortcut menu
or
• The Ctrl+C key combination

3 Select the location for the new Program Unit. It can be a Program Unit.

4 Paste the new Program Unit by:

• Click Paste After from the shortcut menu
or
• The Ctrl+V key combination
Result: The new Program Unit is created just after the selected lProgram Unit.

If using the drag-and-drop function to duplicate a Program Unit without copy of the effective
parameters:
• Press the key combination Ctrl + left-click on the Program Unit to be duplicated
(holding down the mouse button),

33003101.26 497
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

• drop the Program Unit at the desired location.

NOTE: A Program Unit containing an SFC section can be only duplicated in the MAST
task.

Duplication With Effective Parameters

Process the following steps to duplicate a Program Unit with copying the effective
parameter:

Step Action

1 Select the desired Program Unit.

2 Copy the Program Unit by:

• Click Copy from the shortcut menu
or
• The Ctrl+C key combination

3 Select the location for the new Program Unit. It can be a Program Unit.

4 Paste the new Program Unit by clicking Paste Special After... from the shortcut menu.

Result: A message box opens asking if you want to copy the effective parameters.

5 Click Yes to confirm the duplication with effective parameters.

NOTE: If you click No, the duplication is done without effective parameters, page 497.

6 Result: The new Program Unit is created just after the selected Program Unit.

If using the drag-and-drop function to duplicate a Program Unit with copy of the effective
parameters:
• Press the key combination Ctrl + Shift + left-click on the Program Unit to be duplicated
(holding down the mouse button),
• drop the Program Unit at the desired location.
NOTE: A Program Unit containing an SFC section can be only duplicated in the MAST
task.

Analyze
Process the following steps to analyze a Program Unit:

498 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

1 Select the desired Program Unit.

2 Analyze the Program Unit by clicking Analyze from the shortcut menu.

3 Check the result of the analysis in the Display Window on the lower part of the window.

NOTE: Double-click on an error row in the display window to go to the source of the
error.

Accessing Sections
Overview
This section describes accessing sections.

Creating an FBD, LD, IL, or ST Section

Introduction
Create FBD, LD, IL, or ST sections for Modicon M340:
• in the MAST and FAST tasks (Logic directory of the task)
• in a Program Unit that belongs to a task (Sections directory of the Program Unit)
• in offline and online mode
Create FBD, LD, IL, or ST sections for Modicon M580:
• in the MAST, FAST, AUX0, and AUX1 tasks (Logic directory of the task)
• in a Program Unit that belongs to a task (Sections directory of the Program Unit)
• in offline and online mode
Create FBD, LD, IL, or ST sections for Quantum, Premium and Atrium:
• in MAST, FAST, and AUX tasks (Sections directory of the task)
• in offline and online mode

Information for creating LD sections

An LD section contains 11-63 columns and 17-3998 rows.

33003101.26 499
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

The number of columns is set in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Program >
Languages > LD tab, in the Number of Columns text box.
This setting only applies to sections to be created, not existing sections. Verify that you
define the number of columns before you create a new LD section.
(The number of rows and columns can be changed during the creation of section contents.)

Information for creating FBD sections

An FBD section contains 86,400 grids (number of rows x number of columns).
The number of rows and columns is set in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the
Program > FBD tab.
This setting only applies to sections to be created, not existing sections. Always define the
number of rows and columns before you create a new FBD section.
(The number of rows and columns can be changed during the creation of section contents.)

Creating a section
Creating a section:

Step Action

1 To create a section in a task, select the desired directory (Sections or Logic) or place the cursor
using the arrow keys on this directory.

2 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select New Section in the context menu.

Or

Select Edit > New Section

Result: The New dialog box for the section opens.

3 Enter the section name.

The section name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general naming
conventions.
NOTE: Two sections of different program units can have the same name.

4 Select the programming language of the section.

5 Select the type of access protection if necessary from the Protection list box:
• None
No protection

500 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Project Protection, page 187.

6 Select the functional module to which the section is allocated from the Localization tab if
necessary.

See also section Functional module, page 232.

7 Define a Boolean variable in the Condition tab with which the section can be activated/deactivated
(section active when variable=1) if required.

You have the following options to select variables:

• You can enter the name of the variable/address directly or copy it from the clipboard.
• Use the command button ...to open an instance selection dialog box, page 1174.
Activate the Can be forced check box when you want to force the variable.

8 Only applies to Quantum projects:

Assign a read RIO drop and a write RIO drop to the section in the Remote IO tab if required.

See also section Executing Quantum sections with distributed inputs/outputs (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

9 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

10 If you wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with Apply. In this case, the New
dialog box will remain open and you can generate additional sections.

If you do not wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with OK. In this case, the New
dialog box will close and the generated section will open automatically.

Displaying or modifying section properties

Displaying or modifying section properties:

Step Action

1 Left-click on the desired section, or place the cursor on this section with the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the Properties... menu command from the
shortcut menu.

Result: The Properties of dialog box for the section opens.

3 Implement the desired changes.

4 Confirm all entries with OK.

33003101.26 501
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Importing/exporting sections
See:
• Importing programs, page 1692
• Exporting programs, page 1690

Properties Dialog Box for FBD, LD, IL, or ST Sections

Structure of the properties dialog box
The properties dialog box consists of four or five tabs depending on the platform of the
project:
• General
Enter the name, the programming language and the type of access protection of the
section in this tab.
• Localization
You can enter the functional module of the section in this tab.
• Condition
You can enter a Boolean variable which can enable/disable the section in this tab.
• Remote IO
This tab is only available for Quantum projects.
Assign a read RIO drop and a write RIO drop to the section in this tab.
Assigning drops will remove them from the TASK I/O update routine and will be
managed from the section.
When disabling a section by a condition, the read and write of the assigned drops are
still active.
• Comment
You can enter a comment in this tab.

502 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Name Enter the name of the section in this text box.

The section name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general
naming conventions.

Language Select the programming language of the section from this list box.

Note: The programming language can only be defined for new sections. The
programming language cannot be changed for existing sections.

Protection Select the type of access protection from this list box.
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

33003101.26 503
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Localization tab
Representation of the Localization tab:

Elements of the Localization tab:

Element Description

Task The task of the section is displayed in this field.

Functional module Select the functional module to which the section is to be allocated to in this list box.

For detail, refer to chapter Functional Modules, page 232.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

504 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Condition tab
Display of the Condition tab:

Elements of the Condition tab:

Element Description

Variable You can enter Boolean variables which can conditionally enable/disable the section in
this tab.

In this area, you can enter the following:

• Name
◦ You can directly enter the name of the variable/address or paste it from the
clipboard.
◦ Use the command button ... to open an instance selection dialog box, page
1174.
• Comment
The comments about the selected variables are displayed in this text box.

Can be forced This check box indicates whether the selected variable can be forced or not.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

33003101.26 505
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Remote IO tab
Representation of the Remote IO tab (only for Quantum projects):

Elements of the Remote IO tab:

Element Description

Remote drop Select the remote drop to read/write from this list box.

Already configured drops are displayed in black; non-configured in red.

See also section Executing Quantum sections with distributed inputs/outputs (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.
Read > Use this button to accept the selected drop as the drop to read. I.e. when processing
starts on the current section, the inputs for this drop are read.

Write > Use this button to accept the selected drop as the drop to write. I.e. when processing
ends on the current section, the outputs for this drop are written.

Delete Use this command button to reset the selected read/write drops.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

506 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box A comment about the section can be entered in this text box.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Creating SFC sections

Introduction
Create SFC sections for Modicon M340, and Modicon M580:
• in the MAST task (Logic directory of the task)
• in a Program Unit that belongs to the MAST task (Sections directory of the Program
Unit.)
• in offline and online mode
Create SFC sections for Quantum, Premium and Atrium:
• in the MAST task (Sections directory of the task)
• in offline and online mode
When creating an SFC section, the following three directories are created in addition to the
actual SFC section:

33003101.26 507
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

• Unused macros
In this directory, all macro sections are stored which were created but are no longer
being used, page 892.
• Actions
This directory contains all Action sections, page 956 for the current SFC section.
• Transitions
This directory contains all transition sections, page 965 for the current SFC section.

Creating SFC sections

Creating SFC sections:

Step Action

1 To create a section in the MAST task, select the desired directory (Sections or Logic) or place the
cursor using the arrow keys on this directory.

2 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select New Section in the context menu.

Or

Select Edit > New Section

Result: The New dialog box for the section opens.

3 Enter the section name.

The section name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general naming
conventions.
4 Select the programming language SFC.

5 If necessary, assign an automation area from 0-15 to the section in the Area number list box.

This automation area (area number) can be used as sorting criteria in the diagnostic viewer, page
1517.

It makes sense to assign the area number corresponding to the functional unit.

Example:

Cutting: No. 1

Milling: No. 2

Thread cutting: No. 3

In the example, the Area number must have the value 1, 2 or 3.

6 If you want an explicit acknowledgment of all diagnostic results for the SFC section (e.g. exceeding
the step monitoring times) to be required in the diagnostic viewer, page 1517, activate the
Operator control check box.

508 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

7 Select the type of access protection if necessary from the Protection list box:
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also Project Protection, page 187.

8 Select the functional module to which the section is allocated from the Localization tab if
necessary.

See Functional module, page 232.

9 Define a Boolean variable in the Condition tab with which the section can be activated/deactivated
(section active when variable=1) if required.

You have the following options to select variables:

• You can enter the name of the variable/address directly or copy it from the clipboard.
• Use the command button ...to open an instance selection dialog box, page 1174.
Activate the Can be forced check box when you want to force the variable.

10 Only applies to Quantum projects:

Assign a read RIO drop and a write RIO drop to the section in the Remote IO tab if required.

See also section Executing Quantum sections with distributed inputs/outputs (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

11 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

12 If you wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with Apply. In this case, the New
dialog box will remain open and you can generate additional sections.

If you do not wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with OK. In this case, the New
dialog box will close and the generated section will open automatically.

Displaying or modifying section properties

Displaying or modifying section properties:

Step Action

1 Left-click on the desired section, or place the cursor on this section with the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the Properties... menu command from the
shortcut menu.

Result: The Properties of dialog box for the section opens.

33003101.26 509
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

3 Implement the desired changes.

4 Confirm all entries with OK.

Importing/exporting sections
See sections:
• Importing programs, page 1692
• Exporting programs, page 1690

Properties Dialog Box for SFC Sections

Structure of the properties dialog box
The properties dialog box consists of five tabs for Quantum projects and four tabs for
Modicon M580, M340, Premium, and Atrium projects:
• General
You can enter the name, the programming language, the type of access protection and
diagnostic settings for the section in this tab.
• Localization
You can enter the functional module of the section in this tab.
• Condition
You can enter a Boolean variable which can enable/disable the section in this tab.
• Remote IO
This tab is only available for Quantum projects.
Assign a read RIO drop and a write RIO drop to the section in this tab.
Assigning drops will remove them from the TASK I/O update routine and will be
managed from the section.
When disabling a section by a condition, the read and write of the assigned drops are
still active.
• Comment
You can enter a comment in this tab.

510 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Name Enter the name of the section in this text box.

The section name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general
naming conventions.

Language Select the programming language of the section from this list box.

Note: The programming language can only be defined for new sections. The
programming language cannot be changed for existing sections.

Area number This list box is used to assign an automation range to the section; see also how to create
an SFC section, page 507.

This automation area (area number) can be used as sorting criteria in the diagnostic
viewer, page 1517.

The valid range for Area number 0...15.

Operator control When you enable this check box, any diagnostics events occurring in the SFC section (e.
g. violation of the step supervision times) must be acknowledged in the diagnostics
viewer, page 1517.

Protection Select the type of access protection from this list box.
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also Project Protection, page 187 .

33003101.26 511
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Element Description

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Localization tab
Representation of the Localization tab:

Elements of the Localization tab:

Element Description

Task The task of the section is displayed in this field.

Functional module Select the functional module to which the section is to be allocated to in this list box.

See also Functional module, page 232.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

512 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Condition tab
Display of the Condition tab:

Elements of the Condition tab:

Element Description

Variable You can enter a Boolean variable which can conditionally enable/disable the section in
this tab.

In this area, you can enter the following:

• Name
◦ You can directly enter the name of the variable/address or paste it from the
clipboard.
◦ Use the command button ... to open an instance selection dialog box, page
1174.
• Comment
The comments about the selected variables are displayed in this text box.

Can be forced This check box indicates whether the selected variable can be forced or not.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

33003101.26 513
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Remote IO tab
Representation of the Remote IO tab (only for Quantum projects):

Elements of the Remote IO tab:

Element Description

Remote drop Select the remote drop to read/write from this list box.

Already configured drops are displayed in black; non-configured in red.

See also section Executing Quantum sections with distributed inputs/outputs (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

Read > Use this button to accept the selected drop as the drop to read. I.e. when processing
starts on the current section, the inputs for this drop are read.

Write > Use this button to accept the selected drop as the drop to write. I.e. when processing
ends on the current section, the outputs for this drop are written.

Delete Use this command button to reset the selected read/write drops.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

514 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box A comment about the section can be entered in this text box.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Creating action, transition and macro sections

Creating action, transition and macro sections
The descriptions are found in the following sections:
• Creating action sections, page 956
• Creating transition sections, page 965
• Creating macro sections, page 930

Displaying or modifying section properties

Displaying or modifying section properties:

33003101.26 515
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

1 Left-click the target section, or place the cursor on this section with the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the menu command Properties from the
shortcut menu.

Result: The properties dialog box, page 516 for the section is opened.

3 Modify the section name as required.

Note that when you modify the name, the name of a link between the section and the element
calling (action, transition or macro section) is deleted.

4 Select the type of access protection if necessary from the Protection list box:
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

5 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

6 Confirm all entries with OK.

Action, transition and macro sections properties dialog

box
Structure of the properties dialog box
The properties dialog box consists of three tabs:
• General
The name and the programming language are displayed in this tab. You can also define
the type of protection for the section.
• Localization
You can enter the functional module of the section in this tab.
• Comment
You can enter a comment in this tab.

516 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Name The name of the section is displayed in this field.

Note that when you modify the name, the name of a link between the section and the
element calling (action, transition or macro section) is deleted.

Language The programming language of the section is displayed in this list box.

Note: The programming language can only be defined when creating the section.
The programming language cannot be changed for existing sections.

Protection Select the type of access protection from this list box.
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 517
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Localization tab
Representation of the Localization tab:

Elements of the Localization tab:

Element Description

Task The task of the section is displayed in this field.

Functional module Select the functional module to which the section is to be allocated to in this list box.

See also section Functional modules, page 232.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Note: This command button is only available in the properties dialog box for existing
sections.

518 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box A comment about the section can be entered in this text box.
OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Note: This command button is only available in the properties dialog box for existing
sections.

Create a Sub-Program Section (SR)

Introduction
Subroutine sections can be created:
• in offline and online mode
Subroutines are expansions to IEC 61131-3 and must be explicitly enabled via the Tools >
Project Settings dialog box, in the Language extensions tab by activating the Allow
subroutines check box.

Information for creating LD sections

An LD section contains 11-63 columns and 17-3998 lines.

33003101.26 519
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

The number of columns is set in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Program >
Languages > LD tab, in the Number of Columns text box.
This setting only applies to sections to be created, not existing sections. Always define the
number of columns before you create a new LD section.
(The number of lines can be increased or reduced during the creation of section contents.)

Creating subroutine sections

Creating subroutines:

Step Action

1 Left-click the SR Sections directory for the target task, or place the cursor on this directory using
the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the New SR Section menu command from the
shortcut menu.

Result: The New dialog box for the section opens.

3 Enter the section name.

The section name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general naming
conventions.
4 Select the programming language of the section.

5 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

6 If you wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with Apply. In this case, the New
dialog box will remain open and you can generate additional sections.

If you do not wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with OK. In this case, the New
dialog box will close and the generated section will open automatically.

View or edit section properties

Displaying or modifying section properties:

Step Action

1 Left-click on the desired section, or place the cursor on this section with the arrow keys.

2 Click the right mouse button or press Shift+F10 to select the Properties ... menu command from
the shortcut menu.

Result: The Properties of dialog box for the section opens.

520 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

3 Implement the desired changes.

4 Confirm all entries with OK.

Importing/exporting sections
See sections:
• Importing the Program, page 1692
• Exporting the program, page 1690

Property Dialog of the Sub-Program Sections

Structure of the properties dialog box
The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• General
Enter the name and the programming language of the section in this tab. The display
indicates whether the subroutine is used in the project.
• Comment
You can enter a comment in this tab.

33003101.26 521
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Name Enter the name of the subroutine section in this text box.

The section name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general
naming conventions.

Language The programming language of the section is displayed in this list box.

Note: The programming language can only be defined when creating the section.
The programming language cannot be changed for existing sections.

Protection Select the type of access protection from this list box.
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

Is called This check box indicates whether the subroutine is used in the project.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

522 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Comment tab
Representation of the Commenttab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box A comment about the section can be entered in this text box.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Creating a Timer Event Section

Introduction
Timer event sections can only be created in offline mode.
The following can be modified in offline mode:
• the number of the timer event,
• the time base,
• the unit of the preset value,
• the unit for the phase,
• the type of access protection,
• the functional module,
• the comment.

33003101.26 523
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

In online mode in stop mode, the following can be changed:

• the unit of the preset value,
• the unit for the phase,
• the type of access protection,
• the functional module,
• the comment.

Information for creating LD sections

An LD section contains 11-63 columns and 17-3998 rows.
The number of columns is set in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Program >
Languages > LD tab, in the Number of Columns text box.
This setting only applies to sections to be created, not existing sections. Always define the
number of columns before you create a new LD section.
(The number of rows and columns can be changed during the creation of section contents.)

Information for creating FBD sections

An FBD section contains 86,400 grids (number of rows x number of columns).
The number of rows and columns is set in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the
Program > FBD tab.
This setting only applies to sections to be created, not existing sections. Always define the
number of rows and columns before you create a new FBD section.
(The number of rows and columns can be changed during the creation of section contents.)

Creating timer event sections

Creating timer event sections:

Step Action

1 Left-click the Timer Events directory of the Events task, or place the cursor on this directory with
the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the New Event Section menu command from the
shortcut menu.

Result: The New dialog box for the section opens.

524 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

3 Enter the number of the timer event in the Timer number list box.

The maximum number of timer events depends on the selected CPU, see also section Timer
section (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
in the Reference manual.
4 Enter the time base for the preset value and phase in the Time base list box.

Note: Select the largest time base to reduce system load.

5 Enter the units for the preset value in the Preset text box.

The valid range is 0...1023.

Preset value = Preset x Timer base

6 Enter the unit for the phase in the Phase text box.

The valid range is 0...1023.

Phase value = Phase x Timer base

7 Select the programming language of the section.

8 Select the type of access protection if necessary from the Protection list box:
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

9 Select the functional module to which the section is allocated from the Localization tab if
necessary.

See also section Functional modules, page 232.

10 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

11 If you wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with Apply. In this case, the New
dialog box will remain open and you can generate additional sections.

If you do not wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with OK. In this case, the New
dialog box will close and the generated section will open automatically.

Displaying or modifying the section properties

Displaying or modifying section properties:

33003101.26 525
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

1 Left-click on the desired section, or place the cursor on this section with the arrow keys.

2 Click the right mouse button or press Shift+F10 to select the Properties... menu command from
the shortcut menu.

Result: The Properties of, page 526 dialog box for the section opens.

3 Implement the desired changes, page 523.

4 Confirm all entries with OK.

Importing/exporting sections
See sections:
• Importing the Program, page 1692
• Exporting the program, page 1690

Properties dialog box for Timer Event Sections

Structure of the properties dialog box
The properties dialog box consists of three tabs:
• General
In this tab, you can enter the timer event number, the timer time value, the programming
language and the type of access protection for the timer event section, see also section
Event processing (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
• Localization
You can enter the functional module of the section in this tab.
• Comment
You can enter a comment in this tab.

526 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Timer number Enter the number of the timer event in this list box. Note that the ITCNTRL function block
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System, Block Library) is required to activate a timer
event.

The maximum number of timer events depends on the selected CPU, see also section
Event processing (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Time base Enter the time base for the preset value and phase in this list box.

The following values are available:

• 1 ms
• 10 ms
• 100 ms
• 1 sec
The default value is 10 ms.

Note: Select the largest time base to reduce system load.

Preset Enter the unit for the preset value in this text box.

The valid range is 1...255.

Preset value = Preset x Timer base

Phase Enter the units for the phase in this text box.

The valid range is 0...255.

Phase value = Phase x Timer base

Language The programming language of the section is displayed in this list box.

33003101.26 527
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Element Description

Note: The programming language can only be defined when creating the section. The
programming language cannot be changed for existing sections.

Protection Select the type of access protection from this list box.
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also Project Protection, page 187.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Localization tab
Representation of the Localization tab:

Elements of the Localization tab:

Element Description

Functional module Select the functional module to which the section is to be allocated to in this list box.

See also Functional module, page 232.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

528 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box A comment about the section can be entered in this text box.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Create an I/O Event Section

Introduction
I/O event sections can be created in offline and online mode.

Information for creating LD sections

An LD section contains 11-63 columns and 17-3998 rows.
The number of columns is set in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Program >
Languages > LD tab, in the Number of Columns text box.
This setting only applies to sections to be created, not existing sections. Always define the
number of columns before you create a new LD section.
(The number of rows and columns can be changed during the creation of section contents.)

33003101.26 529
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Information for creating FBD sections

An FBD section contains 86,400 grids (number of rows x number of columns).
The number of rows and columns is set in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the
Program > FBD tab.
This setting only applies to sections to be created, not existing sections. Always define the
number of rows and columns before you create a new FBD section.
(The number of rows and columns can be changed during the creation of section contents.)

Creating I/O event sections

Creating I/O event sections:

Step Action

1 Left-click on the I/O Events directory of the Events task, or place the cursor arrow on this directory.

2 Use the right mouse button or the Shift+F10 key combination to select the New Event Section
menu command in the context menu.

Result: The New dialog box for the section opens.

3 Enter the number of the I/O event in the I/O Event number list.

The maximum number of I/O events depends on the selected CPU, see also the section on Tasks
and Processes (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).

4 Select the programming language of the section.

5 Select the type of access protection if necessary from the Protection list:
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

6 Select the functional module to which the section is allocated from the Localization tab if
necessary.

See also section Functional modules, page 232

530 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

7 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

8 If you wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with Apply. In this case, the New
dialog box remains open and you can generate additional sections.

If you do not wish to create additional sections, confirm the entries with OK. In this case, the New
dialog box closes and the generated section opens automatically.

Displaying or modifying section properties

Displaying or modifying section properties:

Step Action

1 Left-click on the desired section, or place the cursor on this section with the arrow keys.

2 Use the right mouse button or press Shift+F10 to select the Properties menu command.

Result: The Properties of, page 531 dialog box for the section opens.

3 Implement the desired changes.

4 Confirm all entries with OK.

Importing/exporting sections
See sections:
• Importing the Program, page 1692
• Exporting the program, page 1690

Property Dialog of I/O Event Sections

Structure of the properties dialog box
The properties dialog box consists of three tabs:
• General
Enter the I/O event number, the programming language and the type of access
protection for the I/O event section in this tab, see also section Event processing (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
in the Reference manual.

33003101.26 531
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

• Localization
You can enter the functional module of the section in this tab.
• Comment
You can enter a comment in this tab.

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

I/O Event number You can enter the number of the I/O event in this list box.

The maximum number of I/O events depends on the selected CPU, see also section
Event section, page 529 in the Reference manual.

Language The programming language of the section is displayed in this list box.

Note: The programming language can only be defined when creating the section. The
programming language cannot be changed for existing sections.

Protection Select the type of access protection from this list box.
• None
No protection
• Read-Only
Write protection
• No read & write
Read and write protection
See also section Program Unit, Section and Subroutine Protection, page 187.

532 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Element Description

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Localization tab
Representation of the Localization tab:

Elements of the Localization tab:

Element Description

Functional module Select the functional module to which the section is to be allocated to in this list box.

See also section Functional modules, page 232.

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

33003101.26 533
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Comment tab
Representation of the Commenttab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box A comment about the section can be entered in this text box.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Opening a Section
Opening a section
Opening a section:

Step Action

1 Click the left mouse button on the section desired (section, subroutine, event), or place the cursor
on this section with the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the menu command Open from the shortcut
menu.

or

Double click on the section.

Result: The section is opened.

534 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Deleting sections
Deleting sections
Deleting sections:

Step Action

1 Left-click the target section (section, subroutine, event), or place the cursor on this section with
the arrow keys.

2 Select (right-click or Shift+F10 key combination) the Delete menu command from the shortcut
menu.

Result: The section is deleted.

Execution order of sections

Introduction
The execution of sections is carried out according to the order displayed in the structural
view.
The arrangement of the actions, transition, macro steps, subroutines, and event sections
has no influence on the execution order as their execution is program or event controlled.
The execution order of sections can be changed exclusively in the structural view.
The changes can be made:
• in offline mode
• in online mode in stop mode

Modifying the execution order

Modifying the execution order:

Step Action

1 Click on the desired section with the left mouse button and hold the mouse button down.
2 Move the section to the required position within the current task or into another task.

33003101.26 535
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Creating LL984 Segments and Networks

Introduction
The logic of LL984 is programmed in networks.
Several networks are grouped in segments.
Each network contains a matrix of 7 rows and 11 columns, where you can place contacts,
coils, function blocks etc.
At the beginning of each segment's code execution the inputs of a RIO drop can be read
and at the end the outputs of the same or another RIO drop can be written.

Recommendations
It is recommended not to use more than 64 segments and 5,000 networks in an application.

Restrictions
For creating LL984 segments and networks the following rules apply:
• LL984 segments can only be created when the Ladder Logic 984 (LL984) project
setting is activated via Tools > Project Settings > Program > Languages.
• LL984 segments can only be created in the MAST task of the application, they are not
allowed in the FAST and AUX tasks.
• Only one LL984 segment can be created inside the subroutine (SR Sections) node of
the MAST task.
• LL984 segments can not be created under Timer Events or I/O Events nodes.
• LL984 segments can not be created in DFBs.
• For action and transition sections in SFC, LL984 is not allowed as language.
Only ST, IL, FBD and LD are allowed as language.
• LL984 segments and sections with IEC languages can be mixed inside the Sections
node of the MAST task. The same is valid inside the subroutine (SR Sections) node of
the MAST task.
• LL984 networks can only be created as children of LL984 segments.
• Only LL984 networks are allowed as children of LL984 segments, no sections with IEC
languages can be created there.

536 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Creating a Segment
Step Action

1 Left-click the Sections directory of the MAST task, or place the cursor using the arrow keys on this
directory.

2 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select New Section in the context menu.

Result: The properties dialog for the segment is opened.

3 Enter the section (segment) name.

The section (segment) name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general
naming conventions of Control Expert.

4 Select LL984 Segment as programming Language of the segment.

5 Select the functional module to which the segment is attached from the Localization tab if
necessary.

Also refer to Functional modules, page 232.

6 Define a boolean variable in the Condition tab with which the segment can be activated/
deactivated (segment active when variable=1) if required.

You have the following options to select variables:

• Enter the name of the variable/address directly or copy it from the clipboard.
• Use the ... button to open a Data Selection dialog.

7 Only applies to Quantum projects:

Assign a read RIO drop and a write RIO drop to the segment in the Remote IO tab if required.

8 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired (max. 1024 characters).

9 If you wish to create additional segments, confirm the entries with Apply. In this case, the dialog
will remain open and you can generate additional segments.

If you do not wish to create additional segments, confirm the entries with OK. In this case, the
dialog will close and the generated segment is displayed as the last element in the Sections
directory.
NOTE: The position of sections and segments inside the Structural view matches exactly the
execution sequence and can be changed via drag-and-drop.

Creating a Network
Step Action

1 Left-click an LL984 Segment in the Sections directory of the MAST task, or place the cursor using
the arrow keys on this directory.

2 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select New 984 Network in the context menu.

33003101.26 537
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

Result: The properties dialog for the network is opened.

3 Enter the network name.

The network name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general naming
conventions of Control Expert.

4 LL984 Network is preselected for the Language of the network and can not be changed.

5 Define a boolean variable in the Condition tab with which the segment can be activated/
deactivated (segment active when variable=1) if required.

You have the following options to select variables:

• Enter the name of the variable/address directly or copy it from the clipboard.
• Use the command button ...to open a Data Selection dialog.

6 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

7 Confirm the entries with OK. The dialog will close and the generated network is displayed as the
last element in the LL984 Segment directory.
NOTE: The position of networks inside the Structural view matches exactly the execution
sequence and can be changed via drag-and-drop.

A new network is normally inserted as the last element in the LL984 Segment directory.
To insert a new network directly before a selected network use Insert Network … from the
context menu.

Creating a Network for Subroutines

Step Action

1 Left-click the SR Sections directory of the MAST task, or place the cursor using the arrow keys on
this directory.

2 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select New SR Section in the context menu.

Result: The properties dialog for the SR section (LL984 Segment) is opened.

3 Enter the SR section (LL984 segment) name.

The SR section (LL984 Segment) name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the
general naming conventions of Control Expert.

4 Select LL984 Segment as programming Language of the segment.

NOTE: There can be only 1 LL984 SR segment in a project. So when there is already 1
existing you can no longer select LL984 Segment as programming Language for a new SR
section.
5 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired (max. 1024 characters).

538 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Step Action

6 Confirm the entries with OK. The dialog will close and the generated LL984 segment is displayed in
the SR Section directory.

7 Left-click the LL984 Segment in the SR Sections directory of the MAST task, or place the cursor
using the arrow keys on this directory.

8 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select New 984 Network in the context menu.

Result: The properties dialog for the network is opened.

9 Enter the network name.

The network name must be unique in the entire project and conform to the general naming
conventions of Control Expert.

10 LL984 Network is preselected for the Language of the network and can not be changed.

11 Enter a comment in the Comment tab if desired.

12 Confirm the entries with OK. Tthe dialog will close and the generated network is displayed as the
last element in the LL984 Segment directory.
NOTE: The position of networks inside the Structural view matches exactly the execution
sequence and can be changed via drag-and-drop.

Displaying or Modifying Segment/Network Properties

Step Action

1 Left-click on the desired segment/network, or place the cursor on this section/network with the
arrow keys.

2 Click the right mouse button or use Shift+F10 to select Properties in the context menu.

Result: The Properties dialog for is opened.

3 Implement the desired changes.

4 Confirm all entries with OK.

Exporting/Importing Segments/Networks
Please refer to Exporting/Importing LL984 Segments/Networks, page 1715.

33003101.26 539
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Modifying LL984 Segment Properties

Introduction
This section describes the specifics of the LL984 Editor referring to modifying LL984
segment properties.
For standard features please refer to Accessing Sections, page 499.

Protection
The Protection property is not available at the moment.

Localization
You can only attach LL984 segments to a functional module and not LL984 networks. The
networks of a segment are implicitly attached to the functional module of their segment.
You can attach an LL984 segment to a functional module either in the Localization tab of its
properties dialog or in the Project Browser via drag-and-drop from the Structural View to
the Functional View.
You can detach an LL984 segment from a functional module either in the Localization tab
of its properties dialog or by selecting Detach from the segment´s context menu.

Condition
You can modify the Condition of an LL984 segment in the Condition tab of its properties
dialog.
When you configure a boolean variable in this tab, the state of this variable is checked at the
beginning of the LL984 segment's code execution.
When the variable´s state is 0, the segment and all its networks are not executed.
When the variable´s state is 1 or when no condition variable is defined for the segment, it
depends on the condition variables of the networks whether the networks are executed or
not.

540 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Remote I/O
You can synchronize the Remote I/Os of an LL984 segment in the Remote I/O tab of its
properties dialog.
Here you can configure which Remote Quantum drop is read before and which one is
written after execution of the LL984 segment.
Drops which are not yet configured are displayed in red inside the list box.
Not configured drops can be selected here, but when they are not configured before next
Build, the build will not be successful and a diagnostic message will be displayed.
NOTE: This property is only available for Quantum projects.

Comment
You can enter a comment to an LL984 segment in the Comment tab of its properties dialog.
The maximum size of a comment is 1024 characters.

The LL984 Subroutine Segment

You can only have 1 LL984 segment under the SR sections node of the MAST task.
The properties dialog of this LL984 subroutine segment only provides the General and the
Comments tabs.
The Is called check book in the General tab is greyed and not checked.
This is done because in LL984, subroutines can be called via a memory word and so you
only know at run time whether a subroutine is called or not.
You can not define a condition variable for the LL984 subroutine segment.

Modifying LL984 Network Properties

Introduction
This section describes the specifics of the LL984 Editor referring to modifying LL984
network properties.
For standard features please refer to Accessing Sections, page 499.

33003101.26 541
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

Protection
The Protection property is not available at the moment.

Localization
You can only attach an LL984 segment to a functional modules. The networks of a segment
are implicitly attached to the functional module of their segment.

Condition
You can modify the Condition of an LL984 network in the Condition tab of its properties
dialog.
When you configure a boolean variable in this tab, the state of this variable is checked at the
beginning of the LL984 network's code execution.
When the variable´s state is 0, the variable and its networks are not executed.
When the variable´s state is 1 or when no condition variable is defined for the network, it
depends on the condition variables of the networks whether the networks are executed or
not.
You can define a condition variable for each network.
NOTE: Condition variables do not have influence on the execution of an L9_SKP block,
that means when you have a skip over 4 networks, you skip the remainder of the current
network and the next 3 networks independent of their condition variables.

Remote I/O
You can synchronize the Remote I/Os only for LL984 segments and not for LL984 networks.

Comment
You can enter a comment to an LL984 network in the Comment tab of its properties dialog.
The maximum size of a comment is 1024 characters.

542 33003101.26
Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

User Directory/Hyperlink
For LL984 networks you can add hyperlinks by selecting Add Hyperlink from the network´s
context menu.
For details please refer to chapter Hyperlinks, page 1765.
You can not add user directories to LL984 networks.

LL984 Networks in Subroutine Segments

The properties dialog of an LL984 network in a subroutine (SR) segment only provides the
General and the Comments tabs.
The Is called check box in the General tab is greyed and not checked, because in LL984
subroutines can be called via a memory word and so you only know at run time whether a
subroutine is called or not.
You can not define a condition variable for an LL984 network in a subroutine (SR) segment.

Scheduling LL984 Segments and Network

Introduction
Sections and LL984 segments (and also LL984 networks inside segments) are executed in
the sequence in which they are displayed in the Structural View of the Project Browser.
To change this sequence, you can drag-and-drop sections, LL984 segments or LL984
networks inside the Structural View.

Restrictions
For dragging-and-dropping LL984 segments and networks the following rules apply:
• Sections (ST, LD, …) can not be dropped into LL984 segments.
• LL984 segments can not be dropped into other LL984 segments.
• LL984 networks can only be dropped into LL984 segments.
LL984 networks can be dropped into the LL984 subroutine segment under the SR
Sections) node of the MAST task.
After dropping the networks, they are re-analyzed latest during next Build, because e.g.
L9_LAB function blocks are only allowed in networks of the LL984 segment in the SR
Sections node.

33003101.26 543
 Accessing Tasks, Program Units and Sections

• When an LL984 network has an activation condition and is dragged-and-dropped into

the LL984 subroutine segment, the LL984 network loses its activation condition
because subroutine networks do not have activation conditions.

Drag-and Drop Between Applications

You can not drag-and drop LL984 segments and networks from one Control Expert
application to another.
To copy sections between applications you have to use the import/export feature of Control
Expert.

Deleting, Cutting, Copying and Pasting LL984 Segments

and Network
Deleting LL984 Segments and Networks
You can delete LL984 segments and networks in the Structural View of the Project
Browser.
To delete an LL984 segment or network either select Delete from its context menu or press
the DEL key.
If you want to delete an LL984 segment, a message is displayed that all its networks will be
deleted, too.
You have to confirm this message to delete the LL984 segment.

Cutting, Copying and Pasting

You can not cut, copy and paste LL984 segments and networks in a Control Expert
application.
Alternatively you can use the import/export feature on segment or network level.

544 33003101.26
33003101.26 545
 Control Expert Software Options

Control Expert Software Options

What’s in This Chapter
Project Settings ..................................................................... 546
Options ................................................................................. 587
Customize Dialog Box ............................................................ 602

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes the options in Control Expert software. The software provides 3
types of option:
• Project Settings: they are specific to the generated project and to how it is executed on
the PLC (for example: acknowledgment of diagnostic functions, execution of SFC
language, etc.).
• Options..: they are specific to the workstation and may therefore differ from one station
to another for the same project (for example: the way in which errors are displayed,
direction of movement of selection after data entry, etc.)
• Custom..: they are used to customize the ergonomics of the workstation (contents of
toolbar etc.).

Project Settings
Overview
This section describes the Tools > Project settings dialog box tab.

546 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

General Description
Introduction

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
When importing a project settings file, ensure that the required file is used. Importing an
inappropriate project setting file can result in unexpected application behavior.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

The table below describes the general functions used with all Project Settings tabs:

Fields Description

Import This button allows the selection of a Project Setting .XSO file. All values in the file
will be taken into account for the current opened project. After Import, click on OK
or Apply to validate the settings.

Export This button allows the current values of the project settings to be saved in an .XSO
file.
Reset All This button is used to reset all the settings to their default values.

OK This button is used to save the modifications and close the current tab.
Apply This button is used to save the modifications.

Cancel This button is used to cancel without saving the modifications on the current tab.

Help This button is used to call the online help.

General Navigation
The table below describes the general key shortcut navigation used with all Project Settings
tabs:

Fields Description

TAB This key is used to move from one control to another.

ENTER This key is used to confirm the current action.

ESC This key is used to cancel without saving the modifications in the current tab.

Up, Down, Left and Right These keys are used to navigate within the tree control and the right list box.
Arrows

33003101.26 547
 Control Expert Software Options

Specific Navigation
The table below describes the Specific key shortcut navigation used with all Project Settings
tabs:

Fields Description

Space This key is used to check/uncheck an element.

F2 This key is used to activate the current line.

ESC This key is used to deactivate the current line.

Up and Down Arrows These keys are used to navigate in the list box in the active line.

+ and - These keys are used to increase or decrease a value in the number field in the
active line.

General Project Settings

At a Glance
The following tables describe the available functions in the Project Settings dialog for
project generation:
• Management of build messages
• Build settings
• Project autosaving on download
• PLC embedded data
• PLC diagnostics
• PLC behaviour
• Path
• Time
• Configuration

Management of build messages

The following table shows all available Management of build messages fields, their
description, and required action to take modification into account:

548 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

Variable not used Nothing or a detected warning is displayed in the view window if variables defined in
generates the project are not used in the program.

Variables defined in the project but are not used in the program.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Multiple writing of Variables assigned several times to different places in the program.
variables generates
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Parameters not EFB or DFB parameters not assigned.

assigned generates
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Multiple use of FB EFB or DFB instances used several times at different places in the program.
instance generates
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

DDT mapping An alignment test on DDTs is done for each type of data structure (BOOL, BYTE, INT,
compatibility DINT...) with specific rules for each platform. Control Expert displays a notification
generates stating which DDTs have to be modified when either an Analyze Project, Build
Changes, or Rebuild all Project command runs.

If the data structures have the same alignment in each platform, communication
between them is possible. Otherwise, a notification appears to inform which DDTs
have to be modified for allowing communication.

Premium and Quantum have the same mapping rule so these two platforms are
aligned for communication.

M340, M580, and Momentum have a different mapping rule than Premium and
Quantum. So, it is necessary to check if the alignment of the exchanged DDTs is the
same for each platform (M340 and Premium for example) and in this case modify the
DDTs.

Refer to DDT: Mapping rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) for alignment rules.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Overlapping of If nothing is selected, no message is displayed in the view window even if there is
address generates overlapping of address of some variables.

If a detected warning is selected, some address messages are displayed in the view
window if there is overlapping of addresses of some variables.The project is
generated.

33003101.26 549
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

If a detected error is selected, some detected error messages are displayed in the
view window if there is overlapping of addresses of some variables. Due to the
detected errors, the project is not generated.
NOTE: Overlapping of topological addresses is not detected. Only flat addresses
are detected by Control Expert.
NOTE: The overlapping can generate a high number of detected errors for
clients using many located variables or LL984 converted code and so increase
the build generation time.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Missing gateway IP @ A detected error is generated on Quantum RIO architecture when a 140 NOC 780 00,
generates 140 NOC 781 00 or 140 CRP 312 00 module is configured without gateway IP
address defined (equal to 0.0.0.0).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Control numbers of The Control numbers of warnings has to be selected and a value defined in the
warnings Maximum of warnings allowed field (the valid range is 100...2000). Then, when the
number configured is reached, the next detected warnings are not displayed in the
view window.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Control numbers of The Control numbers of errors has to be selected and a value defined in the
errors detected Maximum of errors allowed field (the valid range is 100- 2000). Then,
when the number configured is reached, the next detected errors are not displayed in
the view window.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Build settings
The following table shows all available Build settings fields and their description:

550 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

Create New data block Exclusive setting that allows you to select the management of data memory during
on line on line modification.

This setting allows you to add/modify variables without limitation of the memory
block. By default, this check box is checked:
• When checked, the dynamic allocation of unlocated variables in a new data
block can be done online and you are not prompted Control Expert does not
prompt you to Rebuild all Project.
• When unchecked, Control Expert acts as per the free data memory setting,
which appears below.
NOTES:
• For applications (STA, XEF, ZEF files, or an upload) that contain this project
setting when opened the setting is not changed.
• For applications that do not contain this project setting, when opened or
uploaded it is set to the default value: checked.

Modification: Online possible

Action Rebuild All Project (Offline) to deselect

required:
Build Changes (Online) to select

Free data memory (in Exclusive setting that allows you to select the management of data memory during
kbytes) on line modification.

This setting was the only way to manage data memory during on line changes with
previous versions of Unity Pro V6.0.

Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.

It is kept for compatibility with previous versions or when only a few modifications of
variables on line are planned.

When this setting is valid, only one memory block 1...64 K is reserved.

Each time unlocated variables are created or modified, they are added to this
memory block in the PLC.

When the memory allocated is full, it is not possible to perform additional on-line
modifications (a detected error message is displayed during the on-line change
session). A Rebuild All Project is mandatory to restart with this memory block
empty and available for new on line modifications.

Modification: Online possible

Action Rebuild All Project (Offline)

required:

Virtual connected Used to modify a project on a non-connected terminal, as if this terminal was
mode connected to the PLC.

It is then simply a case of connecting the terminal to the PLC and activating the
command Build > Build Changes in order to have these modifications taken into
consideration in the PLC. This transfer does not stop the PLC and only the changes
made are taken into account. The purpose of this mode is to inform when an online

33003101.26 551
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

modification is not possible. However, if the change is made, the virtual connected
mode is aborted.

Analysis is permitted in this mode, but generation is not possible. The project can be
regenerated at any time, but this exits virtual mode.

Modification: Online possible

Action Rebuild All Project (Offline)

required:

Generate with LD link Allows choosing to include or not information on ladder diagram link animation in the
animation generated code.

Modification: Online possible

Action Rebuild All Project (Offline)

required:

Optimized code Used to reduce the size of the code generated by removing arithmetic overflows.
Note the following:
• On Modicon M580, M340, and Premium PLCs and on Quantum 140 CPU 6••
PLCs, the %S18 bit is not managed for arithmetic operations on elementary
data types (EDT) and tables.
• On Quantum 140 CPU 3••/4••/5•• PLCs, the %S18 bit is not managed for
arithmetic operations on EDT. The %S20 bit is not managed for table indexing
(the threshold values are still checked).

Modification: Online possible

Action Build Changes (Offline)

required:

Safe Signature Used to specify when a new SourceSafeSignature will be calculated for a safety
management PAC application:
• Automatic: (default) A new SourceSafeSignature is calculated automatically at
each build.
• On user request: A new SourceSafeSignature is calculated only when the
Build > Update Safe Signature command is executed in Control Expert.

Modification: Online possible

Action Build Changes (Offline)

required:

Apply online Allows choosing whether the application is to be downloaded automatically or on a

modification user request after the Build Changes command.

552 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

On each modification, this dialog box allows you to validate or not the modification:

Modification: Online possible

Action No build necessary

required:

I/O Scanning mode Defines the I/O scanning register size for Modbus TCP devices:
• Legacy: The default I/O scanning Device DDT structure created is an array of
BYTE, aligned on 32 bits.
This mode is used in applications created with Unity Pro ≤ V11.1. Set this
mode for these applications to keep Modbus TCP device settings.
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
Changing the mode between Legacy and Enhanced may have an impact on
the Device DDT structure of configured DIO devices.
• Enhanced: The default I/O scanning Device DDT structure created is an array
of INT, aligned on 16 bits. This mode is valid for M580 CPU with OS version ≥
2.00.
This mode is recommended for applications created with Control Expert that
are not opened or modified with Unity Pro ≤ V11.1. If the CPU DIO ports are
used for I/O scanning, CPU OS version ≥ 2.00 is necessary.
Refer to DDT: Mapping rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) for alignment rules. DDT alignment
verification is set in the DDT mapping compatibility generates, page 548 project
setting.
NOTE: This function is applicable in a Modicon M580 system.

Modification: Offline only

Action Rebuild All Project (Offline)

required:

Project autosaving on download

The following table shows all available Project autosaving on download fields and their
description:

33003101.26 553
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

save STA If selected, the archive file is automatically saved each time it is transferred to
the PLC (generation in online mode or transfer of complete program).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

save STU If selected, the project is automatically backed up (STU and auto.STA files
saved if the application has changed since the last download) each time it is
transferred to the PLC (generation in online mode or transfer of complete
program).
NOTE: Each time the project is saved (STU file), if the project is in BUILT
state, a file with AUTO.STA suffix is saved, even if the STU box is not
checked.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

save XVM If selected, the project variables are automatically backed up (XVM file) each
time the project is transferred to the PLC (generation in online mode or
transfer of complete program).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

PLC embedded data

The following table shows all available PLC embedded data fields and their description:

554 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

Data dictionary Dictionary of symbolized variables with their characteristics (address, type,...) in the
PLC memory.

If this setting is enabled, all symbolized variables of the application are embedded in
the PLC memory. Any client (SCADA using OFS, HMI, embedded Web server...) can
then animate or modify those variables. By default, the settings are disabled.

The Data dictionary is generated at build time. This block is updated only if it is
needed during an online modification.
NOTE: Comments of the variables are not stored.
The 3 following properties improve the performances of the Data dictionary online
build:
• When checking Preload on build changes, download of data dictionary
reflecting the change of variable definition is performed before applying the real
change of the application in the PLC. The PLC client tools are then able to learn
new changes of data.
• The Effective Build changes time-out (sec) is the time (1...240 s) that Control
Expert is waiting between the download of the new data dictionary and the real
online application change. The down counting of the time-out is displayed in the
progress bar during the Build Changes operation.
• Checking the Only HMI variables and identifying the HMI variables necessary
in the Data Property table improves online build performances and memory
usage of the PLC. This setting means that the data dictionary embeds only
variables or DFB/EFB instances that have the HMI attribute set.
The Usage of Process Namespace setting, only available for M580 safety projects,
determines how an operator screen can access and read process variable. For more
detailed information, refer to chapter M580 Safety Project Settings (see Modicon
M580, Safety System Planning Guide)

Checking the Include DFB/PU private variables setting adds these private
variables in the Data dictionary.
NOTE: A Memory full detected error message could happen during a Build
Changes if there is not enough free memory. A project with the Data dictionary
enabled needs a large amount of free memory to be built.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Online)

Upload information If selected, this non-executable code designed to restore the source of the project on
a terminal is simultaneously loaded with the executable code when transferring the
project to the PLC.

If selected, program transfer from the PLC to the PC cannot be done. In this non-
executable code, the check boxes Comments and Animation tables are used to
include comments associated with the variables and types and animation tables
respectively.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Upload information If Automatic is selected, all online modifications are made on both the executable
management code and the non-executable code designed to restore the project on the terminal.

33003101.26 555
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

If On user request is selected, the online modifications are only made on the
executable code in the PLC processor. The non-executable code has to be updated
implicitly using the PLC > Update Upload Information command.

An indicator at the foot of the screen is displayed if the non-executable code has not
been updated.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Optimize data on-line If this box is checked, it reduces the time of the Upload information generation
change relating to variables and function blocks of the application in online mode.
NOTE: Uncheck this option to keep compatibility with Unity Pro versions before
4.1.
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Data memory protect If this box is checked, it allows to protect some data against request modification in
monitoring mode.
NOTE: Only available for:
• M580 CPU with OS version V3.20 or later
• M340 CPU with OS version V3.30 or later
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

PLC diagnostics
The following table shows all available PLC diagnostics fields and their description:

Fields Description

Application diagnostics If the box is checked, you can choose an Application diagnostic level.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Application diagnostic Diagnostic level choice:

level • If No cause of fault is selected, the analysis of the diagnostic detected error
origin is not performed.
• If Local diagnostic is selected, the analysis of the diagnostic detected error
origin is performed within the section using the diagnostic DFB.

556 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

• If Global diagnostic is selected, the analysis of the diagnostic detected

error origin is performed within the whole application.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

System diagnostics If the box is checked, you can choose a System diagnostic language.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

System diagnostic Language choice:

language • English (by default)
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
• French
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Rack Viewer diagnostics If selected, it provides a view of the rack.

information
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Online)

Rack Viewer variable If selected, it provides a view of the rack names.

names
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Online)

Program Viewer The Program Viewer runs on a PC that is connected to an Ethernet module.
information
If selected, it provides a view of the program structure (functional and structural)
and displays the contents of sections and animation.

NOTES:
• Useful only when having a FactoryCast 140 NOE 771 1•, TSY ETY 5103 in
the PLC local rack.
• The Data dictionary has to be selected and preferably without the Only
HMI variables option.The program viewer relies on the data dictionary being
fully present in the PLC to animate the variables in the code. If the data
dictionary is not present, or incomplete, the code is visible but not animated
or only partially animated. Using the HMI variables only would limit the
scope of the animated variables in the code.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

33003101.26 557
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

Event Logging Select this field to enable event logging for each possible originator of event
logging in the architecture. The syslog settings entered below are transferred to
each event logging originator in the architecture.
NOTE: Event logging is enabled if this field is selected and a valid syslog
server IP address is entered in SYSLOG server address field below.
NOTE: Control Expert event logging is configured in the Profiles tab of the
Security Editor tool. For more details refer to EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Security Editor, Operation Guide.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

SYSLOG server address Sets the IP address of the syslog server that stores the system events logging.
NOTE: The default value (0.0.0.0) does not allow events to be logged, a valid
server address is needed with the Event Logging field selected.
NOTE: The syslog server address entered here is embedded in the
application.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

SYSLOG server port Sets the syslog port number.

number
Port number value:
Default: 601
Range: 0...65535

Modification: Offline only

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

SYSLOG server protocol Sets the syslog server protocol.

TCP V1 is the default syslog protocol.

Modification: The syslog protocol cannot be modified in Unity Pro 10.0.

Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version

13.1 or earlier.
Action required: –

558 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

PLC behaviour

CAUTION
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that the use of the function Reset %M on Stop->Run transition is appropriate to
the application and carefully tested before any implementation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

The following table shows the PLC behaviour field and its description:

Field Description

Reset %M on Stop- This function resets %M that is not used in LL984 sections during a STOP to RUN
>Run transition transition of the CPU.
NOTE: This function is only available for the Quantum CPUs with version 2.82
or higher of the operating system.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

The action of the Reset %M on Stop->Run transition function depends on the following
(Tools menu) > Project Settings check boxes:
• General > PLC behaviour > Reset%M on Stop->Run transition
This setting only impacts % M not used in LL984 language sections.
• Program > Languages > Ladder Logic 984 (LL984)
This setting only impacts %M used with normal coils in LL984 language sections.
This table shows that results of a transition depend on which check boxes are validated:

Reset%M LL984 Resulting Action on Stop > Run transition

Unchecked Unchecked No %M are reset.

Checked Reset of %M used with normal LL984 coils.

Checked Unchecked Reset of %M.

Checked Reset of all %M not used with latched LL984 coils.

If there are %M conflicts:

• For a %M used on an LL984 latched coil and on a non-LL984 coil, the LL984 latched
coil has the higher priority
• For a %M used on an LL984 normal coil and on a non-LL984 coil, the LL984 normal
coil has the higher priority

33003101.26 559
 Control Expert Software Options

If a %M has its value forced, its forced value does not change after a Reset %M on Stop-
>Run transition.

Path
The following table shows the Path field and its description:

Fields Description

Hyperlink Root Path Allows choosing a path which is used for LL984 application, page 104 when the
option to convert long comments to text files is chosen. In this case, the long
comments are available as hyperlinks in the variable comments column of the
data editor.

Additionally you can define a path for the created hyperlink text files by either of 2
ways:
• Define a relative path in the root directory of your application.
• Use the ... button to select any other path.
The subfolder of the hyperlink files is displayed below the edit field.

The path defined is written to the project settings of your new application: Tools >
Project Settings > General > Path > Hyperlink Root Path

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Time
The following table shows all available Time fields and their description:

Fields Description

Time Stamping Defines the time stamping mode:

Mode
• Applicative (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Applicative Time Stamping, User
Guide)
• System (see System Time Stamping, User Guide)

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Max events stored Only available for System time stamping mode, this value (from 0 to 32000) defines the
maximum number of time stamping events stored in the PLC memory. This maximum
number defines the size reserved in the PLC memory for time stamping storage.See
the PLC > Memory Consumption... to know the memory size used and refine this
value if needed.
NOTE: When building the project, if this value is too small, a detected error
message gives the exact value to select.

560 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Custom Gives the possibility to define your own time zone. If checked the option:
behaviourTimeZone • Time Zone in UTC time cannot be selected.
• Time Offset can be adjusted.
• Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving can be configured.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Time Zone Allows you to select the wanted time zone in the list of standard time zone.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Time Offset Allows you to add an offset to the Time Zone between -1439...1439 minutes.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Automatically Enabled: In the START Daylight Saving and END Daylight Saving fields, enter the
adjust clock for month, day of the week, occurrence range, hour, minute, second, and offset from the
daylight saving respective dropdown lists.

Disabled (by default): The START Daylight Saving and END Daylight Saving fields
are disabled because their times are automatically changed in the spring and fall every
year.
NOTE: Automatic clock adjust for daylight saving change is NOT implemented on
Modicon Premium, Quantum, Momentum, MC80, or M340 ranges. You are
advised not to activate this feature (No internal or external action is performed
when this function is activated).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

NOTE: The time settings are only used if you configure a PLC with BMXNOR••••,
BMXCRA••••, BMECRA••••, or BMXERT•••• modules. In all other cases, time settings
are managed by NTP or by user PLC application. The Quantum and Premium Ethernet
modules have their own time setting configuration screen.

Configuration
The following table shows the Configuration field and its description:

33003101.26 561
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

M580 preferred I/O You can choose the default type of I/O for adding a new device in a Modicon M580
data type (Local I/O) main local rack (containing the CPU):
• Device DDT (by default): unlocated data
• Topological: located data

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

M580 preferred I/O You can choose the default type of I/O for adding a new Quantum I/O module in a
data type for Modicon M580 remote I/O:
Quantum EIO • Device DDT (by default): unlocated data
• State Ram: located data
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Variables
Introduction
This dialog box can be accessed with the Tools > Project Settings > Variables.

562 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Representation
Representation of the Variables section:

Elements of the Variables section:

Element Description

Allow leading digits When activating this check box, leading digits in names can be used (for example,
section names, variable names, step names, and so on). Verify that the names contain
at least one letter in addition to the leading digits.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Character set Standard: When activating this optional button, the standard (IEC) character set in
names can be used (for example, section names, variable names, step names, and so
on). It is not possible to use accented characters (for example ’é’).

Extended: When activating this optional button, the ASCII character set in names can
be used (for example, section names, variable names, step names, and so on).It is
possible to use accented characters.

Unicode: When you activate this optional button, the unicode character set in names
can be used (for example, section names, variable names, step names, and so on). This
option is necessary to create elements in not-roman alphabets like Chinese.

Modification: Online possible

33003101.26 563
 Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Allow usage of EBOOL When you activate this check box, the EBOOL data type for edge recognition can be
edge used.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow INT/DINT in place of When activating this check box, for generic parameters of data type ANY_BIT, the
ANY_BIT parameters of data type INT or DINT can be used (not UINT and UDINT).

For example:

Allowed:

AND (AnyBitParam := IntVar1, AnyBitParam2 := IntVar2):

Not allowed:

AND_WORD (WordParam1 := IntVar1, WordParam2 := IntVar2); (In this case,

use AND_INT.

AND_ARRAY_WORD (ArrayInt, ...) (In this case, perform an explicit type conversion
using INT_ARR_TO_WORD_ARR (...).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow bit extraction of INT, When activating this check box, the individual bits from an INT, WORD, or BYTE can be
WORD and BYTE extracted, see Single bits in words (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Directly represented array When this check box is checked, it is possible to:
variables
• Declare references via indexed addresses (for example, %MW1[3]).
See References using indexed addresses (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
• Reference bits and words as tables (Array) (for example, %MW1:16).
See Table of bits and words (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
• Use a combination of both of them (for example, %MW1[3]:16).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow dynamic arrays When activating this check box, the dynamic arrays can be used, see Tables (see
[ANY_ARRAY_XXX] EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

Modification: Online possible

564 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Disable array size When activating this check box, no compatibility check is made on the arrays when one
compatibility check array is assigned to another, see also section Tables (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Note: This option applies only to one-dimensional array.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Enable fast scanning for When activating this check box, a fast scan is made on variables. The analysis of
trending trending variables is improved.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Force references When activating this check box (default state), variables of Reference type (see
initialization EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
have to be initialized when they are created in the Data Editor, otherwise errors
messages will be displayed during build.

When the check box is not activated, if the variable of Reference type are not initialized
in the Data Editor, they are initialized by default with the NULL value, then they have to
be assigned by the REF (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Standard, Block
Library) function in the application program.
NOTE: The application performance is better if the checkbook is activated.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Save Restore Data When activating this check box, Save data from PLC to file box is displayed to propose
Request saving CPU data, page 122 in a file when Control Expert is disconnected, page 85 from
the PLC. A dialog box related to PLC init values and local init values is displayed when a
build online, page 79 is performed.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Display private variables When activating this check box, private variables for DFB instances are displayed to
for DFB instances allow setting default values in data editor.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

33003101.26 565
 Control Expert Software Options

Program
Introduction
This configuration section can be accessed Tools > Project Settings > Program. It
contains common languages, FBD, LD, SFC, and ST section display settings.

Languages
Element Description

Function Block Diagram (FBD) When this check box is selected, the FBD language can be used in
your project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Ladder (LD) When this check box is selected, the LD language can be used in your
project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Sequential Function Chart (SFC) When this check box is selected, the SFC language can be used in
your project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

List (IL) When this check box is selected, the IL language can be used in your
project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Structured Text (ST) When this check box is selected, the ST language can be used in your
project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Ladder Logic 984 (LL984) When this check box is selected, the LL984 language can be used in
your project.

The LL984 is not available for Modicon M580 system.

566 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

NOTE: For modifying the Ladder Logic 984 (LL984) setting, the
following restrictions apply:
• This setting is disabled for applications using Quantum
Safety PLCs, as LL984 segments and networks can only be
created for non-safety applications.
• You have to go offline.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Common
Element Description

Allow procedures When this check box is selected, the procedures can be used in your
project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow subroutines When this check box is selected, the subroutines can be used in your
project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow nested comments When this check box is selected, the comments can be nested without it
being reported as an error.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow multi assignment [a:=b:=c] When this check box is selected, the multi-assignments (see
(ST/LD) EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) can be used in ST.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow empty parameters in non- When this check box is selected, it is not necessary to assign a value to
formal call (ST/IL) all formal parameters when making informal calls of functions (ST) and
function blocks (IL/ST).

See Informal call (ST) (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program

Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) and Informal call (IL) (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

33003101.26 567
 Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Usage of ST expressions (LD/ When this check box is selected, the ST expressions can be used as
FBD) actual parameters on FFB inputs and contacts.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Maintain output links on disabled When this check box is selected, the behavior of link values can be
EF (EN=0) defined in case an EF is called conditionally (EN input connected).

The default value of this option for a new application is "unchecked".

After changing this setting a Rebuild All Project of the application is

necessary, because it influences the generated code.

For detailed information, refer to Maintain Output Links on Disabled EF,

page 574.
NOTE: This setting allows keeping the same behavior as a Concept
application.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

Display complete comments of Displays the complete comments of structured elements in the mixed
structure element mode of LD and in the tooltips for variables in FBD/LD/SFC sections,
page 628.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

Enable implicit type conversion When this check box is selected, you do not need to apply explicit data
type conversions for the subset of Control Expert implicit conversions in
this table (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

FBD
This area is used to define the number of rows and columns for Function Block Diagrams
(FBD).

Element Description

Number of rows From 240 to 1440 (steps of 10).

568 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

Number of columns From 60 to 360 (steps of 10).

The section area (number of rows x number of columns) cannot exceed the
maximum size of 86,400 grids: for example, 240 x 360 or 1,440 x 60.

The two input fields are impacting one another. For example, the number of rows is
determined by the internal calculation 86,400/number of columns (limited to the
lower tenth).

Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

LD
Element Description

Right-justify coils If this check box is selected, coils, page 778 are automatically placed on
the right power rail.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

Number of columns Define the number of columns in an LD section in this box.

From 11 to 63.

Note: These settings are only valid for new LD sections and not for
existing sections.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

Single scan edge detection for When an EBOOL is written only one time (through OFS, HMI, by program
EBOOL or forced by Control Expert):
• If this check box is selected, writing or forcing an EBOOL activates
the edge detection for one cycle.
• If this check box is not selected, writing or forcing an EBOOL
activates the edge detection until the next writing of this EBOOL.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: Rebuild All Project (Offline)

33003101.26 569
 Control Expert Software Options

LD > Mixed display

This area is used to define the available area for variable comments lines height, symbol
lines height, and address lines height in mixed display mode, page 745.

Element Description

Comments lines height Sets the maximum number of comment lines shown in mixed display mode.

From 0 to 20 lines.
Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

Symbol lines height Sets the maximum number of symbol lines shown in mixed display mode.

From 0 to 20 lines.
Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

Address lines height From 0 to 5 lines.

NOTE: These parameters are adjustable only on the Project Settings.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

SFC
Element Description

Allow macro sections When this check box is selected, the macro sections (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) can be
used in your project.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Allow multiple token When this check box is selected, the sequential control works in the Multi-
token (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) operating mode.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

570 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

SFC > multi token

The SFC multi token option is for PL7 migration and to support the GRAFCET specification
that used to be supported by Telemecanique.

Element Description

Max. # of active steps/section This box is only available if the Allow multiple token check box
activated.

The maximum number of active steps per section can be defined

(including all their macro sections) in this box.

From 1 to 100.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Max. # of active actions/section This box is only available if the Allow multiple token check box
activated.

The maximum number of active actions per section can be defined

(including all their macro sections) in this box.

From 1 to 100.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

SetSteps: keep previous step(s) in This box is only available if the Allow multiple token check box
active state activated.

When this check box is selected, all currently active steps remain
active when you set new steps (Animation Panel or function block).

When this check box is not selected, all currently active steps are
deactivated when you set new steps (Animation Panel or function
block).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

Parallel branches: allow jump in/ This box is only available if the Allow multiple token check box
out activated.

When this check box is selected, jumps can be made into or out of a
parallel sequence, see Jump into a parallel sequence (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) and Jump out of a parallel sequence (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

33003101.26 571
 Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

Allow multiple evolutions by This box is only available if the Allow multiple token check box
divergence of sequence selection activated.

When this check box is checked, all transitions of an alternative branch

are processed in parallel (x-out-n-select), see x-out-n-select (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

When this check box is not checked, all transitions of an alternative

branch are processed in sequence (1-out-n-select), see Alternative
sequences (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

NOTE: Verify that you optimize the number of active steps and active actions at the right
number to get the project to fit into the available memory.

SFC > Single token

This feature is only available for M340 with minimum OS version V3.30 and M580 with
minimum OS version V3.20.

Element Description

SFC action behavior: Final Scan When this check box is selected, the final scan is activated in SFC
logic activated Action Section (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

NOTE: An application using SFC final scan option cannot be opened with Control Expert
V14.1 and earlier.

ST
Element Description

Allow jump and label When this check box is selected, you can use jumps and labels (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in ST.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Offline)

572 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

LL984
Element Description

SKP enabled This LL984 setting is enabled only, if the LL984 library setup was installed.

When this check box is selected, the L9_SKP function block can be used in your
project.
NOTE: Modifying this setting leads to a reanalysis of the LL984 networks. This is
also possible in online mode.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: Build Changes (Online)

LL984 > Network Display

Element Description

Printing View Using this list you select view1 to view4 defined under items View 1 to View 4
(see below).

The default view is view4.

The view you select for the Printing View setting is used for printing the LL984
networks.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Column Width Using this field you can enter the column width as a floating point value (1.0 to
3.0.

For example, a value of 3.0 means a 3 times larger column width.

The default width is 1.0.

NOTE: Modifying the Column Width setting does not lead to the need of a
new Build.
Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

View 1 to View 4 The LL984 editor can display various information concerning variables attached
to coils, contacts, and function block nodes.

According to the settings for View 1 to View 4 the LL984 editor shows the
following information:
• Address (for example, %M100)
• 984-address (for example, 400100
• Variable name
• Variable comment

33003101.26 573
 Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

• Descriptors 1 to 9
• Topological address
For further information, refer to Items of the View 1 to View 4 Settings (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference Manual).

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Maintain Output Links on Disabled EF (EN=0)

Introduction
The Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting allows you define the
behavior of link values, connected to output pins of EFs, in case an EF is called conditionally
(EN input connected).
The default value of this project setting for new applications is deactivated (unchecked).
NOTE: After changing this setting you have to make a Rebuild All Project of the
application.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Check the behavior of the application when using the Maintain output links on Disable EF
function.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

NOTE: The behavior of the application will change after modifying this project setting
that has an impact on the code execution.

Changing this Project Setting

You can change the Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting in
Control Expert under Tools > Project Settings > Program > Languages > Common.

574 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Behavior in Case of Deactivated Project Setting

In case of a falling edge of EN input, the values of output variables stay unchanged, whereas
output links are reset to 0.
For the example shown in the graphic below:
• EN -> 0
• save_out_val = 1
• link = 0 (red)

Behavior in Case of Activated Project Setting

In case of a falling edge of EN input, the values of output variables and output links stay
unchanged.
For the example shown in the graphic below:
• EN -> 0
• save_out_val = 1
• link = 1 (green)

33003101.26 575
 Control Expert Software Options

Compatibility Unity Pro 4.0 and 4.1 or later

NOTE:
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
The following table describes the compatibility of Unity Pro 4.0 (or earlier) and Unity Pro 4.1
or later regarding:
• transferring from PLC to PC (upload)
• opening XEF file on PC (import)
• opening STA file on PC (archived project)
The compatibility depends on whether the project setting Maintain output links on
disabled EF (EN=0) is activated or deactivated.

Prerequisite Unity Pro ≤4.0 Unity Pro 4.1 or later

Generated with Unity Pro ≤4.0. possible possible

Project setting not available in Unity Pro 4.0.

Generated with Unity Pro 4.1 or later for an application 4.0. possible (1) possible

Project setting deactivated.

Generated with Unity Pro V4.1 or later for an application V4.0 not possible possible

Project setting activated.

Generated with Unity Pro V4.1 or later for an application V4.1 or not possible possible
later, using M340 V2.1 PLC, …)

Project setting deactivated.

Generated with Unity Pro V4.1 or later for an application V4.1 or not possible(2) possible
later (using M340 V2.1 PLC, …)

Project setting activated.

(1) importing a 4.1 XEF file into Unity 4.0 may require the external tool XEFDowngrader

(2) PLC is not recognized

Project Settings after Upload, Open XEF, Open STA File

NOTE:
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
The following table describes the status of the Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=
0) project setting after

576 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

• transferring from PLC to PC (upload)

• opening XEF (or ZEF) file on PC (import)
• opening STA file on PC (archived project)

Prerequisite Unity Pro ≤4.0 Unity Pro 4.1 or later

Generated with Unity Pro ≤4.0. not available not activated

Project setting not available in Unity Pro 4.0.

Generated with Unity Pro 4.1 or later for an application 4.0. not available not activated

Project setting deactivated.

Generated with Unity Pro V4.1 or later for an application V4.0 not available activated

Project setting activated.

Generated with Unity Pro V4.1 or later for an application V4.1 or not available not activated
later, using M340 V2.1 PLC, …)

Project setting deactivated.

Generated with Unity Pro V4.1 or later for an application V4.1 or not available activated
later (using M340 V2.1 PLC, …)

Project setting activated.

In case of uploading, importing or opening a Unity Pro application with Unity Pro 4.1 or later,
created with Unity Pro 4.0 or earlier, the Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0)
project setting is deactivated.
After a Rebuild All Project and download the behavior is the same as the application had in
the environment of the earlier version of Unity Pro.
If you want to use the Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting, you
must:
• open or upload an application,
• activate the project setting,
• Rebuild All Project.

Undoing EF Deletion
If the Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting is activated and an EF
is called conditionally, static memory will be allocated for each output pin of the EF, to save
the output values during runtime.
In case you delete this EF in the editor the static memory will be released.

33003101.26 577
 Control Expert Software Options

If you perform an UNDO later on, the EF will be re-created and new static memory will be
allocated.
After a following Build Changes, these mechanisms occur:
• Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting deactivated:
No static memory is assigned for the output pins as maintaining the last link values is
not needed.
◦ If EN is 0 the link is reset to 0.
◦ If EN is 1 the link is written with the value of the OUT.
• Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting activated:
New static memory is allocated for the output pins because the old memory has been
released. The link´s new static memory is initialized to 0.
◦ If EN is 0 the link's value remains initialized to 0.
◦ If EN is 1 the EF is executed and the value of the OUT is written to the link.
Example:
Project setting activated, EN not connected

Conditions before Build Changes:

• EN = 0
• save_out_val = 1
• link = 1
Delete EF.

578 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Perform UNDO and Build Changes.

Result:
• save_out_val = 1
• link = 0
With the next activation of the changed EF the link's new static memory will be written and
works as expected on the next deactivation.
This behavior is in principle the same by using other EF types (ADD, XOR…).

EN Not Connected
If EN is not connected or not displayed (box Show EN/ENO not checked), no preparation is
done to maintain the last link values.
If the EN input is connected later and then Build Changes is performed, the following
mechanisms occur:
• Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting deactivated:
No static memory is assigned as maintaining the last link values is not needed.
After falling edge of EN, link is reset to zero, variable save_out_val is unchanged.
• Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting activated:
New static memory is allocated in PLC to maintain the last link values for the output
links. This static memory is initialized to 0.
If EN is 1 after a Build Changes, the EF is executed and the output data is assigned to
the connected link's static memory.
The link's static memory will be consistent at the end of the first PLC working cycle after
a Build Changes.
NOTE: If the EN is 0 after the Build Changes, the static memory, representing the link,
keeps its initialization state (0), which may be different to the value before the download
change.
Example:

33003101.26 579
 Control Expert Software Options

Option activated, EN not connected

Conditions before Build Changes:

• EN of first AND is not connected, i.e. EF AND is invoked
• save_out_val = 1
• link = 1
Connect enable to EN of first AND, set enable to 0, perform Build Changes.

Result:
• save_out_val = 1
• link = 0
With the next activation of the changed EF the link's new static memory will be written and
works as expected on the next deactivation.
This behavior is in principle the same by using other EF types (ADD, XOR…).

Use Cases
The following use cases show that
• replacing EFs by other EFs leads to initialization of output link values due to new
memory allocation.
• changing output links on not changed EFs leads to maintaining the link values due to
using of already allocated memory that belongs to the EFs.
The following use cases apply to all EF types.

580 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Replacing AND by AND_BOOL

Preconditions
• Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting is activated
• variable enable = 0.
• output link = 1 (due to enable was 1 in the history)

Replace AND by AND_BOOL and perform Build Changes.

Result: output link = 0

Reason for output link is 0 after Build Changes:
• The memory to hold the output values of the deleted EF (AND) has been released.
• Assigning a new EF (AND_BOOL) causes allocation of new memory to hold its output
link values.
• The new memory is initialized to 0.

Replacing ADD by MUL

Preconditions
• Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting is activated
• variable enable = 0.
• output link = 6 (due to enable was 1 in the history)

33003101.26 581
 Control Expert Software Options

Replace ADD_INT by MUL_INT and perform Build Changes.

Result: output link = 0

Reason for output link is 0 after Build Changes:
• The memory to hold the output values of the deleted EF (ADD_INT) has been released.
• Assigning a new EF (MUL_INT) causes allocation of new memory to hold its output link
values.
• The new memory is initialized to 0.

Deleting Output Link and Performing UNDO

Preconditions
• Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0) project setting is activated
• variable enable = 0.
• output link = 6 (due to enable was 1 in the history)

Delete output link.

582 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Undo deletion and perform Build Changes.

Result: output link = 6

Reason for output link is 6 after Build Changes:
• Deleting an output link and connecting a new output link to the same EF output pin does
not cause the allocating of new memory to hold the values of the output link.
• As this memory belongs to the EF, it will not be released until deletion of the EF.
• In this use case the new link gets the memory of the deleted link (value = 6).

Configuration Settings for Operator Screens

At a Glance
The configuration section accessible from Tools > Project Settings > Operator Screens is
used to:
• Manage the control of screens by the PLC,
• Manage the detection of displayed screens,
• Manage the display or masking of screen numbers in the project browser,
• Manage the display of full screen at opening.

33003101.26 583
 Control Expert Software Options

Representation
Representation of the Operator Screens section:

Description
Elements of the Operator screens section:

Field Description

Operator Screens

Full screen at opening When this box is checked, the operator screens open in Full screen mode.

The menu bar is replaced by the drawing toolbar.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Controlled Screen
Variable Variable: This field is used to enter the screen control variable. In online mode,
this variable enables the PLC to select the screen to be displayed. To the right

584 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Field Description

of this field is the button, which can be used to access the variable
instance selection window.

Type: Type of the selected variable.

Comment: Comment on the selected variable.

NOTE: Only variable with type EBOOL, BOOL, byte, INT, or DINT can be
selected.
Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

Displaying screens When this box is checked, displaying of screens in online mode is controlled via
controlled via the PLC the PLC. It is the value of the control variable that determines the screen
displayed.

This setting can also be changed via the shortcuts F2/F3 or their corresponding

buttons in the toolbar when an operator screen is

open.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Display screen number in When this box is checked, the screen number is displayed to the left of the
the project browser screen name in the project browser.

Modification: Online possible

Action required: No build necessary

Last opened screen

Variable Variable: This field is used to enter the DINT type variable containing the
number of the last screen opened by the user or the PLC.

To the right of this field is the button, which can be used to access the
variable instance selection window.

Type: Type of the selected variable.

Comment: Comment on the selected variable.

NOTE: Only variable with type DINT can be selected.

Modification: Offline only

Action required: No build necessary

33003101.26 585
 Control Expert Software Options

Control Variable
The control variable enables the PLC to select the screen to be displayed. This variable can
be binary or numeric.

Binary Control Variable

A binary control variable allows controlling the operator screen display with only one button
connected to the PLC.
The diagram below gives an example of the trend of the binary control variable:

For each of the steps of the trend diagram, the control variable operates as follows:

Step Operation

1 Its value is equal to 1 for more than 1 second: the screens are highlighted one after another (1
second per screen) according to their position in the project browser. The PLC selects the
screens by scrolling through the list from top to bottom.

2 and 4 Its value is equal to 0 for more than 1 second: the screen currently highlighted in the Project
Browser (n = current screen) is displayed.

3 Its value is equal to 1 for less than 1 second: on each pulse, the PLC selects the screen (n+1) in
the list of operator screens. The pulses are used to display the screens one by one.

NOTE: As long as this binary control variable has value 1, the operator screens are
selected automatically in project browser one after the other. In this case, the context
menu cannot be used in the project browser.

586 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Numeric Control Variable

When the control variable is numeric, its value corresponds to an operator screen number.
Therefore, the screen editor displays (if it exists) the screen whose number is equal to the
variable value.

Options
Overview
This section describes the Tools > Options dialog box tab.

General Description
Introduction
Functionalities, key shortcuts and specific key-shortcut navigation are used for all Options
tabs.

General Description
The table below describes the general functions used with all options tabs:

Fields Description

Import This button allows the selection of a Options .XOO file. All values in the file is taken
into account immediately. After Import, click on OK or Apply to validate the options.
NOTE: If a project is opened, the Custom Library and Working Drive are
updated in the next Control Expert launching.

Export This button allows to save the current values of the options in a .XOO file.

Reset All This button is used to reset all the options to their default values.

OK This button is used to save the modifications and close the current tab.
Apply This button is used to save the modifications.

Cancel This button is used to cancel without saving the modifications on the current tab.

Help This button is used to call the online help.

33003101.26 587
 Control Expert Software Options

General Navigation
The table below describes the general key shortcut navigation used with all Options tabs:

Fields Description

TAB This key is used to move from control to another.

ENTER This key is used to confirm the current action.

ESC This key is used to cancel without saving the modifications in the current tab.

Up, Down, Left and Right These keys are used to navigate within the tree control and the right list box.
Arrows

Specific Navigation
The table below describes the specific key shortcut navigation used with all Options tabs:

Fields Description

Space This key is used to check / uncheck an element.

F2 This key is used to activate the current line.

ESC This key is used to deactivate the current line.

Up and Down Arrows These keys are used to navigate in the list box in the active line.

+ and - These keys are used to increase or decrease a value in number field in the active
line.

General Options
At a Glance
This configuration section, accessible from Tools > Options > General, contains a set of
general options.

588 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

General Options Dialog Box

Representation of the General section:

Description
Elements of the General section:

Fields Description

General
Auto incrementation of When this option is selected, the project version is automatically incremented on
project version each build.

Auto completion of the This option is useful when you start the data selection to enter the name of a
variable name variable: for example, a pin of a block in FBD.

When it is selected, you can enter the first characters of a variable to select one
of these that matches with the entered string. If the entered string has been
already used before, the auto completion feature completes the string with the
last variable that was used.
Display errors / messages If Message box is selected, all detected error messages are displayed in dialog
boxes.

33003101.26 589
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

If Output window is selected, all detected error messages are displayed in the
output window.

Contextual Restore at If this box is selected, the windows have the same arrangement whereas the
project opening project is opened or closed. A .ZTX file is generated, which saves the context.

Display list of modified When this box is checked, the modified sections are listed in the List of
sections before build modified sections dialog box after activating the Build Changes command in
the Build menu.

General > Paths

Project path Path where the .STU project files are saved or from where they are retrieved
when opening.

Import/Export file path Path where the import/export source files are kept: for example, .XEF files.

XVM path Path where the .XVM file is stored.

This file is automatically generated to back up the variables of the project every
time this one is transferred to the PLC.

The default path is the same as the default Project path.

Project settings templates Path where the Project Settings templates are located.
path

Project settings template Project settings template file that is proposed in the Settings File during the New
file Project, page 68 creation.

Custom Library path Path where the custom libraries are located. Changing the custom library path is
taken into account at next open project or new project.

Working drive Workspace used by the software.

Log files path Path where the workspace is used by the software.

NOTE: The libraries provided by Schneider Electric are located in a Control Expert
system folder. You cannot change the location of these libraries.
To use a previously created custom library after changing the Custom Library Path,
move the library file to the new location.

Data and Languages

Introduction
The Data and Languages section contains settings for entering data.

590 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

NOTE: The changes made in this section become active when the respective dialog box
(for example, data editor) is closed and then opened again.

Representation
Representation of the Data and Languages section:

Items of the Data and Languages section:

Element Description

Spreadsheet behavior

Move selection after This options button allows specifying which neighboring cell becomes active
entering information when the Enter key is pressed.

Open edit session on If this box is checked, the input mode is automatically opened for the currently
char key press active cell when you press a character key. The contents of the active cell are
overwritten with the new contents.
Languages

Automatically assign a If this box is checked, the properties dialog box (for example, for contacts, coils,
variable to a new steps, transitions) or the FFB input assistant (for example, for functions or
graphical object function blocks) is opened. It assigns the formal parameter of the object when you
place a graphical object.

Reuse windows on refine If this box is checked, then:

• Only 1 window is used for Refine command on DFBs
• Only 1 window is used for Refine command on actions
• Only 1 window is used for Refine command on transitions.

33003101.26 591
 Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

If this box is not checked, for each Refine command on DFBs, actions or
transitions, a new window is opened.

LL984
Show latched coils as Use this list to select letter L (by default) or letter M that is displayed inside a
latched coil.
NOTE: Modifying this setting leads to a refresh of the editor window of all
opened LL984 networks.

Reuse 984 editor window If this box is checked, only 1 window is used for Open commands on LL984
when network is opened networks.

If this box is not checked, for each Open command on an LL984 network, a new
window is opened.
NOTE: Modifying this setting will only take effect after next time an LL984
editor is opened.

Mnemonics The Property label column lists all contacts and coils and an assortment of
function blocks available for LL984 networks.

In the Property value column, you can enter a mnemonic for each listed element.
A mnemonic can consist of up to 4 alphanumeric signs.

Refer to Using Mnemonics, page 1150.

LD
Mnemonics The Property label column lists an assortment of objects available for LD
sections.

In the Property value column, you can enter a mnemonic for each listed element.
A mnemonic can consist of up to 4 alphanumeric signs.

Refer to Using Mnemonics, page 761.

Connection Options
At a Glance
This configuration section, accessible from Tools > Options > Connection, contains the
options relating to the connection, page 77 of the terminal to the PLC.

592 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Connection Options Dialog Box

Representation of the Connection section:

Description
Items of the Connection section:

33003101.26 593
 Control Expert Software Options

Fields Description

PLC connection When several terminals simultaneously access the same PLC, this information can
identification be used to identify which terminal holds the PLC reservation. By default, the
network name of the terminal is proposed; this name can be changed.

Default connection If Use programming mode is selected, the terminal connects, by default, in
mode programming mode.

If Ask for connection mode is selected, the terminal asks, on each connection to
a PLC, in which mode the connection is to be made: programming mode or
monitoring mode.

If Use monitoring mode is selected, the terminal connects, by default, in

monitoring mode (read-only access).

Note: In monitoring mode links between EFs are not animated.

If Mandatory programming mode is selected, the terminal can only connect in

programming mode. If the PLC is reserved, a connection refusal then follows.

The Operator Screens Option

At a Glance
The configuration section, accessible from Tools > Options > Operator Screens, is used
to:
• Enable or prevent use of the magnetic grid,
• Display the mouse position,
• Enable edit in online mode,
• Enable selection of an object in online mode,
• Display or hide the vertical scroll bar,
• Display or hide the horizontal scroll bar,
• Specify the default size of new operator screens.

594 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Representation
Representation of the register section Operator Screens:

Elements of the register section Operator Screens

Field Description

Grid
Display grid When this box is checked, the grid is displayed according to the step defined.

Step Used to define the step of the grid, i.e. the space between the horizontal and
vertical lines of the grid. From 5 to 100 (steps of 5 pixels).

Alignment of objects on grid When this box is checked, the objects are automatically positioned on the
points of the grid when they are handled (creation, size-modification,
movement, etc.).

If this box is not checked, the objects are not aligned on the grid.

Edit
Display mouse position When this box is checked, the position of the mouse is displayed in the left
side of the status bar. If an object is selected, the display indicates the position
of its top left corner, its dimensions, and its animation settings (if they exist),
see the following example:

33003101.26 595
 Control Expert Software Options

Field Description

Vertical scroll bar When this box is checked, the vertical scroll bar is displayed when the screen
height is larger than the current window.

Horizontal scroll bar When this box is checked, the horizontal scroll bar is displayed when the
screen width is larger than the current window.

Online mode
Enable edit in online mode When this box is checked, this authorizes the editing of screens that are not
currently controlled by the PLC in online mode (creation, modification, and
deletion of screens).
NOTE: If the screens are controlled by the PLC Description, page 584,
you cannot edit them in Online Mode even if the Enable edit in online
mode is checked.
Enable selection in online When this box is checked, this enables the selection of an object in online
mode mode.
Default screen size
Width These two fields allow the definition of the default size of new screens. The
values entered do not change the size of screens already created.
Height

Screen opening

Screen opening If the Mono-Instance box is checked, when a new screen opens, the latter
replaces the previous one in the display window.

If the Multi-Instance box is checked, each time a new screen is opened, the
screen is displayed in a new window. In online mode, if several screens are
opened simultaneously, this can reduce performance.

Converters
Introduction
This configuration section, accessed from Tools > Options > Converters, contains options
for the conversion of legacy projects to Control Expert.
The section is only available for Quantum, Premium, and Atrium.

596 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Representation
Representation of the register section Converters:

Elements of the register section Converters:

Element Description

Converters
Split Converted This separates ProWORX 32, Modsoft, and Concept LL984 segments into smaller
Sections units.

Separation is only applied to MAST task sections. Grafcet and Post, FAST task
sections and subroutines must be present as a complete unit and cannot be
separated into smaller sections:
• When this check box is enabled, the options Networks per Section and
Ignore Jumps when splitting are enabled and can be modified.
• When this check box is disabled, the options Networks per Section and
Ignore Jumps when splitting are disabled.
The separation of segments into smaller units does not take place, if a jump is
present in the segment and its target has not yet been reached, and becomes active
again after the jump target.

Networks per Section Allows the definition of the number of networks in a section.

From 1 to 30 networks per section.

33003101.26 597
 Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

Ignore Jumps when A section may contain jumps to labels. A jump is located inside the section.
splitting
The converter takes jumps inside the section into account since it is not allowed to
have a jump from one section to another. Depending on how the jump is validated
inside the section (active or not), the automatic splitting at network bounds is
inhibited (active).

The feature of recognizing such jump scopes can be suppressed by this check box.
When this check box is enabled, automatic section splitting always takes place
regardless of jumps. Therefore many error messages concerning missing jump
targets are generated at analyze time.

Symbols Instead of
Direct Addresses • When this check box is enabled, discrete variables are converted with their
symbols instead of the direct addresses.
When there is no symbol in the source application, a symbol is created
automatically (for example, %IO.2.3.4 -> IO_2_3_4).
• When this check box is disabled, the variables are converted with their direct
addresses.
Generate Topological
Addresses for • When this check box is enabled, a topological address is created (for example,
Quantum %M\2.3\4.5.6).
• When this check box is disabled, a flat address is generated (for example, %
M1234).
During the conversion, the Concept addresses are converted into internal flat
addresses 1:1. However, if topological addressing is desired, the flat address is
searched for in the I/O address tables of the I/O modules. If the associated address
is found, the address of the module link point is determined and linked with the
address of the I/O module to a topological address.
NOTE: Flat addressing is only possible for Quantum and for Modicon M340.
For Premium, topological addressing is always used regardless of the option.

Converters > LL984

These options are present only if LL984 converter is installed.

Suppress Schedule When this check box is enabled, the association of I/O drops (Remote I/O) is
suppressed during conversion.

This can be done to avoid analyzing errors in Control Expert.

Suppress Graphs When this check box is enabled, networks only containing links are erased during
conversion.

This can be done to avoid analyzing errors in Control Expert.

Attach coils to open When this check box is enabled, coils without assigned variables are positioned at
ends the open ends automatically.

This can be done to avoid analyzing errors in Control Expert.

Generate ConvError
Hints • When this check box is enabled, ConvError objects are generated in the LD
programs during the conversion to draw attention to special issues.

598 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

• When this check box is disabled, ConvError objects are not generated in the
LD programs.

Include 984 Execution

Corrections • When this check box is enabled, the converter modifies the section so that the
result in Control Expert is the same as in ProWORX 32, Modsoft, or Concept.
• When this check box is disabled, no ConvError objects are generated during
the conversion.
Unpowered LD objects When this check box is enabled, unpowered LD objects are connected to the left
to Left Power power rail automatically with a normally opened contact without assigned variable.

Comment Generation When this check box is enabled, is possible to composite a variable comment from
Rule different source strings.

A blank character is generated between all the different source strings.

Symbol Generation When this check box is enabled, is possible to composite a variable comment from
Rule different source strings.

An underline character is generated between all the different source strings.

Possible parameters for the string generation rules are:

• Sx: short comments while x could be 1…4,
• Dx: descriptors while x could be 1...9,
• L: long comment,
• F: flat address as string without % character.
NOTE: Variable name source priority:
• If Symbol is defined for a State Ram Data, it is used as variable name,
• Else, if ISA Symbol is defined for a State Ram Data, it is used as variable
name,
• Else, a data name is generated with the Symbol Generation Rule.

Max. Symbol Length Limitation of the generated symbol length.

Map Compact to
Premium • When this check box is enabled, the Compact modules are converted to
Control Expert Premium modules.
• When this check box is disabled, Concept Compact applications are converted
to Modicon M340 applications.

Converters > PL7

Transition Optimization
• When this check box is enabled, in order to improve the performances at
execution time, some SFC transitions are converted to variables.
• When this check box is not enabled, the transitions are converted as they
were in PL7.
Step State Explicit
Definition

33003101.26 599
 Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

• If this check box is enabled, the macro steps that are not used on the PL7
program are declared on the Control Expert project when the conversion of
PL7 application to Control Expert is done.
• If this check box is disabled, the macro steps that are not used on the PL7
program are not converted on the Control Expert project.

Symbol As Step Name

• When this check box is enabled, the PL7 steps %Xi are converted with the
PL7 step symbol. For example, on PL7 %X2 with the symbol Motor_1 is
converted into Motor_1.
• When this check box is not enabled, the PL7 steps %Xi are converted on X_i.
For example on PL7 %X2 is converted into X_2.

Converters > Concept

Variables at empty pins
• When this check box is enabled, empty link points are filled with variables
created by the converter.
• When this check box is disabled, empty link points are not filled with variables
created by the converter.
In Control Expert, it is necessary to fill provided inputs and outputs for derived data
types or I/O parameters (this is not necessary in Concept).

If these types are not generic, the converter fills these initially empty inputs and
outputs with variables created by the converter.

Disable FB Output
Multi-Assignment • When this check box is enabled, the converter disables the multiple
detection assignment check.
• When this check box is disabled, the converter enables the multiple
assignment check.
Control Expert and Concept behavior differ on DFB/FB output parameters in FBD or
LD sections. This different behavior exists with elementary variables or derived data
type components. The converter searches all potential locations where such
elementary variables or derived data type components are written and marks these
locations with a Converter Error Hint. Then, you can check the affected code
concerning different behavior and if necessary modify the application. If the variable
is written only once, no Converter Error Hint is generated.

Generate Generic EFs

• When this check box is enabled, the converter removes the added data type
from the name of the function.
• When this check box is disabled, the converter leaves the added data enter
the name of the function.
There are only a few generic elementary functions in Concept (EFs) for example,
MOVE, SEL, MUX. With many other functions, the elementary data type is added to
the name of the function.

In Control Expert, many of these functions are used without the elementary data
type added to the name (as defined in IEC 61131). The converter removes the
added data type from the name of the function.

600 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

In some cases, the use of generic functions in Control Expert leads to analytic
errors. In these cases, disable the check box.

Separate LD networks
• When this check box is enabled, recognized networks are moved vertically,
which prevents overlapping.
• When this check box is disabled, recognized networks are not vertically
moved. The original vertical arrangement of the graphics is maintained, but
error messages may occur due to overlapping.
IEC LD sections contain many independent graphic areas (networks).

During the conversion of IEC LD sections, additional columns are added to the
networks to avoid undesired automatically generated links in Control Expert.

If the additionally inserted columns were to extend across the entire section, the
original graphic would be modified too much. Therefore, the sections are divided in
networks during the conversion and additional columns are only inserted for the
associated network.

Inserting additional columns may cause a network to exceed its maximum section
width and it is then wrapped into the next line.

If this causes networks to vertically overlap, the overlapping of the logic can lead to
undesired automatic links in Control Expert.

Substitute Procedures
in ST/IL • When this check box is enabled, the instance name of the Concept call is
replaced with the type name.
• When this check box is disabled, a DFB is created, which accesses the
procedure.
Some EFBs from Concept are implemented as procedures in Control Expert without
instance names.
Substitute %QD by %
MF • When this check box is enabled, %QD variables are converted to %MF
variables.
• When this check box is not enabled, %QD variables are converted to MW
variables.
Variables that are directly addressed in Concept with %QD can be initialized floating
point constants or dual word constants. When floating point constants appear, this
check box should be enabled.
LD Column Break The number entered here determines the column after which a network is wrapped
to the next column.

Inserting additional columns may cause a network to exceed its maximum section
width and it is then wrapped into the next line. For more information, see Wrapping
networks that are too wide in the Concept Converter documentation.

33003101.26 601
 Control Expert Software Options

Customize Dialog Box

Overview
This section describes the dialog box for customizing menu toolbars.

Customize Dialog Box

Call the Dialog Box:
You have the following options to call the dialog box:
• Execute the Tools > Customize command, or
• Use the Toolbar menu command from a toolbar shortcut menu or the toolbar itself.

Dialog Structure
The dialog box consists of two tabs:
• Toolbars
In this tab, you can show/hide toolbars, create new toolbars, and define the appearance
of the toolbars.
• Tools
In this tab, you can define the menu commands for starting external applications.

602 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Toolbars Tab
Illustration of the Toolbars tab:

Elements of the Toolbars tab:

Element Description

Toolbars Displays the currently available toolbars.

To display a toolbar, activate the respective check box.

To hide a toolbar, deactivate the respective check box.

Toolbar name Displays the name of the selected toolbar.

Show Tooltips When you activate this check box, tooltips are displayed for each toolbar symbol.

Cool Look When you activate this check box, the toolbar symbols are displayed in flat form.

New... Use this button to open the dialog box for defining new toolbars, see also Creating your
own toolbars, page 1831.

Reset Use this button to restore the original state of the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list.

33003101.26 603
 Control Expert Software Options

Tools Tab
Display of Tools tab:

Elements of the Tools tab:

Element Description

Menu Contents Displays the defined menu commands.

Menu Text Enter the name of the new command, also see Starting external applications, page
1825.
Command Enter the path of the file to be executed, also see Starting external applications, page
1825.
Arguments Enter the arguments to be transferred while launching the application Starting external
applications, page 1825.

By clicking arrow > CurrentProject, the argument is $(ProjectName).

When the application is launched, $(ProjectName) is replaced with the complete STU
file path of the opened application.
NOTE: If the application has never been saved, the project file path is undefined.

Initial Directory Enter the path to the working directory of the application Starting external applications,
page 1825.

Add Use this button to define a new menu command for starting an external application, see
also Starting external applications, page 1825.

Remove Use this button to delete the selected menu command.

604 33003101.26
Control Expert Software Options

Element Description

Move Up Use this button to move the selected menu command up by 1 position.

Move Down Use this button to move the selected menu command down by 1 position.

33003101.26 605
606 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Common Function for graphical language

What’s in This Chapter
Using Bookmarks in Graphical Languages Sections ................. 607
Display grid in a FBD/LD/SFC section ..................................... 613
Zoom in a FBD/LD/SFC section .............................................. 613
Tracking links in a FBD/LD/SFC section................................... 616
Print Current Section in a FBD/LD/SFC section ........................ 617
Undo and redo changes in a FBD/LD section ........................... 618
Using connectors in a FBD/LD section..................................... 619
Inspect windows in a FBD/LD section ...................................... 624
Tooltips for Variables in a FBD/LD/SFC Section........................ 628
Replace Variables in a FBD/LD Section ................................... 630
Initialize search in a FBD/LD section........................................ 635
Initialize Animation Table in a FBD/LD section .......................... 636
Go to in a FBD/LD section ...................................................... 637
Go to dialog box in a FBD/LD section ...................................... 639

Overview
This chapter describes the common menus and dialogs of the FBD, LD and SFC editors.

Using Bookmarks in Graphical Languages

Sections
Introduction
Bookmarks are used to mark positions in the margin (gray column on the left edge of the
section/network) and allow the marked positions to be easily found in different language
sections/networks.
You can navigate through a list of bookmarks, displayed in the Tools > Bookmarks dialog.

33003101.26 607
 Common Function for graphical language

An example of a bookmark in SFC:

The current bookmark is indicated using a horizontal arrow ( ).

Bookmark are displayed in different colors.

Created Enabled/Disabled Color

manually enabled blue

manually disabled light gray

automatically enabled gray

automatically disabled light gray

Setting Bookmarks
You have the following options to set a bookmark:
• Execute the command Edit > Bookmarks > > Toggle Bookmark. (There must not be
any current bookmark in the selected area).
The bookmark is inserted in the margin (gray column on the left edge of the section/
network) and is marked as the current bookmark.
• Press the Ctrl+F2 key combination. (There must not be any current bookmark in the
selected area).
The bookmark is inserted in the margin (gray column on the left edge of the section/
network) and is marked as the current bookmark.
or

608 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

• Place the mouse pointer in the margin (gray column on the left edge of the section/
network) at the position to be marked and use Toggle Bookmark from the context
menu for the margin (right mouse click).
The bookmark is inserted at the mouse pointer and marked as the current bookmark.

Removing Single Bookmarks

You have the following options to remove a bookmark:
• Select the bookmark to be deleted as the current bookmark (e.g. with Next Bookmark)
and use the Edit > Bookmark > > Toggle Bookmark command.
• Select the bookmark to be deleted as the current bookmark (e.g. with Next Bookmark)
and press the Ctrl+F2 key combination.
or
• Place the mouse pointer on the bookmark to be removed and use Toggle Bookmark
from the context menu of the bookmark (right mouse click).
• You can also remove a bookmark using the context menu of the Bookmarks dialog.

Removing All bookmarks

You have the following options to remove all bookmarks in the current section/network:
• Use the Edit > Bookmark> > Clear all Bookmarks menu command.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Shift+F2 key combination.
• You can also remove all bookmarks using the context menu of the Bookmarks dialog.

Searching for Bookmarks (Search Down)

You have the following options to search for bookmarks (search down):
• Use the Edit > Bookmark> > Next Bookmark menu command.
• Use the Edit > Go to > Bookmark > Next menu command.
or
• Press the F2 key.
If a current bookmark is selected, a jump is made to the next one and it is marked as the
current bookmark.

33003101.26 609
 Common Function for graphical language

The bookmarks are traversed according to their order of appearance in the Bookmarks
dialog.

Searching for Bookmarks (Search Up)

You have the following options to search for bookmarks (search up):
• Use the Edit > Bookmark> > Previous Bookmark menu command.
• Use the Edit > Go to > Bookmark > Previous menu command.
or
• Press the Shift+F2 key combination.
If a current bookmark is selected, a jump is made to the previous one and it is marked as the
current bookmark.
The bookmarks are traversed according to their order of appearance in the Bookmarks
dialog.

Bookmarks Dialog
To open the bookmarks dialog use Tools > Bookmarks.
A list of the project´s bookmarks is displayed in the Bookmarks dialog.

610 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Element Description

Bookmark column List of the project´s bookmarks. Automatically created bookmarks

(see below) are displayed in gray and can not be renamed.

Location column Location of the bookmark (section, network or DFB) referring to the
Project Browser.

Line column Line in the section/network where the bookmark is located.

check boxes in the Bookmark column Activate this check box to be able to jump to this bookmark by means
of Next Bookmark/Previous Bookmark.

By default for newly created bookmarks the check box is activated.

Delete/Delete all Right click in the dialog and select from the context menu:
• Delete: to delete the selected bookmark
• Delete all: to delete all bookmarks in the project

Creating bookmarks is done in the language editors.

Deleting and renaming bookmarks can be done in the Bookmarks dialog, too.
NOTE: Renaming of bookmarks can only be done with created bookmarks.
Automatically created bookmarks can not be renamed.

Bookmark Commands in Language Editors

The bookmark commands in language editors affect the Bookmarks dialog as follows:
• Toggle Bookmark creates a bookmark, visible also in the Bookmarks dialog.
It will be appended to the list of bookmarks.
• Next Bookmark jumps to the next bookmark in the list of bookmarks
• Previous Bookmark jumps to the previous bookmark in the list of bookmarks.
• Delete Bookmark deletes the selected bookmark.
• Delete all Bookmarks deletes only the bookmarks inside the current section/network.
NOTE: The Bookmark tab of the Edit > Go To dialog only displays the bookmarks of
the current section.

Naming Bookmarks
Created bookmarks are named as Bookmark1, Bookmark2 and so on.
In the Bookmarks dialog you can rename the bookmarks.

33003101.26 611
 Common Function for graphical language

Automatically Created Bookmarks

Automatically created bookmarks are named as Search”<Search String>”.
Automatically created bookmarks are displayed in gray and can not be renamed.
The maximum number of automatically created bookmarks is 30.
Automatic creation of another bookmark will insert the new bookmark as the first one in the
bookmark list and will delete the bookmark at the end.
For automatically created bookmarks please refer to Tracing Variables / Addresses, page
1245.

Navigating to Bookmarks
In the Bookmarks dialog double-click a line in the list of bookmarks to open the respective
section/network with the selected bookmark.
If the check box in front of a bookmark line is not activated, you can not jump to this
bookmark by means of Next Bookmark/Previous Bookmark.

Saving Bookmarks
Bookmarks are saved with your application.

Deleting Bookmarked Lines

If you delete a section/network or a bookmarked line in a section/network, the corresponding
bookmarks are deleted, too.
Undo will not restore the bookmarks.

612 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Display grid in a FBD/LD/SFC section

Displaying the grid
The editor window has a grid background as default which splits the window into lines and
columns.
Use the View > Grid menu command to show or hide the grid.
The active mode is indicated by way of a check-symbol before the menu command.

Zoom in a FBD/LD/SFC section

Introduction
Several Zoom functions are available to provide an optimal display of the elements in the
current section (overview of the entire contents or display of details).

Zoom factor in % (FBD/LD/SFC)

The Zoom factors given in percentages increase or decrease the view of the section in
proportion to its normal size. To see the section in its normal size, select 100%.

NOTE: For LD sections, the column width can be adjusted using the
buttons, so that more text can be displayed keeping the same zoom factor (same line
height).
The following Zoom factors are available:
• 50%
Decreases the section contents to half their normal size.
• 75%
Decreases the section contents to three-quarters of their normal size.
• 100%
Displays the section contents in normal size.
• 200%
Increases the section contents to double their normal size.

33003101.26 613
 Common Function for graphical language

The menu command to set the Zoom factor is available:

• via the View > Zoom menu.
• with right click and menu Zoom for the section.
You can see which mode is active by way of a check-symbol before the menu command.

Custom... (FBD/LD/SFC)
This dialog box has two functions:
• Displaying the current Zoom factor as a percentage
When the dialog box is opened, the Zoom % list displays the current Zoom factor.
• Defining any Zoom factor as a percentage
You can define the Zoom factor by entering the Zoom factor as a percentage or by
selecting a percentage from the list of already used Zoom factors.
The menu commands to set the user-defined Zoom factor is available:
• via the menu View > Zoom > Custom....
• with right click and menu Zoom > Custom... for the section.
You can see which mode is active by way of a check-symbol before the menu command.

Zoom to Fit (FBD/LD/SFC)

For FBD and SFC sections the contents are minimized horizontally and vertically so that the
whole section can be seen.
For LD sections the contents are minimized horizontally so that the whole section width can

be seen. Adjusting the column width using the buttons double (|M|) or triple (|
L|) the number of visible lines.
If the size of the section is changed, the section contents are automatically adapted to the
new size.
The menu command to set the window size is available:
• via the menu View > Zoom > Zoom to fit.
• with right click and menu Zoom > Zoom to fit for the section.
• using the key combination Ctrl+* (* = multiplication sign of numeric pad)

• using the symbol.

614 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

You can see which mode is active by way of a check-symbol before the menu command.

Zoom to selection (FBD/LD/SFC)

Decreases or increases the section contents so that the selected element(s) is (are)
displayed as large as possible and in focus.
The menu command to zoom to the selection is available:
• via the menu View > Zoom > Zoom to selection.
You can see which mode is active by way of a check-symbol before the menu command.

Zoom out
To reduce current display by 25 %:
• select the menu View > Zoom > Zoom out.
• right click in the section and select Zoom > Zoom out.
• press the key combination Ctrl+Minus (-).
• using the mouse: press Ctrl+Rotate the mouse wheel.

• click the symbol.

Zoom in
To zoom in on current display by 25 %:
• select the menu View > Zoom > Zoom in.
• right click in the section and select Zoom > Zoom out.
• press the key combination Ctrl+Plus (+).
• using the mouse: press Ctrl+Rotate the mouse wheel.
• click the symbol.

Fullscreen
To display the application window in full-screen mode:
• select the View > Full screen menu.

33003101.26 615
 Common Function for graphical language

• press the key combination Ctrl+F8.

• click the symbol.
To end the full screen mode press Esc or use the toolbar menu.

Tracking links in a FBD/LD/SFC section

Introduction
There are different view functions available to provide optimum display of links (display
source, display destination, display entire link).

Displaying the source of a link

Displaying the source (start point) of a link:

Step Action

1 Select the link whose source you want to display.

2 Use the Edit > Link > Go to Source menu command.

or

Use the Go to Source menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The focus of the section is changed to display the source (start point) of the link. The
current zoom factor remains unchanged.

Displaying the destination of a link

Displaying the destination (end point) of a link:

616 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Step Action

1 Select the link whose destination you want to display.

2 Use the Edit > Link > Go to destination menu command.

or

Use the Go to destination menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The focus of the section is changed to display the destination (end point) of the link. The
current zoom factor remains unchanged.

Displaying the entire link

Displaying the entire link:

Step Action

1 Select the link that should be displayed in its entirety.

2 Use the Edit > Link > Zoom menu command.

or

Use the Zoom menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: Decreases or increases the section contents so that the selected links are displayed as
large as possible and in focus.

Print Current Section in a FBD/LD/SFC section

Introduction
There are the following ways to print the current section:
• Print the section using the menu command
• Print the section using the print documentation
NOTE: To view the breaks on the current section (for printing purpose), click View >
Page Break. Click again to hide page breaks.

33003101.26 617
 Common Function for graphical language

Print the section using the menu command

Carry out the following steps to print the current section using the menu command:

Step Action

1 Open the print dialog using:

• the menu command File > Print,
• or the key combination Ctrl+P
or
• the symbol .

2 Press OK to start printing the current section.

Print the section using the print documentation

Carry out the following steps to print the current section using the print documentation:

Step Action

1 Double-click on Documentation in the project browser.

Result: An overview of your system is open, see also Documentation, page 1651

2 Select Program > Tasks > MAST/FAST/AUX > ... to print the section.
3 Select the menu command Print from the sections context menu.
4 Press OK to start printing the current section.

Undo and redo changes in a FBD/LD section

Undo changes
You have the following options to undo the recent changes:
• Use the Edit > Undo menu command.
• Press the Ctrl+Z key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
One change is undone each time the function is executed.

618 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

The function can be executed a maximum of 10 times.

Redo changes
Changes that have been undone using Undo can be restored:
• Use the Edit > Redo menu command.
• Press the Ctrl+Y key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
One undone change is restored each time the function is executed.
The function can be executed a maximum of 10 times.

Using connectors in a FBD/LD section

Introduction
To avoid links overlapping each other, they can also be represented in the form of
connectors, see also section Links (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Displaying links as connectors

Displaying links as connectors:

33003101.26 619
 Common Function for graphical language

Step Action

1 Select the desired link.

Example:

2 Use the Edit > Link > Show as Connector menu command.
or

Use the Show as Connector menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The link is displayed as a connector.

Example:

Displaying connectors as links

Displaying connectors as links:

620 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Step Action

1 Select the desired connector.

Example:

2 Use the Show as Link menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The connector is displayed as a link.

Example:

Note: Although the connector is now displayed as a link, the name of the connector is still
occupied and cannot be used for another link. If the connector name is used for another link, the
connector must be explicitly deleted, see Deleting connectors, page 622.

Renaming connector
Renaming connector:

33003101.26 621
 Common Function for graphical language

Step Action

1 Double-click the target connector (source).

Result: The editor mode is activated.

2 Enter the new name.

Note: The name must be unique within the current section and may not already be used by a
connector, this also applies to connectors that are to be displayed as links. To enable an
occupied connector name, the connector must be explicitly deleted, see Deleting connectors,
page 622.

Confirm the entry using Enter.

Result: The connector (source and target) is renamed.

Example:

Deleting connectors
Deleting connectors:

622 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Step Action

1 Select the desired connector.

Example:

2 Use the Show as Link menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The connector is displayed as a link.

Example:

3 Use the Delete Connector menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The connector is deleted.

33003101.26 623
 Common Function for graphical language

Inspect windows in a FBD/LD section

Introduction
In offline mode, the name, address (if available) and the comment (if available) of the
associated variable are displayed in inspect windows.
In online mode, the name, address (if available) and the current value of the variable are
displayed in inspect windows.
The current values can be displayed:
• Decimal, e.g. 15
• Binary, e.g. 00001111
• Hexadecimal, e.g. F
• Floating point, e.g. 15.4
• Exponent, e.g. 1.3e+003
• Literal, e.g. 'otto'

Generating an inspect window

Generating an inspect window:

624 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Step Action

1 In FBD: Select the desired FFB pin.

In LD: Select the desired contact, the desired coil or the desired FFB pin.

2 You have the following options to generate inspect windows:

• Use the Edit > New > Inspect window menu command.
• Use the Place Inspect menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the F9 key.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result: The inspect window is generated.

Example (offline):

Example (online):

Resizing
Position the mouse pointer on the right or left edge of an inspect window (the correct
position is indicated by the or mouse pointer symbol), click the left mouse button and
drag the mouse right or left.

33003101.26 625
 Common Function for graphical language

Changing the position

Position the mouse pointer on the inspect window, click the left mouse button and move the
inspect window to the target position.

Anchoring the position

You can anchor all inspect windows of a section to their relative positions within the section
(the inspect window stays in its onscreen position even if the page is scrolled), or to their
absolute position (the inspect window is scrolled along with the rest of the section contents).
To switch between modes, select the View > Floating Inspect Windows menu command.
You can see which mode is active by way of a check-symbol in front of the menu command.

Setting a zone monitor

Setting a zone monitor:

Step Action

1 Position the mouse pointer on the inspect window.

2 Use the Settings menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The properties dialog box for the inspect window is opened.

Example:

3 Enter a minimum and a maximum value for the variable to be monitored.

626 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Step Action

4 Enter the format of the variable displayed in the section.

5 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result:
• If the current value is within the defined range, the inspect window is displayed in cyan.
• If the current value is outside the defined range, the inspect window is displayed in yellow.
• If the current value is above the defined range, the inspect window is displayed in magenta.
Example:

Hiding inspect windows

To hide and show the inspect windows select the View > Hide Inspect Windows menu
command.
You can see which mode is active (hide inspect windows) by way of a check-symbol in front
of the menu command.

Deleting inspect windows

Position the cursor on the inspect window to be deleted and select the Delete Inspect menu
command from the shortcut menu.

33003101.26 627
 Common Function for graphical language

Tooltips for Variables in a FBD/LD/SFC Section

Introduction
In offline and online mode the following information of a variable can be displayed by tooltip:
• type
• name
• address (if available)
• comment (if available)
• Alias of (if available)
Information is displayed for variables and expressions associated to:
• pins of FFBs (FBD/LD)
• contacts, coils, operation and comparison blocks (LD)
• transitions (SFC)

Concatenated Comments
To show concatenated comments of DDT expressions, set the option Display complete
comments from structure element via Tools > Project Settings (for the current project)
or via Tools > Options (for future projects).
Example, when the option is set.

DDT expression Tooltip

ddt1.b1 ddt1.b1

DDT1 : ddt1 @ %MW100 | 'Comment for ddt1'

BOOL : ddt1.b1 @ %MW100 | 'Comment for ddt1.Comment for b1'

ddt2.ddt1.b1 ddt2.ddt1.b1

DDT2 : ddt2 @ %MW200 | 'Comment for ddt2'

BOOL : ddt2.ddt1.b1 @ %MW200 | 'Comment for ddt2.Comment for nested ddt1.

Comment for nested b1'

Example, when the option is not set.

628 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

DDT expression Tooltip

ddt1.b1 ddt1.b1

DDT1 : ddt1 @ %MW100 | 'Comment for ddt1'

BOOL : ddt1.b1 @ %MW100 | 'Comment for b1'

ddt2.ddt1.b1 ddt2.ddt1.b1

DDT2 : ddt2 @ %MW200 | 'Comment for ddt2'

BOOL : ddt2.ddt1.b1 @ %MW200 | 'Comment for nested b1'

Variable/Pin
Position the mouse pointer over a variable (e.g. b1) or expression to display type, name,
address and comment of the variable.
Position the mouse pointer over an FFB pin name (e.g. IN1) to display type, name and
comment of the pin. In this case the information is taken from the FFB type and not from the
FB instance.

Detected Error Tooltip

There are analyze errors and animation errors.
• Analyze errors are displayed in offline mode in a tooltip, when you position the mouse
pointer over a connectable object (e.g. FFB, contact, coil etc.).
• Animation errors are displayed in online mode in a tooltip, when you position the mouse
pointer over the #Err! value, which is shown in this case as animation value.

33003101.26 629
 Common Function for graphical language

Using the Variable Tooltip

Step Action

1 Position the mouse pointer over the variable or expression.

2 The tooltip is displayed.

Example:

Replace Variables in a FBD/LD Section

Overview
To replace variables assigned to elementary functions (EF) or to function blocks (EFB, DFB)
in FBD/LD sections use the Replace Variables dialog box.
To find and replace variables connected to functions and/or function blocks you can use
placeholders.
NOTE:

• Structure elements of multi-element variables (DDTs) cannot be replaced.

• If the original variable does not exist, the replacement variable is not possible.

Dialog Box
You have the following options to display the Replace Variables dialog box:

630 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

• Select the Edit > Replace Variables menu command.

• Select the Replace Variables command in the context menu (right-click on one or more
EF/EFBs in the section).
Dialog box for replacing functions/function blocks using placeholders

Find and Replace Pattern

The find and replace patterns are applied to all variables connected to the selected
functions/function blocks.
The following placeholders can be used:
• * to search/replace any string
• ? to search/replace any character
Rules for find and replace patterns see below.

33003101.26 631
 Common Function for graphical language

Replace Variables
All variables matching Find Pattern will be listed in a dialog box:

Elements of the dialog box

Element Description

Original displays the names of the found variables

The entries in this column are not editable.

Replacement displays the strings that will replace the names of the found variables

The entries in this column are editable.

Data Type displays the type of the original variable (not that on of the replacement variable, which
could already exist and be of another type)

The entries in this column are not editable.

Replace provides the option to enable/disable the variable replacement via a check box

By default Replace is enabled for all rows.

The entries in this column are editable.

Create undeclared If this check box is selected, the replacement variables will be created in the Data Editor
replacement automatically.
variables
If such a replacement variable already exists in the Data Editor, the creation will be
skipped.

Note: If the replacement variable already exists, but has another type than the original
one, since creation is skipped the replacement variable may or may not match the type of
the connected pin afterwards.

Note: If the check box is not selected, no variable creation will take place (some of the
replacement variables may be undeclared afterwards).

632 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Undo/Redo
Replace Variables supports Undo/Redo, which means that the original state will be
recreated on Undo (of course without deleting the newly created replacement variables from
Data Editor) and the state after replacement on Redo.

Online Mode
Replace Variables is supported in online mode.

Rules for Find and Replace Patterns

Rules for find and replace patterns:
• ? can be used many times in pattern
• * can be used at maximum 2 times in pattern
• * can be first and last character in pattern only
• no * only and no ** can be used
• no ?* and no *? can be used (always another letter between them)
• numbers of * and ? in both (find and replace) pattern must be equal
• if two * and at least one ? are used the find and replace pattern must be structural
identical (same length, same order of normal letters and placeholders)

Examples
Examples of simple replacements

Find Pattern: Found Variable Replace With: Variable is Replaced With

abc123jmk abc123jmk abc223jmk abc223jmk

abc123jmk abc123jmk abc124123jmk abc124123jmk

Examples for replacements with constant characters

33003101.26 633
 Common Function for graphical language

Find Pattern: Found Variable Replace With: Variable is Replaced With

ab?1????k abc123jmk ab?2????k abc223jmk

abc???12??mk abc124123jmk abc???022?4?mk abc12402234jmk

Examples for replacements with constant series of characters

Find Pattern: Found Variable Replace With: Variable is Replaced With

*123jmk abc123jmk *223jmk abc223jmk

*123* abc123jmk *223* abc223jmk

*123* abc123jmk *2234* abc2234jmk

Examples of complex replacements

Find Pattern: Found Variable Replace With: Variable is Replaced With

abc???12??m* abc124123jmk abc???022?4?m* abc12402234jmk

*1???mk abc123jmk *2???mk abc223jmk

*2??jmk abc223jmk *1240?2?4jmk abc12402234jmk

*1?3* abc123jmk *2?3* abc223jmk

Examples of array replacements

Find Pattern: Found Variable Replace With: Variable is Replaced With

array[5* array[5] array[6* array[6]

array5[5* array5[5] array5[6* array5[6]

*5* array5[5] *6* array6[5]

array5[i* array5[i5] array5[i6* array5[i65]

*5* array5[i5] *6* array6[i6]

Not Possible
The following complex replacements are not possible

634 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Entry in text field Found variable Entry in text field Replace With
search pattern

*1?3* abc123jmk *2?34*

*1?3* abc123jmk *02?34*

*1241?3* abc124123jmk *12402?34*

*12?1?3* abc124123jmk *12?02?34*

Initialize search in a FBD/LD section

Introduction
The Initialize Search function transfers the name of the selected element (search text) to
the Element text box in the Cross-References window.

Selecting the search text

Process the following steps to select the search text:

Step Action

1 Select the element to search for (search text).

The following elements can be searched for:

• Variable
(To search for a variable, select the variable.)
• EFB/DFB Instance
(To search for an EFB/DFB instance, select the EFB/DFB.)

2 Use the Services > Initialize Search menu command.

or

Select the menu command Initialize search from the sections shortcut menu.

or

Press the Ctrl+U key combination.

Result: The search text is transferred to the Element text box in the Cross-References window.

33003101.26 635
 Common Function for graphical language

Initialize Animation Table in a FBD/LD section

Introduction
The Initialize Animation Table transfers the selected variables to the Animation table, page
1475.

Selecting the variables

Process the following steps to select variables:

Step Action

1 Select the variables to transfer to the Animation table.

The following items can be selected:

• Variable
(To transfer one or more variables, select the variable(s) desired).
• FFB
(To transfer all variables of an FFB, select the FFB).
• Contacts, Coils, Operate and Compare Blocks (LD)
(To transfer all variables associated to Contacts, Coils, Operate and Compare Blocks,
select these objects).)

2 Use the Services > Initialize Animation table menu command.

or

Select the menu command Animation Table from the sections context menu.

or

Press the Ctrl+T key combination.

Result: The variable(s) is/are transferred to the Animation table, page 1475.

Initialize Animation Table

Using Initialize Animation Table(Ctrl+T) you create an animation table with a default name
e.g. Table[FBD Editor - Mixer : [MAST]]. You can rename the table.
All the variables you selected are listed in the animation table.

636 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Selecting a new set of variables and using Initialize Animation Table again, all new
variables are added to this animation table (if you did not rename it).

Initialize New Animation Table

Using Initialize New Animation Table (Ctrl+Shift+T) you create a new animation table with
an indexed default name e.g. Table[FBD Editor - Mixer : [MAST]1]. You can rename
the table.
All the variables you selected are listed in the table.
But if you click anywhere in the section and do not select any variable, you create a new
empty animation table.
Every time you use Initialize New Animation Table you create a new animation table.

Go to in a FBD/LD section
Introduction
The Go to function is used to jump to:
• a specific location in the current section,
• a specific bookmark in the current section or
• a specific mark in the current section.

Open the dialog

The following options are available to open the Go to dialog box.
• Use the menu command Edit > Go to,
• select the menu command Go to from the sections shortcut menu,
• Press the key combination Ctrl+G.
or
• Choose the symbol.

33003101.26 637
 Common Function for graphical language

Go to a location
Go to a certain position in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 637 the Go to dialog box.

2 Select the Position tab.

3 Enter the line or column number.
4 Confirm the entry using the command button Go to.

Result: The desired position is displayed.

Go to a bookmark
Go to a certain bookmark in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 637 the Go to dialog box.

2 Choose theActionstab.
3 Select a bookmark in the list.
4 Double click on the selected bookmark or press the Go to command button.

Result: The bookmark is shown and marked as the current bookmark, page 607.

Go to a location
Go to a certain location in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 637 the Go to dialog box.

2 Select the Locationtab.

3 Select a location in the list.
4 Double click on the selected location or press the Go to command button.

Result: The desired location is displayed.

638 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Go to dialog box in a FBD/LD section

Call the dialog box:
see Open the dialog, page 637

Call the dialog box

The Go todialog box is made up of three tabs:
• Location
Go to a certain position in the current section using this tab:
• Bookmarks
Go to a certain bookmark in the current section using this tab:
• Label
Go to a certain location in the current section using this tab:

Position tab
Representation of the tab Position:

Elements of the Position tab

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Row The number of the row to be displayed can be entered in this text box.

33003101.26 639
 Common Function for graphical language

Element Description

Column The number of the column to be displayed can be entered in this text box.

Go to Display the current position using the button desired position, page 638.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

Register tab Bookmarks

Representation of theBookmark tab:

Elements of the tab Bookmark:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Bookmark: Select the bookmark to be displayed from this list box.

Prev If a current bookmark, page 607 is selected, a jump is made to the previous one and
the last one is marked as the current bookmark.

If no current bookmark is selected, the margin is search from the bottom to the top
for the next bookmark, which is marked as the current bookmark.

When the start of the section is reached, the search starts again from the bottom.

Next If a current bookmark, page 607 is selected, a jump is made to the previous one and
the last one is marked as the next bookmark.

If no current bookmark is selected, the margin is search from top to bottom for the
next bookmark, which is marked as the current bookmark.

When the end of the section is reached, the search starts again from the top.

640 33003101.26
Common Function for graphical language

Element Description

Go to Display the current position using the button desired bookmark, page 638.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

Register tab Location

Representation of the tab Label:

Elements of the tab Bookmark:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Locations: Select the location to be displayed from this text box.

You can enter the name of the location in the text box with the keyboard or using the
drop-down list by clicking with the mouse.

Go to Display the current position using the button desired location, page 638.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

33003101.26 641
642 33003101.26
FBD Editor

FBD Editor
What’s in This Chapter
Creating a program with FBD programming language............... 643
Editing FFBs.......................................................................... 661
Returning from a Subroutine or DFB........................................ 698
Calling a Subroutine............................................................... 700
Jumps within the Current Section ............................................ 705
Definition of the Jump Target (Jump Labels)............................. 710
Editing Links.......................................................................... 715
Entering Comments ............................................................... 729
Online functions..................................................................... 731
FBD Reference Data Type...................................................... 731
Export/Import......................................................................... 732
Customize FBD Editor............................................................ 733

Overview
This chapter describes the menus and dialogs of the FBD editor.
For a description of the syntax for the FBD programming language, please refer to the
Function Block Diagram FBD (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) chapter in the Reference manual.

Creating a program with FBD programming

language
Overview
This section describes the basics for creating a program in the FBD programming language.

Structure of an FBD program (function block language)

Properties of an FBD program
Properties of an FBD program:

33003101.26 643
 FBD Editor

• FBD sections have a grid behind them.

• A grid section consists of ten grid units. A grid unit is the smallest possible space
between two objects in an FBD section.
• An FBD section can be configured in number of cells (horizontal grid coordinates and
vertical grid coordinates).
• The FBD programming language is not cell oriented but the objects are still aligned with
the grid units.
• The execution order is determined by the position of the FFBs in the section (executed
from left to right and from top to bottom). If the FFBs are connected to a network using
graphical links, the execution order is determined by the signal flow, see also section
Execution order of the FFBs (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
The execution order can be influenced in several ways, see also section Changing the
execution order (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
• A syntax and semantics check, page 646 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered. The result of this check is displayed in colored text and objects.
• Syntactically or semantically incorrect sections can be saved.

FBD program objects

The objects of the programming language FBD (Function Block Diagram) help to divide a
section into a number of:
• EFs and EFBs, page 666 (Elementary Functions and Elementary Function Blocks),
• DFBs, page 666 (Derived Function Blocks) and
• Procedures, page 666
These objects, combined under the name FFBs, can be linked with each other by:
• Links, page 715 or
• Actual Parameters, page 671.
Comments for the logic of the program can be added using text objects, page 729.

Edit and view functions

Edit and view functions of the FBD Editor:
• Selecting objects, page 648
• Deleting objects, page 650
• Cutting, page 651, copying, page 651 and pasting, page 652 objects

644 33003101.26
FBD Editor

• Moving, page 654 objects (also between different FBD/LD sections)

• Undo, page 618 and Redo, page 619
• Using bookmarks, page 607
• Searching and replacing, page 1232 variables and function blocks and DFB instances.

Input assistants
Input assistants for the FBD Editor:
• Function input assistants, page 681 for functions, function blocks and procedures

Online functions
Online functions of the FBD Editor:
• Display the current value, page 624.
• Setting breakpoints, page 1422
• Setting watchpoints, page 1428
• Step by Step, page 1425

Creating an FBD Program

Creating an FBD program
Carry out the following procedures to create an FBD program:

Step Action

1 Creating an FBD section., page 499

2 Place the desired FFB in the section, see also Calling an FFB via the data selection, page 666.

3 Assign the necessary current parameters to the FFB, also see Assign actual parameters, page
671.

Note: As soon as the text is entered several checks are made, such as syntax/semantic error
checks, correct spelling of variable names etc. A detailed description of syntax is found in chapter
Function Block Diagram FBD (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The results of the checks are indicated by a color folder, see also Syntax and Semantics Check
during programming, page 646.

4 Create a graphical link between FFBs, also see Placing a Link, page 716.

33003101.26 645
 FBD Editor

Syntax and Semantics Check during programming

Introduction
Syntax and semantics check is performed directly when creating the program.
The result of this check is displayed in three formats:
• directly in the program section with colored text
• as tooltip if the cursor is placed on incorrect text.
• In the output window, if Generate > Analyze is selected.

Representation
Meaning of colors and labels:

Color Description Example

Black Syntax and semantics are correct

Blue Possible causes:

• Associated variable is not declared
• Data type of the variable does not match
the data type of the pin

Red wavy Faulty text, e.g. variables which are not

line declared, variables with an incorrect data type,
...

Tooltips
If the cursor is placed over an incorrect object or incorrect text, the tooltip is displayed with a
brief description of the cause of the error. It will also be displayed in the output window after
the analysis.

646 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Error message in the output window

Error message: Accessed object is not a function block.

Cause of error Error Correction

Name of the function block was already used for a Rename the already used variable.
variable.

Navigating with the keyboard

Using the keyboard
The following keys and key combinations are provided for navigation:

Key combinations Motion

Cursor left Moves the cursor to the left

Cursor right Moves the cursor to the right

Cursor up Moves the cursor up

Cursor down Moves the cursor down

Ctrl+Cursor left Moves the cursor one grid point to the left

Ctrl+Cursor right Moves the cursor one grid point to the right

Ctrl+Cursor up Moves the cursor one grid point up

Ctrl+Cursor down Moves the cursor one grid point down

Home Shows the beginning of the current line

End Shows the end of the current line

Ctrl+Home Shows the top left cell of the section (the position of the cursor is not
affected by this function)

Ctrl+End Shows the bottom right cell of the section (the position of the cursor is
not affected by this function)

Page Up Scrolls one page up (the position of the cursor is not affected by this
function)

Page Down Scrolls one page down (the position of the cursor is not affected by
this function)

Ctrl+Page Up Scrolls one page left (the position of the cursor is not affected by this
function)

33003101.26 647
 FBD Editor

Key combinations Motion

Ctrl+Page Down Scrolls one page to the right (the position of the cursor is not affected
by this function)

Ctrl+Alt+Page Up Displays the previous section (including via the View > Previous
Sectionmenu).

Ctrl+Alt+Page Down Displays the next section (including via the View > Next
Sectionmenu).

Spacebar Selects the object at the cursor position.

Ctrl + space bar Adds the object at the cursor position to the current selection (multiple
selection).

Enter Opens the properties dialog box for the selected pin.

Alt+Enter Opens the properties dialog box for the selected object.

Selecting objects
Select and placement mode
Objects are selected in select mode.
Select mode can be activated using:
• the Edit > Select Mode menu command
• the symbol
or
• the Esc key

The cursor symbol indicates that select mode is active.

Selecting an object
Selecting an object:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Left-click the object you want to select. 1. Move the cursor to the object to be selected,
see also Navigating with the keyboard, page
647.
2. Press the spacebar.

648 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Selecting several objects

Selecting several objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed. 1. Move the cursor to the first object to be
selected, see also Navigating with the keyboard,
2. Drag the mouse across the objects you want to page 647.
select.
2. Press the spacebar.
or
3. Move the cursor to the next object to be
1. Left-click the first object you want to selected
select.
4. Press the Ctrl+spacebar key combination.
2. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.
5. Repeat these steps until the desired objects are
3. Left-click the next object you want to selected.
select.
4. Repeat these steps until the desired
objects are selected.

Selecting by rows
Selecting by rows:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Selecting the contents of a row: -

1. Left-click the number of the row you want to
select in the vertical ruler.
Selecting the contents of several rows:
1. Left-click the number of the first row you
want to select in the vertical ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last row you
want to select in the vertical ruler.
Note: Pressing the Shift key makes it possible to
combine this procedure with the procedure for
selecting columns.

Selecting by columns
Selecting by columns:

33003101.26 649
 FBD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Selecting the contents of a column: -

1. Left-click the number of the column you want to
select in the vertical ruler.
Selecting the contents of several columns:
1. Left-click the number of the first column
you want to select in the vertical ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last column
you want to select in the vertical ruler.
Note: Pressing the Shift key makes it possible to
combine this procedure with the procedure for
selecting rows.

Selecting all (entire contents of the section)

Selecting all (entire contents of the section):

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Use the Edit > Select All menu command. Press the Ctrl+A key combination.

Deselecting objects
Deselecting objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Left-click an empty space in the section. 1. Move the cursor to an empty space in the
section, see also Navigating with the keyboard,
page 887.
2. Press the spacebar.

Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting, duplicating, and

moving objects
Deleting objects
Deleting objects:

650 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 648 the object to be deleted. 1. Select, page 648 the object to be deleted.

2. Use the Edit > Delete menu command. 2. Press the Delete key.

Result: The selected object is deleted. The actual parameters (and the links for FFBs) are deleted together with
the object, even if they are not selected explicitly.

Please also pay careful attention to the Notes, page 689 on deleting from FFBs using an execute after
reference.

Cutting objects
Cutting objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 648 the object to be cut. 1. Select, page 648 the object to be cut.

2. Use the Edit > Cut menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+X key combination.

or
Use the menu command Cut in the shortcut
menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

Result: The selected object is cut from the section and copied to the clipboard. This is also the case for the
actual parameters. Links are also cut. But they are only copied to the clipboard if they (and their partner objects)
are selected explicitly.

Please also pay careful attention to the Notes, page 689 on deleting from FFBs using an execute after
reference.

The cut object can be inserted, page 652 in any other position (also in another FBD section).

Copying objects to the clipboard

Copying objects to the clipboard:

33003101.26 651
 FBD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 648 the object to be copied. 1. Select, page 648 the object to be copied.

2. Use the Edit > Copy menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+C key combination.

or
Use the Copy menu command from the shortcut
menu (right-click).
or

Click the symbol.

Result: The selected object is copied to the clipboard. This is also the case for the actual parameters. Links are
only copied to the clipboard if they (and their partner objects) are selected explicitly.

Please also pay careful attention to the Notes, page 689 on copying from FFBs using an execute after
reference.

The copied object can be inserted, page 652 in any other position (also in another FBD
section).
If the copied object is an EFB or a DFB instance, it can also be duplicated, page 653 in any
other available position (also in another LD or FBD section).

Pasting objects from the clipboard

Pasting objects from the clipboard:

652 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Move the cursor to the target position using the

1. Use the menu command Edit > Insert. arrow keys.
or
2. Press the Ctrl+V key combination.
Use the menu command Paste in the shortcut
3. Press Enter.
menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

2. Left-click the target position.

Note: This presents the behavior of the Copy, Cut, Paste on a function block instance. It only applies to
graphical languages as FBD and LD.
• Using the Paste function after a Copy of an object:
As a result of a Copy, a new function block instance (FBI) is used. The Paste function creates a new FBI
whenever it is repeated. Accordingly, the FBI is incremented.
• Using the Paste function after a Cut of an object:
As a result of a Cut, the same instance of the function is used. The Paste function uses the same FBI
whenever it is repeated. Accordingly, the FBI is identical.
Note: Please also pay careful attention to the Notes, page 689 on copying from FFBs using an execute after
reference.
NOTE: Using same instance of a function block is not recommended because it can lead to incorrect
execution of the function blocks. A function block instance uses contextual variables that are owned by
each instance usage and cannot be applied to any other. For instance, each current value is specific to one
timer instance and one timer usage (Current value of a timer named TON_1 cannot be shared with another
timer named TON_2).

Duplicating an EFB or a DFB instance from the clipboard

Duplicating an EF instance is not possible. If the clipboard contains several objects with
different types (EF, EFB and DFB), the EF is copied while the EFB and DFB instances are
duplicated.
Duplicating an EFB or a DFB instance from the clipboard:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Move the cursor to the target position using the

1. Use the menu command Duplicate in the
shortcut menu (right mouse button). arrow keys.

2. Move the mouse to the desired target position. 2. Press the Ctrl+W key combination.

Result: A dotted frame appears and the mouse Result: The target position appears as a dotted

pointer changes its symbol to for a valid frame with the symbol in its center for a
position. valid position.

3. Left-click the target position. 3. Press Enter.

33003101.26 653
 FBD Editor

The duplicate operation is also possible across sections between different opened LD or
FBD sections in the same or another Control Expert instance.
NOTE: If the EFB or DFB instances to be duplicated do not already exist in the other
Control Expert instance, these instances are copied.

Moving objects
Moving objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Position, page 648 the cursor on the object to be

1. Select, page 648 the object to be moved.
moved.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected
2. Press the spacebar.
object. (on one of the selected objects if several
are selected). 3. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol 4. Move the object to the target position using the
arrow keys.
to .
3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol

to .
4. Drag the object to the new position and release
the mouse button.
Result: The selected object is moved from its original position to the target position. The object's actual
parameters are moved together with the object. FFBs still have their links and they are adjusted to the new
position of the FFB.

Note: The move operation is also possible across sections between different opened FBD sections.

Note: When objects are moved beyond the visible area of the editor window, automatic scrolling of the window
will not begin until you reach the edge of the window with the mouse pointer, not as soon as the objects are
moved beyond the edge.

Copying objects via drag & drop

Copying objects via drag & drop:

654 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

-
1. Select, page 648 the object to be copied.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected object.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
4. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

5. Drag the object to the new position.
Note: This is also possible across sections between different opened FBD
sections.
6. Release the mouse button.
Result: A copy of the selected object is pasted at the target position. The object's actual
parameters (variable/address) are copied together with the object. A new instance is
automatically created for FFBs. Links are only copied if they (and their partner objects)
are selected explicitly.

Please also pay careful attention to the Notes, page 689 on copying from FFBs using
an execute after reference.

Copying, pasting and adjusting pin variables

Copying variables to the clipboard
Copying variables to the clipboard:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 648 the pin variable to be copied. 1. Select, page 648 the pin variable to be copied.
2. Press the Ctrl+C key combination.
2. Use the Edit > Copy menu command.
or
Use the Copy menu command from the shortcut
menu (right-click).
or

Click the symbol.

Result: The selected variable is copied to the clipboard.

33003101.26 655
 FBD Editor

Pasting variables from the clipboard

Pasting variables from the clipboard:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Press the Ctrl+Shift+V key combination.

1. Use the menu command Edit > Paste variable.
2. Move the cursor to the target position using the
or
arrow keys.
Use the menu command Paste variable in the
3. Press Enter.
shortcut menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

2. Left-click the target position.

Adjusting variables font size

You can increase or decrease the size of the font for the FFB pins (inputs and outputs) using

the following buttons on the toolbar .

NOTE: The text inside the blocks and the instance name cannot be changed.

Inserting Rows and Columns

Rules for Inserting Rows
The following rules apply when inserting rows/columns:
• The maximum size of 86,400 grids cannot be exceeded.
• The maximum number of rows is 1440.
• The maximum number of columns is 360.
• The size of one inserted row or column is like the ruler size (that is 10 grids).
• The first row/column selected must not intersect with an object, that has an origin before
this row/column.
• The same number of rows/columns are inserted as selected in the vertical/horizontal
ruler.
• The new rows/columns are inserted above/left of the first selected row/column (i.e. all
objects of the selected rows/columns are moved down/right).

656 33003101.26
FBD Editor

• When rows/columns are inserted within existing links, these links are kept and are
adjusted to the new position of the objects.
NOTE: The section area (number of rows x number of columns) cannot exceed the
maximum size of 86,400 grids, e.g. 240 x 360 or 1,440 x 60. The number of rows and
columns will impact one another, e.g. the number of rows is determined by the internal
calculation 86,400 / number of columns (limited to the lower tenth).

Inserting Rows
Step Action

1 Select, page 648 the desired number of rows in the vertical ruler (click the row numbers).

2 Use the Insert rows menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler or the Edit >
Insert rows command.

Result: The number of selected rows is inserted above the first selected row.

Inserting Columns
Step Action

1 Select, page 648 the desired number of columns in the horizontal ruler (click the column
numbers).

2 Use the Insert columns menu command from the shortcut menu of the horizontal ruler or the
Edit > Insert columns command.

Result: The number of selected columns is inserted in front of the first selected column.

Deleting Rows and Columns

Rules for Deleting Rows
The following rules apply when deleting rows/columns:
• The minimum number of rows (240) respective columns (60) cannot be fallen short.
• The size of one deleted row or column is like the ruler size (that is 10 grids).
• The same number of rows/columns are deleted as selected in the vertical/horizontal
ruler.
• When rows/columns are deleted within existing links, these links are kept and are
adjusted to the new position of the objects.

33003101.26 657
 FBD Editor

• The objects of the selected rows/columns are deleted and the objects of the following
rows/columns are moved up/left by the respective number of rows/columns.

Deleting Rows
Deleting rows:

Step Action

1 Select, page 648 the desired number of rows in the vertical ruler (click the row numbers).

2 Use the Delete rows menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler or the Edit >
Delete rows command.

Result: The selected number of rows is deleted.

Deleting Columns
Deleting columns:

Step Action

1 Select, page 648 the desired number of columns in the horizontal ruler (click the columns
numbers).

2 Use the Delete Columns menu command from the shortcut menu of the horizontal ruler or the
Edit > Delete Columns command.

Result: The selected number of columns is deleted.

Displaying the properties

Displaying the object properties
You have the following options to display the object properties dialog box:
• Double-click the object.
• Select, page 648 the object and use the Edit > Properties... dialog box..
• Select, page 648 the object and use the Properties...command.from the shortcut
menu.
• Select, page 648 the object and then press the Alt+Enter key combination.
When the properties dialog box is called without an object being selected, the section
properties dialog box , page 502 is opened.

658 33003101.26
FBD Editor

If several objects are selected, the commands do not work.

View data properties

You have the following options to display the section properties dialog box, page 1195:
• using the data editor, page 344
1. Selecting one or several lines in a list editor
2. Using the shortcut menu select the Propertiescommand.
• via the FBD section
1. Selecting one or several element(s) in the FBD section.
2. From the context menu select the command Data properties or press Ctrl + Enter.

Refining DFBs and subroutines

Introduction
This function makes it possible to "look into" a DFB or subroutine. This makes it possible to
see the internal state of the DFB/subroutine when animation is used, or to make changes to
the logic very quickly.
NOTE: The only limitation occurs when the displayed variable is in an ARRAY with at
least 2 dimensions and when the index is not a constant. In this case an error message
is displayed and the variable value can't be displayed.

Refining DFBs
Process the following steps to refine DFBs:

33003101.26 659
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the DFB.

2 You have the following options to refine DFBs:
• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: If the DFB contains only one section, this will be opened automatically.

If the DFB contains several sections, a selection dialog is opened.

Example:

3 Select the desired DFB section.

Result: The DFB section is opened.

Note: With nested DFBs, several refine processes are possible, but we should not let open
simultaneously the refine editors or it could lead to a wrong data display.

Refining subroutines
Process the following steps to refine subroutines:

660 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the subroutine block, page 701.

2 You have the following options to refine subroutines:

• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: The subroutine is opened.

Note: With nested subroutines several refine processes are possible.

Editing FFBs
Overview
This section describes the various possibilities to edit elementary functions, elementary
function blocks, derived function blocks and procedures in the FBD programming language.

General information about calling an FFB

Introduction
FFB is the generic term for:
• Elementary Function (EF)
• Elementary Function Block (EFB)
• Derived Function Block (DFB)
• Procedure
(Procedures are an expansion to IEC 61131-3 and must be enabled explicitly in the
Tools > Project Settings dialog box, on the Languages > Common tab by selecting
the Allow procedures checkbox).
FFBs can be placed in any free space.
If an FFB is placed in a space that is already occupied by an object, an error message is
returned.

33003101.26 661
 FBD Editor

For more information, refer to chapter Elementary Functions, Elementary Function Blocks,
Derived Function Blocks and Procedures (FFBs) (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

Declaring block instances

Function blocks (elementary and derived) have internal states. If the inputs have the same
values, the value on the output can have another value during the individual executions. For
example, with a counter the value on the output is incremented.
The instance name serves as a unique identification for the function block in a project.
Instances can be declared:
• By selecting a function block type and its placement in a section.
• By the declaration of the block instance in the FFB input assistant, page 1192 its
placement in the section.
• By the declaration of the block instance in the Data editor, page 376.

an FFB call.
FFBs can be called in the following ways:
• Via the FFB Input Assistant..., page 663 menu command
◦ Use the Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command.
◦ Use the menu command FFB Input Assistant... from the shortcut menu.
or
◦ Press the Ctrl+I key combination.
• Via the data selection, page 666
◦ Use the Edit > Data Selection....
◦ Use the menu command Data Selection... from the shortcut menu.
◦ Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
or
◦ Select the symbol.
• Via the Types library browser per drag & drop
◦ Use the Tools > Types Library Manager menu command.
or
◦ Press the Alt+3 key combination.

662 33003101.26
FBD Editor

NOTE: You can customize the FBD toolbar to call directly a maximum of 20 EF, EFB or
DFB via the FBD Favorite Toolbar, page 735.

Calling an FFB via the FFB Input Assistant.

Activating the FFB input assistant
You have the following options to activate the FFB input assistant:
• Use the Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command. (no object may be selected).
• Use the menu command from the shortcut menu (no object may be selected).
or
• Press the key combination Ctrl+I (no object may be selected).

The active FFB placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Selecting an FFB type via the FFB input assistant

Process the following steps to select an FFB type via the FFB input assistant:

33003101.26 663
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 From the FFB input assistant....from the shortcut menu (right-click) for the FFB input assistant,
page 663section.

The FFB input assistant, page 1192 is opened.

2 You have the following options to enter the FFB type with the:FFB Type text box:
• You can enter the FFB type in the textbox:
In this case, continue with step 6 of the procedure.
• You can select the FFB type from the list of recently used names using the symbol.
In this case, continue with step 6 of the procedure.
• Using the button ... open the FFB selection dialog, page 1183.

3 Select the library from the Libraries/Families column which contains the desired function block.

Tip: If you do not know where to find the FFB you are looking for select the Libset, entry to see a
list of all the FFBs available independently of their libraries.

4 Select the desired function block from the Name column.

664 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

Example:

5 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and FFB input assistant is activated.

Example:

33003101.26 665
 FBD Editor

Step Action

6 You have the following options to enter the block instance for function blocks in the instance text
box:
• You can accept the name which is suggested.
• You can change the name which is suggested.

7 The number of inputs, page 684can be increased with some elementary functions.

Expandable pins can be recognized from the following display:

To add further pins select the last pin in the structure and press Add pin.

8 To assign the current parameter double-click the Entry field cell of the first formal parameter and
enter the parameter to be used.

You have the following options to enter the variables/addresses:

• You can enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174.
Assign an actual parameter to all formal parameters of the function block in this way.

9 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The FFB input assistant is closed and the FFB input mode is activated. The active FFB

placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

10 To place the FFB , and click the desired location in the FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The FFB is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed.

Calling an FFB via the data selection

Set data selection to active
You have the following options to activate the data exchange:
• Use the Edit > Data Selection... menu command.

666 33003101.26
FBD Editor

• Use the menu commandData selection...from the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
NOTE: When executing the commands no object can be selected in the section.

The active FFB placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the corresponding
input assistant is automatically opened when an FFB is placed. The procedures explained
here are used when the checkbox is cleared.

Selecting an FFB type via the Data Selection

Process the following steps to select an FFB type via the Data selection:

Step Action

1 From the Data selection....from the shortcut menu (right-click) for the Data selection, page
666section.

Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

2 You have the following options to enter the FFB type:

• You can now enter the FFB type and confirm using Enteror the button.
In this case, continue with step 7 of the procedure.
• You can select the name from the list of recently used names using the FFB type symbol
and confirm using Enteror the button .
In this case, continue with step 7 of the procedure.
• You can delete your entry by pressing Escor clicking the button.
• Using the button ...you can open the dialog box for FFB selection, page 1179.

33003101.26 667
 FBD Editor

Step Action

Example of a FFB type selection, page 1181 dialog box:

3 Select the Function Types, Function Block Types tab.

Result:

The tab used for selecting an FFB type is opened.

4 Select the library and family from the Libraries/Families column which contains the desired
function block.

668 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

Tip: If you do not know where to find the FFB you are looking for select the Libset, entry to see a
list of all the FFBs available independently of their libraries.

5 Select the desired function block from the Name column.

Example:

6 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and FFB placement mode is activated.

7 To place the FFB , and click the desired location in the FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: For the selected FFB type, an instance name is automatically generated (only valid for
function blocks), the FFB is inserted and placement mode remains active so that further FFBs
can be inserted. To end insert mode press Esc.

Note: The automatically generated instance names can be changed to improve clarity, see also
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family of function blocks (EF), page 376.

Selecting a block instance

Process the following steps to select a block instance that has already been declared:

33003101.26 669
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Activate FFB placement mode.

Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

2 Press the button ..., to open the FFB selection dialog, page 1179.

3 Select the Function Blocks tab (if it is not already active).

Result:

The tab used for selecting a block instance is opened and the desired selection of block
instances, page 1180 is displayed.

4 Select the desired block instance from the Name column.

5 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and FFB placement mode is activated.

6 Click the target position in the FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected block instance is inserted and the placement mode remains active so that
more block instances can be inserted. To end insert mode press Esc.

670 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Assign actual parameters

Introduction
Inputs and outputs are required to transfer values to or from an FFB. These are called
formal parameters.
Objects are linked to formal parameters; these objects contain the current process states.
They are called actual parameters.
The data type of the actual parameter must match the data type of the input/output (formal
parameter). The only exceptions are generic inputs/outputs whose data type is determined
by the actual parameter. If all actual parameters consist of literals, a suitable data type is
selected for the function block.
Formal and Actual Parameters:

Permitted actual parameters are:

• Variables
◦ Enter already declared variables, page 672
◦ Enter undeclared variables, page 674
• Formal parameters of other function blocks, page 676
• Literals, page 678
• ST Expression, page 679
ST expressions as formal parameters on FBB inputs are an extension of IEC 61131-3
and must be explicitly enabled via the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the
Language extensions tab by selecting the Usage of ST expressions checkbox.
• Links, page 715 to other FBD objects

33003101.26 671
 FBD Editor

NOTE: Please take note of the section Information about Programming (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.
You can make actual parameter assignments for
• each pin individually
or
• with the function input assistant, page 681 for all pins

Assign declared variables to a pin

Process the following steps to assign undeclared variables to a pin. (See also Creation of
EDT instances, page 386.)

672 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Open a data selection box for the desired FFB pin by:
• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection... menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

2 You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enteror the button.
• You can select the variable names from the list of recently used names using the symbol
and confirm using Enteror the button.
• You can delete your entry by pressing Escor clicking the button.
• Using the button ... open an Instance selection dialog box and confirm the selected variables
there with OK.
Example of a instance selection dialog box:

Result: The selected variable is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is
performed.

33003101.26 673
 FBD Editor

Step Action

Example:

Assign undeclared variables to a pin

Process the following steps to assign undeclared variables to a pin:

Step Action

1 Open a data selection box for the desired FFB pin by:
• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection... menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 opens.

2
Enter the variable name and confirm using Enteror the symbol.

Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

3 Change the default data type, if desired.

Note: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog box using the symbol. In this
case, the variable name is enabled on the pin, but not declared.

674 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

4
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

5
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled on the selected pin.

6 Enter all actual parameters in this way.

Declaring variables on a pin

Process the following steps to declare variables on a pin:

Step Action

1 Open the variable declaration dialog box for the desired variable by.
• Select an undeclared variable (red wavy line under the variable name) and the Create
Variable command from the shortcut menu.
• Select an undeclared variable (red wavy line under the variable name) and the Shift+Enter
key combination.
Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

2
If you do not want to assign an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

33003101.26 675
 FBD Editor

Step Action

3
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

4
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

Assigning formal parameters to a pin

Process the following steps to assign formal parameters to a pin:

Step Action

1 Select the desired FFB pin.

2 Open a data selection box by:

• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

676 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

3 You have the following options to enter the formal parameter:

• You can enter the formal parameter name and confirm using Enter or the button.
• You can select the formal parameter name from the list of recently used names using the
symbol and confirm using Enteror the button.
• You can delete your entry by pressing Escor clicking the button.
• Using the button ... to open an Instance selection dialog box.

4 Select the Function Block tab.

Result:

The function block instances are displayed.

5 Expand the display of the inputs, outputs and public variables by clicking their + symbols.

Result:

33003101.26 677
 FBD Editor

Step Action

You can now see all available inputs, outputs and public variables of the function block.

6 Select the desired formal parameter and confirm with OK.

7 Result: The formal parameter selected is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is
performed.

Example:

Assigning literals to a pin

Process the following steps to assign literals to a pin:

678 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the desired FFB pin.

2 Open a data selection box by:

• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

3 Enter the literal (e.g. 0, 1, TRUE, FALSE, 1.0, 3.5, t#2ms) and confirm using the Enterbutton.

Tips:When in the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, on the Language extensions tab, the
Allow leading digits checkbox is cleared, the following simplifications for entering literals are
possible:
• When assigning TIME literals to a pin of the TIME data type, it suffices to enter the numerical
value and the unit (such as h, m, s). The prefix (t#) is automatically added.
• When assigning REAL literals to a pin of the REAL data type, for integers it suffices to enter
the numerical value. The decimal marker (t#) is automatically added.
Result: The literal is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is performed.

Example:

Assigning ST expressions to a pin

Process the following steps to assign ST expressions to a pin:

33003101.26 679
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Make sure that the Usage of ST expressions checkbox is activated in the Tools > Project
Settings dialog box.

2 Select the desired FFB pin.

3 Open a data selection box by:

• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

4 Enter the ST expression (e.g. MUX(1,var1,var2), VarA * VarB, VarA < VarB) and confirm
pressing Enter.

Result: The ST expression selected is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is
performed.

Example:

If the variables have already been declared (see also Creation of EDT instances, page 386), the
procedure ends here.

If the variables have not yet been declared, continue with step 5.

5 Declare all variables used, either:

• using the data editor, page 386
or
• using Create variable in the context menu (possible when only one variable of the ST
statement is undeclared).

680 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Actual parameter assignment using the function input assistant

Process the following steps to change actual parameter assignment with the function input
assistant:

Step Action

1 Select the desired FFB.

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192:
• The Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command.
• The FFB Input Assistant... menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• The Ctrl+I key combination.
Result:

The function input assistant will be opened.

33003101.26 681
 FBD Editor

Step Action

3 Double click the Entry Field cell of the first formal parameter and enter the actual parameter to be
used.

You have the following options to enter the variables/addresses:

• You can enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the buton ... to open an Instance selection dialog box.
Assign an actual parameter to all formal parameters of the function block in this way.

Example:

4 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The actual parameter is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is
performed.

Example:

682 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Using Public Variables

Introduction
In addition to inputs/outputs, some function blocks also provide public variables.
These variables transfer statistical values (values that are not influenced by the process) to
the function block. They are used for setting parameters for the function block.
The assignment of values to public variables is made via their initial values.
Public variables are read via the instance name of the function block and the names of the
public variables.

Assigning Values to Public Variables

Carry out the following steps to assign a value to a public variable:

Step Action

1 Place a function block in the section, see also Calling an FFB via the data selection, page 666.

2 Open the data editor, see also Data Editor Access, page 345.

3 Select the Function Block tab.

Result:

The function block instances are displayed.

33003101.26 683
 FBD Editor

Step Action

4 Expand the display of the public variables by clicking the respective + symbols.

Result:

You can now see all available public variables of the function block.

5 Enter the desired value for the public variable in the Value box.

Reading public variables

See Assigning formal parameters to a pin, page 676

Expanding Functions
Introduction
The number of inputs can be increased with some elementary functions.
You find out which functions can be expanded by referring to the descriptions for the
individual functions.
NOTE: Only expand the function by the number of inputs actually required as non-
occupied inputs are assigned a 0 as standard.

684 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Expanding a function
Carry out the following steps to expanding a function:

Step Action

1 Select the function.

2 Position the mouse pointer on the bottom point to be expanded.

3 Press the left mouse button and drag the function to the required size.

Example:

4 Release the mouse key.

Result: The desired number of inputs/outputs have been added.

Example:

Negating FFB Pins

Introduction
FFB pins (inputs and outputs) of the data type BOOL can be negated.

33003101.26 685
 FBD Editor

Negated pins are identified with a circle symbol:

NOTE: Negated pins must be connected with a graphical link or a variable. Open
negated pins are not allowed.

Negating an FFB pin

FFB pins can be negated in the following ways:
• Select the pin to be negated and execute the menu command Negate Pin in the
shortcut menu (right-click).
or
• Launch the Inversion tool using
◦ the menu command New > Inversion Tool,
◦ the menu command Inversion Tool in the shortcut menu (right-click)
or
◦ the icon
and click on the pin to be negated.

EN and ENO Show and Hide

Introduction
With all FFBs, one EN input and one ENO output can be configured, see also EN and ENO
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
in the Reference manual.

EN and ENO show or hide

To show or hide EN and ENO, carry out the following steps:

686 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the FFB.

2 Open the properties dialog box, page 658 for the FFB.

3 Check the FFB Properties check box Show EN/ENO to show EN/ENO, or uncheck it to hide EN/
ENO.

Note: If EN or ENO is occupied by an actual parameter or connected with a link, EN/ENO cannot be
hidden.

Modifying the execution order

Introduction
The execution order is determined by the position of the FFBs in the section (executed from
left to right and from top to bottom) and is displayed with execution numbers. If the FFBs are
connected to a network using graphical links, the execution order is determined by the
signal flow, see also section Execution order (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
You can already influence the execution order when creating the program.
• The use of links in place of actual parameters (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
• The position of networks (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual)
In some cases it might be necessary to explicitly modify the execution order.
By using Execute After in an FFB properties dialog the execution order of two FFBs can be
defined.
FFBs whose execution order has been explicitly modified receive the instance name /
function number of the previously executed FFB as an additional entry in front of the
execution number.

Modifying the execution order

In the example, the execution order of FFB 1.4 and FFB 1.5 has to be switched. Process the
following steps to modify the execution order using an FFB properties dialog box.

33003101.26 687
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the FFB to be executed second.

Example:

2 Open the properties dialog box, page 658 for the FFB.

3 In the Execute After list box, select the function number / instance name of the FFB to be
executed before the selected FFB.

Example:

Result:The execution sequence of both FFBs are exchanged. To indicate that the execution
order was changed, the execution number is shown in a black field.

Example:

688 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

Note:Only one reference of an instance is allowed, e.g. the instance ".6" may only be referenced
once.

Notes
When using Execute after please note the following:
• If an FFB that is referenced by another FFB is deleted, the execution order attribute of
the referencing FFB is reset.
Example:
1. FBI_1 has an "Execute After" reference to FBI_2.

2. FBI_2 is deleted.

3. For FBI_1 the attribute for determining the execution sequence is deleted.

33003101.26 689
 FBD Editor

• If an FFB deletion operation carried out on a referenced FFB is undone usingUndo it is

reset to its former state.
Example:
1. FBI_1 has an "Execute After" reference to FBI_2.

2. FBI_2 is deleted.

3. For FBI_1 the attribute for determining the execution sequence is deleted.

4. Execute from Edit > Undo.

5. FBI_2 is inserted again and FBI_1 and FBI_2 has an "Execute After" reference.

690 33003101.26
FBD Editor

• If an FFB that has an "Execute After" reference pointing to another FFB is copied, the
attribute which defines the execution order attribute of the FFB is reset during insertion.
Example:
1. FBI_1 has an "Execute After" reference to FBI_2.

2. FBI_1 is copied and the copy (FBI_3) inserted in the section.

3. For FBI_3 the attribute for determining the execution sequence is deleted.

Replacing an FFB
Access
This is only available in FBD sections.
You have the following options to access the Replace FFB feature:
• Select the Edit > Replace FFB menu command.
• Select the Replace FFB command in the context menu (right-click on one or more
FFBs in the section).

Replace FFB
Selecting the Replace FFB feature opens the FBD-Editor: FFB Type Selection dialog box.

33003101.26 691
 FBD Editor

For more information about this dialog box see FFB Selection Dialog box, page 1179.
Select the desired type and confirm with OK. The FFBs selected in the FBD section are
replaced with the new type.
Links and variables connected will be retained if possible (if a pin on the same position of the
new type exists).

Type Changing
There are different cases of type changing:

Type Changing Description

EF -> EF changes the type for the existing EF only

EF -> FB creates a new instance of the FB type

FB -> EF creates the new EF template,

does not delete the old FB instance in the Data Editor (even if it is the only
instance)

FB -> FB creates the new FB instance,

does not delete the old FB instance in the Data Editor (even if it is the only
instance)

692 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Undo/Redo
Replace FFB supports Undo/Redo, which means that the original state will be recreated on
Undo (of course without deleting the new FFBs from Data Editor) and the state after
replacement on Redo.

Online Mode
Replace FFB is supported in online mode.

Properties dialog box for elementary functions,

procedures and sub-routine blocks.
Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 658

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• FFB Properties
General information about functions/procedures/sub-routine calls is displayed in this tab
and you can change their order of execution.
• Comment
You can enter a comment about the functions/procedures/sub-routine calls in this tab.

33003101.26 693
 FBD Editor

FFB Properties tab

Representation of the FFB Properties tab:

Elements of the FFB Properties tab:

Element Description

Function number Specifies the name of the function number and the current execution order. This
name cannot be modified.
Execute After You can define the FFB execution order in this list. Select the FFB from this list after
which the current FFB should be executed, see also Modifying the execution order,
page 687.

Show EN/ENO When you activate this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are displayed.

When you uncheck this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are no longer displayed.

Note: If EN or ENO is occupied by an actual parameter or connected with a link, the

pins EN/ENO cannot be hidden.

Input Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the
inputs.

If the input is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears(not linked).

Output Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the
outputs.

If the output is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears(not linked).

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

694 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of theComment:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the FFB.

This comment is displayed in the tooltip when the cursor is placed over the function/
procedure.

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Properties dialog box for elementary and derived

function blocks (FBs)
Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 658

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:

33003101.26 695
 FBD Editor

• FFB Properties
General information about FBs is displayed in this tab and you can change their
execution order.
• Comment
A comment about the FB can be entered in this tab.

FFB Properties tab

Representation of the FFB Properties tab:

Elements of the FFB Properties tab:

Element Description

Instance Name Specifies the name of the block instance. You can change this name in the data
editor, see also Managing of instances of data belonging to the family of function
blocks (EF), page 376.

Execute After You can define the FFB execution order in this list. Select the FFB from this list after
which the current FFB should be executed, see also Modifying the execution order,
page 687.

Show EN/ENO When you activate this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are displayed.

When you uncheck this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are no longer displayed.

Note: If EN or ENO is occupied by an actual parameter or connected with a link, the

pins EN/ENO cannot be hidden.

Input Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the FB
inputs.

696 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Element Description

If the input is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears(not linked).

Output Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the FB
outputs.

If the output is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears(not linked).

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Comment tab
Representation of the tab Comment:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Version: Specifies version of the FB code.

Text box Enter a comment about the FB.

This comment is displayed in the tooltip when the cursor is placed over the FB.

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

33003101.26 697
 FBD Editor

Returning from a Subroutine or DFB

Overview
This section describes how to return from a subroutine or DFB to the FBD programming
language.

Returning from a Subroutine or DFB

Introduction
Every subroutine and every DFB (derived function block) is exited after being processed, i.e.
you return to the main program called.
If the subroutine/DFB is left prematurely, the return to the main program can be forced by the
return object.
If the status of the left link is 1, a return from the subroutine or DFB to the main program is
performed.
Return objects can only be used in subroutines or DFBs. They cannot be used in main
programs.
To generate a conditional return, a return object is linked to a Boolean FFB output.

Selecting the return object

You have the following options to select return objects:
• Use the Edit > New > Return menu command.
or
• Choose the symbol.

The active placement mode for return objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box, in the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
affect a variable on a new graphical object check box is activated, its properties dialog

698 33003101.26
FBD Editor

box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedure explained here is valid
for deactivated check boxes.

Executing a return
Process the following steps to execute a return:

Step Action

1 Create a subroutine, page 519 or a DFB, page 1249 in the FBD programming language.

2 Create the logic for the subroutine/DFB.

3 Create the logic for return.

Example:

4 Select the return object.

5 Click the target position in the FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result:The return object is inserted.

Example:

6 Create a connection between the return logic and return object using a graphical link, page 716.

Example:

33003101.26 699
 FBD Editor

Return object properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 658

Structure of the properties dialog box

Representation of the properties dialog box:

Elements of the properties dialog box:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the return object.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Calling a Subroutine
Overview
This section describes how to call a subroutine in the FBD programming language.

700 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Calling a subroutine
Introduction
In FBD, subroutines are called using a special subroutine block, see also section Subroutine
call (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the Reference manual.
The subroutine to be called must be located in the same task as the FBD section calling.
For an unconditional subroutine call, page 702, EN and ENO of the subroutine block are
hidden, page 686 or the input EN is assigned the value 1.
For a conditional subroutine call, page 703, EN and ENO of the subroutine block are shown,
page 686 and the input EN is linked with a Boolean FFB output.
For a parallel call of several subroutines, page 704, EN and ENO of the subroutine blocks are
shown, page 686 and the output ENO is connected to the EN input of the next subroutine
block.
Subroutine calls are expansions to IEC 61131-3 and must be explicitly enabled via the Tools
> Project Settings dialog box, in the Language extensions tab by activating the Allow
subroutines check box.

Activating the placement mode for subroutine blocks

You have the following options to activate the placement mode for subroutine blocks:
• Use the Edit > New > Subroutine menu command.
• Use the Subroutine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Select the symbol.

The active placement mode for subroutine blocks is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box, in the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
affect a variable on a new graphical object check box is activated, its properties dialog
box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedures explained here are
used when the check box is cleared.

33003101.26 701
 FBD Editor

Placing subroutine blocks:

Placing subroutine blocks:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for subroutine blocks, see also Activating the placement mode for
subroutine blocks, page 701.

2 Click the target cell in the FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected subroutine block is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

3 • Placing other subroutine blocks:

Click the target cell in the FBD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Unconditional subroutine call

Unconditional subroutine call:

Step Action

1 Place a subroutine block in the section, see also Placing subroutine blocks:, page 702.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the subroutine block.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

3 Double-click the EN input of the subroutine block.

Result: A data selection box is opened.

4 Enter 1 or TRUE for the unconditional subroutine call.

702 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

Example:

5 Double-click the SR_NAME input of the subroutine block.

Result: A selection dialog box for selecting the subroutine to be called is opened.

Example:

6 Enter the name of the subroutine, or click the symbol and select the subroutine to be called
from the list. Confirm the entry with Enter.

Result: The subroutine call is inserted into the section and a syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed.

Example:

If the subroutine has already been created (see also Create a Sub-Program Section (SR), page
519), the procedure ends here.

If the subroutine has not yet been created, continue with step 7.

7 Create the subroutine, see alsoCreate a Sub-Program Section (SR), page 519.

Conditional subroutine call

Conditional subroutine call:

33003101.26 703
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Execute the Unconditional subroutine call, page 702 procedure, but do not assign a value to the
EN input.

2 Create a Boolean logic for the subroutine call.

3 Connect the logic’s Boolean output to the EN input of the subroutine block.

Example:

Note: To execute the conditional subroutine call you can also allocate any Boolean variable to
the EN input.

Example:

Parallel call of several subroutines

Calling several subroutines:

Step Action

1 Execute the Unconditional subroutine call, page 702 procedure for all subroutines to be called in
parallel.

2 Connect the ENO outputs and the EN inputs of the subroutine block.

Example:

3 Possibly create a Boolean logic for the first subroutine block.

704 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Jumps within the Current Section

Overview
This section describes jumps within the current FBD section.

Jump within the current section

Introduction
Jump objects execute jumps to a jump target, page 710 within the current section.
When the status of the left link is 1, a jump is made to a label (in the current section).
To generate a conditional jump, a jump object is linked to a Boolean FFB output.
To generate an unconditional jump, the jump object is assigned the value 1 using the AND
function for example.

Selecting the jump object

You have the following options to select jump objects:
• Use the Edit > New > Jump menu command.
or
• Choose the symbol.

The active placement mode for jump objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box, in the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
affect a variable on a new graphical object check box is activated, its properties dialog
box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedure explained here is valid
for deactivated check boxes.

Executing a jump
Process the following steps to execute a jump:

33003101.26 705
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Create the logic for the jump.

Example: Logic for conditional jump:

Example: Logic for unconditional jump:

2 Select the jump object.

3 Click the target position in the FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result:The jump object is inserted.

Example: Logic for conditional jump:

Example: Logic for unconditional jump:

4 Create a link between the jump logic and jump object using a graphical link, page 716.

706 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

Example: Logic for conditional return:

Example: Logic for unconditional return:

5 To enter the jump target, open the properties dialog box, page 658 of the jump object.

Result: The properties dialog box for the jump object is opened, see also Jump object properties
dialog box, page 708.

33003101.26 707
 FBD Editor

Step Action

6 You have the following options to enter the jump target:

• You can now enter the name of the jump target and confirm using Enter.
or
• You can select the name of the jump target from the list of available jump targets using the
symbol and confirm using Enter.
Result: The jump target is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is performed.

Example of a conditional jump:

Example of an unconditional jump:

If the jump target has already been defined (see also Jump target, page 710), the procedure
ends here.

If the jump target has not yet been declared, continue with step 7.

7 Specify the jump target, see also Jump target, page 710.

Jump object properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 658

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:

708 33003101.26
FBD Editor

• General
You can enter the jump target of the jump, page 705 in this tab.
• Comment
A comment about the jump object can be entered in this tab.

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Jump Label Enter the jump target in this text box, see also Definitions of Jump Labels, page 710.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 709
 FBD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the jump object.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Definition of the Jump Target (Jump Labels)

Overview
This section describes how to define jump targets in the FBD programming language.

Definitions of Jump Labels

Introduction
Jump labels create a jump target for jumps, page 705 within the current section.
Jump labels are represented as text with a colon at the end.

710 33003101.26
FBD Editor

The text is limited to 32 characters and must be unique across the entire section. The text
must conform to general naming conventions.
Jump labels can only be placed between the first two grid points on the left edge of the
section.
NOTE: Jump labels may not "dissect" networks, i.e. an assumed line from the jump label
to the right edge of the section may not be crossed by any object. This also applies to
the connections.
To find a specific jump label use the Go to dialog box.

Selecting the jump label

You have the following options to select jump labels:
• Use the Edit > New > Jump Label menu command.
or
• Choose the symbol.

The active placement mode for jump labels is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box, in the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
affect a variable on a new graphical object checkbox is activated, its properties dialog
box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedure explained here is valid
for deactivated checkboxes.

Placing a jump label

Placing a jump label:

33003101.26 711
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the jump label.

2 Click with the mouse on the target position between the first two grid points on the left edge of the
FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target positions between the first two grid points on
the left edge of the FBD section, and press Enter.

Result: The jump label is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

Example:

3 To insert further jump objects:

• Click the target cell in the FBD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Definition of the Name

Definition of the Name:

Step Action

1 To enter the name, open the properties dialog box, page 658 for the jump label.

Result: The jump label properties dialog box is opened, see also Jump label objects properties
dialog box, page 713.

2 You have the following options to enter the name of the jump label:
• You can now enter the name and confirm using Enter.
or
• You can select the name of the jump from the list of available jumps using the symbol
and confirm using Enter.
Result: The name is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is performed.

Example:

712 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Jump label objects properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 658

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• General
You can enter the name of the jump label, page 711 in this tab.
• Comment
A comment about the jump label can be entered in this tab.

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

33003101.26 713
 FBD Editor

Element Description

Jump Label You can enter the name of the jump label in this list box.

The text is limited to 32 characters and must be unique across the entire section.
The text must conform to general naming conventions.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the jump label object.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

714 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Editing Links
Overview
Editing links in the FBD programming language.

Links
Introduction
Links are vertical and horizontal connections between FFBs.
Attention should be paid to the following programming information:
• Links can be used for every data type.
• The data types of the inputs/outputs to be linked must be the same.
• Several links can be connected with one FFB output. However, only one may have an
FFB output.
• Only inputs and outputs can be linked together. A link between several outputs cannot
be made. This means that OR links are not possible using links in FBD. An OR function
should always be used.
• An overlap of links with other objects is permitted.
• No loop can be configured with links because in this case the execution sequence in the
section cannot be clearly determined. Loops must be terminated with actual parameters
(see Terminating loops (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual)).
• To avoid links crossing each other, links can also be represented in the form of
connectors, page 619.
NOTE: A detailed description about Links (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) can be found in the Reference manual.

Selecting links
You have the following options to activate the placement mode:
• Use the Edit > New > Link menu command.
• Press the F6 key.
or

33003101.26 715
 FBD Editor

• Select the symbol.

The and cursor symbols indicate which mode is active.

Representation
The link points are identified by a filled-in circle.

Crossed links are indicated by a "broken" link.

Placing a Link
Placing a link using the mouse
Carry out the following steps to place a link using the mouse:

716 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for links, see also Links, page 715.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the start point of the link.

Note: The correct position is shown by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

33003101.26 717
 FBD Editor

Step Action

3 Click the left mouse button on the start point and drag mouse pointer to the target point of the link.

Example:

Tips:
• By clicking between the start point and target position you can place intermediate points; for
example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• You can leave this mode at any time by pressing Esc.

4 Click on the target position with the left mouse button.

Result: The link is inserted. When the cursor is placed over a link, the Quickinfo (Tooltip) shows the
source and destination of the link.

Example:

See also Editing Links, page 721

NOTE: You can also place a link using the mouse in select mode, page 716.

718 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Placing a link using the keyboard

Carry out the following steps to place a link using the keyboard:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for links by using:, see also Links, page 715.

2 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the link, and press Enter.

Note: The correct position is shown by the cursor symbol.

Example:

33003101.26 719
 FBD Editor

Step Action

3 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the target position of the link.

Example:

Tips:
• By pressing the Enter key between the start point and target position you can place intermediate
points; for example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• You can leave this mode at any time by pressing Esc.

4 Press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted. When the cursor is placed over a link, the Quickinfo (Tooltip) shows the
source and destination of the link.

Example:

See also Editing Links, page 721

720 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Placing a link using the mouse in select mode

Carry out the following steps to place a link using the mouse in select mode:

Step Action

1 Activate the select mode by using:

• the Edit > Select Mode
• the symbol,
or
• the Esc key

2 Place the mouse pointer on the start point of the link.

Note: The correct position is shown by the mouse pointer symbol.

Click the left mouse button change the mode from select mode to placement mode.

3 Keeping the left mouse button pressed on the start point, drag mouse pointer to the target point of the
link.

Example:

Result: The link is inserted.

Editing Links
Editing links
Links consist of one or more segments connected to one another.
When cutting, page 651, deleting, page 650, copying, page 651 and moving, page 654 links,
the action is executed for the entire link.

33003101.26 721
 FBD Editor

If a link is selected, the target points are displayed at their beginnings, ends and at every
direction change

Modifying connections
Modifying connections:

722 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link and place the mouse pointer on the connection to be modified.

Example:

2 Left-click the connection to be modified and drag the mouse pointer to the new connection.

Example:

3 Left-click the new target position.

Result: The link route is modified.

Example:

33003101.26 723
 FBD Editor

Step Action

Creating sizing handles

The creation of angles in links can only be made using sizing handles. If no sizing handles
are available they can be created. Process the following steps to create sizing handles in
links:

724 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link.

2 Press the Ctrl key and place the mouse pointer at the target position.

Note: The correct position is shown by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

3 Left-click the target position.

Result:

The sizing handle is created.

Moving links vertically/horizontally

Process the following procedures to move a link segment vertically or horizontally:

33003101.26 725
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the item to be moved.

Note: The correct position is shown by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

3 Click the left mouse button and drag the segment to the target position.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result:

The change is made.

Creating angles in FFB links

Process the following steps to create angles in links:

726 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link.

2 Place the mouse pointer on a source position.

Note: The correct position is shown by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

3 Click the left mouse button and drag the source point to the target position.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result:

The change is made.

Determining the optimum connection route

Determining the optimum link route:

33003101.26 727
 FBD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link.

Example:

2 Use the Edit > Link > Route menu command.

or

Use the Route menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The current link route is changed to the optimum route.

Example:

728 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Entering Comments
Overview
This section describes how to enter comments in the FBD programming language.

Entering comments
Introduction
Comments can be placed in FBD in the form of text objects.
Text objects can overlap other objects.
The size of the object, depending on the size of the text, can be extended vertically and
horizontally to fill additional grid units.
The same rules apply for entering text and navigating within text objects as for editing ASCII
text in standard text editors. (To create a line break in text objects you must press the Ctrl
+Enter key combination).
NOTE: Keep in mind that each change to a comment (e.g. change to a comment text,
change to the size of the text object) makes it necessary to recreate the section involved
(Generation > Generate project).

Displaying or hiding the comments

Use the button in the toolbar to show or hide the comments.

The background color of the button in blue indicates that the comments are hidden.

NOTE: To select or place text objects, check that the button in the toolbar is not
activated.

Selecting the text object

You have the following options to select text objects:
• Use the Edit > New > Comment menu command.
• Use the Comment menu command from the shortcut menu.

33003101.26 729
 FBD Editor

• Press the F8 key.

or

• Select the symbol.

The active placement mode for text objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Placing text objects:

Placing text objects:

Step Action

1 Select the text object.

2 Click the target position in the FBD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected text object is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

Example:

3 Enter the comment.

4 Confirm the text entered by:
• Clicking with the mouse outside of the text object
or
• Pressing the Enter key.

5 To insert additional text objects:

• Click the target position in the FBD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

730 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Online functions
Overview
This section describes the online functions of the FBD programming language.

Online functions
Online functions
The description of online functions is found in Debugging in Function Block Diagram (FBD)
Language, page 1422.

FBD Reference Data Type

Reference Data Type in FBD
Introduction
References to variables can be assigned in FBD application programs.
A reference can be de-referenced in FBD application programs.
For more information, refer to Reference Data Type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

33003101.26 731
 FBD Editor

FBD Examples using the Reference Data Type:

The EF, REF, takes a variable as an input parameter (type ANY) and provides its address as
output parameter (type REF_ANY).
The EF, MOVE, can assign a reference to a variable to another reference. If the input
parameter is (REF(MyVariable)), MOVE has the same effect as the REF EF.
The EF, TON, takes ptrToMyBool^ as an input parameter to dereference the reference
ptrToMyBool.

Export/Import
Overview
This section describes the Import/Export functions of the FBD programming language.

732 33003101.26
FBD Editor

Export/Import FBD Sections

Export/Import
The description for exporting/importing sections is found in the chapter Import / Export, page
1677.

Customize FBD Editor

Overview
This section describes how to customize the toolbar and colors of the FBD editor.

Customize FBD Editor Colors

Overview
To customize FBD editor colors, open the Tools > Colors Settings... dialog box.
The Color Settings dialog box allows to:
• Modify the color of the selected item in the list.
• Reset the colors with initial values.
• Import an *.ini file that defines the colors associated to the FBD editor.
• Export the definition colors associated to the FBD editor.

Color Setting File

Depending on the operating system of the PC, the color setting file FBDColors.ini is located
in one of the following folders:
• c:\Program Files\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
• c:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
For more detail on destination folder when Control Expert is installed, refer to the
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Installation Manual.
NOTE: Make a copy of this file before modifying it.

33003101.26 733
 FBD Editor

Description
This table describes the default color values for each parameter in the FBDColors.ini file:

Parameter Default value (R, Description

G, B)

BkAnimation 192,192,192 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in programming mode.

StatementError 255,0,0 Element in error is underlined with this color.

InspectBk 0,255,255 Inspect window background color

InspectText 0,0,0 Inspect window text color

InspectBkMin 255,255,0 Inspect window background color when the value is less than
the minimum value defined in the inspect window settings.

InspectBkMax 255,0,255 Inspect window background color when the value is greater
than the maximum value defined in the inspect window
settings.

BkAnimMonitoring 255,211,211 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in monitoring mode.

AnalyzeError 0,0,255 Drawing color when an element generates an analyze error.

GraphAnimBoolTrue 0,150,0 Color of true BOOL in animation mode.

GraphAnimBoolFalse 255,0,0 Color of false BOOL in animation mode.

BkComment 255,255,204 Background color of comment area

BkCommentEdit 225,225,225 Background color of comment area when you are editing it.

BkAnimNumeric 255,255,0 Background color of numeric variables

BlockBreakpoint 128,0,0 Bullet color in the element where the breakpoint is set.

BlockCurrentStep 255,255,0 Color of the current element in debug mode

AnchorLink 128,0,0 Color of anchor link

Background 255,255,255 Editor background color.

FBDFgExpression 0,0,0 Color for FBD text

FBDBgExpression 255,255,255 Background color for FBD text

734 33003101.26
FBD Editor

FBD Favorite Bar

Overview

In the current FBD editor toolbar, the button allows to manage the toolbar FBD
Favorite Bar which can contain a maximum of 20 EF, EFB or DFB for direct call.

Showing and Hiding the Toolbar

You have two options to show the toolbar FBD Favorite Bar (to open it):
• Right-click in the common toolbar and select the toolbar from the shortcut menu.
• Open the Tools > Customize dialog box and select the toolbar,
You have three options to hide the toolbar FBD Favorite Bar (to close it):
• Right-click in the common toolbar and deselect the toolbar from the shortcut menu,
• Open the Tools > Customize dialog box and deselect the toolbar,
• With the close symbol ( x ) if the toolbar is non-anchored in the current FBD editor
toolbar.

Managing the Toolbar

To manage the toolbar FBD Favorite Bar, opens the Add/Delete Favorite dialog box by

clicking the button.

The Add/Delete Favorite dialog box allows to:
• Add component via the FFB Type Selection dialog box.
• Delete component.
• Import an *.ini file that define the components for the FBD Favorite Bar.
• Export the components of the FBD Favorite Bar.
NOTE: The components of the toolbar FBD Favorite Bar are saved in the Favorite.
ini file.
For example with Control Expert 14.0, the Favorite.ini file is located in C:
\ProgramData\Schneider Electric\Control Expert\14.0\Favorite\
folder.

33003101.26 735
736 33003101.26
LD Editor

LD Editor
What’s in This Chapter
Creating a program with LD programming language ................. 737
Editing Contacts .................................................................... 767
Editing Coils .......................................................................... 775
Editing compare blocks .......................................................... 786
Editing operation blocks ......................................................... 792
Editing FFBs.......................................................................... 798
Returning from a Subroutine or DFB........................................ 832
Jumps within the Current Section ............................................ 835
Definition of the Jump Target (Jump Labels)............................. 840
Editing Links.......................................................................... 845
Entering Comments ............................................................... 872
Online functions..................................................................... 874
LD Reference Data Type ........................................................ 874
Export/Import......................................................................... 875
Customize LD Editor .............................................................. 876

Overview
This chapter describes the menus and dialog boxes of the LD editor.
For a description of the syntax for the LD programming language, please refer to Ladder
Diagram LD (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

Creating a program with LD programming

language
Overview
This section describes the basics for creating a program in the LD programming language.

33003101.26 737
 LD Editor

Structure of an LD program (ladder diagram)

Introduction
The structure of an LD program corresponds to a rung for relay switching.
The left power rail is located on the left side of the LD editor. This left power rail corresponds
to the phase (L conductor) of a rung. With LD programming, in the same way as in a rung,
only the LD objects which are linked to a power supply, that is to say connected with the left
power rail, are "processed". The right power rail corresponds to the neutral conductor.
All contacts and FFB inputs must be directly or indirectly connected with the left power rail
and all coils and FFB outputs must be directly or indirectly connected with the right power
rail to allow current flow.
A group of connected objects that are not connected to other objects (except for the power
rails), is called a network or rung.

Properties of an LD program
Properties of an LD program:
• An LD section contains 11-63 columns and 17-3998 lines.
The default number of columns for a new section is set via the Tools > Project
Settings dialog box, in the Editors tab in the Number of columns text box.
The number of columns can be increased, page 766 or reduced, page 767 during the
creation of section contents.
The number of lines can be increased, page 765 or reduced, page 765 during the
creation of section contents.
• The width of the cells can be managed, page 767 from one to three standard cell
widths.
• LD programs are cell oriented, i.e. only one object can be placed in each cell.
• The processing sequence of the individual objects in an LD program is determined by
the data flow within the section. Networks connected to the left power rail are processed
from top to bottom (connection to the left power rail). Separate networks within the
section are processed in the order in which they are placed (top to bottom). Refer also
to section Execution order and signal flow (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)).
• A syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered. The result of this check is displayed in colored text and objects.
• Syntactically or semantically incorrect sections can be saved.

738 33003101.26
LD Editor

LD program objects
The objects of the LD programming language help to divide a section into a number of:
• Contacts, page 767,
• Coils, page 775,
• EFs and EFBs, page 798 (Elementary Functions and Elementary Function Blocks),
• DFBs, page 798 (derived function blocks)
• Procedures, page 798
• operate blocks, page 792,
• compare blocks, page 786,
• jumps, page 835 within the section and
• subroutine calls, page 782
These objects can be linked with each other through:
• Links, page 845 or
• actual parameters, page 809 (only FFBs).
Comments for the logic of the program can be added using text objects, page 872.

Edit and view functions

Edit and view functions of the LD editor:
• Selecting objects, page 752
• Deleting objects, page 755
• Cutting, page 755, copying, page 755 and pasting, page 756 objects
• Moving, page 758 objects (also between different LD/FBD sections)
• Replacing objects
• Undo, page 618 and Redo, page 619
• Using bookmarks, page 607
• Searching and replacing, page 1232 variables and function blocks and DFB instances

Input assistants
Input assistants for the LD editor:
• Mnemonics, page 761 for contacts, coils, blocks, links and jumps
• Function input assistants, page 820 for functions, function blocks and procedures

33003101.26 739
 LD Editor

Online functions
Online functions of the LD editor:
• Display the current value, page 624.
• Setting breakpoints, page 1405
• Setting watchpoints, page 1411
• Step by Step, page 1408

Creating an LD program
Introduction
The LD editor window is made up of cells and 1 object can be placed in each one. The cells
are separated visually using a grid, page 613 which can be switched off.
When creating a program with the keyboard, the selected (active) cell has a gray
background, see also Programming with the keyboard, page 742.
When creating a program with the mouse, this gray field is not relevant.

Creating an LD program with the mouse

Process the following steps to create an LD program with the mouse:

Step Action

1 Create an LD section., page 499

2 Select the desired object (see also Pasting objects, page 845) using:
• the menu commands in the Objects > <Object> menu
or
• the menu commands in the Edit > New > <Object> menu
or
• the symbols for the objects in the toolbar
Result: The mouse pointer indicates the selected object (placement mode).

Note: As soon as the text is entered several checks are made, such as syntax/semantic error
checks, correct spelling of variable names etc. A detailed description of syntax is found in chapter
Ladder Diagram (LD) (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The results of the checks are indicated by a colored folder, see also Syntax and semantics check
during programming, page 744.

740 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

3 Click the target cells in the LD section.

Result: The selected object is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

Example:

Note: If you want to insert several objects of the same type, press and hold the Ctrl key and insert
any number of selected objects by clicking with the left mouse button. Return to selection mode by
clicking the symbol or pressing the Esc key.

4 To enter the respective actual parameters (variable/address), double-click the object.

Result: The properties dialog box for the object is opened.

Example:

33003101.26 741
 LD Editor

Step Action

5 Enter the desired actual parameter and a comment (if required) and confirm the entries with OK.

Result: In entry mode, the names of the associated variables are displayed above the object. In
mixed display mode, the addresses and comments are displayed in addition to the names of the
variables (if available), see also Mixed display mode, page 745.

Example (entry mode):

Example (mixed display mode):

6 Repeat these steps until all objects are entered.

Creating an LD program with the keyboard

Process the following steps to create an LD program with the keyboard:

Step Action

1 Create an LD section., page 499

2 Place the field with the gray background on the cell where the object should be inserted, see also
Navigating with the keyboard, page 750.

3 Select the desired object (see also Pasting objects, page 845) using the function keys for the
objects.

Result: The cursor symbol indicates the selected object.

Note: As soon as the text is entered several checks are made, such as syntax/semantic error
checks, correct spelling of variable names etc. A detailed description of syntax is found in chapter
Ladder Diagram (LD) (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The results of the checks are indicated by a color folder, see also Representation, page 744.

4 Confirm the selection using the Enter key.

Result: The selected object is inserted into the cell with the gray background and the gray field is
automatically shifted to the next cell.

742 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Example:

Note: If you want to insert several objects of the same type, press and hold the Ctrl key and insert
any number of selected objects with the Enter key. To return to selection mode, press the Esc key.

5 Press the Enter key to open a shortcut menu for the selected object.

6 To enter the respective actual parameters (variable/address), use the Properties menu command
from the shortcut menu.

Result: The properties dialog box for the object is opened.

Example:

7 Enter the desired actual parameter and a comment (if required) and confirm the entries with OK.

Result: In entry mode, the names of the associated variables are displayed above the object. In
mixed display mode, the addresses and comments are displayed in addition to the names of the
variables (if available), see also Mixed display mode, page 745.

Example (entry mode):

Example (mixed display mode):

8 Repeat these steps until all objects are entered.

33003101.26 743
 LD Editor

Syntax and Semantics Check during programming

Introduction
Syntax and semantics check is performed directly when creating the program.
The result of this check is displayed in three formats:
• directly in the program section with colored text
• as tooltip if the cursor is placed on incorrect text.
• In the output window, if Generate > Analyze is selected.

Representation
Meaning of colors and labels:

Color Description Example

Black Syntax and semantics are correct

Blue Possible causes:

• Associated variable is not declared
• Data type of the variable does not match
the data type of the pin
• Input or output pin not connected

Red wavy Faulty text, e.g. variables which are not

line declared, variables with an incorrect data type,
...

744 33003101.26
LD Editor

Tooltips
If the cursor is placed over incorrect text, the tooltip is displayed with a brief description of
the cause of the error. It will also be displayed in the output window after the analysis.

Error message in the output window

Error message: Accessed object is not a function block.

Cause of error Error Correction

Name of the function block was already used for a Rename the already used variable.
variable.

View for variables

Display modes for variables
The following view modes are available for variables:
• Input mode, page 746
• Mixed display mode, page 747
You can switch between the two modes using:
• The View > Mixed Display Mode menu command
• The Ctrl+E key combination.
A check-symbol displayed on the left of the View > Mixed Display Mode item indicates
when the mixed display mode, page 747 is enabled.

Variables display
Depending on the size set for the cells, it may be the case that variable names are not
shown in full.
A maximum of 3 columns are available to display the variables. The space available
depends on various factors, on both Input mode, page 746 & Mixed display mode, page 747

33003101.26 745
 LD Editor

• On the position
◦ If an element (e.g. a contact) was placed directly on the left power rail, columns 1-3
are available for the variable names.
◦ If an element (e.g. a coil) was placed directly on the right hand power rail, columns
9-11 are available for the variable names.
◦ If an element (e.g. a contact) was placed arbitrarily in the section, the column to the
right and the column to the left of the element are available for the variable name.
• On the availability of the cells:
◦ Only cells that are not occupied by other objects are available to display the variable
name.
◦ If an unused cell is between two objects, it is automatically reserved for the variable
name of the left hand object and is not available to the right hand object (even if it is
not used by the left hand object).
The gray fields indicate which area is available for the variable names of the individual
objects.

Tip: There are two options for displaying the full variable names:
• Select the variable and the full variable name is shown in the status line.
• Place the cursor on the variable and a Tooltip will appear with type, name, address and
comment of the variable.

Input mode
In input mode, only the symbolic name is displayed for variables and only the address for
direct addresses:

746 33003101.26
LD Editor

• if you enter a symbol you will see in this mode a symbol even if you associate an
address after in the data editor.
• if you enter a direct address you will see in this mode a direct address even if you
associate a symbol after in the data editor.
Example of a section in input mode:

Mixed display mode

In the mixed display mode, the comment, symbolic name and, if a unique association is
possible, the address will be displayed for the variables.
Example of a section in Mixed Display Mode:

This functionality is available for variables for both LD objects (contact, coil, comparative
module, operation module) and FFBs.
NOTE: When using structure elements, the entire comment (comment for root variables
and comment(s) for the structure element(s)) or only the comment for the root variable
may be displayed. To display the entire comment, select Tools > Project Settings >
Program > Common and enable Display complete comments for structure
element.
NOTE: To print one or several sections the option mixed display must be check in
Documentation configuration of project.

33003101.26 747
 LD Editor

For example, the following displays are possible:

Display Description

The located variable VarA with the comment VariableA has the
address %I3.1.2.

For this type of display the following requirements apply:

• The display of comments is enabled.
• The variable is a located variable.
• A comment was defined for the variable.
• An address is only associated with one symbolic name
or
the symbolic name was assigned to the actual parameter.

The structure element Start of the variable Motor is assigned to the

address %I3.1.2 assigned. The displayed comment consists of the
comments for the root variable (Motor) and the comment(s) for the
structure elements (Start).

For this type of display the following requirements apply:

• In Tools > Project Settings > Program > Common the option
Display complete comments for structure elements is
enabled.
• The variable is a located variable.
• A comment was defined for the variable.
• An address is only associated with one symbolic name
or
the symbolic name was assigned to the actual parameter.

The element Start of the variable Motor is assigned to the address %

I3.1.2 assigned. The displayed comment is the comment for the root
variable (Motor).

For this type of display the following requirements apply:

• In Tools > Project Settings > Program > Common the option
Display complete comments for structure elements is
disabled.
• The variable is a located variable.
• A comment was defined for the variable.
• An address is only associated with one symbolic name
or
the symbolic name was assigned to the actual parameter.

The located variable VarA has the address %I3.1.2and no comment

was defined for the variable.

For this type of display the following requirements apply:

• The variable is a located variable.

748 33003101.26
LD Editor

Display Description

• An address is only associated with one symbolic name

or
the symbolic name was assigned to the actual parameter.

The variable VarA is an unlocated variable.

An address with multiple assigned symbolic names was assigned to

the object as an actual parameter. Since in this case, a unique
assignment of symbolic name to address is not possible, no symbolic
name is displayed.

The address was a assigned a comment, but no symbolic name.

Syntax error. The expression entered is not correct. For this reason no
addresses or symbols can be displayed.

or

NOTE: The Comments line height to display additional information can be specified
under Tools > Project Settings > Program > Languages > LD > Mixed display.
The column width can be adjusted, page 767.

Adjusting variables font size

You can increase or decrease the size of the font for the variables using the following

buttons on the toolbar .

NOTE: The text inside the blocks and the instance name cannot be changed.

33003101.26 749
 LD Editor

Navigating with the Keyboard

Using the keyboard
The following keys and key combinations are provided for navigation:

Key combinations Motion

Cursor left Moves the gray field in a cell to the left by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell.

If the first line is reached, the previous line is automatically selected.

Cursor right Moves the gray field in a cell to the right by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell.

If the last line is reached, the next line is automatically selected.

Cursor up Moves the gray field in a cell to the up by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell
Cursor down Moves the gray field in a cell to the down by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell
Ctrl+Left arrow Moves the cursor 1 pixel left and moves the gray field to the cursor
position

Ctrl+Right arrow Moves the cursor 1 pixel right and moves the gray field to the cursor
position

Ctrl+Up arrow Moves the cursor 1 pixel up and moves the gray field to the cursor
position

Ctrl+Down arrow Moves the cursor 1 pixel down and moves the gray field to the cursor
position

Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow Moves the cursor one cell left

Ctrl+Shift+Right arrow Moves the cursor one cell right

Ctrl+Shift+Up arrow Moves the cursor one cell up

Ctrl+Shift+Down arrow Moves the cursor one cell down

Shift+Left arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field to the left by one cell

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

Shift+Right arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field to the right by one cell.

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

Shift+Up arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field up by one cell.

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

750 33003101.26
LD Editor

Key combinations Motion

Shift+Down arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field down one cell.

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

Home Positions the gray field in the first column and shows this new
location.
End Positions the gray field in the last column and shows this new location.

Ctrl+Home Positions the gray field in the upper left hand cell in this section and
shows this new location.
Ctrl+End Positions the gray field in the upper right hand cell in this section and
shows this new location.
Page Up Scrolls the position of the gray field one page up and shows this new
position.

Page Down Scrolls the position of the gray field one page down and shows this
new position.

Ctrl+Page Up Scrolls the position of the gray field one page left and shows this new
position.

Ctrl+Page Down Scrolls the position of the gray field one page right and shows this new
position.

Ctrl+Alt+Page Up Displays the previous section (including via the View > Previous
Sectionmenu).

Ctrl+Alt+Page Down Displays the next section (including via the View > Next
Sectionmenu).

Spacebar Selects or deselects the object in the cells highlighted in gray.

If several objects are in the gray highlighted field, the next object in the
cell is selected every time you press the space bar.

The position of the gray field is not affected by this function.

See also Selecting objects, page 752.

Ctrl + space bar If several objects are in the gray highlighted cells, every time you
press the shortcut key combination Ctrl+space bar the next object is
inserted in the currently selected cells (multiple selection).

The position of the gray field is not affected by this function.

Shift + space bar The position of the gray field is moved one cell to the right and all
objects in the currently selected cells highlighted in gray (multiple
selections) are inserted.

Enter In Select mode: Opens the properties dialog box for the selected
contact / coils. When you are finished press Enter to cancel press
Esc.

33003101.26 751
 LD Editor

Key combinations Motion

In Insert mode: Inserts the selected object into the currently selected
cells highlighted in gray and moves the position of the gray field one
cell to the right.

Alt+Enter Opens the properties dialog box for the selected object/pin.

Tab Select the next pin in an FFB if the FFB or an FFB pin is selected.

Esc Activates Select mode.

Selecting objects
Select and placement mode
Objects are selected in select mode.
Select mode can be activated using:
• the Objects > Select Mode menu command
• the Edit > Select Mode menu command
• the symbol,
or
• the Esc key

The cursor symbol indicates that select mode is active

Selecting an object
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Left-click the object you want to select. Move the gray field to the cell with the object to be
selected, see also Navigating with the keyboard, page
750.

Note: If several objects are in the gray highlighted

field, the next object in the cell is selected every time
you press the spacebar.

752 33003101.26
LD Editor

Selecting several objects

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed. Selecting several objects in different cells:

2. Drag the mouse across the objects you want to 1. Move the gray field to the cell with the first object
to be selected, see also Navigating with the
select.
keyboard, page 750.
or
2. Press the Shift+spacebar key combination.
1. Left-click the first object you want to
select. Result: The object is added to the current
selection and the gray field is shifted one cell to
2. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed. the right.
3. Left-click the next object you want to 3. Repeat these steps until all desired objects are
select. selected.
4. Repeat these steps until all desired Selecting several objects in one cell:
objects are selected.
1. Move the gray field to the cell with the
objects to be selected, see also
Navigating with the keyboard, page 750.
2. Press the spacebar until the first
desired object is selected.
3. Press the Ctrl+spacebar key
combination to select the next object in
the cell.
4. Repeat these steps until all desired
objects are selected.

Selecting by rows
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Selecting the contents of a row: -

1. Left-click the number of the row you want to
select in the vertical ruler.
Selecting the contents of several lines:
1. Left-click the number of the first line you
want to select in the vertical ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last line you
want to select in the vertical ruler.
Note: Pressing the Shift key makes it possible to
combine this procedure with the procedure for
selecting columns.

33003101.26 753
 LD Editor

Selecting by columns
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Selecting the contents of a column: -

1. Left-click the number of the column you want to
select in the vertical ruler.
Selecting the contents of several columns:
1. Left-click the number of the first column
you want to select in the vertical ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last column
you want to select in the vertical ruler.
Note: Pressing the Shift key makes it possible to
combine this procedure with the procedure for
selecting lines.

Selecting all (entire contents of the section)

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Use the Edit > Select All menu command. Press the Ctrl+A key combination.

Selecting all objects

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Left-click an empty space in the section. 1. Move the gray field to an empty space, see also
Navigating with the keyboard, page 750.
2. Press the spacebar.

Deselecting objects
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Left-click an empty space in the section. Move the gray field or press the space bar.

754 33003101.26
LD Editor

Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting, duplicating, and

moving objects
Deleting objects
Deleting objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Deleting the selected object:

1. Select, page 752 the object to be deleted.
1. Select, page 752 the object to be deleted.
2. Use the Edit > Delete menu command.
2. Press the Delete key.
Deleting the object left of the gray field:
1. Press the Backspace key.

Result: The selected object is deleted. The actual parameters (and the links for FFBs) are deleted together with
the object, even if they were not selected explicitly. Boolean links are only deleted if they are selected explicitly.

Cutting objects
Cutting objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 752 the object to be cut. 1. Select, page 752 the object to be cut.

2. Use the Edit > Cut menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+X key combination.

or
Use the menu command Cut in the shortcut
menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

Result: The selected object is cut from the section and copied to the clipboard. This is also the case for the
actual parameters. FFB links are also cut. But they are only copied to the clipboard if they (and their partner
objects) are selected explicitly.

The cut object can be inserted, page 756 in any other position (also in another LD section).

Copying objects to the clipboard

Copying objects to the clipboard:

33003101.26 755
 LD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 752 the object to be copied. 1. Select, page 752 the object to be copied.

2. Use the Edit > Copy menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+C key combination.

or
Use the Copy menu command from the shortcut
menu (right-click).
or

Click the symbol.

Result: The selected object is copied to the clipboard. This is also the case for the actual parameters. FFB links
are only copied to the clipboard if they (and their partner objects) are selected explicitly.

The copied object can be inserted, page 756 in any other position (also in another LD
section).
If the copied object is an EFB or a DFB instance, it can also be duplicated, page 757 in any
other available position (also in another LD or FBD section).

Pasting objects from the clipboard

Pasting objects from the clipboard:

756 33003101.26
LD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Move the cursor to the target position using the

1. Use the menu command Edit > Paste. arrow keys.
or
2. Press the Ctrl+V key combination.
Use the menu command Paste in the shortcut
3. Press Enter.
menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

2. Left-click the target position.

Note for pasting contacts and coils: If the target position already contains a contact or coil, the existing object
is overwritten by the new object.

Note: This presents the behavior of the Copy, Cut, Paste on a function block instance. It only applies to
graphical languages as FBD and LD.
• Using the Paste function after a Copy of an object:
As a result of a Copy, a new function block instance (FBI) is used. The Paste function creates a new FBI
whenever it is repeated. Accordingly, the FBI is incremented.
• Using the Paste function after a Cut of an object:
As a result of a Cut, the same instance of the function is used. The Paste function uses the same FBI
whenever it is repeated. Accordingly, the FBI is identical.
NOTE: Using same instance of a function block is not recommended because it can lead to incorrect
execution of the function blocks. A function block instance uses contextual variables that are owned by
each instance usage and cannot be applied to any other. For instance, each current value is specific to one
timer instance and one timer usage (Current value of a timer named TON_1 cannot be shared with another
timer named TON_2).

Duplicating an EFB or a DFB instance from the clipboard

Duplicating an EF instance is not possible. If the clipboard contains several objects with
different types (EF, EFB and DFB), the EF is copied while the EFB and DFB instances are
duplicated.
Duplicating an EFB or a DFB instance from the clipboard:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Use the menu command Duplicate in the 1. Move the cursor to the target position using the
arrow keys.
shortcut menu (right mouse button).
2. Press the Ctrl+W key combination.
2. Move the mouse to the desired target position.
Result: The target position appears as a dotted
Result: A dotted frame appears and the mouse

pointer changes its symbol to for a valid frame with the symbol in its center for a
position. valid position.

3. Left-click the target position. 3. Press Enter.

33003101.26 757
 LD Editor

The duplicate operation is also possible across sections between different opened LD or
FBD sections in the same or another Control Expert instance.
NOTE: If the EFB or DFB instances to be duplicated do not already exist in the other
Control Expert instance, these instances are copied.

Moving objects
Moving objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 752 the object to be moved. 1. Position, page 752 the gray field on the object to
be moved.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected
object. (on one of the selected objects if several 2. Press the spacebar.
are selected). 3. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol 4. Move the object to the target position using the
arrow keys.
to .
3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol

to .
4. Drag the object to the new position and release
the mouse button.
Result: The selected object is moved from its original position to the target position. The object's actual
parameters are moved together with the object. FFBs still have their FFB-links and they are adjusted to the new
position of the FFB. Boolean links are only kept for horizontal movement operations.

Note: A moving of FFBs to cells that are already occupied (e.g. by contact, coil, other FFB, boolean link), is not
possible.

Note: The move operation is also possible across sections between different opened LD sections.

Note: When objects are moved beyond the visible area of the editor window, automatic scrolling of the window
will not begin until you reach the edge of the window with the mouse pointer, not as soon as the objects are
moved beyond the edge.

Copying objects via drag & drop

Copying objects via drag & drop:

758 33003101.26
LD Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

-
1. Select, page 752 the object to be copied.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected object.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
4. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

5. Drag the object to the new position.
Note: This is also possible across sections between different opened LD sections.
6. Release the mouse button.
Result: A copy of the selected object is pasted at the target position. The object's actual
parameters (variable/address) are copied together with the object. A new instance is
automatically created for FFBs. FFB links are only copied if they (and their partner
objects) are selected explicitly.

Copying, and pasting variables

Overview
You can copy / paste the variable of one contact, coil or pin of FBD block to another one.

Copying variables to the clipboard

Copying variables to the clipboard:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 752 the object containing the 1. Select, page 752 the object to be copied.
variable to be copied. 2. Press the Ctrl+C key combination.
2. Use the Edit > Copy menu command.
or
Use the Copy menu command from the shortcut
menu (right-click).
or

Click the symbol.

Result: The variable of the selected object is copied to the clipboard.

33003101.26 759
 LD Editor

Pasting variables from the clipboard

Pasting variables from the clipboard:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Left-click the target object. 1. Move the gray field to the cell with the target
object using the arrow keys.
2. Use the menu command Paste variable in the
shortcut menu (right mouse button). 2. Press the Ctrl+Shift+V key combination.
3. Press Enter.

NOTE: If the target position already contains a variable, a confirmation message to replace the existing
variable is returned.

Copying variables via drag & drop

NOTE: This functionality is not available for copying variable of a pin.
Copying variables via drag & drop:

Using the mouse Using the

keyboard

-
1. Select, page 752 the contact or coil to be copied.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected object.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
4. Press the Alt key and keep it pressed.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

5. Drag the object to the new position.
Note: This is also possible across sections between different opened LD sections.
6. Release the mouse button. Then release the Alt key.
Result: A copy of the selected object variable is pasted at the target position. If the target
position already contains a variable, a confirmation message to replace the existing
variable is returned.

Insert Mode
Overview
The insert mode allows to drop the following objects on an occupied cell:

760 33003101.26
LD Editor

• Contact
• Coil
• Operate block
• Compare block

Activating Insert Mode

Insert mode is activated using the button.

The background color of the button in blue indicates that insert mode is active.
The object cursor symbol indicates that select mode is active for this object.

Inserting an Object
Dropping an object on an occupied cell makes an insert of the object if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
• There is no derivation on the right side
• There is no EF, EFB, DFB on the right side.
• In addition to the preceding conditions:

for a contact or a coil: At least one empty cell or one horizontal link is available on the right side.

for an operate block: At least two empty cell or two horizontal links are available on the right side.

for a compare bloc: At least four empty cell or four horizontal links are available on the right side.

NOTE: If insert is not possible, a confirmation message of replacement opens.

Using Mnemonics
Introduction
Instead of inserting LD objects via toolbar, menu command or drag-and-drop, you can use
so called Mnemonics.

33003101.26 761
 LD Editor

Mnemonics Option
Open the Tools > Options... dialog.
Under Data and Languages > Languages > LD > Mnemonics, the Property label column
lists the frequently used objects available for LD sections.
In the Property value column you can enter a mnemonic for each listed element.
A mnemonic can consist of up to 4 alphanumeric signs.

Using Mnemonics
As you start typing text while the current cell marker is on an empty cell in the LD Editor, a
small edit box opens in the editor.
Entering a mnemonic (first key typed is taken over into the edit box) and pressing the Enter
key insert the corresponding LD objects at the current cell.
You can also insert EF, EFB, and DFB by typing the complete instance name (for example
MOVE or ADD) and pressing the Enter key.
If the cells needed to insert the element are already occupied, a message box informs you
and the element is not inserted.

Displaying the properties

Displaying the object properties
You have the following options to display the object properties dialog box:
• Double-click the object.
• Select, page 752 the object and use the Edit > Properties... dialog box..
• Select, page 752 the object and use the Properties...commandfrom the shortcut
menu.
• Select, page 752 the object and then press the Alt+Enter key combination.
When the properties dialog box is called without an object being selected, the section
properties dialog box , page 502 is opened.
If several objects are selected, the commands do not work.

762 33003101.26
LD Editor

View data properties

You have the following options to display the section properties dialog box, page 1195:
• using the data editor, page 344
1. Selecting one or several lines in a list editor
2. Using the shortcut menu select the Propertiescommand.
• via the LD section
1. Selecting one or several element(s) in the LD section.
2. From the context menu select the command Data properties or press Ctrl + Enter.

Refining DFBs and subroutines

Introduction
This function makes it possible to "look into" a DFB or subroutine. This makes it possible to
see the internal state of the DFB/subroutine when animation is used, or to make changes to
the logic very quickly.
NOTE: The only limitation occurs when the displayed variable is in an ARRAY with at
least 2 dimensions and when the index is not a constant. In this case an error message
is displayed and the variable value can't be displayed.

Refining DFBs
Process the following steps to refine DFBs:

33003101.26 763
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the DFB.

2 You have the following options to refine DFBs:
• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: If the DFB contains only one section, this will be opened automatically.

If the DFB contains several sections, a selection dialog is opened.

Example:

3 Select the desired DFB section.

Result: The DFB section is opened.

Note: With nested DFBs, several refine processes are possible, but we should not let open
simultaneously the refine editors or it could lead to a wrong data display.

Refining subroutines
Process the following steps to refine subroutines:

764 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the subroutine block, page 701.

2 You have the following options to to refine subroutines:

• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: The subroutine section is opened.

Note: With nested subroutines several refine processes are possible.

Inserting, Deleting, and Copying Rows

Inserting Rows
The following rules apply when inserting rows:
• The same number of rows are inserted as are selected in the vertical ruler.
• The new rows are inserted above the first selected row.
• The first selected row may not contain any objects.

Step Action

1 Select, page 753 the desired number of rows in the vertical ruler (click the row numbers).

2 Use the Insert rows menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler or use the Edit >
Insert row menu command.

Result: The selected number of rows is inserted above the first selected row.

Deleting Rows
The following rules apply when deleting rows:
• The rows to be deleted may not contain any objects.

33003101.26 765
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select, page 754 the desired number of rows to be deleted from the vertical ruler (click the row
numbers).

2 Use the Delete rows menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler or use the Edit >
Delete row menu command.

Result: The selected rows are deleted.

Copying Rows
Step Action

1 Select, page 753 the desired rows to copy in the vertical ruler (click the row numbers).

2 Use the Copy menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler or use the Edit > Copy
menu command.
3 Either:
• Select, page 753 the same desired number of rows in the vertical ruler (click the row
numbers).
Use the Paste menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler or use the Edit >
Paste menu command.
Result: The desired selected number of rows is copied.
NOTE: If the target rows are not empty, the existing objects are overwritten by the new
ones.
• Use the Insert Copy menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler.
Result: The desired selected number of rows is inserted above the first selected row.

Columns Management
Default Number of Columns
The default number of columns, when LD section is created, is specified in the Tools >
Project Settings dialog box, on the Program > Languages > LD tab, in the Number of
columns text box.

Inserting columns
The following rules apply when inserting columns:
• The same number of columns are inserted as are selected in the horizontal ruler.
• The new columns are inserted before the first selected column.
766 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select, page 753 the desired number of columns in the horizontal ruler (click the column numbers).

2 Use the Insert Column menu command from the shortcut menu of the horizontal ruler.

Result: The selected number of columns is inserted before the first selected column and
connections between links and blocks are kept.

Deleting Columns
Step Action

1 Select, page 754 the desired number of columns to be deleted from the horizontal ruler (click the
column numbers).

2 Use the Delete Column menu command from the shortcut menu of the horizontal ruler.

Result: The selected columns are deleted.

Column Width
The column width can be managed using the following LD editor toolbar buttons

|S| Small size

|M| Medium size that is double small size

|L| Large size that is triple small size

Editing Contacts
Overview
This section describes how to edit contacts in the LD programming language.

33003101.26 767
 LD Editor

Select contacts
Introduction
A contact is an LD element that transfers a status on the horizontal link to its right side. This
status comes from the Boolean AND link of the status of the horizontal link on the left side
with the status of the relevant Boolean current parameter.

Selecting contacts
Selecting contacts:

Contact type Description Call via the menu command Call via Call via a key Cursor
the symbol
icon
N.O. contact For normally open contacts, Objects > Normally open F3
the status of the left link is contact
copied to the right link, if the
status of the relevant or
Boolean actual parameter is
1. Otherwise, the status of Edit > New > Normally
the right link is 0. open contact

or

Contacts > Normally open

contact in the shortcut menu
N.C. contact For normally closed Objects > Normally closed Shift+F3
contacts, the status of the contact
left link is copied to the right
link, if the status of the or
relevant Boolean actual
parameter is 0. Otherwise, Edit > New > Normally
the status of the right link is closed contact
0.
or

Contacts > Normally

closed contact in the
shortcut menu

768 33003101.26
LD Editor

Contact type Description Call via the menu command Call via Call via a key Cursor
the symbol
icon
Positive With contacts for detection of Objects > Positive Ctrl+F3
transition positive transitions, the right transition-sensing contact
contact link for a program cycle is 1 if
a transfer of the relevant or
actual parameter goes from
0 to 1 and the status of the Edit > New > Positive
left link is 1 at the same time. transition-sensing contact
Otherwise, the status of the
right link is 0. or

Also see the Edge Contacts > Positive

recognition (see transition-sensing contact
EcoStruxure™ Control in the shortcut menu
Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the user guide.

Negative With contacts for detection of Objects > Negative Ctrl + Shift +
transition negative transitions, the right transition-sensing contact F3
contact link for a program cycle is 1 if
a transfer of the relevant or
actual parameter goes from
1 to 0 and the status of the Edit > New > Negative
left link is 1 at the same time. transition-sensing contact
Otherwise, the status of the
right link is 0. or

Also see the Edge Contacts > Negative

recognition (see transition-sensing contact
EcoStruxure™ Control in the shortcut menu
Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the user guide.

Placing contacts
Introduction
Contacts can be placed in any free cell except cells directly on the right power rail.
If a contact is placed in a cell that was previously occupied by a Boolean link or a label, the
cell contents are replaced by the new contact.
If a contact is placed in a cell that is already occupied by another contact or coil, a
confirmation message is returned to replace the cell contents by the new contact.
If a contact is placed in a cell that is already occupied by another object and can not be
replaced (e.g. FFBs), an error message is returned.

33003101.26 769
 LD Editor

NOTE: The above behavior maybe different when Insert Mode, page 760 is activated.
A placed contact automatically creates a connection with its neighboring objects on the left
and right if they are of the Bool data type and there are no free cells between them.
The following are permitted as actual parameters for contacts:
• Boolean variables
• Boolean literals (0, 1, FALSE, TRUE)
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)
• ST expressions that return a Boolean result (e.g. VarA > VarB)
ST expressions as formal parameters on contacts are an extension of IEC 61131-3 and
must be explicitly enabled via the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Program
> Languages > Common tab by selecting the Usage of ST expressions (LD/FBD)
checkbox.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages > Languages tab, if the
Automatically assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the
corresponding properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The
procedures explained here are used when the checkbox is cleared.

Placing contacts:
Placing contacts:

770 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the desired contact.

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected contact is inserted.

3 To place further contacts of the same type:
• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Assigning actual parameters

Assigning actual parameters:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the contact.

Result: The contacts properties dialog box is opened.

Example:

2 You have the following options to enter the actual parameters:

• You can now enter the actual parameter and confirm using Enter.

33003101.26 771
 LD Editor

Step Action

• You can select the actual parameter from the list of recently used names using the symbol
and confirm using Enter.
or
• Using the button ... you can open an Instance selection dialog box and confirm the selected
variables there with OK.
Example of a variable selection dialog box:

3 Confirm the selected variable with OK.

Result:
• If the selected variable is declared, it is enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check,
page 744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

• If the variable is not declared, a variable declaration dialog box opens. In this case, continue
with the following steps of this procedure.
Variable declaration dialog box

Note: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog box using the symbol. In
this case, the variable name is enabled in the section, but not declared.

4
If you do not want to assign the variable an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the
symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

772 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Example:

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed immediately after the statement is entered.

Example:

Usage of ST expressions
To enter ST expressions for contacts the same rules apply as for entering ST expressions for
FFB pins., page 818

Property dialog box for contacts

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The contact properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• General
In this tab, you can enter the actual parameter, page 771 of the contact.

33003101.26 773
 LD Editor

• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the contact can be entered.

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

BOOLEAN Expression Enter the name of the actual parameter in this text box.

You have the following options:

• You can directly enter the name of the variable/address or paste it from the
clipboard.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names
using the symbol.
or
• Use the command button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174.
The actual parameters which are permitted are:
• Boolean variables
• Boolean constants
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)
• ST expression delivering a Boolean result (e.g. BoolVar1 OR BoolVar1)
• Literal (1 or 0 or. TRUE or FALSE)

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

774 33003101.26
LD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the contact.

This comment is displayed as a tooltip when the cursor is placed over the contact. It
is independent from the variable comment that can be assigned to the variable in the
data editor.
OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing Coils
Overview
This section describes how to edit coils in the LD programming language.

33003101.26 775
 LD Editor

Selection of coils
Introduction
A coil is an LD element which transfers the status of the horizontal link on the left side,
unchanged, to the horizontal link on the right side. The status is saved in the respective
Boolean actual parameter. Coils normally follow contacts or FFBs, (functions and function
blocks), but they can also be followed by contacts.

Selecting coils
Selecting coils:

Coil type Description Call via menu command Call via Call via Cursor
symbol keyboard symbol

Coil With coils, the status of the Objects > Coil F5

left link is copied to the
relevant Boolean actual or
parameter and the right link.
Edit > New > Coil
or

Coils > Coil from the

shortcut menu
Negated coils With negated coils, the Objects > Negated Coil Shift+F5
status of the left link is
copied onto the right link. or
The inverted status of the
left link is copied to the Edit > New > Negated Coil
relevant Boolean actual
parameter. If the left link is 0, or
the right link is also 0 and
the respective Boolean Coils > Negated Coil from
actual parameter is 1. the shortcut menu

Positive With coils for detection of Objects > Positive -

transition- positive transitions, the transition-sensing coil
sensing coil status of the left link is
copied to the right link. The or
relevant Boolean actual
parameter is 1 for a program Edit > New > Positive
cycle, if a transition from 0 to transition-sensing coil
1 is made on the left link.
or
Also see the Edge
recognition (see Coils > Positive transition-
EcoStruxure™ Control sensing coil from the
Expert, Program Languages shortcut menu
and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the user guide.

776 33003101.26
LD Editor

Coil type Description Call via menu command Call via Call via Cursor
symbol keyboard symbol

Negative With coils for detection of Objects > Negative -

transition- negative transitions, the transition-sensing coil
sensing coil status of the left link is
copied to the right link. The or
relevant Boolean actual
parameter is 1 for a program Edit > New > Negative
cycle, if a transition from 1 to transition-sensing coil
0 is made on the left link.
or
Also see the Edge
recognition (see Coils > Negative transition-
EcoStruxure™ Control sensing coil from the
Expert, Program Languages shortcut menu
and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the user guide.

Set coil With set coils, the status of Objects > Set Coil Alt+F5
the left link is copied onto
the right link. The relevant or
Boolean actual parameter is
set to 1 if the left link has the Edit > New > Set Coil
status 1, otherwise it
remains unchanged. The or
relevant Boolean actual
parameter can be reset Coils > Set Coil from the
through the reset coil. shortcut menu

Reset coil With reset coils, the status of Objects > Reset Coil Shift + Alt +
the left link is copied onto F5
the right link. The relevant or
Boolean actual parameter is
set to 0 if the left link has the Edit > New > Reset Coil
status 1, otherwise it
remains unchanged. The or
relevant Boolean actual
parameter can be set Coils > Reset Coil from the
through the set coil. shortcut menu

33003101.26 777
 LD Editor

Coil type Description Call via menu command Call via Call via Cursor
symbol keyboard symbol

Halt coil With halt coils, if the status Objects > Halt coil -
of the left link is 1, the
program execution is or
stopped immediately. (With
halt coils the status of the Edit > New > Halt coil
left link is not copied to the
right link.) or

Coils > Halt coil from the

shortcut menu
Call coil With call coils, the status of Objects > Call Coil F4
the left link is copied to the
right link. If the status of the or
left link is 1, the
corresponding subroutine is Edit > New > Call Coil
called.
or
Subroutine calls are
expansions to IEC 61131-3 Coils > Call Coil from the
and must be explicitly shortcut menu
enabled via the Tools >
Project Settings dialog box,
in the Program >
Languages > Common tab
by selecting the Allow
subroutines check box.

Placing coils
Introduction
Coils can be placed in any free cell except cells directly on the left power rail.
If all coils are to be placed on the right power rail, select the Tools > Project Settings menu,
and in the Program > LD tab, check the Right-justify coils checkbox.
If a coil is placed in a cell that is already occupied by a Boolean link or a label, the cell
contents are replaced by the new coil.
If a coil is placed in a cell that is already occupied by a coil, or a contact, a confirmation
message is returned to replace the cell contents by the new coil.
If a coil is placed in a cell that is already occupied by another object and can not be replaced
(e.g. FFBs), an error message is returned
NOTE: The above behavior maybe different when Insert Mode, page 760 is activated.
A placed coil automatically creates a connection with its neighboring objects on the left and
right if they are of the BOOL data type, even if free cells are between them.

778 33003101.26
LD Editor

The following are permitted as actual parameters for coils:

• Boolean variables
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages > Languages tab, if the
Automatically assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the
corresponding properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The
procedures explained here are used when the checkbox is cleared.

Placing Coils
Placing Coils

Step Action

1 Select the desired coil.

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected coil is inserted.

In the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, on the Program > LD tab, if the Right-justify coils
checkbox is selected and the last cell in the current row (cell directly on the right power rail) is not
occupied, the coil is placed automatically on the right power rail. If this cell is already occupied, the
coil is inserted into the current cell (cursor position gray field).

3 To place further coils of the same type:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

33003101.26 779
 LD Editor

NOTE: When editing a program in Ladder, a short circuit on a coil may lead to a state
always true. For a good logic behavior, the short-circuit must be deleted..

If the short-circuit (1) is located on top of the coil B2, this coil will remain in a true state
(B2 = 1) regardless of the logic activating the coil C1. As a consequence, the active state
(2) is propagated to the following logic (b4 = 1).

Assigning actual parameters

Assigning actual parameters:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the coil.

Result: The coils properties dialog box is opened.

Example:

2 You have the following options to enter the actual parameters:

• You can now enter the variable/address name and confirm using Enter.

780 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

• You can select the variable name from the list of recently used names using the symbol
and confirm using Enter.
or
• Using the button ... you can open an Instance selection dialog box and confirm the selected
variables there with OK.
Example of a variable selection dialog box:

3 Confirm the selected variable with OK.

Result:
• If the selected variable is declared, it is enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check,
page 744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

• If the variable is not declared, a variable declaration dialog box opens. In this case, continue
with the following steps of this procedure.
Variable declaration dialog box

Note: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog box using the symbol. In
this case, the variable name is enabled in the section, but not declared.

4
If you do not want to assign the variable an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the
symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

33003101.26 781
 LD Editor

Step Action

Example:

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed.

Example:

Calling a subroutine
Calling a subroutine:

Step Action

1 Place a call coil in the section.

Note: Subroutine calls are expansions to IEC 61131-3 and must be explicitly enabled via the Tools
> Project Settings dialog box, in the Program > Languages > Common tab by selecting the
Allow subroutines checkbox.
2 Open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the coil.

Result: The coils properties dialog box is opened.

782 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

3 Click the symbol and select the subroutine to call from the list and confirm using Enter.

Note: The subroutine to be called must be located in the same task as the LD section called.

Result: The subroutine call is inserted into the section and a syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed.

Example:

If the subroutine has already been created, the procedure ends here.

If the subroutine has not yet been created, continue with step 4.

4 Create the subroutine.

Property dialog box for coils

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box for coils, negated coils, coils for sensing positive/negative
transitions and set/reset coils consists of two tabs:
• General
In this tab, you can enter the actual parameter, page 780 of the coil.
• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the coil can be entered.
The properties dialog box for halt coils consists of one tab:
• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the coil can be entered.
The properties dialog box for call coils consists of two tabs:
• General
In this tab, you can enter the name of the subroutine to be called, page 782.

33003101.26 783
 LD Editor

• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the coil/subroutine call can be entered.

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Representation of the General tab for call coils:

Elements of the General tab:

784 33003101.26
LD Editor

Element Description

BOOLEAN Expression This text box is only available for coils, negated coils, coils for sensing positive/
negative transitions and set/reset coils.

Enter the name of the actual parameter in this text box.

You have the following options:

• You can directly enter the name of the variable/address or paste it from the
clipboard.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names
using the symbol.
or
• Use the command button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174.
The actual parameters which are permitted are:
• Boolean variables
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)

Subroutine This text box is only available for call coils.

You can enter the name of the subroutine to be called in this text box.

You have the following options:

• You can directly enter the name of the subroutine or paste it from the clipboard.
or
• You can select the name of the subroutine from the list of subroutines using the
symbol.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 785
 LD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the coil.

This comment is displayed as a tooltip when the cursor is placed over the coil. It is
independent from the variable comment that can be assigned to the variable in the
data editor.
OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing compare blocks

Overview
This section describes how to edit compare blocks in the LD programming language.

786 33003101.26
LD Editor

Placing compare blocks

Introduction
Compare blocks are only available in the LD programming language. They are used to
execute a compare expression (<, >, <=, >=, =, <>) in the ST programming language.
NOTE: The same functionality is also possible using ST expressions, page 818.
If the state of the left link is 1 and the result of the comparison is 1, the state of the right link
is 1.
Compare blocks can be placed in any free cell except the last cell directly on the right power
rail.
A compare block requires 1 line and 2 columns.
If a compare block is placed in a cell that is occupied by a Boolean link, and the following cell
is either empty or also occupied by a Boolean link, then these cells will be occupied by the
placed compare block.
If a compare block is placed in a cell, and this cell or the following cell is already occupied by
another object, an error message is returned.
NOTE: The above behavior maybe different when Insert Mode, page 760 is activated.
A placed compare block automatically creates a connection with its neighboring objects on
the left and right if they are of the BOOL data type and there are no free cells between them.

Activating compare block placement mode

You have the following options to activate the compare block placement mode:
• Use the Objects > Compare Block menu command.
• Use the Edit > New > Compare Block menu command.
• Use the Common Objects > Compare Block menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the Ctrl+F7 key combination.
or

• Choose the symbol.

The active compare block placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

33003101.26 787
 LD Editor

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages > Languages tab, if the
Automatically assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the
corresponding properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The
procedures explained here are used when the checkbox is cleared.

Placing a compare block

Placing a compare block:

Step Action

1 Activate the compare block placement mode.

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position, and press Enter.

Result:The compare blocks is placed.

3 Placing other compare blocks:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Defining the compare operation

Defining the compare operation:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the compare block.

Result: The properties dialog box for the compare block is opened.

2 Enter the desired compare operation in the text box, see also General tab, page 791.

788 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Example:

3 Confirm the compare operation with OK.

Result:
• If the selected variables are declared, they are enabled in the section. A syntax and
semantics check, page 744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

• If the more than one of the selected variables are not declared, they are enabled in the
section but not declared. A syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed. Declare
them at this time, using the data editor, page 386.
• If the one of the selected variables is not declared, a variable declaration dialog box opens. In
this case, continue with the following steps of this procedure.
Variable declaration dialog box

Note: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog box using the symbol. In
this case, the variable name is enabled in the section, but not declared.

4
If you do not want to assign the variable an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the
symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

Example:

33003101.26 789
 LD Editor

Step Action

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
744 is performed.

Example:

Compare block properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• General
In this tab, you can enter the compare operation, page 788.
• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the compare block can be entered.

790 33003101.26
LD Editor

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

ST Expression Enter the compare operation in this text box, see also Placing compare blocks, page
787.

You have the following options to variables for the comparison operation:
• You can enter the name of the variable/address directly or copy it from the
clipboard.
• Using the command button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page
1174.
A compare block can contain up to 4,096 characters. If not all characters can be
displayed, the beginning of the string sequence is followed by an ellipsis (...).

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 791
 LD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of theCommenttab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the compare block.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing operation blocks

Overview
This section describes how to edit operate blocks in the LD programming language.

Placing Operate Blocks

Introduction
Operate blocks are only available in the LD programming language. They are used to
execute an ST statement.

792 33003101.26
LD Editor

When the status of the left link is 1, the ST statement in the block is executed.
All ST statements are allowed except the control statements:
• (RETURN,
• JUMP,
• IF,
• CASE,
• FOR
• etc.)
For operate blocks, the state of the left link is passed to the right link (regardless of the result
of the ST statement).
Operate blocks can be placed in any free cell.
A operate block requires 1 line and 4 columns.
If an operate block is placed in a cell that is occupied by a Boolean link, and the following
cells are either empty or also occupied by Boolean links, then these cells will be occupied by
the placed operate block.
If an operate block is placed in a cell, and this cell or the following 3 cells are already
occupied by another object, an error message is returned.
NOTE: The above behavior maybe different when Insert Mode, page 760 is activated.
A placed operate block automatically creates a connection with its neighboring objects on
the left if they are of the BOOL data type and there are no free cells between them.

Activating operate block placement mode

You have the following options to activate the operate block placement mode:
• Use the Objects > Operate Block menu command.
• Use the Edit > New > Operate Block menu command.
• Use the Common Objects > Operate Block menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the key combination Alt+F7.
or

• Choose the symbol.

The active operate block placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

33003101.26 793
 LD Editor

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages > Languages tab, if the
Automatically assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the
corresponding properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The
procedures explained here are used when the checkbox is cleared.

Placing an operate block

Placing an operate block:

Step Action

1 Activate operate block placement mode.

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The operation block is placed.

3 Placing other operate blocks:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Defining the operation

Defining the operation:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the operate block.

Result: The operate block properties dialog box is opened.

2 Enter the desired ST statement in the text box.

794 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Example:

3 Confirm the ST statement with OK.

Result:
• If the selected variables are declared, they are enabled in the section. A syntax and
semantics check, page 744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

• If the more than one of the selected variables are not declared, they are enabled in the
section but not declared. A syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed. Declare
them at this time, using the data editor, page 386.
• If the one of the selected variables is not declared, a variable declaration dialog box opens. In
this case, continue with the following steps of this procedure.
Variable declaration dialog box

Note: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog box using the symbol. In
this case, the variable name is enabled in the section, but not declared.

4
If you do not want to assign the variable an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the
symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and the ST statement is enabled in the section. A syntax and
semantics check, page 744 is performed and the procedure ends here.

Example:

33003101.26 795
 LD Editor

Step Action

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and the ST statement is enabled in the section. A syntax and
semantics check, page 744 is performed.

Example:

Operate block properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• General
Enter the operation, page 794 in this tab.
• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the operate block can be entered.

796 33003101.26
LD Editor

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

ST Statement Enter the operation in this text box, see also Placing Operate Blocks, page 792.

You have the following options to select variables for the operation:
• You can enter the name of the variable/address directly or copy it from the
clipboard.
• Using the command button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page
1174.
An operate block can contain up to 4,096 characters. If not all characters can be
displayed, the beginning of the string sequence is followed by an ellipsis (...).

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 797
 LD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Commenttab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the operate block.

This comment is displayed above the operate block if the mixed display mode, page
745 is activated.
OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing FFBs
Overview
This section describes the various possibilities to edit elementary functions, elementary
function blocks, derived function blocks and procedures in the LD programming language.

798 33003101.26
LD Editor

General information on calling an FFB

Introduction
FFB is the generic term for:
• Elementary Function (EF)
• Elementary Function Block (EFB)
• Derived Function Block (DFB)
• Procedure
(Procedures are an expansion to IEC 61131-3 and must be enabled explicitly in the
Tools > Project Settings dialog box, on the Languages > Common tab by selecting
the Allow procedures checkbox).
FFBs can be placed in any free space.
If an FFB is to be placed in an area that is already occupied by an object (contact, coil, other
FFB, link), an error message is returned.
For more information, refer to chapter Elementary Functions, Elementary Function Blocks,
Derived Function Blocks and Procedures (FFBs) (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

Declaring block instances

Function blocks (elementary and derived) have internal states. If the inputs have the same
values, the value on the output can have another value during the individual executions of
the function block. For example, with a counter the value on the output is incremented.
The instance name serves as a unique identification for the function block in a project.
Instances can be declared:
• By selecting a function block type and its placement in a section.
• By the declaration of the block instance in the FFB input assistant, page 1192 and its
placement in the section.
• By the declaration of the block instance in the Data editor, page 376.

Calling FFBs
FFBs can be called in the following ways:

33003101.26 799
 LD Editor

• Via the FFB Input Assistant, page 800 menu command

◦ Use the Edit > FFP input assistant... menu command.
◦ Use the menu command FFB Input Assistant...in the shortcut menu.
or
◦ Press the Ctrl+I key combination.
• Via the data selection, page 804
◦ Use the menu command Edit > Data Selection.
◦ Use the menu command Data selection... in the shortcut menu.
◦ Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
or
◦ Select the symbol.
• Via the Types library browser per drag & drop
◦ Use the Tools > Types Library Manager menu command.
or
◦ Press the Alt+3 key combination.
NOTE: Timers and counters EFB can be called directly via the LD Instruction Bar, page
878. You can also customize the LD toolbar to call directly a maximum of 20 EF, EFB or
DFB via the LD Favorite Toolbar, page 879.

Calling an FFB via the FFB input assistant

Activating the FFB input assistant
You have the following options to activate the FFB input assistant:
• Use the Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command. (no object may be selected).
• Use the menu command from the shortcut menu (no object may be selected).
or
• Press the key combination Ctrl+I (no object may be selected).

The active FFB placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Selecting an FFB type via the Input Assistant

Process the following steps to select an FFB type via the FFB input assistant:

800 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 From the FFB input assistant....from the shortcut menu (right-click) for the FFB input assistant,
page 804section.

Result:

The FFB input assistant, page 1192 is opened.

2 You have the following options to enter the FFB type with the:FFB Type text box:
• You can enter the FFB type in the textbox:
In this case, continue with step 6 of the procedure.
• You can select the FFB type from the list of recently used names using the symbol.
In this case, continue with step 6 of the procedure.
• Using the button ... open the FFB selection dialog, page 1183.

3 Select the library from the Libraries/Families column which contains the desired function block.

Tip: If you do not know where to find the FFB you are looking for select the Libset, entry to see a
list of all the FFBs available independently of their libraries.

4 Select the desired function block from the Name column.

33003101.26 801
 LD Editor

Step Action

Example:

5 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and FFB input assistant is activated.

802 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Example:

6 You have the following options to enter the block instance for function blocks in the instance text
box:
• You can accept the name which is suggested.
• You can change the name which is suggested.

7 The number of inputs, page 684can be increased with some elementary functions.

Expandable pins can be recognized from the following display:

To add further pins select the last pin in the structure and press Add pin.

8 To assign the current parameter double-click the Entry field cell of the first formal parameter and
enter the parameter to be used.

You have the following options to enter the variables/addresses:

• You can enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174.
Assign an actual parameter to all formal parameters of the function block in this way.

33003101.26 803
 LD Editor

Step Action

9 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The FFB input assistant is closed and the FFB input mode is activated. The active FFB

placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

10 To place the FFB , and click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The FFB is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed.

Calling an FFB via the data selection

Set data selection to active
You have the following options to activate the data exchange:
• Use the Edit > Data Selection menu command.
• Use the menu commandData selection...from the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
NOTE: When executing the commands no object can be selected in the section.

The active FFB placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the corresponding
properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedures
explained here are used when the checkbox is cleared.

Selecting an FFB type via the Data Selection

Process the following steps to select an FFB type via the Data selection:

804 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 From the Data selection....from the shortcut menu (right-click) for the Data selection, page
804section.

Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

2 You have the following options to enter the FFB type:

• You can now enter the FFB type and confirm using Enteror the button.
In this case, continue with step 7 of the procedure.
• You can select the name from the list of recently used names using the FFB type symbol
and confirm using Enteror the button .
In this case, continue with step 7 of the procedure.
• You can delete your entry by pressing Escor clicking the button.
• Using the button ...you can open the dialog box for FFB selection, page 1179.
Example of an FFB type selection dialog box:

3 Select the Function Types, Function Block Types tab.

Result:

33003101.26 805
 LD Editor

Step Action

The tab used for selecting an FFB type, page 1181 is opened.

4 Select the library and family from the Libraries/Families column which contains the desired
function block.

Tip: If you do not know where to find the FFB you are looking for select the Libset, entry to see a
list of all the FFBs available independently of their libraries.

5 Select the desired function block from the Name column.

Example:

806 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

6 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and FFB placement mode is activated.

7 To place the FFB , and click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: For the selected FFB type, an instance name is automatically generated (only valid for
function blocks), the FFB is inserted and placement mode remains active so that further FFBs
can be inserted. To end insert mode press Esc.

Note: The automatically generated instance names can be changed to improve clarity, also see
Managing of instances of data belonging to the family of function blocks (EF), page 376.

Selecting a block instance

Process the following steps to select a block instance that has already been declared:

Step Action

1 Activate FFB placement mode.

Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

2 Press the button ..., to open the FFB selection dialog, page 1179.

3 Select the Function Blocks tab (if it is not already active).

Result:

33003101.26 807
 LD Editor

Step Action

The tab used for selecting a block instance, page 1180 is opened and the desired selection of
block instances is displayed.

4 Select the desired block instance from the Name column.

5 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and FFB placement mode is activated.

6 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The selected block instance is inserted and the placement mode remains active so that
more block instances can be inserted. To end insert mode press Esc.

Connection of FFBs to the Left Power Rail

Introduction
FFBs will only be processed when they are directly or indirectly connected to the left bus
bar.

808 33003101.26
LD Editor

If the FFB should be executed conditionally, the EN input can be pre-linked using contacts or
other FFBs, see also section EN and ENO (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the User manual.

Examples
Unconditional FFB call

Unconditional FFB call

Conditional FFB call

Assigning Actual Parameters

Introduction
Input and output are required to transfer values to or from an FFB. These are called formal
parameters.

33003101.26 809
 LD Editor

Objects are linked to formal parameters; these objects contain the current process states.
They are called actual parameters.
The data type of the actual parameter must match the data type of the input/output (formal
parameter). The only exceptions are generic inputs/outputs whose data type is determined
by the actual parameter. If all actual parameters consist of literals, a suitable data type is
selected for the function block.
Formal and Actual Parameters:

Permitted actual parameters are:

• Variables
◦ Enter already declared variables, page 811
◦ Enter undeclared variables, page 813
• Formal parameters of other function blocks, page 815
• Literals, page 817
• ST expressions, page 818
ST expressions as formal parameters on FBB inputs are an extension of IEC 61131-3
and must be explicitly enabled via the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the
Language extensions tab by selecting the Usage of ST expressions checkbox.
• Links, page 845 to other LD objects
NOTE: Please take note of the section Information about Programming (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.
You can make actual parameter assignments for
• each pin individually
or
• with the function input assistant, page 820 for all pins

810 33003101.26
LD Editor

Assign declared variables to a pin

Process the following steps to assign undeclared variables to a pin. (See also Creation of
EDT instances, page 386.)

33003101.26 811
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Open a data selection box for the desired FFB pin by:
• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection... menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

2 You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enteror the button.
• You can select the variable names from the list of recently used names using the symbol
and confirm using Enter or the button.
• You can delete your entry by pressing Esc or the symbol.
• Using the button ... you can open an Instance selection dialog box and confirm the selected
variables there with OK.
Example of a variable selection dialog box:

812 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Result: The selected variable is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is
performed.

Example:

Assign undeclared variables to a pin

Process the following steps to assign undeclared variables to a pin:

Step Action

1 Open a data selection box for the desired FFB pin by:
• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection... menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 opens.

2
Enter the variable name and confirm using Enteror the symbol.

Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

33003101.26 813
 LD Editor

Step Action

3 Change the default data type, if desired.

Note: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog box using the symbol. In this
case, the variable name is enabled on the pin, but not declared.

4
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

5
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and enabled on the selected pin.

6 Enter all actual parameters in this way.

Declaring variables on a pin

Process the following steps to declare variables on a pin:

Step Action

1 Open the variable declaration dialog box for the desired variable by.
• Select an undeclared variable (red wavy line under the variable name) and the Create
Variable command from the shortcut menu.
• Select an undeclared variable (red wavy line under the variable name) and the Shift+Enter
key combination.
Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

2
If you do not want to assign an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the symbol.

814 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

3
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for obtaining
an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

4
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

Assigning formal parameters to a pin

Process the following steps to assign formal parameters to a pin:

Step Action

1 Select the desired FFB pin.

2 Open a data selection box by:

• double-clicking the pin.
• the Edit > Data Selection menu command.
• the Data Selection menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• the Ctrl+D key combination.
Result:

33003101.26 815
 LD Editor

Step Action

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

3 You have the following options to enter the formal parameter:

• You can enter the formal parameter name and confirm using Enter or the button.
• You can select the formal parameter name from the list of recently used names using the
symbol and confirm using Enter or the button.
• You can delete your entry by pressing Esc or clicking the button.
• Using the button...to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174.

4 Select the Function Block tab.

Result:

The function block instances are displayed.

5 Expand the display of the inputs, outputs and public variables by clicking their + symbols.

Result:

816 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

You can now see all available inputs, outputs and public variables of the function block.

6 Select the desired formal parameter and confirm with OK.

7 Result: The formal parameter selected is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 646 is
performed.

Example:

Assigning literals to a pin

Process the following steps to assign literals to a pin:

33003101.26 817
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the desired FFB pin.

2 Open a data selection box by:

• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

3 Enter the literal (e.g. 0, 1, TRUE, FALSE, 3.5, t#2ms) and confirm using Enter.

Tips: If the in the dialog box Tools > Project settings in the Language Extensions tab Allow
leading digits checkbox is cleared, the following simplifications for entering literals are possible:
• When assigning TIME literals to a pin of the TIME data type, it suffices to enter the numerical
value and the unit (such as h, m, s). The prefix (t#) is automatically added.
• When assigning REAL literals to a pin of the REAL data type, for integers it suffices to enter
the numerical value. The decimal marker (t#) is automatically added.
Result: The literal is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed.

Example:

Assigning ST expressions to a pin

Process the following steps to assign ST expressions to a pin:

818 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 Make sure that the Usage of ST expressions checkbox is activated in the Tools > Project
Settings dialog box.

2 Select the desired FFB pin.

3 Open a data selection box by:

• double-clicking the pin.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Edit > Data Selection menu command.
• selecting the pin and clicking the Data Selection menu command on the shortcut menu.
• selecting the pin and pressing the Ctrl+D key combination.
or

• selecting the pin and clicking the symbol.

Result:

The data selection box, page 1841 opens.

4 Enter the ST expression [e.g. MUX(1,var1,var2), VarA * VarB, VarA < VarB] and confirm
using Enter.

Result: The ST expression selected is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is
performed.

Example:

If the variables have already been declared (see also Creation of EDT instances, page 386), the
procedure ends here.

If the variables have not yet been declared, continue with step 5.

5 Declare all variables used, either:

• using the data editor, page 386
or
• using Create variable in the context menu (possible when only one variable of the ST
statement is undeclared).

33003101.26 819
 LD Editor

Changing the actual parameter assignment using the function

input assistant
Process the following steps to change actual parameter assignment with the function input
assistant:

Step Action

1 Select the FFB.

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192:
• The Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command.
• The FFB Input Assistant... menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• The Ctrl+I key combination.
Result:

The function input assistant will be opened.

820 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

3 Double click the Entry Field cell of the first formal parameter and enter the actual parameter to be
used.

You have the following options to enter the variables/addresses:

• You can enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the button ... to open an Instance selection dialog box.
Assign an actual parameter to all formal parameters of the function block in this way.

Example:

4 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The actual parameter is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is
performed.

Example:

33003101.26 821
 LD Editor

Step Action

Using Public Variables

Introduction
In addition to inputs/outputs, some function blocks also provide public variables.
These variables transfer statistical values (values that are not influenced by the process) to
the function block. They are used for setting parameters for the function block.
The assignment of values to public variables is made via their initial values.
Public variables are read via the instance name of the function block and the names of the
public variables.

Assigning Values to Public Variables

Carry out the following steps to assign a value to a public variable:

Step Action

1 Place a function block in the section, see also Calling an FFB via the data selection, page 804.

2 Open the data editor, see also Data Editor Access, page 345.

3 Select the Function Block tab.

Result:

822 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

The function block instances are displayed.

4 Expand the display of the public variables by clicking the respective + symbols.

Result:

You can now see all available public variables of the function block.

5 Enter the desired value for the public variable in the Value box.

Reading public variables

See Assigning formal parameters to a pin, page 815

33003101.26 823
 LD Editor

Expanding Functions
Introduction
The number of inputs can be increased with some elementary functions.
You find out which functions can be expanded by referring to the descriptions for the
individual functions.
NOTE: Only expand the function by the number of inputs actually required as non-
occupied inputs are assigned a 0 as standard.

Expanding a function
Carry out the following steps to expanding a function:

Step Action

1 Select the function.

2 Position the mouse pointer on the bottom point to be expanded.

824 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

3 Press the left mouse button and drag the function to the required size.

Example:

4 Release the mouse key.

Result: The desired number of inputs/outputs have been added.

Example:

NOTE: Expanding a DFB can cause an automatic link with a line placed just under the
block.
The following figure shows an example of LD program before a DFB expansion:

33003101.26 825
 LD Editor

The following figure shows the program modification that occurs after a DFB expansion:

Extending the DFB1 will automatically link PB1 to the new input IN3.

WARNING
UNINTENDED PROGRAM EXECUTION
Do not extend a FFB over an other one before adding manually the necessary line.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Negating FFB Pins

Introduction
FFB pins (inputs and outputs) of the data type BOOL can be negated.
Negated pins are identified with a circle symbol:

NOTE: Negated pins must be connected with a graphical link or a variable. Open
negated pins are not allowed.

Negating an FFB pin

FFB pins can be negated in the following ways:

826 33003101.26
LD Editor

• Select the pin to be negated and execute the menu command Negate Pin in the
shortcut menu (right-click).
or
• Launch the Inversion tool by clicking on the icon, then click on the pin to be
negated.

EN and ENO Show and Hide

Introduction
With all FFBs, one EN input and one ENO output can be configured, see also EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual in the Reference
manual.

EN and ENO show or hide

To show or hide EN and ENO, carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the FFB.

2 Check the FFB Properties check box Show EN/ENO to show EN/ENO, or uncheck it to hide EN/
ENO.

Note: If EN or ENO is occupied by an actual parameter or connected with a link, EN/ENO cannot be
hidden.

Properties dialog box for elementary functions,

procedures and sub-routine blocks.
Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:

33003101.26 827
 LD Editor

• FFB Properties
General information regarding functions/procedures is displayed in this register.
• Comment
You can enter a comment about the functions/procedures/sub-routine blocks in this tab.

FFB Properties tab

Representation of the FFB Properties tab:

Elements of the FFB Properties tab:

Element Description

Function Specifies the name of the function number and the current execution order. This
name cannot be modified.
Show EN/ENO When you activate this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are displayed.

When you uncheck this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are no longer displayed.

Note: If EN or ENO is occupied by an actual parameter or connected with a link, the

pins EN/ENO cannot be hidden.

Input Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the
inputs.

If the input is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears.

Output Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the
outputs.

If the output is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears.

828 33003101.26
LD Editor

Element Description

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Comment tab
Representation of the tab Comment:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the FFB.

This comment is displayed in the tooltip when the cursor is placed over the function/
procedure.

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

33003101.26 829
 LD Editor

Properties dialog box for elementary and derived

function blocks (FBs)
Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• FFB Properties
General information regarding the FB is displayed in this register.
• Comment
A comment about the FB can be entered in this tab.

FFB Properties tab

Representation of the FFB Properties tab:

Elements of the FFB Properties tab:

830 33003101.26
LD Editor

Element Description

Instance Specifies the name of the block instance. You can change this name in the data
editor, see also Managing of instances of data belonging to the family of function
blocks (EF), page 376.

Show EN/ENO When you activate this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are displayed.

When you uncheck this checkbox the pins EN/ENO are no longer displayed.

Note: If EN or ENO is occupied by an actual parameter or connected with a link, the

pins EN/ENO cannot be hidden.

Input Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the FB
inputs.

If the input is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears.

Output Displays the formal parameters, the data types and the actual parameter of the FB
outputs.

If the output is not yet linked, the entry N.L. appears.

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Comment tab
Representation of the tab Comment:

Elements of the Comment tab:

33003101.26 831
 LD Editor

Element Description

Version: Specifies version of the FB code.

Text box Enter a comment about the FB.

This comment is displayed in the tooltip when the cursor is placed over the FB.

OK Use this button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Returning from a Subroutine or DFB

Overview
This section describes how to return from a subroutine or DFB to the LD programming
language.

Returning from a subroutine or DFB

Introduction
Every subroutine and every DFB (derived function block) is exited after being processed, i.e.
you return to the main program called.
If the subroutine/DFB is left prematurely, the return to the main program can be forced by the
return object.
If the status of the left link is ON, a return from the subroutine or DFB to the main program is
performed.
Return objects can only be used in subroutines or DFBs. They cannot be used in main
programs.
To generate a conditional return, a return object is placed at the end of a series of contacts.

Selecting the return object

You have the following options to select return objects:
• Use the Edit > New > Return menu command.

832 33003101.26
LD Editor

• Use the Common Objects > Return menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Choose the symbol.

The active placement mode for return objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object check box is selected, then the corresponding
properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedure
explained here is valid for deactivated check boxes.

Placing return objects:

Placing return objects:

Step Action

1 Create a subroutine, page 519 or a DFB, page 1249 in the LD programming language.

2 Create the logic for the subroutine/DFB.

3 Select the return object.

33003101.26 833
 LD Editor

Step Action

4 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result:The return object is inserted.

Example:

5 To insert further return objects:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Return object properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

834 33003101.26
LD Editor

Structure of the properties dialog box

Representation of the properties dialog box:

Elements of the properties dialog box:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the return object.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Jumps within the Current Section

Overview
This section describes jumps within the current LD section.

Jumps within the current section

Introduction
Jump objects execute jumps to a jump target, page 840 within the current section.

33003101.26 835
 LD Editor

When the status of the left link is 1, a jump is made to a label (in the current section).
To generate an unconditional jump, the jump object must be placed directly on the left power
rail.
To generate a conditional jump, a jump object is placed at the end of a series of contacts.

Selecting the jump object

You have the following options to select jump objects:
• Use the Edit > New > Jump menu command.
• Use the Common Objects > Jump menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Choose the symbol.

The active placement mode for jump objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object check box is selected, then the corresponding
properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedure
explained here is valid for deactivated check boxes.

Placing jump objects:

Placing jump objects:

836 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the jump object.

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position, and press Enter.

Result:The jump object is inserted.

3 To insert further jump objects:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Defining the jump target

Defining the jump target:

33003101.26 837
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the jump object.

Result: The properties dialog box for the jump object is opened, see also Jump object properties
dialog box, page 838.

2 You have the following options to enter the jump target:

• You can now enter the name of the jump target and confirm using Enter.
or
• You can select the name of the jump target from the list of available jump targets using the
symbol and confirm using Enter.
Result: The jump target is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed.

Example of an unconditional jump:

Example of a conditional jump:

If the jump target has already been defined (see also Jump target, page 840), the procedure
ends here.

If the jump target has not yet been declared, continue with step 3.

3 Specify the jump target, see also Jump target, page 840.

Jump object properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:

838 33003101.26
LD Editor

• General
Enter the jump target of the jump, page 836 in this tab.
• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the jump can be entered.

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Jump Label Enter the jump target in this text box, see also Definitions of jump targets (jump
labels), page 840.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 839
 LD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the jump object.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Definition of the Jump Target (Jump Labels)

Overview
This section describes how to define jump targets in the LD programming language.

Definitions of jump targets (jump labels)

Introduction
Jump labels create a jump target for jumps, page 835 within the current section.

840 33003101.26
LD Editor

See reference manual to have more details: place, number of characters, naming
conventions...
To find a specific jump label use the Go To dialog box.

Selecting the jump label

You have the following options to to select jump labels:
• Use the Edit > New > Jump Label menu command.
• Use the Common Objects > Jump Label menu command from the shortcut menu,
or
• Choose the symbol.

The active placement mode for jump labels is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the corresponding
properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedure
explained here is valid for deactivated checkboxes.

Placing jump objects

Placing jump objects

33003101.26 841
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the jump label.

2 Click the target cell on the left power rail.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position on the left power rail, and press
Enter.

Result:The return object is inserted.

Example:

3 Placing other jump label objects:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Position of the Name

Position of the Name

842 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 To enter the name, open the properties dialog box, page 762 for the jump label.

Result: The jump label properties dialog box is opened, see also Jump label properties dialog
box, page 843.

2 You have the following options to enter the name of the jump label:
• You can now enter the name and confirm using Enter.
or
• You can select the name of the jump from the list of available jumps using the symbol
and confirm using Enter.
Result: The name is inserted and a syntax and semantics check, page 744 is performed.

Example:

Jump label properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the properties, page 762

Structure of the properties dialog box

The properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• General
Enter the name of the jump label, page 841 in this tab.
• Comment
In this tab, a comment about the jump label can be entered.

33003101.26 843
 LD Editor

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Jump Label Enter the name of the jump label in this list box.

The text is limited to 32 characters and must be unique across the entire section.
The text must conform to the general naming conventions.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

844 33003101.26
LD Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the jump label object.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing Links
Overview
Editing links in the LD programming language.

Select links
Introduction
Links are connections between LD objects (contacts, coils, FFBs etc).
There are two types of links:

33003101.26 845
 LD Editor

• Boolean links
Boolean links comprise one or more segments that connect Boolean objects (contacts,
coils) with one another.
With Boolean links there are:
◦ Horizontal connections
Horizontal connections enable series switching of contacts and coils.
The segments of this link can be created individually or as a complex link comprising
several segments.
◦ Vertical connections
Vertical connections enable parallel switching of contacts and coils.
• FFB links
FFB links are a combination of horizontal and vertical segments that connect FFB
inputs/outputs with other objects.
To avoid links crossing each other, FFB links can also be represented in the form of
connectors, page 619.
FFB links are represented with double line thickness to distinguish them from Boolean links.
NOTE: A detailed description about links, see also section Links (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference
manual.

Selecting links
Selecting links:

Type of Call via menu command Call via Call via key Cursor
connection symbol symbol

Horizontal Objects > Boolean Connection F7

connection, page
849 or

Edit > New > Boolean Connection

or

Connection > Boolean Connection from the

shortcut menu
Link tool mode, Objects > Boolean Link Alt + F6
page 851
(horizontal or
connection)
Edit > New > Boolean Link
Vertical connection, Objects > Vertical Connection Shift + F7
page 853

846 33003101.26
LD Editor

Type of Call via menu command Call via Call via key Cursor
connection symbol symbol

or

Edit > New > Vertical Connection

or

Link > Vertical connexion from the shortcut

menu
FFB link, page 855 Objects > Link F6

or ,

Edit > New > Link

Derivation, page – –
863

Combining Links
Boolean links
Horizontal and vertical Boolean links can be combined in any way.
Example:

Contacts and coils

Contacts and coils link automatically to existing horizontal or vertical links if no free cells are
found between them.

33003101.26 847
 LD Editor

Example:

Crossing Boolean links

If two Boolean links cross each other they are automatically connected. Since Boolean links
may not cross each other there is no special label for them.
Example:

Crossing FFB links

If two FFB links cross each other a connection is not made between them. Crossed links are
indicated by a "broken" link.
Example:

Crossing FFB links and Boolean links

If FFB links and Boolean links cross each other, a connection is not made between them.
Crossed links are indicated by a "broken" link.

848 33003101.26
LD Editor

Example:

Placing links
Placing horizontal links
Process the following steps to place a horizontal link:

33003101.26 849
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for horizontal links, see also Select links, page 845.

Example:

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted.

Example:

See also
• Combining Links, page 847
• Placing horizontal and vertical links with FBB links
using the mouse, page 859
using the keyboard, page 861
• Editing links, page 864

3 To place further links of the same type:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:

850 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Select the object you wish to insert.

Placing horizontal links in link-tool mode

Process the following steps to place a horizontal link in link-tool mode:

33003101.26 851
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Activate the link-tool mode, see also Select links, page 845.

Example:

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted and a connection is created to the neighboring Boolean objects to the
left and right.

If there are no neighboring Boolean objects available, a connection to the power rail is made. This
function is a good way to connect coils with the right power rail.

Example:

See also
• Combining Links, page 847
• Placing horizontal and vertical links with FBB links
using the mouse, page 859
using the keyboard, page 861
• Editing links, page 864

3 To place further links of the same type:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

852 33003101.26
LD Editor

Placing vertical links

On the right side of the cells, there is space to create a vertical link to the cell below. Process
the following steps to place a vertical link:

33003101.26 853
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for vertical links, see also Select links, page 845.

Example:

2 Click the contact which should be connected with the cell below.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

Example:

See also
• Combining Links, page 847
• Placing horizontal and vertical links with FBB links
using the mouse, page 859
using the keyboard, page 861
• Editing links, page 864

3 To place further links of the same type:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:

854 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Select the object you wish to insert.

Placing an FFB link with the mouse

Process the following steps to place an FFB link using the mouse:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for FFB links. See also Select links, page 845.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the start point of the link.

Notes: When creating an FFB link, first select the output pin and then the input pin. The cursor
symbol indicates the correct position .

Example:

33003101.26 855
 LD Editor

Step Action

3 Click the left mouse button on the start point and drag mouse pointer to the target point of the link.

Example:

Note: For FFB links, at least one FFB input or output must be used. An FFB link between contacts
and coils is automatically resolved into a combination of horizontal and vertical links.

Tips:
• By clicking between the start point and target position you can place intermediate points; for
example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• By clicking Esc, you quit the mode and the delete the link segments you created.
• By clicking Enter you quit the mode, and the link segments you created are resolved into a
combination of horizontal and vertical links.
4 Click on the target position with the left mouse button

Result: The link is inserted. When the cursor is placed over an FFB link, the tooltip displays the
source and the destination of the link.

Example:

See also

856 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

• Combining Links, page 847

• Editing links, page 864

Placing an FFB link with the keyboard

Process the following steps to place an FFB link using the keyboard:

Step Action

1 Use the arrow keys to move the gray cell cursor to the source object (for example, contact) of the
link.

Note: When creating an FFB link, first select the output pin and then the input pin.

2 Activate the placement mode for horizontal links using F6. See also Select links, page 845.

3 Press the Ctrl+Enter key combination.

Result: The output pin of the object in the gray cell is selected as the start point of the FFB link.

Example:

33003101.26 857
 LD Editor

Step Action

4 Use the Ctrl+arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position of the link.

Tips:
• By pressing the Ctrl+Enter key combination between the start point and target position you
can place intermediate points; for example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• By clicking Esc, you quit the mode and the delete the link segments you created.
• By clicking Enter you quit the mode, and the link segments you created are resolved into a
combination of horizontal and vertical links.
Example:

Note: For FFB links, at least one FFB input or output must be used. An FFB link between contacts
and coils is automatically resolved into a combination of horizontal and vertical links.

5 Press the Ctrl+Enter key combination.

Result: The link is inserted.

Tip:When the cursor is placed over an FFB link, the tooltip displays the source and the destination
of the link.

Example:

858 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

See also
• Combining Links, page 847
• Editing links, page 864

Placing horizontal and vertical links using FFB links with the
mouse
The functions for creating FFB links can also be used to create horizontal and vertical links
between other objects (not FFBs). If an FFB link involves no input or output, the FFB link is
automatically resolved into a combination of horizontal and vertical links. To do this, process
the following steps:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for FFB links. See also Select links, page 845.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the start point of the link.

Notes: When creating an FFB link, first select the output pin and then the input pin. The cursor
symbol indicates the correct position .

Example:

33003101.26 859
 LD Editor

Step Action

3 Click the left mouse button on the start point and drag mouse pointer to the target point of the link.

Example:

Tips:
• By clicking between the start point and target position you can place intermediate points; for
example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• By clicking Esc, you quit the mode and the delete the link segments you created.
• By clicking Enter you quit the mode, and the link segments you created are resolved into a
combination of horizontal and vertical links.
4 Click on the target position with the left mouse button

Result:The link is inserted and the FFB link is automatically resolved into a combination of
horizontal and vertical links.

Example:

See also
• Combining Links, page 847
• Editing links, page 864

860 33003101.26
LD Editor

Placing horizontal and vertical links using FFB links with the
keyboard
The functions for creating FFB links can also be used to create horizontal and vertical links
between other objects (not FFBs). If an FFB link involves no input or output, the FFB link is
automatically resolved into a combination of horizontal and vertical links. To do this, process
the following steps:

Step Action

1 Use the arrow keys to move the gray cell cursor to the source object (for example, contact) of the
link.

Note: When creating an FFB link, first select the output pin and then the input pin.

2 Activate the placement mode for horizontal links using F6. See also Select links, page 845.

3 Press the Ctrl+Enter key combination.

Result: The output pin of the object in the gray cell is selected as the start point of the FFB link.

Example:

33003101.26 861
 LD Editor

Step Action

4 Use the Ctrl+arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position of the link.

Tips:
• By pressing the Ctrl+Enter key combination between the start point and target position you
can place intermediate points; for example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• By clicking Esc, you quit the mode and the delete the link segments you created.
• By clicking Enter you quit the mode, and the link segments you created are resolved into a
combination of horizontal and vertical links.
Example:

5 Press the Ctrl+Enter key combination.

Result:The link is inserted and the FFB link is automatically resolved into a combination of
horizontal and vertical links.

Example:

See also
• Combining Links, page 847
• Editing links, page 864

862 33003101.26
LD Editor

Placing derivation links

Process the following steps to place a derivation link:

Step Action

1 Activate the derivation-tool, page 845.

2 Click the target cell in the LD section. This cell is the starting point of the derivation.

Result: The derivation is inserted.

NOTE: The width and height of the derivation link is one cell. The derivation can be enlarged.

Resizing derivation links

Process the following steps to enlarge a derivation link:

33003101.26 863
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Activate the select mode.

2 Left-click and keep it pressed one vertical link of the derivation you want to enlarge.

Example:

3 Drag the mouse to the new position for the vertical link.

Result: The derivation link is enlarged.

Example:

Editing links
Editing Boolean links
Horizontal and vertical Boolean links contain one or more independent segments.
When cutting, page 755, deleting, page 755, copying, page 755 and moving, page 758
horizontal and vertical links, the action is executed for the explicitly selected, page 752
segment.

864 33003101.26
LD Editor

Editing FFB links

FFB links comprise one or more segments connected to one another.
When cutting, page 755, deleting, page 755, copying, page 755 and moving, page 758 FFB
links, the action is executed for the entire link.
If an FFB link is selected, the target points are displayed at their beginnings, ends and at
every direction change

Modifying connections
Modifying connections:

33003101.26 865
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link and place the mouse pointer on the connection to be modified.

Example:

2 Left-click the connection to be modified and drag the mouse pointer to the new connection.

Example:

3 Left-click the new target position.

Result: The link route is changed.

Example:

866 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

Creating sizing handles

The creation of angles in FFB links can only be made using sizing handles. If no sizing
handles are available they can be created. Process the following steps to create sizing
handles in FFB links:

33003101.26 867
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the FFB link.

2 Press the Ctrl key and place the mouse pointer at the target position.

Note: The correct position is indicated by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

3 Left-click the target position.

Result:

The sizing handle is created.

Moving FFB links vertically/horizontally

Process the following procedures to move an FFB link segment vertically or horizontally:

868 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the FFB link.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the item to be moved.

Note: The correct position is indicated by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

3 Click the left mouse button and drag the segment to the target position.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result:

The change is made.

Creating angles in FFB links

Process the following steps to create angles in FFB links:

33003101.26 869
 LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the FFB link.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the source position.

Note: The correct position is indicated by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

3 Click the left mouse button and drag the source point to the target position.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result:

The change is made.

Determining the optimum link route

Determining the optimum link route:

870 33003101.26
LD Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link.

Example:

2 Use the Edit > Link > Route menu command.

or

Use the Route menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The current link route is changed to the optimum route.

Example:

33003101.26 871
 LD Editor

Entering Comments
Overview
This section describes how to enter comments in the LD programming language.

Entering comments
Introduction
Comments can be placed in ladder diagram LD in the form of text objects.
Text objects can overlap other objects.
The size of the object, depending on the size of the text, can be extended vertically and
horizontally to fill further grid units.
The same rules apply for entering text and navigating within text objects as for editing ASCII
text in standard text editors. (To create a line break in text objects you must press the Ctrl
+Enter key combination).
NOTE: Keep in mind that each change to a comment (e.g. change to a comment text,
change to the size of the text object) makes it necessary to recreate the section involved
(Generation > Generate project).

Displaying or hiding the comments

Use the button in the toolbar to show or hide the comments.

The background color of the button in blue indicates that the comments are hidden.

NOTE: To select or place text objects, check that the button in the toolbar is not
activated.

Selecting the text object

You have the following options to select text objects:
• Use the Objects > Comment menu command.
• Use the Edit > New > Comment menu command.

872 33003101.26
LD Editor

• Use the Common objects > Comment menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the F8 key.
or

• Select the symbol.

The active placement mode for text objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Placing text objects:

NOTE: A double-click on a line number in the vertical ruler creates a comment block all
along the entire line.
Placing text objects:

Step Action

1 Select the text object.

2 Click the target cell in the LD section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result:The text object is inserted.

Example:

3 Enter the comment.

4 Confirm the text entered with:
• Clicking with the mouse outside of the text object
or
• Pressing the Enter key.

5 To insert further text objects:

• Click the target cell in the LD section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

33003101.26 873
 LD Editor

Online functions
Overview
This section describes the online functions of the LD programming language.

Online Functions
Online Functions
The description of online functions is found in chapter Debugging in Ladder Language, page
1405.

LD Reference Data Type

Reference Data Type in LD
Introduction
References to variables can be assigned in LD application programs.
A reference can be de-referenced in LD application programs.
For more information, refer to Reference Data Type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

874 33003101.26
LD Editor

LB Examples using the Reference Data Type:

The EF, REF, takes a variable as an input parameter (type ANY) and provides its address as
output parameter (type REF_ANY).
The EF, MOVE, can assign a reference to a variable to another reference. If the input
parameter is (REF(MyVariable)), MOVE has the same effect as the REF EF.
The EF, TON, takes ptrToMyBool^ as an input parameter to dereference the reference
ptrToMyBool.

Export/Import
Overview
This section describes the Import/Export functions of the LD programming language.

33003101.26 875
 LD Editor

Export/Import LD Sections
Export/Import
The description for exporting/importing sections is found in the chapter Import / Export, page
1677.

Customize LD Editor
Overview
This section describes how to customize the toolbar and the colors of the LD editor.

Customize LD Editor Colors

Overview
To customize LD editor colors, open the Tools > Colors Settings... dialog box.
The Color Settings dialog box allows to:
• Modify the color of the selected item in the list.
• Reset the colors with initial values.
• Import an *.ini file that defines the colors associated to the LD editor.
• Export the definition colors associated to the LD editor.

Color Setting File

Depending on the operating system of the PC, the color setting file LDColors.ini is located in
one of the following folders:
• c:\Program Files\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
• c:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
For more detail on destination folder when Control Expert is installed, refer to EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Installation Manual.
NOTE: Make a copy of this file before modifying it.

876 33003101.26
LD Editor

Description
This table describes the default color values for each parameter in the LDColors.ini file:

Parameter Default value (R, Description

G, B)

BkAnimation 192,192,192 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in programming mode.

StatementError 255,0,0 Element in error is underlined with this color.

InspectBk 0,255,255 Inspect window background color

InspectText 0,0,0 Inspect window text color

InspectBkMin 255,255,0 Inspect window background color when the value is less than
the minimum value defined in the inspect window settings.

InspectBkMax 255,0,255 Inspect window background color when the value is greater
than the maximum value defined in the inspect window
settings.

BkAnimMonitoring 255,211,211 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in monitoring mode.

AnalyzeError 0,0,255 Drawing color when an element generates an analyze error.

GraphAnimBoolTrue 0,150,0 Color of true BOOL in animation mode.

GraphAnimBoolFalse 255,0,0 Color of false BOOL in animation mode.

BkComment 255,255,204 Background color of comment area

BkCommentEdit 225,225,225 Background color of comment area when you are editing it.

BkAnimNumeric 255,255,0 Background color of numeric variables

BlockBreakpoint 128,0,0 Bullet color in the element where the breakpoint is set.

BlockCurrentStep 255,255,0 Color of the current element in debug mode

AnchorLink 128,0,0 Color of anchor link

LLFgExpression 0,0,0 Text color of boolean expressions

LLFgAddress 100,100,230 Text color of variable address

LLFgSymbol 0,0,0 Text color of variable name

LLFgComment 0,128,0 Text color of variable comment

LLBkExpression 255,255,255 Background color of boolean expressions

LLBkAddress 255,255,255 Background color of variable address

LLBkSymbol 255,255,255 Background color of variable name

33003101.26 877
 LD Editor

Parameter Default value (R, Description

G, B)

LLBkComment 255,255,255 Background color of variable comment

Background 255,255,255 Editor background color.

LD Instruction Bar
Overview
The toolbar LD Instruction Bar contains the timers and counters EFB for direct call.
For detailed information about these EFBs refer to chapter Timers and Counters.

Showing and Hiding the Toolbar

You have two options to show the toolbar LD Instruction Bar (to open it):
• Right-click in the common toolbar and select the toolbar from the shortcut menu.
• Open the Tools > Customize dialog box and select the toolbar,
You have three options to hide the toolbar LD Instruction Bar (to close it):
• Right-click in the common toolbar and deselect the toolbar from the shortcut menu,
• Open the Tools > Customize dialog box and deselect the toolbar,
• With the close symbol ( x ) if the toolbar is non-anchored.

Timers and Counters EFB

The toolbar LD Instruction Bar contains the following EFBs organized in 4 drop-list buttons

CTD Downcounter EFBs

• CTD
• CTD_DINT
• CTD_INT
• CTD_UDINT
• CTD_UINT

CTU Upcounter EFBs

• CTU

878 33003101.26
LD Editor

• CTU_DINT
• CTU_INT
• CTU_UDINT
• CTU_UINT

CTUD Up and down counter EFBs

• CTUD
• CTUD_DINT
• CTUD_INT
• CTUD_UDINT
• CTUD_UINT

TIME Timer EFBs

• TOF
• TON
• TP

LD Favorite Bar
Overview

In the current LD editor toolbar, the button allows to manage the toolbar LD Favorite
Bar which can contain a maximum of 20 EF, EFB or DFB for direct call.

Showing and Hiding the Toolbar

You have two options to show the toolbar LD Favorite Bar (to open it):
• Right-click in the common toolbar and select the toolbar from the shortcut menu.
• Open the Tools > Customize dialog box and select the toolbar,
You have three options to hide the toolbar LD Favorite Bar (to close it):
• Right-click in the common toolbar and deselect the toolbar from the shortcut menu,
• Open the Tools > Customize dialog box and deselect the toolbar,
• With the close symbol ( x ) if the toolbar is non-anchored in the current LD editor toolbar.

33003101.26 879
 LD Editor

Managing the Toolbar

To manage the toolbar LD Favorite Bar, opens the Add/Delete Favorite dialog box by

clicking the button.

The Add/Delete Favorite dialog box allows to:
• Add component via the FFB Type Selection dialog box.
• Delete component.
• Import an *.ini file that define the components for the LD Favorite Bar.
• Export the components of the LD Favorite Bar.
NOTE: The components of the LD Favorite Bar are saved in the Favorite.ini file.
For example with Control Expert 14.0, the Favorite.ini file is located in C:
\ProgramData\Schneider Electric\Control Expert\14.0\Favorite\
folder.

880 33003101.26
33003101.26 881
 SFC Editor

SFC Editor
What’s in This Chapter
Creating a program with the SFC programming
language ............................................................................... 882
General Information about Steps............................................. 913
Editing "normal" steps ............................................................ 916
Editing macro steps................................................................ 929
Editing input steps.................................................................. 940
Editing Output Steps .............................................................. 946
Editing actions ....................................................................... 950
Editing Transitions ................................................................. 961
Editing Jumps........................................................................ 970
Editing Branches and Joints.................................................... 976
Inserting Alternative Strings and Simultaneous Strings ............. 984
Inserting Step-Transitions and Transition-Step-
Sequences ............................................................................ 988
Editing Links.......................................................................... 992
Entering Comments ............................................................. 1003
Online functions................................................................... 1005
Export/Import....................................................................... 1005
Customize SFC Editor Colors ............................................... 1005

Overview
This chapter describes the menus and dialogs of the SFC editor.
For a description of the syntax for the SFC programming language, please refer to the
Sequential Function Chart SFC (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) chapter in the Reference manual.

Creating a program with the SFC programming

language
Overview
This section describes how to create a program in the SFC programming language.

882 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Structure of an SFC Program (Sequential Function Chart)

Introduction
IEC conforming sequential control is created from SFC sections (top level), transition
sections and action sections.
SFC sections are only permitted in the projects master task. SFC sections can not be used
in other tasks or DFBs.
Each SFC section contains one or more SFC networks (sequences).

Structure of an SFC section

Zero or more actions belong to every step. A transition condition belongs to every transition.
The last transition of the sequence is always connected to the first step of the sequence
(using a graphical link or jump label). Step sequences run cyclically.

Properties of an SFC program

Properties of an SFC program:
• SFC section always have a grid background.
• Because of performance reasons, it is strongly recommended to create less than 100
SFC sections in a project (macro section are not counted).
• An SFC section contains a maximum of 200 lines and 64 columns.
• SFC objects can theoretically be placed in every unoccupied cell.
• Steps, transitions and jumps each require a cell. Branches and joints do not require
their own cell, but are inserted into the respective cell of the step or transition. Text
objects can be placed anywhere in the window.
• Steps and transitions are linked with one another through directional links. Two steps
can never be directly linked, and must always be separated by a transition, see also
section Connection rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
• To prevent step sequences being subdivided, 99 linked steps with the transitions are
vertically displayed along with a locking jump with its transition.
• A maximum of 1024 steps can be placed per SFC section (including all their macro
sections).

33003101.26 883
 SFC Editor

• A maximum of 100 steps can be active per SFC section (including all their macro
sections) (multi token), see also Tools > Project Settings dialog box, Language
extensions tab, Sequential Function Chart (SFC) area.
• A maximum of 64 steps can be set simultaneously per SFC section (multi token), see
also Tools > Project Settings dialog box, Language extensions tab, Sequential
Function Chart (SFC) area.
• A maximum of 100 actions are permitted using the S qualifier per SFC Section.
• A maximum of 20 actions can be assigned to each SFC step.
• The processes of the active signal status take place along the directional links,
triggered by the connecting of a transition. The direction of the string process follows
the directional links and runs from the under side of the predecessor step to the top side
of the successive step. Branches are processed from left to right.
• A syntax and semantics check, page 886 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered. The result of this check is displayed in colored text.
• Syntactically or semantically incorrect sections can be saved.

SFC program objects

The objects of the programming language SFC (Sequential Function Chart) help to divide a
section into a number of:
• Step, page 916
• Macro Step, page 929 (embedded sub-step sequence)
• Transitions, page 961 (transition conditions)
• Jump, page 970
• Alternative Sequence, page 976
• Parallel Sequence, page 976
These objects can be linked with each other using links, page 992.
Comments for the logic of the program can be added using text objects, page 1003.

Edit and view functions

Edit and view functions of the SFC editor:
• Selecting objects, page 889
• Deleting objects, page 892
• Cutting, page 893, copying, page 893 and pasting, page 894 objects
• Moving, page 895 objects

884 33003101.26
SFC Editor

• Undo, page 891 and Redo, page 891

• Using bookmarks, page 607
• Finding and replacing, page 1232 variables

Online functions
Online functions of the SFC editor:
• Setting breakpoints, page 1435
• Controlling, page 1439 SFC sequences

SFC save and restore

The SFC_RESTORE function block is used to restart all SFC charts of an application with a
given set of active steps at a state, saved before a CPU failure.
In a recovery situation it is possible to set a group of steps that represent a given state in the
process and to continue at that point.
(See SFC_RESTORE: SFC Save and Restore (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System,
Block Library) in the System Library).

Creating an SFC Program

Creating an SFC program
Carry out the following procedures to create an SFC program:

33003101.26 885
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Creating an SFC Section., page 507

2 Place the desired SFC element in the section and define its properties:
• Step, page 913
• Macro step, page 929
• Transitions, page 961
• Jumps, page 970
• Alternative strings, page 976
• Simultaneous strings, page 976
• Links, page 992

3 Create the last transition of the string and the first step of the string using graphical links or a
jump link (cyclical string processing).

Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming

Introduction
A syntax and semantics check is carried out during program creation. The result of this
check is displayed using color objects and text.

Representation
Representation of colors and labels:

Color Description Example

Black step Error free step

symbol

Blue step symbol Possible errors are:

• Input pin not connected
• Output pin not connected
• Assigned action variable not declared
• Assigned SFCSTEP_TIMES variable not
declared
Filled yellow step Minimum supervision time (see EcoStruxure™
symbol (only Control Expert, Program Languages and
Online) Structure, Reference Manual) for the step
below limit

886 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Color Description Example

Filled magenta Maximum supervision time (see EcoStruxure™

step symbol Control Expert, Program Languages and
(only Online) Structure, Reference Manual) for the step
exceeded
Black transition Error free transition variable
symbol

Black transition Error free transition section

symbol

Blue transition Possible errors are:

symbol • Input pin not connected
• Output pin not connected

Red wavy line Assigned transition variable not declared

Black jump Error free jump

symbol

Blue jump Possible errors are:

symbol
• Input pin not connected
• Jump target not defined
• Invalid jump target

Quickinfo
If the cursor is placed over faulty text or object, a Quickinfo (Tooltip) with a brief description
of the cause of the error appears.

Navigating with the keyboard

Using the keyboard
The following keys and key combinations are provided for navigation:

33003101.26 887
 SFC Editor

Key combinations Motion

Cursor left Moves the cursor to the left

Cursor right Moves the cursor to the right

Cursor up Moves the cursor up

Cursor down Moves the cursor down

Ctrl+Cursor left Moves the cursor one cell left
Ctrl+Cursor right Moves the cursor one cell right

Ctrl+Cursor up Moves the cursor one cell up

Ctrl+Cursor down Moves the cursor one cell down

Home Moves the cursor to the first displayed pixel of the current line

End Moves the cursor to the last displayed pixel of the current line

Ctrl+Home Shows the top left cell of the section (the position of the cursor is not
affected by this function)

Ctrl+End Shows the bottom right cell of the section (the position of the cursor is
not affected by this function)

Page Up Scrolls one page up (the position of the cursor is not affected by this
function)

Page Down Scrolls one page down (the position of the cursor is not affected by
this function)

Ctrl+Page Up Scrolls one page left (the position of the cursor is not affected by this
function)

Ctrl+Page Down Scrolls one page to the right (the position of the cursor is not affected
by this function)

Ctrl+Alt+Page Up Displays the previous section (including via the View > Previous
Sectionmenu).

Ctrl+Alt+Page Down Displays the next section (including via the View > Next
Sectionmenu).

Spacebar Selects the objects in the cell where the cursor is currently positioned.

Alt+Enter Opens the properties dialog box for the selected object.

888 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Selecting Objects
Select and Placement Mode
Selecting objects occurs in select mode.
Select mode can be activated by:
• Using the Edit > Select Mode menu command
• Using the symbol
or
• Pressing the Esc key

The cursor symbol indicates that select mode is active.

Selecting an Object
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Left-click the object you want to select. 1. Move the cursor to the object to be selected,
see also Navigating with the keyboard, page
887.
2. Press the spacebar.

Selecting Several Objects

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed. 1. Move the cursor to the first object to be
selected, see also Navigating with the keyboard,
2. Drag the mouse across the objects you want to page 887.
select.
2. Press the spacebar.
or
3. Move the cursor to the next object to be
1. Left-click the first object you want to selected
select.
4. Press the Ctrl+spacebar key combination.
2. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.
5. Repeat these steps until the desired objects are
3. Left-click the next object you want to selected.
select.
4. Repeat these steps until the desired
objects are selected.

33003101.26 889
 SFC Editor

Selecting by Rows
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Selecting the contents of a row: -

1. Left-click the number of the row you want to
select in the vertical ruler.
Selecting the contents of several rows:
1. Left-click the number of the first row you
want to select in the vertical ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last row you
want to select in the vertical ruler.
Note: Pressing the Shift key makes it possible to
combine this procedure with the procedure for
selecting by columns.

Selecting by Columns
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Selecting the contents of a column: -

1. Left-click the number of the column you want to
select in the vertical ruler.
Selecting the contents of several columns:
1. Left-click the number of the first column
you want to select in the vertical ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last column
you want to select in the vertical ruler.
Note: Pressing the Shift key makes it possible to
combine this procedure with the procedure for
selecting by rows.

Selecting All (Entire Contents of the Section)

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Use the Edit > Select All menu command. Press the Ctrl+A key combination.

890 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Deselecting Objects
Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Left-click an empty space in the section. 1. Move the cursor to an empty space in the
section, see also Navigating with the keyboard,
page 887.
2. Press the spacebar.

Undo and Redo Changes

Undo changes
Undo the last changes in the following ways:
• Use the Edit > Undo menu command.
• Press the Ctrl+Z key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Undo one change each time the function is carried out.
The function can be executed a maximum of 10 times.
If steps or transitions have been deleted, "Undo" means that the step and transition are
restored, including the information assigned to them.
If a deleted step/deleted transition has an action/transition section assigned to it, only the
reference to the action/transition section is restored and not the action/transition section
itself.

Redo changes
Using Redo, you can redo changes that have been made:
• Use the menu command Edit > Redo.
• Press the Ctrl+Y key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Redo one undone action each time the function is carried out.
The function can be executed a maximum of 10 times.

33003101.26 891
 SFC Editor

Limits
After any of the following actions has been carried outUndo and Redo cannot be used.
• Deleting a step or a macro step in online mode.
• Toggling between Normal View and Advanced View and vice versa.

Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting and moving objects

Deleting objects
Deleting objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 889 the object to be deleted. 1. Select, page 889 the object to be deleted.
2. Press the Entf key.
2. Use the Edit > Delete menu command.
Result:
• The selected object (and its graphical link when available) is deleted from the section.
• If action sections are assigned to a step, (in offline mode) you are asked to confirm whether the action
sections should be deleted. (In Online mode no confirmation is sought and the action sections remain until
they are explicitly deleted.)
• If a transition section is assigned to a transition, (in offline mode) you are asked to confirm whether this
transition section should also be deleted. (In online mode no confirmation is sought and the transition
section remains until it is explicitly deleted.)
• (If a transition variable is assigned in transition it remains until it is explicitly deleted.)
• If steps or transitions are to be deleted with step variables that will be used in the program (including on the
operating screen or in animation tables),
◦ a message will appear in the online mode that the step variables are used in the program and can only
be deleted in the offline mode. If the question whether the operation should be continued is confirmed
with Yes, the mode will change to offline and the object will be deleted.. No will terminate the
operation.
◦ a message will appear in the offline mode that the step variables are used in the program. If the
question whether the operation should be continued is confirmed with Yes, the object will be deleted..
WithNo the operation will be terminated.
• When deleting a macro step, the associated macro step section is moved to the Unused macros directory
for the current SFC section.
• If a step or macro step is deleted in online mode it cannot be undone using Undo.

NOTE: To delete entire rows or columns from the section, select the lines or columns in
the line box, see also Deleting Rows and Columns, page 899.

892 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Cutting objects
Cutting objects:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 889 the object to be cut. 1. Select, page 889 the object to be cut.

2. Use the Edit > Cut menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+X key combination.

or
Use the menu command Cut in the shortcut
menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

Result:
• The selected object (and its graphical link when available) is deleted from the section.
• If action sections are assigned to a step, (in offline mode) you are asked to confirm whether the action
sections should be deleted. (In Online mode no confirmation is sought and the action section remains until
it is explicitly deleted.)
• If a transition section is assigned to a transition, (in offline mode) you are asked to confirm whether this
transition section should also be deleted. (In online mode no confirmation is sought and the transition
section remains until it is explicitly deleted.)
• (If a transition variable is assigned in transition it remains until it is explicitly deleted.)
• If steps or transitions are to be deleted with step variables that will be used in the program (including on the
operating screen or in animation tables),
◦ a message will appear in the offline mode that the step variables are used in the program. If the
question whether the operation should be continued is confirmed with Yes, the object will be deleted..
WithNo the operation will be terminated.
◦ an additional message is displayed in the online mode that Create project can only be performed in
the offline mode.
• When deleting a macro step, the associated macro step section is moved to the Unused macros directory
for the current SFC section.
• If a step or macro step is deleted in online mode it cannot be undone using Undo.

The cut object can be inserted, page 894 in any other position (also in another SFC section).

Copying objects to the clipboard

Copying objects to the clipboard:

33003101.26 893
 SFC Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 889 the object to be copied. 1. Select, page 889 the object to be copied.

2. Use the Edit > Copy menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+C key combination.

or
Use the Copy menu command from the shortcut
menu (right-click).
or

Click the symbol.

Result:
• The selected object and associated information is copied to the clipboard.
• Graphical links can only be copied if they and their partner objects are explicitly selected.
• If action sections are assigned to a step, only the reference to the action section is copied to the clipboard,
not the action section itself.
• If transition sections are assigned to a transition, only the reference to the transition section is copied to the
clipboard, not the transition section itself.
• When copying macro steps, only the macro step is copied and not its macro step section.

The copied object can be inserted, page 894 in any other position (also in another SFC
section).

Pasting objects from the clipboard

Pasting objects from the clipboard:

894 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Press the Ctrl+V key combination.

1. Use the menu command Edit > Insert.
2. Move the cursor to the target position using the
or
arrow keys.
Use the menu command Paste in the shortcut
3. Press Enter.
menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

2. Left-click the target position.

Result:
• The objects contained in the clipboard and their associated information are inserted into the section.
• Graphical links can only be inserted if they and their partner objects have been explicitly copied to the
clipboard.
• If the objects to be inserted are placed on a graphical link, the link is undone and the objects are inserted
into the structure.
• When inserting steps and macro steps they are automatically assigned a unique name.
• If an action section is assigned to a step, only the reference to the action section is inserted into the section
together with the step and not the action section itself.
If an action section is not declared in the current section, the action with the action section is deleted when
it is inserted.
• If a transition section is assigned to a transition, only the reference to the transition section is inserted into
the section together with the transition and not the transition section itself.
A transition section may only be referenced once in a project. That means if a reference is already
available for a transition during insertion, only the transition object is inserted (without a reference).
• When inserting macro steps, only the macro step is inserted and not its macro step section. A new macro
step section is created instead. The names of the steps within this macro step section are automatically
matched to the (new) macro step names.

Moving objects (Drag & Drop)

Moving objects (Drag & Drop):

33003101.26 895
 SFC Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Position, page 889 the cursor on the object to be

1. Select, page 889 the object to be moved.
moved.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected
2. Press the spacebar.
object. (on one of the selected objects if several
are selected). 3. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol 4. Move the object to the target position using the
arrow keys.
to .
3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol

to .
4. Drag the object to the new position and release
the mouse button.
Result:
• The selected object is moved from its original position to the target position.
• Graphical links can only be moved if they and their partner objects are explicitly selected.
• If the objects to be moved are placed on a graphical link, the link is undone and the objects are inserted
into the structure.
• Graphical links can only be kept if they and their partner objects are explicitly selected.
Note: The move operation is also possible across sections between different opened SFC sections.

Note: When objects are moved beyond the visible window of the editor window, automatic scrolling of the
window will not begin until you reach the edge of the window with the mouse pointer, not as soon as the objects
are moved beyond the edge.

Copying objects by moving (Drag & Drop)

Copying objects via drag & drop:

896 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

-
1. Select, page 889 the object to be copied.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected object.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
4. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

5. Drag the object to the target position.
6. Release the mouse button.
Result:
• The copy of the selected object and its associated information is inserted into the
target position.
• Graphical links can only be copied if they and their partner objects are explicitly
selected.
• If the objects to be copied are placed on a graphical link, the link is undone and
the objects are inserted into the structure.
• When copying steps and macro steps they are automatically assigned a unique
name.
• If an action section is assigned to a step, only the reference to the action section is
inserted into the section together with the step and not the action section itself.
If an action section is not declared in the current section, the action with the action
section is deleted when it is inserted.
• If a transition section is assigned to a transition, only the reference to the transition
section is inserted into the section together with the transition and not the
transition section itself.
A transition section may only be referenced once in a project. That means if a
reference is already available for a transition section during insertion, only the
transition object is inserted (without a reference).
• When copying macro steps, only the macro step is copied and not its macro step
section. A new macro step section is created instead. The names of the steps
within this macro step section are automatically matched to the (new) macro step
names.

Inserting Rows and Columns

Rules for Inserting Rows
The following rules apply when inserting rows:
• The total number of rows in an SFC section cannot be changed.
However, the objects of an SFC section can be moved downwards by rows within the
available section and therefore empty rows can be inserted into the string.

33003101.26 897
 SFC Editor

• The same number of rows is inserted as selected in the vertical ruler.

• As many rows can be inserted as there are empty rows at the end of the section.
• The new rows are inserted above the first selected row (i.e. all objects of the selected
rows are moved down).
• When rows are inserted within existing links, these links are kept and are adjusted to
the new position of the objects.

Inserting Rows
Step Action

1 Select, page 890 the desired number of rows in the vertical ruler (click the row numbers).

2 Use the Insert cells menu command from the shortcut menu of the vertical ruler or the Edit >
Row operation > Insert cells command.

Result: The number of selected rows is inserted above the first selected row.

Rules for Inserting Columns

The following rules apply when inserting columns:
• The total number of columns in an SFC section cannot be changed.
However, the objects of an SFC section can be moved right by columns within the
available section and therefore empty columns can be inserted into the string.
• The same number of columns is inserted as is selected in the horizontal ruler.
• As many columns can be inserted as there are empty columns at the right border of the
section.
• The new columns are inserted above the first selected column (i.e. all objects of the
selected columns are moved right).
• When columns are inserted within existing branches or joints, the affected branches or
joints are expanded by the corresponding number of columns.

898 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Inserting Columns
Step Action

1 Select, page 890 the desired number of columns in the horizontal ruler (click the row numbers).

2 Use the Insert cells menu command from the shortcut menu of the horizontal ruler or the Edit >
Row operation > Insert cells command.

Result: The number of selected columns is inserted in front of the first selected column.

Deleting Rows and Columns

Rules for Deleting Rows
The following rules apply when deleting rows:
• The total number of rows in an SFC section cannot be changed.
However, the objects of an SFC section can be deleted by rows and the objects of the
following rows can be moved up.
• The same number of rows are deleted as are selected in the vertical ruler.
• The objects of the selected row(s) are deleted and the objects of the following rows are
moved up by the respective number of rows.
• If rows are deleted within existing links, these links are kept and are adjusted to the new
position of the objects.

Deleting Rows
Step Action

1 Select, page 890 the desired number of rows in the vertical ruler (click the row numbers).

2 You have the following options to delete the selected rows:

• Select the menu command Move and delete cells in the rows shortcut menu,
• execute the command Edit > Vertical ruler > Move and delete cells,
or
• Press the Del key.
Result: The selected number of rows is deleted.

33003101.26 899
 SFC Editor

Rules for Deleting Columns

The following rules apply when deleting columns:
• The total number of columns in an SFC section cannot be changed.
However, the objects of an SFC section can be deleted by columns and the objects of
the following rows can be to the left.
• The same number of columns are deleted as are selected in the horizontal ruler.
• The objects of the selected column(s) are deleted and the objects of the following
columns are moved to the left by the respective number of columns.
• If columns are deleted within existing branches or joints, the affected branches or joints
are contracted by the respective number of columns.

Deleting Columns
Step Action

1 Select, page 890 the desired number of columns in the horizontal ruler (click the row numbers).

2 You have the following options to delete the selected columns:

• Select the menu command Move and delete cells in the rows shortcut menu or,
• execute the command Edit > Vertical ruler > Move and delete cells,
or
• Press the Del key.
Result: The selected number of columns is deleted.

Displaying the object properties

Displaying the object properties
You have the following options to display the object properties dialog box:
• Double-click the object.
• Select, page 889 the object and use the Edit > Properties... dialog box..
• Select, page 889 the object and use the Properties...command.from the shortcut
menu.
• Select, page 889 the object and then press the Alt+Enter key combination.
When the properties dialog box is called without an object being selected, the section
properties dialog box , page 510 is opened.

900 33003101.26
SFC Editor

If several objects are selected, the commands do not work.

View data properties

You have the following options to display the section properties dialog box, page 1195:
• using the data editor, page 344
1. Selecting one or several lines in a list editor
2. Using the shortcut menu select the Propertiescommand.
• via the SFC section
1. Selecting one or several transitions in the SFC section.
2. From the context menu select the command Data properties or press Ctrl + Enter.

Initialize Search
Introduction
The Initialize Search function transfers the name of the selected element (search text) to
the Element text box in the Cross-References window.

Selecting the search text

Process the following steps to select the search text:

33003101.26 901
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Select the element to search for (search text).

The following elements can be searched for:

• step variables
(To search for a step variable, select the step symbol.)
• transition variables
(To search for a transition variable, select the transition symbol.)

2 Use the Services > Initialize Search menu command.

or

Select the menu command Initialize search from the sections shortcut menu.

or

Press the Ctrl+U key combination.

Result: The search text is transferred to the Element text box in the Cross-References window.

Initialize Animation Table

Introduction
The Initialize Animation Table transfers the selected variables to the Animation table, page
1475.

Selecting the variables

Process the following steps to select variables:

902 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Select the variables to transfer to the Animation table.

The following items can be selected:

• step variables
(To transfer step variables, select the step symbol.)
• transition variables
(To accept a transition variable, select the transition symbol.)

2 Use the Services > Initialize Animation table menu command.

or

Select the menu command Animation Table from the sections context menu.

or

Press the Ctrl+T key combination.

Result: The variable(s) is/are transferred to the Animation table, page 1475.

Initialize Animation Table

Using Initialize Animation Table (Ctrl+T) you create an animation table with a default
name e.g. Table[SFC Editor - Mixer : [MAST]]. You can rename the table.
All the variables you selected are listed in the animation table.
Selecting a new set of variables and using Initialize Animation Table again, all new
variables are added to this animation table (if you did not rename it).

Initialize New Animation Table

Using Initialize New Animation Table (Ctrl+Shift+T) you create a new animation table with
an indexed default name e.g. Table[SFC Editor - Mixer : [MAST]1]. You can rename
the table.
All the variables you selected are listed in the table.
But if you click anywhere in the section and do not select any variable, you create a new
empty animation table.
Every time you use Initialize New Animation Table you create a new animation table.

33003101.26 903
 SFC Editor

Refining steps, macro steps and transitions

Introduction
This function makes it possible to "look into" a macro step or a transition (section). This
makes it possible to see the internal state of the macro/transition section when animation is
used, or to make changes to the logic very quickly.

Refining steps
Process the following steps to refine steps:

Step Action

1 Select the step.

2 You have the following options to display to refine steps:

• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: If the step contains only one action section, this will be opened automatically.

If the step contains several action sections, a selection dialog box is opened.

Example:

3 Select the desired action section.

Result: The action section is opened.

904 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Refining macro steps

Process the following steps to refine macro steps:

Step Action

1 Select the macro step.

2 You have the following options to refine macro steps:

• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: The macro section is opened.

Note: With nested macro steps several refine processes are possible.

Refining transitions
Process the following steps to refine transitions:

Step Action

1 Select the transition.

2 You have the following options to refine transitions:
• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: The transition section is opened.

Go to
Introduction
The Go to function is used to jump to:
• a specific location in the current section,
• a specific bookmark in the current section or
• a specific step or macro step in the current section or
• a specific jump in the current section.

33003101.26 905
 SFC Editor

Open the dialog

The following options are available to open theGo to dialog box.
• Use the menu command Edit > Go to,
• select the menu command Go to from the sections shortcut menu,
• Press the key combination Ctrl+G.
or
• Choose the symbol.

Jump to a Position
Go to a certain location in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 906 the Go to dialog box.

2 Select the Position tab.

3 Enter the line and/or column number.
4 Confirm the entry using the command button Go to.

Result: The desired position is displayed.

Jump to Bookmark
Go to a certain bookmark in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 906 the Go to dialog box.

2 Choose theBookmark tab.

3 Select a bookmark in the list.
4 Double click on the selected bookmark or press the Go to command button.

Result: The bookmark is shown and marked as the current bookmark, page 607.

906 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Jump to a Step
Jump to a certain step or macro step in the current section by carrying out the following
steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 906 the Go to dialog box.

2 Select the Step tab.

3 Select a step or a macro step in the list.

4 Double click on the selected step or macro step or press the Go to command button.

Result: The desired step is displayed.

Jump to a Jump
Go to a certain jump in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 906 the Go to dialog box.

2 Select the Jump tab.

3 Select a jump in the list.

4 Double click on the selected jump or press the Go to command button.

Result: The desired jump is displayed.

Go to dialog
Call the dialog box:
Refer to the Opening the dialog, page 906

Call the dialog box

The Go to dialog box is made up of three tabs:

33003101.26 907
 SFC Editor

• Location
Go to a certain position in the current section using this tab:
• Bookmarks
Go to a certain bookmark in the current section using this tab:
• Step
This tab is used to a jump to a certain step or macro step in the current section
• Jump
Go to a certain jump in the current section using this tab:

Position tab
Representation of the tab Position:

Elements of the Position tab

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Row The number of the row to be displayed can be entered in this text box.

Column The number of the column to be displayed can be entered in this text box.

Go to Display the current position using the button desired position, page 906.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

908 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Register tab Bookmarks

Representation of theBookmark tab:

Elements of the tab Bookmark:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Bookmark: Select the bookmark to be displayed from this list box.

Prev If a current bookmark, page 607 is selected, a jump is made to the previous one and
the last one is marked as the current bookmark.

If no current bookmark is selected, the margin is search from the bottom to the top
for the next bookmark, which is marked as the current bookmark.

When the start of the section is reached, the search starts again from the bottom.

Next If a current bookmark, page 607 is selected, a jump is made to the previous one and
the last one is marked as the next bookmark.

If no current bookmark is selected, the margin is search from top to bottom for the
next bookmark, which is marked as the current bookmark.

When the end of the section is reached, the search starts again from the top.

Go to Display the current position using the button desired bookmark, page 906.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

33003101.26 909
 SFC Editor

tab Step
Display of the Register Step:

Elements of the register tab Step:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Steps: You can enter the names of the steps and macro steps to be shown in this text box.

You can enter the name of the step or macro step in the text box with the keyboard or
using the drop-down list by clicking with the mouse.

Go to Display the desired step or macro step, page 907 using the button.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

910 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Tab Jump
Display of the Register Jump:

Elements in the Jumptab:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Locations: You can enter the names of the jump to be shown in this text box.

You can enter the name of the jump in the text box with the keyboard or using the
drop-down list by clicking with the mouse.

Go to Display the current position using the button desired jump, page 907.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

List and display jumps

Introduction
The Display jumps function is used to list all jumps referencing this step and display a
selected position of the current section.

Open the dialog

To open the dialog, select the jump and execute the Display jumps command in the context
menu of the jump.

33003101.26 911
 SFC Editor

List in the dialog

Since the jumps do not have their own names, the dialog lists the positions of the jumps and
names of their preceding steps.

Display a selected position

Follow the steps below to display a selected position in the current section.

Step Action

1 Open the Display jumps dialog box:

2 Select a position from the list.

3 Confirm the selection using the command button Go to.

Result: The desired position is displayed.

Note: Instead of selecting the position and clicking on the button, you can also double-click on
the position.

Go to Step
Introduction
The Go to Stepfunction displays the referenced step of a jump.

Display the referenced step

Perform the steps below to display the referenced step of a jump.

Step Action

1 Select a jump,

2 Open the context menu (right-click).

3 Click on Go to Step.

Result: The referenced step is displayed.

912 33003101.26
SFC Editor

General Information about Steps

Overview
This section provides general information about using steps in the SFC programming
language.

Selecting steps
Introduction
An SFC section is a "status machine", i.e. the status is indicated by the active steps. Zero or
more actions belong to every step.

Selecting steps
Selecting steps:

Step type Description Call via menu Call via Call via Cursor
command symbol keyboard symbol

"Normal" step, A step becomes active, when the Edit > New > Step F3
page 917 upstream transition is satisfied,
and is normally inactive when the or
downstream is satisfied.
Step menu command
Zero or more actions belong to from the shortcut menu
every step. Steps without action
are known as waiting steps.

See also section Step (see

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.
Initial Step, The initial status of a sequence is Edit > New > Step F3
page 918 characterized by the initial step,
which is active when initializing or
the project containing the SFC
section. Initial steps are not Step menu command
usually assigned an action. With from the shortcut menu
single token (conforming to IEC
61131-3), only one initial step is
permitted per sequence.

33003101.26 913
 SFC Editor

Step type Description Call via menu Call via Call via Cursor
command symbol keyboard symbol

With multi token, any number (0

up to all steps in the string) of
initial steps are possible.

See also section Step (see

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.
Macro Step, Macro steps are used to call Edit > New > Macro Ctrl+F3
page 930 macro sections and therefore the Step
hierarchical structure of
sequence control. or

Macro sections calls are Macro Step menu

expansions to IEC 61131-3 and command from the
must be explicitly enabled via the shortcut menu
Tools > Project Settings dialog
box, in the Language
extensions tab by activating the
Allow macro sections check
box.

See also section Macro steps

and macro sections (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.

914 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step type Description Call via menu Call via Call via Cursor
command symbol keyboard symbol

InStep, page Every macro section begins with - - - -

940 an InStep.

InSteps are created automatically

in macro sections by the SFC
editor and cannot be deleted,
copied or inserted manually.

See also section InStep (see

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.
OutStep, Every macro section ends with - - - -
page 947 an OutStep.

OutSteps are created

automatically in macro sections
by the SFC editor and cannot be
deleted, copied or inserted
manually.

See also section OutStep (see

EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.

Placing steps
Introduction
Steps can be placed in any free cell.
If a step is placed in a cell that is already occupied by an object, an error message is
returned.
If a step is placed in a cell where the neighboring cell above or below already contains a
step, an error message is returned because a transition must be placed between two steps
(see also section Connection rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual).
A step which is placed always connects automatically with the neighboring objects above
and below if there are no free cells between them.

33003101.26 915
 SFC Editor

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object check box is selected, then the corresponding
properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedures
explained here are used when the check box is cleared.

Placing steps:
Placing steps:

Step Action

1 Select the desired step, see also Selecting steps, page 913.

2 Click the target cell in the SFC section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected step is inserted.

3 To place further steps of the same type:

• Click the target cell in the SFC section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Editing "normal" steps

Overview
This section describes how to edit "normal" steps in the SFC programming language.

916 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Defining the properties of steps

Introduction
The following can be defined for steps:
• the step name, page 917
• whether the step is an initial step, page 918
• the supervision times and the delay time
◦ as a literal, page 919
◦ as a SFCSTEP_TIMES variable, page 920
• the actions assigned, page 951
• a comment, page 924
To find a specific jump in the current section use the Go to dialog box.

Defining the step name

Defining the step name:

33003101.26 917
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the step.

Result: The step properties dialog box, page 924 is opened.

Example:

2 In order to change the name of the step, enter a step name in the Step Name text box, see also
section Step names (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

3 Confirm the step names with OK.

Result: The selected step name is enabled, the properties dialog box is closed, and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Defining an initial step

Defining an initial step:

918 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the step.

Result: The step properties dialog box, page 924 is opened.

2 In order to define an initial step, activate the Initial Step check box, see also section Step types
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the
Reference manual.

Example:

3 Confirm the entry with OK.

Result: The selected step is enabled in the section as an initial step, the properties dialog box is
closed, and a syntax and semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Example:

Defining the supervision time/delay time as a literal

Defining the supervision time/delay time as a literal:

33003101.26 919
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the step.

Result: The step properties dialog box, page 924 is opened.

2 In the Supervision times and delay time area, activate the Literal option button if it isn't already
activated.
3 Enter a value for the minimum supervision time, the maximum supervision time and the delay
time, see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Example:

4 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The step times are enabled, the properties dialog box is closed, and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Defining the supervision time/delay time as an SFCSTEP_TIMES

variable
Defining the supervision time/delay time as an SFCSTEP_TIMES variable:

920 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the step.

Result: The step properties dialog box, page 924 is opened.

2 In the Supervision times and delay time area, activate the 'SFCSTEP_TIMES' variable option
button if it isn't already activated.

Example:

3 In the data selection box, page 1841, specify a variable of the SFCSTEP_TIMES (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) data type.

You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can enter the name of the variable.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names using the
symbol.
or
• Using the command button ... you can open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174 and
confirm the selected variables there with OK.

33003101.26 921
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

4 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The selected SFCSTEP_TIMES variable is enabled, the properties dialog box is closed,
and a syntax and semantics check, page 886 is performed.

If the variable has already been declared (see also Derived variable declaration, page 390), the
procedure ends here.

If the SFCSTEP_TIMES variable has not yet been declared, process the following steps.

922 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

5 Declare a derived variable of the SFCSTEP_TIMES data type, see also Derived variable
declaration, page 390.

Example:

6 Enter a value for the minimum supervision time, the maximum supervision time and the delay
time, see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Example:

33003101.26 923
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Result: The SFCSTEP_TIMES variable is declared and the step frame is displayed in black.

Enter a comment
Enter a comment:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the step.

2 Select the Comment tab and enter a step comment.

3 Confirm the comment with OK.

Result: The comment is accepted and the properties dialog box is closed.

Steps properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Opening the properties dialog box, page 900

Structure of the properties dialog box

The steps properties dialog box consists of three tabs:

924 33003101.26
SFC Editor

• General
In this tab you can define:
◦ the step name, page 917
◦ whether it is an initial step, page 918
◦ the step supervision times and delay time as a variable, page 920 or literal, page
919
• Actions
In this tab you can define:
◦ the actions assigned to the step as an action variable, page 954 or as an action
section, page 956
◦ the qualifier, page 957 allocated to the action
◦ the time period for the qualifier, page 957
◦ the execution order, page 959 of the actions
• Comment
In this tab, you can enter a comment, page 924 about the step.

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

33003101.26 925
 SFC Editor

Element Description

Step Name Enter the step name, page 917 in this text box.

Initial Step When this check box is activated, the current step becomes an initial step, page 918.

Supervision times and Define the step supervision times and delay time in this area, see also section Step
delay time times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The contents of this area depends on the selected option:

• 'SFCSTEP_TIMES' variable
When you activate this option button, you can enter the step supervision and
delay times as variables, page 920 of the SFCSTEP_TIME data type in the
Name of 'SFCSTEP_TIMES' typed variable data selection box, page 1841,
see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
• Literals
When you activate this option button, you can enter the step supervision and
delay times as literals, page 919, see also section Step times (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the Reference manual.
◦ Maximum
Enter the maximum supervision time for the current step in this text box.
◦ Minimum
Enter the minimum supervision time for the current step in this text box.
◦ Delay
Enter the delay time for the current step in this text box.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

926 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Actions tab
Representation of the register tab Actions:

Elements of the Actions tab:

Element Description

Qualifier Select the qualifier, page 957 for the current action from this list box, see also section
Qualifiers (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Time Define the time period for the qualifiers, page 957 L (time limited), D (time delayed)
or DS (delayed and saved) in this area.

The contents of this area depends on the selected option:

• Literal
When you activate this option button, you can enter the time period as literals
in the text box.
• Variable
When you activate this check box, you can enter the time period as a TIME
data type in the data selection box, page 1841.

Action Define the action in this area.

The contents of this area depends on the selected option:

• Variable
When you activate this check box, you can enter the action as an action
variable, page 954 in the data selection box, page 1841.

33003101.26 927
 SFC Editor

Element Description

• Section
When you activate this check box, you can enter the action as an action
section, page 956 in the list box.

Action list box All actions of the current step are displayed in this list box.

Edit Action section This command button is only available when an action section is selected in the
action list box.

Use this command button to close the properties dialog box and open the selected
action section.
Init Search for selected This command button is only available when an action variable is selected in the
variable action list box.

Use this command button to close the properties dialog box and open the selected
action section.

The name of the action variable is applied using this command button in the Cross-
references window.
Accept action Use this command button to replace the definitions of the selected action in the
action list box with the modified definitions, page 953.

New action Use this command button to insert the new action, page 951 into the action list box.

Delete action Use this command button to delete the selected action in the action list box., page
959

Note: When deleting actions with action sections you are asked to confirm whether
the action section should be deleted. Please note that deleted sections cannot be
restored using Edit > Undo.

Move up Use this command button to move the selected actions in the action list box one
position up, see also Changing the execution order of actions, page 959.

Move down Use this command button to move the selected actions in the action list box one
position down, see also Changing the execution order of actions, page 959.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

928 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the step.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing macro steps

Overview
This section describes how to edit macro steps in the SFC programming language.
Macro steps are expansions to IEC 61131-3 and must be explicitly enabled via the Tools >
Project Settings dialog box, in the Language extensions tab by activating the Allow
macro sections check box.

33003101.26 929
 SFC Editor

Defining the properties of macro steps

Introduction
The following can be defined for macro steps:
• the macro step name, page 930
• the logic of the macro section, page 931
• the supervision times and the delay time
◦ as a literal, page 932
◦ as a SFCSTEP_TIMES variable, page 933
• a comment, page 937

Defining the macro step name

Defining the macro step name:

930 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the macro step.

Result: The macro step properties dialog box is opened, see also Macro Steps Properties Dialog
Box, page 937.

Example:

2 In order to change the name of the step, enter a name in the Step Name text box, see also
section Macro step names (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

3 Confirm the macro step name with OK.

Result: The macro step name selected is enabled for the macro step and the steps within the
macro step section. The properties dialog box is closed and a syntax and semantics check, page
886 is performed.

Editing the macro section

Editing the macro section:

33003101.26 931
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 of the macro step, and press the Edit command
button.

or

Select the macro step and process the Services > Refine menu command.
Result: The macro step properties dialog box is closed and the macro section of the macro step
is opened.

Example:

2 Create the macro section logic, see also section Macro sections (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Defining the supervision time/delay time as a literal

Defining the supervision time/delay time as a literal:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the macro step.

Result: The macro step properties dialog box is opened, see also Macro Steps Properties Dialog
Box, page 937.

2 In the Supervision times and delay time area, activate the Literal option button if it isn't already
activated.

932 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

3 Enter a value for the minimum supervision time, the maximum supervision time and the delay
time, see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Example:

4 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The step times are enabled, the properties dialog box is closed, and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Defining the supervision/delay time as an SFCSTEP_TIMES

variable.
Defining the supervision time/delay time as an SFCSTEP_TIMES variable:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the macro step.

Result: The macro step properties dialog box is opened, see also Macro Steps Properties Dialog
Box, page 937.

2 In the Supervision times and delay time area, activate the 'SFCSTEP_TIMES' variable option
button if it isn't already activated.

33003101.26 933
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

3 In the data selection box, page 1841, specify a variable of the SFCSTEP_TIMES data type, see
also section SFCSTEP_TIMES (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can enter the name of the variable.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names using the
symbol.
or
• Using the command button ... you can open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174 and
confirm the selected variables there with OK.

934 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

4 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The selected SFCSTEP_TIMES variable is enabled, the properties dialog box is closed,
and a syntax and semantics check, page 886 is performed.

If the variable has already been declared (see also Derived variable declaration, page 390), the
procedure ends here.

If the SFCSTEP_TIMES variable has not yet been declared, process the following steps.

33003101.26 935
 SFC Editor

Step Action

5 Declare a derived variable of the SFCSTEP_TIMES data type, see also Derived variable
declaration, page 390.

Example:

6 Enter a value for the minimum supervision time, the maximum supervision time and the delay
time, see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Example:

936 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

Result: The SFCSTEP_TIMES variable is declared and the macro step frame is displayed in
black.

Enter a comment
Enter a comment:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the macro step.

2 Select the Comment tab and enter a macro step comment.

3 Confirm the comment with OK.

Result: The comment is accepted and the properties dialog box is closed.

Macro Steps Properties Dialog Box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the object properties, page 900

Structure of the properties dialog box

The macro steps properties dialog box consists of 3 tabs:

33003101.26 937
 SFC Editor

• General
In this tab you can define:
◦ the macro step names, page 930
◦ the step supervision time and delay time as a variable, page 933 or literal, page 932
• Comment
A comment, page 937 about the step can be entered in this tab.

Tab General
Representation of the General tab:

Items of the General tab:

Item Description

Step name Enter the macro step name, page 930 in this text box.

Edit Use this command button to close the properties dialog box and open the macro
step section.

Supervision times and You define the step supervision time and delay time in this range, see also section
delay time Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The contents of this area depends on the option selected:

938 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Item Description

• 'SFCSTEP_TIMES' variable
If you check this option button you can enter in the data selection box , page
1841 Name of 'SFCSTEP_TIMES' typed variables the Step supervision and
delay times as variables, page 933 of the SFCSTEP_TIME data type.
• Literals
If you check this option button you can enter the Step supervision and delay
times as literals, page 932.
◦ Maximum
Enter the maximum supervision time for the current macro step in this text
box.
◦ Minimum
Enter the minimum supervision time for the current macro step in this text
box.
◦ Delay
Enter the delay time for the current macro step in this text box.

OK This command button enables all entries and closes the dialog box.

Apply This command button enables all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Tab Comment
Representation of the Actions tab:

Items of the Comment tab:

33003101.26 939
 SFC Editor

Item Description

Text box Enter a comment about the step.

OK This command button enables all entries and closes the dialog box.

Apply This command button enables all entries without closing the properties dialog box.

Editing input steps

Overview
This section describes how to edit input steps in the SFC programming language.

Defining the properties of InSteps

Introduction
The following can be defined for InSteps:
• the supervision times and the delay time, page 940
• the actions assigned, page 951
• a comment, page 941

Defining the supervision time/delay time

Defining the supervision time/delay time as a literal:

940 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the InStep.

Result: The properties dialog box for the step is opened, see also InSteps properties dialog box,
page 942.

2 Enter a value for the minimum supervision time, the maximum supervision time and the delay
time, see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Example:

3 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The step times are enabled, the properties dialog box is closed, and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Entering a comment
Entering a comment:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the InStep.

2 Select the Comment tab and enter a step comment.

3 Confirm the comment with OK.

Result: The comment is enabled and the properties dialog box is closed.

33003101.26 941
 SFC Editor

InSteps properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the object properties, page 900

Structure of the properties dialog box

The InStep properties dialog box consists of three tabs:
• General
In this tab you can define:
◦ the step supervision time and the delay time, page 940
• Actions
In this tab you can define:
◦ the actions assigned to the step as an action variable, page 954 or as an action
section, page 956
◦ the qualifier, page 957 allocated to the action
◦ the time period for the qualifier, page 957
◦ the execution order, page 959 of the actions
• Comment
In this tab, comment, page 941 about the InStep can be entered.

942 33003101.26
SFC Editor

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Step Name The names of InSteps cannot be changed, see also section Step names (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the Reference manual.

Supervision times and Define the step supervision times and the delay time in this area, see also section
delay time Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual. For InSteps, the steps times can be
exclusively defined as literals, page 919.
• Maximum
Enter the maximum supervision time for the current InStep in this text box.
• Minimum
Enter the minimum supervision time for the current InStep in this text box.
• Delay
Enter the delay time for the current InStep in this text box.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 943
 SFC Editor

Actions tab
Representation of the Actions tab:

Elements of the Actions tab:

Element Description

Qualifier Select the qualifier, page 957 for the current action from this list box, see also section
Qualifiers (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Time Define the time period for the qualifiers, page 957 L (time limited), D (time delayed)
or DS (delayed and saved) in this area.

The contents of this area depends on the option:

• Literal
When you activate this option button, you can enter the time period as literals
in the text box.
• Variable
When you activate this check box, you can enter the time period in the data
selection box, page 1841 as a TIME data type.

Action Define the action in this area.

The contents of this area depends on the selected option:

• Variable
When you activate this check box, you can enter the action as an action
variable, page 954 in the data selection box, page 1841.

944 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Element Description

• Section
When you activate this check box, you can enter the action as an action
section, page 956 in the list box.

Action list box All actions of the current step are displayed in this list box.

Edit Action section This command button is only available when an action section is selected in the
action list box.

Use this command button to close the properties dialog box and open the action
section selected.
Accept action Use this command button to replace the definitions of the selected action in the
action list box with the modified definitions, page 953.

New action Use this command button to insert the new action, page 951 in the action list box.

Delete action Use this command button to delete the selected action in the action list box., page
959

Note: When deleting actions with action sections you are asked to confirm whether
the action section should be deleted. Note that deleted sections cannot be restored
using the Edit > Undo menu command.

Up Use this command button to move the selected actions in the action list box one
position up, see also Modifying the execution order of actions, page 959.

Down Use this command button to move the selected actions in the action list box one
position down, see also Modifying the execution order of actions, page 959.

OK Us this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 945
 SFC Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the InStep.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing Output Steps

Overview
This section describes how to edit output steps in the SFC programming language.

946 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Defining the properties of OutSteps

Introduction
The following can be defined for OutSteps:
• the delay time, page 947
• a comment, page 948

Defining the delay time

Defining the delay time as a literal:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the OutStep.

Result: The properties dialog box for the step is opened, see also OutStep properties dialog box,
page 948.

2 Enter the value of the delay time, see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Example:

3 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The delay time is enabled, the properties dialog box is closed, and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

33003101.26 947
 SFC Editor

Entering a comment
Entering a comment:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the OutStep.

2 Select the Comment tab and enter a step comment.

3 Confirm the comment with OK.

Result: The comment is enabled and the properties dialog box is closed.

OutStep properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the object properties, page 900

Structure of the properties dialog box

The OutStep properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• General
In this tab you can define:
◦ the delay time, page 940
• Comment
In this tab, a comment, page 941 about the OutStep can be entered.

948 33003101.26
SFC Editor

General tab
Representation of the General tab:

Elements of the General tab:

Element Description

Step Name The names of OutSteps cannot be changed, see also section Step names (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the Reference manual.

Supervision times and Define the delay time in this area, see also section Step times (see EcoStruxure™
delay time Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the
Reference manual. For OutSteps, the delay time can be exclusively defined as
literal, page 947.
• Maximum
Not available
• Minimum
Not available
• Delay
Enter the delay time for the current OutStep in this text box.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 949
 SFC Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the OutStep.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing actions
Overview
This section describes how to edit actions in the SFC programming language.

950 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Assigning actions to a step

Introduction
Each step contains zero or a maximum of 20 actions, see also section Actions (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the
Reference manual.
The following can be defined for actions:
• as action variable, page 954, see also section Action variables (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the
Reference manual
• as action section, page 956 of the programming languages FBD, LD, IL or ST, see also
section Action sections (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual
• as Qualifiers, page 957, see also section Qualifiers (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual
• the order, page 959 in which the defined actions should be processed

Defining a new action

Defining a new action:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the step.

Result: The step properties dialog box is opened, see also Steps properties dialog box, page
924.
2 Select the Actions tab.

Result: The dialog box for defining actions is opened.

33003101.26 951
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

3 In the Action area, define an action as

• action variable, page 954
or
• action section, page 956

4 If necessary, define an Qualifier in the Qualifier symbol, page 957 list box.

952 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

5 Confirm the definitions for the action with the New action button.

Result: The action is enabled in the action list box.

Example:

6 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The actions are accepted, the properties dialog box is closed, and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Modifying an action
Modifying an action:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the step.

Result: The step properties dialog box is opened, see also Steps properties dialog box, page
924.
2 Select the Actions tab.

Result: The dialog box for defining actions is opened.

3 Select the action to modify from the actions list box.

Result: The properties of the selected action are enabled in the Qualifier, Time and Action
areas.

33003101.26 953
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

4 If necessary, modify in the Action area

• action variable, page 954
or
• action section, page 956
Note: When modifying action sections you are asked to confirm whether the current action
section should be deleted. Please note that deleted sections cannot be undone usingEdit
> Undo .
5 If necessary, define an Qualifier in the Qualifier symbol, page 957 list box.

6 Confirm the changes for the action with the Accept action button.

Result: The definitions of the selected action in the action list box are replaced with the changed
definitions.
7 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The actions are accepted, the properties dialog box is closed, and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Defining an action variable

Defining an action variable:

954 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Select the Actions tab from the step properties dialog box, if it isn't already activated.

2 In the Action area, activate the Variable option button, if it isn't already activated.

3 Enter a Boolean variable/address, or a Boolean element of a multi-element variable in the data

selection box, page 1841, see also section Action variables (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can enter the name of the variable.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names using the
symbol.
or
• Using the button... you can open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174 and confirm
the selected variables there with OK.
Example:

4 If necessary, define an qualifier, page 957 for the action.

If you do not define an qualifier, the action section is automatically assigned the qualifier N (no
qualifier).

5 Click the New action button to insert a new action, page 951, or the Accept action button to
modify an existing action, page 953.

Result: The action is enabled in the action list box.

6 If the action variable has not been declared, declare it as BOOL data type, see also Creation of
EDT instances, page 386.

33003101.26 955
 SFC Editor

Defining a new action section

Defining a new action section:

Step Action

1 Select the Actions tab from the step properties dialog box, if it isn't already activated.

2 In the Action area, activate the Section option button.

3 Enter the name of the action section in the list box, see also section Action sections (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the
Reference manual.
4 If necessary, define an qualifier, page 957 for the action section.

If you do not define an qualifier, the action section is automatically assigned the qualifier N (no
qualifier).

5 Click the New action button to insert a new action, page 951, or the Accept action button to
modify an existing action, page 953.

Result: The action is enabled in the action list box.

Example:

6 Click the Edit Action section button to create the action section logic.

Result: A dialog box is opened for defining the programming language for the action section.

956 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

7 Select the desired programming language for the action section and confirm the selection with
OK.

Information for creating LD sections: An LD section contains 11-63 columns and 17-3998
lines. The number of columns is defined using the Tools > Project Settings...dialog box, in the
Editors tab, in the Number of columns text box. These settings are only valid for new sections
and not for existing sections. Always define the number of columns before you create a new LD
section. (The number of lines can be increased or reduced during the creation of section
contents.)

Result: The step properties dialog box is closed and the action section is opened.

8 Create the action section logic, see also section Action sections (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Note: If the action sections subprograms are called in the Tools > Project settings... >
Language extensions dialog box, the options Subprograms allowed and Multi Token allowed
must be activated.

Please note that the subroutine called from the action section do not affect the sequence string
control, i.e.
• the qualifier assigned to the action section has no effect on the subroutine,
• the subroutine remains active when the calling step is deactivated.

Defining the qualifier

Defining the qualifier for an action:

Step Action

1 Select the Actions tab from the step properties dialog box, if it isn't already activated.

2 Select the desired qualifier from the Qualifier list box, see also section Qualifiers (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the
Reference manual.
3 If you select an qualifier of type L (time limited), D (time delayed) or DS (delayed and saved), you
are assigning a time period for the qualifier.

33003101.26 957
 SFC Editor

Step Action

You can define the time period as a literal or as a variable of the TIME data type:
• Literal
1. In the Time area, activate the Literal option button, if it isn't already activated.
2. Enter a time period, e.g. 500 ms, 1 sec.
• Variable
1. Activate the Variable option button in the Time area.
2. You have the following options to enter variables:
You can enter the name of the variable.
You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names using
the symbol.
or
Using the button... you can open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174 and
confirm the selected variables there with OK.
3. If the variable is not already declared, declare it as a variable of the TIME data type
and assign the variables with the desired time period, see also Creation of EDT
instances, page 386.

4 Define the action variable, page 954 or the action section, page 956.

5 Click the New action button to insert a new action, page 951, or the Accept action button to
modify an existing action, page 953.

Result: The action is enabled with the qualifier in the action list box.

Example:

958 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Modifying the execution order of actions

Modifying the execution order of actions:

Step Action

1 Select the Actions tab from the step properties dialog box, if it isn't already activated.

2 Select the action from the action list box whose execution order you want to change.

Note: If several actions are assigned to a step, they are executed in the order they are listed in
the action list box.

Exception: Regardless of their position in the action list box, actions with the qualifier P1 are
always processed first and actions with the qualifier P0 are always processed last, see also
section Qualifiers (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

3 Move the selected action to the target position using the Move up and Move down buttons.

Deleting actions
Deleting actions:

Step Action

1 Select the Actions tab from the step properties dialog box, if it isn't already activated.

2 Select the action to be deleted from the actions list box.

The following selection options are available:

• Selecting an action
1. Click the action.
• Selecting several non-sequential actions
1. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
2. Click the first action to be selected.
3. Click the last action to be selected.
• Selecting several sequential actions
1. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.
2. Click the actions to be selected.
3 To delete the selected action(s), click the Delete action button.

Note: When deleting actions with action sections you are asked to confirm whether the action
section should be deleted. Please note that deleted sections CANNOT be restored using Edit >
Undo.

33003101.26 959
 SFC Editor

Display modes for actions

Introduction
The following display modes are available:
• Input mode
• Expanded display
You have the following options to switch between modes:
• Use the View > Expanded Display menu command.
or
• Press the Ctrl+E key combination.
You can see which mode is active (Expanded Display) by way of a check-symbol in front of
the menu command.

Input mode
Only the step symbol is displayed in this mode.
Example of a section in input mode:

Expanded display
In addition to the step symbol, this mode displays the actions assigned to the section and
their properties (qualifier, name of the action variable/section and the time period defined for
the qualifier, if available). If more than two actions are assigned to a step you can scroll the
list.

960 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Example of a section in Expanded Display:

Editing Transitions
Overview
This section describes how to edit transitions in the SFC programming language.

Placing transitions
Introduction
A transition provides the condition through which the checks of one or more pre-transition
steps pass on one or more consecutive steps along the corresponding link.
Transitions can be placed in any free cell.
If a transition is placed in a cell that is already occupied by an object, an error message is
returned.
If a transition is placed in a cell where the neighboring cell above or below already contains
a transition, an error message is returned because a step must be placed between two
transitions (see also section Connection rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual).
A transition which is placed always connects automatically with the neighboring objects
above and below if there are no free cells between them.

33003101.26 961
 SFC Editor

Activating transition placement mode

You have the following options to activate the transition placement mode:
• Use the Edit > New > Transition menu command.
• Use the Transition menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the Shift+F3 key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.

The active transition placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object check box is selected, then the corresponding
properties dialog box is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedures
explained here are used when the check box is cleared.

Placing transitions
Placing transitions:

Step Action

1 Activate the transition placement mode.

2 Click the target cell in the SFC section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The transition is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

3 To insert further transitions:

• Click the target cell in the SFC section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

962 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Defining transition properties

Introduction
The following can be defined for transitions:
• the assigned transition condition
◦ as variable, page 963
◦ as transition section, page 965
• whether the transition condition should be inverted, page 967 (trigger the transition
when 0)
• a comment, page 967

Defining the transition condition as a variable

Defining the transition condition as a variable:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the transition.

Result: The properties dialog box for the transition is opened, see also Properties dialog box for
transitions, page 968.

2 In the Type of transition condition area, activate the Variable option button, if it isn't already
activated.
3 In the BOOL variable, value or address data selection box, page 1841, enter a Boolean
variable/address, a Boolean element for a multi-element variable or a Boolean literal, see also
section Transition conditions (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can enter the name of the variable.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names using the
symbol.
or
• Using the command button ... you can open a variable selection dialog box, page 1174 and
confirm the selected variables there with OK.

33003101.26 963
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

4 Confirm the entry with OK.

Result:
• If the selected variable is already declared, the transition condition is accepted, the
properties dialog box is opened, a syntax and semantics check is, page 886 carried out and
the procedure is ended.

• If the selected variable is not declared, a variable declaration dialog box opens. In this case,
continue with the following steps of this procedure.
Variable declaration dialog box

Note: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog box using the symbol. In
this case, the variable name is enabled in the section, but not declared. You can declare the
variables later in the Data Editor, page 386 or by selecting the transition and the executing
the menu command Generate Variable in the shortcut menu.
5
If you do not want to assign the variable an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the
symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
886 is performed and the procedure ends here.

964 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

6
To assign an address or comment, use the symbol.

Result: The dialog box expands.

7 Enter the address or comment, or both.

8
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result:The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check, page
886 is performed.

Example:

Defining the transition condition as a section

Defining the transition condition as a section:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the transition.

Result: The properties dialog box for the transition is opened, see also Properties dialog box for
transitions, page 968.

2 In the Type of transition condition area, activate the TRANSITIONS section option button.

3 Enter the name of the transition section in the text box, see also section Transition section (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the
Reference manual.

You have the following options to enter the section name:

• You can enter the section name.
or

33003101.26 965
 SFC Editor

Step Action

• You can select the name of the section from the list of transition sections which are defined
but not yet used with the symbol.
Example:

4 To create the logic for the transition section, click the Edit command button.

Result: A dialog box to define the programming language of the transition section is opened.

Example:

5 Select the desired programming language for the transition section and confirm the selection with
OK.

Information for creating LD sections: An LD section contains 11-63 columns and 17-3998
lines. The number of columns is set via the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Editors
tab in the Number of columns text box. These settings are only valid for new sections and not
for existing sections. Always define the number of columns before you create a new LD section.
(The number of lines can be increased or reduced during the creation of section contents.)

Result: The properties dialog box is closed and the transition section is opened.

6 Create the logic for the transition section, see also section Transition section (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

966 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Inverting the transition condition

Inverting the transition condition:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the transition.

Result: The properties dialog box for the transition is opened, see also Properties dialog box for
transitions, page 968.

2 To invert the transition condition, activate the Invert transition condition check box.

Example:

3 Confirm the entry with OK.

Result: The transition condition is represented as inverted in the section, the properties dialog
box is closed and a syntax and semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Example:

Enter a comment
Enter a comment:

33003101.26 967
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the transition.

2 Select the Comment tab and enter a transition comment.

3 Confirm the comment with OK.

Result: The comment is accepted and the properties dialog box is closed.

Properties dialog box for transitions

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the object properties, page 900

Structure of the properties dialog box

The transition properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• Transition Condition
In this tab you can define:
◦ the transition condition assigned to the transition as a transition variable, page 963
or as a transition section, page 965
◦ whether the transition condition should be inverted, page 967
• Comment
In this tab, a comment, page 924 about the transition can be entered.

968 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Transition Condition tab

Representation of the Transition Condition tab:

Elements of the Transition Condition tab:

Element Description

Invert transition If you activate this check box, the transition condition is inverted (trigger the
condition transition when 0).

Type of transition In this area, you can define the transition condition, see also section Transition
condition conditions (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The contents of this area depends on the selected option:

• Variable
If you activate this option button, you can enter a Boolean variable/address, a
Boolean element of a multi-element variable or a Boolean literal in the BOOL
variable, value or address data selection box, page 1841.
• TRANSITION section
When you activate this option button, you can go to the TRANSITION Section
text box and enter the name of the transition section.
Note: This text box is only used for referencing transition sections. If you want
to rename an existing transition section, you must execute this in the properties
dialog of the transitions section.

Edit This command button is only available when the TRANSITION section option button
is activated in the Type of transition condition area.

Use this command button to close the properties dialog box and open the respective
transition section.
OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 969
 SFC Editor

Comment tab
Representation of theCommenttab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the transition.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing Jumps
Overview
This section describes how to edit jumps in the SFC programming language.

970 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Placing jumps
Introduction
Jumps are used to represent directional links which are not displayed in full length.
Jumps can be placed in any free cell.
If a jump is placed in a cell that is already occupied by an object, an error message is
returned.
If a jump is placed in a cell where the neighboring cell above already contains a step, an
error message is returned because a transition must be placed between a step and a jump
(see also section Connection rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual).
A jump which is placed always connects automatically with the neighboring objects above if
there are no free cells between them.
Use the context sensitive Go to, Go to step or List and display jumps dialogs to find a
certain jump in the current section.

Activating the jump placement mode

You have the following options to activate the jump placement mode:
• Use the Edit > New > Jump menu command.
• Use the Jump menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Choose the symbol.

The active jump placement mode is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Note
If in the Tools > Options dialog in the Data and Languages tab the Automatically assign
a variable to a new graphics object checkbox is enabled, an objects property dialog will
automatically open during placement. The procedures explained here are used when the
check box is cleared.

33003101.26 971
 SFC Editor

Placing jumps
Placing jumps:

Step Action

1 Activate the jump placement mode.

2 Click the target cell in the SFC section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The jump is inserted and the selection mode is enabled again.

3 To insert further jumps:

• Click the target cell in the SFC section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Defining jump properties

Introduction
The following can be defined for jumps:
• the jump target, page 972, see also Jump (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
• a comment, page 974

Defining the jump target

Defining the jump target:

972 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the jump.

Result: The jump properties dialog box is opened, see also Calling the properties dialog box,
page 974.

2 Enter the name of the target step in the text box, see also Jump (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Note: With multi-token, you can enable the option to jump into a parallel sequence or out of a
parallel sequence, see also the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Language
extensions tab, Sequential control (SFC) area.

You have the following options to enter the target step name:
• You can enter the step name.
or
• You can select the name of the step from the list of steps used in the current section with
the symbol.
Example:

3 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result: The properties dialog box is closed, the jump target is accepted and a syntax and
semantics check, page 886 is performed.

Example:

4 Create the logic for the transition section, see also Transition section (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

33003101.26 973
 SFC Editor

Entering a comment
Entering a comment:

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the jump.

2 Select the Comment tab and enter a jump comment.

3 Confirm the comment with OK.

Result: The comment is enabled and the properties dialog box is closed.

Jump properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
You have the following options to call the properties dialog box:
• Double-click the jump.
• Select the jump and use the Edit > Properties... menu command.
or
• Select the jump and use the Object Properties... menu command from the shortcut
menu.

Structure of the properties dialog box

The jump properties dialog box consists of two tabs:
• Jump target
You can define the Jump target, page 972 this tab.
• Comment
In this tab, a comment, page 924 about the transition can be entered.

974 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Jump target tab

Representation of the Jump target tab:

Elements of the Jump target tab:

Element Description

Step Name Enter the name of the target step, page 972 in this text box, see also section Jumps
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the Reference manual.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

33003101.26 975
 SFC Editor

Comment tab
Representation of the Comment tab:

Elements of the Comment tab:

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the transition.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing Branches and Joints

Overview
This section describes how to edit branches and joints in the SFC programming language.

976 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Selecting Branches and Joints

Introduction
Alternative sequences and parallel sequences are differentiated in SFC:
• Alternative sequence
The alternative sequence offers the option to program conditional branches in the
control flow of the SFC structure, see also Alternative Branches and Alternative Joints
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the Reference manual.
Alternative sequences consist of:
◦ Alternative branch
With alternative branches, as many transitions follow a step under the horizontal line
as there are different processes.
◦ Alternative joint
All alternative branches are linked to a single branch using alternative joints or
jumps where they are then continued to be processed.
• Parallel sequence
With parallel sequences the connection of an individual transition leads to the parallel
activation of several (maximum 32) steps (branches). After this activation, the individual
branches are processed independently from one another, see also Parallel Branches
and Parallel Joints (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.
Parallel sequences consist of:
◦ Parallel branch
With parallel branches, as many transitions follow a step under the horizontal line as
there are parallel processes.
◦ Parallel joint
In accordance to IEC 61131-1, all parallel branches are joined at their ends by a
common parallel joint. The transition to a parallel connection is evaluated when all
previous steps of the transition are set.
If a parallel branch is combined using an alternative joint, this is only possible with
Multi-Token-Operation, see also dialog box Tools > Project Settings tab Language
extensions area Sequential control (SFC).

Selecting Branches and Joints

Selecting Branches and Joints:

33003101.26 977
 SFC Editor

Type Call via menu command Call via Call via Cursor
symbol keyboard symbol

Alternative branch, page 978 Edit > New > Alternative F4

branch

or

Branches and Joints >

Alternative branch shortcut
menu
Alternative joint, page 978 Edit > New > Alternative joint Shift+F4

or

Branches and Joints >

Alternative joint shortcut menu

Parallel branch, page 978 Edit > New > Parallel branch F5

or

Branches and Joints > Parallel

branch shortcut menu
Parallel joint, page 978 Edit > New > Parallel joint Shift+F5

or

Branches and Joints > Parallel

joint shortcut menu

Placing branches and joints

Introduction
Branches and joints do not require their own cell, but are inserted into the respective cell of
the step or transition.
If a branch or joint is placed in a cell that already contains a branch or joint an error message
is returned (see also section Connection rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual).
A branch or joint which is placed connects automatically with the neighboring objects above
and below if there are no free cells between them.

Placing branches or joints

Placing branches or joints:

978 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Select the desired branch or joint, see also Selecting Branches and Joints, page 977.

2 Click the target cell in the SFC section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected branch or joint is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

3 To place further elements of the same type:

• Click the target cell in the SFC section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Modifying the Properties of Branches and Joints

Introduction
The following can be defined for branches:
• the number of output pins
◦ by dragging the mouse, page 980
◦ using the properties dialog box, page 980
• the position of the input pin
◦ using the properties dialog box, page 981
The following can be defined for joints:
• the number of input pins
◦ by dragging the mouse, page 980
◦ using the properties dialog box, page 980
• the position of the output pins
◦ using the properties dialog box, page 981

33003101.26 979
 SFC Editor

Defining the number of pins using the mouse

Defining the number of pins using the mouse:

Step Action

1 Select the branch or joint.

Result: A change label is placed at both ends of the branch or joint.

Example:

2 Place the mouse pointer on one of the change labels.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

3 Drag the branch or joint in the desired direction using the mouse.

Result: The branch or joint is expanded to the desired number of pins.

Example:

Defining the number of pins using the properties dialog box

Defining the number of pins using the properties dialog box:

980 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the branch or joint.

Result: The properties dialog box for the branch, page 982 or joint, page 983 is opened.

Example of a properties dialog box for branches:

2 Enter the desired number of output pins (for branches) or the desired number of input pins (for
joints).

Example of a properties dialog box for branches:

3 Confirm the entry with OK.

Result: The number of pins is accepted.

Example:

Defining the position of the input or output pin

Defining the position of the input pin (for branches) or output pin (for joints):

33003101.26 981
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog box, page 900 for the branch or joint.

Result: The properties dialog box for the branch, page 982 or joint, page 983 is opened.

Example of a properties dialog box for branches:

2 Enter the target position of the input pin (for branches) or the position of the output pin (for joints).

Note: The position numbers start at 0.

Example of a properties dialog box for branches:

3 Confirm the entry with OK.

Result: The position of the input or output pin is accepted.

Example:

Branches properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the object properties, page 900

982 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Build
Representation of the dialog box:

Elements of the dialog box:

Element Description

OutPin number Enter the number of output pins, page 980 of the branch in this text box.

InPin position Enter the position of the input pin, page 981 of the branch in this text box.

Note: The position numbers start at 0.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the properties dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Joints properties dialog box

Calling the properties dialog box
see Displaying the object properties, page 900

Build
Representation of the dialog box:

Elements of the dialog box:

33003101.26 983
 SFC Editor

Element Description

InPin number Enter the number of input pins, page 980 of the branch in this text box.

OutPin position Enter the position of the output pin, page 981 of the branch in this text box.

Note: The position numbers start at 0.

OK Use this command button to accept all entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept all entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Inserting Alternative Strings and Simultaneous

Strings
Overview
This section describes how to insert alternative strings and simultaneous strings in the SFC
programming language.

Selecting Alternative Sequences and Parallel Sequences

Introduction
You can place alternative sequence and parallel sequence objects (branches, steps,
transitions, joints) individually or place entire alternative sequences or parallel sequences.
You can select any number of branches or transitions (with alternative sequences) or steps
(with parallel sequences).
See also section Branches and Joints (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Selecting Sequences
Selecting alternative sequences and parallel sequences

984 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Sequence type Call via menu command Call via Cursor

symbol symbol

Alternative sequence, page Sequences > Alternative Sequence shortcut

985 menu

Parallel Sequence, page 986 Sequences > Parallel Sequence shortcut

menu

Placing alternative sequences and parallel sequences

Introduction
Alternative sequences and branches can only be placed in free cells. The number of free
cells required depends on the size of the sequence to be inserted.
If a cell, in which an alternative sequence or parallel sequence is to be placed, is already
occupied by an object, an error message is returned.
An alternative sequence or parallel sequence which is placed always connects automatically
with the neighboring objects above and below if there are no free cells between them, see
also section Connection rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Placing an alternative sequence

Placing an alternative sequence:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for alternative sequences, see also Selecting Alternative
Sequences and Parallel Sequences, page 984.

Result: The dialog box for defining the sequence size is opened.

Example:

2 Enter the number of transition-step sequences to be inserted per branch in the Rows to insert
text box.

33003101.26 985
 SFC Editor

Step Action

3 Enter the number of branches to be inserted into the Columns to insert text box.

Example:

4 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and the cursor changes its symbol to .

5 Click the cell where the input pin of the alternative sequence should be placed.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The alternative sequence is inserted into the section.

Example:

6 Define the properties of the placed steps, page 917 and transitions, page 963.

Placing a parallel sequence

Placing a parallel sequence:

986 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for parallel sequences, see also Selecting Alternative Sequences
and Parallel Sequences, page 984.

Result: The dialog box for defining the sequence size is opened.

Example:

2 Enter the number of step-transition sequences to be inserted per branch in the Rows to insert
text box.
3 Enter the number of branches to be inserted into the Columns to insert text box.

Example:

4 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and the cursor changes its symbol to .

33003101.26 987
 SFC Editor

Step Action

5 Click the cell where the input pin of the alternative sequence should be placed.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The parallel sequence is inserted into the section.

Example:

6 Define the properties of the placed steps, page 917 and transitions, page 963.

Inserting Step-Transitions and Transition-Step-

Sequences
Overview
This section describes how to insert step transitions and transition step sequences using the
SFC programming language.

Selecting Step-Transition and Transition-Step Sequences

Introduction
You can place the steps and transitions individually or place complete Step-Transitions or
Transition-Steps. Any number of steps and transitions can be selected.

988 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Selection
Selecting Step-Transitions and Transition-Step Sequences:

Sequence type Call via the menu command Call via the Cursor
icon symbol

Insert Step-Transition- Sequence > Step-Transition Sequence

Sequence, page 989 shortcut menu

Transition-Step Sequence, Sequence > Transition-Step Sequence

page 991 shortcut menu

Placing step-transition and transition-step sequences

Introduction
Step-transition and transition-step sequences can only be placed in free cells. The number
of free cells required depends on the size of the sequence to be inserted.
If a cell, in which the step-transition or transition-step sequence is to be placed, is already
occupied by an object, an error message is returned.
A step-transition or transition-step sequence which is placed always connects automatically
with the neighboring objects above and below if there are no free cells between them, see
also section Connection rules (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

Placing a step-transition sequence

Placing a step-transition sequence:

33003101.26 989
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for step-transition sequences, see also Selecting Step-Transition
and Transition-Step Sequences, page 988.

Result: The dialog box for defining the number of step-transition sequences is opened.

Example:

2 Enter the number of step-transition sequences to be inserted into the Rows to insert text box.

Example:

3 Confirm the entry with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and the cursor changes its symbol to .

990 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

4 Click the cell where the input pin of the step-transition sequence should be placed.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The step-transition sequences are inserted into the section.

Example:

5 Define the properties of the placed steps, page 917 and transitions, page 963.

Placing a transition-step sequence

Placing a transition-step sequence:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for transition-step sequences, see also Selecting Step-Transition
and Transition-Step Sequences, page 988.

Result: The dialog box for defining the number of transition-step sequences is opened.

Example:

2 Enter the number of transition-step sequences to be inserted into the Rows to insert text box.

33003101.26 991
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

3 Confirm the entry with OK.

Result: The dialog box is closed and the cursor changes its symbol to .

4 Click the cell where the input pin of the transition-step sequence should be placed.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The transition-step sequences are inserted into the section.

Example:

5 Define the properties of the placed steps, page 917 and transitions, page 963.

Editing Links
Overview
Editing links in the SFC programming language.

992 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Links
Introduction
Links connect steps and transitions, transitions and steps, etc.
Attention should be paid to the following programming information:
• Links between objects of the same type (step with step, transition with transition, etc.)
are not possible.
• Links are possible between:
◦ Unused object outputs
◦ Used or unused step inputs
(i.e. step inputs can be connected using links)
• Overlapping links and other SFC objects (step, transition, jump, etc.) is not possible.
• Overlapping links and links is possible.
• Crossing links and links is possible. Crossed links are indicated by a "broken" link.

• The signal flow is generally from top to bottom. In exceptional cases (e.g. return) it can
also be from bottom to top. This special case is indicated using an arrow symbol.

NOTE: A detailed description about links can be found in section Links (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in
the Reference manual.

Selecting links
You have the following options to activate the placement mode:
• Use the Edit > New > Link menu command.
• Use the Link menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the F6 key.
or
33003101.26 993
 SFC Editor

• Select the symbol.

The and cursor symbols indicate which mode is active.

Placing a Link
Placing a link using the mouse
Carry out the following steps to place a link using the mouse:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for links, see also Links, page 993.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the start point of the link.

Note: The correct position is shown by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

994 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

3 Click the left mouse button on the start point and drag mouse pointer to the target point of the
link.

Example:

Tips:
• By clicking between the start point and target position you can place intermediate points; for
example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• You can leave this mode at any time by pressing Esc.

4 Click on the target position with the left mouse button.

Result: The link is inserted.

Example:

See also Editing links, page 998

33003101.26 995
 SFC Editor

Placing a link using the keyboard

Carry out the following steps to place a link using the keyboard:

Step Action

1 Activate the placement mode for links, see also Links, page 993.

2 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the link, and press Enter.

Note: The correct position is shown by the cursor symbol.

Example:

996 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

3 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the target position of the link.

Example:

Tips:
• By pressing the Enter key between the start point and target position you can place
intermediate points; for example, to avoid crossing other objects.
• You can leave this mode at any time by pressing Esc.

4 Press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted.

Example:

See also Editing links, page 998

33003101.26 997
 SFC Editor

Editing links
Editing links
Links are comprised of one or more segments connected to one another.
When cutting, page 893, deleting, page 892, copying, page 893 and moving, page 895 links,
the action is executed for the entire link.
If a link is selected, the target points are displayed at their beginnings, ends and at every
direction change

Moving links vertically/horizontally

Process the following procedures to move a link segment vertically or horizontally:

Step Action

1 Select the link.

2 Place the mouse pointer on the item to be moved.

Note: The correct position is indicated by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

998 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

3 Click the left mouse button and drag the segment to the target position.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result:

The change is made.

Creating angles in FFB links

Process the following steps to create angles in links:

Step Action

1 Select the link.

2 Place the mouse pointer on a change label.

Note: The correct position is indicated by the mouse pointer symbol.

33003101.26 999
 SFC Editor

Step Action

Example:

3 Click the left mouse button and drag the change label to the target position.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result:

The change is made.

Creating a sizing handle

The creation of angles in links can only be made using sizing handles. If no sizing handles
are available they can be created. Process the following steps to create sizing handles in
links:

1000 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link.

2 Press the Ctrl key and place the mouse pointer at the target position.

Note: The correct position is indicated by the mouse pointer symbol.

Example:

3 Left-click the target position.

Result:

The sizing handle is created.

Determining the optimum link route

Determining the optimum link route:

33003101.26 1001
 SFC Editor

Step Action

1 Select the link.

Example:

2 Use the Edit > Link > Route menu command.

or

Use the Route menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The current link route is changed to the optimum route.

Example:

1002 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Entering Comments
Overview
This section describes how to enter comments in the SFC programming language.

Entering comments
Introduction
Comments can be placed in SFC in the form of text objects.
Text objects can overlap other objects.
The size of the object, depending on the size of the text, can be extended vertically and
horizontally to fill additional grid units.
The same rules apply for entering text and navigating within text objects as for editing ASCII
text in standard text editors. (To create a line break in text objects you must press the Ctrl
+Enter key combination).
NOTE: Keep in mind that each change to a comment (e.g. change to a comment text,
change to the size of the text object) makes it necessary to recreate the section involved
(Generation > Generate project).

Displaying or hiding the comments

Use the button in the toolbar to show or hide the comments.

The background color of the button in blue indicates that the comments are hidden.

NOTE: To select or place text objects, check that the button in the toolbar is not
activated.

Selecting the text object

You have the following options to select text objects:
• Use the Edit > New > Comment menu command.
• Use the Comment menu command from the shortcut menu.

33003101.26 1003
 SFC Editor

• Press the F8 key.

or

• Select the symbol.

The active placement mode for text objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Placing text objects:

Placing text objects:

Step Action

1 Select the text object.

2 Click the target position in the SFC section.

or

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected text object is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

Example:

3 Enter the comment.

4 Confirm the text entered by:
• Clicking with the mouse outside of the text object
or
• Pressing the Enter key.

5 To insert additional text objects:

• Click the target position in the SFC section.
or
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target position, and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

1004 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Online functions
Overview
This section describes the online functions of the SFC programming language.

Online functions
Online functions
The description of online functions is found in chapter Debugging in Sequential Function
Chart Language (SFC), page 1435.

Export/Import
Overview
This section describes the Import/Export functions of the SFC programming language.

Export/Import SFC Sections

Export/Import
The description for exporting/importing sections is found in the chapter Import / Export, page
1677.

Customize SFC Editor Colors

Overview
This section describes how to customize the SFC editor colors.

33003101.26 1005
 SFC Editor

Customize SFC Editor Colors

Overview
To customize SFC editor colors, open the Tools > Colors Settings... dialog box.
The Color Settings dialog box allows to:
• Modify the color of the selected item in the list.
• Reset the colors with initial values.
• Import an *.ini file that define all the colors associated to the SFC editor.
• Export the definition colors associated to the SFC editor.

Colors Setting File

Depending on the operating system of the PC, the colors settings file SFCColors.ini is
located in one of the following folder:
• c:\Program Files\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
• c:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
For more detail on destination folder when Control Expert is installed, refer to EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Installation Manual.
NOTE: Make a copy of this file before modifying it.

Description
This table describes the default color values for each parameters in the SFCColors.ini
file:

Parameter Default value (R, Description

G, B)

BkAnimation 192,192,192 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in programming mode.

StatementError 255,0,0 Element in error is underlined with this color.

InspectBk 0,255,255 Inspect window background color

InspectText 0,0,0 Inspect window text color

InspectBkMin 255,255,0 Inspect window background color when the value is less than
the minimum value defined in the inspect window settings.

1006 33003101.26
SFC Editor

Parameter Default value (R, Description

G, B)

InspectBkMax 255,0,255 Inspect window background color when the value is greater
than the maximum value defined in the inspect window
settings.

BkAnimMonitoring 255,211,211 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in monitoring mode.

AnalyzeError 0,0,255 Drawing color when an element generates an analyze error.

GraphAnimBoolTrue 0,150,0 Color of true BOOL in animation mode.

GraphAnimBoolFalse 255,0,0 Color of false BOOL in animation mode.

BkComment 255,255,204 Background color of comment area

BkCommentEdit 225,225,225 Background color of comment area when you are editing it.

BkAnimNumeric 255,255,0 Background color of numeric variables

BlockBreakpoint 128,0,0 Bullet color in the element where the breakpoint is set.

BlockCurrentStep 255,255,0 Color of the current element in debug mode

AnchorLink 128,0,0 Color of anchor link

BkAnimFrozen 128,255,255 Editor background color when animation is frozen (using SFC
debug mode).

SFCStepTMax 255,0,255 Step color when the maximum time defined in the step is
reached.
SFCStepTMin 255,255,0 Step color when the minimum time defined in the step is
reached.
Background 255,255,255 Editor background color.

33003101.26 1007
1008 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Common Function for Textual Language

What’s in This Chapter
Selecting Text ...................................................................... 1009
Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting and moving text ................. 1012
Undoing and redoing changes .............................................. 1014
Match case.......................................................................... 1015
Zoom (font size)................................................................... 1016
Using Bookmarks................................................................. 1017
Go to................................................................................... 1019
Go to dialog box................................................................... 1021
Searching text ..................................................................... 1023
Searching and replacing text................................................. 1025
Call a subroutine.................................................................. 1027
Refine DFBs and subroutines ............................................... 1028
Inspect windows .................................................................. 1030
Enter comments .................................................................. 1034
Printing the Current Section .................................................. 1035
Initialize search.................................................................... 1036
Initialize Animation table ....................................................... 1037
Displaying the section properties........................................... 1039
Fullscreen ........................................................................... 1039
Customize IL and ST Editor Colors........................................ 1040

Overview
This chapter describes the common menus and dialog boxes of the IL and ST editor.

Selecting Text
Selecting one or more characters
Selecting one or more characters:

33003101.26 1009
 Common Function for Textual Language

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Left click with mouse and keep it pressed. 1. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.

2. Drag the mouse across the characters you want 2. Use the arrow keys to move the insertion point
to select. over the characters to be selected.

or
1. Place the insertion point in front of the
first character you want to select.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Click the left mouse button behind the
last character you want to select.

Selecting a word
Selecting a word:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Double click on the word to be selected. 1. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
2. Use the arrow keys to move the insertion point
over the word to be selected.

Selecting one or more lines

Selecting one or more lines:

1010 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Click the left mouse button at the height of the 1. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
line to be selected in the left margin. 2. Use the arrow keys to move the insertion point
or over the characters to be selected.

1. Click the left mouse button at the height

of the first line to be selected in the left
margin.
2. Press and hold the mouse button down
and drag the cursor down to the last line
to be selected.
or
1. Place the insertion point at the start of the
first line you want to select.
2. Left click the mouse and keep it pressed.
3. Drag the cursor to the end of the last line
to be selected.
4. Release the mouse key.
or
1. Place the insertion point at the start of the
first line you want to select.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Click the left mouse button behind the
last line you want to select.

Select all (entire contents of the section)

Select all (entire contents of the section):

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

Use the menu command Edit > Select all. Press the key combination Ctrl+A.

or

Press the Ctrl key, and left mouse click in the left
margin.

33003101.26 1011
 Common Function for Textual Language

Deleting, cutting, copying, pasting and moving

text
Deleting Text
Deleting text:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 1009 the text to be deleted. 1. Select, page 1009 the text to be deleted.

2. Use the Edit > Delete menu command. 2. Press the Delete key.

Cutting Text
Cutting text:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 1009 the text to be cut.

1. Select, page 1009 the text to be cut.
2. Use the Edit > Cut menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+X key combination.

or
Use the Cut menu command from the shortcut
menu (right-click).
or

Click the symbol.

The text which is cut can be pasted, page 1013 at any location (also in another IL or ST
section).

Copying Text into the Clipboard

Copying text into the clipboard:

1012 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Select, page 1009 the text to be copied. 1. Select, page 1009 the text to be copied.

2. Use the Edit > Copy menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+C key combination.

or
Use the Copy menu command from the shortcut
menu (right-click).
or

Click the symbol.

The text which is copied can be pasted, page 1013 at any location (also in another IL or ST
section).

Pasting Text from the Clipboard

Pasting text from the clipboard:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

1. Place the cursor at the target position. 1. Place the cursor at the target position.

2. Use the menu command Edit > Insert. 2. Press the Ctrl+V key combination.

or
Use the menu command Paste in the shortcut
menu (right mouse button).
or

Click the symbol.

Moving Text
Moving text:

33003101.26 1013
 Common Function for Textual Language

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

-
1. Select, page 1009 the text to be moved.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected text.
3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
4. Drag the text to the new position.
Note: This can also be done between sections in various open IL and ST sections.
5. Release the mouse button.
Result: The selected text is moved from the original position to the target position.

Copying text
Copying text:

Using the mouse Using the keyboard

-
1. Select, page 1009 the text to be moved.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected text.
3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
4. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.
5. Drag the text to the new position.
Note: This can also be done between sections in various open IL and ST sections.
6. Release the mouse button first and then the Ctrl key.
Result: A copy of the selected text is pasted at the target position.

Undoing and redoing changes

Undo changes
You have the following options to undo the recent changes:
• Use the Edit > Undo menu command.
• Press the Ctrl+Z key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
One change is undone each time the function is executed.

1014 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

The function can be executed a maximum of 10 times.

Redo changes
Changes that have been undone using Undo can be restored:
• Use the Edit > Redo menu command.
• Press the Ctrl+Y key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
One undone change is restored each time the function is executed.
The function can be executed a maximum of 10 times.

Match case
All caps text
Process the following steps to display text in All Caps:

Step Action

1 Select the text to display in All Caps.

2 You have the following options to convert the selected text:

• Use the Edit > All caps menu command.
• Press the Shift+Alt+U key combination.

• Select the symbol.

Lower case text

Process the following steps to display text in lower case:

33003101.26 1015
 Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

1 Select the text to display in lower case.

2 You have the following options to convert the selected text:

• Use the Edit > Lower case menu command.
• Press the Alt+U key combination.

• Select the symbol.

Zoom (font size)

Introduction
Several font sizes are available to provide an optimal display of the text in the current
section (overview of the entire contents or display of details).

Zoom out (reducing the font size)

To reduce current display (font size) by 25 %:
• Select the menu View > Zoom > Zoom out.
• Right click in the section and select Zoom > Zoom out for the section.
• Press the key combination Ctrl+Minus (-).
• Click the symbol.

• Click the symbol.

• Using the mouse: press Ctrl+Rotate the mouse wheel.

Zoom in (increasing the font size)

To increase current display (font size) by 25 %:
• Select the menu View > Zoom > Zoom in.
• Right click in the section and select Zoom > Zoom in for the section.
• Press the key combination Ctrl+Plus (+).
• Click the symbol.

1016 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

• Click the symbol.

• Using the mouse: press Ctrl+Rotate the mouse wheel.

Using Bookmarks
Introduction
Bookmarks are used to mark text lines and allow these marked lines to be easily found in
different sections.
An example of a line marked with a bookmark:

Setting a Single Bookmark

You have the following options to set a bookmark:
• Place the cursor in the line to be marked and carry out the menu command Edit >
Bookmarks> > Toggle Bookmark.
• Place the cursor in the line to be marked and press the key combination Ctrl+F2.
or
• Place the mouse pointer in the margin (gray column on the left edge of the section) for
the line to be marked and use Toggle Bookmark from the context menu of the margin.

Setting Multiple Bookmarks

Setting a bookmark in each line which contains a defined search text can be done in the
following ways:

33003101.26 1017
 Common Function for Textual Language

• Use the menu command Edit > Find... to open the search dialog box, enter the search
text and press the command button Mark all.
or
• Press the key combination Ctrl+F to open the search dialog box, enter the search text
and press the command button Mark all.
Also see Searching text, page 1023

Removing Single Bookmarks

You have the following options to remove a bookmark:
• Place the cursor in the line with the bookmark to be removed and carry out the menu
command Edit > Bookmark> > Toggle Bookmark.
• Place the cursor in the line with the bookmark to be removed and press the key
combination Ctrl+F2.
or
• Place the mouse pointer on the bookmark to be removed and use Toggle Bookmark
from the context menu of the bookmark.

Removing All Bookmarks

You have the following options to remove all bookmarks in the current section:
• Use the Edit > Bookmarks > Clear all Bookmarks menu command.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Shift+F2 key combination.

Searching for Bookmarks (Search Down)

You have the following options to search for bookmarks (search down):
• Use the Edit > Bookmarks > Next Bookmark menu command.
• Use the Edit > Go to > Bookmark > Next menu command.
or
• Press the F2 key.
The bookmarks are traversed according to their order of appearance in the Bookmarks
dialog.

1018 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Searching for Bookmarks (Search Up)

You have the following options to search for bookmarks (search up):
• Use the Edit > Bookmarks > Previous Bookmark menu command.
• Use the Edit > Go to > Bookmark > Previous menu command.
or
• Press the Shift+F2 key combination.
The bookmarks are traversed according to their order of appearance in the Bookmarks
dialog.

Bookmarks Dialog
Please also refer to Bookmarks Dialog, page 610.

Go to
Introduction
The Go to function is used to jump to:
• a specific line in the current section,
• a specific bookmark in the current section or
• a specific mark in the current section,

Open the dialog

The following options are available to open theGo todialog box.
• Use the menu command Edit > Go to,
• select the menu command Go to from the sections shortcut menu.
• Press the key combination Ctrl+G.
or
• Choose the symbol.

33003101.26 1019
 Common Function for Textual Language

Go to a line
Go to a certain line in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 1019 the Go todialog box.

2 Select the Line tab.

3 Enter the line number.
4 Confirm the entry using the command button Go to.

Result: The desired line is displayed.

Go to a bookmark
Go to a certain bookmark in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 1019 the Go todialog box.

2 Choose the Bookmark tab.

3 Select a bookmark in the list.
4 Double click on the selected bookmark or press the Go tocommand button.

Result: The desired bookmark is displayed.

Go to a location
Go to a certain location in the current section by carrying out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open, page 1019 the Go todialog box.

2 Select the Location tab.

3 Select a location in the list.
4 Double click on the selected location or press the Go tocommand button.

Result: The desired location is displayed.

1020 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Go to dialog box
Call the dialog box:
see Open the dialog, page 1019

Call the dialog box

The Go todialog box is made up of three tabs:
• Row
Go to a certain location in the current line using this tab.
• Bookmarks
Go to a certain bookmark in the current section using this tab:
• Label
Go to a certain location in the current section using this tab:

tab Line
Representation of theLine tab:

Elements of the tab Line:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Line number The number of the row to be displayed can be entered in this text box.

33003101.26 1021
 Common Function for Textual Language

Element Description

Go to Display the current position using the button desired line, page 1020.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

Register tab Bookmarks

Representation of theBookmark tab:

Elements of the tab Bookmark:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Bookmark: Select the bookmark to be displayed from this list box.

Prev Display the current position using this button.

When the start of the section is reached, the search starts again from the bottom.

Next Display the next bookmark using this button.

When the end of the section is reached, the search starts again from the top.

Go to Display the current position using the button desired bookmark, page 1020.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

1022 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Register tab Location

Representation of the tab Label:

Elements of the tab Bookmark:

Element Description

For symbols that are not printed, the dialog box is closed after every search.

For printed symbols the dialog box remains open until you close it.

Locations: Select the location to be displayed from this text box.

You can enter the name of the location in the text box with the keyboard or using the
drop-down list by clicking with the mouse.

Go to Display the current position using the button desired location, page 1020.

Close Use this button to close the dialog.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog help.

Searching text
Searching text
When searching text, you can define the search text and various options for the search.
You have the following options to search for text:
• Use the Edit > Find menu command.
• Press the key combination Ctrl+F.
or

33003101.26 1023
 Common Function for Textual Language

• click the symbol.

This function is only used for searching and in some cases marking search terms.
To search and replace text, use the Edit > Replace menu command, see also Searching
and replacing text, page 1025.
For intelligent search and replace of variables and FFBs you can use the Tools > Search/
Replace menu command.

Representation
Search dialog display

Elements of the dialog box

Element Description

Find: Enter the text to be found. You can insert text from the clipboard or from
the list of recently used terms.

Find whole words only If you select this option, only the whole term is searched for and not parts
of the term.
Match case If you select this option, only terms are searched whose capitalization
matches the text in the Find what text box.
Direction Select the desired direction here.
Find Next Use this command button to search for the next instance of the search
target in the section.

Select All Use this command button to mark all lines in the section that contain the
search term with a bookmark, see also Using Bookmarks, page 1017.

1024 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Find Previous
You have the following options to find earlier instances of the term defined in the Find dialog
box:
• Use the Edit > Previous menu command.
or
• press the Shift+F3 key combination.

Find Next
You have the following options to find later instances of the term defined in the Find dialog
box:
• Use the Edit > Find Next menu command.
or
• press the F3 key.

Searching and replacing text

Searching and replacing text
You have the following options to search and replace text:
• Use the Edit > Replace menu command.
or
• Press the Ctrl+H key combination.
This function is used to search and replace simple text.
For intelligent search and replace of variables and FFBs you can use the Tools > Search/
Replace menu command.

33003101.26 1025
 Common Function for Textual Language

Representation
Representation of the Find dialog box

Elements of the dialog box

Element Description

Find what Enter the text to be found. You can insert text from the clipboard or from
the list of recently used terms.

Replace with Enter the new text. You can insert text from the clipboard or from the list of
recently used terms. In order to delete the text in the Find what text box,
leave the Replace with text box empty.

Find whole words only If you select this option, only the whole term is searched for and not parts
of the term.
Match case If you select this option, only terms are searched whose capitalization
matches the text in the Find what text box.
Replace with Select the area where the replace operation should be performed:
• Selection
The replace procedure is performed in the text area selected in the
section.
• Complete file
The replace procedure is performed in the entire section.

Find Next Use this command button to search for the next instance of the search
target in the section. (No replacement is made.)

Replace Use this command button to replace the selected occurrence of the search
term and select the next occurrence.
Replace All Use this command button to replace all occurrences of the search term in
the area defined in Replace with with the replacement term.

1026 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Call a subroutine
Introduction
The subroutine to be called must be located in the same task as the section calling.
Subroutines can also be called from within subroutines.
Subroutine calls are expansions to IEC 61131-3 and must be explicitly enabled via the Tools
> Project Settings dialog box, in the Language extensions tab by activating the Allow
subroutines check box.
In IL, a subroutine call consists of the CAL operator, followed by the name of the subroutine
section, followed by an empty parameter list (optional), e.g.
CAL SR_Name
or
CAL SR_Name ()
In ST, a subroutine call consists of the name of the subroutine section, followed by an empty
parameter list, followed by a semicolon, e.g.
SR_Name () ;
The name of subroutine is shown in boldface to identify that these subroutines can be
refined, page 1028.
You can enter the name of the subroutine section just like any other text, or use the input
assistant.

Entering the name of the subroutine section with input

assistant
Process the following steps to enter a subroutine section name with the input assistant:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 Use the Edit > New > Select subroutine menu command.
or

Select the symbol.

Result:

33003101.26 1027
 Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

A selection dialog box for selecting the subroutine to be called is opened.

3 Click the symbol, select the subroutine to be called from the list and confirm pressing Enter.

Note: The subroutine to be called must be located in the same task as the section calling.

Result: The name of the subroutine section is enabled in the section.

4 Complete the subroutine call.

IL example:

ST example:

Refine DFBs and subroutines

Introduction
This function makes it possible to "look into" a DFB or subroutine. This makes it possible to
see the internal state of the DFB/subroutine when animation is used, or to make changes to
the logic very quickly.
Refinable objects are labeled in boldface, e.g.
CAL SR_Name
or
MY_DFB (IN1 := var1, IN2 := var12, OUT => var3);
NOTE: The only limitation occurs when the displayed variable is in an ARRAY with at
least 2 dimensions and when the index is not a constant. In this case an error message
is displayed and the variable value can't be displayed.

1028 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Refining DFBs
Process the following steps to refine DFBs:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor on the DFB instance name.

2 You have the following options to refine DFBs:
• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: If the DFB contains only one section, this will be opened automatically.

If the DFB contains several sections, a selection dialog is opened.

Example:

3 Select the desired DFB section.

Result: The DFB section is opened.

Note: With nested DFBs several refine processes are possible, but we should not let open
simultaneously the refine editors or it could lead to a wrong data display.

Refining subroutines
Process the following steps to refine subroutines:

33003101.26 1029
 Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

1 Position the cursor on the subroutine call.

2 You have the following options to refine subroutines:
• Use the Services > Refine menu command.
• Use the Refine menu command from the shortcut menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl+Q key combination.
Result: The subroutine is opened.

Note: With nested subroutines several refine processes are possible.

Inspect windows
Introduction
In offline mode, the name, address (if available) and the comment (if available) of the
associated variable are displayed in inspect windows.
In online mode, the name, address (if available) and the current value of the variable are
displayed in inspect windows.
The current values can be displayed:
• Decimal, e.g. 15
• Binary, e.g. 00001111
• Hexadecimal, e.g. F
• Floating point, e.g. 15.4
• Exponent, e.g. 1.3e+003
• Literal, e.g. 'otto'

Generating an inspect window

Generating an inspect window:

1030 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

1 Position the cursor in front of or in the target variable.

2 You have the following options to generate inspect windows:

• Use the Edit > New > Inspect window menu command.
• Use the Place Inspect menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the F9 key.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result: The inspect window is generated.

Example (offline):

Example (online):

Resizing
Position the mouse pointer on the right or left edge of an inspect window (the correct
position is indicated by the or mouse pointer symbol), click the left mouse button and
drag the mouse right or left.
The size selected applies to all inspect windows within the current section.

33003101.26 1031
 Common Function for Textual Language

Changing the position

Position the mouse pointer on the inspect window, click the left mouse button and move the
inspect window to the target position.

Anchoring the position

You can anchor all inspect windows of a section to their relative positions within the section
(the inspect window stays in its onscreen position even if the page is scrolled), or to their
absolute position (the inspect window is scrolled along with the rest of the section contents).
To switch between modes, select the View > Floating Inspect Windows menu command.
You can see which mode is active by way of a check-symbol in front of the menu command.

Setting a zone monitor

Setting a zone monitor:

Step Action

1 Position the mouse pointer on the inspect window.

2 Use the Settings menu command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The properties dialog box for the inspect window is opened.

Example:

3 Enter a minimum and a maximum value for the variable to be monitored.

1032 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

4 Enter the format of the variable displayed in the section.

5 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result:
• If the current value is within the defined range, the inspect window is displayed in cyan.
• If the current value is outside the defined range, the inspect window is displayed in yellow.
• If the current value is above the defined range, the inspect window is displayed in magenta.
Example:

Hiding inspect windows

To hide and show the inspect windows select the View > Hide Inspect Windows menu
command.
You can see which mode is active (hide inspect windows) by way of a check-symbol in front
of the menu command.

Deleting inspect windows

Position the cursor on the inspect window to be deleted and select the Delete Inspect menu
command from the shortcut menu.

33003101.26 1033
 Common Function for Textual Language

Enter comments
Introduction
In the IL and ST editors, comments start with the string (* and end with the string *). Any
comment can be entered between these two strings.
NOTE: Keep in mind that each change to a comment (e.g. change to a comment text,
change to the size of the text object) makes it necessary to recreate the section involved
(Generation > Generate project).
In accordance with IEC 61131-3, nesting of comments is not permitted. If it is necessary to
nest comments you must enable them via the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the
Language extensions tab by activating the Allow nested comments check box.

Placing a new comment

Placing a comment:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 You have the following options for placing a comment:

• Use the Edit > New > Comment menu command.
• Use the Comment menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the F8 key.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result: The strings for the start and end of the comments are inserted.

Example:

3 Enter the comment between the two strings.

Example:

1034 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Executing Text Comments

Placing a comment:

Step Action

1 Select the command text to be executed.

Example:

2 You have the following options for placing a comment:

• Use the Edit > New > Comment menu command.
• Use the Comment menu command from the shortcut menu.
• Press the F8 key.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result: The strings for the start and end of the comments are inserted.

Example:

Printing the Current Section

Introduction
There are the following ways to print the current section:
• Print the section using the menu command
• Print the section using the print documentation

Print the section using the menu command

Carry out the following steps to print the current section using the menu command:

33003101.26 1035
 Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

1 Open the print dialog using:

• the menu command File > Print,
• or the key combination Ctrl+P
or
• the symbol .

2 Press OK to start printing the current section.

Print the section using the print documentation

Carry out the following steps to print the current section using the print documentation:

Step Action

1 Double-click on Documentation in the project browser.

Result: An overview of your system is open, see also Documentation, page 1651

2 Select Program > Tasks > MAST/FAST/AUX > ... to print the section.
3 Select the menu command Print from the sections shortcut menu.
4 Press OK to start printing the current section.

Initialize search
Introduction
The Initialize Search function transfers the name of the selected element (search text) to
the Element text box in the Cross-References window.

Selecting the search text

Process the following steps to select the search text:

1036 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

1 Select the element to search for (search text).

The following elements can be searched for:

• Variable
(To search for a variable, select the variable.)
• EFB/DFB Instance
(To search for an EFB/DFB instance, select the name of the EFB/DFB instance.)

2 Use the Services > Initialize Search menu command.

or

Select the menu command Initialize search from the sections shortcut menu.

or

Press the Ctrl+U key combination.

Result: The search text is transferred to the Element text box in the Cross-References window.

Initialize Animation table

Introduction
The Initialize Animation Table transfers the selected variables to the Animation table, page
1475.

Selecting the variables

Process the following steps to select variables:

33003101.26 1037
 Common Function for Textual Language

Step Action

1 Select the variables to transfer to the Animation table.

The following items can be selected:

• single variable
(To accept a variable, select the variable.)
• several variables
(To accept several variables, select the entire text area in which the variables are located.)

2 Use the Services > Initialize Animation table menu command.

or

Select the menu command Animation Table from the sections context menu.

or

Press the Ctrl+T key combination.

Result: The variable(s) is/are transferred to the Animation table, page 1475.

Initialize Animation Table

Using Initialize Animation Table (Ctrl+T) you create an animation table with a default
name e.g. Table[ST Editor - Mixer : [MAST]]. You can rename the table.
All the variables you selected are listed in the animation table.
Selecting a new set of variables and using Initialize Animation Table again, all new
variables are added to this animation table (if you did not rename it).

Initialize New Animation Table

Using Initialize New Animation Table (Ctrl+Shift+T) you create a new animation table with
an indexed default name e.g. Table[ST Editor - Mixer : [MAST]1]. You can rename
the table.
All the variables you selected are listed in the table.
But if you click anywhere in the section and do not select any variable, you create a new
empty animation table.
Every time you use Initialize New Animation Table you create a new animation table.

1038 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Displaying the section properties

View section properties
You have the following options to display the section properties dialog box, page 502:
• Use the Edit > Data Selection...menu command.
• Use the Properties from the shortcut menu.
• Press the Alt+Enter key combination.

View Data Properties

You have the following options to display the section properties dialog box, page 1195:
• using the data editor, page 344
1. Selecting one or several lines in a list editor
2. Using the shortcut menu select the Properties command.
• via the IL/ST section.
1. Selecting one or several element(s) in the IL/ST section.
2. From the context menu select the command Data properties or press Ctrl + Enter.

Fullscreen
Fullscreen
You have the following options to display the section application window in full screen mode:
• Select the View > Full screen menu.
• Press the key combination Ctrl-F8.
• Click the symbol.
To end the full screen mode press Esc or use the menu.

33003101.26 1039
 Common Function for Textual Language

Customize IL and ST Editor Colors

Overview
Each of IL and ST editors have its own color setting definition file.
To customize IL or ST editor colors, open the Tools > Colors Settings... dialog box.
The Color Settings dialog box allows to:
• Modify the color of the selected item in the list.
• Reset the colors with initial values.
• Import an *.ini file that defines the colors associated to the IL or ST editor.
• Export the definition colors associated to the IL or ST editor.

Color Setting Files

Depending on the operating system of the PC, the color setting files ILColors.ini and
STColors.ini are located in one of the following folders:
• c:\Program Files\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
• c:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Control Expert ••.•\
For more detail on destination folder when Control Expert is installed, refer to EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Installation Manual.
NOTE: Make a copy of this file before modifying it.

Description
This table describes the default color values for each parameter in both ILColors.ini
and STColors.ini files:

Group Parameter Name Default value Description

(R, G, B)

Text Foreground Text Color 0,0,0 Color of text

Background Background 255,255,255 Color of the background text

Color Text
Text Foreground Text Selection 255,255,255 Color of selected text
Selection Color

1040 33003101.26
Common Function for Textual Language

Group Parameter Name Default value Description

(R, G, B)

Background Text Selection 0,0,128 Background color of selected text

Background
Color
Operator Foreground Operator Color 255,0,0 Color of operator

Background Operator 255,255,255 Background color of operator

background
color
Comment Foreground Comment color 0,128,0 Color for comment text

Background Background 255,255,255 Background color for comment text

comment color
Keyword Foreground Keyword color 0,0,255 Color for keyword text

Background Keyword 255,255,255 Background color for keyword

background
color
Identifier Foreground Identifier color 0,0,0 Text color for identifier

Background Identifier 255,255,255 Background color for identifier text

background
color
Variable Foreground Variable color 0,0,0 Color for variable text

Background Variable 255,255,255 Background color for variable text

background
color
FFB Foreground FFB color 0,0,0 Color for FFB text

Background FFB background 255,255,255 Background color for FFB text

color
Literal Foreground Literal color 0,0,0 Color for literal text

Background Literal 255,255,255 Background color for literal text

background
color
AnimBool- Foreground Animation bool 0,140,0 Color of true BOOL in animation mode.
True true color
Background Animation bool 192,192,192 Background color of true BOOL in
true background animation mode.
color
AnimBool- Foreground Animation bool 255,0,0 Color of false BOOL in animation mode.
False false color
Background Animation bool 192,192,192 Background color of false BOOL in
false animation mode.
background
color

33003101.26 1041
 Common Function for Textual Language

Group Parameter Name Default value Description

(R, G, B)

AnimNoValue Foreground Animation No 0,0,0 Color of any variable without value in

Value color animation mode
Background Animation No 255,255,0 Background color of any variable without
Value value in animation mode
background
color
AnimForced Foreground Animation 0,0,0 Color of any forced variable in animation
forced color mode
Background Animation 192,192,192 Background color of any forced variable in
forced animation mode
background
color
AnimCyclic- Foreground Animation Cycle 255,255,255 Color of cyclic set in animation mode
Set Set color
Background Animation Cycle 80,0,80 Background color of cyclic set in animation
Set background mode
color
BKAnimation Foreground Background 255,255,255 Foreground color of background in
animation color animation mode
Background Background 192,192,192 Background color in animation mode
animation
background
color
TokenError Foreground Token error 255,0,0 Color of token error
color
Background Token error 255,255,255 Background color of token error
background
color
Statemen- Foreground Statement error 255,0,0 Color of statement error marking
tError color
Background Statement error 255,255,255 Background color of statement error
background marking
color
AnimError Foreground Animation error 255,255,0 Color of error in animation mode
color
Background Animation error 192,192,192 Background color of error in animation
background mode
color

1042 33003101.26
33003101.26 1043
 IL Editor

IL Editor
What’s in This Chapter
Structure of an IL program .................................................... 1044
Creating an IL Program ........................................................ 1046
Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming ................ 1047
Navigating with the keyboard ................................................ 1052
Data input ........................................................................... 1053
Calling an FFB..................................................................... 1059
Using Public Variables.......................................................... 1070
Online functions................................................................... 1072
Reference Data Type in IL .................................................... 1072
Export/Import IL Sections ..................................................... 1073

Overview
This chapter describes the specific menus and dialog boxes of the IL editor.
For a description of the syntax for the IL programming language, please refer to the
Instruction List IL (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) chapter in the Reference manual.

Structure of an IL program
Introduction
An IL program (Instruction List) consists of a list of statements that are executed in
sequence by the controller. Using these statements you can call function blocks, functions
and procedures conditionally or unconditionally, process assignments and jumps
conditionally or unconditionally within a section.

Properties of an IL program
Properties of an IL program:

1044 33003101.26
IL Editor

• Statements consist of:

◦ an operator,
◦ with modifier if necessary,
◦ an operand if required and
◦ a comment if required.
◦ In addition, every statement can be provided with a label.
• Every statement begins on a new line.
• Each line is limited to 300 characters.
• Line breaks are possible in statements (multi-line statements).
• Labels, symbols and comments can be placed anywhere in a section. (Comments can
be entered anywhere where empty spaces are permitted.)
• A syntax and semantics check, page 1047 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered. The result of this check is displayed in colored text.
• Syntactically or semantically incorrect sections can be saved.

Edit and view functions

Edit and view functions of the IL editor:
• Entering text using the insert or overwrite mode, page 1046
• Deleting text, page 1012
• Selecting text, page 1009 (characters, words, lines, all)
• Cutting, page 1012, copying, page 1012 and pasting, page 1013 text
• Moving text, page 1013 (also between different ST/IL sections)
• Undo, page 1014 and Redo, page 1015
• Go To function, page 1019
• Using bookmarks, page 1017
• Searching for text and marking the result, page 1023
• Searching and replacing text, page 1025
• Searching and replacing variables and function blocks and DFB instances
• Displaying text in selectable fonts and sizes
The text display type can be selected from the View > Select Font menu command.
This configuration applies to all sections of the IL and ST programming languages.
• Intelligent text indentation
The text indentation of a new line is taken from the previous one.

33003101.26 1045
 IL Editor

• Display the position (line, column) of the cursor in the status bar.

Input assistants
Input assistant for the IL editor:
• Input assistant for variables, page 1053
• Input assistant for functions, function blocks and procedures, page 1059

Online functions
Online functions of the IL editor:
• Displaying actual values, page 1030.
• Setting breakpoints, page 1414
• Setting watchpoints, page 1419
• Step by Step, page 1416

Creating an IL Program
Writing in insert/overwrite mode
Text can be entered in insert or overwrite modes
• Insert mode
The characters entered are inserted in the current position of the insert marker in
addition to the existing characters.
• Overwrite mode
The characters entered are inserted in the current position of the insert marker and
overwrite the existing characters.
Switching between the modes is done using the Insert key.
The current mode is displayed in the status bar using INS for insert mode and OVR for
overwrite mode.

1046 33003101.26
IL Editor

Creating an IL program
Carry out the following procedures to create an IL program:

Step Action

1 Creating an IL Section, page 499.

2 Enter the first operator (e.g. LD).

Note: As soon as the text is entered several checks are made, such as syntax/semantic error
checks, correct spelling of keywords and variable names etc. A detailed description of syntax is
found in chapter Instruction List IL (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The results of the checks are indicated by a color folder, see also Syntax and Semantics Check
during Programming, page 1047.

3 Use the TAB key or spaces to separate operands from operators.

4 Enter the operands (e.g. il).

5 Confirm the line with the ENTER key.

6 Repeat these steps until all instructions are entered.

Example:

Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming

Introduction
Syntax and semantics check is performed directly when creating the program.
The result of this check is displayed in three formats:
• directly in the program section with colored text
• as tooltip if the cursor is placed on incorrect text.
• In the output window, if Generate > Analyze is selected.

33003101.26 1047
 IL Editor

Representation
Representation of colors and labels:

Labeling Description Example

blue Keyword (e.g. LD, AND, ST,...)

Note: Function block input operators (see also

section Input operator requirements (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
in the Reference manual) are not treated as
keywords.

red Operators (that are not keywords)

green Comment

black standard text (e.g. variable, address, label, ...)

bold The name of DFBs and subroutines are shown

in boldface to identify that these objects can be
refined, page 1028.

underlining In DFB sections, the formal parameters of the

DFBs are shown underlined.

red wavy line Faulty text:

• Syntax error
e.g. spelling errors in keywords, non-
declared variables or FB instances,
incorrect block call, unvailable block call
(in the current PLC plateform or in the
library types), EFB type call instead of the
instance,...
• Semantic error
e.g. division by zero, value range
exceeded/underflow (recognized by the
system when entered)

Inverted text Text is selected

1048 33003101.26
IL Editor

Tooltips
If the cursor is placed over incorrect text, the tooltip is displayed with a brief description of
the cause of the error. It will also be displayed in the output window after the analysis.

Error messages in the output window

Error message: Accessed object is not a function.

33003101.26 1049
 IL Editor

Cause of error Error Correction Example

Write error is present during Correct the write Wrong:

accessing of a function. error.

Right:

Name of the function was Rename the already -

already used for: used object.
• one variable
• an FB instance
• a DFB Type
• an SR Section
• a procedure or function
in a user library

Wrong syntax used during Correct the syntax. Wrong:

access
• an FB

Right:

Wrong:

Right:

1050 33003101.26
IL Editor

Cause of error Error Correction Example

Error message: Accessed object is not a function block.

Cause of error Error Correction Example

Write error is present during Correct the write Wrong:

accessing. error.
• an FB

Right:

Name of the function was Rename the already -

already used for: used object.
• one variable
• an FB instance
• a DFB Type
• an SR Section
• a procedure or function
in a user library

Function block instances that Define the FB on the -

are not defined in the data data editor.
editor.
EFB that is not available for Change the EFB. -
the current PLC platform.

An EFB that is not in the libset Update the libset. -

of the current project.

33003101.26 1051
 IL Editor

Navigating with the keyboard

Navigating with the keyboard
The following keys and key combinations are provided for navigation:

Key combinations Motion

Cursor left Moves the cursor to the left

Cursor right Moves the cursor to the right

Cursor up Moves the cursor up

Cursor down Moves the cursor down

Ctrl+Cursor left Moves the cursor one string left

Ctrl+Cursor right Moves the cursor one string right

Ctrl+Cursor up Scrolls one line up (the position of the cursor is not affected by this
function)

Ctrl+Cursor down Scrolls one line down (the position of the cursor is not affected by this
function)

Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line

End Moves the cursor to the end of the current line

Ctrl+Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current section

Ctrl+End Moves the cursor to the end of the current section

Page Up Scrolls one page up (the cursor remains in its position on the screen)

Page Down Scrolls one page down (the cursor remains in its position on the
screen)

Ctrl+Alt+Page Up Displays the previous section (including via the View > Previous
Sectionmenu).

Ctrl+Alt+Page Down Displays the next section (including via the View > Next
Sectionmenu).

Alt+Enter Opens the properties dialog box for the selected section.

1052 33003101.26
IL Editor

Data input
Introduction
You have different options for using data in your IL section.
• Using already declared variables, page 1053
◦ you can use a data selection dialog box,
or
◦ you can enter the variable name just like any other text.
• Use undeclared variables and declare them later, page 1054
You can define variable names when creating your IL section and then declare all
variables used.
• Use undeclared variables and declare them immediately, page 1055
You can define variable names when creating your IL section and declare them
immediately.
• Declaration of variables directly in the IL section., page 1056
You can declare variables in the Data Editor, page 386, but also directly in the IL
section.
• Using formal parameters from function blocks (inputs/outputs, public variables), page
1057
◦ You can use a data selection dialog box.
or
◦ You can enter the formal parameter name just like any other text.

Entering declared variables using data selection

Carry out the following steps to enter a declared variable using data selection:

Step Action

1 Declare the required variables, see also Creation of EDT instances, page 386.

2 Place the cursor at the target position.

33003101.26 1053
 IL Editor

Step Action

3 Open data selection by:

• The Edit > Data Selection menu command..
• The Data Selection... menu commandfrom the shortcut menu for the section.
or
• Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

4 You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enter or the button .
• You can select the variable names from the list of recently used names using the symbol
and confirm using Enter or the button .
• You can delete your entry by pressing Esc or the button .
• Use the button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1185 and in the Variables
tab confirm the selected variable using the OK button.
Example of a data selection dialog box:

Result: The selected variable is inserted into the section and a syntax and semantics check,
page 1047 is performed.

Entering undeclared variables and declaring them later

Process the following steps to enter undeclared variables and declare them later:

1054 33003101.26
IL Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 Enter the variable name.

Result: The variable selected is accepted. The syntax and semantics check, page 1047 marks
the variable name with a red wavy line to identify it as being undeclared, e.g.

3 Enter all variables in this way.

4 Declare all variables in the Data Editor, page 386 or directly in the IL section, page 1056.

Result: The red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

Entering undeclared variables and declaring them

immediately
Process the following steps to enter undeclared variables and declare them immediately:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 Click Create Variable in the shortcut menu, or press the Shift+Enter key combination

Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

3 Enter the variable name and data type.

4
If you do not want to assign an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and inserted at the target position in the section.

33003101.26 1055
 IL Editor

Step Action

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for
obtaining an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and inserted at the target position in the section.

Declaration of variables directly in the IL section.

Process the following steps to declare variables directly in the IL section.

Step Action

1 Place the cursor in an undeclared variable (undeclared variables are identified by a red wavy
line).

2 Click Create Variable in the shortcut menu, or press the Shift+Enter key combination

Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

Note: The variable name automatically appears in the Name field, if editor recognizes the text
entered in the section as a variable and its syntax is correct.

3
If you do not want to assign an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

1056 33003101.26
IL Editor

Step Action

4
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for
obtaining an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

5
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

Using formal parameters

Process the following steps to use formal parameters with data selection:

Step Action

1 Call the function block whose formal parameters you want to use, see also Calling a function
block, page 1059.

2 To use the formal parameter, place the cursor at the target position.

3 Open data selection by:

• The Edit > Data Selection menu command..
• The Data Selection... menu commandfrom the shortcut menu for the section.
or
• Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

4 You have the following options to enter the formal parameter:

• You can enter the formal parameter name and confirm using Enter or the button.
In this case the procedure ends here.
• You can select the name from the list of recently used names using the symbol and
confirm using Enter or the button .
In this case the procedure ends here.
or
• Use the button ... to open a data selection dialog box, page 1185.

5 Select the Function Blocks tab.

33003101.26 1057
 IL Editor

Step Action

Result:

All declared block instances are displayed.

6 Expand the display of the inputs, outputs, and any inputs/outputs and public variables by clicking
their + symbols.

Result:

You can now see all available inputs/outputs of the function block.

1058 33003101.26
IL Editor

Step Action

7 Select the desired formal parameter and confirm with OK.

Result: The selected formal parameter is inserted into the section and a syntax and semantics
check, page 1047 is performed.

For example:

Calling an FFB
Introduction
You have the following options to open FFBs (Elementary Function, Elementary Function
Block, Derived Function Block, Procedure):
• You can enter the call like you enter any text (for syntax, see Calling FFB sections (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)
in the Reference manual),
• you can use the function input assistants,
or
• you can enter the FFB to the section using the drag & drop method.
NOTE: Procedures are expansions to IEC 61131-3 and must be explicitly enabled via
the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Language extensions tab by activating
the Allow procedures check box.

Calling a function block using the function input

assistant
Process the following steps to call a function block (elementary or derived) with the function
input assistant:

33003101.26 1059
 IL Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

Note: No text may be selected in the section.

The following positions are possible:

• On a free position outside of an existing FFB call.
• On a space within an existing FFB call. (In this case, an FFB call is created within an FFB
call.)

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192 using:

• the Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command..
• The FFB Input Assistant...menu commandfrom the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Pressing the Ctrl+I key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result:

The function input assistant will be opened.

3 In the FFB type line click the button ...., to open an FFB selection window, page 1189.

Result:

1060 33003101.26
IL Editor

Step Action

The FFB selection dialog box is opened.

4 Select the library and family from the Libraries/Families column which contains the desired
function block.

Tip: If you do not know where to find the FFB you are looking for select the Libset, entry to see a
list of all the FFBs available independently of their libraries.

5 Select the desired function block from the Name column.

33003101.26 1061
 IL Editor

Step Action

Example:

6 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result:
• The function block is added to the function input assistant dialog box.
• An instance name is automatically suggested. You can keep this or change it as you
please.
• You can see all available parameters (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) of the function block, see also Information
about programming (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

1062 33003101.26
IL Editor

Step Action

7 The number of inputs can be increased with some elementary functions. (You find out which
functions can be expanded by referring to the descriptions for the individual functions.)

Expandable pins can be recognized from the following display:

To add further pins select the last pin in the structure and press Add pin.

33003101.26 1063
 IL Editor

Step Action

8 Double-click the Entry field cell of the first parameter and enter the name of the variable/address
or an expression to be used.

You have the following options to enter the variable/address:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the button ... to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1186.
Assign all parameters of the function block a variable/address in this way.

Example:

9 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The function block call is inserted into the IL section and a syntax and semantics check,
page 1047 is performed.

Example:

1064 33003101.26
IL Editor

Calling a function or procedure using the function input

assistant
Calling a function or procedure using the function input assistant is identical in principle to
calling a function block. The only difference is the absence of an instance name (step 6 of
the procedure Calling a function block using the function input assistant, page 1059).

Remarks
Some complex FFBs provide additional windows for entering parameters. Access to this
window is gained using the Special Assistant button that appears at the bottom of the
window.

Calling a function block instance using the function input

assistant
Process the following steps to select a block instance that has already been declared:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192 using:

• The Edit > FFB Input Assistant menu command.
• The FFB Input Assistant...menu commandfrom the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Pressing the Ctrl+I key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result:

33003101.26 1065
 IL Editor

Step Action

The function input assistant will be opened.

3 In the Instance line click the button ...., to open an FFB selection window, page 1180.

Result:

The dialog box for selecting function block instances is opened.

4 Select the desired block instance from the Name column and confirm the selection with OK.

Result:

1066 33003101.26
IL Editor

Step Action

• The block instance is added to the function input assistant dialog box.
• You can see all available parameters (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) of the function block, see also Information
about programming (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

5 Double-click the Entry field cell of the first parameter and enter the name of the variable/address
to be used.

You have the following options to enter the variable/address:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the button ... to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1186.
Assign all parameters of the function block a variable/address in this way.

33003101.26 1067
 IL Editor

Step Action

Example:

6 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The function block call is inserted into the IL section and a syntax and semantics check,
page 1047 is performed. If the variables are not declared yet a red wavy line under the name is
used to identify them.

Example:

7 Declare all variables in the Data Editor, page 386 or directly in the IL section, page 1056.

Result: The red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

1068 33003101.26
IL Editor

Changing the actual parameter using the function input

assistant
Process the following steps to change actual parameters with the function input assistant:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor inside a word for the FFB to be changed.

Note: No text may be selected and the FFB call to be changed must be syntactically correct.

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192 using:

• The Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command..
• The FFB Input Assistant...menu commandfrom the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Pressing the Ctrl+I key combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result:

The function input assistant is opened with the current actual parameters.

3 Make the desired changes and confirm using OK.

33003101.26 1069
 IL Editor

Inserting FFBs via drag & drop

FFBs can also be inserted into the section via drag & drop using the Types Library
Browser.
You have the following options to activate the Types Library Manager:
• Use the Tools > Types Library Manager menu command.
or
• Pressing the Alt+3 key combination.

Using Public Variables

Introduction
In addition to inputs/outputs, some function blocks also provide public variables.
These variables transfer statistical values (values that are not influenced by the process) to
the function block. They are used for setting parameters for the function block.
The assignment of values to public variables is made via their initial values or via the load
and save instructions.
Public variables are read via the instance name of the function block and the names of the
public variables.

Assigning Values using the Initial Value

Process the following steps to assign values using the initial value:

Step Action

1 Call the function block for whose public variable you want to assign a value, see also Calling an
FFB, page 1059.

2 Open the data editor, see also Data Editor Access, page 345.

3 Select the Function Block tab.

Result:

1070 33003101.26
IL Editor

Step Action

The function block instances are displayed.

4 Expand the display of the public variables by clicking the respective + symbols.

Result:

You can now see all available public variables of the function block.

5 Enter the desired value for the public variable in the Value box.

Assigning Values using the Load and Save Instructions

Carry out the following steps to assign values using the load and save instructions:

33003101.26 1071
 IL Editor

Step Action

1 Call the function block for whose public variable you want to assign a value, see also Calling an
FFB, page 1059.

2 Load the value to be assigned to the buffer.

For example:

LD 1
3 Save the buffer contents in a public variable, see also Using formal parameters, page 1057.

For example:

ST D_ACT1.OP_CTRL

Reading public variables

See Using formal parameters, page 1057

Online functions
Online functions
The description of online functions is found in chapter Debugging in Textual Languages
(Structured Text, Instruction List), page 1413.

Reference Data Type in IL

Introduction
References to variables can be assigned in IL application programs.
A reference can be de-referenced in IL application programs.
For more information, refer to Reference Data Type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

1072 33003101.26
IL Editor

IL Examples using the Reference Data Type:

The EF, REF, takes a variable as an input parameter (type ANY) and provides its address as
output parameter (type REF_ANY).
The EF, MOVE, can assign a reference to a variable to another reference. If the input
parameter is (REF(MyVariable)), MOVE has the same effect as the REF EF.
The EF, TON, takes ptrToMyBool^ as an input parameter to dereference the reference
ptrToMyBool.

Export/Import IL Sections
Export/Import
The description for exporting/importing sections is found in the chapter Import / Export, page
1677.

33003101.26 1073
1074 33003101.26
ST Editor

ST Editor
What’s in This Chapter
Structure of an ST program................................................... 1075
Creating an ST Program....................................................... 1077
Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming ................ 1078
Navigating with the keyboard ................................................ 1082
Data input ........................................................................... 1083
Calling an FFB..................................................................... 1090
Using public variables .......................................................... 1101
Calling a statement .............................................................. 1103
Online functions....................................................................1110
Reference Data Type in ST....................................................1111
Export/Import IL Sections ......................................................1111

Overview
This chapter describes the specific menus and dialog boxes of the ST editor.
For a description of the syntax for the ST programming language, please refer to the
Structured Text ST (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) chapter in the Reference manual.

Structure of an ST program
Introduction
An ST program (Structured Text) consists of a list of statements that are executed in
sequence by the controller. Using these statements you can call function blocks, functions
and procedures conditionally or unconditionally, make assignments, execute statements
explicitly, repeat statements and execute jumps conditionally or unconditionally within a
section.

Properties of an ST program
Properties of an ST program:

33003101.26 1075
 ST Editor

• Statements consist of:

◦ an operator,
◦ an operand,
◦ an expression if required and
◦ a comment if required.
◦ In addition, every statement can be provided with a label.
• Statements must be concluded with semicolons.
• Several statements (separated by semicolons) may be present in one line.
• A single semi-colon denotes an empty statements (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).
• Each line is limited to 300 characters.
• Line breaks are possible in statements (multi-line statements).
• Labels, symbols and comments can be placed anywhere in a section. (Comments can
be entered anywhere where empty spaces are permitted.)
• A syntax and semantics check, page 1078 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered. The result of this check is displayed in colored text.
• Syntactically or semantically incorrect sections can be saved.

Edit and view functions

Edit and view functions of the ST editor:
• Entering text using the insert or overwrite mode, page 1077
• Selecting text, page 1009 (characters, words, lines, all)
• Deleting text, page 1012
• Cutting, page 1012, copying, page 1012 and pasting, page 1013
• Moving text, page 1013 (also between different ST/IL sections)
• Undo, page 1014 and Redo, page 1015
• Go To function, page 1019
• Using bookmarks, page 1017
• Searching for text and marking the result, page 1023
• Searching and replacing text, page 1025
• Searching and replacing variables and function blocks and DFB instances

1076 33003101.26
ST Editor

• Displaying text in selectable fonts and sizes

The text display type can be selected from the View > Select Font menu command.
This configuration applies to all sections of the IL and ST programming languages.
• Intelligent text indentation
The text indentation of a new line is taken from the previous one.
• Display the position (line, column) of the cursor in the status bar.

Input assistants
Input assistant for the ST editor:
• Input assistant for variables, page 1083
• Input assistant for functions, function blocks and procedures, page 1090
• Input assistant for statements, page 1103

Online functions
ST editor online functions:
• Displaying actual values, page 1030.
• Setting breakpoints, page 1414
• Setting watchpoints, page 1419
• Step by Step, page 1416

Creating an ST Program
Writing in insert/overwrite mode
Text can be entered in insert or overwrite modes
• Insert mode
The characters entered are inserted in the current position of the insert marker in
addition to the existing characters.
• Overwrite mode
The characters entered are inserted in the current position of the insert marker and
overwrite the existing characters.

33003101.26 1077
 ST Editor

Switching between the modes is done using the Insert key.

The current mode is displayed by INS for insert mode and OVR for overwrite mode.

Creating an ST program
Carry out the following procedures to create an ST program:

Step Action

1 Creating an ST section, page 499.

2 Enter the first instruction (e.g. VarA := VarB).

Note: As soon as the text is entered several checks are made, such as syntax/semantic error
checks, correct spelling of keywords and variable names etc. A detailed description of syntax is
found in chapter Structured Text (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual.

The results of the checks are indicated by a color folder, see also Syntax and Semantics Check
during Programming, page 1078.

3 Terminate the instruction with the closing operator (;).

4 Confirm the line with the ENTER key.

5 Repeat these steps until all instructions are entered.

Example:

Syntax and Semantics Check during Programming

Introduction
Syntax and semantics check is performed directly when creating the program.

1078 33003101.26
ST Editor

The result of this check is displayed in three formats:

• directly in the program section with colored text
• as tooltip if the cursor is placed on incorrect text.
• In the output window, if Generate > Analyze is selected.

Illustration in the program section

Representation of colors and labels:

Labeling Description Example

blue Keyword (e.g. IF, FOR, WHILE,...)

Note: IL specific keywords (e.g. LD, CAL, ST)

are not keywords in ST, but are still labeled as
such for technical reasons.
red Operators (that are not keywords)

green Comment

black standard text (e.g. variable, address, label, ...)

bold The name of DFBs and subroutines are shown

in boldface to identify that these objects can be
refined, page 1028.

underlining In DFB sections, the formal parameters of the

DFBs are shown underlined.
red wavy line Faulty text:
• Syntax error
e.g. spelling errors in keywords, non-
declared variables or FB instances,
incorrect block call, unvailable block call
(in the current PLC plateform or in the
library types), EFB type call instead of the
instance,...
• Semantic error
e.g. division by zero, value range
exceeded/underflow (recognized by the
system when entered)

Inverted text Text is selected

33003101.26 1079
 ST Editor

Tooltips
If the cursor is placed over incorrect text, the tooltip is displayed with a brief description of
the cause of the error. It will also be displayed in the output window after the analysis.

Error messages in the output window

Error message: Accessed object is not a function.

Cause of error Error Correction Example

Write error is present during Correct the write Wrong:

accessing of a function. error.

Right:

Name of the function was Rename the already -

already used for: used object.
• one variable
• an FB instance
• a DFB Type
• an SR Section
• a procedure or function
in a user library

Wrong syntax used during Correct the syntax. Wrong:

access
• an FB
• a procedure Right:
• an SR Section

Wrong:

Right:

Wrong:

Right:

1080 33003101.26
ST Editor

Error message: Accessed object is not a function block.

Cause of error Error Correction Example

Write error is present during Correct the write Wrong:

accessing. error.
• an FB
• a procedure Right:
• an SR Section

Wrong:

Right:

Wrong:

Right:

Name of the function was Rename the already -

already used for: used object.
• one variable
• an FB instance
• a DFB Type
• an SR Section
• a procedure or function
in a user library

Function block instances that Define the FB on the -

are not defined in the data data editor.
editor.
EFB that is not available for Change the EFB. -
the current PLC platform.

33003101.26 1081
 ST Editor

Cause of error Error Correction Example

An EFB that is not in the libset Update the libset. -

of the current project.

Wrong syntax used during Correct the syntax. Wrong:

access.
• a function
• a function block

Right:

Wrong:

Right:

Wrong:

Right:

Navigating with the keyboard

Navigating with the keyboard
The following keys and key combinations are provided for navigation:

Key combinations Motion

Cursor left Moves the cursor to the left

Cursor right Moves the cursor to the right

Cursor up Moves the cursor up

Cursor down Moves the cursor down

Ctrl+Cursor left Moves the cursor one string left

Ctrl+Cursor right Moves the cursor one string right

1082 33003101.26
ST Editor

Key combinations Motion

Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line

End Moves the cursor to the end of the current line

Ctrl+Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current section

Ctrl+End Moves the cursor to the end of the current section

Page Up Scrolls one page up (the cursor remains in its position on the screen)

Page Down Scrolls one page down (the cursor remains in its position on the
screen)

Ctrl+Alt+Page Up Displays the previous section (including via the View > Previous
Sectionmenu).

Ctrl+Alt+Page Down Displays the next section (including via the View > Next
Sectionmenu).

Alt+Enter Opens the properties dialog box for the selected section.

Data input
Introduction
You have different options for using data in your ST section.
• Using already declared variables, page 1084
◦ You can use a data selection dialog box.
or
◦ you can enter the variable name just like any other text.
• Use undeclared variables and declare them later, page 1085
You can define the variable name when creating your ST section and then declare all
variables used.
• Use undeclared variables and declare them immediately, page 1086
You can define variable names when creating your ST section and declare them
immediately.
• Declaration of variables directly in the ST section., page 1087
You can declare variables in the Data Editor, page 386, but also directly in the ST
section.

33003101.26 1083
 ST Editor

• Using formal parameters from function blocks (inputs/outputs, public variables), page
1088
◦ You can use a data selection dialog box.
or
◦ You can enter the formal parameter name just like any other text.

Entering declared variables using data selection

Carry out the following steps to enter a declared variable using data selection:

Step Action

1 Declare the required variables, see also Creation of EDT instances, page 386.

2 Place the cursor at the target position.

1084 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

3 Open data selection by:

• The Edit > Data Selection menu command..
• The Data Selection... menu commandfrom the shortcut menu for the section.
or
• Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

4 You have the following options to enter variables:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enter or the button .
• You can select the variable names from the list of recently used names using the symbol
and confirm using Enter or the button .
• You can delete your entry by pressing Esc or the button .
• Use the button ...to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1185 and in the Variables
tab confirm the selected variable using the OK button.
Example of a variable selection dialog box:

Result: The selected variable is enabled in the section.

Entering undeclared variables and declaring them later

Process the following steps to enter undeclared variables and declare them later:

33003101.26 1085
 ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 Enter the variable name.

Result: The variable selected is accepted. The syntax and semantics check, page 1078 marks
the variable name with a red wavy line to identify it as being undeclared, e.g.

3 Enter all variables in this way.

4 Declare all variables in the Data Editor, page 386 or directly in the ST section, page 1087.

Result: The red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

Entering undeclared variables and declaring them

immediately
Process the following steps to enter undeclared variables and declare them immediately:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 Click Create Variable in the shortcut menu, or press the Shift+Enter key combination

Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

3 Enter the variable name and data type.

4
If you do not want to assign an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and inserted at the target position in the section.

1086 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for
obtaining an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and inserted at the target position in the section.

Declaration of variables directly in the ST section.

Process the following steps to declare variables directly in the ST section.

Step Action

1 Place the cursor in an undeclared variable (undeclared variables are identified by a red wavy
line).

2 Click Create Variable in the shortcut menu, or press the Shift+Enter key combination

Result: The variable declaration dialog box opens.

Note: The variable name automatically appears in the Name field, if editor recognizes the text
entered in the section as a variable and its syntax is correct.

3
If you do not want to assign an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

33003101.26 1087
 ST Editor

Step Action

4
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for
obtaining an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

5
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and the red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

Using formal parameters

Process the following steps to use formal parameters with data selection:

Step Action

1 Call the function block whose formal parameters you want to use, see also Calling a function
block, page 1090.

2 To use the formal parameter, place the cursor at the target position.

3 Open data selection by:

• The Edit > Data Selection menu command..
• The Data Selection... menu commandfrom the shortcut menu for the section.
or
• Press the Ctrl+D key combination.
Result:

A data selection box, page 1841 is opened.

4 You have the following options to enter the formal parameter:

• You can enter the formal parameter name and confirm using Enter or the button.
In this case the procedure ends here.
• You can select the name from the list of recently used names using the symbol and
confirm using Enter or the button .
In this case the procedure ends here.
or
• Using the button ... to open a data selection dialog box, page 1185.

5 Select the Function Blocks tab.

1088 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

Result:

All declared block instances are displayed.

6 Expand the display of the inputs, outputs, and any inputs/outputs and public variables by clicking
their + symbols.

Result:

All available formal parameters are displayed now.

33003101.26 1089
 ST Editor

Step Action

7 Select the desired formal parameter and confirm with OK.

Result: The selected formal parameter is inserted into the section and a syntax and semantics
check, page 1078 is performed.

For example:

Calling an FFB
Introduction
You have the following options to open FFBs (Elementary Function, Elementary Function
Block, Derived Function Block, Procedure):
• You can enter the call like you enter any text (for syntax, see the section Calling FFBs
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual) in the Reference manual),
• You can use the function input assistants,
or
• You can enter the FFB to the section using the drag & drop method.
NOTE: Procedures are expansions to IEC 61131-3 and must be explicitly enabled via
the Tools > Project Settings dialog box, in the Language extensions tab by activating
the Allow procedures check box.

Calling a function block using the function input

assistant
Process the following steps to call a function block (elementary or derived) with the function
input assistant:

1090 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

Note: No text may be selected in the section.

The following positions are possible:

• On a free position outside of an existing FFB call.
• On a space within an existing FFB call. (In this case, an FFB call is created within an FFB
call.)

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192:

• The Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command..
• The FFB Input Assistant...menu commandfrom the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Press the Ctrl+Ikey combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result:

The function input assistant will be opened.

3 Click the FFB-Typ button in the....column, to open an FFB selection window, page 1189.

Result:

33003101.26 1091
 ST Editor

Step Action

The FFB selection dialog box is opened.

4 Select the library and family from the Libraries/Families column which contains the desired
function block.

Tip: If you do not know where to find the FFB you are looking for select the Libset, entry to see a
list of all the FFBs available independently of their libraries.

5 Select the desired function block from the Name column.

1092 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

Example:

6 Confirm the selection with OK.

Result:
• The function block is added to the function input assistant dialog box.
• An instance name is automatically suggested. You can keep this or change it as you
please.
• You can see all available parameters (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) of the function block, see also Information
about programming (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

33003101.26 1093
 ST Editor

Step Action

7 The number of inputs can be increased with some elementary functions. (You find out which
functions can be expanded by referring to the descriptions for the individual functions.)

Expandable pins can be recognized from the following display:

To add further pins select the last pin in the structure and press Add pin.

1094 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

8 Double-click the Entry field cell of the first parameter and enter the name of the variable/address
or an expression to be used.

You have the following options to enter the variable/address:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the button ... to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1186.
Assign all parameters of the function block a variable/address in this way.

Example:

9 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The function block call is inserted into the ST section and a syntax and semantics check,
page 1078 is performed.

Example:

33003101.26 1095
 ST Editor

Calling a function or procedure using the function input

assistant
Calling a function or procedure using the function input assistant is identical in principle to
calling a function block. The only difference is the absence of an instance name (step 5 of
the procedure Calling a function block using the function input assistant, page 1090).

Remarks
Some complex FFBs provide additional windows for entering parameters. Access to this
window is gained using the Special Assistant button that appears at the bottom of the
window.

Calling a function block instance using the function input

assistant
Process the following steps to select a block instance that has already been declared:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the target position.

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192:

• The Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command..
• The FFB Input Assistant...menu commandfrom the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Press the Ctrl+Ikey combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result:

1096 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

The function input assistant will be opened.

3 Click the Instance button in the....column, to open an FFB selection window, page 1180.

Result:

The dialog box for selecting function block instances is opened.

4 Select the desired block instance from the Name column and confirm the selection with OK.

Result:

33003101.26 1097
 ST Editor

Step Action

• The block instance is added to the function input assistant dialog box.
• You can see all available parameters (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) of the function block, see also Information
about programming (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

5 Double-click the Entry field cell of the first parameter and enter the name of the variable/address
to be used.

You have the following options to enter the variable/address:

• You can now enter the variable name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable/address from the list of recently used variables/addresses using
the symbol.
or
• Using the button ... to open a variable selection dialog box, page 1186.
Assign all parameters of the function block a variable/address in this way.

1098 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

Example:

6 Confirm the entries using the OK button.

Result: The function block call is inserted into the ST section and a syntax and semantics check,
page 1078 is performed. If the variables are not declared yet a red wavy line under the name is
used to identify them.

Example:

7 Declare all variables in the Data Editor, page 386 or directly in the ST section, page 1087.

Result: The red wavy line under the variable name disappears.

Changing the actual parameter using the function input

assistant
Process the following steps to change actual parameters with the function input assistant:

33003101.26 1099
 ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor inside a word of the FFB to be changed.

Note: No text may be selected and the FFB call to be changed must be syntactically correct.

2 Open the function input assistant, page 1192:

• The Edit > FFB Input Assistant... menu command..
• The FFB Input Assistant...menu commandfrom the shortcut menu (right-click) for the
section.
• Press the Ctrl+Ikey combination.
or
• Select the symbol.
Result:

The function input assistant is opened with the current actual parameters.

3 Make the desired changes and confirm using OK.

Inserting FFBs via drag & drop

FFBs can also be inserted into the section via drag & drop using the Types Library
Browser.
You have the following options to activate the Types Library Manager:

1100 33003101.26
ST Editor

• Use the Tools > Types Library Manager menu command.

or
• Press the Alt+3 key combination.

Using public variables

Introduction
In addition to inputs/outputs, some function blocks also provide public variables.
These variables transfer statistical values (values that are not influenced by the process) to
the function block. They are used for setting parameters for the function block.
The assignment of values to public variables is made via their initial values or assignments.
Public variables are read via the instance name of the function block and the names of the
public variables.

Assigning values using the initial value

Process the following steps to assign values using the initial value:

Step Action

1 Call the function block for whose public variable you want to assign a value, see also Calling an
FFB, page 1090.

2 Open the data editor, see also Data Editor Access, page 345.

3 Select the Function Block tab.

Result:

33003101.26 1101
 ST Editor

Step Action

The function block instances are displayed.

4 Expand the display of the public variables by clicking the respective + symbols.

Result:

You can now see all available public variables of the function block.

5 Enter the desired value for the public variable in the Value box.

Assigning values using the assignment operator

Process the following steps to assign values using the assignment operator:

1102 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

1 Call the function block for whose public variable you want to assign a value, see also Calling an
FFB, page 1090.

2 Call the public variable, see also Using formal parameters, page 1088.

For example:

D_ACT1.OP_CTRL

3 Assign a value to the public variable.

For example:

D_ACT1.OP_CTRL := 1 ;

Reading public variables

See Using formal parameters, page 1088

Calling a statement
Introduction
You can call a statement (IF, FOR, WHILE, REPEAT, CASE) in the same way that you enter
text (syntax, see section Statement (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) in the Reference manual) or using an input assistant.

Selecting statements
Selecting statements:

33003101.26 1103
 ST Editor

State- Description Call via menu command Call via Call via key
ment symbol combination

IF The IF statement determines Edit > New > IF F4

that a statement or a group of Statement
statements will only be executed
if its related Boolean expression
has the value 1 (true). If the
condition is 0, the statement or
the statement group will not be
executed.

See also in the Reference

manual:

IF...THEN...END_IF (see
EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference
Manual),

ELSE (see EcoStruxure™

Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) and

ELSIF...THEN (see
EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference
Manual)

FOR, The FOR statement repeats a Edit > New > FOR F5
statement sequence until the Statement
END_FOR statement. The
number of repetitions is
determined by the start value,
the end value and the control
variable.

See also in the Reference

manual:

FOR...TO...BY...DO...
END_FOR (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual),

WHILE The WHILE statement causes a Edit > New > WHILE F6
sequence of statements to be Statement
executed repeatedly until its
related Boolean expression is 0.
If the expression is false right
from the start, the group of
statements will not be executed
at all.

See also in the Reference

manual:

1104 33003101.26
ST Editor

State- Description Call via menu command Call via Call via key
ment symbol combination

WHILE...DO...END_WHILE
(see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference
Manual),

REPEAT The REPEAT statement causes a Edit > New > REPEAT Shift + F6
sequence of statements to be Statement
executed repeatedly (at least
once) until its related Boolean
condition is 1.

See also in the Reference

manual:

REPEAT...UNTIL...END_
REPEAT (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual),

CASE The CASE statement consists of Edit > New > CASE Shift + F4
an INT data type expression Statement
(the "selector") and a list of
statement groups. Each group is
provided with a label which
consists of one or several
integer numbers (INT, DINT,
UINT, UDINT) or areas of
integer values. The first group of
statements is executed, whose
label contains the calculated
value of the selector. Otherwise
none of the statements will be
executed.

See also in the Reference

manual:

CASE...OF...END_CASE
(see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference
Manual),

Calling a IF statement using the input assistant

Process the following steps to call a IF statement with the input assistant:

33003101.26 1105
 ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the beginning of an empty line.

2 Select the input assistant for IF statements, see also Selecting statements, page 1103.

Result:

An empty IF statement is inserted into the section.

3 Complete the IF statement with your data.

Result: A syntax and semantics check, page 1078 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered.

Note: An input assistant is also provided for entering variables, page 1083 and calling FFBs,
page 1090 (functions, function blocks and procedures).

For example:

Calling a FOR statement using the input assistant

Process the following steps to call a FOR statement with the input assistant:

1106 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the beginning of an empty line.

2 Select the input assistant for FOR statements, see also Selecting statements, page 1103.

Result:

An empty FOR statement is inserted into the section.

3 Complete the FOR statement with your data.

Result: A syntax and semantics check, page 1078 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered.

Note: An input assistant is also provided for entering variables, page 1083 and calling FFBs,
page 1090 (functions, function blocks and procedures).

For example:

Calling a WHILE statement using the input assistant

Process the following steps to call a WHILE statement with the input assistant:

33003101.26 1107
 ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the beginning of an empty line.

2 Select the input assistant for WHILE statements, see also Selecting statements, page 1103.

Result:

An empty WHILE statement is inserted into the section.

3 Complete the WHILE statement with your data.

Result: A syntax and semantics check, page 1078 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered.

Note: An input assistant is also provided for entering variables, page 1083 and calling FFBs,
page 1090 (functions, function blocks and procedures).

For example:

Calling a REPEAT statement using the input assistant

Process the following steps to call a REPEAT statement with the input assistant:

1108 33003101.26
ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the beginning of an empty line.

2 Select the input assistant for REPEAT statements, see also Selecting statements, page 1103.

Result:

An empty REPEAT statement is inserted into the section.

3 Complete the REPEAT statement with your data.

Result: A syntax and semantics check, page 1078 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered.

Note: An input assistant is also provided for entering variables, page 1083 and calling FFBs,
page 1090 (functions, function blocks and procedures).

For example:

Calling a CASE statement using the input assistant

Process the following steps to call a CASE statement with the input assistant:

33003101.26 1109
 ST Editor

Step Action

1 Place the cursor at the beginning of an empty line.

2 Select the input assistant for CASE statements, see also Selecting statements, page 1103.

Result:

An empty CASE statement is inserted into the section.

3 Complete the CASE statement with your data.

Result: A syntax and semantics check, page 1078 is performed immediately after the statement
is entered.

Note: An input assistant is also provided for entering variables, page 1083 and calling FFBs,
page 1090 (functions, function blocks and procedures).

For example:

Online functions
Online functions
The description of online functions is found in chapter Debugging in Textual Languages
(Structured Text, Instruction List), page 1413.

1110 33003101.26
ST Editor

Reference Data Type in ST

Introduction
References to variables can be assigned in ST application programs.
A reference can be de-referenced in ST application programs.
For more information, refer to Reference Data Type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).
ST Examples using the Reference Data Type:

The EF, REF, takes a variable as an input parameter (type ANY) and provides its address as
output parameter (type REF_ANY).
The EF, MOVE, can assign a reference to a variable to another reference. If the input
parameter is (REF(MyVariable)), MOVE has the same effect as the REF EF.
The EF, TON, takes ptrToMyBool^ as an input parameter to dereference the reference
ptrToMyBool.

Export/Import IL Sections
Export/Import
The description for exporting/importing sections is found in the chapter Import / Export, page
1677.

33003101.26 1111
1112 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

LL984 Editor
What’s in This Chapter
Creating a Program with LL984 Programming
Language.............................................................................1113
Editing Contacts .................................................................. 1132
Editing Coils ........................................................................ 1139
Editing Function Blocks ........................................................ 1147
Editing Links........................................................................ 1151
Editing Equation Network Blocks........................................... 1156
Assigning Variables to LL984 Objects.................................... 1163
Calling Subroutines.............................................................. 1166
Entering Comments ............................................................. 1168
Customize LL984 Editor Colors............................................. 1170

Overview
This chapter describes the specifics of the LL984 Editor.

Creating a Program with LL984 Programming

Language
Overview
This section describes the basics for creating a program in the LL984 programming
language.

Project Settings for LL984 Programs

Introduction
Before creating an LL984 program, you should activate the following project settings:
• Ladder Logic 984 (LL984)
(Project Settings > Program > Languages)
To be able to create LL984 sections and networks.

33003101.26 1113
 LL984 Editor

• Allow dynamic arrays (ANY_ARRAY_XXX)

(Project Settings > Variables)
To be able to use dynamic arrays with the LL984 function blocks.

Structure of an LL984 Program

Introduction
The structure of an LL984 program corresponds to a rung for relay switching.
The left power rail is located on the left side of the LL984 Editor. This left power rail
corresponds to the phase (L conductor) of a rung.
The right power rail corresponds to the neutral conductor.
A group of connected objects that are not connected to other objects (except for the power
rails), is called a rung.

Properties of an LL984 program

In LL984 program:
• The logic of LL984 is programmed in networks.
• Several networks are grouped in segments.
• Each network contains a matrix of 7 rows and 11 columns, where you can place
contacts, coils, function blocks etc.
• LL984 programs are cell oriented, i.e. only 1 object can be placed in each cell.
With the exception of vertical connections. They may coexist with other objects
(contact, coils, function blocks).

1114 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

• LL984 segments (and also LL984 networks inside segments) are executed in the
sequence in which they are displayed in the Structural View of the Project Browser.
To change this sequence, you can drag-and-drop LL984 segments or LL984 networks
inside the Structural View.
Objects in a network are executed top to bottom, left to right.

• A syntax and semantics check is performed immediately after the statement is entered.
The result of this check is displayed in colored text and objects.
Please refer to Syntax and Semantics Check During Programming, page 1119.
• Syntactically or semantically incorrect segments or networks can be saved.

LL984 Operating Modes

NOTE: to detect the first cycle in RUN, the recommended solution is to use %S21
system bit.

LL984 Program Objects

The objects of the LL984 programming language help to divide a network into a number of:
• contacts, page 1132
• coils, page 1139
• function blocks

33003101.26 1115
 LL984 Editor

• equation network blocks, page 1156

• jumps and subroutine calls, page 1166
These objects can be linked with each other through:
• boolean connections and links, page 1151
• variables
Comments for the logic of the program can be added using text objects, page 1168.

Edit and View Functions

• Selecting objects
• Deleting objects
• Cutting, copying and pasting objects
• Moving objects (also between different LL984 sections)
• Replacing objects
• Undo and Redo
• Using Bookmarks, page 607
• Searching and replacing variables and function blocks, page 1232

FFB Input Features

The LL984 Editor provides 2 additional features to add function blocks to a network:
• LL984 Instruction Bar (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference
Manual)
• mnemonics (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference Manual)
Using mnemonics, page 1150 you can also add coils and contacts to a network.

Online Functions
Displaying and modifying variable values using:
• animation tables, page 1486
• instruction editors, page 1495

1116 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Creating an LL984 Program

Introduction
The LL984 Editor window is made up of cells and 1 object can be placed in each one. The
cells are separated visually using a grid which can be switched off (View > Grid).

Creating an LL984 Program with the Mouse

Process the following steps to create an LL984 program with the mouse:

Step Action

1 Create an LL984 network., page 536

2 Select the desired object using:

• the menu commands in the Edit > New > <Object> menu
or
• the symbols for the objects in the toolbar
Result: The mouse pointer indicates the selected object (placement mode).

3 Click the target cells in the LL984 section.

Result: The selected object is inserted and the selection mode is active again.

Example:

Return to selection mode by clicking the symbol or pressing the ESC key.

4 To enter the respective actual parameters (variable/address), double-click the object.

Result: The properties dialog box for the object is opened.

33003101.26 1117
 LL984 Editor

Step Action

Example:

5 Enter the desired actual parameter and a comment (if required) and confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The names of the associated variables are displayed above the object.
NOTE: Entering a binary address opens the Create variable dialog. By this you can create
a variable associated with the entered address.
6 Repeat these steps until all objects are entered.

Creating an LL984 Program with the Keyboard

Process the following steps to create an LL984 program with the keyboard:

Step Action

1 Create an LL984 network., page 536

2 Using the keyboard, place the field with the gray background on the cell where the object should
be inserted.
3 Select the desired object using the function keys for the objects.

Result: The cursor symbol indicates the selected object.

4 Confirm the selection using the ENTER key.

Result: The selected object is inserted into the cell with the gray background and the gray field is
automatically shifted to the next cell.

Example:

1118 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Step Action

To return to selection mode, press the ESC key.

5 To enter the respective actual parameters (variable/address), use the Properties menu
command from the shortcut menu.

Result: The properties dialog box for the object is opened.

Example:

6 Enter the desired actual parameter and a comment (if required) and confirm the entries with OK.

Result: The names of the associated variables are displayed above the object.
NOTE: Entering a binary address opens the Create variable dialog. By this you can create
a variable associated with the entered address.
7 Repeat these steps until all objects are entered.

Syntax and Semantics Check During Programming

Introduction
Syntax and semantics check is performed directly when creating the program.
The result of this check is displayed in 3 formats:
• Directly in the program section with colored objects or texts.
• As tooltip if the cursor is placed on an incorrect object.
• In the output window, if Build > Analyze is selected.
NOTE: Warnings are not visualized in the program section.

33003101.26 1119
 LL984 Editor

Colors of Objects/Texts
Color Description

black Syntax and semantics are correct.

blue Possible causes:

• Associated variable is not declared.
• Data type of the variable does not match the data type of the pin.
• Input or output pin not connected.

red wavy line invalid text. For example, variables which are not declared, variables with an incorrect data
below text type, etc.

Tooltips
If the cursor is placed over an incorrect object, a tooltip is displayed with a brief description
of the cause of the error/warning.

Messages in the Output Window

Error and warning messages are displayed in the output window after Build > Analyze.
Double-click an error or a warning message in the output window to navigate to the affected
object in the LL984 Editor.
Errors messages in contrast to warning messages must be fixed, because they inhibit a
successful Build.

Error Messages
The following is a list of example error messages that Analyze will display (E).

Error Message

illegal link

variable '%1' must be located

only coils allowed in last column

only one coil per row

FFB type '%1' isn't supported

last object in row must be coil

1120 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Error Message

maximum column number allowed is '11'

maximum row number allowed is '7'
parameter '%1' expects constant value

illegal constant value '%1': %2

parameter '%1' expects variable

unsupported object

dimension of '%1' is too small, must be at least '%2'

dimension of '%1' must be '%2'

variable '%1' must be writable

parameter of '%1' must be a multiple of '%2'

parameter of '%1' must be a multiple of '%2'

usage of LL984 language is disabled

usage of SKP instruction is disabled

'%1' only allowed in subroutine network

'%1' must be in row1/column1

label '%1' isn't unique

label '%1' doesn't exist

subroutine segment doesn't exist

file '%1' is missing

IMC template '%1' doesn't exist

Non-latched usage of '%1' detected, which is used also as latched

Warning Messages
The following is a list of example warning messages that Analyze will display (W).

Warning Message

expression expected (if no actual parameter is assigned to a contact)

variable expected (if no actual parameter is assigned to a coil)

33003101.26 1121
 LL984 Editor

Tolerated Problems
Analyze will tolerate the following problems.

Problem
missing connections (to power rails or other logic elements)

skipping from a subroutine network to a network of another subroutine in the LL984 subroutine segment, if the
project setting "SKP enabled" is checked

Network Display
Introduction
The LL984 Editor can display various information concerning variables attached to coils,
contacts and function blocks.
This information is displayed above the respective coil, contact or function block node and
can be displayed by tooltip, too.

4 Different Views
You can define 4 different views (View 1 to View 4) via Tools > Project Settings >
Program > LL984 > Network Display.
According to the settings for View 1 to View 4 the LL984 Editor will show the following
information:
• address (e.g. %M100)
• 984-address (e.g. 400100)
• variable name
• variable comment
• descriptors 1 to 9
• topological address
For detailed information on how to define the different views, please refer to Project
Settings, section Program (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference
Manual).

1122 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

View Switching
You can switch between the different views defined, using CTRL+W or using the Change

View Mode button ( ).

The button's tooltip shows the current view (View 1, 2, 3 or 4.

Navigating with the Keyboard

Using the Keyboard
The following keys and key combinations are provided for navigation:

Key combinations Motion

Left arrow Moves the gray field in a cell to the left by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell.

If the first line is reached, the previous line is automatically selected.

Right arrow Moves the gray field in a cell to the right by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell.

If the last line is reached, the next line is automatically selected.

Up arrow Moves the gray field in a cell to the up by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell.
Down arrow Moves the gray field in a cell to the down by one cell and selects the
contents of that cell.
Shift+Left arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field to the left by one cell.

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

Shift+Right arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field to the right by one cell.

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

Shift+Up arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field up by one cell.

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

Shift+Down arrow Moves the selected object and the gray field down one cell.

This also applies to several selected objects, the gray field must be
behind one of the selected objects.

33003101.26 1123
 LL984 Editor

Key combinations Motion

Home Positions the gray field in the first column and shows this new
location.
End Positions the gray field in the last column and shows this new location.

Ctrl+Home Positions the gray field in the upper left hand cell in this network and
shows this new location.
Ctrl+End Positions the gray field in the upper right hand cell in this network and
shows this new location.
Page Up Scrolls the position of the gray field one page up and shows this new
position, as long as the first row is not visible.

Displays the previous network/segment, if the first row is already

visible. You can also display the previous segment/network via View
> GoTo Previous Section.
Page Down Scrolls the position of the gray field one page down and shows this
new position, as long as the last row is not visible.

Displays the next network/section, if the last row is already visible.

You can also display the next section/network via View > GoTo Next
Section.

Using Page Down in the last network of a segment, if the last row is
already visible, will display a message box asking you to create a new
network.

Click Yes to open the New Network dialog.

Click No to open the next segment/network.

Space bar Selects or deselects the object in the cells highlighted in gray.

Shift + Space bar The position of the gray field is moved one cell to the right.

Enter In Insert mode: Inserts the selected object into the currently selected
cells highlighted in gray and moves the position of the gray field one
cell to the right.

Alt+Enter Opens the properties dialog box for the selected object/pin.

Tab Select the next pin in an FFB if the FFB or an FFB pin is selected.

Esc Activates the Select mode.

NOTE: You can also display a segment/network by double-clicking the respective

segment/network in the Structural View of the Project Browser.

1124 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Selecting Objects
Select Mode
Objects are selected in select mode.
Select mode can be activated using:
• the Edit > Select Mode menu command
• the symbol,
or
• the Esc key

The cursor symbol indicates that select mode is active

Selecting an Object
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

Left-click the object you want to select. Move the gray field to the cell with the object to be
selected, see also Navigating with the Keyboard,
page 1123.

Selecting Several Objects

Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

Selecting several objects:

1. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
1. Move the gray field to the cell with the first object
2. Drag the mouse across the objects you want to
select. to be selected, see also Navigating with the
Keyboard, page 1123.
or
2. Press the Shift+Space bar key combination.
1. Left-click the first object you want to
select. Result: The object is added to the current
selection and the gray field is shifted one cell to
2. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed. the right.
3. Left-click the next object you want to 3. Repeat these steps until all desired objects are
select. selected.
4. Repeat these steps until all desired
objects are selected.

33003101.26 1125
 LL984 Editor

Selecting by Rows
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

Selecting the contents of a row: -

1. Left-click the number of the row you want to
select in the vertical ruler.
Selecting the contents of several lines:
1. Left-click the number of the first line you
want to select in the vertical ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last line you
want to select in the vertical ruler.

Selecting by Columns
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

Selecting the contents of a column: -

1. Left-click the number of the column you want to
select in the horizontal ruler.
Selecting the contents of several columns:
1. Left-click the number of the first column
you want to select in the horizontal ruler.
2. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
3. Left-click the number of the last column
you want to select in the horizontal ruler.

Selecting All
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

Use the Edit > Select All menu command. Press the Ctrl+A key combination.

Deselecting Objects
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

Left-click an empty space in the section. Move the gray field.

1126 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Deleting, Cutting, Copying, Pasting and Moving Objects

Deleting Objects
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

Deleting the selected object:

1. Select, page 1125 the object to be deleted.
1. Select, page 1125 the object to be deleted.
2. Use the Edit > Delete menu command.
2. Press the Del key.
Deleting the object left of the gray field:
1. Press the Backspace key.

Result: The selected object is deleted. The actual parameters are deleted together with the object, even if they
were not selected explicitly. Boolean links are only deleted if they are selected explicitly.

Cutting Objects
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

1. Select the object to be cut. 1. Select the object to be cut.

2. Use the Edit > Cut menu command. 2. Press the Ctrl+X key combination.

or
Use Cut from the context menu (right-click).

Result: The selected object is cut from the section and copied to the clipboard. This is also the case for the
actual parameters.

The cut object can be inserted in any other position (also in another LL984 network).

Copying Objects to the Clipboard

Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

1. Select the object to be copied.

1. Select the object to be copied.
2. Press the Ctrl+C key combination.
2. Use the Edit > Copy menu command.
or
Use Copy from the context menu (right-click).

Result: The selected object is copied to the clipboard. This is also the case for the actual parameters.

The cut object can be inserted in any other position (also in another LL984 network).

33003101.26 1127
 LL984 Editor

Pasting Objects from the Clipboard

Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

1. Move the cursor to the target position pressing

1. Use the menu command Edit > Insert. Ctrl and using the arrow keys.
or
2. Press the Ctrl+V key combination.
Use Paste from the context menu (right-click).
3. Press Enter.
2. Left-click the target position.

NOTE: (for pasting contacts and coils) If the target position already contains a contact or coil, the
existing object is overwritten by the new object.
NOTE: The following is the behavior of the Copy, Cut and Paste on a function block instance. It only
applies to graphical languages as FBD, LD and LL984.
• Using the Paste function after a Copy of an object:
As a result of a Copy, a new function block instance (FBI name) is used. The Paste function creates a
new FBI whenever it is repeated. Accordingly, the FBI name is incremented.
• Using the Paste function after a Cut of an object:
As a result of a Cut, the same instance of the function is used. The Paste function uses the same FBI
whenever it is repeated. Accordingly, the FBI is identical.
NOTE: Using same instance of a function block is not recommended because it can lead to incorrect
execution of the function blocks. A function block instance uses contextual variables that are owned by
each instance usage and cannot be applied to any other. For instance, each current value is specific to one
timer instance and one timer usage (Current value of a timer named TON_1 cannot be shared with another
timer named TON_2).

1128 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Moving Objects
Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

1. Select the object to be moved. 1. Position the gray field on the object to be moved.

2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected 2. Press the Space bar.
object. (On one of the selected objects if several 3. Press the Shift key and keep it pressed.
are selected).
4. Move the object to the target position using the
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol arrow keys.

to .
3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol

to .
4. Drag the object to the new position and release
the mouse button.
Result: The selected object is moved from its original position to the target position. The object's actual
parameters are moved together with the object. Boolean links are only kept for horizontal movement operations.
NOTE: A moving of FFBs to cells that are already occupied (e.g. by contact, coil, other FFB, boolean link),
is not possible.
NOTE: The move operation is also possible across sections between different opened LL984 networks.
NOTE: When objects are moved beyond the visible area of the editor window, automatic scrolling of the
window will not begin until you reach the edge of the window with the mouse pointer, not as soon as the
objects are moved beyond the edge.

Copying Objects via Drag-and-Drop

Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard

-
1. Select the object to be copied.
2. Position the mouse pointer on the selected object.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

3. Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
4. Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.

Result: The mouse pointer changes its symbol to .

5. Drag the object to the new position.
NOTE: This is also possible across sections between different opened LL984
networks.
6. Release the mouse button.
Result: A copy of the selected object is pasted at the target position. The object's actual
parameters (variable/address) are copied together with the object. A new instance is
automatically created for FFBs.

33003101.26 1129
 LL984 Editor

Displaying the Properties

Displaying the Object Properties
You have the following options to display the object properties dialog:
• Double-click the object.
• Select, page 1125 the object and use the Edit > Properties... dialog.
• Select the object and use Properties from the context menu (right-click).
• Select the object and then press the Alt+Enter key combination.
When the properties dialog is called without an object being selected, the Network
Properties, page 541 dialog is opened.
If several objects are selected, the commands do not work.

Displaying the Data Properties

You have the following options to display the Data Properties dialog, page 1195:
• Via the LL984 network:
Select an object and use Data Properties from the context menu or press the Ctrl
+Enter key combination.
• Via the Data Editor
Select the line of the respective object in the Data Editor and use Data Properties from
the context menu or press the Ctrl+Enter key combination or use the Edit > Data
Properties dialog.

Inserting and Deleting Rows/Columns

Introduction
Each network contains a matrix of 7 rows and 11 columns.
But via Insert/Delete row and Insert/Delete column you can shift rows downwards/
upwards and shift columns to the right/left.

Rules for Inserting Rows/Columns

The following rules apply when inserting rows/columns.

1130 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

• The new row is inserted above the first selected row.

The content of the following rows will be shifted to the bottom.
• The new column is inserted left of the first selected column.
The content of the following columns will be shifted to the right.
• If there are no free rows/columns at the bottom/right of the network, the menu items will
be disabled.
• If the new row would intersect a middle or a bottom node of an FFB, the menu items will
be disabled.

Rules for Deleting Rows/Columns

The following rules apply when deleting rows/columns.
• You can not delete a row/column containing any object.
• If there are no free rows/columns at the current position, the menu items will be
disabled.

Inserting Rows
Step Action

1 Select the desired row in the vertical ruler (click the row number).

2 Use the Insert row menu command from the context menu of the vertical ruler or use the Edit >
Insert row menu command.

Result: A row is inserted above the selected row.

Inserting Columns
Step Action

1 Select the desired column in the horizontal ruler (click the column number).

2 Use the Insert column menu command from the context menu of the horizontal ruler or use the
Edit > Insert column menu command.

Result: A column is inserted left of the selected column.

33003101.26 1131
 LL984 Editor

Deleting Rows
Step Action

1 Select the desired row in the vertical ruler (click the row number).

2 Use the Delete row menu command from the context menu of the vertical ruler or use the Edit >
Delete row menu command.

Result: The row is deleted. The rows below are shifted on row up. At the bottom an empty row is
inserted.

Deleting Columns
Step Action

1 Select the desired column in the horizontal ruler (click the column number).

2 Use the Delete column menu command from the context menu of the horizontal ruler or use the
Edit > Delete column menu command.

Result: The column is deleted. The columns from the right are shifted one column to the left. At
the right side of the grid an empty column is inserted.

Editing Contacts
Overview
This section describes how to edit contacts in the LL984 programming language.

Selecting Contacts
Introduction
A contact is an LL984 element that transfers a status on the horizontal link to its right side.
This status comes from the Boolean AND link of the status of the horizontal link on the left
side with the status of the relevant Boolean current parameter.

1132 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Information Concerning Variables

The LL984 Editor can display various information concerning variables attached to coils,
contacts and function block nodes.
This information can be displayed by tooltip, too.
For further information on how the variables attached to contacts are displayed, please refer
to Network Display, page 1122.

Contact Types
Contact Type Description Call via Menu Command Call via Call via Key
Icon
Normally For normally open contacts, the status Edit > New > Normally F3
open contact of the left link is copied to the right link, if open contact
the status of the relevant Boolean actual
parameter is 1. Otherwise, the status of or
the right link is 0.
Normally open contact from
the context menu
Normally For normally closed contacts, the status Edit > New > Normally Shift+F3
closed of the left link is copied to the right link, if closed contact
contact the status of the relevant Boolean actual
parameter is 0. Otherwise, the status of or
the right link is 0.
Normally closed contact
from the context menu
Positive With contacts for detection of positive Edit > New > Positive Ctrl+F3
transition- transitions, the right link for a program transition-sensing contact
sensing cycle is 1 if a transfer of the relevant
contact actual parameter goes from 0 to 1 and or
the status of the left link is 1 at the same
time. Otherwise, the status of the right Positive transition-sensing
link is 0. contact from the context
menu
Also see Edge Recognition (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).

Negative With contacts for detection of negative Edit > New > Negative Ctrl + Shift +
transition- transitions, the right link for a program transition-sensing contact F3
sensing cycle is 1 if a transfer of the relevant
contact actual parameter goes from 1 to 0 and or
the status of the left link is 1 at the same
time. Otherwise, the status of the right Negative transition-sensing
link is 0. contact from the context
menu
Also see Edge Recognition (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).

33003101.26 1133
 LL984 Editor

Placing Contacts
Introduction
Contacts can be placed in any free cell except cells directly on the right power rail.
If a contact is placed in a cell that was previously occupied by a contact, coil, a Boolean link
or a label, the cell contents are replaced by the new contact.
If a contact is placed in a cell that is already occupied by another object (e.g. FFBs), an error
message is returned.
The following are permitted as actual parameters for contacts:
• Boolean variables
• Boolean literals (0, 1, FALSE, TRUE)
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)
• ST expressions that return a Boolean result (e.g. VarA > VarB)
ST expressions as formal parameters on contacts are an extension of IEC 61131-3 and
must be explicitly enabled via the Tools > Project Settings > Program > Languages >
Common by activating the Usage of ST expressions check box.

Automatically Assign a Variable

If via Tools > Options > Data and Languages > Languages the Automatically assign a
variable to a new graphical object check box is activated, then the corresponding
properties dialog is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedures
explained here are used when the check box is deactivated.

1134 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Placing Contacts
Step Action

1 Select the desired contact, see also Selecting Contacts, page 1132.

2 Click the target cell in the LL984 section.

or

Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected contact is inserted.

3 To place further contacts of the same type:
• Click the target cell in the LL984 section.
or
Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Assigning Actual Parameters

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog, page 1130 for the contact.

Result: The contacts properties dialog is opened.

Example:

2 You have the following options to enter the actual parameters:

33003101.26 1135
 LL984 Editor

Step Action

• You can enter %Mx (%Ix) and confirm using Enter.

• You can enter the actual parameter and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the actual parameter from the list of recently used names using the
symbol and confirm using Enter.
or
• Using the button ... you can open a Data Selection dialog and confirm the selected
variables there with OK.
3 Confirm the selected variable with OK.

Result:
• If the selected variable is declared, it is enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics
check, page 1119 is performed and the procedure ends here.

• If the variable is not declared, a Create variable? dialog opens. In this case, continue with
the following steps of this procedure.

NOTE: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog using the symbol.
In this case, the variable name is enabled in the section, but not declared.
NOTE: Entering a binary address (%M1 / %I1) opens the Create variable dialog
proposing a variable name (_000001 / _100001) that can be modified. If there is
already a variable associated to %M1 / %I1 it will be reused as proposal.

4
If you do not want to assign the variable an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the
symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check is
performed and the procedure ends here.

Example:

1136 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Step Action

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for
obtaining an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check is
performed immediately after the statement is entered.

Example:

Usage of ST Expressions
To enter ST expressions for contacts the same rules apply as for entering ST expressions for
FFB pins, page 818.

Properties Dialog for Contacts

Calling the Properties Dialog
See Displaying the Properties, page 1130.

Structure of the Properties Dialog

The contact properties dialog consists of 2 tabs:
• General
In this tab, you can enter the actual parameter, page 1135 of the contact.
• Comment
In this tab, you can enter a comment about the contact.

33003101.26 1137
 LL984 Editor

General Tab
Representation of the General tab

Elements of the General tab

Element Description

BOOLEAN Expression Enter the name of the actual parameter in this text box.

You have the following options:

• You can directly enter the name of the variable/address or paste it from the
clipboard.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names
using the symbol.
or
• Use the command button ...to open a Data Selection dialog, page 1174.
The actual parameters which are permitted are:
• Boolean variables
• Boolean constants
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)
• ST expression delivering a Boolean result (e.g. BoolVar1 OR BoolVar1)
• Literal (1 or 0 or. TRUE or FALSE)

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the dialog.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog.

NOTE: Entering a binary address (%M1 / %I1) opens the Create variable? dialog
proposing a variable name (_000001 / _100001) that can be modified. If there is already
a variable associated to %M1 / %I1 it will be reused as proposed.

1138 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Comment Tab
Representation of the Comment tab

Elements of the Comment tab

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the contact.

This comment is displayed as a tooltip when the cursor is placed over the contact. It
is independent from the variable comment that can be assigned to the variable in the
Data Editor.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the dialog.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog.

Editing Coils
Overview
This section describes how to edit coils in the LL984 programming language.

33003101.26 1139
 LL984 Editor

Selecting Coils
Introduction
A coil is an LL984 element which transfers the status of the horizontal link on the left side,
unchanged, to the horizontal link on the right side. The status is saved in the respective
Boolean actual parameter. Coils normally follow contacts or FFBs, (functions and function
blocks), but they can also be followed by contacts.

Information Concerning Variables

The LL984 Editor can display various information concerning variables attached to coils,
contacts and function block nodes.
This information can be displayed by tooltip, too.
For further information on how the variables attached to coils are displayed, please refer to
Network Display, page 1122.

Coil Types
Non-latched/ and latched coils have different behavior.

Non-latched Coils: A reset of the coil will be performed during warm-start and after STOP/RUN of the
PLC. Reset during warm-start works for %M addresses and %M-located-variables
attached only.

Latched Coils: In the first scan latched coils have the status of last scan before warm-start.

CAUTION
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Before using non-latched or latched coils, make sure that you completely understand
the different behavior of non-latched/latched coils.
• Be sure of the output states after a PLC start when using latched and non-latched
coils.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

1140 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Coil Type Description Call via Menu Command Call via Call via
Icon Keyboard

Coil (non- With coils, the status of the left link is Edit > New > Coil F5
latched) copied to the relevant Boolean actual
parameter and the right link. or

For further information see below. Coil from the context menu

Latched coil With latched coils, the status of the left Edit > New > Latched coil Shift+F5
link is copied to the relevant Boolean
actual parameter and the right link. or

For further information see below. Latched coil from the context
menu

PLC Start Behavior of Coils

• Non-latched Coils
A reset of the coil will be performed during warm-start and after STOP/RUN of the PLC.
Reset during warm-start works for %M addresses and %M-located-variables attached
only.
• Latched Coils
Latched coils will maintain their state after a Stop/Start of the PLC and on warm-start. In
the first scan latched coils have the status of last scan before warm-start.
This is the same behavior as normal coils show in IEC Ladder Diagram language.
Detailed information:
• For details when a warm-start is performed please see Processing of Power Outage
and Restoral for Premium/Quantum PLCs (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).
Especially for the case of a Power Cycle this depends on the position of the PLC's key
switch (MemPrt/Start/Stop).
◦ For firmware version 2.8:
Latched coils are not maintained if the key switch is in the Start position.
◦ For firmware version 2.6:
Latched coils are maintained regardless of the key switch position.
• For details regarding the PLC's key switch refer to Key Switches (see Quantum using
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference Manual).
For details regarding Cold Start and warm-start processing refer to Processing on Cold
Start for Premium/Quantum PLCs (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) and Processing on Warm Restart for
Premium/Quantum PLCs (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual).

33003101.26 1141
 LL984 Editor

Non-latched Coil Restriction

The following restriction applies for non-latched coils:
• If an address (or a variable located on this address) is attached to a normal LL984 coil
(non-latched) and this address has other (latched) write usages somewhere else in the
program (for example an assignment in ST/FBD/LD or a latched coil in an LL984
network), this will lead to the following analyze message:
Non-latched usage of '%1' detected, which is used also as latched.
This message will be reported for the non-latched coil(s) usage in LL984 networks only.
To help avoid this restriction, start a search for getting the occurrences of this conflicting
address.

Latched Coil Representation

A latched coil is represented by a circle with an L or an M in the middle.
Whether an L or an M will be displayed inside a latched coil can be define via Tools >
Options > Data and Languages > LL984 > Show latched coil as. Please refer to Data
and Languages (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference Manual).

Placing Coils
Introduction
For placing coils the following restrictions apply:
• Only 1 coil can be placed per row.
• No other object can be placed to the right of a coil. The coil is always the last object in a
row.
• If a coil is placed in a cell that is already occupied by another object (e.g. FFBs), an
error message is returned.
A placed coil automatically creates a connection with its neighboring objects on the left if
they are of the BOOL data type, even if free cells are between them.
The following are permitted as actual parameters for coils:
• Boolean variables
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)

1142 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Show Coils in Last Column

Using the main menu View you can activate the Show coil in last column setting.
If this setting is activated, each coil will be displayed in the last column with a dotted line
between its "real" location cell and the last column.
Otherwise each coil will be displayed at its "real" location cell.
NOTE: Activating this setting will switch the LL984 Editor to Read only mode. No
modifications are allowed inside the LL984 Editor. To leave the Read only mode, just
deactivate this setting.

Automatically Assign a Variable

If via Tools > Options > Data and Languages > Languages the Automatically assign a
variable to a new graphical object check box is activated, then the corresponding
properties dialog is automatically opened when an object is placed. The procedures
explained here are used when the check box is deactivated.

Placing Coils
Step Action

1 Select the desired coil. See also Selecting Coils, page 1140.

2 Click the target cell in the LL984 section.

or

Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position, and press Enter.

Result: The selected coil is inserted.

3 To place further coils of the same type:
• Click the target cell in the LL984 section.
or
Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

33003101.26 1143
 LL984 Editor

Assigning Actual Parameters

Step Action

1 Open the properties dialog, page 1130 for the coil.

Result: The coils properties dialog is opened.

Example:

2 You have the following options to enter the actual parameters:

• You can enter %Mx (%Ix) and confirm using Enter.
• You can enter the variable/address name and confirm using Enter.
• You can select the variable name from the list of recently used names using the symbol
and confirm using Enter.
or
• Using the button ... you can open a Data Selection dialog and confirm the selected
variables there with OK.
3 Confirm the selected variable with OK.

Result:
• If the selected variable is declared, it is enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics
check, page 1119 is performed and the procedure ends here.
• If the variable is not declared, a Create variable? dialog opens. In this case, continue with
the following steps of this procedure.

NOTE: If you wish to declare the variable later, close the dialog using the symbol.
In this case, the variable name is enabled in the section, but not declared.
NOTE: Entering a binary address (%M1 / %I1) opens the Create variable? dialog
proposing a variable name (_000001 / _100001) that can be modified. If there is
already a variable associated to %M1 / %I1 it will be reused as proposal.

1144 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Step Action

4
If you do not want to assign the variable an address or comment, confirm using Enter or the
symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check is
performed and the procedure ends here.

5
If you do want to assign the variable an address and/or comment, use the symbol for
obtaining an advanced dialog and enter the address and/or comment.

6
Confirm with Enter or the symbol.

Result: The variable is declared and enabled in the section. A syntax and semantics check is
performed.

Property Dialog for Coils

Calling the Properties Dialog
See Displaying the Properties, page 1130.

Structure of the Properties Dialog

The coil properties dialog consists of 2 tabs:
• General
In this tab, you can enter the actual parameter, page 1144 of the coil.
• Comment
In this tab, you can enter a comment about the coil.

33003101.26 1145
 LL984 Editor

General Tab
Representation of the General tab

Elements of the General tab

Element Description

BOOLEAN Expression Enter the name of the actual parameter in this text box.

You have the following options:

• You can directly enter the name of the variable/address or paste it from the
clipboard.
• You can select the name of the variable from the list of recently used names
using the symbol.
or
• Use the command button ... to open a Data Selection dialog, page 1174.
The actual parameters which are permitted are:
• Boolean variables
• Boolean addresses (topological addresses or symbolic addresses)

OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

1146 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Comment Tab
Representation of the Comment tab

Elements of the Comment tab

Element Description

Text box Enter a comment about the coil.

This comment is displayed as a tooltip when the cursor is placed over the coil. It is
independent from the variable comment that can be assigned to the variable in the
Data Editor.
OK Use this command button to accept the entries and close the dialog box.

Apply Use this command button to accept the entries without closing the properties dialog
box.

Editing Function Blocks

Editing Function Blocks
Introduction
You can insert function blocks using one of the following features:
• LL984 Instruction Bar
• Mnemonics
• Data Selection

33003101.26 1147
 LL984 Editor

• FFB Input Assistant.

• Types Library Browser,
• Copy/Paste

Inserting a Function Block

Step Action

1 In the LL984 Editor right-click and select from the context menu either
• Data Selection (Ctrl+D) or
• FFB Input Assistant (Ctrl+I).
You can also insert a function block using:
• drag-and-drop from the Types Library Browser (Alt+3), .
• copy/paste
• LL984 Instruction Bar
• Mnemonics
2 Enter the complete name of the function block (e.g. L9_SUB).

3 Confirm with Enter.

4 Click the cell where you want to insert the function block.

Result:

The function block is inserted (if allowed at this position).

1148 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Representation of the FFB Input Assistant

You can also see the Comments displayed in the dialog above as a tooltip when the cursor
is placed over the respective pin of the function block.

Editing Values
To open the FFB Input Assistant for an already inserted function block, right-click the
function block and select FFB Input Assistant from the context menu.
Click the Entry Field and enter a value.
You are only allowed to edit the Entry fields displayed in black. Only the nodes (top, middle,
bottom) of a function block can be edited.
You can not edit the Entry fields displayed in grey (disabled).

33003101.26 1149
 LL984 Editor

Restrictions
For inserting function blocks the following restrictions apply:
• Only LL984 library function blocks can be inserted in LL984 networks. If you try to insert
a function block of another library a message will inform you, that this is not possible.
• You can not insert self-programmed DFBs in LL984 networks.
• LL984 library function blocks can not be inserted in IEC languages sections (FBD, LD,
ST, IL). SFC does not use function blocks.
◦ FBD and LD editors will refuse insertion and will display a message that insertion is
not possible.
◦ For textual languages (ST, IL) the call of an LL984 library function block will be
detected during Analyze.

Using Mnemonics
Introduction
Instead of inserting LL984 objects via toolbar, FFB Input Assistant, Data Selection or
drag-and-drop, you can use so called Mnemonics.

Mnemonics Option
Open the Tools > Options dialog.
Under Data and Languages > Languages > LL984 > Mnemonics the Property label
column lists the contacts and coils and an assortment of frequently used functions blocks
available for LL984 networks.
In the Property value column you can enter a mnemonic for each listed element.
A mnemonic can consist of up to 4 alphanumeric signs.

Using Mnemonics
As you start typing text, while the current cell marker is on an empty cell in the LL9894
Editor, a small edit box opens in the editor.
Entering a mnemonic (first key typed will be taken over into the edit box) and pressing the
Enter key will insert the corresponding LL984 element at the current cell.

1150 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

If the cells needed to insert the element are already occupied, a message box will inform
you and the element will not be inserted.

Editing Links
Overview
This section describes how to edit links in the LL984 programming language.

Selecting Links
Introduction
Links are connections between LL984 objects (contacts, coils, FFBs etc.).
Boolean connections comprise one or more cell-segments that connect Boolean objects
(contacts, coils) with one another.
• Boolean Connection (horizontal connection)
This horizontal connection enables series switching of contacts and coils.
The cell-segments of this connection can be created individually or as a complex
connection comprising several cell-segments.
• Boolean Link (horizontal link)
This horizontal link automatically creates a connection between neighboring Boolean
objects to the left and right or between an object and the power rail.
• Vertical Connection
This vertical connection enables parallel switching of contacts and coils.

33003101.26 1151
 LL984 Editor

Link Types
Link Type Description Call via Menu Command Call via Call via Key
Icon
Horizontal horizontal connection, 1 cell wide Edit > New > Boolean F7
connection Connection

or

Boolean Connection from

the context menu
Horizontal link A horizontal link creates a connection Edit > New > Boolean Link Alt+F6
between neighboring Boolean objects to
the left and right. or

If there are no neighboring Boolean Boolean Link from the

objects available, a connection to the context menu
power rail is made.

Vertical vertical connection, 1 cell high Edit > New > Vertical Shift+F7
connection Connection

or

Vertical Connection from the

context menu

Combining Links
Boolean Links
Horizontal and vertical Boolean links can be combined in any way.
Example:

Contacts and Coils

Contacts and coils link automatically to existing horizontal or vertical links if no free cells are
found between them.

1152 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Example:

Crossing Boolean Links

If 2 Boolean links cross each other they are automatically connected. Since Boolean links
may not cross each other there is no special label for them.
Example:

Placing Links
Placing Horizontal Connections
Process the following steps to place a horizontal link.

33003101.26 1153
 LL984 Editor

Step Action

1 Select the horizontal connection (Boolean Connection). See also Selecting Links, page 1151.

2 Click the target cell in the LL984 section.

or

Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted.

3 To place further links of the same type:
• Click the target cell in the LL984 section.
or
Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Placing Horizontal Links

Process the following steps to place a horizontal link.

Step Action

1 Select the horizontal link (Boolean Link). See also Selecting Links, page 1151.

2 Click the target cell in the LL984 section.

or

Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted and a connection is created to the neighboring Boolean objects to the
left and right.

If there are no neighboring Boolean objects available, a connection to the power rail is made.

3 To place further links of the same type:

• Click the target cell in the LL984 section.
or
Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

1154 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Placing Vertical Connections

On the right side of the cells, there is space to create a vertical connection to the cell below
or above. Process the following steps to place a vertical connection.

Step Action

1 Select the vertical connection (Vertical Connection). See also Selecting Links, page 1151.

2 Click the object which should be connected with the cell below.

or

Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The link is inserted.

3 To place further links of the same type:
• Click the target cell in the LL984 section.
or
Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Editing Links
Introduction
If you combine several horizontal links this will result in 1 horizontal link.
If you combine several vertical links this will result in 1 vertical link.
If you combine a horizontal and a vertical link this will result in a link made of 2 objects, a
horizontal and a vertical link, that can be selected independent from each other.

Deleting, Cutting, Copying, Pasting and Moving Links

You can delete, cut, copy, paste and move links.
For further information please refer to Deleting, Cutting, Copying, Pasting and Moving
Objects, page 1127.

33003101.26 1155
 LL984 Editor

Modifying the Size of Links

Step Action

1 Select a link.

Result: Size handles are displayed at the beginning and at the end of the link.

2 Click a size handle with the left mouse button and keep it pressed.

3 Drag the size handle to the desired new end position of the link and release the mouse button.

Editing Equation Network Blocks

Overview
This section describes how to edit Equation Network Blocks in the LL984 programming
language.

Editing Equation Network Blocks

Introduction
Equation networks in the LL984 Editor are provided as Equation Network Blocks.
Equation network blocks offer an opportunity to program complex mathematical functions,
with values stored in memory words.
An Equation Network Block contains an assignment expression written in ST language.
In general you can use the features provided by ST language as long as it is a valid ST
assignment expression.
Please refer to the Structured Text (ST) chapter (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) and the ST Editor chapter, page 1075.

Using the Equation Network Block

You can insert an Equation Network Block using the respective toolbar button, via menu
(Edit > New > Equation Network block) or via the editors context menu (right mouse click).

1156 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

An Equation Network Block can only be inserted in an LL984 network at row 1, column 2.
The block is 7 rows high and 9 columns wide.
On the left side of an equation network block there is an Enable input pin, where you can
connect a contact or a boolean connection.
On the right side there are 5 output pins (OK, Lower, Equal, Greater,Error), where you can
connect 5 normally open coils. After inserting these coils are displayed with symbols inside
according to the pin names (O, <, =, >, E).

Representation
Representation of the Equation Network Block

Items of the Equation Network Block

Item Description

input pin Enable you can connect a contact or a boolean connection to enable the block

equation network block expression written in ST language

output pins OK (O): set when the equation is solved without problems

Lower (<): set when the equation result is less than zero

Equal (=)set when the equation result is equal to zero

Greater (>)set when the equation result is greater than zero

33003101.26 1157
 LL984 Editor

Item Description

Error (E): set when a problem occurred during solving the equation (see
table below)

Problems During Solving

Problem Description

invalid operation An internal message generated by the math coprocessor.

overflow A value is too large to be represented in its specified data type.

underflow A number is too small to be represented in FP format (for floating point data
only).

divided by 0 The variable, constant, or result of a function directly to the right of a / operator
has a value of zero.

Editing the ST Assignment Expression

Introduction
After inserting an Equation Network Block double-click the displayed question marks
(?????) to enter the ST assignment expression.
Confirming with Enter will start an analysis and the found detected problems will be
displayed in a tooltip.
Animation of the memory words used inside the ST assignment expression can be seen in a
Variable Window. Please refer to Variable Display Window, page 1461.

Memory Addresses
A memory address entered in the ST assignment expression must start with one of the
following symbols, specifying the address type:
• %M (memory bit)
• %I (discrete input)
• %IW (input word)
• %MW (memory word)
The address type must be followed by an address number (no leading zeros required).

1158 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Creating Variables Automatically

After confirming the ST assignment expression with Enter, for every entered address a
variable will be created automatically, which is used in the equation network.
Examples

Address Variable
%M1 _000001

%I1 _100001

%IW1 _300001

%MW1 _400001

The variable type is derived from its address suffix.

Suffix Variable Type

no suffix %Mx, %Ix EBOOL

%IWx, %MWx UINT

I INT
DI DINT
UD UDINT
R REAL
W WORD

The variable is mapped to the associated internal located memory.

For example: %IW1DI becomes the variable _300001_DI:DINT@%IW1.

Constants
Constants in equation networks have the same syntax as in other IEC editors (that is without
a leading # character).

Operators
Operators and their precedence

33003101.26 1159
 LL984 Editor

Operation Symbol Precedence

Parentheses (expression) HIGHEST

Function evaluation identifier (argument list) -

Negation - -

Complement ~ -

Exponentiation ** -

Multiply * -

Divide / -

Add + -

Subtract - -

Comparison < , > , <= , >= -

Equality = -

Inequality <> -

Boolean AND & -

Boolean Exclusive OR ^ -

Boolean OR | -

Assignment := LOWEST

The operators **, *, /, +, -, <<, >>, <, >, <=, >=, =, <>, &, ^ and | are supported as they are
implemented now in Control Expert ST syntax. That is not all data type combinations for
operand types and the result type are supported.
NOTE: Control Expert only supports a floating point value for the ** operator (EXPT-
functions).
NOTE: Bitwise logical AND, OR or XOR operations work like in ST syntax.

Ternary Conditional
Ternary conditional (C?t:f ), in contrast to legacy LL984, is not available in Control Expert ST
syntax.
The already existing SEL function block provides this functionality and has to be used
instead.
Example:
Legacy syntax:

1160 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

400010 := 300010 < 300020 ? 300004 : 300005

Control Expert syntax:
%MW10 := SEL(%IW10 < %IW20, %IW4, %IW50);
With the following, automatically created by the editor:
_400010 := SEL(_300010 < _300020, _300004, _300005);

Bitwise Shift
Bitwise shift (<<, >>), in contrast to legacy LL984, is not available in Control Expert ST
syntax.
The already existing SHL and SHR function blocks provide this functionality and have to be
used instead.
Example:
Legacy syntax:
400010 = 300010U << 3
Control Expert syntax:
%MW100W := SHL(%IW10W, 3);
With the following, automatically created by the editor:
_400100_W := SHL(_300010_W, 3);

Function Blocks
In general you can use the function blocks provided for ST language.
In particular the following Control Expert function blocks replace the legacy function blocks
listed below.

Legacy Function Control Expert Argument Return Type* Meaning

Name Function Name Type*

ABS ABS S,U,L,UL,F S,U,L,UL,F absolute value

ARCCOS ACOS F F arc cosine

ARCSIN ASIN F F arc sine
ARCTAN ATAN F F arc tangent

COS COS F F cosine

33003101.26 1161
 LL984 Editor

Legacy Function Control Expert Argument Return Type* Meaning

Name Function Name Type*

COSD COSD F F cosine of degrees

EXP EXP F F exponent function (power of e)

(does not need to be a whole number)

FIX REAL_TO F L convert floating point to integer

(presumes an FP argument)

FLOAT INT_TO S, U, L, UL F converts integer to floating point

(presumes an integer argument)

LN LN F F natural logarithm (base e)

LOG LOG F F common logarithm (base 10)

SIN SIN F F sine of radians

SIND SIND F F sine of degrees

SQRT SQRT F F square root

TAN TAN F F tangent of radians

TAND TAND F F tangent of degrees

*: S=INT, U=UINT, L=DINT, UL=UDINT, F=REAL

Example of an LL984 Expression

Legacy syntax:
40701 = 40702U + COS(40703UL) * #8.00135F + SIN(40704);
Control Expert syntax:
%MW701 := REAL_TO_UINT(WORD_TO_REAL(%MW702W) + COS(WORD_AS_REAL(%
MW703W, %MW704W)) * 8.00135 + SIN(WORD_TO_REAL(%MW704W)));
With the following, automatically created by the editor:
_400701 := REAL_TO_UINT(WORD_TO_REAL(_400702_W) + COS(WORD_AS_REAL
(_400703_W, _400704_W)) * 8.00135 + SIN(WORD_TO_REAL(_400704_W)));

1162 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Assigning Variables to LL984 Objects

Assigning Variables to LL984 Objects
Introduction
In the LL984 Editor you can assign a variable (like _400001 or sym1) or an address (like %
M1) to an FFB pin or to a contact/coil.
If the variable is not declared, the Create variable? dialog opens.
If the variable or address assigned is not compatible with the pin or contact/coil, a message
will be displayed in the output window after Build > Analyze.

Automatic Variable Naming

If you, for example, assign an address (e.g. %MW1) to a pin, the Create variable? dialog
opens proposing a variable name (e.g. _400001) and a data type (e.g. UINT).
The following rules apply to this automatic proposal, depending on the address of the actual
parameter, the pin type and dimension (n) in case of an array type:

Address Pin Type Dimension (for array Variable Name

types)

%MW1 UINT 1 (n) _400001 (_400001_n)

INT _400001_I (_400001_In)

WORD _400001_W (_400001_Wn)

%IW1 UINT 1 (n) _300001 (_300001_n)

INT _300001_I (_300001_In)

WORD _300001_W (_300001_Wn)

%I1 EBOOL 1 (n) _100001 (_100001_n)

%M1 EBOOL 1 (n) _000001 (_000001_n)

NOTE: For the most used pin types UINT and EBOOL no type suffix are appended to
the proposed variable name.

33003101.26 1163
 LL984 Editor

Use Case 1
Assignment to a pin of type UINT

User-Assigned Variable Variable Created and Variable Type

Address Assigned

%MW1 not existing yet _400001 UINT

NOTE: As the pin type was UINT no type suffix was appended to the variable name.

Use Case 2
Assignment to a pin of type ARRAY[1...n] of UINT

User-Assigned Variable Variable Created and Variable Type

Address Assigned

%MW1 not existing yet _400001_n ARRAY[1...n] of UINT

Use Case 3
Assignment to a pin of type ANY or ANY_ARRAY_UINT or ANY_ARRAY_BOOL (dynamic
array)
The dimension (n) of a dynamic array will be provided by another dimension pin (e.g.
LENGTH) of the function block.
This dimension pin will be initialized during block insertion.
The dimension of the array will be calculated based on the dimension pin value entered as
actual parameter of the dimension pin.
• If the resulting type is a UINT array:
dimension = dimension pin value.
• If the resulting type is a Boolean array:
dimension = dimension pin value * 16.

User-Assigned Variable Variable Created and Variable Type

Address Assigned

%MW1 not existing yet _400001_n ARRAY[1...n] of UINT

If you modify n on the dimension pin to n2:

1164 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

User-Assigned Variable Variable Created and Variable Type

Address Assigned

%MW1 not existing yet _400001_n2 ARRAY[1...n2] of UINT

%MW1 already existing _400001_n2 ARRAY[1...n2] of UINT

attributes (like
descriptors, comments
etc.) are taken over

Use Case 4
Assignment to a pin of type DDT1

User-Assigned Variable Variable Created and Variable Type

Address Assigned

%MW1 not existing yet _400001_DDT1 DDT1

Memory Consumption
If you create any kind of located variables (elementary type, array or DDT) this will not
increase memory consumption on the PLC (except for Upload information).

New Variable Creation

If you assign a different address or modify a dimension pin, a new variable will be created.
The old attributes (except the address) will be overtaken and the old variable will be deleted,
if it is not used anywhere else in the program.

Invalid Variables
If you create a located variable with an address range which exceeds the address range
defined under State RAM of the CPU´s Configuration tab, the following message will be
displayed after Build > Analyze:
Topological address index is not valid.
There are different ways to solve this issue:
• Click the message displayed in the output window to open the Data Editor and adapt
the address of the variable.

33003101.26 1165
 LL984 Editor

• Click the message displayed in the output window to open the Data Editor and delete
the variable and create a new variable with an applicable address range.
• Adapt the address range defined under State RAM of the CPU´s Configuration tab.
NOTE: If you just create a new variable at the pin of the function block without deleting
the previously created, invalid variable the message mentioned above will be displayed
again after next Build > Analyze.
Example:
Under State RAM of the CPU´s Configuration tab you entered a value 10000 for %MW.
In your program you have an L_BLKM function block with LENGTH = 10.
At the SOURCE pin of the function block you enter following value: %MW9999.
This results in creation of the following variable:
_409999:ARRAY[1..10] OF UINT@%MW9999
As the start address is %MW9999 and the length is 10, the end address will be %MW10009.
This exceeds the address range (10000) defined under State RAM of the CPU´s
Configuration tab.
Therefore the message mentioned above will be displayed after Build > Analyze.

Calling Subroutines
Overview
This section describes how to call subroutines in the LL984 programming language.

Calling Subroutines
Introduction
Calling subroutines is managed by 3 function blocks:
• L9_JSR
• L9_LAB
• L9_RET

1166 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

For detailed information please refer to the function block descriptions (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, UnityLL984, Block Library).
Up to 1023 subroutines can be established.
Control Expert does not support interrupt handling with LL984 subroutines.

Restrictions
For the calling subroutines feature the following restrictions apply:
• Only one LL984 segment can be created inside the subroutine (SR Section) node of
the MAST task.
• L9_LAB and L9_RET function blocks can only be placed in an LL984 subroutine
network in the SR Sections.
• An L9_LAB function block can only be placed in row 1, column 1 of an LL984
subroutine network.

Subroutine Structure
A subroutine is identified by a number (1.. 1023).
Subroutines are called by the L9_JSR function block within an LL984 network (normal or
subroutine network).
Two additional function blocks, which are only available in subroutine networks, mark the
starting point (L9_LAB function block) and ending point (L9_RET function block) of a
subroutine.
A subroutine may span multiple networks.
The L9_RET function block is optional and this explicit ending point of a subroutine can be
omitted,
• if the last subroutine network is the last network of the subroutine segment or
• if a new subroutine network (L9_LAB) would entered.
The L9_RET function block or the implicit forms, return from the current subroutine network
to the calling L9_JSR function block with an OK status.

Nesting
A subroutine may call other subroutines or recursively call itself up to 100 times.

33003101.26 1167
 LL984 Editor

If the maximum nesting level is reached, an implicit return is performed and the ERR output
of the L9_JSR function block is set.
A nesting level problem message is propagated to the (99) cascaded L9_JSR function
blocks.
Further cascaded L9_JSR function blocks, which are being executed after a nesting level
problem, do not succeed to call a subroutine and the ERR output is being set until the
nesting level stack has been unwound.
NOTE: The message is only visible at those L9_JSR function blocks, contributing to the
problem. A dedicated problem treatment is possible on each calling level. Subsequent
L9_JSR function blocks of a segment are not influenced by this problem.
Please also refer to the L9_JSR function block description (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, UnityLL984, Block Library).

Entering Comments
Overview
This section describes how to enter comments in the LL984 programming language.

Entering Comments
Introduction
Comments can be placed in LL984 sections in the form of text objects.
Text objects can overlap other objects.
The size of the object, depending on the size of the text, can be extended vertically and
horizontally to fill further grid units.
The same rules apply for entering text and navigating within text objects as for editing ASCII
text in standard text editors. (To create a line break in text objects you must press the Ctrl
+Enter key combination).
NOTE: Keep in mind that each change to a comment (e.g. change to a comment text,
change to the size of the text object) makes it necessary to recreate the section involved
(Build > Build Changes).

1168 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Displaying or hiding the comments

Use the button in the toolbar to show or hide the comments.

The background color of the button in blue indicates that the comments are hidden.

NOTE: To select or place text objects, check that the button in the toolbar is not
activated.

Selecting the Text Object

You have the following options to select text objects:
• Use the Edit > New > Comment menu command.
• Use the Comment menu from the context menu.
• Press the F8 key.
or

• Select the symbol.

The active placement mode for text objects is indicated by the cursor symbol.

Placing Text Objects

Step Action

1 Select the text object.

2 Click the target cell in the LL984 section.

or

Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.

Result: The text object is inserted.

Example:

3 Enter the comment.

33003101.26 1169
 LL984 Editor

Step Action

4 Confirm the text entered with:

• Clicking with the mouse outside of the text object
or
• Pressing the Enter key.

5 To insert further text objects:

• Click the target cell in the LL984 section.
or
Use the Arrow keys to move the gray field to the target position and press Enter.
• To return to selection mode:
Press the Esc key.
• To insert other objects:
Select the object you wish to insert.

Customize LL984 Editor Colors

Overview
This section describes how to customize the LL984 editor colors.

Customize LL984 Editor Colors

Overview
To customize LL984 editor colors, open the Tools > Colors Settings... dialog box.
The Color Settings dialog box allows to:
• Modify the color of the selected item in the list.
• Reset the colors with initial values.
• Import an *.ini file that define all the colors associated to the LL984 editor.
• Export the definition colors associated to the LL984 editor.

1170 33003101.26
LL984 Editor

Colors Setting File

Depending on the operating system of the PC, the colors settings file 984Colors.ini is
located in one of the following folder:
• c:\Program Files\Schneider Electric\Control Expert\
• c:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Control Expert\
For more detail on destination folder when Control Expert is installed, refer to EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Installation Manual.
NOTE: Make a copy of this file before modifying it.

Description
This table describes the elements of the color file:

Parameter Default value Description

BkAnimation 192,192,192 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in programming mode.

StatementError 255,0,0 Element in error is underlined with this color.

InspectBk 0,255,255 Inspect window background color

InspectText 0,0,0 Inspect window text color

InspectBkMin 255,255,0 Inspect window background color when the value is less than
the minimum value defined in the inspect window settings.

InspectBkMax 255,0,255 Inspect window background color when the value is greater
than the maximum value defined in the inspect window
settings.

BkAnimMonitoring 255,211,211 Editor background color when animation is ON and you are
connected in monitoring mode.

AnalyzeError 0,0,255 Drawing color when an element generates an analyze error.

GraphAnimBoolTrue 0,150,0 Color of ANY_BOOL variable when its value is TRUE.

GraphAnimBoolFalse 255,0,0 Color of ANY_BOOL variable when its value is FALSE.

BkComment 255,255,204 Background color of comment area

BkCommentEdit 225,225,225 Background color of comment area when you are editing it.

BkAnimNumeric 255,255,0 Background color of numeric variables

BlockBreakpoint 128,0,0 Bullet color in the element where the breakpoint is set.

BlockCurrentStep 255,255,0 Color of the current element in debug mode

AnchorLink 128,0,0 Color of anchor link

33003101.26 1171
 LL984 Editor

Parameter Default value Description

LLFgExpression 0,0,0 Text color of boolean expressions

LLFgAddress 100,100,230 Text color of variable address

LLFgSymbol 0,0,0 Text color of variable name

LLFgComment 0,128,0 Text color of variable comment

LLBkExpression 255,255,255 Background color of boolean expressions

LLBkAddress 255,255,255 Background color of variable address

LLBkSymbol 255,255,255 Background color of variable name

LLBkComment 255,255,255 Background color of variable comment

984CoilAlignLine 192,192,192 Colors of coils align line

984BkEqNet 228,228,228 Background color of equation network

Background 255,255,255 Editor background color

1172 33003101.26
33003101.26 1173
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Programming Languages Data Selection

Dialog Box
What’s in This Chapter
Instance selection dialog box ................................................ 1174
FFB Selection Dialog box ..................................................... 1179
FFB Type Selection Dialog box ............................................. 1183
Data selection dialog box .................................................... 1185
Function Input Assistant ....................................................... 1192
Data Properties.................................................................... 1195
Generate variables............................................................... 1197

Overview
This chapter describes the dialog boxes provided for data selection that can be called from
the various programming languages.

Instance selection dialog box

Structure of the dialog box
The Instance selection dialog box consists of two or three tabs:
• Variables
You can select an elementary variable or an element of a multi-element variable in this
tab.
• Function Blocks
You can select a formal parameter of a function block instance in this tab.
• Interface
You can select a variable of a Program Unit in this tab.
NOTE: Program Units are only available for Modicon M580 and M340. Without
Program Unit in the program structure the Interface tab is empty.

1174 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Variables tab
Representation of the tab Variables tab:

Elements of the Variables tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected variables are displayed in this text box.

Scope list Allow to reduce the scope for the variable selection.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the variable to search for can be entered in this text box. You can also use
the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

Inside Structure When you activate this check box, all structured variables are displayed.

Name The names of the variables are displayed in this column.

33003101.26 1175
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Type The types of the variables are displayed in this column.

Value The initial value of the variables are displayed in this column.

Comment The comments for the variables are displayed in this column.

Alias The alias name of the IODDT, DDT, or Array element are displayed in this column.

Alias of The complete paths of the variables when an alias name has been set are displayed in
this column.
Address The address in the controller are displayed in this column.

HMI Variable This column displays if the variable is embedded in the data dictionary.

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the variable is a Reference data type.
Referenced
Variable
Effective Only when the Instance selection dialog box is called from a section included in a
Parameter Program Unit.

This column displays the variable assignment for Program Unit parameters (input, output
and input/output parameters).

Nature Only when the Instance selection dialog box is called from a section included in a
Program Unit.

This column displays the nature of the Program Unit variables.

1176 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Function Blocks tab

Representation of the Function Blocks tab:

Elements of the Function Blocks tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected function block instances are displayed in this text box.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the function block instance to search for can be entered in this text box. You
can also use the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

EFB When you activate this checkbox, the instances of elementary function blocks (EFBs) are
displayed.

DFB When you activate this checkbox, the instances of derived function blocks (DFBs) are
displayed.

33003101.26 1177
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Named by default When you activate this check box, the function block instances are displayed whose
default names (e.g. FBI_19_3, TON_1) have not been changed.

Name This column displays the names of the function block instances and their formal
parameters (inputs, outputs, public variables).

no. This column displays the order number of the formal parameters in the function block.

Type This column displays the types of the function block instances and the data types of their
formal parameters (inputs, outputs, public variables).

Value This column displays the initial value of the formal parameters.

Comment This column displays comments about the function block instances and their formal
parameters (inputs, outputs, public variables).

HMI Variable This column displays if the formal parameter is embedded in the data dictionary.

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the formal parameter is a Reference data
Referenced type.
Variable

NOTE: Help for the Type..

Hold down the Alt+F1 keys and then click on the function block type for which you wish
to access Help.

Interface Tab
Representation of the Interface tab:

1178 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Elements of the Interface tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected function block instances are displayed in this text box.

Scope list Allow to select the data scope for the variable selection among the different Program
Units.
Name This column displays the names of the variables belonging to the Program Unit selected
into the scope list.

The variables are grouped by Nature (<inputs>, <outputs>, <inputs/outputs>,

<public>, <external>).

Type This column displays the data types of the variables.

Value This column displays the initial value of the variables.

Comment This column displays the comment for the variables.

Effective Only when the Instance selection dialog box is called from a section included in a
Parameter Program Unit.

This column displays the variable assignment for Program Unit parameters (input, output
and input/output parameters).

Address Only when the Instance selection dialog box is called from a section included in a
Program Unit.

The address in the controller are displayed in this column.

FFB Selection Dialog box

Structure of the properties dialog box
The dialog box for selecting function block instances and function types/function block types
consists of two tabs in FBD and LD:
• Function Blocks
You can select a function block instance in this tab.
• Function and Function Block Types
You can select a function type or function block type in this tab.

33003101.26 1179
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Function Blocks tab

Representation of the Function Blocks tab:

Elements of theFunction Blocks tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected function block instances are displayed in this text box.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the function block instance to search for can be entered in this text box. You
can also use the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

EFB When you activate this check box, the instances of elementary function blocks (EFBs)
are displayed.

DFB When you activate this check box, the instances of derived function blocks (DFBs) are
displayed.

1180 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Named by default When you activate this check box, the function block instances are displayed whose
default names (e.g. FBI_19_3, TON_1) have not been changed.

Name This column displays the names of the function block instances and their formal
parameters (inputs, outputs).

no. This column displays the order number of the formal parameters in the function block.

Type This column displays the types of the function block instances and the data types of their
formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Value This column displays the initial value of the formal parameters.

Comment This column displays comments about the function block instances and their formal
parameters (inputs, outputs).

HMI Variable This column displays if the formal parameter is embedded in the data dictionary.

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the formal parameter is a Reference data
Referenced type.
Variable

NOTE: Help for the Type.

Hold down the Alt+F1 keys and then click on the function block type for which you wish
to access Help.

Function and Function Block Types tab

Representation of the Function and Function Block Types tab:

33003101.26 1181
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Elements of the Function and Function Block Types tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected function block instances are displayed in this text box.

Help On Type Use this button to open the help for the function block types shown.

Note:

Alternatively, you can also hold down Alt+F1 and then click on the function block type for
which you want to access Help.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the function type or function block type to search for can be entered in this
text box. You can also use the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

EF When you enable this check box, Elementary Function types (EFs) are displayed.

EFB When you enable this check box, Elementary Function Block types (EFBs) are
displayed.

DFB When you activate this check box, Derived Function Blocks (DFBs) are displayed.

Libraries/Families The scope of the displayed function types and function block types is selected in this
column:
• To display all function types and function block types used in the project, select
<Application>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library independently of
the library assignment, select <Libset>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library, select the desired
library.
• To display all function types and function block types of a family, select the desired
family.

Name This column displays the names of the function types and function block types and their
formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

no. This column displays the order number of the formal parameters.

1182 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Type This column displays the types of the function types and function block types and the
data types of their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Value This column displays the initial value of the formal parameters.

Comment This column displays comments about the function types and function block types and
their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the formal parameter is a Reference data
Referenced type.
Variable

FFB Type Selection Dialog box

Structure of the properties dialog box
In the Function Input Assistant dialog box: FFB type selection you can select a function
type or function block type in this tab.

Function Input Assistant: FFB Type Selection

Representation of the dialog box:

Elements of the Function and Function Block Types dialog box:

33003101.26 1183
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Text box The selected function or function block types are displayed in this text box.

Help On Type Use this button to open the help for the function block types shown.

Note:

Alternatively, you can also hold down Alt+F1 and then click on the function block type for
which you want to access Help.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the function type or function block type to search for can be entered in this
text box. You can also use the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

EF When you enable this check box, Elementary Function types (EFs) are displayed.

EFB When you enable this checkbox, Elementary Function Block types (EFBs) are displayed.

DFB When you activate this checkbox, Derived Function Blocks (DFBs) are displayed.

Libraries/Families The scope of the displayed function types and function block types is selected in this
column:
• To display all function types and function block types used in the project, select
<Application>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library independently of
the library assignment, select <Libset>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library, select the desired
library.
• To display all function types and function block types of a family, select the desired
family.

Name This column displays the names of the function types and function block types and their
formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

no. This column displays the order number of the formal parameters.

Type This column displays the types of the function types and function block types and the
data types of their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Value This column displays the initial value of the formal parameters.

1184 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Comment This column displays comments about the function types and function block types and
their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the formal parameter is a Reference data
Referenced type.
Variable

Data selection dialog box

Structure of the dialog box
The Data selection dialog box consists of four tabs in IL and ST:
• Variables
You can select an elementary variable or an element of a multi-element variable in this
tab.
• Function Blocks
You can select a function block instance in this tab.
• Function and Function Block Types
You can select a function type or function block type in this tab.
• Interface
You can select a variable of a Program Unit in this tab.
NOTE: Program Units are only available for Modicon M580 and M340. Without
Program Unit in the program structure the Interface tab is empty.

33003101.26 1185
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Variables tab
Representation of the Variables tab:

Elements of the Variables tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected variables are displayed in this text box.

Scope list Allow to reduce the scope for the variable selection.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the variable to search for can be entered in this text box. You can also use
the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

EDT When you activate this check box, elementary variables are displayed.

1186 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

DDT When you activate this checkbox, multi-element variables (derived variables) are
displayed.

IODDT When you activate this checkbox, derived I/O variables (IODDT variables) are displayed.

Device DDT When you activate this checkbox, derived DDT are displayed.

Name The names of the variables are displayed in this column.

Type The types of the variables are displayed in this column.

Value The initial value of the variables are displayed in this column.

Comment The comments for the variables are displayed in this column.

Alias The alias name of the IODDT, DDT, or Array element are displayed in this column.

Alias of The complete paths of the variables when an alias name has been set are displayed in
this column.
Address The address in the controller are displayed in this column.

HMI Variable This column displays if the variable is embedded in the data dictionary.

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the variable is a Reference data type.
Referenced
Variable
Effective Only when the Data selection dialog box is called from a section included in a Program
Parameter Unit.

This column displays the variable assignment for Program Unit parameters (input, output
and input/output parameters).

Nature Only when the Data selection dialog box is called from a section included in a Program
Unit.

This column displays the nature of the Program Unit variables.

33003101.26 1187
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Function Blocks tab

Representation of the Function Blocks tab:

Elements of the Function Blocks tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected function block instances are displayed in this text box.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the function block instance to search for can be entered in this text box. You
can also use the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

EFB When you activate this checkbox, the instances of elementary function blocks (EFBs) are
displayed.

DFB When you activate this checkbox, the instances of derived function blocks (DFBs) are
displayed.

1188 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Named by default When you activate this check box, the function block instances are displayed whose
default names (e.g. FBI_3, TON_1) have not been changed.

Name This column displays the names of the function block instances and their formal
parameters (inputs, outputs, public variables).

no. This column displays the order number of the formal parameters in the function block.

Type This column displays the types of the function block instances and the data types of their
formal parameters (inputs, outputs, public variables).

Value This column displays the initial value of the formal parameters.

Comment This column displays comments about the function block instances and their formal
parameters (inputs, outputs, public variables).

HMI Variable This column displays if the formal parameter is embedded in the data dictionary.

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the formal parameter is a Reference data
Referenced type.
Variable

NOTE: Help for the Type..

Hold down the Alt+F1 keys and then click on the function block type for which you wish
to access Help.

Function and Function Block Types tab

Representation of the Function and Function Block Types tab:

33003101.26 1189
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Elements of the Function and Function Block Types tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected function block types are displayed in this text box.

Help On Type Use this button to open the help for the function block types shown.
NOTE: Alternatively, you can also hold down Alt+F1 and then click on the function
block type for which you want to access Help.

button Clicking on this button updates the display corresponding to the filter term defined in the
Name field.

button Clicking on this button opens the Filtering data, page 431 dialog box where you can
define the conditions for the individual attributes.

Name The name of the function type or function block type to search for can be entered in this
text box. You can also use the joker * and ?.

button Clicking on this button inverts the filter. The button changes from = to <> and vice versa.

EF When you enable this check box, Elementary Function types (EFs) are displayed.

EFB When you enable this checkbox, Elementary Function Block types (EFBs) are displayed.

DFB When you activate this checkbox, Derived Function Blocks (DFBs) are displayed.

Libraries/Families The scope of the displayed function types and function block types is selected in this
column:
• To display all function types and function block types used in the project, select
<Application>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library independently of
the library assignment, select <Libset>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library, select the desired
library.
• To display all function types and function block types of a family, select the desired
family.

Name This column displays the names of the function types and function block types and their
formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

no. This column displays the order number of the formal parameters.

Type This column displays the types of the function types and function block types and the
data types of their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

Value This column displays the initial value of the formal parameters.

1190 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Comment This column displays comments about the function types and function block types and
their formal parameters (inputs, outputs).

R/W Rights of This column displays the access rights when the formal parameter is a Reference data
Referenced type.
Variable

Interface tab
Representation of the Interface tab:

Elements of the Interface tab:

Element Description

Text box The selected function block instances are displayed in this text box.

Scope list Allow to select the data scope for the variable selection among the different Program
Units.
Name This column displays the names of the variables belonging to the Program Unit selected
into the scope list.

The variables are grouped by Nature (<inputs>, <outputs>, <inputs/outputs>,

<public>, <external>).

Type This column displays the data types of the variables.

Value This column displays the initial value of the variables.

33003101.26 1191
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Comment This column displays the comment for the variables.

Effective Only when the Data selection dialog box is called from a section included in a Program
Parameter Unit.

This column displays the variable assignment for Program Unit parameters (input, output
and input/output parameters).

Address Only when the Data selection dialog box is called from a section included in a Program
Unit.

The address in the controller are displayed in this column.

Function Input Assistant

Introduction
If noFFB is selected when the function input assistant is called the FFB input assistant is
used for assigning parameters to the new FFBs generated.
Example for:
• FBD, page 663
• LD, page 800
• IL, page 1059
• ST, page 1090
If an FFB is selected when the function input assistant is called the FFB input assistant is
used for assigning parameters to the new FFB generated.
Example for:
• FBD, page 681
• LD, page 820
• IL, page 1069
• ST, page 1099

1192 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Function Input Assistant

Representation:

Elements:

Element Description

FFB type Enter the function type or function block type to edit in this text box.

You have the following options to enter the function type or function block type:
• You can directly enter the type.
• You can select the type from the list of recently used types using the symbol.
or
• Using the button ... you can open a dialog box to select FFB , page 1181 types.

Instance For existing function blocks this textbox shows the name of the selected function
block instance.

For function blocks to be generated enter the name of the selected function block
instance in this textbox.

You have the following options to enter the function instance or function block
instance:
• You can directly enter the instance.
• You can select the instance from the list of recently used instances using the
symbol.
or
• Using the button ... a dialog box for FFB instances selection, page 1180 .

33003101.26 1193
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Name This column displays the formal parameters (inputs, outputs) of the function instance
or function block instance.
Type This column displays the data types of the formal parameters (inputs, outputs) of the
function instance or function block instance.
No. This column displays the pin positions of the formal parameters (inputs, outputs) of
the function instance or function block instance.
Comment This column displays the comments of the formal parameters (inputs, outputs) of the
function instance or function block instance.
Entry field Enter the actual parameters of the function instance or function block instance in this
column.

You have the following options to enter actual parameters:

• You can directly enter the actual parameter.
• You can select the actual parameter from the list of recently used actual
parameters using the symbol.
or
• Using the button ... a dialog box for variables selection, page 1174 .

Adding a pin Using this button you can increase thenumber of inputs, page 684 for expandable
functions (e.g. AND, OR).

Expandable pins can be recognized from the following display:

To add further pins select the last pin in the structure and confirm using the Add pin
button.
Removing pin(s) Using this button you can decrease the number of inputs, page 684 for expandable
functions (e.g. AND, OR).

To decrease the number of inputs select the last pin(s) in the structure and use the
Remove pin(s) button.

Help about type Use this button to call up the FFB.

Special Assistant Some complex FFBs provide additional windows for entering actual parameters. To
access these windows use the Special Assistant button.
NOTE: take care that for the same FFB the Special Assistant could be
available for some platforms and not for other platforms.

OK For new FFBs the FFB insert mode for placing FFBs becomes active.

Use this button to accept the allocated actual parameters for existing FFBs.

Close With this button, you can close the dialog box without accepting changes.

Help Use this button to call up the dialog.

1194 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Data Properties
Introduction
The anchored window, page 1818 Data Properties is used to display and modify the
variables and FFB properties.
The Data Properties window can be called up
• using the Data Editor, page 344.
1. Select one or several lines in the Data Editor.
2. Select Properties from the context menu.
• the programming language sections
1. Select one or several element(s) in the programming language section.
2. Select Data Properties from the context menu or press CTRL+Enter.
• the tab I/O Objects of a module
1. Select one or several lines in the Address/Name/Type table.
2. Select Data Properties from the context menu.
How the window behaves and the options in the Data Properties window depend on
whether the window was opened using the Data Editor or the Programming Languages
section.
NOTE: If more than one object is selected, only the common data for all the selected
objects is displayed. If this data is modified, the modification applies to all the selected
objects. In this way it is possible to assign the same comment to different variables or
assign the same initial value, see also: Changing the attribute in several instances, page
416

CAUTION
LOSS OF DATA
Before changing a data in the Data Properties window, ensure that the change is
appropriate not only to the selected instance of this data, but also to all other instances of
this data.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Structure of the Window

The contents of the window depend on the selected object:

33003101.26 1195
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Window Data Properties for elementary variables:

Window Data Properties for function blocks:

Available Attributes
The list of available attributes is the same as the Data Editor columns. Refer to the Data
Editor columns, page 421 for more information.

1196 33003101.26
Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Generate variables
Representation
Representation of the dialog box:

Items
Elements of the dialog box:

Element Description

Name Name of the variables to generate (maximum length = 32 characters).

Type Datatype of the variables to generate.

If you want to allocate the variable for the elementary data type, you can select it
from the list.

If you want to allocate the variables for the derived data type, enter the data type in
the text box.
This button is only available in the IL and ST editor under the following conditions:
• The cursor is located where a variable can be inserted (i.e. not in a word).
• The name of the variable is automatically entered in the text box Name.
You can confirm the entries using this button and the variable will be declared and
inserted in the section.
In the FBD and LD-Editor:

You can confirm the entries using this button and the variable will be declared and (if
not already inserted) inserted in the section.

In the IL and ST Editor:

You can confirm the entries using this button and the variable will be declared (but
not inserted in the section).

Cancel the generate of the variables using this button.

Use this button to show or hide the Address and Commentarytext boxes.

33003101.26 1197
 Programming Languages Data Selection Dialog Box

Element Description

Address Address of the variables to generate (optional).

Comment Comment for the variables to generate (optional).

1198 33003101.26
33003101.26 1199
 I/O Objects tab

I/O Objects tab

What’s in This Chapter
Introduction to the I/O Object Tab .......................................... 1200
I/O Objects Tab for a Processor............................................. 1202
I/O Objects Tab for a Module................................................. 1204
Details of Areas in the I/O Objects Tab................................... 1206
I/O Objects Tab for a Bus Device........................................... 1212
How to Use the I/O Objects Tab ............................................ 1212

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes the I/O objects tab, which is used to associate variables with the
module I/Os and to manage these different variables.

Introduction to the I/O Object Tab

General Points
This tab is used to manage the I/O objects of a module, a field bus device or the memory
and system objects of the PLC.
The following table summarizes the different functionalities according to the type of device
associated with the tab:

Function Processor Module or bus device

Displaying all located objects of the PLC X -

Displaying I/O objects (topological addressing) X (1) X (2)

Filtering all located objects of the PLC X -

Filtering I/O objects X (1) X (2)

Sorting all located objects of the PLC X -

Sorting I/O objects X (1) X (2)

Creating an IODDT variable for a module - X

Creating an IODDT variable for a channel - X

Creating a topological EDT variable - X

1200 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Function Processor Module or bus device

Presymbolizing a set of IODDT variables for a module - X

Presymbolizing a set of topological EDT variables - X

For Quantum and Modicon M340 PLCs, displaying the X X

correspondence between the topological address and State
RAM.
Legend:

X: available functionality,

-: non-available functionality

(1): of all I/O objects of the PLC

(2): only the I/O objects of the module or the device concerned.

Access Rules
To access this tab, the following conditions must be met:
• The tab can be accessed from the configuration screen for the module, processor or
bus device (it is located at the same level as the description tab).
• The tab is accessible in offline and online mode.

Operating Rules
The main operating rules are as follows:
• This tab can be used to create and associate variables, but not to delete them.
• To delete a variable created by this tab, you must use the data editor.
• Multiple presymbolization can only be used on compatible objects (of the same type).
• For the processors, the tab only allows PLC objects to be displayed (variables cannot
be associated).
• The control loops built into the processor are regarded as module channels, and
consequently, creation and presymbolization are possible.
• It is possible to name a variable derived after symbolization.
For example, if Counter_0 is a T_COUNT_STD type variable, the presymbolized
counting value Counter_0.CUR_MEASURE can be renamed (Value_C0, for example).

33003101.26 1201
 I/O Objects tab

I/O Objects Tab for a Processor

At a Glance
The processor I/O Objects tab can be used to view PLC objects (system objects, memory
objects) as well as I/O objects, regardless of whether they belong to an in-rack module or to
a communication bus device (for example, Fipio).
NOTE: This screen can only be used to view objects; for modifications, use the I/O
objects tab associated with the modules or bus devices, page 1204.

1202 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Illustration
Example of an I/O Objects screen for a Modicon M340 processor.

Description
The different areas of the screen are as follows:

33003101.26 1203
 I/O Objects tab

Zone Description

CPU objects, page 1207 This zone can be used to select PLC system and
memory objects that you would like to view in the
Address Name Type Comment zone.

I/O Objects, page 1208 This zone can be used to select processor I/O objects
that you would like to view in the Address Name Type
Comment zone.
Update, page 1211 This zone allows you to start the update of the
information in the Address Name Type Comment
zone.
Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 Zone used to view and select data. The contents of
this zone are obtained using the buttons and
selections of the previous zones. The Quantum State
RAM column is added.

I/O Objects Tab for a Module

At a Glance
For a module, this tab can be used to view module I/O objects and to manage the
association of these objects with variables.
NOTE: To view PLC objects (system, internal memory or internal constant objects), use
the I/O objects tab associated with the processor, page 1202.

1204 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Illustration
Example of an I/O objects screen for an Premium X bus module.

Description
The different areas of the screen are as follows:

33003101.26 1205
 I/O Objects tab

Zone Description

Create I/O variable, page 1209 This zone can be used to create variables and to
associate them with channels or channel elements
with a comment for each variable.
I/O Objects, page 1208 This zone can be used to select processor I/O objects
that you would like to view in the Address Name Type
Comment zone.
Update, page 1211 This zone allows you to start the update of the
information in the Address Name Type Comment
zone.
Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 Zone used to view and select data. The contents of
this zone are obtained using the buttons and
selections of the previous zones. For Quantum and
Modicon M340, the State RAM column is added.

NOTE: For Modicon M340 I/O modules only the topological I/O objects are displayed. It
is not possible to instantiate an IODDT.

Details of Areas in the I/O Objects Tab

At a Glance
The I/O Objects tab is available for:
• Modules in the rack and their channels,
• Processors and their channels,
• Process control loops,
• Communication bus devices.
The following paragraphs give details of the areas available from this tab.

1206 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Illustration of the CPU Objects Area

The CPU Objects area is only available for the processor. This appears as follows:

Description of the CPU Objects Area

The selection of different objects using checkboxes %S, %SW, %M, %MW, %MD, %MF, %KW, %KD
and %KF enables these to be displayed in the Address Name Type Comment area for
Premium or the Address Name Type State RAM Comment area for Modicon M340 and
Quantum, once the Update Grid with... button is pressed, in the Update area.
NOTE: For Premium/Atrium PLCs double-type instances of located data (%MD<i>, %
KD<i>) or floating (%MF<i>, %KF<i>) should be located by an integer type (%MW<i>, %
KW<i>). Only I/O objects make it possible to locate type instances (%MD<i>, %KD<i>, %
QD, %ID, %MF<i>, %KF<i>, %QF, %IF) by using their topological address (for example %
MD0.6.0.11, %MF0.6.0.31).
NOTE: For Modicon M340 PLCs, double-type instances of located data (%MD<i>, %
KD<i>) or floating (%MF<i>, %KF<i>) are not available.
NOTE: For Modicon M340 PLCs, the index (i) value must be even (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) for double-type
instances of located data (%MW and %KW).

33003101.26 1207
 I/O Objects tab

Illustration of the I/O Objects Area

The I/O Objects area is available for modules, processors, control loops and bus devices. It
appears as follows:

Description of the I/O Objects Area

The selection of different objects using checkboxes enables these to be displayed in the
Address Name Type Comment area, once the Update Grid with... button is pressed, in
the Update area.
The different objects can be selected by type:
• Channel: for module channels or a bus device.
• Configuration: for configuration language objects.
• System: for language objects managing explicit exchanges.
• State: for status language objects (accessible by READ_STS).
• Parameter: for configuration language objects (accessible by READ_PARAM, WRITE_
PARAM, SAVE_PARAM, RESTORE_PARAM).
• Command: for command language objects (accessible by WRITE_CMD).
• Implicit: for implicit language objects of the module or a bus device.

1208 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Illustration of the Create I/O Variable Area

The Create I/O Variable area is only available for modules, control loops and bus devices. It
appears as follows:

Description of the Create I/O Variable Area

Having selected one or more objects in the Address Name Type Comment area, you can
select an IODDT type and create one or more variables of this type by clicking The I/O
Objects tab is available for:Create.
Operating rules:
• By selecting a line in the Address Name Type Comment area, you can create a
variable for which you can enter the name. You can also assign a comment to the
variable.
• By selecting several homogenous (same type) lines from the Address Name Type
Comment area, you can automatically create several variables with identical prefixes
(the first variable with the suffix 0 the second 1, the third 2, etc.). This method also
applies for the variable comment (the first comment will have the suffix 0, the second 1,
and the third 2, etc.).
• When the selected variable(s) is/are of EDT type, the type area is grayed out. Type
selection is only available when several types are available.

33003101.26 1209
 I/O Objects tab

Illustration of the Address Name Type Comment Area

The Address Name Type Comment area is available for all I/O Objects tabs. These appear
as follows:

Description of the Address Name Type Comment Area

This area enables you to:
• Display the objects selected in the CPU Objects and I/O Objects areas,
• Select one or more object lines in order to create variables and associate variables with
these,
• Open, page 1215 the Data Properties window,
• View the comment associated with the variable.
For Quantum PLCs, an additional column is available:
• State RAM is used to view the correspondence between the topological address and
State RAM.

1210 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Illustration of the Update Area

The Update area is available for all I/O Objects tabs. These appear as follows:

Description of the Update Area

By clicking the Update Grid with... button, you can update the Address Name Type
Comment area from the information selected in the CPU Objects and I/O Objects areas.
The Address Name Type Comment area is also used to select objects in order to create
variable names and comments for them (only true for modules, control loops and
communication bus devices).
The Cancel button is used to cancel the update of object names from the Address Name
Type Comment area.
The Filter on use button is used to display only those objects used in the project.
The addresses, names, types and comments and use checkboxes are used,
respectively, to display:
• The Address column,
• the Name and Type and Comments columns,
• In bold the variables used in the program.

33003101.26 1211
 I/O Objects tab

I/O Objects Tab for a Bus Device

At a Glance
All bus devices that have a description window also have an I/O objects tab.
Currently, Fipio (Premium) and CANopen (Modicon M340 and Modicon M580) bus devices
have an I/O objects tab. This tab behaves in exactly the same way as the I/O objects of a
module, page 1204 tab.

How to Use the I/O Objects Tab

At a Glance
The I/O tab is used to facilitate the management of located variables in an automation
project using Control Expert.
For information on the different possible actions, refer to the pages describesing this tab for:
• Processors, page 1202
• Modules, page 1204
• Communication bus devices, page 1212
A description of the main procedures for carrying out these actions is given below.

How to Display Required Objects

The following table shows the procedure for displaying a list of objects associated with a
processor, module or communication bus device.

1212 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Step Action

1 In the CPU objects, page 1207 area or I/O objects, page 1208 area, check the boxes of the
objects you want to display (%S, %SW, %MW, %CH, %M, %MW, %I, %Q, etc.).

Note: The Select All and Deselect All buttons can be used to check or un-check all boxes.
2 In the Update, page 1211 area, click Update Grid with....

Result: the Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 area is updated and displays all the
selected variables available on the processor, module or current bus device.

Note: When searching for names, it is possible to cancel an update in progress by clicking
Cancel.

How to Select an Object

The following table shows the procedure for selecting an object associated with a processor,
module or communication bus device.

Step Action

1 In the Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 area, click the line of the object to select.

Result: the line appears in reverse video, and the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area
becomes accessible for modules and communication bus devices, for creating a variable
associated with the selected line.

Note: If the Address Name Type Comment area is empty or contains no object to select, see
the section How to Display Required Objects, page 1212.

How to Create a Variable for an Object

The following table shows the procedure for creating a variable for a module object or
communication bus device object.

Step Action

1 In the Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 area, click the line of the object to select.

Result: the line appears in reverse video, and the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area
becomes accessible for modules and communication bus devices, for creating a variable
associated with the selected line.

Note: If the Address Name Type Comment area is empty or contains no object to select, see
the section How to Display Required Objects, page 1212.

2 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, select the type of variable to create (if available).

33003101.26 1213
 I/O Objects tab

Step Action

Note: When the variable is an EDT type (such as DINT, INT, BOOL, EBOOL type variables) or
when the available IODDT is unique, the choice of type is not available.

3 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, enter the name of the variable to be created.

4 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, enter the comment for the variable to be created.

5 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, click Create.

Result: a new variable is created, which is associated with the object selected in the Address
Name Type Comment, page 1210 area.

How to Select a List of Objects

The following table shows the procedure for selecting several objects associated with a
module or communication bus device.

Step Action

1 In the Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 area, click the left column (gray column of
object numbers) on the first object to select.

2 Hold down the mouse button and slide the cursor down to the last element to select.

Result: the list of selected objects appears in reverse video.

How to Create Variables Associated with a List of Objects

The following table shows the procedure to create variables associated with several
homogenous objects from a module or communication bus device.

Step Action

1 In the Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 area, click the left column (gray column of
object numbers) on the first object to select.

2 Hold down the mouse button and slide the cursor down to the last element to select.

Note: If the Address Name Type Comment area is empty or contains no objects to select, see
the section How to Display Required Objects, page 1212 in order to select a contiguous list of
objects to select.

3 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, select the type of variable to create (if available).

Note: When the selected variables are of EDT type (such as DINT, INT, BOOL, EBOOL type
variables) or when a single IODDT is available, the choice of type is not available.

1214 33003101.26
I/O Objects tab

Step Action

Caution: if heterogeneous (not of the same type) objects appear in the list, the creation of
variables will not be available. You must therefore select a list of homogenous objects.

4 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, enter the prefix to be associated with all selected
objects.

Note: This prefix will be associated with a number to form the name of each variable. The first
object will be number 0, the second 1, the third 2, etc.

Example: if you enter the prefix Valve, the created variables will be: Valve0, Valve1, Valve2,
Valve3, etc.

5 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, enter the prefix of the comment to be associated
with all selected objects.

Note: This prefix will be associated with a number to form the comment for each variable. The
first object will be number 0, the second 1, the third 2, etc.

Example: if you enter the prefix Comment, the created comments will be: Comment0,
Comment1, Comment2, Comment3, etc.

6 In the Create I/O variable, page 1209 area, click Create.

Result: the new variables are created and appear in the Address Name Type Comment, page
1210 area.

How to Access Data Properties

The following table provides a step-by-step procedure for accessing the Data Properties
window from the I/O tab.

Step Action

1 In the Address Name Type Comment, page 1210 area click on the variable whose properties
you wish to display.

2 Right-click on Properties.

Result: the Data Properties window is displayed.

Once it is open, this window displays the properties of the variable selected in the Address
Name Type Comment area.

Frequently Asked Questions

Below is a list of the most commonly asked questions you may have on the use of the I/O
Objects tab.

33003101.26 1215
 I/O Objects tab

Question Answer

How can I sort the objects list into alphabetical order in Simply click on the name of the column to be sorted.
a column?
How can I display the variables and objects used in my The variables and objects used in a program appear in
project? bold and the others are not yet used.

How can I filter the objects in the Address Name Type Use the check boxes of the Update area.
Comment area?
Why are the Address Name Type Comment or Possible reasons include:
Address Name Type State RAM Comment areas • You have not yet updated the area by clicking
empty? Update Grid with....
• You have not yet checked the boxes in the CPU
Objects or I/O Objects areas.
• No object for which the boxes are checked
appears in this module, processor or
communication bus device.
Why is the Quantum State RAM column empty? Possible reasons include:
• The Address Name Type State Ram Comment
area is empty, refer to the previous question.
• The elements displayed are not associated with
State RAM.
Why is variable creation not available? Possible reasons include:
• You are in the processor, and it is therefore
impossible to display the objects.
• You have selected a list of heterogeneous
objects, and it is only therefore possible to create
lists of variables for objects of the same type.
• You have selected an object that is already
associated with a variable. You must go into the
data editor to delete this variable, in order to
create another.
• You have selected a list of objects of which at
least one is already associated with a variable
(see previous point).

1216 33003101.26
33003101.26 1217
 Memory Tab

Memory Tab
What’s in This Chapter
Memory Tab ........................................................................ 1218

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes the Memory tab, which is only available for Quantum and Modicon
M340 PLCs that are equipped with a State RAM.

Memory Tab
Overview
The Memory tab is only available for the Modicon M340 hardware platform equipped with a
State RAM memory area.
It allows defining the type of memory management for the selected input / output module.
The option you select here must comply with the type of memory management you selected
for the processor, page 1340.
The following settings are possible:

If... Then...
Topological memory management is configured for you can only select Topological memory
the processor management for the discrete and analog modules.

Mixed topological and State RAM memory you can select either Topological or Mixed
management is configured for the processor topological and State RAM memory management
for the discrete and analog modules.

The memory management settings of the modules are compared with the memory
management settings of the processor during Analyze. If any inconsistencies are detected,
an appropriate message is displayed in the output window.
The type of memory management you selected for the processor will be used as default
setting for the Memory Management parameter in the Memory tab.
Any application made with Control Expert is automatically configured with address
configuration for topological addressing as the default setting.

1218 33003101.26
Memory Tab

NOTE:
If you want to import a legacy LL984 Compact application which uses Modbus request to
communicate with an HMI, you have to use State RAM addressing to preserve the
Modbus exchange between PLC and HMI.

Specific Configuration Dialogs in Case of LL984 Import

If an ST section has been created during import to emulate Compact configuration behavior
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference Manual), the converter creates
a specific I/O module configuration with specific configuration dialogs (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, LL984 Editor, Reference Manual).
The Memory Management area is grayed and the choice is fixed to Mixed topological and
State RAM.
In the State RAM area Format and Coding are defined by the converter.
You can only delete these modules. Copy and paste of these modules is not possible.

Memory Management
The area Memory Management of the Memory tab provides the following options:

Option Description

Topological Select this option to work with pure topological

addressing.

If this mode is selected, the parameters in the State

RAM area of this dialog box are disabled.

Mixed topological and State RAM Select this option to work with State RAM addressing
for IO access.

Topological addressing remains possible for some IO

objects (%CH, %I.ERR, ...) but it’s not possible to
access IO values (%I, %Q).

With this option selected, define further State RAM

options in the State RAM area of this tab for the
different types of modules.
NOTE: With this type of memory management,
all channels are associated with only one task
(MAST or FAST).

33003101.26 1219
 Memory Tab

NOTE: If you select Mixed topological and State RAM for Memory Management the
following online features are disabled:
• I/O Objects
• Memory
• Debug
• Fault

State RAM Configuration for Discrete Modules

Depending on the selected module, the State RAM area of the Memory tab contains
parameters for discrete input modules, discrete output modules or for discrete mixed
modules. They are available if the option Mixed topological and State RAM is selected in
the Memory Management area.
The figure below shows the Memory tab for a discrete mixed input / output module as an
example:

The State RAM area contains the following parameters:

1220 33003101.26
Memory Tab

Parameter Description

Format • Bit: Select this option for channel mapping in the discrete mode. This means
that each channel is mapped to a %I (inputs) or %M (outputs).
• Word1: Select this option for channel mapping in the word mode. This means
that a group of 8 channels is mapped to a %IW (inputs) or %MW (outputs).

Coding This parameter is only available for channel mapping in word mode, that is if the
parameter Format is set to Word.
• Binary: Select this option to use the binary integer format.
• BCD: Select this option to use the BCD coding format.

Mapping This parameter allows you to define the starting addresses for the inputs and
outputs.

The following sizes of the memory areas are possible:

• For inputs in Bit format: %I-1x
• For inputs in Word format: %IW-3x
• For outputs in Bit format: %M-0x
• For outputs in Word format: %MW-4x
NOTE: The State RAM address starts at address 0, but the first available
address for discrete and analog modules is %I1, %M1, %IW1, and %MW1.

(1) When Word is selected as the Format, the LSB of the Word is mapped to:
• Input 0 on discrete input modules
• Output 0 on discrete output modules
NOTE: All channels of a discrete module must be configured. It is not possible to leave a
group of channels un-configured.
NOTE: You can use State RAM objects in event sections, but they are refreshed with the
frequency of the task where they are declared.
NOTE: State RAM addresses are not checked during input. If any range overlapping is
detected or any address exceeds the range of the State RAM, an appropriate message
is displayed at the validation screen or during Analyze.

State RAM Configuration for Analog Modules

Depending on the selected module, the State RAM area of the Memory tab contains
parameters for analog input modules, analog output modules or for analog mixed modules.
They are available if the option Mixed topological and State RAM is selected in the
Memory Management area.

33003101.26 1221
 Memory Tab

The figure below shows the Memory tab for a mixed analog input / output module as an
example:

The State RAM area contains the following parameters:

Parameter Description

Mapping This parameter allows you to define the starting addresses for the inputs and
outputs.

The following sizes of the memory areas are possible:

• For inputs in Word format: %IW-3x
• For outputs in Word format: %MW-4x

NOTE: State RAM addresses are not checked during input. If any range overlapping is
detected or any address exceeds the range of the State RAM, an appropriate message
is displayed at the validation screen or during Analyze. For instance, if a located
variable is created in the Data Editor, using a %MW IO map word of a configured IO
base, the following build error will occur: ‘Error: Memory overlapping with protected
memory address '%MWi'. Please relocate the resources in '%MWi' to avoid overlapping.’
(%MWi is the address that have to be changed in the DataEditor).

1222 33003101.26
33003101.26 1223
 Type Library Browser

Type Library Browser

What’s in This Chapter
Access to the Type Library Browser....................................... 1224
Description of the Type Library Browser................................. 1226
Configuration of Columns of the Type Library Browser ............ 1228
Drag & Drop of FFBs in a program section ............................. 1230

Overview
This chapter describes the type library browser.

Access to the Type Library Browser

At a Glance
Functions and function blocks (FFBs) can be dragged from the type library browser into a
program section and stored (Drag & Drop).

1224 33003101.26
Type Library Browser

Accessing the Browser

Step Action

1 In the Tools menu, select the Type Library Browser option or click the Type Library Browser

button in the language editor toolbar.

(To close the Type Library Browser click the button again).

2
Result: The following window appears.

33003101.26 1225
 Type Library Browser

Description of the Type Library Browser

Calling the Type Library Browser
See Access to the Type Library Browser, page 1224.

Structure of the window

Appearance:

1226 33003101.26
Type Library Browser

Elements:

Element Description

Library name The scope of the displayed function types and function block types is
selected in this column:
• To display all function types and function block types used in the
project, select <Project>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library
independently of the library assignment, select <Libset>.
• To display all function types and function block types of a library,
select the desired library.

Family name To display all function types and function block types of a library family,
select the desired family.

Click this button to update the display corresponding to the filter term
Button defined in the Name field.

Click this button to open a dialog box, page 430 for defining the filters.
Button

Click this button to invert the filter. The button changes from = to <> and
Button vice versa.

Name (Text Box) The name of the functions and function block types to search for can be
entered in this text box. You can also use the joker * and ?.

EF When you enable this check box, Elementary Function types (EFs) are
displayed.

EFB When you enable this checkbox, Elementary Function Block types
(EFBs) are displayed.

DFB When you enable this checkbox, Derived Function Blocks (DFBs) are
displayed.

Name (List) This column displays the names of the function types and function block
types and their formal parameters.

Type This column displays the types of the function types and function block
types.

Comment This column displays the comments for the function types and function
block types.

33003101.26 1227
 Type Library Browser

Closing the Type Library Browser the currently selected Library name, Family name and
type check boxes (EF, EFB, DFB) are saved. If you open the Type Library Browser again,
these items will be preset.

Shortcut menu structure

Additional different commands can be executed via the context menu of the Type Library
Browser.
Shortcut menu commands:

Menu command Description

Copy into Project This menu command is only available for functions and function block
types that are not used yet in the project.

Use this menu command to load the selected function and function block
types into the project. Select via drop down list the Library Name which
makes it quicker to access the type in the project.

Expand All Use this menu command to display the formal parameters of the selected
function and function block type. The same function is also available
above the + symbol in front of the function block type names.

Collapse Use this menu command to hide the formal parameters of the selected
function and function component type. The same function is also
available via the - symbol in front of the function block type names.

Customize Columns... Using this menu command you can:

• define the columns, page 1228 to be displayed and
• define the sequence, page 1228 for the columns shown.

Help on Type Use this button to open the help for the selected function or function block
types shown.

Data Properties Use this menu command to call the Data Properties, page 1195 dialog
box for the selected function and function block type.

Configuration of Columns of the Type Library

Browser
Introduction
You can use the Column Configuration dialog box to:
• define the columns that you want to display,

1228 33003101.26
Type Library Browser

• define the sequence for the columns shown.

Call the dialog box:

You can call up the Column configuration dialog box from the shortcut menu in the Type
Library browser, page 1226.

Call the dialog box

Representation:

Elements:

Element Description

Name This checkbox is to show the names of the functions and function blocks
in the Type Library Browser and cannot be unchecked.

Type When you activate this checkbox, the Type Library Browser and the types
(EFB, FB etc.) for the functions and function blocks are shown.

Version When you enable this checkbox, the Type Library Browser and the
versions of the functions and function blocks types are shown.

Comment When you enable this checkbox, the Type Library Browser and the
comments for the functions and function blocks types are shown.

Use this button to move the location of the selected attribute one place
forward.

The location of the attribute Name cannot be modified.

Use this button to move the location of the selected attribute one place
back.

The location of the attribute Name cannot be modified.

33003101.26 1229
 Type Library Browser

Drag & Drop of FFBs in a program section

Procedure
To insert a function or function block (FFBs) using drag & drop, carry out the following steps:

Step Action

1 Open a program section

2 Open the Types Library Browser per drag & drop.

• the Tools > Type Library Browsermenu command.
or
• press the key combination Alt+3.

3 Select the desired function/function block and hold down the left mouse button.
4 Drag the selected function/ function block types in the program section.

5 Release the mouse button.

Result:
• The FFB is inserted in the program section.
• In the Tools > Options dialog box on the Data and Languages tab, if the Automatically
assign a variable to a new graphical object checkbox is selected, then the Function
input assistant, page 1192 is automatically opened for inputting the current parameters.

1230 33003101.26
33003101.26 1231
 Search/Replace Tool

Search/Replace Tool
What’s in This Chapter
Overview of the Search / Replace tool ................................... 1232
General Features for Search/Replace ................................... 1234
Searching for Data ............................................................... 1235
Replacing Data .................................................................... 1236
Search Toolbar .................................................................... 1237
Data Search Dialog .............................................................. 1239
Cross-References (Search Results) ...................................... 1240
Cross-References (Replace) ................................................ 1243
Tracing Variables / Addresses............................................... 1245

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter presents the Search / Replace tool and how to use its main functions:
• the Search function is used to look for data,
• the Replace function is used to replace data.

Overview of the Search / Replace tool

Introduction
The Search / Replace tool provides you with the following functions:
• the Search function,
• the Replace function.

Search Function
This function lets you look for objects such as:
• instances of elementary data types (EDT),
• instances and types of derived data (DDT / IODDT),

1232 33003101.26
Search/Replace Tool

• instances and types of function block data (EFB / DFB),

NOTE: In online mode, searching DFB instances can also be performed using the
DFB instances animation button in the programming language editor toolbar. For
more detailed information, refer to Searching / animating DFB Instances, page
1277.
• instances and types of data relating to Sequential Function Charts (SFC),
• topological addresses (%M100).
The search is carried out in the following areas of the project:
• sections that make up the application program,
• animation tables,
• operator screens,
• configuration.

Replace Function
This function lets you replace objects such as:
• instances of elementary data types (EDT),
• instances of derived data types (DDT / IODDT),
• instances of function block data (EFB / DFB),
• topological addresses (%M100).
The replacement objects must be declared, except for direct addressing data (%M, %MW, etc.)
and their type must correspond to that of the objects being replaced.
The replacement can done on the search results and initiated at the result window.

Accessing the Data Search Dialog

To open the Data Search dialog

• click the Data Search button in the toolbar or

• use the Tools > Search / Replace menu (Alt+5).

Predefined Search
To start a predefined search

33003101.26 1233
 Search/Replace Tool

• from the Data Editor or

• from a language editor window,
select the object whose references you want to see and use Initialize Search from the
context menu.
Another way is to select a variable in a language editor window. Doing so, the list box of the
search toolbar, page 1237 contains the variable name. Press Enter to start searching. You
can also use 2 special buttons from the toolbar to search for reading/writing references,
page 1238.

General Features for Search/Replace

Copy / Paste
You can use copy and paste in the following instances:
• copying a data item from any given editor in the programming software and pasting it
into an entry field in the window,
• copying a data item from the window and pasting it into any given editor in the
programming software,
• copying / pasting a data item within a window.

Drag-and-Drop
You can use drag-and-drop for search.
Drag a data item from any given editor in the programming software and drop it at the end of
the list of displayed references; the corresponding tree is created.

Protection
The Search function is always available. Protection applies to:
• the references in the protected sections of the program, which are not displayed,
• the references in the protected sections of the DFBs, which are not displayed.
The Replace function complies with the protection applied to the different areas of the
project:
• if the application field is in read-only, the Replace button is not available,

1234 33003101.26
Search/Replace Tool

• if certain references are protected, they can not be selected for replacement.

Online Mode
The use and behavior of Search / Replace in online mode are identical to the use and
behavior in offline mode.

Save Context
When you close the Search / Replace window, the following data is saved:
• the position and size of the window,
• the selection of search parameters,
• the 10 most recent entries in the drop-down menu,
• the current view (structural/functional and full/shortened/flat),
• the contents of the Control Expert Search / Replace output window.

Searching for Data

Searching via Data Search Dialog
To search data using the Data Search dialog, you must perform the following actions:

33003101.26 1235
 Search/Replace Tool

Step Action

1 Open the Data Search dialog

• by clicking the Data Search button in the toolbar or

• by using the Tools > Search / Replace menu (Alt+5) and pressing the Data Search
button in the Cross-References window, page 1240.
Result:

The Data Search Dialog is displayed.

2 Specify the search options in the Data Search Dialog, page 1239.

3 Click the Search button.

Result:

The search results are displayed in the Cross-References window, page 1240.

Predefined Search
To start a predefined search
• from the Data Editor or
• from a language editor window,
select the object whose references you want to see and use Initialize Search from the
context menu.
Another way is to select a variable in a language editor window. Doing so, the list box of the
search toolbar, page 1237 contains the variable name. Press Enter to start searching. You
can also use 2 special buttons from the toolbar to search for reading/writing references,
page 1238.

Replacing Data

To access the data replace function, you must perform the following actions:

1236 33003101.26
Search/Replace Tool

Step Action

1 After searching for data, page 1235 the search results are displayed in the Cross-References
dialog, page 1240.

2
In the Cross-References dialog click the button to display the Replace with area of the
dialog.

3 Enable the check boxes for those references of the search results which should be replaced.

4 • Enter the replacement data (only data compatible with the data being searched for is
tolerated)
• or click the Down arrow to select the replacement data out of a list providing the last 10
entries
• or click the ... button to open a Data Selection dialog to select the instance or data to be
replaced (only the instances compatible with the instance being searched for are displayed)

5 Click the Replace button to start the replacement operation in the preselected Scope. Please
refer to Data Search dialog, page 1239.

Search Toolbar
Introduction
The main toolbar of Control Expert provides a Data Search button with a list box beside it to
select or to enter a search string.

Start Searching
To start searching the selected or entered search string press Enter.
The default search options are used.
The options can be changed by pressing the Data Search button left to the list box instead
of pressing Enter.
The search results are displayed in the Cross-References dialog, page 1240 and a jump to
the first occurrence of the searched data is done.

33003101.26 1237
 Search/Replace Tool

Data Search Dialog

To open the Data Search dialog, page 1239 click the binoculars symbol.

Searching for Reading/Writing References

To search for reading/writing references only, you can use
• the Data Search dialog, page 1239 or
• two special buttons from the toolbar (see below).

Button Description

Click this button to start searching for reading references only.

The current search options, defined in the Data Search dialog, are used but the
Write option is ignored.

Click this button to start searching for writing references only.

The current search options, defined in the Data Search dialog, are used but the
Read option is ignored.

Using one of these 2 buttons initiates a direct jump to the first found occurrence of the
reading/writing reference (for example, into the containing network).
If instead of a direct jump to the first found occurrence of the reading/writing reference the
Data Editor is opened, either deactivate the Overlapping, page 1239 option or click the Go
to next reference button, page 1241.

1238 33003101.26
Search/Replace Tool

Data Search Dialog

Representation

Description
Elements of the Search tab

Element Description

Find what Enter the complete variable name you want to search for.

Click the Down arrow to display a list providing the last 10 search strings.

Click the ... button to open a Data Selection dialog to select the object you want to
search for.
Scope Select the scope where you want to search.

The different scopes are:

• Global (application)
• a specific Program Unit of the application
• a specific DFB of the project
• all scopes (application + all Program Units + all DFBs)

Read Limits the search to reading references.

Write Limits the search to writing references.

Overlapping Activate this check box to search for all complete and partial references.

Inside DDT Activate this check box to search inside DDT variables.
Inside DFB Activate this check box to search inside DFB instances (except protected DFB types).

33003101.26 1239
 Search/Replace Tool

Element Description

Indirect Activate this check box to search for sub-elements and direct parents of structured
variables and arrays.

Max level of Defines the maximum level of indirect elements (sub-elements/parents) to be

indirection displayed.

Context Limits the search to a specific context.

• Contact: variable attached to a contact
• Coil: variable attached to a LD/LL984 coil
• SFC Object: variable used with an SFC object
• FFB / Subroutine: variable passed to an FFB
• ST / IL Statement: variable used with an ST/IL statement
The context is displayed as an optional column in the search results.

Keep previous Activate this check box to keep the previous search results. Otherwise, the search
results results window (Cross-References) is cleared before the new search results are
displayed.

Output to pane 2 Deactivate this check box to display the search results in the Find Result 1 tab of the
search results window (Cross-References).

Activate this check box to display the search results in the Find Result 2 tab of the
search results window (Cross-References).

Search button Starts the search and opens search results window (Cross-References).

Close button Closes the dialog.

Help button Opens the Help for this dialog.

Cross-References (Search Results)

Introduction
The Cross-References search results dialog displays the results of a search.

1240 33003101.26
Search/Replace Tool

Representation

Description
Elements of the Cross-References dialog

Element Description

Find Result 1 tab Depending on the respective check box activated in the Data Search dialog,
page 1239, the search results are displayed in one of the 2 tabs.
Find Result 2 tab
Displays the search results in a similar manner to the structural view in the
Project Browser.

Displays the search results in a similar manner to the functional view in the
Project Browser.

Displays the search results in Full form.

• Data declaration
• Path
• Data usage

Displays the search results in Shortened form.

• Data declaration
• Data usage

Displays the search results in Flat form.

33003101.26 1241
 Search/Replace Tool

Element Description

• Data usage

Selects the previous reference of the search results.

Selects the next reference of the search results.

Jumps directly to the currently selected found occurrence of the reference.

Jumps directly to the previous found occurrence of the reference (for example
into the containing network).

Jumps directly to the next found occurrence of the reference.

Opens the Data Search dialog.

Displays/hides the Replace with area of the dialog, page 1243.

Reference This column displays the name of the instance or type (DDT/IODDT/EFB/DFB) of
the data searched for. The details displayed depend on the display settings
described above (Full, Shortened, Flat).

Type This column displays

• type and reference of the data searched for,
• programming language used in the sections, subroutines, events, etc. that
contain references to the data searched for.
Usage This column displays
• the nature of the references to the data searched for (read only, write only,
read / write),
• the data search area.
Context Specific context as defined in the Data Search Dialog, page 1239.

Unit This column displays the unit of the Location.

Location This column displays the location of the data searched for in a short form.

Sorting Order
When the search results are displayed in Full or Shortened form sorting can only be done
by Reference or Type.

1242 33003101.26
Search/Replace Tool

When the search results are displayed in Flat form sorting can also be done by reference
related columns (Usage, Context, Unit and Location).
The search results are first sorted by their path (Program, Task, Segment, Section/Network).
The search results of sections/networks are sorted by a second key, depending on the kind
of the section/network.
• References within IEC language sections (FBD, LD, SFC, ST, IL) are sorted by row and
column.
• References within LL984 networks are sorted by column and row.
You can re-sort the search results by clicking on a specific column.
Re-sorting by multiple keys is not supported.

Cross-References (Replace)
Introduction
The Cross-References (Search Results) dialog, page 1240 displays the results of a search.

To display the Replace with area of the dialog use the button.

33003101.26 1243
 Search/Replace Tool

Representation

Description
Elements of the Replace with area of the dialog

Element Description

Replace with
To display this area of the dialog use the button.
• Enable the check boxes for those references of the search results which
should be replaced.
• Enter the replacement data (only data compatible with the data being
searched for is tolerated),
• or click the Down arrow to display a list providing the last 10 entries,
• or click the ... button to open a Data Selection dialog to select the instance
or data to be replaced (only the instances compatible with the instance
being searched for are displayed).

Replace button Starts the replacement operation in the preselected Scope. Please refer to Data
Search dialog, page 1239.

1244 33003101.26
Search/Replace Tool

Tracing Variables / Addresses

Introduction
Using the tracing feature, you can locate the occurrences of a variable/address in an
application.

Tracing
Step Action

1 Select an object in a language editor window.

Result:

The address attached to the object is displayed in the edit field of the Search Toolbar, page 1237.

2 Start a search either

• by pressing the Enter key or
• by means of one of the 2 special buttons next to the edit field of the Search Toolbar
(Searching for Reading/Writing References, page 1237).
Result:
• The search results are displayed in the Cross-References dialog, page 1240.
• A direct jump is initiated to the first found occurrence of the reading/writing reference (for
example into the containing network).
• A new automatic Search_”<Search String>” bookmark is created (to be able to jump back
later on). This bookmark is inserted into the bookmarks list like any other manually created
bookmark. Automatically created bookmarks, page 612 are displayed in gray and can not
be renamed.
3 Double-click a search result, displayed in the Cross-References dialog, to jump to the
respective read/write location.

4 With the bookmarks feature you can mark one or more of the shown locations in the language
editor. These bookmarks can be used later on to jump to from the bookmarks window.

5 From the bookmarks window you can also select the automatic Start of Search bookmark for
going back to the original starting position of the search.
NOTE: You can delete automatically generated bookmarks via the bookmarks window.

33003101.26 1245
1246 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

User's Function Blocks

What’s in This Chapter
DFB Type ............................................................................ 1247
DFB Instance ...................................................................... 1266
How to Create Nested DFBs ................................................. 1279

Overview
This chapter describes how to use the user's function blocks: DFB.

DFB Type
Purpose of this section
This section describes the types of DFB.

DFB Type
General information about DFBs
A DFB (Derived Function Block) is a user function block that has been customized to take
the specific nature of your project into consideration. It can be stored in the user-defined
library.
To use a DFB in your application, you must:
• Create a user's function block model called DFB type (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual),
• Use the available copies of the model called DFB instances (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) in your project.

Online Help for DFB Types (Help on Type)

It is possible to link an HTML help file to each DFB in the user-defined library.

33003101.26 1247
 User's Function Blocks

• This file must have a name that is identical to the linked DFB and the extension must be
*.htm.
•
◦ For Windows XP this file must be located in the directory:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Schneider Electric\Control
Expert\CustomLibset/Vx.x/Language.
◦ for Windows Vista this file must be located in the directory:
C:\ProgramData\Schneider Electric\Control Expert\CustomLibset/Vx.x/Language.
Language is named ENG, FRE, GER, ITA, SPA or CHI according to the language
desired.
Creating Help on Type

Step Action

1 Create an HTML help file for your DFB (for example with any kind of HTML editor).

Note: The HTML file name must be exactly the same as the name of your DFB.

2 Copy this file into the respective language folder (ENG, FRE ...).

3 Create an additional folder called HELP in the same directory as the language folders.

4 Copy all the files (for example graphics) you are referencing in your HTML file to the HELP folder.

5 Install your user-defined library in Control Expert.

Result:

All the files will be copied to the Libset directory and the HTML help file will be launched when you
click the Help on Type button.

Accessing a DFB Type

To create a DFB type, you must use the program Control Expert.
DFB types are accessed via the Derived FB Types directory in the project browser.
NOTE: You can also access the DFB types definition tool via the directory Variables &
FB instances.

Accessing DFB Types Via the Derived FB Types Directory

To access the DFB types via the Derived FB Types directory, do the following:

1248 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 In the structural view of the project browser, right-click on the directory Derived FB Types.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

2 Activate the Open command.

Result: The data editor window is opened. It is positioned directly under the DFB Types register
tab and shows the list of existing DFBs. A double-click on the first available line indicated by an
arrow provides access to the creation of a new DFB type.

Creating a DFB Type

How to create a DFB type
To create a DFB type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual), you must do the following:
• Enter a name on the empty line to create the empty structure of the DFB type,
• configure the DFB type,
• program the DFB Type (in the codes section).

Creating a DFB type

Do the following to create the empty structure of a DFB Type:

33003101.26 1249
 User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 Open the DFB types, page 1247 register tab in the data editor.

Result: The list of existing DFBs is displayed.

2 Select the first empty Name cell (shown by an arrow) and enter the parameter or variable name and
confirm with Enter.

Result: The empty structure of the DFB type is now created. This new DFB added to the list of existing
DFBs. It also appears in the directory tree Derived FB Types.

Configuration of a DFB Type

How to Configure a DFB Type
To configure a DFB type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) you must:
• input the parameters of the DFB: input, output and input/output
• input the DFB variables: public or private
• Input the DFB description.

1250 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Input of the Parameters and Variables

Carry out the following actions to input the parameters and the variables for a DFB:

Step Actions

1 Go to the DFB types, page 1247 tab of the data editor.

Result: the list of existing DFBs is displayed on the screen.

2 Click on the + sign positioned in front of the name of the DFB type to be configured.

Result: the DFB type is expanded, which gives access to its various directories (input, output, etc.).

3 Click on the + sign of the directory that you want to expand: input, output, input/output, public, private.

33003101.26 1251
 User's Function Blocks

Step Actions

4 Select the first empty Name cell (indicated by an arrow) and enter the name of the parameter or the
variable, then confirm using Enter.

Result: the data is created with a BOOL type by default (or with the last type selected).

5 Repeat steps 4 and 5, for all data to be input.

Parameter Type Modification

Carry out the following actions to modify the type of DFB parameter:

1252 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Actions

1 Double click on the Type cell associated with the desired parameter.

Result: you have access to the list of available types, page 1185.

2 Select a new type and confirm using Enter.

Result: data is modified with the new type.

Note:The MFB can be programmed in a DFB. To do this setup the type of an input by typing AXIS_REF.
(this type name is not proposed in the list box but is a valid type for a DFB input).

Note: The IODDT related to CANopen devices for Modicon M340 cannot be used as a DFB I/O parameter.
During the analyse/build step of a project, the following message:"This IODDT cannot be used as a DFB
parameter" advises the limitations to the user.

New Pin Number Allocation

Carry out the following actions to allocate a new pin number to a DFB parameter (when
parameter is created, a default pin number is allocated):

Step Actions

1 Only for input, output and input/output directories:

if you want to allocate a new pin number to every element of data, double click on the relevant
No. cell.

Result: the arrow is replaced by a data entry field.

2 Enter the desired new pin number then Enter to validate.

Result: the data is associated with the selected pin number.

33003101.26 1253
 User's Function Blocks

Programming a DFB type

How to program a DFB type
To program a DFB type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) you must:
• create the DFB section(s),
• enter the program code for each section.

Creating a section
Carry out the following actions in order to create a DFB section:

Step Action

1 Go to the DFB types, page 1247 tab of the data editor.

Result: the list of existing DFBs is displayed on the screen.

2 Expand the DFB type that you would like to program.

3 Expand the sections directory by clicking on +.

4 Select the Name cell and enter the name of the section.

Confirm with Enter.

Result: a dialog box is displayed on the screen to allow you to create a new section.

5 Select the programming language desired in the drop-down menu in the Language field.

6 Click OK to confirm the command.

Result: the section appears in the sections directory.

1254 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Action

7 If the sections directory already contains sections and you want to create a new one, expand the directory
and select the first empty Name cell.

Result: the dialog box used to enter section parameters is displayed on the screen.

8 Enter the section parameters and confirm with OK.

Result: the new section appears in the sections directory.

Entering the program

Carry out the following actions in order to enter the program for the section:

Step Action

1 Expand the sections directory of the DFB whose code you would like to enter.

Result: the list of sections is displayed on the screen.

2 Right-click on the name of the section to program.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

3 Activate the Open command.

Result: the section programming screen is displayed on the screen, in the selected language.

4 Enter the section program, page 468.

33003101.26 1255
 User's Function Blocks

Programming restrictions
All language instructions are allowed, except instructions that use input/output module
variables (READ_STS, READ_PARAM, WRITE_CMD, etc..).
Connection to a label (JUMP) is only possible within the same section.
You may not use the following objects:
• input/output objects (%I, %Q, etc.),
• the application's global objects (%MW, %KW, ...), except system bits and words %S and %
SW.
NOTE: When the Create variable option in the contextual menu is used from a DFB
section, the variable created is a private variable.
NOTE: For PL7 Function blocks (Obsolete Library): it is recommended not to use the
PL7_••• function blocks inside DFBs because you are not allowed to create new
instances in online mode.

Deleting a DFB type element

Deleting an element
To delete an element, do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the DFB types, page 1247 tab of the data editor and expand the DFB type from which you
want to remove an element.
2 Expand the directory that contains the element you want to delete.

3 Either: Or:

Select the element that you want to delete. Right-click on the element that you wish to
delete.

Result: A contextual menu appears.

4 Press Delete. Activate the command Delete.

Result: The item is removed from the Result: The item is removed from the
directory. directory.

1256 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Archiving a DFB Type

Introduction
After having created a DFB type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual), you can back it up in a user library, page 371 if the
following conditions are met:
• You are using Control Expert software,
• The computer is in offline mode,
• You have the required access rights,
• The DFB Type to back up is compatible (the nested DFBs and DDTs are also
compatible),
• The DFB type name doesn't already exist in the library (the name of the nested DFBs
and DDTs must also not already exist in the library).
When a DFB Type is backed up in a library, it can be used if the following conditions are met:
• You are using Control Expert software,
• The computer is in offline mode,
• You have the required access rights.

Archiving a DFB Type

To archive a DFB type in a user library, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the DFB types, page 1247 register tab in the data editor.

2 Right-click on the DFB type that you wish to back up.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

3 Activate the Copy into library command.

4 Select the library and the destination family.

Click OK to confirm.

33003101.26 1257
 User's Function Blocks

How to Reinforce Protection of a DFB Type

At a Glance
There are 4 levels of protection enforcement for a DFB type:
• None: The DFB type is not protected.
• No modification of version info: The DFB type is not protected except the DFB
version number.
• Read-Only: The DFB type parameters directories (inputs, outputs, inputs/outputs,
public, private and sections) are in read only format.
• No Read & Write: The DFB types parameters directories private and sections are not
displayed. All the other the DFB type parameters directories (inputs, outputs, inputs/
outputs and public) can be accessed from the data editor in read only format.
NOTE: If a DFB uses a DDT, you can modify the DDT type even if the protection of DFB
is enforced.

Password Mechanism
From lowest to highest level of security, the password mechanism of a DFB Type with the
reinforced protection can be:
• Not encrypted
• Encrypted
• Encrypted with hardened encryption (except for level of protection enforcement: No
modification of version info)
NOTE: Choosing the hardened encryption mechanism contributes to prevention from
any export of a DFB Type with the reinforced protection in an unencrypted format. This
option increases protection against theft of intellectual property.

Protection Enforcement of a DFB Type

To reinforce the protection of a DFB Type, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the DFB types register tab in the data editor.

2 Select the DFB Type to reinforce the protection.

3 Select the menu command Edit > Properties.

Result: The respective screen is displayed.

1258 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Action

4 Select the protection enforcement level from the drop-down menu.

5 After selecting, enter your password in the Entry field (maximum 8 characters).

6 Confirm your password in the Confirmation field.

7 Check the Password Encrypted check box if an enhanced password protection is required.
NOTE: A DFB Type with an encrypted password can not be edited with Unity Pro 4.0 or
earlier.

Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
When Password Encrypted option is selected, you can reinforce the security by selecting the
option Hardened Encryption check box.
NOTE: A DFB Type with hardened encrypted password can not be edited with Control Expert
14.1 or earlier.
8 Click OK to confirm.

Modification of the protection enforcement level

To change a DFB Type protection enforcement level, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the DFB types register tab in the variables editor.

2 Select the DFB Type for which you need to change the level of protection enforcement.

3 Select the menu command Edit > Properties.

Result: The respective screen is displayed.

4 Select the attribute Protection and click on the related box in the Value column.

Result: A drop-down menu appears.

5 Select the new protection enforcement level from the drop-down menu (None, No modification of
version info, Read-Only, No Read & Write).

6 After selecting, enter the current password if the protection of DFB was already reinforced.

7 Click OK to confirm.

Modify Password
To change a DFB type password, you must do the following:

33003101.26 1259
 User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 Open the DFB types register tab in the variables editor.

2 Select the DFB type to change the password for.

3 Select the menu command Edit > Properties.

Result: The respective screen is displayed.

4 Enable the attribute Protection by clicking on the + sign.

5 Select the attribute Password and click on the related box in the column Value.

Result: The Change password dialog box is opened.

6 Enter the current password in the Enter password field.

7 Enter your new password in the Entry field (maximum 8 characters).

8 Confirm your new password in the Confirmation field.

9 Check the Password Encrypted check box if an enhanced password protection is required.
NOTE: A DFB Type with a crypted password can not be edited with Unity Pro 4.0 or earlier.

Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
When Password Encrypted option is selected, you can reinforce the security by selecting the
option Hardened Encryption check box.
NOTE: A DFB Type with a hardened encryption password can not be edited with Control
Expert 14.1 or earlier.

10 Click OK to confirm.

Deleting a DFB Type

Deleting a DFB type
To delete a DFB type, do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the DFB types, page 1247 tab in the data editor.

Result: The list of existing DFBs is displayed.

2 Either: Or:

Select the DFB that you want to delete. Right-click on the DFB that you wish to
delete.

Result: A contextual menu appears.

1260 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Action

3 Press Delete. Activate the command Delete.

Result: The item is removed from the list. Result: The item is removed from the list.

How to access the attributes of a DFB type

Accessing the Attributes of a DFB Type
You should perform the following steps in order to access the attributes of a DFB type:

Step Action

1 Go to the DFB Types, page 1247 tab of the data editor.

2 Right-click the DFB type whose attributes you would like to display.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

3 Select Properties.

Result: The corresponding dialog box appears on the screen.

4 If you would like to associate an explanatory text with the definition of the DFB type (several lines of text
with hyperlinks), select the Descriptive form tab.

Result: The Descriptive form dialog box appears, page 1787.

33003101.26 1261
 User's Function Blocks

Attribute List
The attributes of a DFB type are the following:
• Name
• Location
• Comment
• Category
• Diag
• Size
• Protection
◦ None
◦ Read Only (password protection)
◦ No Read & Write (password protection)
◦ No modification of version info (password protection)
• Version
The version number is automatically incremented after a modification of the DFB type.
◦ Date
◦ Template Signature
◦ Code Signature
NOTE: The following attributes can be accessed in write mode depending on
Protection item setting:
• Name
• Comment
• Diag
• Protection
• Version

Authorized DFB Type Modifications

At a Glance
The modifications possible on a DFB type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) are defined by the access rights authorized
by your user profile.

1262 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

The following table summarizes the authorized modifications when you have a default user
profile:

Modification Read only Operation Adjustment Debugging Program-

ming

DFB type in offline mode No No No No Yes

DFB type in online mode No No No No Yes

DFB instance in offline mode No Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: In offline mode any kind of modification of a DFB Type is authorized on

condition that a non-blocking protection level is used.

Authorized DFB type modifications

The following table shows the operations that you can perform with DFB types in online
mode:

Action Non-used DFB Used DFB type

type

Create a DFB type Yes No

Delete a DFB type Yes No

Modify the name Yes No

Change Protection Level Yes No

Modify the comment Yes Yes

Modify the description Yes Yes

Export a DFB type No No

Import a DFB type No No

Make a back up to a library of a DFB Type No No

Use a DFB type from a library Yes Yes

Authorized modifications on the input/output parameters

The following table shows the operations that you can perform for the input/output
parameters of a DFB Type in online mode:

33003101.26 1263
 User's Function Blocks

Action Non-used DFB Used DFB type

type

Create a parameter Yes No

Delete a parameter Yes No

Move a parameter Yes No

Modify the name Yes No

Change type Yes No

Modify the comment Yes Yes

Change the initial value Yes Yes

Modify the other attributes Yes No

Authorized modifications on public variables

The following table shows the operations that you can perform on public variables of a DFB
type in online mode:

Action Non-used DFB Used DFB type

type

Create a variable Yes Yes

Delete a variable Yes No
Modify the name Yes No

Change type Yes No

Modify the comment Yes Yes

Change the initial value Yes Yes

Modify the other attributes Yes No

Authorized modifications on private variables

The following table shows the operations that you can perform on private variables of a DFB
type in online mode:

1264 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Action Non-used DFB Used DFB type

type

Create a variable Yes Yes

Delete a variable Yes No
Modify the name Yes No

Change type Yes No

Modify the comment Yes Yes

Change the initial value Yes Yes

Modify the other attributes Yes No

Authorized modifications of the sections

The following table shows the operations that you can perform on the sections of a DFB
Type in online mode:

Action Non-used DFB Used DFB type

type

Create a section Yes Yes

Delete a section Yes Yes
Move a section Yes Yes
Modify the name Yes No

Modify the comment Yes Yes

Modify the code Yes Yes

33003101.26 1265
 User's Function Blocks

DFB Instance
Purpose of this section
This section describes DFB instances. DFB instances management is identical to the
management of EFB instances, page 376.

DFB Instance
At a Glance
A DFB instances (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) is a copy of a validated DFB type (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) that can be used for programming.
You can create multiple instances of a same DFB type. In this case the inputs/outputs
parameters and the variables (public and private) are duplicated. The DFB type code is not
duplicated.
You can use the same instance of the DFB multiple times in your application. This
operation is nevertheless strongly discouraged.
The DFB instance name must be different from the name of a Control Expert reserved word,
a symbol, or from an elementary function (EF) name, or DFB type name.

How to access to a DFB instance

To access a DFB instance, you must use the program Control Expert.
DFB instances are accessed via the Variables & FB instances directory in the project
browser.

Accessing DFB instances via the Derived FB instances directory

To access the DFB instances via the Derived FB instances directory, you must do the
following:

1266 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 From the project browser structural view, expand the directoryVariables & FB instances.

2 Double-click on the folder Derived FB instances.

Result: The data editor window is opened. It is automatically placed under the Function Blocks register
tab. The list of instances already in the system is displayed.

Creating a DFB Instance

At a Glance
There are two possible ways in which you can create a DFB instance (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual):
• by inserting a new instance in the function block list,
• by inserting an instance in an editor.

Inserting a new DFB instance in the data editor

To create a new DFB instance, you must do the following:

33003101.26 1267
 User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 register tab in the data editor.

2 Select the first empty Name cell (shown by an arrow) and enter name of the new DFB instance and confirm
with Enter.

3 Then change the associated attributes, page 1272.

Inserting a new DFB instance in a language editor

To insert a new DFB instance in a language editor, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the language editor (the LD editor for example).

2 Click on an empty zone in the language editor.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

3 Activate the Data Selection command.

4 In the drop-down list, select the DFB type of which you wish to insert an instance.

5 Confirm with Enter.

Result: The mouse cursor is shown as a function block.

6 Click on the location where you wish to insert the DFB instance.

Result: A new DFB instance is created with a default name. It is inserted in the language editor
and created in the data editor at the same time.

1268 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Creating several DFB Instances

At a Glance
Several DFB instances can be created at once using the import function.

Creation of several DFB instances by importing a source file

Several DFB instances (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) can be created by importing, page 1677 a variables exchange
file (.xsy or .txt format). If you have chosen to export the variables with the associated DFB
types, the latter are imported.

Deleting a DFB instance

Deleting a DFB instance
To delete a DFB instance, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 tab in the data editor.

2 Either: Or:

Select the DFB instance that you want to Right-click on the DFB instance that you
delete. wish to delete.

Result: A contextual menu appears.

3 Press Delete. Activate the command Delete.

Result: The item is removed from the list. Result: The item is removed from the list.

Operations on DFB Instances

At a Glance
For each DFB instance (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual), the Function Blocks register tab in the data editor provides

33003101.26 1269
 User's Function Blocks

one line of information by default: Instance name, DFB type, comment, etc. From this screen
you can also:
• Apply a filter on the list of instances, page 430,
• View the elements of a DFB instance,
• View the attributes of a DFB instance,
• Sort the DFB instances according to their attributes.
NOTE: The DFB instance structure cannot be modified using the Function Blocks
register tab (name and type of the elements). However, the attributes of the instance
itself can be modified (name, type and comments of the DFB instance).

View the elements of a DFB instance

To view the elements of a DFB instance, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 register tab in the data editor.

2 Open the DFB instance of which you want to view the elements.

View the elements of a DFB instance

To view the attributes of a DFB instance, you must do the following:

1270 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 Either: Either:

Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 Open the DFB instance to gain access to its
register tab in the data editor. elements.

2 Right-click on the DFB instance whose Right-click on the element whose attributes
attributes you wish to view. you wish to view.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened. Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

3 Activate the Properties command.

Result: The related dialog box is opened.

Attributes list
The specific DFB instance attributes are:
• Instance name,
• Comments,
• Type,
• Category,
• Size,
• Diag,
• Used (frequency of use in program),
• Customize.
NOTE: All the DFB instance attributes are available in read/write mode except the
Category and the Used attributes of instances, which are available in read only.

Sorting DFB instances

To change the classification criteria, do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 register tab in the data editor.

2 Click on the title of the column that you want for the first criteria.

Result: The DFB instance classification criteria become:

• Firstly, a classification by alphabetical order in the column on which you have clicked,
• then, a classification by alphabetical order by name.
Note: The DFB instances are classified by name alphabetically as default.

33003101.26 1271
 User's Function Blocks

Modifying the Attributes of a DFB Instance

At a Glance
There are 2 different ways to modify the attributes of a DFB instance (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual):
• From the Function Blocks register tab, for the attributes that are directly accessible,
• or via the Data Properties dialog box for all attributes.

Modifying an attribute using the Function Blocks register tab

To modify the attributes of a DFB instance, you must do the following:

1272 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 register tab in the data editor.

2 Double-click on the cell that you wish to change the content of (you can also highlight this cell and press
Enter).

Result: A selection list or an entry field is displayed.

3 Modify the attribute (instance name, instance type, comment) and confirm with Enter.

Result: The DFB instance is displayed with its new attribute.

Modifying an attribute via the Data Properties dialog box

To modify the attributes of a DFB instance using the Data Properties dialog box, you must
do the following:

33003101.26 1273
 User's Function Blocks

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 register tab in the data editor.

2 Right-click on the DFB instance whose attributes you wish to view.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

3 Activate the Properties command.

Result: The related dialog box is opened.

4 In the Value column, double-click on the cell of the attribute to modify (you can also highlight this
cell and press Enter).

5 Modify the attribute (instance name, instance type, comment) and confirm with Enter.

Result: The new attribute is assigned to the DFB instance.

Simultaneous modification of an attribute of several DFB

instances
To simultaneously modify an attribute of several DFB instances, you must do the following:

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 register tab in the data editor.

2 Select the DFB instances of which you want to change an attribute (adjacent or non-adjacent
multi-selection).

3 Right-click on one of the instances that you just selected.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

4 Activate the Properties command.

Result: The related dialog box is opened.

5 Modify the attribute value and confirm with Enter.

Result: The new attribute is assigned to the DFB instance.

Limitations
The following limitations apply to multiple selections:
• All the selected instances must have the attribute and it must be modifiable,
• The new attribute value must be valid for all the selected instances,
• The attribute name cannot be changed (a DFB instance name is unique).

1274 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

NOTE: In a multiple selection, the selected elements must at the same level of the
hierarchy or must be compatible.

Modifying the attributes of the elements of multiple DFB

instances
Modification of one or several (multiple selection) attributes of elements of one or several
DFB instances. To do this, you must:

Step Action

1 Open the Function Blocks, page 1266 register tab in the data editor.

2 Open the DFB instance(s) to modify.

3 Select the elements for which you want to modify the attributes (by pressing Shift if the multiple
selections are adjacent or Ctrl if the multiple selections are non-adjacent).

4 Right-click on one of the elements that you just selected.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

5 Activate the Properties command.

Result: The related dialog box is opened.

6 Modify the attribute value and confirm with Enter.

Result: The new attribute is assigned to the selected elements.

33003101.26 1275
 User's Function Blocks

Authorized DFB Instance Modifications

At a Glance
The modifications possible on a DFB instance (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) are defined by the access rights authorized
by your user profile, page 1262.

Authorized DFB instance modifications

The following table shows the operations that can be carried out on the DFB instances in
offline mode:

Situation Possible Actions

Actions when there is no DFB instance selected Create a DFB instance,

Paste a DFB instance.

Actions when a DFB instance is selected Delete a DFB instance,

Change the name of a DFB instance,

Change the type of a DFB instance,

Change the comment for a DFB instance,

Duplicate a DFB instance.

Actions when several DFB instances are selected Delete DFB instances,

Change the type of the DFB instances,

Change the comment for the DFB instances,

Duplicate DFB instances.

Actions on all DFB instances Export all DFB instances,

Print locally all DFB instances.

1276 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

Searching / Animating DFB Instances

Overview
In online mode, you can display the location of instances using a DFB type, select one of the
instances, and animate it.

Searching a DFB Instance

To search DFB instances in a program perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 Select the corresponding DFB type and open one of the code sections.

2
Click the button in the programming language editor toolbar.

3
The DFB instances animation dialog box opens:

4 Select the DFB instance then click the Open Caller button.

5 This opens the DFB instance in your application program.

33003101.26 1277
 User's Function Blocks

Animating a DFB Instance

To animate a section of a DFB Instance perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 Select the corresponding DFB type and open one of the code sections.

2
Click the button in the programming language editor toolbar.

3 The DFB instances animation dialog box opens.

4 Double-click the DFB instance that you want to animate.

Or,

Select the DFB instance that you want to animate and click Ok.

A window showing the DFB sections opens:

In this box, choose the section code of the DFB that you want to animate and confirm with OK.

1278 33003101.26
User's Function Blocks

How to Create Nested DFBs

Aim of this Section
This subchapter describes the procedure for creating nested DFBs.

How to Create Nested DFBs

At a Glance
When creating nested DFBs (DFBs with DFB instances as private variables), you must not
exceed 15 nesting levels (including DDT variables).
You must also respect certain chronological rules. The following table describes the
procedure.

Procedure
The steps are as follows.

Step Action

1 Create the DFB type of the last level (n)

2 Create the DFB type of the level n-1

3 For this DFB type, create a private variable with a type matching the DFB type of level n

4 Create the DFB type of the level n-2

5 For this DFB type, create a private variable with a type matching the DFB type of level n-1

6 Repeat these actions without exceeding 15 levels

7 Create a first level DFB type instance, which you will use in your program.

33003101.26 1279
Project Configuration
What’s in This Part
Introduction to the configuration ............................................ 1281
Bus Editors.......................................................................... 1294
Modules editor..................................................................... 1340
General functionalities of the editor ....................................... 1377

Subject of this Part

This part describes how to configure Premium/Atrium, Quantum and Modicon M340 PLC
stations.
Its purpose is to guide the user in the configuration:
• of the PLC station,
• of the modules used in the station.
For Modicon M580 PLC stations, refer to chapter Configuring the CPU in Control Expert
(see Modicon M580, Hardware, Reference Manual).
For Momentum, refer to chapter Configuring the 171 CBU 78090, 171 CBU 98091 and 171
CBU 98091 Processors in Control Expert (see Momentum for EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
171 CBU 78090, 171 CBU 98090, 171 CBU 98091 Processors, User Guide).

1280 33003101.26
Introduction to the configuration

Introduction to the configuration

What’s in This Chapter
Proposed Services............................................................... 1281
Services offered in offline mode ............................................ 1286
Services Offered In Online Mode........................................... 1287
Access to project configuration ............................................. 1288

Aim of this section

This section gives a very general introduction to the functionalities offered by the
configuration editor and describes how to access the default configuration.

Proposed Services
Introduction
The configuration tool is used to:
• create\modify\save (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual) the elements involved in the configuration of the PLC
station,
• set up the application-specific modules comprising the station,
• diagnose the modules configured in the station,
• assess the current discharged from the voltages supplied by the power supply module
declared in the configuration,
• control the number of application-specific channels configured in relation to the
capacities of the processor declared in the configuration.
• assess the processor memory (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) usage.
The configuration may be performed before or after the programming of the project; this has
the advantage of being able to create generic projects without having to be concerned with
the configuration in the initial stage.
The various services are provided through 2 editors which are:
• the bus editor, which allows you to select and position the modules or devices on the
bus,

33003101.26 1281
 Introduction to the configuration

• the input/output module editor, which allows you to set up the modules or devices
present on the PLC station bus(es).
NOTE: When you configure the different elements of your project (specific application,
modules, processors, etc.) you may ensure that there are no conflicts between data
areas (overlap) as this may result in downgraded application functionality.

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Before performing a build ensure there is no overlapping of data between specific
applications within the same project. Check that the project operates correctly.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

At a Glance
From the project browser, you can view the hardware configuration of the PLC station by
opening the Configuration directory.
The hardware configuration of the station is displayed in a directory tree.

1282 33003101.26
Introduction to the configuration

Configuration example for a Modicon M340 station:

33003101.26 1283
 Introduction to the configuration

Configuration example for a Premium station:

1284 33003101.26
Introduction to the configuration

Configuration example for a Quantum station:

NOTE: you may note that each address (slot in the rack) is not necessarily occupied by
an input/output module, and that some modules may occupy 2 slots.

33003101.26 1285
 Introduction to the configuration

Services offered in offline mode

Introduction
These functional options are preset by the bus editor and the input/output module editor,
when the PLC is not connected to the programming terminal.

From the bus editor

The available services are:
• selection/replacement of the rack(s),
• selection/replacement of the power supply module,
• selection/replacement/set-up of the processor,
• selection/positioning/replacement of an application-specific module or a device,
• selection/replacement of a PCMCIA card in a module or in the processor,
• the figures for:
◦ the consumption of power provided by the power supply module,
◦ the number of application-specific channels configured,
◦ the memory usage of the PLC.

From the input/output modules editor

The available services are:
• the set-up of the input/output modules,
• the set-up of certain PCMCIA cards,
• the set-up of the application-specific functions.

1286 33003101.26
Introduction to the configuration

Services Offered In Online Mode

Introduction
These are configurable functional options when the PLC is connected to the programming
terminal.
Certain services are available or not according to whether the type of PLC connected is:
• Modicon M340,
• Premium/Atrium,
• Quantum.

Modicon M340 PLCs

Services offered by the configuration editor:

Service PLC in RUN PLC in STOP

mode mode
Adding/moving a module No No

Modification of configuration parameters Yes Yes

Modification of adjustment parameters Yes Yes

Display of errors Yes Yes

Display of status information Yes Yes

Premium\Atrium PLCs
Services offered by the configuration editor:

Service PLC in RUN PLC in STOP

mode mode
Adding/moving a module No No

Modification of configuration parameters Yes Yes

Modification of adjustment parameters Yes Yes

33003101.26 1287
 Introduction to the configuration

Service PLC in RUN PLC in STOP

mode mode
Display of errors Yes Yes

Display of status information Yes Yes

Quantum PLCs
All Quantum PLCs allow online modification. Services offered by the configuration are:

Service PLC in RUN PLC in STOP

mode mode
Automatic detection of the PLC configuration Yes Yes

Adding/removing a module Yes Yes

Modification of configuration parameters Yes Yes

Modification of adjustment parameters Yes Yes

Display of errors Yes Yes

Display of status information Yes Yes

NOTE: All modifications made in the bus editor are authorized in online mode. But in
order for these to be taken into account, you must generate and transfer the project to
the PLC.
NOTE: A feature CCOTF modification (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Change Configuration On The Fly, User Guide) has been developped for
Quantum and allows I/O configuration changes when the PLC is in RUN mode.

Access to project configuration

Introduction
When a project is created, a default configuration is created automatically according to the
choices imposed by the programming software.
These choices concern:
• the PLC family,
• the type of processor used in the station.

1288 33003101.26
Introduction to the configuration

These choices determine the power of the configuration, and the available functionalities
(number of inputs/outputs, field buses, languages used, types of data, etc.).
NOTE: The choice of PLC family is irreversible, only the type of processor may be
changed.

Procedure
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 From the project browser, open the Configuration directory.

2 For a Modicon M340 station:

From the PLC Bus directory or from the directory representing the station, via the contextual
menu select the Open command; the default configuration is displayed on the screen.

For a Premium station:

From the X-Bus directory or from the directory representing the station, via the contextual menu
select the Open command; the default configuration is displayed on the screen.

For a Quantum station:

From the directory representing the station, via the contextual menu select the Open command;
the default configuration is displayed on the screen.

3 In the configuration window, via the contextual menu select the Zoom in command to determine
the size of the station.

Click View > Zoom > Zoom to Fit to optimize the size of the station in relation to the size of the
window.

At this stage the configured physical elements constituting the station are:
• the rack,
• the power supply module (except for a Quantum station),
• the processor.

33003101.26 1289
 Introduction to the configuration

Configuration
For a Modicon M340 station:

1290 33003101.26
Introduction to the configuration

For a Premium station:

33003101.26 1291
 Introduction to the configuration

For a Quantum station:

1292 33003101.26
33003101.26 1293
 Bus Editors

Bus Editors
What’s in This Chapter
Rack configuration on local bus............................................. 1294
Configuration of the power supply modules ............................ 1300
Configuration of the processor .............................................. 1303
Configuration of the modules in the PLC station ..................... 1307
Configuration of devices on the field bus ................................ 1311
Consumption management................................................... 1329
Bus editors in online mode.................................................... 1335

Aim of this section

This chapter guides the user in the creation of the physical configuration of the PLC station.

Rack configuration on local bus

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the installation of the rack/s constituting the station.

Organization of the Racks

Introduction
A default rack is selected when the project is created. It has the following address:
• 0 for a PLC from the Premium/Atrium or Modicon M340 family,
• 1 for a PLC from the Quantum family.
This rack contains the type of processor selected when the project is created. This
processor can be replaced by a compatible processor.
Processors belonging to the Modicon M340 family.

1294 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Type of processors Number of racks managed

For all M340 PLC Version 01.00. 1 rack

For BMX P34 1000 Version 02.00 2 racks
For BMX P34 20X0 4 racks

Processors belonging to the Premium/Atrium family

Type of processors Numbers of racks managed

TSX 57 0244 1 rack

TSX 57 1x4 Up to 4 racks

TSX P57 204 Up to 16 racks

TSX PCI 57 204

TSX P57 254

TSX P57 2634

TSX P57 304

TSX P57 354

TSX P57 3634

TSX P57 454 / TSX PCI 57 354

TSX P57 4634

TSX P57 554

TSX P57 5634

TSX P57 6634

Processors belonging to the Quantum family

Type of processors Numbers of racks managed

140 CPU 311-10 Does not depend on the type of processor

140 CPU 434-12A/U
140 CPU 534-14A/U
140 CPU 651-50\60\60S
140 CPU 652-60
140 CPU 658-60
140 CPU 671-60\60S
140 CPU 672-60\61

33003101.26 1295
 Bus Editors

Type of processors Numbers of racks managed

140 CPU 678-61

Organization of a Modicon M340 Station on PLC Bus

Station composed of a single rack:

Station composed of several racks:

1296 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Organization of The Premium/Atrium Station on Bus X

Station composed of a single rack (standard rack):

Station composed of several racks (extendable racks) with different addresses:

33003101.26 1297
 Bus Editors

Station composed of several racks (extensible racks) with the same address:

Organization of a Quantum Station on Local Bus

Station composed of several racks:

Station composed of several racks (extendable racks) with different addresses:

1298 33003101.26
Bus Editors

How to configure the racks

Introduction
You may manipulate the racks of a PLC station:
• either by using the functions provided by the bus editor,
• or from the browser provided by the bus editor.

Functions offered by the bus editor

From the bus editor the following functionalites are offered:

If you want to then and

select a rack select the address of the rack

eight handles appear around the

selected rack.
Cut/Paste a rack select the rack and, from the select the destination address of
contextual menu, click Cut the rack and, using the contextual
menu, click Paste.

Copy/Paste a rack select the rack and, using the select the destination address of
contextual menu, click Copy the rack and, using the contextual
menu, click Paste.

add a rack select an empty address using the contextual menu, click
New Device,

or the extension symbol

replace a rack select the rack and, using the select the required rack from the
contextual menu, click Replace list offered.
Rack,

delete a rack select the rack using the contextual menu, click
Delete Rack,

empty a rack select the rack using the contextual menu, click
Clear Rack,

33003101.26 1299
 Bus Editors

Bus editor browser

The browser only allows for the addition of one rack in the PLC station.
Example for a Premium station:

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 From the browser, select the Rack directory and open it by clicking on +

2 select the required rack and, holding down right mouse button, move it to the required address
point; a dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify in the dialog box the required address and confirm with OK.

Configuration of the power supply modules

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the management of the power supply module(s) of the
PLC station.

1300 33003101.26
Bus Editors

How to configure the power supply modules

Introduction
When creating an application two boxes are produced according to whether you select a
Premium/Atrium station, a Quantum station or a Modicon M340 station:
• in a Modicon M340 or Premium station a power supply module is configured by default,
• in a Quantum station, there is no power supply module configured by default.

Rules for a Modicon M340 station

The power supply module must occupy the left-most position of the rack. This position does
not have an address.
There is only one power supply module per rack.

Rules for a Premium/Atrium station

The power supply module must occupy the left-most position of the rack. This position does
not have an address.
A double format power supply module also occupies the address position 0 (usually
occupied by the processor module), in this case the processor module must be configured
at the address position 1.
There is only one power supply module per rack.

Rules for a Quantum station

The power supply module can occupy any rack position. It has an address.
The power supply modules are single format.
Several power supply modules may be configured in a rack.

Functions offered by the bus editor

From the bus editor the following functionalites are offered:

33003101.26 1301
 Bus Editors

If you want to then and

Select a module click on it. Eight handles appear

around the module.
Copy/Paste the module select the module and, using the select the target position and, using
contextual menu, click Copy the contextual menu, click Paste.

Cut/Paste the module select the module and, using the select the target position and, using
contextual menu, click Cut the contextual menu, click Paste.

Add a module select the position in the rack select from the proposed list the
required and, using the contextual module required.
menu, click New Device

Move a module select the module holding down the left mouse
button, move it to the required
position.

Delete a module select the module using the contextual menu, click
Delete Module.

Bus editor browser

The browser is used to put or to add (for Quantum) a power supply module in the station.
Example of a Quantum station containing 2 power supply modules:

1302 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the browser, select the directory Supply, and display it by clicking on +.

2 Select the power supply module required and, holding down the left mouse button, move it to the
required position.

Configuration of the processor

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the selection and replacement of the PLC station
processor.

Choice and replacement of the processor

Selecting the processor
The choice of processor is made when the project is created, this choice is not irreversible.
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 From the welcome screen of the software, select the New command from the File menu.

2 Open the type of PLC required.

33003101.26 1303
 Bus Editors

Step Action

Example:

3 If you want to see all PLC versions, click Show all versions.

2 Select the processor.

4 Validate with OK.

Rules
For a Modicon M580 station:
• The processor occupies the slots 00 and 01.
• The processor is double format.
For a Modicon M340 station:
• The processor occupies the slot 0.
• The processor is single format.
For a Modicon Premium station:
• The processor occupies the slot 0, it may occupy slot 1 if a double format power supply
is configured.
• The processor is single format or double format (in this case it occupies two slots).

1304 33003101.26
Bus Editors

For a Modicon Quantum station:

• The processor can occupy any position in the rack.
• The processor is single format or double format (in this case it occupies two slots).
You cannot move or copy a processor in another rack. The processor cannot be deleted
from the rack, it can only be replaced.

Modicon M580 processor restriction

The following Modicon M580 processor version cannot be replaced:
• Upgrade: OS version < V2.00 cannot be replaced by an OS version ≥ V2.00.
• Downgrade: OS version ≥ V2.00 cannot be replaced by an OS version < V2.00.
If a processor replacement mentioned previously is needed, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1 Export, page 1677 the original application program and/or elements (I/O configuration, DFB type,
animation table, ...).

2 Create a new configuration with the new Modicon M580 processor OS version.

3 Import, page 1677 original application program and/or elements.

Replacement of the processor

The configuration editor helps you if you wish to replace the processor. A message is sent if
a replacement is not authorized.
The new processor has to belong to the same PLC family as the previously configured
processor.
If certain previously configured input/output modules are no longer supported by the new
processor, when the project is analyzed, error messages are displayed. You have to resolve
these incompatibilities.
NOTE: This operation is only possible in offline mode (PLC not connected).
You may proceed in accordance with two methods:
Method 1:

Step Action

1 From the bus editor, select the processor.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Replace Processor....

33003101.26 1305
 Bus Editors

Step Action

3 Select the required processor.

4 Validate with OK.

Method 2:

Step Action

1 From the bus editor, display the list of processors. To see all the processor versions, select
Show all versions.

Example:

2 Select the required processor.

3 Confirm your selection.

NOTE: When making a processor replacement, if an FFB used in the application is not
available for the selected processor, you have to remove it from the Application sections
and you have to remove it from the Application itself by the Tools > Types Library
Manager > Purge Unused Types option.

1306 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Configuration of the modules in the PLC station

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the management of the module(s) in the rack(s) of the
PLC station.

How to configure the modules in the PLC station

Introduction
You have two options for inserting the modules in the rack:
• either you use the functions provided by the bus editor,
• or you use the hardware catalog provided by the bus editor.

Positioning a module
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Use the mouse to select the position of the module to insert; eight handles appear around the module.

2 Using the contextual menu, click New Device.

33003101.26 1307
 Bus Editors

Step Action

3 Select the required application and module.

Example:

4 Click OK to confirm.

NOTE: The double format modules are shown on the list of modules available when the
slot preceding or following the selected slot is vacant.
In the case of a Premium or a Modicon M340, the position 0 may only be occupied by a
double format power supply or a processor.

Moving a module
A module may be moved:
• into the rack,
• into another rack if the station has several of them.
Carry out the following actions:

1308 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the required module.

2 Drag and drop the module into new position.

NOTE: If the module cannot be moved, this is indicated by the bus editor.
Rules:
The objects associated with the module are:
• deleted, then re-created automatically at the new address,
• replaced in:
◦ the program,
◦ the variable editor after user confirmation,
◦ the animation tables,
◦ the operator screens.
The symbols associated with the moved module objects are attached to the objects at the
new address.
The module that has been moved keeps all its parameters.
For a Modicon M340,Premium or Atrium station, if a discrete module with a RUN/STOP-
configured channel is moved, the RUN/STOP bit address remains unchanged. It is
necessary to ensure that the RUN/STOP input corresponds to a valid discrete input
address.
When the addresses of the module are used in an EF (e.g.: Send_REQ, Read_VAR,...),
these are not updated automatically.

Copy a module
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the required module.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Copy.

3 Use the mouse to select the target position, then using the contextual menu click Paste.

Rules:
The objects associated with the module are copied to the new address.

33003101.26 1309
 Bus Editors

The duplicated module keeps all its parameters.

The duplication of a module associated with an event (at least one module channel is
associated with an event) is not possible. An event may be associated with several
channels/modules at the same time.

Delete a module
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the required module.

2 Via the popup menu the select the Delete Module command.

Hardware catalog
Using the Hardware catalog, you can insert modules in the rack:

Carry out the following actions:

1310 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

1 From the Configuration directory in the project browser, select the subdirectory representing
the station.

Result: the bus editor and hardware catalog appear.

2 Select the directory of the required specific application in the hardware catalog, and expand it by
clicking on +.

3 Select the module, and, holding down the mouse button, move it to the required position on the
rack in the bus editor.

Configuration of devices on the field bus

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the management of devices on field buses managed by
the Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum stations.

Configuration of the CANopen Slaves for Modicon M340

Introduction
For Modicon M340 PLCs you can configure the CANopen bus with slaves (63 slaves
maximum). The configuration is completely carried out with Control Expert, the use of
another software is not necessary.

How to Configure the CANopen Slave

This table describes the procedure to configure the CANopen slave.

33003101.26 1311
 Bus Editors

Step Action

1 In the Control Expert Project Browser, fully expand the Configuration directory and then double-
click on CANopen .

Result: The CANopen window appears:

2 Select Edit > New device.

Result: The New Device window appears:

1312 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

3 Set the address slave in Topological Address.

Choose the slave device.

4 Click on OK to confirm the choice.

Result: The CANopen window appears with the new device selected:

5
On the project browser the CANopen bus appears with the slaves.

33003101.26 1313
 Bus Editors

Step Action

Other functions
You can also add, delete, move (see Modicon M340, CANopen, User Manual) a slave on
the bus.

How to access and create a Fipio field bus

Introduction
Premium PLCs offer a decentralized input/output architecture solution with the Fipio bus.
You can configure (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus,
Setup Manual) 127 devices.

1314 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Procedure
To access the Fipio field bus, perform the following actions:

Step Action

1 From the project navigator, deploy the Configuration directory.

Result: the following screen appears

2 Select the Fipio sub-directory and select the Opencommand using the contextual menu.

Result: the Fipio window appears

33003101.26 1315
 Bus Editors

Creating a Fipio bus

This operation is used to add, via the software, a device connected to the Fipio bus.

Step Action

1 Access the Fipio configuration screen:

2 Right-click on the logical address of the connection point, at the location where the module has to be
connected (available addresses from 1 to 62 and 64 to 127, addresses 0 and 63 being reserved by the
system).

Result: the New Device screen appears.

3 Enter the number of the connection point corresponding to the address.

By default, the Control Expert software offers the first free consecutive address.

4 In the Reference field, enter the type of device to connect to the bus.

1316 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

5 In the Communicator field, select the element type enabling communication on the Fipio bus.

For modules with built-in communicators, this window does not appear.

6 Confirm with Ok.

Result: the module is declared.

Other functions
You can also:
• add an extension module (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual) to the bus,
• delete, copy, paste (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio
Bus, Setup Manual) bus devices,
• change (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup
Manual) the Fipio communicator.

33003101.26 1317
 Bus Editors

Creating and Accessing RIO\DIO Field Buses

Introduction
Quantum PLCs offer a decentralized input/output architecture solution:
• RIO field bus networks are based on the S908 input/output decentralization network
technology. Up to 31 decentralized stations may be configured, with each station
capable of supporting up to 128 input/output words.
• DIO field bus networks are based on Modbus Plus technology. 32 subscribers may be
configured over 500 meters/1640 feet (receiving 64 subscribers over 2000 meters/6560
feet).

Creating a RIO Bus

The following table describes the procedure for creating a RIO bus from a communication
module:

Step Action

1 In the bus editor, select the slot where you wish to insert the communication module.

2 Select New Device in the contextual menu.

Result: The New Device window appears.

1318 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

3 Expand the Communication directory.

Result: The following window appears:

4 To create a RIO bus, select a 140 CRP 93x 00 module.

Result: The bus appears in the project browser:

Creating a DIO Bus

The following table describes the procedure for creating a DIO bus from a communication
module:

33003101.26 1319
 Bus Editors

Step Action

1 In the bus editor, select the slot where you wish to insert the communication module.

2 Select New Device in the contextual menu.

Result: The New Device window appears.

3 Expand the Communication directory.

Result: The following window appears:

4 To create a bus, select a 140 NOM 2XX 00 module.

Result: The module appears in the rack.

5 Double-click the 140 NOM 2XX 00 module’s Modbus Plus port.

Result: The bus configuration window appears.

1320 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

6 Check the box marked DIO Bus.

7 Confirm the configuration.

Result: The DIO bus appears in the project browser.

Creating a DIO Bus from the Processor

The following table describes the procedure for creating a DIO bus from the processor:

33003101.26 1321
 Bus Editors

Step Action

1 In the bus editor, double-click the processor’s Modbus Plus port.

2 Check the box marked DIO Bus.

3 Confirm the configuration.

Result: The DIO bus appears in the project browser:

Accessing a RIO or DIO Bus

To access a bus, carry out the following actions:

1322 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

1 In the project browser, open the Configuration directory.

Example:

2 Select the RIO bus or DIO bus subdirectory depending on the type of bus you want to open.
Next, select the Open command in the popup menu.

Result: The following window is displayed for the RIO bus:

Result: The following window is displayed for the DIO bus:

33003101.26 1323
 Bus Editors

Step Action

How to configure devices on the RIO/DIO bus

Introduction
You can configure devices on field buses using the functions provided by the bus editor.
You can configure modules in the devices on field buses according to two methods:
• either by using the functions provided by the bus editor,
• or from the hardware catalog provided by the bus editor.
You can also make copies, perform movements, or delete modules from a field bus device.

Configuration of a device
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 From the Configuration directory in the project browser, select the RIO Bus or DIO Bus
subdirectory.

2 Select Open in the contextual menu.

1324 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Step Action

3 Select the connection point and via the popup menu select the New Device command.

Result: The New Device window appears.

4 Select the required rack and validate with OK.

Result: The rack appears in the bus.

Configuration of a module in a device

Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1325
 Bus Editors

Step Action

1 Select the required rack (see procedure above: Configuration of a device).

2 To configure a module in the rack, select the module slot.

3 Select New Device in the contextual menu.

Result: The New Device window appears.

4 Select the module to be inserted.

Result: The module appears in the rack.

1326 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Hardware catalog
Using the hardware catalog, you can insert modules into a device on the field bus:

Proceed with the following steps:

Step Action

1 From the Configuration directory in the project browser, select the DIO Bus subdirectory.

Result: The field bus editor and hardware catalog appear.

2 Select the directory of the required specific application in the hardware catalog, and expand it by
clicking on +.

3 Select the module, and, holding down the mouse button, move it to the required position on the
rack in the bus editor.

Copy a module
Proceed with the following steps:

33003101.26 1327
 Bus Editors

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the required module.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Copy.

3 With the mouse, select the target position, then via the popup menu select the Paste command

Rules:
The duplicated module keeps all its parameters.
The duplication of a module associated with an event (at least one module channel is
associated with an event) is not possible. An event may be associated with several
channels/modules at the same time.

Moving a module
A module may be moved:
• into the rack,
• into another rack if the station has several of them.
Proceed with the following steps:

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the required module.

2 Drag and drop the module into new position.

NOTE: If the module cannot be moved, this is indicated by the bus editor.
Rules:
The objects associated with the module are:
• deleted, then re-created automatically at the new address,
• replaced in:
◦ the program,
◦ the variable editor after user confirmation,
◦ the animation tables,
◦ The operator screens.
The symbols associated with the moved module objects are attached to the objects at the
new address.
The module that has been moved keeps all its parameters.

1328 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Deleting a module
Proceed with the following steps:

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the required module.

2 Via the popup menu, select the Delete Module command.

Consumption management
Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user during the selection of modules so as not to exceed the
limits:
• for consuming power,
• for consuming application-specific channels.

Power consumption budget

At a Glance
A power consumption budget is made for:
• the rack power supply module,
• each module (processor, input/output module) depending on the rack power supply
module.
This budget is presented in the form of a bar chart where each color has a particular
significance. For each voltage, it indicates:
• the current power flow rate: green,
• the quantity of power still available: white,
• a power overload: red, when an excess occurs, a message is displayed.
• the total power (same color code).

33003101.26 1329
 Bus Editors

Power supply module budget

This consumption budget shows the amount of power discharged by the power supply for
each voltage it supplies, as well as the total power.
When you add or remove a module, the budget is adjusted on opening the Power Supply
and IO Budget window.
NOTE: The Power Supply and IO Budget window must be closed to be able to delete or
add a module.
How to access a consumption budget:

Steps Action

1 With the mouse, select the power supply module.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Power Supply and IO Budget. The bar chart is displayed.

3 Select the Power Supply tab.

1330 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Budget:

NOTE: The ASY 800 24 V power consumption is always included in 24 VR (Internal

Rack Power) even if configured with an external power supply.

Budget of the other modules

This consumption budget shows the amount of power discharged in the module for each
voltage it uses, as well as the total power.
NOTE: The Power Supply and IO Budget window must be closed to be able to delete or
add a module.
How to access a consumption budget:

33003101.26 1331
 Bus Editors

Steps Action

1 With the mouse, select the module of your choice.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Power Supply and IO Budget. The bar chart is displayed.

3 Select the Power Supply tab.

Budget:

Budget on the number of application-specific channels

At a Glance
A budget on the number of application-specific channels used is made for:
• the processor module of the station

1332 33003101.26
Bus Editors

• each module (processor, adapter, I/O module) of the station

This budget is presented in the form of a bar chart where each color has a particular
significance, it indicates for each application:
• the number of application-specific channels configured: green,
• the number of application-specific channels still available: white,
• the excess application-specific channels (not managed by the processor): red, when an
excess occurs, a message is displayed.

Processor and adapter budget

This budget shows the number of channels configured by applications in the station.
When you add or remove a module, the budget is adjusted on opening the Power Supply
and IO Budget window.
NOTE: The Power Supply and IO Budget window must be closed to be able to delete
or add a module.
How to access the budget:

Steps Action

1 With the mouse, select the required processor or adapter.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Power Supply and IO Budget. The bar chart is displayed.

3 Select the I/O tab.

33003101.26 1333
 Bus Editors

Example of IO budget content:

Input/output modules budget

This budget shows the number of application-specific channels configured in the module.
NOTE: The Power Supply and IO Budget window must be closed to be able to delete
or add a module.
How to access the budget of the number of application-specific channels:

Steps Action

1 Using the mouse select the input/output module of your choice.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Power Supply and IO Budget. The bar chart is displayed.

3 Select the I/O tab.

1334 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Budget:

Bus editors in online mode

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in diagnosing problems linked to the PLC station
configuration.

33003101.26 1335
 Bus Editors

Online Information
Animation
The bus editor uses color animation to inform you about the status of a module on the bus.
The module's slot number in the rack appears in red if the module is:
• missing,
• detecting a fault condition,
• badly configured.
Modicon M340 PLCs

1336 33003101.26
Bus Editors

Premium PLCs:

Quantum PLCs:

If a fault has occurred on a rack module, the rack number appears in red.

33003101.26 1337
 Bus Editors

Automatic detection of the configuration

When connected to a Quantum station, the programming software is able to detect the
different modules that make up the configuration. This operation can be performed before
programming the application, or after the application has been programmed.

Procedure
The following table describes the procedure for detecting the different elements of a PLC
configuration.

Step Action

1 In online mode (PLC in Stop), open the configuration editor.

2 Select the rack.

3 From the Services menu, select Compare/IO-Sniffing....

Result: The following window opens.

4 Check the Slot box if you want:

• to add the module detected on initial configuration,
• to replace the configured module by the one detected.
If the detected module is identical to the configured module, you can keep this module by checking
the Slot box.

If you leave the Slot box unchecked, the module specified on initial configuration remains.

5 Validate the new configuration by clicking Sniff.

6 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Result: The new configuration appears in the configuration editor.

1338 33003101.26
33003101.26 1339
 Modules editor

Modules editor
What’s in This Chapter
Configuration of Modicon M340 processors ........................... 1340
Configuration of Premium processors .................................... 1353
Configuration of the Quantum processors .............................. 1363
Configuration of the input\output modules for a Premium
\Atrium, Quantum or Modicon M340 station............................ 1372

Aim of this section

This section guides the user in the configuration of the modules comprising a Premium/
Atrium, Quantum or Modicon M340 station.
For Modicon M580 PLC stations, refer to chapter Configuring the CPU in Control Expert
(see Modicon M580, Hardware, Reference Manual).
For Momentum, refer to chapter Configuring the 171 CBU 78090, 171 CBU 98090 and 171
CBU 98091 Processors in Control Expert (see Momentum for EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
171 CBU 78090, 171 CBU 98090, 171 CBU 98091 Processors, User Guide).

Configuration of Modicon M340 processors

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the configuration of processor modules for Modicon
M340 stations.

Configuration of Modicon M340 Processors

Access to the Configuration Screen
Proceed with the following steps:

1340 33003101.26
Modules editor

Step Action

1 Select the processor.

Example:

2 Using the contextual menu, click Open.

3 Select the Configuration tab.

Memory Management
The configuration screen differs, depending on the type of memory management to be used.
The option you select here must comply with the type of memory management you select for
the input and output modules, page 1219.
The following settings are possible:

If... Then...
Topological memory management is configured for you can only select Topological memory
the processor management for the discrete and analog modules.

Mixed topological and State RAM memory you can select either Topological or Mixed
management is configured for the processor topological and State RAM memory management
for the discrete and analog modules.

The memory management settings of the processor are compared with the memory
management settings of the modules during Analyze. If any inconsistencies are detected, a
appropriate message is displayed in the output window.

33003101.26 1341
 Modules editor

The type of memory management you selected for the processor is used as default setting
for the Memory Management parameter in the Memory tab for input / output configuration,
page 1218.
NOTE:
If you want to import a legacy LL984 Compact application which uses Modbus request to
communicate with an HMI, you have to use State RAM addressing to preserve the
Modbus exchange between PLC and HMI.
NOTE: If you use the fallback configuration in your hardware configuration, take care
that the fallback values can only be applied if the Topological option is checked.

Configuration of the Processor

NOTE: You can modify the parameters of this dialog box only in offline mode.
Configuration screen for topological memory management:

CAUTION
LOSS OF DATA ON APPLICATION TRANSFER
Do not press the RESET button on the power supply. Otherwise, %MWi is reset and initial
values are loaded.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

1342 33003101.26
Modules editor

Proceed with the following steps:

Step Action

1 If you wish, enable the Run/Stop input option, page 1346.

Do not enable this option if the associated discrete input is mapped in State RAM because this
inhibits the PLC start-up.

2 If you wish, enable the Memory protect option.

The protection is activated by an input bit. The protection level depends on the Firmware versions,
see detailed information, page 1346.

3 If you wish, enable the Automatic start in Run option, page 1347.

4 Confirm whether the internal words %MWi, page 1347 are to be initialized on cold start (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) triggered by
software (application download, initialize command, restore command, %S0 activation, cold start
button on the PLC screen) or not. By checking the box, the PLC writes the initial values to %MWI.

5 If you wish, enable the Cold Start Only option, page 1347.

6 Define the type of Memory Management:

• select the option Topological for topological addressing
• select the option Mixed topological and State RAM for a mixture of topological and defined
State RAM addressing

7 Proceed with address configuration for the 2 different addressing types as described in the
following separate descriptions.

NOTE: The State RAM address starts at address 0, but the first available address for
discrete and analog modules is %I1, %M1, %IW1, and %MW1.

Topological Addressing
Proceed with address configuration for topological addressing as follows:

Step Action

1 In the Size of global address fields of the dialog box define for the application (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) the number of internal bits
%M.
2 Define the number of internal words %MW.
3 Define the number of constants %KW.

The system bits and system words are fixed by the manufacturer.
M340 applications of version 6.0 and earlier are automatically configured with this address
configuration for topological addressing.

33003101.26 1343
 Modules editor

Mixed Topological and State RAM Addressing

Configuration screen for mixed topological and State RAM memory management:

For mixed topological and State RAM addressing, the following options are additionally
available in the configuration screen:

Option Value Description

Mem usage The value (expressed as a percentage and A bar graph displays the percentage of the
displayed on the scale bar) depends on the memory already in use.
memory usage of the Modicon M340
configuration.

%M-0x Enter the appropriate values. The values Size of the different memory areas.
depend on the configuration.
%MW-4x NOTE: The values for %IW and %MW
have to be divisible by 8.
%I-1x

%IW-3x
Viewer – Opens the State RAM Viewer tab, page 1349
which displays the allocation of used memory.

1344 33003101.26
Modules editor

NOTE: The State RAM address starts at address 0, but the first available address for
discrete and analog modules is %I1, %M1, %IW1, and %MW1.
NOTE: State RAM addresses are not checked during input. If any range overlapping is
detected or any address exceeds the range of the State RAM, an appropriate message
is displayed at the validation screen or during Analyze.
NOTE: With this type of memory management, all channels are associated to one task
(MAST or FAST).

Pre-set values
To select the:
• default values, press the Default values button,
• maximum values, press the Maximum values button,
Window displayed by pressing the Default values button:

Use of the command buttons:

33003101.26 1345
 Modules editor

Button Role
Unselect All Is used to invalidate all the default values posted on the right of the check boxes if they have
been selected.
Select All Is used to select all the default values posted on the right of the check boxes.

Cancel Is used to exit.

OK Is used to exit taking the values into account.

NOTE: With the Maximum values button, the window displayed is the same, only the
values on the right of the check boxes are different.

Input RUN/STOP
The input %Ir.m.c can be parameterized to switch the PLC to RUN/STOP mode in the
following way:
• %Ir.m.c to 1 -> the PLC switches to RUN (execution of the program),
• %Ir.m.c to 0 -> the PLC switches to STOP mode (stop program execution).
NOTE: A STOP command always takes priority over a RUN command. A STOP
command sent from a terminal or via the network has priority over the %Ir.m.c input.
An error on the RUN/STOP input causes a switch to STOP.
Do not enable this option if the associated discrete input is mapped in State RAM
because this inhibits the start-up of the PLC.

Memory protect
The input %Ir.m.c can be parameterized to protect the internal application ram and the
memory card in the following way:

• %Ir.m.c to 0 -> the internal application and the memory card are not protected,
• %Ir.m.c to 1 -> the internal application and the memory card are protected.
For Firmware versions < 2.60, the Memory Protect function prohibits the transfer of a project
into the PLC and modifications in online mode, but RUN/STOP commands are available.
For Firmware versions greater and equal to 2.60, the Memory Protect function prohibits the
transfer of a project into the PLC and modifications in online mode, for cybersecurity
improvement, the connection to the PLC is forbidden then the RUN/STOP command
are not available.

1346 33003101.26
Modules editor

NOTE: If the input is in error (Input Module not physically plugged, wrong wiring, input
not powered...), %Ir.m.c is considered at 1 (memory is protected). To remove this
protection in this configuration screen, the input should not be in error.

Automatic start in Run

The enabling of this option automatically changes the PLC to RUN mode at the time of a
cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).

Initialize %MWi
On a cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) or on download if you check the box (default state):
• the %MWi are handled like other global variables (initialized to 0 or initial value,
according to current application) in all cold start cases,
On cold start or on download if you uncheck the box:
• if %MW were previously saved in internal flash memory (using the %SW96 word) they are
restored from internal flash memory,
• if not,
◦ if cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual) is linked to a power-off or of a push on the reset button, the %MW
are initialized:
◦ if not, the current values of %MW are maintained.
NOTE: if the new (or restored) application has more %MW than the previous one, the
added %MW are set to 0 (non-zero initial values are not applied).

Cold Start Only

If checked, this option forces the cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) of the application, instead of the normal warm
start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).
By default, the Cold Start Only option is unchecked.
The Cold Start Only option is only supported for CPU with OS version V2.1 or later.
An application using this functionality is not:
• downloadable on a PLC with a previous version,

33003101.26 1347
 Modules editor

• executable on a PLC with a previous version,

• usable with Unity Pro V4.0 or earlier.
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
NOTE: The Cold Start Only check box is present only if the current selected PLC can
support it.

Memory Management
This area of the dialog box allows you to define the type of addressing (topological or mixed
addressing).
For mixed addressing it contains a bar graph indicating the size of the State RAM memory
used in your project in relation to the maximum memory size and a Viewer button opening
the State RAM memory viewer.

1348 33003101.26
Modules editor

State RAM Memory Viewer

The following screen displays the content of the State RAM memory areas of the M340
processor:

NOTE: The State RAM viewer is directly accessible via the menu:
• PLC > State Ram Viewer
Description of the screen zones

Zone Description

Table This table represents the mapping of the memory area selected with the Memory
Area selection buttons.

The occupied memory addresses are marked by dashes:

• blue: for module type objects
• red: for objects entered in the program
• green: for objects defined in the variable editor
The scroll bars can be used to access the entire memory area.

Modules, Variables These checkboxes are used to filter the information displayed in the table. If, for
and Language example, Modules is the only checkbox that is selected, only module-type
checkboxes information is displayed.

33003101.26 1349
 Modules editor

Zone Description

Address information By entering the object and its address in the Address fields and clicking on the Go
To button, you display directly the address in the table (without using the scroll bars).
This zone also has a display function; it displays the object and address of the box
selected in the table. For module-type objects, it also gives the topological address
of the module concerned.
Memory Area selection These buttons are used to select the memory area to display in the table:
buttons
• %M (0x) output bits and internal bits
• %I (1x) input bits
• %IW (3x) input words
• %MW (4x) output words and internal words

Size of Located Data in Case of State RAM

NOTE: To use State RAM configuration you need Modicon M340 firmware V2.4 or later.
The following table shows maximum and default size of located data in case of State RAM
configuration according to the type of processor.

Type of Address BMX P34 1000 Processor BMX P34 2000, 20102, 2020, 20302
Objects Processors
Maximum Size Default Size Maximum Size Default Size
output bits %M (0x) 32765 752 65530 1504
and internal
bits
input bits and %I (1x) 32765 752 65530 1504
internal bits
input words %IW (3x) 32765 256 65530 512
and internal
words
output words %MW (4x) 32765 256 65530 512
and internal
words

Impact of a Cold Start on %I and %IW Areas

After a Cold Start or %S0 setting, the %I and %IW areas are set to 0 and forcing state is
reset.

1350 33003101.26
Modules editor

CPU Modbus Server Uses %I and %IW Areas

• When the State RAM is configured in a CPU, the Modbus server access to %I area for
all input bits operations and to %IW area for all input words operations.
Base address %SW138 and %SW140 are not used in this case.
The first object address in a Modbus request (0000) corresponds to %I1 or %IW1.
• With Modicon M340 using firmware V2.4 or later, when the State RAM is not
configured, the Modbus server behaves as in firmware V2.3.
Base address for %M and %MW in system words %SW139 and %SW141 are used whether State
RAM is configured or not.

Protecting Located Data

Introduction
Before any action on the data memory protection, you must activate this feature in your
project settings.
In the Control Expert main window, click Tools > Project Setting > PLC embedded data.
Then select the Data memory protect box and click Apply.
The data memory protection feature is supported by M340 CPU with the firmware V3.30 or
later. For details, refer to chapter Data Memory Protection, page 140.
Procedure of Protecting Located Data
Follow the procedure below to define the located data to protect:

33003101.26 1351
 Modules editor

Step Action

1 In the Control Expert Project Browser, double-click PLC Bus to display the main rack. Then double-
click on the M580 CPU (but not on the Ethernet connectors) to view its properties.

2
Select the Data Protection tab:

3 Select the boxes to enable the data protection:

%M protect The protected area is always located at the end of the %M area. Only the starting
address of the protected area can be set. The end address of the protected area is not
configurable (grayed).

The end address of the protected area equals to n-1 where n is the number of
available %M defined by the PLC abilities and set in the Configuration tab.

If %M protect is selected, you can enter the starting address or the %M data to
protect. By default, the starting address is 0.

Unchecking the %M protection reset the starting address.

%MW The protected area is always located at the end of the %M area. Only the starting
protect address of the protected area can be set. The end address of the protected area is not
configurable (grayed).

The end address of the protected area equals to n-1 where n is the number of
available %MW defined by the PLC abilities and set in the Configuration tab.

If %MW protect is selected, you can enter the starting address or the %M data to
protect. By default, the starting address is 0.

Unchecking the %MW protection reset the starting address.

1352 33003101.26
Modules editor

Step Action

NOTE: Array variables which are mapped on a %MW range must be entirely
inside or entirely outside of the protected %MW range.

I/O protect If selected, all I/O objects (including DTM-objects) are protected.
NOTE: except state Ram objects.

%S, %SW If selected, all system bits and system words are protected.
protect

4
Select Edit > Validate (or click the toolbar button) to save the configuration.

Configuration of Premium processors

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the configuration of processor modules for Premium
stations.

Configuration of Premium\Atrium processors

Access to the configuration screen
Proceed with the following steps:

33003101.26 1353
 Modules editor

Step Action

1 Select the processor.

Example:

2 Using the contextual menu, click Open.

3 Select the Configuration tab.

1354 33003101.26
Modules editor

Configuration of the processor

Configuration Screen:

Proceed with the following steps:

Step Action

1 If you wish, enable the RUN/STOP input, page 1358.

2 If you wish, enable the Memory Protect.

The protection is activated by an input bit. It prohibits the transfer of a project into the PLC and
modifications in online mode, regardless of the communication channel. The Run and Stop
commands are authorized.
3 If you wish, enable the Automatic start in Run, page 1358.

4 Confirm whether the internal words %MWi, page 1358 are to be initialized (on cold restart, on
download, after the insert PCMCIA memory card) or not.

5 If you wish, enable the Cold Start Only, page 1359 feature.

33003101.26 1355
 Modules editor

Step Action

6 Define for the application: (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual)
• the number of internal bits %M,
• the number of internal words %MW,
• the number of constants %KW,
The bits and system words are fixed by the manufacturer.

7 The Memory cards field is completed according to the PCMCIA memory card selected, page
1360. The data storage area is only used by EFBs such as READ_U_PCMCIA and WRITE_U_
PCMCIA. The application area is used for the program. However, some parts of the program
(located and unlocated variables, FB instances) are always present in the CPU internal memory,
page 134.

Pre-set values
To select the:
• default values, press the Default values button,
• maximum values, press the Maximum values button,

1356 33003101.26
Modules editor

Window displayed by pressing the Default values button:

Use of the command buttons:

Button Role
Deselect All Is used to invalidate all the default values posted on the right of the check boxes if they have
been selected.
Select All Is used to select all the default values posted on the right of the check boxes.

Cancel Is used to exit.

OK Is used to exit taking the values into account.

33003101.26 1357
 Modules editor

NOTE: With the Maximum values button, the window displayed is the same, only the
values on the right of the check boxes are different.

RUN/STOP input
The input %Ir.m.c can be parameterized to switch the PLC to RUN/STOP mode in the
following way:
• %Ir.m.c to 1 -> the PLC switches to RUN (execution of the program),
• %Ir.m.cl to 0 -> the PLC switches to STOP mode (stop program execution).
NOTE: A STOP command by the input %Ir.m.c is priority compared to a RUN operation
by terminal or by network command.
An error on the RUN/STOP input causes a switch to STOP.

Memory protect
The input %Ir.m.c can be parameterized to protect the internal application ram and the
memory card in the following way:
• %Ir.m.c to 0 -> the internal application and the memory card are not protected,
• %Ir.m.c to 1 -> the internal application and the memory card are protected.
NOTE: If the input is in error, %Ir.m.c is considered at 1 (memory is protected). To
remove this protection in this configuration screen, the input should not be in error.

Automatic start in Run

The enabling of this option automatically changes the PLC to RUN mode at the time of a
cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).
Two types of start:
• in the absence of a PCMCIA memory card, the PLC starts on the contents of the
internal RAM of the processor,
• in the presence of a PCMCIA memory card it is its content which fixes the start.

Initialize %MWi
On cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual), on download or after the insert of PCMCIA memory card:

1358 33003101.26
Modules editor

Depending of the flag:

At the end of the transfer : On setting of %S0 :

==> The initial values are assigned to ==> The initial values are assigned to
the variables. the variables.
Not OS >= V2.3 NO NO
checked
OS < V2.3 YES NO
Checked OS >= V2.3 YES YES
OS < V2.3 YES YES

the %MWi values will be initialized to 0 or initial value even if the box is unchecked,
• if you change the %MW area on the field Size of global address fields,
• if after a power restoration, the OS detects that the contents of the internal RAM has not
been saved (PLC powered off and Back-up battery non-operational).

Cold Start Only

If checked, this option forces the cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) of the application, instead of the normal warm
start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).
By default, the Cold Start Only option is unchecked.
The Cold Start Only option is only supported since PLC V2.7.
An application using this functionality will not be:
• downloadable on a PLC with a previous version,
• executable on a PLC with a previous version,
• usable with Unity Pro V4.0 or lower.
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
NOTE: The Cold Start Only check box is present only if the current selected PLC can
support it.

33003101.26 1359
 Modules editor

Access to PCMCIA memory cards of Premium

processors
Introduction
This operation describes how to choose a PCMCIA memory card.

Selection of a PCMCIA card

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Access the rack configuration screen.

2 Select the PCMCIA location and from the popup menu execute the New/Replace Submodule...
command.

Example:

1360 33003101.26
Modules editor

Step Action

3 Select the PCMCIA family, and the card within the family.

4 Confirm with OK

The card is added to the directory tree of the processor:

To delete a PCMCIA memory card, select its location and from the popup menu execute the
Delete Submodule command.

Access to control loop configuration for Premium

processors
Instructions
Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1361
 Modules editor

Step Action

1 Access the rack configuration screen.

2 Select the location of the process control loops and from the popup menu execute the Open
Subobject command.

Example:

The following screen is displayed:

3 Configure the process control loops (see Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Process Control, User Manual).

1362 33003101.26
Modules editor

Configuration of the Quantum processors

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section guides the user in the configuration of the processor modules for the
Quantum stations.

Configuration of Quantum processors

Accessing the configuration screen
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Access the rack configuration screen.

2 Select the processor.

3 Using the contextual menu, click Open Module.

4 Select the Configuration tab.

33003101.26 1363
 Modules editor

Configuring the processor

The following figure shows an example of the Quantum processor configuration screen:

Description of the Configuration Screen:

Item Option Value Description

Cold Start Only x If you wish, enable the Cold Start Only, page
1365 feature.
Operating Mode On Automatic start in Run x Determines the operating condition during
Cold Start Cold Start
Initialize %MWi x

Memory Cards A: N/A Displays the configuration in the PCMCIA

Slots
B: N/A

Communication By default, the bandwidth The maximum data volume exchanged each
is 4x256 bytes, supported cycle between the NOE and CPU modules.
by the OS versions prior

1364 33003101.26
Modules editor

Item Option Value Description

to V2.80 for the CPU and

V4.60 for the NOE.
For Quantum processors: 4x256
• 140 CPU 311 10 4x1024
• 140 CPU 534 14
• 140 CPU 434 12
For Quantum processors: 4x256
• 140 CPU 651 50 4x1024
• 140 CPU 651 60
8x1024
• 140 CPU 652 60
• 140 CPU 670 60 12x1024
• 140 CPU 671 60
• 140 CPU 672 60
• 140 CPU 672 61
• 140 CPU 678 61
State RAM Mem usage 1. A bar displays percent of memory used.

%M-0x 2. Size of the different memory areas

%MW-4x 2. Note: The values for %IW and %MW have to be
divisible by 8.
%I-1x 2.
%IW-3x 2.
Viewer N/A Opens the State RAM Viewer tab, which
displays the allocation of used memory. (See
the illustration following.)

Configuration Online Online modification in x This check box allows you to:
Modification RUN or STOP • Add or delete discrete or analog
modules,
• Modify parameters
NOTE: These modifications can be done
in RUN.
1. The value (expressed as a percentage and displayed on the scale) depends on the memory usage of the Hot
Standby configuration.

2. Enter the appropriate values. All values depend on Hot Standby configuration.

Cold Start Only

If checked, this option forces the cold start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) of the application, instead of the normal warm

33003101.26 1365
 Modules editor

start (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference
Manual).
By default, the Cold Start Only option is unchecked.
The Cold Start Only option is only supported on High End PLC since V2.7.
An application using this functionality will not be:
• downloadable on a PLC with a previous version,
• executable on a PLC with a previous version,
• usable with Unity Pro V4.0 or lower.
Unity Pro is the former name of Control Expert for version 13.1 or earlier.
NOTE: The Cold Start Only check box is present only if the current selected PLC can
support it.

Automatic start in RUN

Enabling this option automatically changes the PLC to Run mode (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)on cold start.
Two types of start:
• in the absence of a PCMCIA memory card, the PLC starts on the contents of the
internal RAM of the processor,
• in the presence of a PCMCIA memory card it is its content which fixes the start.
With the Automatic start in RUN option enabled, the following events will trigger the run of
the application on cold start:
• Inserting the PCMCIA card when the PLC is powered
• Replacing the processor while powered
• Unintentional or careless use of the reset button
• Powering up a PLC with a defective battery after a power outage

WARNING
UNWANTED APPLICATION RUN ON PLC COLD START
To prevent the run of the application on cold start:
• use the STOP input (on Premium PLCs).
• use the switch on the front panel of the processor (for Quantum PLCs).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

1366 33003101.26
Modules editor

Initialize %MWi
On application download:
• if you check the box, the %MWi values will be re initialized or set to 0,
• if you uncheck the box, the %MWi values will set to 0.
On cold start or after inserting the PCMCIA memory card:
• if you check the box, the %MWi values will be re initialized or set to 0,
• if you uncheck the box, the %MWi values will retain their current value.

Communication
When the protocol under TCP/IP is used (OFS or Control Expert), it is possible to configure
the maximum volume of data that can be exchanged each cycle between the CPU and the
NOE modules using the Maximum Unity Data exchanged by Plc Scan option.
This functionality is only supported on CPU modules with OS version 2.80 or higher, and on
NOE modules with OS version 4.60 or higher.
The bandwidth set is valid between the CPU and all existing NOE modules. It is not possible
to set different bandwidths for each of the modules.
Increasing this bandwidth has an impact on the cycle time of the controller (2ms per kbytes
exchanged). This impact is proportional to the amount of data actually exchanged and not
the bandwidth configured. So, if the channel is set to the maximum, but not used, the impact
on cycle time will be negligible.

State RAM memory

The State RAM bar chart allows you to know the size of the State RAM memory used in
your project in relation to the maximum memory size.

33003101.26 1367
 Modules editor

State RAM memory Viewer

The following screen displays the content of the State RAM memory areas of the Quantum
processor:

NOTE: The state ram viewer can be directly accessible via the menu:
• PLC > State Ram Viewer
Description of the screen zones

Zone Description

Table This table represents the mapping of the memory area selected in the Memory Area field.

The occupied memory addresses are marked by dashes:

• blue: for module type objects
• red: for objects entered in the program
• green: for objects defined in the variable editor
The scroll bars can be used to access the entire memory area.

Modules, These check boxes are used to filter the information displayed in the table. If, for example,
Variables and 'module' is the only thing checked, only module-type information is displayed.
Language
checkboxes

1368 33003101.26
Modules editor

Zone Description

Address By entering the object and its address in the Address fields and clicking the Go to button,
information you display directly the address in the table (without using the scroll bars). This zone also
has a display function; it displays the object and address of the box selected in the table.
For module-type objects, it also gives the topological address of the module concerned.

Memory Area These buttons are used to select the memory area to display in the table:
selection buttons • %M (0x) output module bits and internal bits
• %I (1x) internal module bits
• %IW (3x) input/output register words and internal words
• %MW (4x) I/O module output words and internal words

Configuration Online Modification

On PLCs supporting this functionality, a check box is activated and appears in the CPU
Editor tab.
If the Online modification in RUN or STOP check box is selected, the user can do online
RUN modification like addition / deletion, and modification of the module parameters.

Configuration of Modbus ports on Quantum

Assignment of Modbus ports
The Modbus port configuration screen can be used to select the Modbus communication
parameters for 3 ports: ports No. 1, 2 and 3.
Port No. 1 is assigned:
• to the built-in Modbus port for 140 CPU 6•• processors
• to the first built-in Modbus port (MODBUS COMM1) for other Quantum processors
Port No. 2 is assigned:
• either to the second built-in port (MODBUS COMM2), for processors with 2 built-in ports
• or to one or several NOM modules.
Port No. 3 is assigned: to one or several NOM modules
Rule for assignment of ports 2 and 3 to NOM modules:
Starting with the lowest slot numbers:
• the first NOM module will be assigned to port 2,
• the second will be assigned to port 3,

33003101.26 1369
 Modules editor

• the third will be assigned to port 2,

• the fourth will be assigned to port 3,
• the fifth will be assigned to port 2,
• the sixth will be assigned to port 3.
Note: It is possible to change the assignment order of 2 of them by entering
their slot number in the Head Slot column (see table below).
Important:
The port parameters are only taken into account if the switches on the front panels of
Quantum 140 CPU 3••/4••/5•• processors (used with first built-in port MODBUS COMM1)
and of NOM modules are in the Mem position.

Access to the configuration editor

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the processor and then select the Open module command from the popup menu.

2 Select the Modbus Port tab.

Result: The following screen appears:

1370 33003101.26
Modules editor

Presentation of configuration parameters

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Choose the operating mode: Bridge Mode checkbox

2 Choose the transmission speed:

3 Choose the number of Stop bits:

4 Choose the parity:

5 Choose the Delay which corresponds to the minimum time tolerated between two frames, also
called delay between frames.

6 Choose the Modbus port slave address.

7 By default, if the Head Slot fields are left set to 0, the NOM modules observe the normal
assignment rule described above.

Entering the slot number of a NOM module assigns it to the corresponding port (the assignment
rule is no longer applied for this module but continues to apply to other modules).

33003101.26 1371
 Modules editor

Step Action

8 Choose the communication mode:

9 Choose the communication protocol:

Configuration of the input\output modules for a

Premium\Atrium, Quantum or Modicon M340
station
Subject of this Section
This section guides the user through the configuration procedure for input\output modules
dedicated to a Premium\Atrium, Quantum or Modicon M340 station.

Access to the Modicon, Premium or Atrium I/O module

configuration editor
Procedure
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the module to be configured.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Open Module.

1372 33003101.26
Modules editor

Configuration in offline mode

The configuration window is an editor from which you configure the module, some of your
entries are checked, and in some cases you are assisted.
To complete the various fields, refer to the application-specific manual corresponding
to the module in which you will find the procedure and information necessary for the
configuration.
Screen example for a discrete module:

Configuration in online mode

In online mode two additional tabs are accessible:
• The Debug tab, used to:
◦ display the current values of the module data,
◦ modify/force the data values,
◦ diagnose the faulty channels.
• The Fault tab, used to display errors occurring in the module.
NOTE: The content of these tabs is described in the "Debugging and adjustment"
chapter of the corresponding application-specific manuals.

33003101.26 1373
 Modules editor

Screen example for a counting module:

Access the Quantum input/output module configuration

editor
Instructions
Proceed with the following steps:

Step Action

1 With the mouse, select the module to be configured.

2 Using the contextual menu, click Open Module.

1374 33003101.26
Modules editor

Configuration in offline mode

The configuration window is an editor from which you configure the module, some of your
entries are checked, and in some cases you are assisted.
To complete the various fields, refer to the application-specific manual corresponding
to the module in which you will find the procedure and information necessary for the
configuration.
Screen example for a discrete module

Configuration in online mode

In online mode, for certain modules, two additional tabs are accessible:
• The Debug tab, used to:
◦ display the current values of the module data,
◦ modify/force the data values,
◦ diagnose the faulty channels.
• the Fault tab which is used to display errors occurring in the module.
NOTE: The content of these tabs is described in the corresponding application-specific
manuals.

33003101.26 1375
1376 33003101.26
General functionalities of the editor

General functionalities of the editor

What’s in This Chapter
Analysis of the configuration ................................................. 1377
Export\Import of the configuration.......................................... 1378
Printing the configuration ...................................................... 1378

Aim of this section

This section describes the general functions available in the configuration editor.

Analysis of the configuration

At a Glance
The configuration analysis is not a separate functionality, it is started during the global
analysis of the project.
The configuration analysis checks:
• that all the declared modules are compatible,
• that the maximum number of one type of module in the configuration is not exceeded,
• that the limits of the various types of inputs/outputs managed are not exceeded
• that all the inputs/outputs declared and used in the application are properly configured.

How to start the global analysis of the application

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the Build -> Analyse project command from the menu.

2 Check the result of the analysis in the information window at the bottom of the screen.

33003101.26 1377
 General functionalities of the editor

Export\Import of the configuration

Export
The description of the procedure is given in the section "Import/Export, page 1687".

Import
The description of the procedure is given in the section "Import/Export, page 1689".

Import SIS
This Import SIS command ensures the gateway with the SIS Automation software version
greater than or equal to Schneider Electric 3.0.
This import ensures the automatic generation of the configuration: racks, processor, input/
output modules... from the .XML file resulting from an export made by this tool.
The description of the procedure is given in the section "Import/Export, page 1689".

Printing the configuration

Introduction
The programming software allows you to generate and print the complete project
documentation file. You can choose to print the configuration alone from this file.
In the project documentation file, the configuration part is made up:
• of the bus editor,
• of the input/output module editor.

1378 33003101.26
General functionalities of the editor

The documentation file can be accessed from the project browser in the "Documentation"
directory.

How to print
A description of the procedure is given in the chapter on "Documentation, page 1651"

33003101.26 1379
1380 33003101.26
Debugging and adjustment
What’s in This Part
Debugging the program........................................................ 1382
Viewing and adjusting variables ............................................ 1460
Machine-Process Simulator .................................................. 1502

Subject of this Part

This part describes the debug and adjustment functions and tools offered by Control Expert:
application debug, variable adjustment, simulator, etc.

33003101.26 1381
 Debugging the program

Debugging the program

What’s in This Chapter
Safety precautions ............................................................... 1382
Program Animation .............................................................. 1389
Debugging in Ladder Language ............................................ 1405
Debugging in Textual Languages (Structured Text, Instruction
List) .................................................................................... 1413
Debugging in Function Block Diagram (FBD)
Language............................................................................ 1422
Debugging User Function Block (DFB) Instances ................... 1431
Debugging in Sequential Function Chart Language
(SFC).................................................................................. 1435
Information on Debugging .................................................... 1443
PLC debug screen ............................................................... 1448

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter guides the user through how to debug the program depending on the language
used in its component sections:
• Ladder language,
• textual languages (Structured Text or Instruction List),
• Function Block Diagram language,
• Sequential Function Chart language.

Safety precautions
Subject of this Section
This section presents the different safety precautions to respect when debugging a project
with Control Expert.

1382 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Modification in RUN
At a Glance
This functionality is used to modify the PLC program where its inputs/outputs control an
industrial process.

RUN Modification
Modifications in In RUN mode are immediately applied to the process.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED BEHAVIOUR OF APPLICATION
When using the in RUN modification function, ensure that the modifications will not have
adverse effects on the running process.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Switch to STOP of a PLC in Debug mode

At a Glance
You can switch a PLC to STOP using:
• the command PLC > STOP when running Control Expert
• the RUN/STOP input for Modicon M340, Modicon M580, and Premium/Atrium
• the switch on the front panel of the processor for Quantum (except 140 CPU 6••)
• The LCD and buttons for Quantum 140 CPU 6••

Precaution
In all the above cases, the STOP is only effective at the end of the MAST task cycle.

33003101.26 1383
 Debugging the program

WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
In Debug mode, check that neither any breakpoint nor the Step by Step mode are active
before switching the PLC to STOP.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

NOTE: When the PLC is in STOP, all tasks are in STOP. Check the behavior of the
corresponding Inputs/Outputs.

Setting a task to STOP

At a Glance
A task can be set to STOP in different ways:
• Use of a breakpoint or the Step by Step mode.
• Use of the PLC screen, page 1448 (PLC animation screen).

Precautions
ATTENTION: When a task is set to STOP, Inputs/Outputs behave differently to whena task
is deactivated, page 1385.
The behavior of outputs differs depending on the type of PLC:
• Modicon M580, M340 and Premium / Atrium: when a task is set to STOP, the
associated outputs automatically switch to the configured mode (fallback or maintain).
The outputs associated with the other tasks continue to be updated as normal.
• Quantum: when a task is set to STOP, the associated outputs continue to be updated
with the value that preceded the STOP action. The outputs associated with the other
tasks continue to be updated as normal.
NOTE: When a task is set to STOP with Quantum, the outputs continue to be updated
by the CPU. In two cases, this can lead to unforeseen behavior:
• when inputs are also updated by another task that is still in RUN
• when Inputs/Outputs are mapped in the same memory zone, and associated with
different tasks.

1384 33003101.26
Debugging the program

WARNING
UNEXPECTED OUTPUT BEHAVIOR - TASK STOP WITH QUANTUM
When a task is set to STOP with Quantum, ensure that no other running task is managing
the same outputs.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Task deactivation
At a Glance
A task can be deactivated in different ways:
• By using system bits (%S30 to %S35 (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System Bits
and Words, Reference Manual)).
• By using the PLC screen, page 1448 (PLC animation screen).

Precautions
ATTENTION: when a task is deactivated, Inputs/Outputs behave differently to whena task is
set to STOP., page 1384
The behavior of outputs differs depending on the type of PLC:

WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR - TASK DEACTIVATION
When deactivating a task, take into account the fact that Inputs and Outputs continue to
be active.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

33003101.26 1385
 Debugging the program

Deactivation of Inputs/Outputs
At a Glance
The inputs associated with a task can be deactivated using the system word %SW8 (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System Bits and Words, Reference Manual).
The outputs associated with a task can be deactivated using the system word %SW9 (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System Bits and Words, Reference Manual).

Precautions
NOTE: Deactivating the Inputs/Outputs does not deactivate the task, page 1385

WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR - OUTPUTS DEACTIVATION
Before deactivating an Output, take into account its deactivation mode (fallback or
maintain).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Before setting the %SW9 value to 1, ensure that the output behavior will remain
appropriate:
On Premium/Atrium:
Module outputs located on the X Bus automatically switch to the configured mode
(fallback or maintain). On the Fipio bus, certain devices do not manage fallback mode;
then only maintain mode is possible.
On Quantum:
All outputs, as well as the local or remote rack (RIO) are maintained in the state that
preceded the switch to 1 of the %SW9 bit corresponding to the task.
The Distributed Inputs/Outputs (DIO) are not assigned by the system word %SW9.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

1386 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Use of the Step by Step mode and Breakpoint

At a Glance
The use of the Breakpoint and Step by Step mode influence the PLC’s operating modes.
You must be careful when using them.

Precautions
In Debug mode, the use of a breakpoint (except for an SFC breakpoint, page 1435) or of the
Step by Step mode forces the task to STOP.

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Check the consequences on the behavior of the outputs when the task is set to STOP,
page 1384.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Unwanted disconnection in Debug mode for Premium

Precaution
If the connection is interrupted between the Control Expert programming software and the
Premium PLC, the breakpoint is automatically deleted. If the Premium PLC was stopped at
breakpoint level, it automatically switches to STOP after the disconnection Timeout.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
With Premium in debug mode, ensure that the consequences of a PLC Stop on the
application are acceptable.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

NOTE: When the PLC is in STOP, all tasks are in STOP. Check the behavior of the
corresponding Inputs/Outputs.

33003101.26 1387
 Debugging the program

Debug Screen Via a Fipway, Fipio or Uni-Telway Network

with a PCMCIA Card
Restriction
If you use debug screens to access a PLC via a Fipway network, a Fipio fieldbus or a Uni-
Telway bus with a PCMCIA card, you may, on certain modules, obtain a message explaining
that it is not possible to access debugging.
The solution is to connect directly to the PLC with the Uni-Telway, USB or XIP link
(depending on the configuration of the hardware used).

Behavior of Forced Variables between Modsoft/NxT/

Concept and Control Expert
Forced Variable Behavior

WARNING
UNEXPECTED VARIABLE BEHAVIOR
Check your forced variables and memory protection switch when shifting between
Modsoft/NxT/Concept and Control Expert.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

The behavior of forced variables has been changed between Modsoft/NxT/Concept and
Control Expert.
With Modsoft/NxT/Concept you cannot force variables (0x, 1X) with the Quantum CPU
memory protect switch in the ON position.
With Control Expert you can force variables (%M, %I, %Q) with the Quantum CPU memory
protect switch in the ON position.
When using a basic Quantum CPU, if the memory protect switch is in the OFF position,
some variables are forced and the application is saved in flash memory:
• with Modsoft/NxT/Concept, forced variables keep their state after a cold start,
• with Control Expert, forced variables lose their state after a cold start.

1388 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Warning Message when Forcing Variables

A warning message will display in Control Expert each time that variables are forced on the
following Quantum PLCs:
• 140 CPU 311 10
• 140 CPU 434 12A/U
• 140 CPU 534 14A/U
This warning message includes a "Do not warn me again" option so that, when checked, the
message will not be redisplayed during the current Control Expert session. Starting a new
session of Control Expert means that the option must be checked once more in order to no
longer see it when forcing a variable.

Program Animation
Subject of this Section
This section describes the animation used in the different language editors.

Introduction to animation
General
Program animation is possible if the project that has been opened using the software is
identical to the project in the PLC.
The two connection modes are as follows:
• integral online mode (projects identical),
• degraded online mode (projects different).
In integral online mode, as long as it is authorized for your user profile and the Use
Programming mode option is checked (Tools ->Options menu then Connection tab) you
can:
• debug the project (setting a breakpoint or a watchpoint),

33003101.26 1389
 Debugging the program

• modify the project, in this case:

◦ either you generate the project, in which case the modifications are automatically
transferred to the PLC and animation resumes,
◦ or you do not generate the project, in which case animation of the modified sections
is stopped.
NOTE: Modification and debugging of the project are not permitted in degraded mode,
or in integral online mode with the "Use monitoring mode" option checked ("Tools
->Options" menu then "Connection" tab).
NOTE: In Monitoring mode links between EFs are not animated.
Animation is managed section by section. You can stop it or restart it section by section.
NOTE: The screen is refreshed immediately after the execution of each section. As a
result, for variables which change very quickly it is possible that there may be
differences from time to time between what is displayed and the actual values in the
PLC.
NOTE: For all languages, the animation of strings is limited to 16 characters no matter

what the string size is. In order to animate more than 16 characters use the button
in the toolbar.

Specific Features of Animation

Two types of animation are available:
• standard animation, in which the variables of the active section are refreshed upon
completion of the master task (MAST),
• synchronized animation in which the variables of the active section are refreshed at
the same time as a program element (of the section) containing the Watchpoint (useful
if one of the variables is used in several program sections and you want to know its
value at a specific location)

1390 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Example of an animated section with Watchpoint:

Depending on which language editor is open, it may not be possible to view the name of the
variable at the same time as it content. The Tool tip function is provided to compensate for
this.
This is a help bubble which is displayed when you move the cursor over the variables. This
help bubble information is then displayed:
• the value of the variable if only its name is visible in the editor,
• the type, name, address and comment of the variable if only its value is visible in the
editor.

33003101.26 1391
 Debugging the program

Examples of help bubbles in an FBD editor and in a Structured Text editor

Starting and Stopping Animation

By default, the sections are animated. To stop the animation of a section click on the
button in the toolbar. To restart the animation, click the button a second time.

1392 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Section in textual languages (Structured Text or

Instruction List)
Animation colors
Animation of a Section in Structured Text language:

The background color of the editor is gray.

All text is shown in black.
All comments are shown in green.
Black color used in offline mode for variables and instructions is replaced.
Variables and instructions during animation are shown in the following colors:
• for Boolean variables:
◦ green if the variable is TRUE (1)
◦ red if the variable is FALSE (0)
• yellow for most types of variable

33003101.26 1393
 Debugging the program

NOTE: Data types other than Booleans, are animated in a display window and not in
the editor. However, it is possible to view their value in a help bubble (Tool tip) when you
position the mouse pointer over the value.
NOTE: Multi-dimension array variable are not animated in the language editors and are
not shown in yellow.

Section in a Ladder Diagram language

At a Glance
Animation of a section in Ladder Diagram language:

The background color of the editor is gray.

The colors used in offline mode for the various elements (instructions, variables, comments)
are replaced:
• for Boolean variables:
◦ green if the variable is TRUE (1),
◦ red if the variable is FALSE (0).
• yellow for numerical types of variable.
NOTE: Derived data (DDT) instances and function block (EFB\DFB) instances are
animated in a display window and not in the language editor. You can view type, name,
address and comment of a numerical variable (yellow) in a help bubble (Tool tip) when
you position the mouse pointer over the variable.

1394 33003101.26
Debugging the program

NOTE: In a LD section:
• the unconnected parameters of elementary functions are not animated,
• the unconnected parameters of function blocks are animated.
The result of textual expressions is also animated:
• in green and red for Boolean expressions,
• numerical expressions are replaced by their result, the associated help bubble (Tool tip)
displays type, name, address and comment of the expression.

Animations
There are 3 types of link:
• Boolean links between contacts and coils,
• Boolean links between function blocks,
• numerical links between function blocks.
Two sorts of animation are possible depending on the option selected:
• with animation of links for which:
◦ Boolean links between contacts and coils are shown in green or red depending on
whether the evaluation of the ladder upstream yields the value TRUE (1) or FALSE
(0),
◦ Boolean links between function blocks are shown in green or red depending on
whether the output parameter to which they are connected is TRUE (1) or FALSE
(0),
◦ numerical links between the function blocks are shown in black. They display the
value of the output parameters to which they are connected.
• without animation of links in which closed contacts and triggered coils are shown in
reverse video.
To select an animation, perform the following actions:

Step Action

1 From the menu, select the Tools->Project Settings... command.

Result: The Project Settings, page 548 window is displayed.

2 In the Code generation zone either:

• check the Generate with LD link animation box for animation of links,
• uncheck the Generate with LD link animation box to disable animation of links.
3 Confirm with OK

33003101.26 1395
 Debugging the program

Example:

NOTE: When switching from one option to the other the project must be regenerated
and reloaded into the PLC. Animation of links has an adverse effect on the performance
of the project in run.

1396 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Section in Function Block Diagram (FBD) language

At a Glance
Animation of a section in Function Block Diagram language:

The background color of the editor is gray.

The colors used in offline mode for the various elements (instructions, variables, comments)
are:
• for Boolean variables:
◦ green if the variable is TRUE (1),
◦ red if the variable is FALSE (0).
• yellow for numerical types of variable.
NOTE: Derived data (DDT) instances and function block (EFB\DFB) instances are
animated in a display window and not in the language editor. You can view type, name,
address and comment of a numerical variable (yellow) in a help bubble (Tool tip) when
you position the mouse pointer over the variable.
NOTE: In an FBD section:
• the unconnected parameters of elementary functions are not animated,
• the unconnected parameters of function blocks are animated.
The result of textual expressions is also animated:
• in green and red for Boolean expressions,

33003101.26 1397
 Debugging the program

• numerical expressions are replaced by their result, the associated help bubble (Tool tip)
displays type, name, address and comment of the expression.

Animating the Links

There are 2 types of link:
• Boolean links between function blocks,
• numerical links between function blocks.
These 2 types of links are animated in the following way:
• Boolean links between function blocks are shown in green or red depending on
whether the output parameters to which they are connected are TRUE (1) or FALSE (0),
• numerical links between the function blocks are shown in black. They display the value
of the output parameter to which they are connected.

1398 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Section in Sequential Function Chart language (SFC)

At a Glance
Animation of a section in Sequential Function Chart language:

The background color of the editor is gray.

The colors used for the different elements are:
• for steps:
◦ green if the step is active,
◦ white if the step is inactive,
◦ yellow if the activity time of the step is less than the minimum programmed time,
◦ pink if the activity time of the step is greater than the minimum programmed time.

33003101.26 1399
 Debugging the program

• for macro-steps:
◦ when a macro-step becomes active the upper half is shown in green,
◦ when the OUT step of the macro-step is active the whole of the macro-step is shown
in green,
◦ when the macro-step becomes inactive it is then shown in white.
• for transitions associated with a Boolean element or a simple Boolean expression:
◦ green if the element or the expression is TRUE
◦ red if the element or the expression is FALSE.
• for transitions associated with a section:
◦ black as long as the previous step remains inactive,
◦ green if the conditions in the section are TRUE,
◦ red if the conditions in the section are FALSE,
In online mode with the animation activated, you can modify the program and Generate the
project. In this case, the animation is not automatically restarted.

CAUTION
ANIMATION OF SFC EDITOR STOPPED
In online mode with the animation activated, after a modification of the program and build
changes, return to the animation by clicking on Services > Animation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Display of Prepositioned steps, after an on-line

modification
At a Glance
As part of the on-line modifications associated with a prepositioning of the SFC, Control
Expert behaves in a specific way when:

• An SFC section uses macro sections

• Sections are animated.
• A prepositioning is performed for this section and for the sections of the macro-steps.

1400 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Procedure
Procedure for obtaining the scenario that may cause a problem.

Step Action

1 Perform a modification in one of the sections.

Result:
• The animation of the section is stopped.
• The prepositionings of the SFC and its macro-sections are reset to zero.

2 Use the command Build > Build Changes to generate the modifications.
3 Use the command PLC > Transfer project to PLC to load the modifications in the PLC.
Result:
• The animation of the modified section is relaunched and displays the current state (the
prepositioning is reset to zero).
• The animation of the sections belonging to the modified section is not updated. In fact,
these still display the prepositionings despite the fact they have been deleted.

Solution:
Stop the animation of the sections concerned, then relaunch this animation again.

DFB instances (user function blocks)

At a Glance
A DFB instance may be made up of one section (IEC 1131-3) or several sections.
Animation of a DFB instance consists in animating a section of the instance written in one
of the programming languages.
The rules governing animation of the DFB sections are the same as for conventional
sections according to the language used such as:
• textual languages, page 1393,
• Ladder Diagram language, page 1394,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1397.
The animated variables are the variables belonging to the DFB instance that has a section
which is currently being animated, in other words:

33003101.26 1401
 Debugging the program

• the input, input\output, output parameters,

• the public variables,
• the private variables.
NOTE: in a DFB section, the unconnected parameters of function blocks are not
animated.

How to Animate a Section of a DFB

To go to the relevant section of a DFB instance, perform the following operations:

1402 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step Action

1 In the animated section of the program, select the DFB instance and from the contextual menu
execute the Refine command.

A window showing the DFB section(s) opens:

2 In this box, choose the section of the DFB that you wish to animate and confirm with OK.

Section in Structured Text:

3 If the DFB section which is currently animated is a nested instance and you wish to animate
one of its sections, restart the operation.

33003101.26 1403
 Debugging the program

Representation of forced variables

At a Glance
Animation of forced variables:

NOTE: Forcing only concerns located Boolean variables of EBOOL type.

NOTE: For Modicon M580 and M340 PLCs analog I/O variables can also be forced.
In animated mode, these variables are represented in the following way:
• framed by a green rectangle if the value is TRUE (1),
• framed by a red rectangle if the value is FALSE (0).
NOTE: Analog I/O variables don’t have any special representation when forced. (They
are not framed by rectangles)

Implementation
The table below describes the actions to be performed to force variables from a language
editor:

Step Action

1 Open a section.

2 From the Edit menu, select all variables using the Select all command or

Select a variable.
3 Select the Initialize Animation Table command from the Services menu.

Result: An animation table opens with the variable(s) selected in the section.

4 Click on Force in the animation table.

1404 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step Action

5 Select the variable to be forced in the animation table.

6

In the animation table click on one of the buttons alongside the desired value or
execute the Force to 0 or Force to 1 commands from the contextual menu.

Debugging in Ladder Language

Subject of this Section
This section introduces the different tools available and explains how to implement them to
debug the program. These tools are:
• the breakpoint,
• step by step execution,
• the watchpoint.

Inserting a breakpoint in Ladder Diagram language (LD)

At a Glance
A breakpoint can be used to stop the execution of the task at the point at which it was set.
During debugging it can be used:
• to examine the behavior of the code,
• to view the value of variables.
There is a single breakpoint at a given point in the project. This is not saved and is lost on
disconnection from the PLC.
It is implemented in online mode, regardless of whether the PLC is in Run or in Stop.
NOTE: It is not possible to set a breakpoint in an event task.

Element Used for Setting a Breakpoint

The program element which can be used to set a breakpoint is the rung or a Sub-Routine
(SR) or user function block (DFB) call within a rung.

33003101.26 1405
 Debugging the program

In other words, the following program section:

How to Insert a Breakpoint

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 For example, select a contact in the rung.

2 Set the breakpoint:

• by selecting the Debug->Set Breakpoint command from the menu,
• by selecting the Set Breakpoint command from the contextual menu,

• or by selecting the button in the debug toolbar.

1406 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Example:

NOTE: Inserting a new breakpoint automatically clears the old one.

From the menu, select the Debug->Show Breakpoint command to locate the breakpoint by
displaying the section where it has been set in the language editor.

How to Delete a Breakpoint

Either you can:
• select the Debug->Clear Breakpoint command from the menu,
• or select the button in the debug toolbar.
Erasing a breakpoint does not restart the task. To do this, you have to press .

33003101.26 1407
 Debugging the program

Step by step execution mode in Ladder Diagram

language (LD)
At a Glance
Step by step mode consists in executing the application program rung by rung. For rungs
containing sub-routine (SR) or user function block (DFB) calls, step by step can be written
into the code used to implement them.
This mode is launched by a breakpoint which will have been set in advance. It is used to
examine the behavior of the code, and the value of the variables.
It is implemented in online mode. The section executed in step by step mode stops the
corresponding task, and the links are no longer animated.
Three commands can be used for step by step mode. These are:
• the Step Into command,
◦ if the current element is a rung which does not contain an SR call or a DFB instance
call, this command executes the rung and moves onto the next rung,
◦ if the current element is a rung which does contain an SR call or a DFB instance call,
this command executes the start of the rung and moves to the first SR or DFB call.
◦ if the current element is an SR or DFB instance call, this command can be used to
step into the code and go to the first element.
• the Step Over command,
◦ if the current element is a rung, this command executes it in its entirety and moves
onto the next rung,
◦ if the current element is an SR or DFB instance call, this command executes it in its
entirety as if it were a straightforward element and moves onto the next element.
• the Step Out command.
◦ if the current element is part of the code of an SR or DFB instance, this command
can be used to execute all the elements of the SR or the DFB and to move onto the
next element after the SR or DFB call,
◦ if the current element is an SR call or a DFB instance call, this command executes
the remainder of the current rung in its entirety and moves onto the next rung,
◦ if the current element is a rung, this command executes the current section in its
entirety and moves onto the start of the next section.

1408 33003101.26
Debugging the program

From step by step mode, if you want to relaunch the execution of the task in order to return
to the breakpoint you set earlier, select the Debug->Go command from the menu, or click
on Go in the toolbar:

Step Into, Step Out and Step Over

Example:

33003101.26 1409
 Debugging the program

Description of step by step from the breakpoint reached :

Step Action

1 Clicking on the Step Into button moves execution of the program to the SR1 call.

2 or 2’ or 2’’ If you click on:

• Step Into (2) execution of the program moves onto %MW1:=0
• Step Out (2’) the rung is executed and execution of the program moves onto the next rung.
• Step Over (2’’) SR1 is executed and execution of the program moves on to call SR2.

3 Clicking on Step Out while in SR1 executes SR1 in its entirety and moves execution of the
program on to call SR2.

4 or 4’ or If you click on:

• Step Into (4) execution of the program moves onto %MW2:=0
Clicking on Step Into moves execution of the program onto %MW3:=5, and so on if you
want to use step by step in SR2.
• Step Out (4) the rung is executed and execution of the program moves onto the next rung,

5 Clicking on Step Out while in SR2 executes SR2 in its entirety and moves execution of the
program onto the next rung.

NOTE: When program execution is over an instruction, it will not yet have been
executed. It will be executed after a command is pressed.

Specific Case of Step Out

If you want to perform step by step section by section, execute the Step Out command
from the first element of each section.
NOTE: If the next section is an SFC section or a section implementing an action or a
transition (mandatory in the Mast task), this is skipped unless a language element has
a breakpoint.

Rule
In step by step mode the task manager will not detect a watchdog overflow for the task
currently being debugged. It will, however, detect infinite loops.

1410 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Inserting a Watchpoint in Ladder Diagram Language

At a Glance
When there is no watchpoint, the values of animated variables are displayed at the end of
MAST task processing.
The limitation of this mode of operation is that it does not permit the value of a variable at a
given point in the program to be known if this value is used in different sections.
The watchpoint is used to synchronize display of animated variables with execution of a
program element (rung) in order to know their exact value at this specific point in the
program.
Variables which are synchronous with the watchpoint must belong to the section in which
the watchpoint is set; display of other variables is synchronous with the end of the MAST
task.
These variables are displayed:
• in the section ladder editor,
• in the display window, page 1462,
• in a single animation table at a given moment when requested by the user.
NOTE: It is not possible to set a watchpoint in an event task.

Watchpoint Properties
These properties are:
• the watchpoint can be set only in online mode; if the connection is broken, the
watchpoint is lost as well,
• a single watchpoint is allowed at a given moment; the watchpoint is exclusive with the
breakpoint,
• display of animated variables is effective before execution of the rung on which the
watchpoint has been set,
• a counter is incremented each time the rung with the watchpoint is executed, up to a
maximum value of 9999, then reset to 0,
• modification of a section is not authorized if a watchpoint is set.

How to Insert a Watchpoint

Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1411
 Debugging the program

Step Action

1 For example, select a contact in the rung.

2 Set the watchpoint in one of the following ways:

• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Set Watchpoint,
• by selecting the following command from the contextual menu:
Set Watchpoint,

• or select the button in the toolbar.

Example:

NOTE: Inserting a new watchpoint automatically clears the old one.

How to Locate an Existing Watchpoint

Carry out the following actions:

1412 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step Action

1 Either:
• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Show Watchpoint,

• or select the button in the toolbar.

2 The part of the language editor containing the watchpoint is displayed.

How to Synchronize with an Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the animation table desired.

2 either you can:
• select the following command from the menu:
Debug->Synchronize Animation Table.

• or select the button in the toolbar.

How to Delete a Watchpoint

Either you can:
• select the Debug->Clear Watchpoint command from the menu,

• or select the button in the toolbar.

Debugging in Textual Languages (Structured Text,

Instruction List)
Subject of this Section
This section introduces the different tools available and explains how to implement them to
debug the program. These tools are:

33003101.26 1413
 Debugging the program

• the breakpoint,
• step by step execution,
• the watchpoint.

Insertion of a breakpoint in textual languages (Structured

Text or Instruction List)
At a Glance
A breakpoint can be used to stop the execution of the task at the point at which it was set.
During debugging it can be used:
• to examine the behavior of the code,
• to view the value of variables.
There is a single breakpoint at a given point in the project. This is not saved and is lost on
disconnection from the PLC.
It is implemented in online mode regardless of whether the PLC is in Run or in Stop.
NOTE: It is not possible to set a breakpoint in an event task.

Element Used for Setting a Breakpoint

The program element used to set a breakpoint is an instruction.
In other words, the following program section:
Line 1 (*Example*)
Line 2 IF(%MW10=14) THEN (*Test condition*)
Line 3 %MW45:=68; (*Execution if condition true*)
Line 4 ELSE
Line 5 %MW45:=24; (*Execution if condition false*)
Line 6 END_IF;
Line 7 %MW10:=12; DFB1_3(prms); %MW0:=%MW0+1;
Line 8
Lines 2, 3, 5 and 7 can hold a breakpoint.
Lines 1, 4, 6 and 8 cannot hold a breakpoint.
NOTE: On line 7 (several instructions), the breakpoint can be set on the first, second or
third instruction. The instruction with the breakpoint is framed.

1414 33003101.26
Debugging the program

How to Insert a Breakpoint

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the desired program element.

2 Set the breakpoint:

• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Set Breakpoint,

• or by selecting the button in the debug toolbar.

Example:

NOTE: Inserting a new breakpoint automatically clears the old one.

From the menu, select the Debug->Show Breakpoint command to locate the breakpoint by
displaying the section where it has been set in the language editor.

How to Delete a Breakpoint

Either you can:
• select the Debug->Clear Breakpoint command from the menu,

33003101.26 1415
 Debugging the program

• or select the button in the debug toolbar.

Erasing a breakpoint does not restart the task. To do this, you have to press .

Step by step execution mode in textual languages

(Structured Text or Instruction List)
At a Glance
Step by step mode consists in executing the application program instruction by
instruction. A line may contain several instructions.
This mode is launched by a breakpoint which will have been set in advance. It is used to
examine the behavior of the code, and the value of the variables.
It is implemented in online mode. The section executed in step by step mode stops the
corresponding task.
Three commands can be used for step by step mode. These are:
• the Step Into command,
◦ if the current element is an SR (sub-routine) or DFB (user function block) instance
call, this command can be used to step into the code and go to the first element of
the SR or DFB,
◦ if the current element is an instruction, this command executes it and moves onto
the next instruction.
• the Step Over command,
◦ if the current element is an SR or DFB instance call, this command executes it in its
entirety as if it were a straightforward element and moves onto the next instruction,
◦ if the current element is an instruction, this command executes it and moves onto
the next instruction.
• the Step Out command.
◦ if the current element is part of the code of an SR or DFB, this command can be
used to execute all the elements of the SR or the DFB and to move onto the next
element of the SR or DFB.
◦ if the current element is an instruction, this command executes the current section in
its entirety and moves onto the start of the next section.

1416 33003101.26
Debugging the program

From step by step mode, if you want to relaunch the execution of the task in order to return
to the breakpoint you set earlier, select the Debug->Go command from the menu, or click
on Go in the toolbar:

33003101.26 1417
 Debugging the program

Step Into, Step Out and Step Over

Example:

Description of step by step from the breakpoint reached :

Step Action

1 Clicking on the Step Into button moves execution of the program to the SR1 call.

2 or 2’ or 2’’ If you click on:

• Step Into (2) execution of the program moves onto %MW1:=0
• Step Out (2’) the section is executed and execution of the program moves onto the first
element of the next section.
• Step Over (2’’) SR1 is executed and execution of the program moves on to call SR2.

3 Clicking on Step Out while in SR1 executes SR1 in its entirety and moves execution of the
program on to call SR2.

1418 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step Action

4 or 4’ If you click on:

• Step Into (4) execution of the program moves onto %MW2:=0
Clicking on Step Into moves execution of the program onto %MW3:=5, and so on if you
want to use step by step in SR2.
• Step Over (4) SR2 is executed and execution of the program moves onto the next
instruction.
5 Clicking on Step Out while in SR2 executes SR2 in its entirety and moves execution of the
program onto the next instruction.

NOTE: When program execution is over an instruction, it will not yet have been
executed. It will be executed after a command is pressed.

Specific Case of Step Out

If you want to perform step by step section by section, execute the Step Out command
from the first element of each section.
NOTE: If the next section is an SFC section or a section implementing an action or a
transition (mandatory in the Mast task), this is skipped unless a language element has
a breakpoint.

Rule
In step by step mode the task manager will not detect a watchdog overflow for the task
currently being debugged. It will, however, detect infinite loops.

Insertion of a Watchpoint in Textual Languages

(Structured Text or Instruction List)
At a Glance
When there is no watchpoint, the values of animated variables are displayed at the end of
MAST task processing.
The limitation of this mode of operation is that it does not permit the value of a variable at a
given point in the program to be known if this value is used in different sections.
The watchpoint is used to synchronize display of animated variables with execution of a
program element (instruction) in order to know their exact value at this specific point in the
program.

33003101.26 1419
 Debugging the program

Variables which are synchronous with the watchpoint must belong to the section in which the
watchpoint is set; display of other variables is synchronous with the end of the MAST task.
These variables are displayed:
• in the section language editor,
• in the display window,
• in a single animation table at a given moment when requested by the user.
NOTE: It is not possible to set a watchpoint in an event task.
NOTE: Using a watchpoint degrades real-time performances due to increased
application overhead. It is not recommended to use a watchpoint in a code loop,
because the watchpoint would be called n times in a cycle and cause major overhead,
possibly triggering the task watchdog.

Watchpoint Properties
These properties are:
• the watchpoint can be set only in online mode; if the connection is broken, the
watchpoint is lost as well,
• a single watchpoint is allowed at a given moment; the watchpoint is exclusive with the
breakpoint,
• display of animated variables is effective before execution of the instruction on which
the watchpoint has been set,
• a counter is incremented each time the instruction with the watchpoint is executed, up
to a maximum value of 9999, then reset to 0,
• modification of a section is not authorized if a watchpoint is set.

How to Insert a Watchpoint

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the section, select the desired instruction.

2 Set the watchpoint in one of the following ways:

• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Set Watchpoint,
• by selecting the Set Watchpoint command from the contextual menu,

• or select the button in the toolbar.

1420 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Example:

NOTE: Inserting a new watchpoint automatically clears the old one.

How to Locate an Existing Watchpoint

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Either:
• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Show Watchpoint.

• or select the button in the toolbar.

2 The part of the language editor containing the watchpoint is displayed.

How to Synchronize with an Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1421
 Debugging the program

Step Action

1 Select the animation table desired.

2 either you can:
• select the following command from the menu:
Debug->Synchronize Animation Table.

• or select the button in the toolbar.

How to Delete a Watchpoint

Either you can:
• select the following command from the menu:
Debug->Clear Watchpoint,

• or select the button in the toolbar.

Debugging in Function Block Diagram (FBD)

Language
Subject of this Section
This section introduces the different tools available and explains how to implement them to
debug the program. These tools are:
• the breakpoint,
• step by step execution,
• the watchpoint.

Inserting a breakpoint in Function Block Diagram

language
At a Glance
A breakpoint can be used to stop the execution of the task at the point at which it was set.

1422 33003101.26
Debugging the program

During debugging it can be used:

• to examine the behavior of the code,
• to view the value of variables.
There is a single breakpoint at a given point in the project. This is not saved and is lost on
disconnection from the PLC.
It is implemented in online mode regardless of whether the PLC is in Run or in Stop.
NOTE: It is not possible to set a breakpoint in an event task.

Element Used for Setting a Breakpoint

The program element used to set a breakpoint is the function block.
In other words, the following program section:

The breakpoint can only be set on 1 block at a time. The number in brackets over the block
corresponds to the order of execution.

How to Insert a Breakpoint

Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1423
 Debugging the program

Step Action

1 Select the desired program element.

2 Set the breakpoint:

• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Set Breakpoint,
• by selecting the following command from the contextual menu:
Set Breakpoint,

• or by selecting the button in the debug toolbar.

Example:

NOTE: Inserting a new breakpoint automatically clears the old one.

From the menu, select the Debug->Show Breakpoint command to locate the breakpoint by
displaying the section where it has been set in the language editor.

1424 33003101.26
Debugging the program

How to Delete a Breakpoint

Either you can:
• select the following command from the menu:
Debug->Clear Breakpoint,
• or select the button in the debug toolbar.
Erasing a breakpoint does not restart the task. To do this, you have to press .

Step by step execution mode in Function Block Diagram

language (FBD)
At a Glance
Step by step mode consists in executing the application program function block by
function block.
This mode is launched by a breakpoint which will have been set in advance. It is used to
examine the behavior of the code, and the value of the variables.
It is implemented in online mode. The section executed in step by step mode stops the
corresponding task.
Three commands can be used for step by step mode. These are: :
• the Step Into command,
◦ if the current element is an SR (sub-routine) or DFB (user function block) instance
call, this command can be used to step into the code and go to the first element of
the SR or DFB,
◦ if the current element is a function block, this command executes it and moves onto
the next function block.
• the Step Over command,
◦ if the current element is an SR or DFB instance call, this command executes it in its
entirety as if it were a straightforward element and moves onto the next function
block,
◦ if the current element is a function block, this command executes it and moves onto
the next function block.

33003101.26 1425
 Debugging the program

• the Step Out command.

◦ if the current element is part of the code of an SR or DFB, this command can be
used to execute all the elements of the SR or the DFB and to move onto the next
element of the SR or DFB.
◦ if the current element is a function block, this command executes the current section
in its entirety and moves onto the start of the next section.
From step by step mode, if you want to relaunch the execution of the task in order to return
to the breakpoint you set earlier, select the Debug->Go command from the menu, or click
on Go in the toolbar:

1426 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step Into, Step Out and Step Over

Example:

Description of step by step from the breakpoint reached :

Step Action

1 Clicking on the Step Into button moves execution of the program to the SR1 call.

2 or 2’ or 2’’ If you click on:

• Step Into (2) execution of the program moves onto %MW1:=0
• Step Out (2’) the section is executed and execution of the program moves onto the first
element of the next section.

33003101.26 1427
 Debugging the program

Step Action

• Step Over (2’’) SR1 is executed and execution of the program moves on to call SR2.

3 Clicking on Step Out while in SR1 executes SR1 in its entirety and moves execution of the
program on to call SR2.

4 or 4’ If you click on:

• Step Into (4) execution of the program moves onto %MW2:=0
Clicking on Step Into moves execution of the program onto %MW3:=5, and so on if you
want to use step by step in SR2.
• Step Over (4) SR2 is executed and execution of the program moves onto the next function
block.
5 Clicking on Step Out while in SR2 executes SR2 in its entirety and moves execution of the
program onto the next function block.

NOTE: When program execution is over a function block, it will not yet have been
executed. It will be executed after a command is pressed.

Specific Case of Step Out

If you want to perform step by step section by section, execute the Step Out command
from the first element of each section.
NOTE: If the next section is an SFC section or a section implementing an action or a
transition (mandatory in the Mast task), this is skipped unless a language element has
a breakpoint.

Rule
In step by step mode the task manager will not detect a watchdog overflow for the task
currently being debugged. It will, however, detect infinite loops.

Inserting a watchpoint in Function Block Diagram

language (FBD)
At a Glance
When there is no watchpoint, the values of animated variables are displayed at the end of
MAST task processing.

1428 33003101.26
Debugging the program

The limitation of this mode of operation is that it does not permit the value of a variable at a
given point in the program to be known if this value is used in different sections.
The watchpoint is used to synchronize display of animated variables with execution of a
program element (function block) in order to know their exact value at this specific point in
the program.
Variables which are synchronous with the watchpoint must belong to the section in which
the watchpoint is set; display of other variables is synchronous with the end of the MAST
task.
These variables are displayed:
• in the section language editor,
• in the display window,
• in a single animation table at a given moment when requested by the user.
NOTE: It is not possible to set a watchpoint in an event task.

Watchpoint Properties
These properties are:
• the watchpoint can be set only in online mode; if the connection is broken, the
watchpoint is lost as well,
• a single watchpoint is allowed at a given moment; the watchpoint is exclusive with the
breakpoint,
• display of animated variables is effective before execution of the block on which the
watchpoint has been set,
• a counter is incremented each time the function block with the watchpoint is executed,
up to a maximum value of 9999, then reset to 0,
• modification of a section is not authorized if a watchpoint is set.

How to Insert a Watchpoint

Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1429
 Debugging the program

Step Action

1 In the section, select the block desired.

2 Set the watchpoint in one of the following ways:

• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Set Watchpoint,
• by selecting the following command from the contextual menu:
Set Watchpoint,

• or select the button in the toolbar.

Example:

NOTE: Inserting a new watchpoint automatically clears the old one.

How to Locate an Existing Watchpoint

Carry out the following actions:

1430 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step Action

1 Either:
• by selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Show Watchpoint.

• or select the button in the toolbar.

2 The part of the language editor containing the watchpoint is displayed.

How to Synchronize with an Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the animation table desired.

2 either you can:
• select the following command from the menu:
Debug->Synchronize Animation Table.

• or select the button in the toolbar.

How to Delete a Watchpoint

Either you can:
• select the Debug->Clear Watchpoint command from the menu,

• or select the button in the toolbar.

Debugging User Function Block (DFB) Instances

Subject of this Section
This section introduces the different tools available and explains how to implement them to
debug the DFB instances of the program. These tools are:
• the breakpoint,

33003101.26 1431
 Debugging the program

• step by step execution,

• the watchpoint.

Inserting a breakpoint in a DFB instance (user function

block)
At a Glance
A breakpoint can be used to stop the execution of the task which contains the DFB
instance in which it has been set.
During debugging it can be used:
• to examine the behavior of the code,
• to view the value of the variables and the input/output parameters of the instance.
There is a single breakpoint at a given point in the project. This is not saved and is lost on
disconnection from the PLC.
It is implemented in online mode regardless of whether the PLC is in Run or in Stop.

Elements Used for Setting a Breakpoint

The program element used to set a breakpoint in a DFB section depends on the language in
which the section has been written:
• the rung and the nested DFB call for Ladder Diagram language, page 1405,
• the instruction for textual languages, page 1414,
• the Function Block for Function Block Diagram, page 1423 language.

How to Insert a Breakpoint

Access the DFB instance section, page 1402 from which you wish to insert a breakpoint.
Depending on the language used in the DFB section, proceed in the following manner:
• for Ladder Diagram language, page 1406,
• for textual languages, page 1415,
• for Function Block Diagram language, page 1415.
If several instances of a DFB are used in the application, the breakpoint is valid for all calls
as the DFB code is shared by all the instances.

1432 33003101.26
Debugging the program

The task corresponding to the first call (order of execution) is stopped when the breakpoint
in reached.
By relaunching execution using the Go button the task corresponding to the next call is
stopped and so on.
NOTE: Inserting a new breakpoint automatically clears the old one.

How to Locate an Existing Breakpoint

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the following command from the menu:

Debug->Show Breakpoint.

2 The part of the language editor containing the breakpoint is displayed.

How to Delete a Breakpoint

Either you can:
• select the following command from the menu:
Debug->Clear Breakpoint,
• or select the button in the debug toolbar.
Erasing a breakpoint does not restart the task. To do this, you have to press .

Step by step execution mode in a DFB instance (user

function block)
At a Glance
For a DFB section programmed in:
• Ladder Diagram language, page 1408,
• textual languages, page 1416,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1425.

33003101.26 1433
 Debugging the program

Step Into, Step Out and Step Over

Step by step functions are used in the same way for a section belonging to a DFB as for a
conventional section.
NOTE: a DFB section may contain a sub-routine (SR).
For a DFB section programmed in:
• Ladder Diagram language, page 1409,
• textual languages, page 1418,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1427.

DFB with Several Sections

A DFB may be made up of several sections.
The Step Out command can be used to move onto the instance following the DFB, and
when applied to the last section allows you to exit the instance.
When you want to quit a DFB instance perform as many Step Out commands as there are
sections. Program execution will go to the first element after the DFB instance call.

Rule
In step by step mode the task manager will not detect a watchdog overflow for the task
containing the DFB instance. It will, however, detect infinite loops.

Inserting a watchpoint in a user function block (DFB)

At a Glance
Access the DFB instance section , page 1402from which you wish to insert a watchpoint.
For a DFB section programmed in:
• ladder language, page 1411,
• textual languages, page 1419,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1428.

1434 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Debugging in Sequential Function Chart Language

(SFC)
Subject of this Section
This section introduces the different tools available and explains how to implement them to
debug the program. These tools are:
• the breakpoint,
• step by step execution,
• the watchpoint.

Inserting a breakpoint in Sequential Function Chart

language (SFC)
At a Glance
In contrast to other languages, a breakpoint in SFC does not stop execution of the task
corresponding to the point at which it has been set, but freezes the chart and
automatically activates mode "disable transitions"..
For this SFC section (section of the breakpoint), the PLC remains in "disable transitions"
mode until you quit this mode using the Animation panel tool.
In "disable transitions" mode, the background color of the editor is blue.
During debugging it can be used:
• to examine the behavior of the code,
• to view the value of variables.
In contrast to other languages, several breakpoints can be set at a given point in an SFC
section. They are not saved and are lost on disconnection from the PLC.
They are implemented in online mode, regardless of whether the PLC is in Run or in Stop.
NOTE: It is not possible to set a breakpoint in an event task.

33003101.26 1435
 Debugging the program

WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR - SFC BREAKPOINT
When using breakpoint in SFC, ensure that the task and its associated inputs/outputs
create an acceptable application processes behavior.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Power off the operating part of the system when using breakpoint in SFC.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Element Used for Setting a Breakpoint

From an SFC section the program element used to set a breakpoint is the step.

1436 33003101.26
Debugging the program

In other words, the following chart section:

From a section which contains the processing of a step or a transition the program
element used to set a breakpoint corresponds to the language used, i.e.:
• Ladder Diagram language, page 1405,
• Structured Text or Instruction List language, page 1414,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1423.

How to Insert a Breakpoint

From an SFC section:

Step Action

1 Select the desired step(s).

2 Set the breakpoint(s) by right-clicking the desired element and selecting the following command:

Animation > Insert/Remove Breakpoint.

33003101.26 1437
 Debugging the program

Example:

From a section corresponding to an action or a section corresponding to a transition

the procedures correspond to the language used, i.e.:
• Ladder Diagram language, page 1406,
• Structured Text or Instruction List language, page 1415,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1423.

How to Delete a Breakpoint from an SFC section

Select the breakpoint to be deleted, then select the Debug ->Clear Breakpoint command
from the menu.
NOTE: When you initiate a StepOver or StepOut in a chart, invisible breakpoints are
created by SFC editor in the same time than the breakpoint created. In order to remove
all these breakpoints use the function ClearAllBreakpoints, otherwise the chart
execution will stop via DisableTransition check button.

1438 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step by step execution mode in Sequential Function

Chart language (SFC)
At a Glance
In SFC language you have 2 debugging levels:
• from an SFC section (chart),
• from a section implementing an action or a transition, where this section is written in
one of the following languages (Ladder, Structured Text, Function Block Diagram,
Instruction List).

Sections Implementing Actions or Transitions

In this type of section, debugging behaves in practically the same way as debugging for a
conventional section using one of the following languages:
• Ladder Diagram language, page 1408,
• textual languages, page 1416,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1425.
The specific characteristics of this type of debug are:
• it is impossible to enter a section of an action or a transition in step by step mode when
coming from another section, unless this section contains a breakpoint,
• when you are at the end of a section of an action or a transition it is impossible to exit it
in step by step mode by using the commands Step Into, Step Over, Step Out, Go is
the only command available.

SFC Sections (Chart)

Step by step mode consists in executing the application program step by step.
NOTE: When program execution is over a step, it will not yet have been executed. It will
be executed after a command is pressed.
This mode is launched by a breakpoint which will have been set in advance (on a step). It is
used to examine the behavior of the code, and the value of the variables.
It is implemented in online mode. The section executed in step by step mode in contrast to
sections in languages other than SFC does not stop the task, but freezes the chart.
The debugging of an SFC section (chart) is checked using the Animation Panel (Services-
>Animation Panel). Each SFC section (chart) has its own tool.

33003101.26 1439
 Debugging the program

WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The SFC Animation Panel is provided for experienced users only. Changes made via the
SFC Animation Panel must be well understood by the user.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Animation Panel Tool

To launch the tool, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Open the editor for the SFC section (chart) that you wish to debug.

2 Select the following command from the menu:

Services->Animation Panel->Show Animation Panel

Result: The tool is displayed.

1440 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Animation Panel tool:

Description of different commands:

SFC section name

Parameters zone
Initialize Chart For an SFC section which is currently being executed, do the following in order:

1) check this box to deactivate the active step(s),

2) uncheck this box to activate the initial steps to start the section.

Disable Time Check Check this box to disable checking of step execution times.

33003101.26 1441
 Debugging the program

SFC section name

Disable Transitions Check this box to make it possible to freeze the chart in any transition state. This
box must be checked to be able to use the following buttons: Step Trans
Dependent, Step Over and Step Out

Disable Actions Check this box to stop processing of steps.

Operation zone

Clear Chart Deactivates the active step(s).

Reset Time Errors Resets information on step activity time overruns.

Step Unconditional Move onto the next step without acknowledgment of the transition condition.
Doesn't work if you have a Delay Time (SFCSTEP_TIME.delay) set in the
properties of the STEP.

Step Trans Dependent Moves to the successor step if the transition condition and the step delay time
(SFCSTEP_TIME.delay) are fulfilled. If the transition condition is not right, the
chart is unfreezed and waits for the right transition's condition. With the
activation of the successor step the chart returns to the freeze state.

Step Over This command moves to the successor step if the transition condition and the
step delay time (SFCSTEP_TIME.delay) are fulfilled. If the transition condition is
not right, the chart is unfreezed and waits for the right transition's condition in
order to move onto the next step or steps (in the event of divergence). With the
activation of the successor step the chart returns to the freeze state.

Step Out Only available if the current element is a step belonging to a macro-step section.
This command unfreezes the chart (master and macro belong logically to the
same chart) in order to work normally over the end of the macro. The process
waits for the valid transition condition(s) of the chart in order to move onto the
successor step or steps (in the event of divergence). With the activation of the
(first) successor step the chart returns to the freeze state.

Set Break On Selection Sets a breakpoint for all selected steps.

Set Pre Pos On Selection Sets the pre-positioning markers on the steps and macro-steps of the SFC
section.
Set Pre-positioned Activates all the steps and macro-steps pre-positioned with the Set Pre Pos On
Selection command.
Select active steps Selects the active steps.

Set Selected Steps Activates the selected steps and macro-steps.

Reset Selected Steps Deactivates the selected steps and macro-steps.

For Multi-Token operating mode only (Project Settings > Allow multiple
token).

Clear All Breakpoints Deactivates all the breakpoints.

Clear All Pre-Positions Deactivates all the steps and macro-steps pre-positioned.

NOTE: The Step Into command is not available when debugging an SFC section
(chart).

1442 33003101.26
Debugging the program

SFC save and restore

The SFC_RESTORE function block can be used to restart all SFC charts of an application
with a given set of active steps at a state, saved before a CPU failure.
In a recovery situation it is possible to set a group of steps that represent a given state in the
process and to continue at that point.
(See SFC_RESTORE: SFC Save and Restore (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System,
Block Library) in the System Library).

Inserting a watchpoint in Sequential Function Chart

language
At a Glance
SFC sections do not support watchpoints.
However, a watchpoint can be set on an element in the section that contains processing
for a step or transition; in this case, the procedures correspond to those described for the
language used:
• ladder language, page 1411,
• textual languages, page 1419,
• Function Block Diagram language, page 1428.

Information on Debugging
Subject of this Section
This section describes how to access additional information during debugging.

33003101.26 1443
 Debugging the program

Tracing task execution

At a Glance
Tracing task execution consists of knowing at a given moment (breakpoint reached, step by
step mode in progress) what the task execution path is, that is to say, what subroutines
(SR), user function blocks (DFB) have been called and what the nesting level is.
For this purpose, a tool is available for your use: the LIFO stack (Last In First Out) which
memorizes all nestings so that you can monitor task execution.

How to Access a Program Element from the Stack

Carry out the following actions:

1444 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Step Action

1 From a breakpoint or a step-by-step mode in progress either by:

• selecting the following command from the menu:
Debug->Call Stack,

• or by pressing the button in the debug toolbar.

Example: Command_blocking section having called a Blocking_valve (valve type) DFB
instance in the Command section:

The line number is used for Structured Text and Instruction List editors; for Ladder and FBD
editors, this is the number of the rung or the block that is displayed.

2 If you select:
• the Command section and you click on Show, the editor positions itself on the step in
progress in the DFB instance; if this is a breakpoint, it is indicated in the left margin by

,
• the Command_blocking section and you click on Show, the editor is positioned on the

DFB instance call that is not the step in progress: it is indicated by .

Clicking the Close button closes the window representing the stack: the green triangle
disappears following:
• the resumption of step by step,
• a new call to display the contents of the stack,

• a restart of the task .

33003101.26 1445
 Debugging the program

Task states during debugging

At a Glance
When debugging a project, it can be useful to determine the current state of tasks it
contains. Apart from the master task (MAST), these tasks can include:
• the FAST task,
• the auxiliary tasks (AUX0, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3).
The task state can be:
• HALT task stopped following the PLC's switch to "Halt",
• RUN task currently being executed,
• BKPT task in step by step mode,
• STOP task stopped.

How to Determine the Project's Task State

To determine the current task state, select the Debug->Task State command from the
menu.
Example with a single task (MAST) in step by step mode:

Disconnection during the debug phase

Caused by the User
For a variety of reasons, you can decide to switch from online mode to offline mode even if
a breakpoint has been set in a section or if you are in step by step mode.

1446 33003101.26
Debugging the program

In this case, you must confirm your choice:

Following confirmation, all application tasks are stopped.

Caused by a fault
When a breakpoint is set in a task section, or when you are in step by step mode, if a
hardware or communication problem is detected, the PLC switches automatically from
online mode to offline mode and the breakpoint is lost without a request for confirmation.

Operation of the alarm relay in Debug mode

Description
The alarm relay (or safety output) changes status on every step or breakpoint it meets.
At the end of each cycle, the outputs are refreshed.

CAUTION
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR - ALARM RELAY
Set the bit %S9 to 1 in order to force outputs to fallback mode to stop alarm relay changes
on every step or breakpoint.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

33003101.26 1447
 Debugging the program

PLC debug screen

Aim of this sub-section
This sub-section shows the debug screen associated with the PLC processor.

Overview of the CPU debugging screen

Role
This screen is composed of 3 tabs:
• Task, statuses and execution commands of the program tasks
• Real-time Clock, adjusting the real-time clock
• Information, information on the project and the PLC processor
PLC debug screens

NOTE: In the Minimum duration time , Current duration time, and Maximum duration
time fields, the values between parenthesis corespond to the Minimum, Current, and
Maximum overhead time (see Modicon M340, Processors, Setup Manual).

1448 33003101.26
Debugging the program

How to access the PLC debug screen

The CPU debug screen is only accessible in online mode using the Tools > PLC Screen
command or by double clicking on the PLC processor in the configuration editor and
choosing the Animation tab.
If the connection is interrupted, the screen remains displayed but is inactive.
To activate the commands or carry out the adjustments proposed in these tabs, you must
have appropriate user rights.

Contextual menu in PLC screen

The contextual menu in the PLC screen displays three options:
• Restore all, page 1450, restore task periods configured for all periodic tasks
• List of forced bits, display list of all forced bits
• Print Information, print data from the information tab
PLC debug screens and its associated contextual menu

NOTE: The Restore all option is only available when Task tab is active and Print
Information when the Information Tab is active. All the options available in the
contextual menu are also available in Services > Restore or Services > Restore all
commands.

33003101.26 1449
 Debugging the program

Description of the Task tab: Task checking field

At a Glance
This field gives you access to the display and settings of the task periods and the various
task execution commands.
Task checking field:

This field may be extended according to the tasks configured in the project: one line per
auxiliary task may be displayed in addition to those in the above screen.

Description
The following table describes the role of each of the screen columns.

Column Role
Programmed Value of the configured task period (for a periodic task).
Period
Adjusted In periodic operation, enables the task period to be adjusted. This setting is lost on a cold start.
Period The value entered in the configuration is then taken into account.

Red background color in a field of this column indicates an erroneous returned by the PLC.

It is possible to restore task periods configured for the selected task or for all the periodic tasks
with the Services > Restore or Services > Restore all commands.
Minimum Minimum duration of execution of the task, measured from the last cold restart or reinitialization
Duration using the Init Duration command.

Current Duration of the last task cycle.

Duration
Maximum Maximum duration of execution of the task, measured from the last cold restart or reinitialization
Duration using the Init Duration command.

Watchdog Value of the task watchdog. This value may not be modified.

Operating Operating mode of the task: RUN, STOP, HALT or BKPT (Breakpoint).
Mode
Cmd The RUN/STOP buttons associated with the tasks are used to switch to RUN or STOP.
Status • E (enabled): for active task (the system bits %S30 and %S31 are set at 1),
• D (disabled): for inactive task (the system bits %S30 and %S31 are set at 0).

1450 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Column Role
Activation The Enable/Disable buttons associated with the tasks are used to enable or disable a task.
Task
When a task is enabled, the code is scanned and executed. The inputs/outputs are updated.

When a task is disabled, the code is neither scanned nor executed. The inputs/outputs are still
updated.

Init Duration This command is used to reinitialize the values of the maximum and minimum durations with the
current value in order to carry out new measurements.

CPU Load Only for M580 with SV >= 2.80: percentage of the CPU load used by the task.

In addition to the these values the system and total CPU load are given below the tasks
checking field.
NOTE: To perform application transfer in good conditions from primary to standby CPU, it
is recommended to not exceed 80% for the total CPU load.

Event Processing
The "Events" field is used to check the execution of event processing

The following table describes the role of each of the columns of the screen above.

Column Role
Enable or This button is used to enable or disable all the event processing operations.
disable all
If the events appear when the processing operations are disabled, they are lost. The master
task must be in RUN for this command to be authorized.
Status indicates the status of the event processing operations: Enabled or Disabled.

Number Number of event processing operations executed

Description of the Task tab: Operating mode field

At a Glance
This field gives access to various simulation buttons:

33003101.26 1451
 Debugging the program

• Warm restart,
• Cold start,
• Output fallback.
Operating Mode field:

This field also indicates the date, time and cause of the last PLC stop.

Description
Buttons and functions:

Button Function
Warm restart Click on this button to perform a warm restart of the PLC.

This sets the %S1 bit to 1, which, for example, is used to command a partial initialization
program.

This does not set %S21 and %S13.

Cold start Click on this button to perform a cold start of the PLC.

This initializes the data, the system, and sets the %S0 bit to 1 which (in this case) is used for
example to command a specific initialization program.

This does not sets %S21 and %S13.

Output It is used to switch the outputs into fallback mode. The values supplied to the outputs are then
fallback the values defined in the configuration (fallback value on PLC STOP).

When the outputs are in fallback, the Applied outputs button becomes active and allows you
to exit fallback mode.
Applied Is used to stop the fallback mode and to reapply the values supplied by the program to the
outputs outputs.

1452 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Specific features
Management of output fallbacks for Premium Atrium, M580 and M340 PLCs: when a
task is set to STOP, the associated outputs automatically switch to the configured mode
(fallback or maintain). The outputs associated with the other tasks continue to be updated as
normal.
For Premium PLCs, during a warm start, an output in fallback or maintain mode goes to the
security mode (state 0) while the CPU is not started. When the CPU is started, if the output
falback function is still active, the output will return to the fallback mode or stay at 0 in
maintain mode.
For M580, refer to chapter BMEP58xxxx CPU Operating Modes (see Modicon M580,
Hardware, Reference Manual).
For M340 PLCs
• Whatever the operating mode, an output in fallback or maintain mode do not return to
the previous state but stays in security mode (state 0) while the fallback condition is
applied.
• The fallback values are only applied if the Topological option of Memory Management
is checked, see in the PLC configuration screen, page 1341.
NOTE: The buttons Output fallback and Applied Outputs are not available for
Quantum PLCs. On Quantum PLCs, the output of the stopped task will continue to be
updated (with the last value written), the others are handled normally. Inputs of the
stopped task will continue to be scanned, but the data input will be discarded.

33003101.26 1453
 Debugging the program

Description of tab: Realtime Clock

At a Glance
This field gives access to the real-time clock settings.

Description
Fields and functions:

Field Function
PLC Date and Displays the date and time of the PLC processor.
Time
PC date and Displays the date and time of the PC.
time

The icon: is used to access the PC Date and Time setting screen.

The Update PC->PLC button updates the real-time clock of the PLC in line with the date and
time of the PC.

1454 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Field Function
User Date Is used to adjust the date and time using the calendar and the entry fields: Date and Time.
and Time
The Update User->PLC button updates the real-time clock of the PLC in line with the date and
time set by the user.

Incorrect This field displays the cause of the error when a date or time is not accepted.
realtime clock
date

Description of the Tab: Information

At a Glance
The Information tab is composed of 2 areas:
• the browser field, which is used to choose the subject
• the display field displayed the information concerning the chosen subject is displayed.
The Services > Print Information command is used to print this information.
Information tab:

33003101.26 1455
 Debugging the program

NOTE: To view the content of the Information tab perform the following actions:
• build the project (Build Changes or Rebuild All Project)
• connect Control Expert to the PLC (PLC > Connect)
• download (PLC > Transfer Project to PLC)

PLC IDENTIFICATION Information

This information is used to identify the PLC processor:

Element Function
PLC RANGE Type of PLC connected

PROCESSOR NAME Reference of the connected processor

PROCESSOR VERSION Software version of the processor

HARDWARE ID Hardware identifier

NETWORK ADDRESS Connection address

PLC MEMORY Information

This information is used to identify the types of memory and their size.

Element Function
RAM CPU Size of the internal RAM memory

BMX RMSxxx Part Number of the SD-Card present in the PLC.

SD-Card A memory card is inside the PLC, but Control Expert cannot read the
part number.

RAM CARTRIDGE Type of the RAM cartridge

FLASH CARTRIDGE Type and size of the additional RAM cartridge

APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION Information

This information is used to identify the project:

1456 33003101.26
Debugging the program

Element Function
NAME Project name

CREATION PRODUCT Software version from which the project has been created

DATE Project creation date

MODIFICATION PRODUCT Software version with which the project has been modified

DATE Project modification date

VERSION Project version

SIGNATURE Software signature associated with the project

LIBSET VERSION Libset version used for the project

SOURCE SAFE SIGNATURE A signature of the several safe parts of the safety PAC application,
produced using the SHA256 secure hash algorithm.

APPLICATION OPTION Information

This information describes the content of the project loaded into the PLC.

Element Function
NEW TERMINAL SUPPORT Presence or absence of support information for new console (includes
"Upload information", "Comments" and "Animation tables").

UPLOAD INFORMATION Presence or absence of information needed to upload the project to the
terminal or to the PLC memory.

COMMENTS Presence or absence of comments on variables in the PLC memory

ANIMATION TABLE Presence or absence of animation tables in the PLC memory.

PROTECTION OF SECTIONS Protection of the project sections

DIAGNOSTICS Depends on PLC diagnostic project setting:

• YES if application diagnostic or system diagnostic is checked
• NO if application diagnostic and system diagnostic are unchecked

APPLICATION LAST MODIFICATION Information

This information describes the general information of the project loaded into the PLC.

33003101.26 1457
 Debugging the program

Element Function
MODIFICATION PRODUCT Software version with which the project has been modified.

DATE Project modification date.

PC NAME Name of the PC1

APPLICATION Path and name of the project saved in *.STU2

USER NAME Display the name of the user profile associated with Control Expert1

1 These elements can be hidden if no information are found

2 This element can be hidden if the project has not been previously saved

APPLICATION MISCELLANEOUS Information

Additional project information

Element Function
NEW TERMINAL SUPPORT Update status of support information for new console.

FORCED BITS Display the number of forced bits in the application.

A single click on this line starts the animation table containing all the
forced bits. This service is only operational if the content of the PLC is
identical to the content of the programming terminal and if there are
forced bits.

See also Animation Table of Forced Bits, page 1494.

HOT STANDBY Information

Quantum and Premium: This information displays the Hot Standby status register (%SW61). It is used to
monitor the current machine status of the Primary CPU and Standby CPU.

For details about the bits in this register, refer to EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
System Bits and Words, Reference Manual.

Modicon M580: This information displays the Hot Standby status register part of the Hot standby
device DDT T_M_ECPU_HSBY (see Modicon M580 Hot Standby, System Planning
Guide for, Frequently Used Architectures).

1458 33003101.26
33003101.26 1459
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Viewing and adjusting variables

What’s in This Chapter
Introduction to variable animation.......................................... 1460
Variable Display Window ...................................................... 1461
Variable Display Boxes......................................................... 1464
Animation Tables ................................................................. 1467
Instruction Editor (LL984) ..................................................... 1495
Modifying values: ................................................................. 1498

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter guides the user through how to implement the tools for viewing and adjusting
project variables. These tools are:
• the variable display window,
• the variable display boxes,
• the animation tables.

Introduction to variable animation

Subject of this Section
This section provides an overview of the tools used to view variables.

Displaying variables in debug mode

At a Glance
Variables can be displayed using different language editors (sections), page 1389, and
additional tools, which are:
• the variable display window,
• the display boxes,
• the animation tables.

1460 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Variables Shown in the Display Window

Certain variables used in a section cannot all be animated directly in the language editor.
These are:
• numerical variables in sections that use textual languages (ST, IL),
• numerical variables used in operation and comparison blocks in textual languages (ST,
IL),
• structure variables belonging to the DDT family (derived data type),
• parameters and variables belonging to DFB or EFB instances.
These variables are shown in the display window, called from the language editors.
The window automatically displays the language editor variables visible onscreen; when the
editor runs through the section, the window is updated automatically with the new variables.

Variables Shown in the Display Boxes

Each box displays the name and value of a single variable.
The boxes can be placed anywhere in the section and can be configured.

Variables Displayed in the Animation Tables

Certain variables must be continually monitored, regardless of whether they are visible or
not in the language editor at a given time.
These variables are displayed in the animation tables, called from the language editors.

Variable Display Window

Subject of this Section
This section guides the user through the implementation of the variable display window.

33003101.26 1461
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Introduction to the Variable Output Window

Opening the Tool
The Output Window is launched from the menu with the
"Tools->Variables Window" command.
In online mode, if the language editor is open, the tool automatically contains the variables
displayed by the language editor.
Opening in offline mode:

The Output Window includes:

• a line for each variable,
• for each one of the variables, columns describing:
◦ their name (symbol or address),
◦ their value,
◦ their type,
◦ a comment.

The Output Window and the Textual Language Editors

A textual language editor (Structured Text, Instruction List) animates Boolean data.
Animation of other types of data takes place in the Variables Window; this data includes:
• elementary numerical types,
• derived type (DDT) instance variables, except Boolean types,
• function block (EFB,DFB) instance variables, except Boolean types.

1462 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Example with Structured Text editor:

NOTE: to display variables of the derived data (DDT) or function block data (EFB\DFB)
types, you must expand (+) the name of the corresponding instance.

The Output Window and the Graphical Language Editors

A graphical language editor (LD,FBD) animates Boolean and elementary numerical types of
data.
Animation of other types of data can be carried out in the Output Window; this data
includes:
• derived type (DDT) instance variables, except Boolean types,
• function block (EFB,DFB) instance variables, except Boolean types,
• numerical variables used in the operation or comparison blocks in the Ladder Diagram
language editor,
• variables for numerical expressions connected to EFB or DFB in the Ladder or Function
Block Diagram language editor.

33003101.26 1463
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Example with Function Block Diagram editor:

NOTE: to display variables of the derived data (DDT) or function block data (EFB\DFB)
types, you must expand (+) the name of the corresponding instance.

Variable Display Boxes

Subject of this Section
This section guides the user through the implementation of the variable display boxes.

1464 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Introduction to variable display boxes

At a Glance
Each variable display box displays the name and value of a variable used in the section.
Main characteristics:
• they are called only via sections written in textual languages (Structured Text,
Instruction List),
• they contain the variable name and value,
• the boxes can be placed anywhere in the section,
• they can be configured.
The display boxes are implemented in offline or online mode.

Creating a Variable Display Box

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the variable from a section (Structured Text or Instruction List).

2 From the contextual menu, select the "New Inspect Window" command; the box is displayed in
the section.
3 Use the mouse to position the box.

Settings
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the display box.

2 From the contextual menu, launch the "Settings" command.

33003101.26 1465
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Step Action

3
The following dialog box appears:

Enter the minimum and maximum values for the variable:

• if the variable value is less than the value entered in Minimum value, the display box is
shown in yellow,
• if the variable value falls between the 2 values entered, the display box is shown in blue,
• if the variable value is greater than the value entered in Maximum value, the display box is
shown in pink.
If no value is entered, the box is shown in blue.

4 Select the type of variable display to be used in the display box (Decimal, Binary, Hexadecimal,
floating default, exponent, literal) by checking the corresponding box.

Example:

Clearing a Variable Display Box

Carry out the following actions:

1466 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Step Action

1 Select the display box.

2 From the contextual menu, launch the "Delete Inspect" command.

Animation Tables
Subject of this Section
This section guides the user through the implementation of animation tables.

Permanent and Temporary Animation Tables

Overview
There are 2 kinds of animation tables:
• permanent animation tables
• temporary animation tables

Permanent Animation Table

A permanent animation table is an integrated part of a project.
It is saved with the project and can be exported.

Temporary Animation Table

A temporary animation table
• is not saved with a project but deleted when closing a project
Therefore no temporary animation table is available in the project browser, when
opening a project.
• does not modify a project
• does not modify the build state of a project
• does not create upload information (and therefore can not be uploaded)

33003101.26 1467
 Viewing and adjusting variables

• can not be exported

• is not included in the printout of a project

Permanent/Temporary
• Creating an animation table via Project Browser > Animation Table you can select if a
permanent or a temporary animation table should be created. To create a temporary
animation table set the Temporary Table checkbox in the Properties dialog.
• Creating an animation table outside the project browser (e.g. via Initialize Animation
Table in a language editor or creating an animation table of forced bits) you will always
create a temporary animation table.
See also Animation Table of Forced Bits, page 1494.

Switching Between Permanent and Temporary

Every temporary animation table (except the animation table of forced bits) can be changed
to a permanent animation table and vice versa.
There are 2 ways to do this:
• Use the checkbox available in the Properties dialog of an animation table (see
Animation Table Properties, page 1474).

• Use the button top right at the animation table. Click the button to change from a
permanent animation table to a temporary animation table and vice versa.

Context Menu
The context menu that can be opened via Project Browser > Animation Tables provides 2
additional entries:
• Make All Tables Permanent
Use this context menu entry to change all temporary animation tables to permanent
animation tables.
As mentioned above, an animation table of forced bits is always a temporary one and
can not be changed to a permanent.
• Purge Temporary Tables
Use this context menu entry to delete all temporary animation tables.

1468 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Icons in the Project Browser

In the Project Browser the 2 kinds of animation tables are represented by different icons.

Introduction to Animation Tables

Overview
An animation table is divided into 3 areas that include:
• the Mode area,
• the Command area,
• the Display area,
Animation table:

33003101.26 1469
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Online and Offline Mode

In offline mode, an animation table does not display values associated with the variables:

In online mode, an animation table displays the values of the variables.

Managing Animation Tables

Creating a New Animation Table
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, go to the Animation Tables directory.

2 From the contextual menu; select the New Animation Table command; the table is created with
a default name.
3 If you wish, you can rename the table by clicking on its name in the project browser.

1470 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Opening an Existing Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the desired table in the Animation Tables directory.

2 Either:
• Select the Open command from the contextual menu,
• or double-click on the name of the table.

Variables that were displayed previously in the table are re-loaded into the table.

Attaching an Animation Table to a Functional Module

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Display the Structural View and the Functional View.

2 Select the desired table in the Animation Tables directory in Structural View.

3 From the Structural View, use the mouse to drag\drop the animation table into the desired functional
module in the Functional View. The authorized insertion point of the animation table in the functional module,
is represented by a line.

Example:

33003101.26 1471
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Another way to attach an animation table to a functional module is described in the following
table:

Step Action

1 Display the Structural View .

2 Select the desired table in the Animation Tables directory in Structural View.

3 Select the Properties command from the contextual menu.

4 Select the desired functional module from the Functional Module data selection box.

Example:

5 Confirm with OK.

Backing Up an Animation Table

The backup is performed automatically.

Deleting an Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

1472 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Step Action

1 Select the desired table in the Animation Tables directory.

2 Select the Delete command from the contextual menu.

Properties of the Animation Table

To access the properties of the animation table, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Select the desired table in the Animation Tables directory or in the editor window.

2 Either:
• Select the Properties command from the contextual menu,
• or click Edit > Properties in the menu bar.
Refer also to Animation Table Properties, page 1474.

Multiple Modifications of Animation Table Variables

Entering Multiple Mode
To enter this mode follow this procedure:

Step Action Icon

1 In the animation table dialog click the Modification button:

2 Click the Enter Multiple Mode button:

33003101.26 1473
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Current and Set Values

Update Current Values in the PLC with Set Values by clicking:

Reset all Set Values by clicking:

Save, import and export animation tables with all their Set Values.

Populate the Set Values with the Current Values by only one click on:

NOTE: This feature allows users to manage animation tables as "recipes".

Animation Table Properties

Presentation

1474 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Animation Table Elements

Element Description

Name Animation table name

Functional module Attached functional module

Comment Animation table comment

Number of animated characters Number of characters that can be animated in the Extended
Strings mode (range: 20 ... 300)

Refer also to Animation of Strings in the Animation Table, page

1479.
Temporary Table Type of animation table (temporary/permanent)

See also Permanent and Temporary Animation Tables, page 1467.

Include in upload info The animation table (including comments) is stored in the *.STU or
*.STA application file.

This box is checked by default and is:

• enabled when Animation Tables in the Project Settings
dialog is also checked
• not enabled when Animation Tables in the Project Settings
dialog is not checked

Basic functions
Adding a Data Item to the Animation Table
Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1475
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Step Action

1 Move to an empty line

2 Either you can:

• double-click on the empty line
• move to a variable and from the contextual menu, by selecting the "Insert" command
• type the variable address
Example:

3
Enter the variable name or select it in the "Instance selection" window launched with the
button.

NOTE: Variables previously created in the Data Editor, page 344 can be added to the
Animation table by entering the address in the Name element of the Animation Table.

Adding a Data Item From Another Animation Table

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the source animation table, select the desired data item.

2 Either:
• select the "Copy" command from the contextual menu, and in the destination animation
table, in the desired line, select the "Paste" command.
• or using the mouse, drag the data item and drop it in the desired line in the destination
animation table.
NOTE: The drag/drop operation removes the data from the source table and places it in the
destination table, whereas Copy/Paste copies the data from the destination table without
removing it from the source table.

NOTE: You can also carry out the same manipulation for multiple selections.

1476 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Modifying the Display Format

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the animation table, select the desired data item.

2 In the contextual menu, select the "Display Format"’ command and choose the format.

Example:

NOTE: Depending on the display format selected, (Binary, Hexadecimal, ASCII, etc.) the
value of the data item is preceded by a prefix and followed by a suffix (except for
Decimal format).
16-bit Data Type arrays (of 2,4,… even) can be displayed as 32-bit formats:
• Array of UINT or INT can be displayed as REAL, 32-bit Integer or 32-Bit Decimal.
• Array of WORD can be displayed as DWORD array.

33003101.26 1477
 Viewing and adjusting variables

When a double format is selected, the 32-bit value is written in the field Value of the first 16-
bit variable and <n/a> is written in the field Value of the second 16-bits variable as illustrated
below:

NOTE: Only the 32-bit value can be modified directly in the animation table.
%MW<i> variable can be displayed as 32-bit format. Right click on the %MW<i> variable
then select the desired double format and the value displayed for %MW<i> is the 32-bit data
calculated form %MW<i> to %MW<i+1>.

Deleting a Variable
Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 In the animation table, select the variable(s) desired.

2 Select the "Delete" command from the contextual menu.

NOTE: Once the deletion has been made, the table is reorganized to fill the empty lines.

Displaying a Variable Name

Entering the variable address in the Name element displays automatically the variable
name.
Carry out the following actions:

1478 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Step Action

1 Move to an empty line

2 Either you can:

• double-click on the empty line
• type the variable address
Example:

Result: Animation table automatically displays a in the Name element:

NOTE: It is possible to have more than one variables with the same address entered in
the Name element. The Animation Table will create an new entry for each variables.
The graphic below shows two variables at the %MW100 address:

Animation of Strings in the Animation Table

Overview
The animation table offers two different modes (Modification/Force) to animate strings.
Normally only the first 16 characters of a string are animated (modified).

33003101.26 1479
 Viewing and adjusting variables

The reason for this restriction is that for animation handling a PLC reserves a buffer.
The size of this buffer is limited and the animation of complete strings can exceed the size of
the buffer easily.

Extended Strings
The animation table can animate more than 16 characters of a string.

At the right side of the command zone area there is the checkbox (Extended Strings).
It can be used to activate the mode extended string animation.

Presentation

The number of characters to be animated in the mode extended string animation can be
set in the properties of the animation table (see Animation Table Properties, page 1474).
NOTE: Using this feature you should keep in mind that the animation of big strings can
reduce the number of sections and animation tables which can be animated at the same
time.

1480 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Modification Mode
Implementing Modification Mode
Press the Modification button in the Mode area:

Modifying an Elementary Variable (EDT)

To modify an immediate value, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Double-click in the "Value" column on the line corresponding to the variable that you wish to
modify.

2 Use the keyboard to enter the desired value.

3 Confirm your choice by pressing the "Enter" key.

To modify a Boolean value, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Use the mouse to select the Boolean value to be modified.

2

Press one of the buttons corresponding to the desired value, or from the
contextual menu, execute the "Set to 0" or "Set to 1"" commands.

To modify several variables simultaneously, see Modifying Several Boolean Variables, page
1491

33003101.26 1481
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Modifying a Derived Variable (DDT)

Derived variables correspond to structures and to tables.
For a structure, if the elements that compose it are elementary variables, modifications are
made element by element see Modifying an Elementary Variable (EDT), page 1481.
Example:

NOTE: if the structures are nested, you must expand them (+) until you reach the
elementary variables.
For a table, if the elements that compose it are elementary variables, modifications are
made element by element see Modifying an Elementary Variable (EDT), page 1481.

1482 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Example:

NOTE: If the table contains structure-type elements, follow the procedure described
above.

Modifying a Function Block (FB) Data Item

Function block data corresponds to DFBs and EFBs.
If the elements that compose the function block (input/output parameters, public variables)
are elementary variables; the modifications are carried out element per element see
Modifying an Elementary Variable (EDT), page 1481.

33003101.26 1483
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Example of a DFB instance:

NOTE: If the variables are derived (structures, tables), you must expand them (+) until
you reach the elementary variables.
Private variables of derived function blocks cannot be accessed by the pre-defined
elements. To display or modify private variables you have to enter them variable by variable
at the end of the function block tree in the animation table. With the same syntax is is also
possible to enter variables that are used in nested derived function blocks.

1484 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Example of a DFB instance with private variables:

Example of nested DFB with public and private variables:

33003101.26 1485
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Force Mode
Precautions
Forcing input and output values in a running controller can have serious consequences to
the operation of a machine or process. Only those who understand the implications in the
controlling logic, and who understand the consequences of forced I/O on the machine or
process, should attempt to use this function.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
You must have prior knowledge of the process and the controlled equipment and the
modified behavior in Control Expert before attempting to force I/O or numeric values to
memory locations.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

NOTE: Before forcing outputs, understand that forced outputs (%M) exhibit different
behavior with Modsoft/NxT/Concept than Control Expert.
• With Modsoft/NxT/Concept you cannot force outputs when the Memory Protect
switch of the Quantum CPU is set to the "On" position.
With Control Expert you can force outputs even when the Memory Protect switch of
the Quantum CPU is set to the "On" position.
• With Modsoft/NxT/Concept forced outputs maintain their values following a cold
start.
With Control Expert forced outputs lose their disabled state following a cold start.

Preset Force Values in Offline Mode

The Modification Values and Force Values for variables can be preset in offline mode via
animation tables. This information can be transferred to PLC later.
Presetting values can also be used for multiple modification and forcing of Boolean
variables, page 1491.

Preset Force Values in Project Information

The preset force values of variables are included in the

1486 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

• download (Transfer Project to PLC) information of a project

• upload (Transfer Project from PLC) information of a project.
The Modification Value/Force Value attribute of a variable is part of the animation table
information.

Include in Upload Information

In the properties dialog of an animation table you can activate/deactivate an additional
property (Include in Upload Information).
As a default this property is activated.
This check box in the property dialog of an animation table is enabled only, if Animation
tables is activated via Project Settings > General > PLC embedded data > Upload
information.

Implementing Forcing Mode

Press the Force button:

This forcing mode is only available for variables responding to these conditions:
• The variable is an EBool type.
• The forcing attribute is validated in the variable editor.
• The variable is a located variable.

33003101.26 1487
 Viewing and adjusting variables

• The variable is an unlocated variable with the following restrictions:

◦ for Modicon M580 with a firmware version greater or equal to 2.10, the unlocated
variable can be in an EDT or in a Device DDT,
◦ for Modicon Quantum 140 CPU 651 50, 140 CPU 651 60, 140 CPU 652 60,140
CPU 658 60, 140 CPU 670 60, 140 CPU 671 60, 140 CPU 672 60, 140 CPU 672 61,
140 CPU 678 61, with a firmware version greater or equal to 3.0 the unlocated
variable can only be in a Device DDT (X80 modules in EIO drops).
◦ for Modicon M340 and for Momentum the unlocated variable can not be forced.
NOTE: Forcing/unforcing unlocated variables does not update %SW108 (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, System Bits and Words, Reference Manual).
Analog I/O variables forcing is managed in a different way:
• On analog Device DDT (see Modicon X80, Analog Input/Output Modules, User
Manual), a set of sub fields (for example EIO2_d1_r0_s1_AMI0800.ANA_CH_IN[0].
ANA.FORCE_CMD) allows to force analog I/Os with a predefined value.
• For Modicon M580 and M340 PLCs the analog I/Os variables can be forced in the
program.
NOTE: With the animation table, it is not possible to set or reset the bit associated to
step S.x.

Forcing a Variable
To force a located Boolean variable, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Use the mouse to select the Boolean variable.

2

Press one of the buttons corresponding to the desired value, or from the contextual
menu, execute the Force to 0 or Force to 1 commands.

To force several variables simultaneously, see Forcing several located variables, page 1493.

1488 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

When a variable is forced, the letter F is displayed in front of the value:

Unforcing a Variable
To unforce a located Boolean variable, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Use the mouse to select the Boolean variable.

2

Press the . button or execute the Unforce command from the contextual menu.

To unforce several variables simultaneously, see Unforcing several located variables, page 1493

When a variable is unforced, the letter F no longer appears in front of the value.

Creating an Offline Forcing Animation Table

To create a new animation table of forced bits from scratch, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Create a new (permanent) animation table via the Project Browser.

2 Enter the memory bits you want to force either as single bits (like %M1) or as a bit array (like M1:100).

3 Press the Force button.

4

Press the Swaps to multiple mode button.

5 Enter forcing values 0 or 1 in the Force value column.

33003101.26 1489
 Viewing and adjusting variables

To create a new animation table of existing forced bits in the PLC, carry out the following
actions:

Step Action

1 There are 3 ways to open the Forced bits animation table:

• In the status bar click the red F.
• In the Project Browser right-click Animations Tables and select Open Forced Bits Table from
the context menu.
• Via Tools > PLC Screen open the PLCScreen dialog.
In the Information tab under APPLICATION > MISCELLANEOUS click the FORCED BITS line.
2 Since this animation table is temporary only, copy and paste the animation table via context menu of the
Project Browser.

Make the copied animation table permanent (using the Temporary table button ).

4 In the copied Forced bits animation table press the Force button.

Press the Swaps to multiple mode button.

Press the Populates multiple values using existing forced bits button.

Result: The Force value column is populated.

Build/Build changes and Save your application.

By building, the values entered in the Force value column will be included in the upload
information which is downloaded into the PLC.

Forcing by Use of an Offline Forcing Animation Table

To force values before starting the PLC, carry out the following actions:

Step Action

1 Open an existing application (*.STU, *.STA or an uploaded application).

2 Connect to the PLC.

3 Open the manually created/copied Forced bits animation table (see Creating an Offline Forcing
Animation Table, page 1489).

4 Press the Force button to enter forcing mode.

1490 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Step Action

Press the Swaps to multiple mode button.

Press the Execute multiple button to force the bits from the preset Force value column.

7 Now you can start your application.

Multiple modification and forcing of Boolean variables

At a Glance
The reason for modifying or forcing a group of several Boolean variables (located) is to
enable the PLC to acknowledge these changes in the same cycle.

Modifying Several Boolean Variables

Carry out the following actions:

33003101.26 1491
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Step Action

Click on the button.

The Set value column is added to the table:

2 In the Set value column, modify the value of the Boolean variables you wish.

The contents of the corresponding lines is now shown in bold font:

Press the button so that the PLC acknowledges the modifications.

The button clears the Set value column.

1492 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Forcing Several Boolean (EBool) Variables

Carry out the following actions:

Step Action

Click on the button.

The Force value column is added to the table:

2 In the Force value column, modify the value of the Boolean variables you wish.

The contents of the corresponding lines is now shown in bold font:

Press the button so that the PLC acknowledges the modifications.

The button clears the Force value column.

33003101.26 1493
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Animation Table of Forced Bits

Overview
You can create an animation table that includes all forced bits of a project.

Table[Forced Bits]
An animation table of forced bits
• can not be modified by you
• is updated automatically if a variable or address becomes forced/unforced or if the
value of a forced variable/address changes
• is always created as a temporary animation table and can not be changed into a
permanent animation table (see also Permanent and Temporary Animation Tables,
page 1467)
• has a fixed name (Table[Forced Bits]) which can not be modified
• displays the symbolic names of the forced addresses (if mapping is available

Creating the Animation Table

There are 3 ways to create the animation table of forced bits:
• Via Tools > PLC Screen open the PLCScreen dialog.
In the Information tab under APPLICATION > MISCELLANEOUS click the FORCED
BITS line.
• In the Project Browser right-click Animations Tables and select Open Forced Bits
Table from the context menu.
• In the status bar click the red F.

1494 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Instruction Editor (LL984)

Instruction Editor
Introduction
For every Control Expert FFB you can use the Control Expert animation tables during
runtime. (Select a function block and use Initialize Animation Table from the context menu.
Please refer to Animation Tables, page 636.
But since special FFBs of the UnityLL984 Block Library have parameters of array type there
will be no detailed information displayed for these parameters.
So for most of the FFBs of the UnityLL984 Block Library the LL984 editor provides another
means of animation called Instruction Editor.
NOTE: For the FFBs of the UnityLL984 Block Library that are not supported by the
Instruction Editor see table below.

Using the Instruction Editor

To open the Instruction Editor for an FFB during runtime, select the FFB and use Show
instruction from the context menu.

33003101.26 1495
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Representation
Representation of the Instruction Editor

Items of the Instruction Editor

Item Description

Table Header displays <Pin name>:<Variable name>@<Address>

• pin name of the respective function block node
• name of the connected variable
Description describes the elements of the array

Address displays the address of the array element in case of located variables

In case of unlocated variables this field is empty.

In either case the corresponding data column field can be animated/modified.

1496 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

Item Description

Data displays the actual value of the array element

The value can be edited by clicking this field.

Radix allows you to select the displayed data type format

Available formats:
• Binary
• Decimal
• Floating Point
• HexaDecimal
• BCD
• ASCII
• Signed Integer
• 32 Bit Integer

Changing the Data Type

If for example an element of the table is defined as of type floating point or 32 bit integer, the
next element is shown as disabled.
For some elements you can change the predefined data type.
For example showing a decimal also as binary.
Changing from floating point to decimal will enable the next decimal row.
Changing back to floating point will disable the next decimal row.

Bit Information
For certain memory words, bit information is also available.
In this case positioning the mouse over the Data column of such a memory word will show
information for the bits, which may be specially useful when Binary is selected as data type
format (Radix).

FFBs Not Supported by Instruction Editor

The following FFBs are not supported by the Instruction Editor.

33003101.26 1497
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Family Not Supported FFBs

CONTL_COMM L9_ID

L9_IE

MISC L9_LAB

L9_RET

Modifying values:
Object of this part
This section describes online modification of values.

Modifying values:
Introduction
You have the several options for changing values of variables online:
• In the shortcut menu for the variables
◦ With the Change Value
◦ With the command Set Value
◦ With the command Force Value
• In the menu Services
◦ With the command Change Value
This applies to all elementary variables and elementary components of derived variables
(DDTs and Arrays) with the following applications:
• In LD (also see the Edge recognition (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) chapter in the user guide).
◦ Contact
◦ Coil
◦ Operation block
◦ Comparison block

1498 33003101.26
Viewing and adjusting variables

• In FBD
◦ FFB Pin
• In SFC
◦ Transition
• In IL and ST
◦ without limitation
NOTE: The above-named commands are only available in the Animation Mode, page
1389.

Change value of variables

The Change value of variables dialog is modeless. This means that the dialog is not
closed after modifying a variable. So you can modify several variables in a section.
One dialog is shown per section. Deactivating a section will hide the opened dialog. Closing
a section or stopping the animation of a section will close the dialog.
Appearance:

Depending on the selected variables some functions of the dialog may be grayed out.
Elements:

Element Description

Variable The selected variable is displayed in this text box.

Every variable in a section can be selected either by means of this

text box or by clicking on the variable in the section itself.

Value to be set Enter the value to be set for the valuable in this text box.

When making the entry, ensure the correct syntax of the entered
literal, e.g. 30s for a variable of data type TIME.

Use Set to assign the entered value to the selected variable and
close the dialog.

33003101.26 1499
 Viewing and adjusting variables

Element Description

Set to 0 or 1 This function is only available for Boolean variables.

Use to set the selected variable to 0 and close the dialog.

The same function is available with the command Set Value > Set
to 0 in the context menu of the variable.

Use to set the selected variable to 1 and close the dialog.

The same function is available with the command Set Value > Set
to 1 in the context menu of the variable.
Force / Cancel Force This function is only available for located variables of data type
EBOOL.

Also see the Edge recognition (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,

Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual) chapter in
the user guide.

Use to force the selected variable to 0 and close the dialog. (The
forced variable will be marked with a frame around the variable
name.)

The same function is available with the command Force Value >
Set to 0 in the context menu of the variable.

Use to force the selected variable to 1 and close the dialog. (The
forced variable will be marked with a frame around the variable
name.)

The same function is available with the command Set Value >
Force to 1 in the context menu of the variable.

Use to cancel the Force command for the selected variable and
close the dialog.

The same function is available with the command Set Value >
Cancel Force in the context menu of the variable.

1500 33003101.26
33003101.26 1501
 Machine-Process Simulator

Machine-Process Simulator
What’s in This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................... 1502

Subject of this Chapter

The SIMAC 100 simulator allows you to simulate a machine or a process piloted by the
Premium PLCs.

Introduction
Overview
The SIM function allows you to create a virtual machine which simulates the behaviour of all
electrical, mechanical, hydraulic components of your process, in the aim to debug the
Control Expert application before starting up on site.

Installation
The SIMAC 100 software must be installed separately of Control Expert software. The
software can be downloaded from the PROSYST web site (www.prosyst.fr).
Please, refer to the PROSYST vendor for further installation information.

1502 33003101.26
33003101.26 1503
Diagnostics
What’s in This Part
Introduction to diagnostics tools ............................................ 1505
Diagnostics screens ............................................................. 1508
Diagnostics Viewer .............................................................. 1514
System diagnostics .............................................................. 1535
Project diagnostics............................................................... 1539

Subject of this Part

This part describes the various diagnostics tools available in Control Expert for the
programming, maintenance, and use of PLCs.

1504 33003101.26
Introduction to diagnostics tools

Introduction to diagnostics tools

What’s in This Chapter
Diagnostics with Control Expert............................................. 1505

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter provides an introduction to the various diagnostics solutions provided by
Control Expert software and available on Modicon M340, Premium, Atrium and Quantum
PLCs.

Diagnostics with Control Expert

At a Glance
Control Expert diagnostics consist of a set of tools and functionalities which allow you to
intervene at all stages in the development and use of an automation application.
The different resources available are as follows:
• Language Objects (IODDTs (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual)).
• Diagnostics screens.
• The Diagnostics Viewer.
• System diagnostics.
• Project diagnostics (diagnostic EFBs and DFBs).

Using the resources

The following table shows the resources available.

33003101.26 1505
 Introduction to diagnostics tools

Resource Use
Language objects (see EcoStruxure™ Language objects are diagnostics tools which can be used in a
Control Expert, Program Languages project to ascertain the status of a channel or module (for example
and Structure, Reference Manual) the error bit for channel 1 of the module located in slot 2 of rack 3: %
I3.2.1.ERR). These objects are described at the end of the
documentation for each module. In general they are used in the form
of IODDT (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages
and Structure, Reference Manual) variables.

Diagnostics screens, page 1508 The diagnostics screens can be accessed from the configuration
editor for the processor and the application-specific modules. To
access the desired diagnostics screen double-click on the element
(processor or module) then select the Fault tab. The fault information
messages are generally very clear (for example: Range over/
undershoot on an analog channel).

The Diagnostics Viewer, page 1514 for The Diagnostics Viewer is a tool which can be used to view the
Control Expert alarms generated by the system diagnostics and the diagnostic
DFBs. There is a Diagnostics Viewer built into Control Expert but
there are also Diagnostics Viewers available for Magelis HMI
terminals or via Factory Cast applications.

System diagnostics, page 1535 System diagnostics is a service which combines the use of system
bits and words with the Diagnostics Viewer. When a project has been
built with the System Diagnostics option, page 548, the system
bits and words automatically generate diagnostics messages in the
Diagnostics Viewers, page 1514.

Project diagnostics, page 1539 Project diagnostics consist of specific EFBs and DFBs which are
embedded in the code of an automation project to provide the user or
(diagnostics EFBs and DFBs and SFC maintenance personnel with clear information on the operating
diagnostics) conditions of the monitored process. These program elements will
trigger alarms which can be viewed in the Diagnostics Viewers.

SFC diagnostics go hand in hand with the system diagnostics, which

are an intrinsic part of SFC and enable step activity times to be
monitored.

Advantages
The main advantages of these services are as follows:
• Diagnostics are an integral part of the project. It can therefore be thought out at the
development stage in order to be able to best meet the requirements of the user and
maintenance personnel.
• Errors are logged and dated at source (in the PLC), meaning that the information
provided is an exact representation of the state of the process.
• You can connect several Viewers (Control Expert, Magelis, Factory Cast) which will
describe the exact state of the process to the user. Each Viewer works independently
and any action taken with one (an acknowledgment for example) is automatically visible
on the others.

1506 33003101.26
33003101.26 1507
 Diagnostics screens

Diagnostics screens
What’s in This Chapter
Module and processor diagnostics screens............................ 1508

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes the diagnostics screens enabling the user to perform troubleshooting
for his automation system.
The screens dealt with are those for:
• Premium and Quantum processor modules,
• an application-specific counting module.
NOTE: by way of example, only diagnostics for the application-specific counting
module are covered here. For the other modules please refer to the manuals for
the corresponding specific applications.

Module and processor diagnostics screens

Subject of this Section
This section introduces the user to the counting module diagnostics screens.
NOTE: By way of example, only diagnostics for application-specific counting
modules are covered here. The diagnostics screens for the other application-
specific modules as well as those for processors are similar.

Viewing fault diagnostics

At a Glance
The diagnostic screens on the module or channel are only accessible in connected mode.
When an un-masked fault appears, this is reported:
• in the configuration screen of the rack, with the presence of a red square in the position
of the module,

1508 33003101.26
Diagnostics screens

• in all screens at module level (Description and Fault tabs),

◦ in the module field with the I/O LED.
• in all channel level screens (Configuration, Adjustment, Debug and Fault tabs),
◦ in the module field with the I/O LED.
◦ in the channel field with the channel fault LED.
• in the fault screen that is accessed by the Fault where the fault diagnostics are
described.
The fault is also reported:
• on the module, through the centralized viewing,
• with the dedicated language objects: CH_ERROR (%Ir.m.c.ERR) and module error
MOD_ERROR (%Ir.m.MOD.ERR), %MWr.m.MOD.2, etc., and the status words (see
Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Counter Modules, User
Manual).
NOTE: even if the fault is masked (TSX CTY 2C), it is reported by the flashing of the
LED I/O and in the fault screen.

33003101.26 1509
 Diagnostics screens

Illustration
The diagram below shows the fault reporting structure.

Lists of fault diagnostics

At a Glance
The messages displayed on the diagnostics screens are used to assist in debugging the
project. These messages must be concise and are sometimes ambiguous (as different faults
may have the same consequences).

1510 33003101.26
Diagnostics screens

These diagnostics are on two levels: module and channel, the latter being the most explicit.
The lists below show the message headings with suggestions for finding out what is wrong.

List of the module fault messages

The table below provides a list of the module fault messages.

Fault indicated Possible interpretation and/or action

Module failure The module has a fault.

Check the module mounting. Change the module.

Faulty channel(s) One or more channels have a fault.

Refer to channel diagnostics.

Self-test The module is running a self-test. Wait until the self-test is complete.

Note: For Modicon M340, if the Xbus line termination are missing, the
module will stay in this state.

Different hardware and There is a lack of compatibility between the module configured and the module in
software configurations the rack.

Make the configuration and the software configuration compatible.

Module is missing or off Install the module. Fasten the mounting screws.

List of channel fault messages

The table below gives the list of fault messages at channel level.

Fault indicated. Other consequences. Possible interpretation and/or action.

External fault or counting input fault: Check the sensor connections.

• encoder or proximity sensor supply
Check the sensor power supply.
fault,
• line break or short circuit of at least Check the sensor operation.
one encoder differential signal (1A,
1B or 1Z), Delete the fault and acknowledge if the fault storing is configured
(CTY 2C).
• SSI series frame fault,
• specific fault on absolute encoder. Counting pulses or incremental encoder: preset or reset to
acknowledge the Invalid measurement message.
Outputs are set to 0 in automatic mode.

Invalid measurement message.

Counting application fault: Diagnose the fault more precisely (external causes).
• measurement overrun Check the application again, if necessary.

33003101.26 1511
 Diagnostics screens

Fault indicated. Other consequences. Possible interpretation and/or action.

• overspeed
Delete the fault and acknowledge if the fault storing is configured
Outputs are set to 0 in automatic mode.
(CTY 2C).
Invalid measurement message.
Counting pulses or incremental encoder: preset or reset to
acknowledge the Invalid measurement message.

Auxiliary input/output fault: Check the output connections.

• power supply Check the input/output power supply (24V).
• short circuit of at least one output
Diagnose the fault more precisely (external causes).
Outputs are set to 0 in automatic mode.
Delete the fault and acknowledge if the fault storing is configured
(CTY 2C).

Internal fault or channel self-test: Module fault has gone down to channel level.
• detected fault condition,
Refer to module level diagnostics.
• module missing or off,
• module running self-test.

Different hardware and software Module fault has gone down to channel level.
configurations
Refer to module level diagnostics.

Invalid software configuration: Check and modify the configuration constants.

• incorrect constant
• bit combination not associated with
any configuration

Communication fault Check the connections between the racks.

Application fault: refusal to configure or Diagnose the fault more precisely.
adjust

1512 33003101.26
33003101.26 1513
 Diagnostics Viewer

Diagnostics Viewer
What’s in This Chapter
Reminder of the Diagnostics Associated with the
Viewer ................................................................................ 1514
Operation of the diagnostics in Control Expert ....................... 1516
Description of the Diagnostics Viewer.................................... 1517
How to find causes............................................................... 1520
Configuring the display ......................................................... 1522
Managing error messages .................................................... 1524
Diagnostics Viewer Commands ............................................ 1526
DiagViewer Properties.......................................................... 1528
Archiving error messages ..................................................... 1530

Subject of this Chapter

The following chapter describes the Diagnostics Viewer, used to display error messages.

Reminder of the Diagnostics Associated with the

Viewer
Diagnostics in Control Expert
In order to check the correct operation of your process, the Control Expert software offers
you 2 types of diagnostics:
• system diagnostics,
• project diagnostics.
The Diagnostics Viewer is used to display error messages.

System Diagnostics
System diagnostics are performed automatically. When the PLC detects a system error (for
example, a watchdog being exceeded, an input/output error, division by zero, etc.),
information is sent to the Diagnostics Viewer. The Diagnostics Viewer displays a system
error message if in the project settings you have checked the System diagnostics, page 548
box.

1514 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Project Diagnostics
Project diagnostics uses diagnostics EFBs and DFBs. In addition, SFC program diagnostics
form an integral part of the system and allow you to test the activation times of the steps.
When the Project diagnostics, page 548 box is checked, information is sent to the viewer
when a fault occurs, which displays an error message.

Diagnostics EFBs and DFBs

EFBs and DFBs are function blocks that are programmed to carry out diagnostics in your
project, page 1539.
The graphic representation of a DFB is as follows:

Viewer
The Diagnostics Viewer is a tool that is used to display and acknowledge error messages linked to
diagnostics:

33003101.26 1515
 Diagnostics Viewer

Operation of the diagnostics in Control Expert

General
The Control Expert diagnostics function monitors the elements of the process to detect any
faults there may be. When a fault occurs, it sends an error message to the display systems
which display this fault.

Illustration
The following illustration shows the operation of the Control Expert diagnostics:

Operation of the diagnostics

The table below describes the various phases of operation of the Control Expert diagnostics:

1516 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Phase Description

1 The diagnostics function blocks built into the project program and the diagnostics built into the
system detect process faults.

2 The faults are stored in the form of date/time stamped messages in the diagnostics buffer
memory.

3 The error messages are then displayed via the following display systems: Diagnostics Viewer or
Human Machine Interface (HMI), used to:
• display messages,
• acknowledge messages that need an acknowledgement,
• initialize animation tables and cross-references,
• launch associated program editors,
• delete diagnostics buffer alarms.

Description of the Diagnostics Viewer

At a Glance
The Diagnostics Viewer is presented in the form of a display window comprising 2 display
fields:
• a field that displays the diagnostics error messages,
• a field that provides additional information on the error message selected from the
alarms list.

33003101.26 1517
 Diagnostics Viewer

Diagnostics Viewer
The following screen presents the Diagnostics Viewer and its 2 display fields:

1 List of error messages

2 Additional information on the message selected

Description of error messages

For each of the alarms, the error messages list displays the following information:

Field Description

Acknowledgement The icon and the text indicate the message status: not acknowledged,
acknowledged, deleted or no acknowledgement.

Message Error message. This message contains the 40 first characters of the text
entered in the comment of the function block instance that generated the error.

Fault Type of diagnostics FB or system bit that detected the error.

Symbol Symbol associated with the fault.

Field PLC zone.

Appearance Date Date and time of appearance of the fault.

Disappearance Date Date and time of disappearance of the fault.

Acknowledge Date Date and time of acknowledgement of the fault.

Definition of icons
The Diagnostics Viewer uses the following icons to indicate the message status:

1518 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Icon Description

The fault has disappeared and has been acknowledged (if it needed an
acknowledgement).

The fault needs an acknowledgement.

The fault has not disappeared.

The system fault has disappeared and has been acknowledged (if it needed an
acknowledgement).

The system fault has not disappeared.

Description of the additional information field

The additional information field provides the following information for the message selected
in the list:
• the alarm type with
◦ a comment (defined by the user for the diagnostics FB)
◦ the date of appearance,
• specific variables depending on the type of alarm,
• a list of error variables including any associated comments (if these exist),
• interpretation of the status words as a function of the STO file corresponding to this
alarm.

33003101.26 1519
 Diagnostics Viewer

The following screen gives an example of additional information on an error message:

If you want to refresh the values of the status words, reselect the message from the list or
press the F5 function key.
NOTE: If you wish, you can find the element that caused the error displayed in the
viewer. This is called finding the cause., page 1520

How to find causes

At a Glance
Cause finding involves searching for an element which has triggered an alarm on a
diagnostics EFB or DFB input.
Each input with the Diag property can be used to search for causes.

How to find causes

The following table describes the procedure for finding causes.

1520 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Step Action

1 Select the alarm in question in the Viewer.

Result: The alarm line is shown in reverse video.

2 Right-click on the input for which you want to search for the cause.

Result: The contextual menu allows you to initialize an animation table and to search for the
DFB input variable so as to ascertain whether it is used in the program. This is called cause
finding.

3 Click on the Initialize Search to search for cross-references to the selected input.

Result: The Cross-References screen is displayed.

Lists of diagnostics inputs of diagnostics EFBs or DFBs

The table below specifies the diagnostics inputs (with Diag property selected) of diagnostics
EFBs or DFBs in the diagnostics library.

Block name Block type Name of diagnostics inputs

ALRM_DIA DFB COND1

COND0
D_ACT EFB UNLOCK

REACT
D_DYN EFB UNLOCK

REACT
D_GRP EFB IN

D_LOCK EFB UNLOCK

D_PRE EFB IN

D_REA EFB REACT

EV_DIA DFB EVENT

COND
MV_DIA DFB EVENT

COND
NEPO_DIA DFB REQ_I

REQ_O

SENSOR_I

33003101.26 1521
 Diagnostics Viewer

Block name Block type Name of diagnostics inputs

SENSOR_O

SECU_I

SECU_O

SECUPERM
TEPO_DIA DFB REQ_I

REQ_O

SENSOR_I

SENSOR_O

SECU_I

SECU_O

SECUPERM
SAFETY_MONITOR DFB -

USER_DIAG_ST_MODEL DFB COND

Configuring the display

At a Glance
The Diagnostics Viewer allows you to configure the display of the error messages. You can:
• select the columns to be displayed,
• resize the columns,
• choose the color and flashing of the messages.

Selecting the columns to be displayed

By default the Diagnostics Viewer displays all of its columns, but allows you to customize the
display by removing columns that are of no use.
To remove a Diagnostics Viewer column, you must perform the following operations:

1522 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Step Action

1 Right-click the title of the column selected.

Result: A contextual menu containing the list of columns appears on the screen.

2 Click the title of the column you want to deselect.

Result: The contextual menu disappears and the column no longer appears in the Diagnostics
Viewer.

Note: To reselect a column you have previously deselected, you must proceed in the same way.
In this case, the contextual menu disappears and the column appears in the Diagnostics Viewer.

3
If you display the contextual menu again (steps 1 and 2), this column will not be preceded by a
pointer (deselected column).

Resizing of columns
To modify the size of a column, carry out the following operations:

Step Action

1 Position your cursor in the column titles header, in between the column you want to modify and
the next column.

Result: The column resizing cursor appears on the screen.

2 When the cursor appears, press and hold the right button of the mouse and move the mouse to
change the column size.

3 Once the correct column size has been reached release the mouse button.

Result: The column is resized.

33003101.26 1523
 Diagnostics Viewer

Choosing the color and flashing of messages

The Properties dialog box of the Diagnostics Viewer, page 1528 is used to change the color
and flashing of error messages.

Managing error messages

At a Glance
The Diagnostics Viewer allows you manage the error messages. You can:
• sort the messages list,
• browse the messages list,
• acknowledge a message in the list,
• delete a message from the list,
• activate another tool,
• delete an alarm from the PLC memory.

Number of messages
The number of messages displayed in the list is defined solely by the size of the available
memory.
If the memory becomes insufficient:
• the DIAG information flashes in the status bar,
• the messages associated with faults that have disappeared and have been
acknowledged (if they needed acknowledging) are deleted.

Sorting messages
You can sort the messages by each column contained in the list except for the one
containing the icons.
To sort the messages, simply click the header of the column containing the data you want to
sort. If you click the same header a second time it will be sorted in reverse order.

1524 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

By default the messages are inserted in the list in chronological order of appearance of the
faults.
NOTE: Whatever the sort criterion for the list, a new message always appears at the top
of the list.

Browsing the list

You can browse the list of messages using:
• the Up, Down, PageUp, PageDown, Home and End keys on the keyboard,
• the mouse. Use the scroll bar if the list contains more messages than can be displayed.

Acknowledging a message
To acknowledge a message that requires acknowledgement, you must select it and activate
one of the following commands:
• the corresponding heading in the contextual menu (accessible by right-clicking with the
mouse),
• the F6 function key,
• the corresponding button in the toolbar,
• double-clicking the icon of the alarm selected.
You can acknowledge several messages at once (multiple selection). When you
acknowledge a message, an order is sent to the PLC and the associated icon is modified in
the list.
A message can be acknowledged from another viewer. In this case, the Control Expert
Diagnostics Viewer is advised and the message is displayed as if acknowledged locally (the
associated icon is modified and the message no longer flashes).

Deleting messages from the list

You cannot delete a message that needs acknowledgement or where the associated fault
has not disappeared.
However, you can delete the messages associated with faults that have disappeared and
have been acknowledged. To do this activate:
• the corresponding heading in the contextual menu,
• the Del key.

33003101.26 1525
 Diagnostics Viewer

Deleting an alarm from the PLC memory

This function is used to delete from the PLC all the messages selected in the list, even if the
fault is still present and has not been acknowledged.
Use of this function is only possible if your user profile (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Security Editor, Operation Guide) is different from ReadOnly or Operate.

Activating another tool

If at least one message is selected in the list, you can activate the following Control Expert
tools:
• the animation tables for displaying the diagnostics function block data (FB alarms only)
and FFB system alarms,
• the cross-references with FB alarms and FFB system alarms only,
• the language editor where the diagnostics function block instance is referenced.
To launch these tools you must activate one of the following commands:
• the corresponding headings in the contextual menu,
• the Ctrl + T (animation tables), Ctrl + U (cross references) and Enter (language editor)
function keys,
• the corresponding buttons in the toolbar.

Diagnostics Viewer Commands

At a Glance
Once you have selected one or more error messages (active errors only), you have a
number of options available for accessing the Diagnostics Viewer commands:
• using the contextual menu,
• using the function keys,
• using the toolbar.

1526 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Contextual Menu
The contextual menu can be accessed by right-clicking a message from the list with the
mouse:

The commands and their function keys from the contextual menu are as follows:

Command Function key Description

Suppress - deletion of the message(s) selected

Delete in DiagBuffer - deletion of alarms in the diagnostics buffer

Retrigger the Fault Causes F5 reactivation of the diagnostics function block

Acknowledge F6 acknowledgments of selected message(s)

Initialize Editor Enter activation of the language editor

Initialize Search Ctrl + U activation of the cross references tool (search for active
errors)

Initialize Animation Table Ctrl + T activation of the animation table tool (initialize animation
table of active errors
Help on Type - opening the online help for the concerned FFB

Properties Alt + Enter displaying the Diagnostics Viewer properties box

NOTE: The Initialize Search and Initialize Animation Table commands are also
accessible through the contextual menu in the additional message information area.

33003101.26 1527
 Diagnostics Viewer

Toolbar
The icons of the toolbar corresponding to the contextual menu or to the function keys are as
follows:

DiagViewer Properties
At a Glance
The DiagViewer Properties dialog box, accessible via the DiagViewer Properties
command in the contextual menu, is used to:
• Define the color of the error messages,
• Define the flashing mode of the error messages,
• Choose the fields to be displayed,
• Define the archiving mode,
• Define the mode of opening the Diagnostics Viewer.

1528 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Properties dialog box

The screen below presents the DiagViewer Properties:

Description
The following table describes the various fields of the Properties dialog box:

33003101.26 1529
 Diagnostics Viewer

Field Description

Acknowledge blink Allows you to define the type of flashing when an error message to
be acknowledged appears. Once acknowledged messages no
longer flash.
• None: no flashing,
• Icon only: only the icon flashes,
• Entire line: the entire line flashes.
Color Allows you to define the color of the non-acknowledged error
messages.

Field Allows you to choose the fields to be displayed (fields 0 to 15). By

default all the fields are displayed.
• Select all: selects all fields,
• Clear All: deselects all fields. To select a field, check the
corresponding box by clicking the mouse.

Archiving Click this box to generate an archive, page 1530. The entry field and
the Browse button allow you to define the path of the archive file.
• Cyclic archiving: a new archive file is generated every 1000
saves.
• Periodic archiving: a new archive file is generated every x
hour.
• Hour allows you to define the number x (from 1 to 24).
• Additional information field: allows you to store additional
data in the file.
General information Displaying various information:
• PLC version.
• Diagnostics buffer memory usage.
• Number of alarms rejected if the diagnostics buffer is full.
• Show Information in the menu bar is used to display this
information in the title bar of the diagviewer window.

Automatic Opening When this button is checked, the Diagnostics Viewer is automatically
displayed when a fault appears.

Archiving error messages

At a Glance
Archiving is used to store in a file all error messages as soon as they appear, disappear or
are acknowledged. As soon as a message is read in the diagnostics buffer it is saved in the
archive file.

1530 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

If a fault appears and then disappears, it is represented by a single message in the

Diagnostics Viewer (a single line), but by 2 lines in the archive file.
The Properties dialog box allows you to activate archiving of error messages. It also allows
you to define the type of archiving and the location of the archive file.

Type of archiving
You can choose between 2 types of archiving:
• cyclic archiving: The history file created is named ProjectName.his, were
ProjectName is the name you entered in the Project Properties dialog box is.
in order to avoid the size of the archive file becoming too large, a new ProjectName.his
file is created every 1000 saves. The old file then changes name and becomes
ProjectName.bak.
Note: If a ProjectName.bak file already exists, it will be overwritten by the new file of the
same name. To avoid a loss of data, you must therefore manage your archive files.
• periodic archiving: the user defines the frequency with which a new archive file is
created (between 1 and 24 hours). The file is created under the name ProjectDraft_
date_time (for example, for a file created on 31 July 2001 at 12 h 26 min 55 s:
ProjectDraft_073101_122655. If the chosen frequency is 1 h, the next file will be
created under the name ProjectDraft_073101_132655, etc.). Creating a new file does
not overwrite the previous file.

Archive file format

The archive file is a delimited ASCII file (each item of information is separated by the ;
character). You can therefore easily import this file into a text editor or a spreadsheet.
Each line of the file takes the following form:
SystemAlarm ; 256 ; 1 ; 51 ; 0 ; 28/04/03 23:50:13 ; 28/04/03
23:51:15; 28/04/03 23:57:16 ; 0 ; 2; 10003 ;148 ; Arithmetic error
; %S18 (MAST);
where:

33003101.26 1531
 Diagnostics Viewer

• SystemAlarm: identifies the fault.

The types of fault can be:
◦ FBAlarm: function block fault
◦ SFCAlarm: sequential function chart fault
◦ SystemAlarm: system fault
◦ UndefAlarm: undefined fault
◦ AlarmERROR: errors
• 256: fault identifier,
• 1: name of this fault,
• 51: state of the diagnostics bits,
• 0: number of the declared area,
• 28/04/03 23:50:13: date and time of appearance of the fault,
• 28/04/03 23:51:15: date and time of acknowledgement of the fault,
• 28/04/03 23:57:16: date and time of disappearance of the fault,
• 0: available number of reasons for the fault,
• 2: status length of the fault,
• 10003: fault type,
• 148: fault classification,
• Arithmetic error; %S18 (MAST): additional data if you have checked the Additional
information field box.
The following table describes the additional information to a message according to fault
type.

1532 33003101.26
Diagnostics Viewer

Error type Information

FBAlarm Comment

Name of the function block instance

Name of the function block type

Name of the input or output of the faulty block

SFCAlarm Comment

Name of the faulty step

Name of the faulty transition

Format of the reference time

Additional information
SystemAlarm Fault name

Additional information according to the fault:

• watchdog,
• arithmetic,
• task,
• SFC,
• ...

33003101.26 1533
1534 33003101.26
System diagnostics

System diagnostics
What’s in This Chapter
System diagnostic................................................................ 1535

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes how to implement system diagnostics and its functionalities.

System diagnostic
At a Glance
The system diagnostic is performed automatically. When the PLC detects a system error (for
example, a watchdog being exceeded, an input/output error, division by zero, etc.),
information is sent to the diagnostic viewer. The diagnostic viewer will display a system error
message if you have checked the System diagnostics, page 548 checkbox.
NOTE: As with the project diagnostic, the information viewed on the Viewer comes from
the PLC's diag buffer, page 1516, consequently the events are dated at the source and
give the precise status of the process monitored.

Implementation
The following table describes the procedure to follow to use the system diagnostic on the
Premium, Atrium and Quantum PLCs in Control Expert.

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Project Settings

Result: the project settings configuration window is displayed.

2 In the Diagnostics area on the Build tab, check the System diagnostics, page 548 checkbox.

3 Confirm with OK.

4 Build your project.

33003101.26 1535
 System diagnostics

Step Action

5 Transfer your project to the PLC.

6 Open the Diagnostic Viewer by selecting: Tools > Diagnostic Viewer.

Result: the system diagnostic is operational and each system alarm now appears in the Viewer.

List of system alarms monitored

The following table summarizes the system information monitored automatically by the
system diagnostic service.

System Succinct description of the alarm

object

%S10 Input/output error

%S11 Watchdog overflow!

%S15 Character string fault

%S18 Overflow or arithmetic error

%S19 Task period overrun

%S20 Index overflow

%S39 Saturation in event processing

%S51 Time loss in real time clock

%S65 Extract card command

%S66 Backup application to the memory card

%S67 State of the PCMCIA application memory card battery

%S68 State of processor battery

%S76 Diagnostic buffer configured

%S77 Diagnostic buffer full

%S96 Previously backup program

%S118 General Fipio I/O fault

%S119 General in-rack I/O fault

%SW0 Master task scanning period

%SW1 Fast task scanning period

%SW2 Period of auxiliary task scanning 0.

1536 33003101.26
System diagnostics

System Succinct description of the alarm

object

%SW3 Period of auxiliary task scanning 1.

%SW4 Period of auxiliary task scanning 2.

%SW4 Period of auxiliary task scanning 3.

%SW11 Watchdog duration

%SW17 Error status for floating operation

%SW76 Diagnostic function: save

%SW77 Diagnostic function: de-registration

%SW78 Diagnostic function: number of errors

%SW96 Save/restore %MW in flash memory.

%SW97 Storage card error code

%SW125 Type of blocking error

%SW146 Fipio bus arbiter function display

%SW153 List of Fipio channel manager faults

%SW154 List of Fipio channel manager faults

33003101.26 1537
1538 33003101.26
Project diagnostics

Project diagnostics
What’s in This Chapter
How to Create a User Diagnostic DFB ................................... 1539
Project diagnostic ................................................................ 1541

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes how to implement project diagnostics and its functionalities.

How to Create a User Diagnostic DFB

At a Glance
You can create a diagnostic DFB in one of two ways.
• You can create a standard DFB and then define its values and program it so that it is a
diagnostic DFB.
• You can use the USER_DIAG_ST_MODEL (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Diagnostics, Block Library) model that we will provide you with, or use a model you
already have.
These two procedures are described below.
NOTE: to understand how user diagnostic DFBs work, refer to the USER_DIAG_ST_
MODEL (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Diagnostics, Block Library) model described
in the diagnostic library.

Creating a Diagnostic DFB without a Model

The following table describes the procedure to follow to create a diagnostic DFB without a
predefined model.

Step Action

1 In the structure view of the Project Browser, right-click on the directory Derived FB Types.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

2 Activate the Open command.

33003101.26 1539
 Project diagnostics

Step Action

Result: The Data Editor window is opened. It is positioned directly under the DFB Types tab and
shows the list of the project's DFBs.

3 Select the first empty cell in the Name column (indicated by an arrow) and enter the name of the
new DFB type, then confirm using Enter.

Result: The empty structure of the DFB type is now created. This new DFB is added to the list of
existing DFBs. It also appears in the Derived FB Types directory tree.

4 In the Data Editor, right-click on the type of DFB you have just created.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

5 Choose the Data Properties command.

Result: the Data Properties window appears.

6 Click on the Diag button.

Result: the checkbox is checked in red. This type of DFB is now a diagnostic DFB. If, in the
Project Settings, page 548, the application diagnostic has been requested, the project's
generation will incorporate the project diagnostic service in the PLC.

7 Create the inputs, outputs, inputs/outputs and the internal variables of the DFB.

Note: in the input's properties, remember to check the Diag checkbox for inputs that will be
monitored by the DFB.

8 Write your DFB's code using the REGDFB (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Diagnostics,
Block Library) function to save and date the alarm, and the DEREG (see EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Diagnostics, Block Library) function to de-register the alarm.

Note: refer to the description of the code of the (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Diagnostics,
Block Library)USER_DIAG_ST_MODEL user diagnostic DFB model if you are not familiar with
this type of DFB.

9 Run a project analysis to validate your new type of DFB.

Result: your new type of DFB is created. You can now create and insert instances of this type of
DFB in your program. When your PLC is in RUN mode, the Viewer, page 1514 will display the
alarms according to the operation you have programmed.

Creating a Diagnostic DFB with the USER_DIAG_ST_

MODEL Model
The following table describes the procedure to follow to create a diagnostic DFB using the
USER_DIAG_ST_MODEL predefined model.

1540 33003101.26
Project diagnostics

Step Action

1 In the structure view of the Project Browser, right-click on the directory Derived FB Types.

Result: A shortcut menu is opened.

2 Choose the Get from Library command.

Result: the Library Browser window appears.

3 Select the USER_DIAG_ST_MODEL diagnostic DFB model in the diagnostic library, then click
on the >> button to transfer it to your project.

4 Confirm the transfer with OK.

Result: the model appears in the Project Browser.

5 Replace the USER_DIAG_ST_MODEL name with the name of the type of user DFB you want to
create.
6 Modify and create the inputs, outputs, inputs/outputs and the internal variables of the DFB.

Note: in the input's properties, remember to check the Diag checkbox for inputs that will be
monitored by the DFB.

7 Write your DFB's code using the model.

Note: refer to the description of the code of the user diagnostic DFB model (see EcoStruxure™
Control Expert, Diagnostics, Block Library) if you are not familiar with this type of DFB.

8 Run a project analysis to validate your new type of DFB.

Result: your new type of DFB is created. You can now create and insert instances of this type of
DFB in your program. When your PLC is in RUN mode, the Viewer, page 1514 will display the
alarms according to the operation you have programmed.

Note: the message displayed by the Viewer is the comment associated with the instance of the
DFB. You must therefore remember to fill in this comment for each instance created.

Project diagnostic
At a Glance
The project diagnostic uses the diagnostic EFBs and DFBs and the diagnostic integrated in
the SFC to generate alarms on the Diagnostic Viewer.
Each diagnostic EFB and each diagnostic DFB has its own specific operation described in
the diagnostic library (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Diagnostics, Block Library). If you
cannot find the appropriate EFB or DFB among these elements, you can create your own
diagnostic DFB (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure,
Reference Manual).

33003101.26 1541
 Project diagnostics

NOTE: It is strongly recommended to only program a diagnostic DFB instance once

within the application.
NOTE: As with the system diagnostic, the information viewed on the Viewer comes from
the PLC's diag buffer, page 1516, consequently the events are dated at the source and
give the precise status of the process monitored.

Implementation of diagnostic EFBs or DFBs

The following table describes the procedure to follow to use the project with a diagnostic
EFB or DFB on the Premium, Atrium and Quantum PLCs in Control Expert.

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Project Settings

Result: the project settings configuration window is displayed.

2 In the Diagnostics area on the Build tab, check the Application diagnostics, page 548
checkbox.
3 Choose the language of the messages in the Viewer.

4 Choose the Application level, page 548 (alarm cause search level).

5 Confirm with OK.

6 Integrate the diagnostic EFBs or DFBs (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Diagnostics, Block
Library) in your application.

Note: The messages displayed in the Viewer will be the comments you will have associated with
the instances of your diagnostic EFBs or DFBs.

7 Build your project.

8 Transfer your project to the PLC.

9 Open the Diagnostic Viewer by selecting: Tools > Diagnostic Viewer.

Result: the system diagnostic is operational and each alarm generated by your EFBs or DFBs
now appears in the Viewer.

Implementation of the SFC diagnostic

The following table describes the procedure to follow to use the SFC diagnostic on the
Premium, Atrium and Quantum PLCs in Control Expert.

1542 33003101.26
Project diagnostics

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Project Settings

Result: the project settings configuration window is displayed.

2 In the Diagnostics area on the Build tab, check the Application diagnostics, page 548
checkbox.
3 Confirm with OK.
4 Build your project.

5 Transfer your project to the PLC.

6 Open the Diagnostic Viewer by selecting: Tools > Diagnostic Viewer.

Result: the SFC diagnostic is operational and each alarm linked to the SFC now appears in the
Viewer.

Error message display

The number of messages it is possible to display is limited only by the size of the memory
buffer.When there is not enough memory, a message warns the user and any messages of
errors that have disappeared or have been acknowledged (if necessary) are then deleted.
It is possible to modify the color of the messages and the blinking associated with an
acknowledged message.
In the viewer, it is possible to show only those messages which come from one or more
specific zones.
The list of messages can be sorted according to each field. To do this, simply click on the
column header containing the data on the basis of which the sort is to be carried out.
A second click carries out the sort in opposite order.
By default, the error messages are inserted into the list in the chronological order in which
they appear.

33003101.26 1543
1544 33003101.26
Operator screen
What’s in This Part
General information ............................................................. 1546
First steps ........................................................................... 1549
Editing runtime screens ........................................................ 1559
Runtime screens in online mode ........................................... 1626
Runtime screens objects library ............................................ 1637

Subject of this Part

This part describes the operator screens built into Control Expert:

33003101.26 1545
 General information

General information
What’s in This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................... 1546
Creation of Runtime Screens ................................................ 1547

Object of this section

This chapter introduces Control Expert built-in operator screens: description, creation and
operator screens

Introduction
Introduction
The operator screens aid the operating of an automated process.
They use in the Control Expert software:
• The project browser for browsing through the screens and launching different tools
(the graphics editor, variables editor, messages editor, ...)
• The graphics editor for creating or changing screens. In connected mode, it also
allows the viewing of animated screens and process driving
• The library of objects which presents design objects and enables their insertion in the
screens. It also allows users to create their own objects and insert them in a library
family.

1546 33003101.26
General information

Example of use
Example of automation structure that uses operator screens:

In this structure, we find:

• The PLC which contains the process management automation project.
• The terminal which contains the automation project with the operator screens. It is
connected to the PLCs by the console line or by a network.
• The operator screens view the process and can be ordered by the keyboard of the PC,
the mouse or even by a command terminal connected to the PLCs.

Creation of Runtime Screens

Introduction
For a given project, you can use the graphic editor to create runtime screens.
These screens are produced with texts and graphic objects that you can draw yourself
(lines, rectangles, curves, etc.) or retrieve from the graphic objects library. They comprise
static (background, title, etc.) and dynamic (animated) parts which reflect the status of the
process.
You must assign a variable to them in order to animate the dynamic objects, the variables’
value will determine display.

33003101.26 1547
 General information

You can also insert driving objects (buttons, input zones, etc.) in your screens to drive the
process.
The screens can then be linked together in order to respond to the specific automation
requirements.

Example of screen
Example of a screen that shows the state of a process, the quantities produced and allows
the safety management of a production line.This screen comprises dynamic displays
which change to match the process and static displays that remain unchanged.

1548 33003101.26
First steps

First steps
What’s in This Chapter
Working principles ............................................................... 1549
Menus and tools in the runtime screen editor ......................... 1550
Configuring options from the runtime screen editor ................. 1557

Object of this chapter

This chapter gives the elements required for understanding the built-in runtimescreens:
notion of runtime screen editor, main menus, etc.

Working principles
Subject of this section
This section recalls the working principles of the runtime screen editor as well as the method
of access.

How to access the operator screens

At a Glance
An operator screen is a window just as any other editor (configuration, language, data
editor). This window can be opened, moved, and resized.

Methodology
The following table lists the operations to perform in order to access operator screens.

33003101.26 1549
 First steps

Step Action

1 View the project in structural view (View > Structural View).

2 In the project browser, expand the folder Operator Screens or the folder of the family for which
you want to open a screen.

3 Open the screen or screens to be viewed. Select a screen to open it and activate the command
Open in the contextual menu.

Example of screen
The following screen shows an example of operator screens.

Menus and tools in the runtime screen editor

Subject of this section
This section introduces the different menus as well as the toolbars offered by the runtime
screen editor.

1550 33003101.26
First steps

Menus in the operator screen editor

Main menus in the operator screens
The Control Expert menu bar is identical for all tools accessible from the project browser.
This is a contextual bar; in other words the commands accessible via the menus depend on
the element (window, graphic object, etc.) that is activated when the menu is scrolled down.
The commands of the operator screen editor can be accessed via the menus:
• Edit which enable the creation or modification of the operator screens,
• View is used to define screen properties (background color, size, etc.),
• Services for choosing the editing tool, selecting an animated object, etc.

Edit menu
Commands that can be accessed in the Edit menu are.

Field Description

Undo all Undoes all changes made in the screen since the last validation.

Enable Validates all changes made in the screen since the last validation.

Cancel Cancels the last completed change.

Redo Re-performs the changes previously cancelled by a command Cancel.

Cut Deletes from the screen the selected item(s) and places it (them) on the clipboard.

Copy Copies the selected item(s) and places it (them) on the clipboard.

Paste Pastes the content of the clipboard on the screen.

Delete Deletes from the screen the selected item(s), without copying them in the clipboard.

Select all Selects all the items contained in the screen

New Sub-menu from which you may select:

Line: Create a line

Rectangle: Create a rectangle

Ellipse: Create an ellipse

Curve: Create a curve

Polygon: Create a closed polygon

Text: Create texts

Image: incorporation of an image

33003101.26 1551
 First steps

Field Description

Screen browsing: Create an inter-screen browser button

Controls: Creating a driving object (command) of type:

• button
• checkbox
• entry field
• counter
• cursor
• explicit exchanges

Select mode Select one or several objects.

Align Sub-menu from which you may select:

Top: Upper alignment

Bottom: Lower alignment

Left: Left alignment

Right: Right alignment

Flip Sub-menu from which you may select:

Flip Vertical

Flip Horizontal

Group Grouping of objects.

Ungroup Ungrouping of objects.

Order Sub-menu from which you may select:

Foreground: Placing in the foreground

Background: Placing in the background

Properties Is used to define properties of the selected item: color, frame, piloted variable, related
text, etc.

Information Displays information specific to the selected object: type of item, position, size, related
variable.

Display menu
Commands accessible from the View menu are as follows.

1552 33003101.26
First steps

Field Description

Full screen Full screen display of the graphics editor window.

Open model used Enables user to open the model if it is used in the current screen.

Screen properties Is used to define the properties of the active screen: screen name, background color,
family, etc.

Services Menu
The commands accessible from the Services Menu areas follows.

Field Description

Animation Starts or stops the animation of the operator screen

Enable variable Authorizes the user to modify the variables in the PLC from the command items.
modification
Driving via the PLC Used to drive the screens with the PLC. The PLCs requirements are taken into account
by means of a variable defined in the advanced parameters, page 584.

Since the screen is called up by the PLC, editing and modification of the configuration
parameters are disabled.

Driving via the Used to drive the screens via the Operator. The requirements of the PLC are disabled,
operator it is the operator who selects the screen that he wants to view.

Previous animated Selects the previous animated object.

object

Next animated Selects the next animated object.

object

Initialize search Used to create a list of cross references for variables associated with objects selected.

Initialize animation Used to create an animation table made up of the variables associated with selected
table items.

Important
Right clicking can be used to gain direct access to the functions available for the current
context. This is the contextual menu.
In online mode, all commands are available if they have not been disabled, page 594.

33003101.26 1553
 First steps

Multi-instantiation
The operator screen editor is used to open several windows (instances) to open
simultaneously. Each window contains a different screen. The keyboard command Ctrl +
Tab is used to switch between windows. Even if several windows are open, only a single tool
bar is displayed and acts on the active window alone.
The full screen display is only used to view one screen.

Edit toolbar
At a Glance
Clicking Tools > Customize displays the Edit toolbar described above. Each icon (tool)
corresponds to an action concerning one or several objects in the graphical editor.
The figure below presents the tools available via the editor toolbar.

Drawing tools for standard objects

The available tools are as follows:

They are used to complete the operations below:

Number Description

1 Select one or more objects

2 Create a line
3 Create a rectangle

4 Create an ellipse

5 Create a curve

1554 33003101.26
First steps

Number Description

6 Create a closed polygon

7 Create texts
8 Incorporation of an image

9 Create an inter-screen browser button

Design tools for command objects

The available tools are as follows:

They are used to complete the operations below:

Number Description

1 Create an input zone

2 Create a button
3 Create a check box
4 Create a counter
5 Create a cursor
6 Create an explicit exchange button

Positioning tools for a group of objects

The available tools are as follows:

33003101.26 1555
 First steps

They are used to complete the operations below:

Number Description

1 Flip Vertical

2 Flip Horizontal

3 Left alignment

4 Right alignment

5 Upper alignment

6 Lower alignment

7 Grouping of objects

8 Ungrouping of objects

9 Placing in the foreground

10 Placing in the background

Object properties
The proposed tool is the following. It is used to access the properties of an object.

Screen driving tools

The available tools are as follows:

They are used to complete the operations below:

1556 33003101.26
First steps

Number Description

1 Driving via the PLC. This service may also be accessed via a keyboard shortcut F2.

2 Driving via the operator. This service may also be accessed via a keyboard shortcut F3.

Access tools to the animated objects

The available tools are as follows:

They are used to complete the operations below:

Number Description

1 Selects the next animated object. This service may also be accessed via a keyboard shortcut
F4.
2 Selects the previous animated object. This service may also be accessed via a keyboard
shortcut F5.
3 Initialization of an animation table. This service may also be accessed via a keyboard shortcut
CTRL+T.
4 Creates a list of cross-references for variables associated with objects selected. This service
may also be accessed via a keyboard shortcut CTRL+U.

5 Authorizes the user to modify the variables in the PLC from the command items. This service
may also be accessed via a keyboard shortcut F7.

Configuring options from the runtime screen

editor
Subject of this section
This section describes all the configuration options for the runtime screen editor.

33003101.26 1557
 First steps

General configuration of operator screens

At a Glance
General configuration options and settings for all the operator screens can be used to
customize their functions.
The options, page 594 are accessible by clicking Tools > Options > Operator Screens tab.
The settings, page 583 are accessible by clicking Tools > Project Settings > Operator
Screens tab.
These modifications are immediate and are automatically saved.

1558 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Editing runtime screens

What’s in This Chapter
Editing screens from the browser ......................................... 1559
Creating an object................................................................ 1571
Default Properties screen ..................................................... 1580
Modification of an object’s attributes ...................................... 1582
Manipulation of objects in runtime screens............................. 1607
Managing the runtime screens messages editor..................... 1615

Object of this section

This chapter describes the different functions offered to the user, for editing the runtime
screens: create, modify, delete a screen or a family of screens, manage built-in runtime
screen messages etc.

Editing screens from the browser

Subject of this section
This section describes the different editing actions that users can perform on the screens or
family of screens: create, modify, delete, etc.

Editing operator screens

Introduction
You can access operator screens through the project browser in the directory Operator
Screens. It displays the information linked to each project in a tree directory.
The screens may be directly associated with the directory or grouped in families of screens.
The tree directory of operator screens may be expanded and contracted in order to obtain
the required level of display.

33003101.26 1559
 Editing runtime screens

Screens
The operator screens accept all editing functions:
• Create
• Modify
• Delete
• Move
• Attach/Detach
• Export

Screen families
The screens are regrouped in families which accept the same editing functions as the
screens:
• Create
• Modify
• Delete
• Move
• Attach/Detach
• Export

1560 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Introduction to the project browser window

The screen below shows the project browser window with in this example a single screen
(Menu) and a screen family (Functions).

Operator screen editor functions

At a Glance
You can access all functions via the Edit menu or via the context menu by right clicking in
the project browser window.

How to Create a Screen

The Table Below Shows the Procedure for Creating a Screen.

33003101.26 1561
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Right click the Operator Screens directory contained in the project browser tree directory.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Enable the New screen command.

Result: A new screen with a generic name, appears in the tree directory

How to Modify the Name of a Screen

The Table Below Shows the Procedure for Modifying a Screen Name.

Step Action

1 In the project browser, right click on the screen to be modified.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Enable the Screen properties command.

Result: The screen properties dialog box appears

3 Modify the screen name in the Name field and confirm with OK.

Result: The screen appears with a new name, in the tree directory

How to Delete a Screen

The Table Below Shows the Procedure for Deleting a Screen.

Step Action

1 In the project browser, right click on the screen to be deleted.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Activate the Delete command.

Result: The screen is deleted from the directory tree

How to Move a Screen

The Table Below Shows the Procedure for Moving a Screen in the Tree Directory (For
Example, Change Families).

1562 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Right click on the screen to be moved, from the project browser.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Enable the Screen properties command.

Result: The screen properties dialog box appears

3 Define in the Location: Family field, the name of the new family under which you want to place
the screen. Click OK to confirm.

Result: The screen is placed in its new position To position it in the root (Operator Screen
directory) leave the Location: Family field empty.

NOTE: The screen can also be moved with the Drag-Drop function

Operation of Screen Movement

When you move a screen from a family to the root, if:
• the family is associated with a functional module, the screen loses this link.
When you move a screen from a family to another or from the root to a family, if:
• the destination family screen is associated with a functional module, the screen will be
also.
• the destination family screen is not associated with a functional module, the screen will
not be associated with any functional module.

How to Attach a Screen to a Functional Module

The Following Table Summarizes the Processes Used to Attach a Screen to a Functional
Module.

Step Action

1 Display the structural view and the functional view.

2 In the project browser of the structural view, select the screen to be associated with a functional
module.
3 Hold down the left mouse button to maintain the selection.
4 Drag and Drop the screen in the destination functional module of the functional view. The
authorized insertion point of the screen in the destination functional module, is represented by a
line.

Result:The screen is now associated with the chosen functional module

33003101.26 1563
 Editing runtime screens

How to Detach a Screen from a Functional Module

The Following Table Summarizes the Processes Used to Detach a Screen from a Functional
Module.

Step Action

1 In the functional view, right click on the screen to be detached from its functional module.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Activate the Detach command.

Result:The screen loses its link with this functional module It can be associated with another
functional module.

How to Delete All Screens and All Families

The Table Below Shows the Procedure for Deleting all the Screens and Families of a
Project.

Step Action

1 In the structural view project browser, select the Operator Screen directory.

2 Right click on the Operator Screen directory.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

3 Activate the Delete all command.

Result:: A dialog box appears

4 Click OK to confirm your choice of deleting all screens and all families.

Result:: All screens and all families are deleted from the project

How to Export Screens

To find out the procedure for exporting operator screens, page 1704.

How to Import Screens

To find out the procedure for importing operator screens, page 1705.

1564 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Screen Family Editor Functions

At a Glance
All Functions Can Be Accessed via the Edit Menu or by Right Clicking on the Browser
Window in the Project Browser.

How to Create a Screen Family

The Following Table Summarizes the Processes Used to Create a Screen Family.

Step Action

1 Right click the Operator Screens folder contained in the project browser tree directory.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Enable the command New family.

Result:: A new family with a generic name appears in the directory tree.

How to Modify the Name of a Screen Family

The Table Below Shows the Procedures for Modifying the Name of a Screen Family.

Step Action

1 Right click on the family to be modified, from the project browser.

2 Enable the Family properties command.

Result:: The screen family dialog box appears

3 Modify the name of the family in the Name field, and click OK to confirm.

Result:: The screen family appears under a new name in the directory tree

How to Delete a Screen Family

The Following Table Summarizes the Processes Used to Delete a Screen Family.

33003101.26 1565
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Right click on the family to be deleted, from the project browser.

2 Activate the Delete command.

Result:: The screen family is deleted from the directory tree

How to Move a Screen Family

The Following Table Summarizes the Processes Used to Move a Screen Family.

Step Action

1 Select the screen family to move in the project browser.

2 Hold down the left mouse button to maintain the selection.

3 Move the screen family to the desired position in the project browser.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result:: The screen family is moved to chosen place

How to Attach a Screen Family to a Functional Module

The Following Table Summarizes the Processes Used to Attach a Screen Family to a
Functional Module.

Step Action

1 Display the structural view and the functional view.

2 In the project browser of the structural view, select the screen family to be associated with a
functional module.
3 Hold down the left mouse button to maintain the selection.
4 Drag and Drop the screen family to the destination functional module of the functional view. The
authorized insertion point of the screen family in the functional module, is represented by a line.

Result:: The screen family is now associated with the chosen functional module

How to Detach a Screen Family from a Functional Module

The following Table Summarizes the Processes Used to Detach a Screen Family from a
Functional Module.

1566 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 In the functional view, right click on the screen family to be detached from its functional module.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Activate the Detach command.

Result:: The screen family no longer has a link with a functional module It can be associated
with another functional module.

How to Export a Screen Family

The export of a screen family takes place in the same way as screen export, page 1704.

Operator screen properties

At a Glance
When a screen is selected, the dialog box that is accessed by clicking Edit > Screen
properties can be used to:
• Modify the screen label
• Modify the value associated with the screen
• Modify the comment associated with a screen
• Modify the screen position
• Modify the screen type
• Modify the color of the screen
• Modify the size of the screen
• Query its creation and modification dates
• Query the number of objects in the screen
• Query the number of variables used in the screen
The dialog box includes three tabs:
• General
• Display
• Information

33003101.26 1567
 Editing runtime screens

Screen properties dialog box

The screen properties dialog box is as follows:

Tab: General
The following table describes the different functions offered by the General tab of the screen
properties dialog box.

Field Description

Name Screen name. It can be modified and a maximum of 200 characters can be
typed in this field.

Value Screen identification number You can modify this number which is used when
you wish to associate a screen browse, page 1595 button to the screen. This
number can be used when the PLC, page 594 controls the screen display in
connected mode.
Comment Screen comment
Family Name of the family to which the screen belongs. The button to the right of the
field is used to access the list of existing families.

Functional Module Name of the functional module to which the screen is linked. The button to the
right of the field is used to access the list of existing the functional modules.

1568 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Tab: Display
The following table describes the different functions offered by the Display tab of the screen
properties dialog box.

Field Description

Used as Pattern When this box is checked, the screen may be used as a pattern for any project
screen. A pattern screen cannot contain animated objects.

Uses pattern When this box is checked, the background of this screen uses the background
pattern that you have defined. The right button can be used to select the model
screen.
Default color When this box is checked, the screen background is the default color used by
Windows software for windows.
Custom color When this box is checked, the screen background is the color you defined
(color of the field located on right side of the check box). The button allows
access to the screen color settings.

Size Screen sizes. It can be changed and its default value is 1280 pixels by 1024
pixels.

Tab: Information
The following table describes the different functions offered by the Information tab of the
property dialog box of a screen.

Field Description

Information This information cannot be modified; it indicates:

• The screen creation date
• The last screen modification date
• The number of objects contained in the screen
• The number of variables used in the screen

Properties of Operator Screen Families

At a Glance
When a screen family is selected, the dialog box accessible via the Edit > Family
Properties command allows you to:
• modify the name of a screen family

33003101.26 1569
 Editing runtime screens

• associate the family with a functional module.

Properties dialog box of a family

The properties dialog box of a family is as follows.

Description
The following table describes the different functions offered by the properties dialog box of a
family.

Field Description

Family Name of the family to which the screen belongs. It can be modified and can
contain up to 200 characters.

Functional Module Name of the functional module with which the family is associated. The button
to the right of the field is used to access the list of existing functional modules.

NOTE: A functional module cannot be created from this dialog box.

1570 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Creating an object
Subject of this section
This section describes how to create or insert an object.

Introduction of a graphic screen object

General
4 types of objects can be created in a graphic screen :
• standard objects: line, rectangle, ellipse, curve, polyline, text,
• images: bitmap files with the BMP or JPGextension,
• the driving (or command) objects: button, check box, input field, counter, cursor, explicit
exchange object, screen browser button,
• compound objects: group of objects of previous 3 types, created by the user or from the
object library.
All the objects used to create a screen can be static or animated.

How to create standard objects

At a Glance
Standard objects are the basic elements of graphic screens.
They are the simple objects which allow the composition of complex objects.
There are two types of standard objects:
• Static objects
• Dynamic or animated objects
Static objects do not have variables associated with them. Their graphic representation is
fixed.
Dynamic objects possess one associated variable, which allows their display to be modified.

33003101.26 1571
 Editing runtime screens

How to create a standard object

The create standard object procedure is identical regardless of the object, with the exception
of polygons.

Step Action

1 Select the type of object that you wish to create from the tool palette.

2 Move the mouse cursor to the position where you want to place the top left corner of your object.

3 Press down the left mouse button.

4 Hold the button down and move the mouse cursor to the position where you want to place the
bottom right corner of the object.

5 Release the button.

Result: The object is created when you release the mouse button

6 Right click on the object.

Result: The contextual menu appears

7 Enable the Properties command.

Result: A contextual dialog box appears This box depends on the type of object and allows the
attributes, page 1582 to be fixed.

How to create a polygon object

The procedure for creating a polygon object is as follows.

Step Action

1 Select the type of polygon object that you require from the tool palette.

2 Move the mouse cursor to the position where you want to place the first point of your object.

3 Press the left mouse button then release.

Result: The object’s start point is created

4 Move the mouse cursor to the position where you want to end the first line.

5 Press the left mouse button then release.

Result: You have just created the first line of your object

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create new lines to form your polygon object.

Result: Segments of consecutive straight lines are created

7 Finish by left clicking on the end point of the object.

1572 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Step Action

Result: The object is created

8 Right click on the object.

Result: The contextual menu appears

9 Enable the Properties command.

Result: A contextual dialog box appears This box depends on the type of object and allows the
attributes, page 1582 to be fixed.

How to insert an image in a screen

At a Glance
An operator screen can contain one or several bmp, jpg or jpeg format images.

How to insert an image object in a screen

Follow the steps below to insert an image in a screen.

33003101.26 1573
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Select the image icon from the tool palette.

Result: the selection window of the bitmap file to be inserted appears

2 Select the type of file to display (bmp, jpg or jpeg).

3 Select the file to be inserted and enable the Open command.

Result: the image is inserted in the screen It appears with selection handles.

Rules and precautions for use

Only images in bmp, jpg or jpeg formats are recognized.
Optimize loading time:
• Do not integrate too many images into one screen
• Limit the size of images
• Avoid modifying the image’s proportions and size in the screen
Optimize display quality:
• Avoid modifying the image’s proportions and size in the screen
• If a screen contains several different images, use 24 bit screen depth
If the image, page 1599 is not copied in the project, it will not be exported, during a screen
export, page 1704.

1574 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

How to create driving objects

At a Glance
Driving (or command) objets allow the user to perform an action:
• Browse from one screen to another
• Modify the value of a variable
• Send a command to the PLCs task module
There are 7 types of these objects:
• Buttons
• Check boxes
• Input zones
• Counters
• Cursors
• Buttons for browsing between screens
• Objects for explicit exchanges

How to create a driving object

The procedure for creating a driving object is as follows.

Step Action

1 Select the type of driving object that you wish to create from the tool palette.

2 Move the mouse cursor to the position where you want to place the top left corner of your object.

3 Press down the left mouse button.

4 Hold the button down and move the mouse cursor to the position where you want to place the
bottom right corner of the object.

5 Release the button.

Result: The object is created when you release the mouse button

6 Enable the Selection tool from the tool palette.

33003101.26 1575
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

7 Right click on the object.

Result: The contextual menu appears

8 Enable the Properties command.

Result: A contextual dialog box appears This box depends on the type of object and allows the
attributes, page 1582 to be fixed.

Type of data driven according to the driving object

The table indicates the types of variables that may be driven by the driving objects.

Object Bit Byte Word Double word Floating point

Button X X* X* X* X*
Check box X - - - -

Entry field X X X X X

Counter X X X X X
Cursor X X X X X

Legend:

* : Only in the case of unsynchronized buttons

NOTE: Driving objects are always placed in the foreground. To prevent command errors,
we strongly advise against placing driving objects between them.

Operation of the driving objects

At a Glance
The piloting objects are enabled by clicking on the mouse (or via the keyboard). Depending
on the fixed attribute, these objects act on their associated variables.
NOTE: The state of associated variables can be changed by the PLC application. The
action of the driven object doesn't constitute a forcing of the variable.
Furthermore, so long as the input of a value has not been validated or that the driven object
maintains control, the displayed value may differ from the real value of the variable
contained in the PLC memory.

1576 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

How the buttons operate

Depending on its attributes, a button works as follows.

When you click on the button, if and if Then

the associated variable is...
a bit, driving is unsynchronized, the associated variable switches to
1 when the left mouse button is
held down, and switches back to 0
when released.
digital, driving is unsynchronized, the associated variable takes the
fixed threshold value in the button
attributes.
a bit, driving is synchronized, the state of the associated variable
changes. It moves to 0 if it was at
1, and vice versa.

How a check box operates

A check box works as follows.

When the box Then

is checked, the associated bit is set to 1.

isn’t checked, the associated bit is set to 0.

How an input zone operates

An input zone works as follows.

When and if Then

the entry zone contains a value, you press Enter, the associated variable takes the
value read in the entry zone.

the associated variable is modified you did not enter a value in the the zone displays the value read in
by the PLC, entry zone, the PLC.

How a counter operates

A counter operates as follows.

33003101.26 1577
 Editing runtime screens

When and if Then

the counter is horizontal, you click on the right arrow of the the associated variable is
counter, incremented by one unit.

the counter is horizontal, you click on the left arrow of the the associated variable is
counter, decreased by one unit.

the counter is vertical, you click on the top arrow of the the associated variable is
counter, incremented by one unit.

the counter is vertical, you click on the bottom arrow of the the associated variable is
counter, decreased by one unit.

NOTE: The increment and decrement value is multiplied by 10, 100 then 1000 when the
arrow is held down.

How a cursor operates

A cursor operates as follows.

When the cursor and if Then

is horizontal, it is moved to the right, the associated variable is
incremented proportionally to the
move made and to the minimum
and maximum thresholds defined
for the variable.
is horizontal, it is moved to the left, the associated variable is
decremented proportionally to the
move made and to the minimum
and maximum thresholds defined
for the variable.
is vertical, it is moved upwards, the associated variable is
incremented proportionally to the
move made and to the minimum
and maximum thresholds defined
for the variable.
is vertical, it is moved downwards, the associated variable is
decremented proportionally to the
move made and to the minimum
and maximum thresholds defined
for the variable.

1578 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

How an inter-screen browser button operates

An inter-screen browser button operates as follows.

When the button Then

is enabled by a click, the screen with the associated number is displayed.

NOTE: In the case of Multi-Instance, page 583 mode, clicking on the browser button
opens a new window with the specified screen. If this is not the case, the new screen
opens in the current window.

How an explicit exchange button operates

An explicit exchange button operates as follows.

When the button Then

is enabled by a click, the associated explicit exchange is launched. The
memory zone of the PLC and that of the module are
updated according to the configured, page 1601
parameters.

33003101.26 1579
 Editing runtime screens

Default Properties screen

Subject of this section
This section present the Default Properties screen of the operators screen, its elements and
its behaviour

Default Properties screen

At a Glance
The Default properties screen allows to set common attributes for all objects you will place in
the operator screen.
You can access this screen by right-clicking on the operator screen and select properties in
the menu. (No object must be selected)

Default properties screen

The following screen shows the different tabs of the default properties screen. (In this
example animation tab is visible)

1580 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Description
To see the description of all the tabs refer to object properties tab screens.
• Animation tab, page 1587
• Animation type tab, page 1589
• Drawing tab, page 1583
• Text tab, page 1585
• Screen browse tab, page 1595

Behaviour of the Default Properties screen

When you modificate attributes in the Default Properties screen, the new attributes are
taken into account only for the objects you will place in the operator screen after the
modifications. If there are already objects in the operator screens, the modifications will not
impact them. In this case you have to modify the attributes for each object (or compound of
objects).

33003101.26 1581
 Editing runtime screens

Modification of an object’s attributes

Subject of this section
This section describes the attributes of objects, how to access these attributes and the
associated information.

How to access an object’s attributes

At a Glance
Each object created in a screen has attributes which depend on its type. These attributes
are accessed via the tabs below.
• Animation, page 1587
• Type of animation, page 1589
• Design, page 1583
• Text, page 1585
• Image, page 1599
• Driving, page 1597
• Screen browsing, page 1595
• Explicit exchanges, page 1601
Access to these attributes is the same for all created objects.

How to access an object’s attributes

The table below indicates how to access the settings of object attributes.

Step Action

1 Select the object whose attributes you wish to modify.

2 Click on the object with the right mouse button.

Result: The contextual menu appears

3 Enable the Properties command.

Result: A dialog box displays the attributes linked to the kind of object chosen.

1582 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Design tab
At a Glance
This tab is used to set the design attributes of a graphic object:
• Modification of the object’s contour line
• Modification of the object’s pattern and color

Design attributes setting screen

The screen below is used to set the design attributes of a rectangle type graphic object.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

33003101.26 1583
 Editing runtime screens

Field Description

Line Contour line of the graphic object:

• Single line
• Single or complex dotted line
• No contour line
Thickness Thickness of the object’s contour line. It is defined in pixels and may range from 1 to 10
pixels maximum.

Outline color Color of contour line. The color palette contains 16 predefined colors and provides
access to the extended colors, page 1584 parameter screen.

Pattern The pattern inside the object. This pattern is defined by a frame and a background
color. The available frames are as follows:
• None (the background is transparent)
• Fill (filled with the selected background color)
• Horizontal frame
• Vertical frame
• Diagonal frame to the top
• Diagonal frame to the bottom
• Grid
• Lattice
Round the corners When this box is checked, the corners of rectangle type objects are rounded.

Background color Color of the object’s content (background). The colors palette contains 16 predefined
colors and provides access to the extended colors, page 1584 parameter screen.

Extended colors
At a Glance
This dialog box proposes 48 basic colors and allows you to create personalized (RGB)
colors enhanced with tint, saturation and brightness.

1584 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Color parameter screen

The following screen allows you to create or modify the extended colors.

Creating a personalized color

This table describes how to create a new color, that can be used for the graphic objects.

Step Action

1 Position the cross hair for selecting color, tint and saturation to find the required shade.

2 Adjust (up or down) the light and color selection cursor to refine your choice.

3 Select a box from Custom Color.

4 Click on the Add to custom colors button to create a new color.

Text tab
At a Glance
This tab is used to set the text attributes of a graphic object:
• text input,

33003101.26 1585
 Editing runtime screens

• associate a hyperlink,
• select the character font,
• select font size,
• set text alignment,
• select text style,
• select text color.

Text attributes setting screen

The screen below is used to set the text attributes of a graphic object.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

Field Description

Text Text of the object. 32635 maximum characters entered on several lines, separated by a
carriage return. If the related variable is of the real type, users may define a display
format as #XX.XXX# (in this case a 5 figure display with three decimals).

Allows access to the dialog box to define the hyperlink. This hyperlink, page 1765 will
be associated with the text attribute of the graphic object.
button

1586 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Field Description

Url
Static display of the hyperlink defined by the button.

Font Character font. The fonts available for selection are those installed in Windows.
Size Font size.
Alignment Text alignment: align left, right or centered in relation to the display area.

Style Text style: bold, underlined, italics or capitals.

Color Text color. The colors palette contains 16 predefined colors and provides access to the
extended colors, page 1584 parameter screen.

Animation Tab
At a Glance
All the graphic objects (simple or compound) that you create in a screen can be animated.
This tab allows users to set the animation attributes of a graphic object.
• to decide to animate an object,
• to choose the animation variable,
• to choose the display conditions.

33003101.26 1587
 Editing runtime screens

Animation attributes setting screen

The following screen is used to set the animation attributes of a graphic object.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

Field Description

Animated object The object is animated if this box is checked.

Calls the variable selection tool to select the variable to associate with the object.
button
Variable The animation variable linked to the object. Possibilities:
• simple variables,
• the public variables of a function block,
• the parameters (input, output, input/out) of a function block.

Type Type of animation variable linked to the object. The type must be EDT (Bool, Ebool, Int,
Dint, Uint, Udint, Real, Time...). It is not possible to use structures or tables. However, it
is possible to use items from tables or structures if they are of type EDT.

1588 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Field Description

Comment Comment of the animation variable linked to the object.

Display condition The object’s display condition:

• Continuous display: the graphic object is always displayed on the screen,
• Bit = 0: the graphic object is displayed if the associated variable (bit) is in state 0,
• Bit = 1: the graphic object is displayed if the associated variable (bit) is in state 1,
• <=, >=, =, <>: the graphic object is displayed if the defined condition is true.
• <= value <=: the graphic object is displayed if the defined condition is true.

Animation type tab

At a Glance
All the graphic objects (simple or compound) that you create in a screen can be animated.
This tab is used to set the animation type which depends on the nature of the graphic object
to be animated:
• to select the object’s display mode,
• to select the display mode of the text linked to the object,
• to select flashing option,
• to select the trend diagram mode,
• to choose bar chart mode.

33003101.26 1589
 Editing runtime screens

Animation type attributes setting screen

The following below is used to set the animation type attributes of a graphic object.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

Field Description

Standard Display The object is displayed with its attributes if this button is selected.

Value The value taken by the variable is displayed according to the display mode chosen.

In offline mode, even if this animation style is selected, the text defined in the Text field
of the object is displayed on the screen with the selected font and size.

Display Choice of display mode:

• Decimal,
• Hexadecimal (value preceded by 16#),
• Binary (value preceded by 2#),
• ASCII.
When the length of the object’s definition zone is too small to display the value, the field
is filled with # characters. The font used is the one defined in the Text tab, page 1585.

If the animation variable is of the String type (string of characters), the Display field
cannot be accessed because viewing is automatically in ASCII.

Message You must select this button to display a message configured in the Operator screens
messages editor, page 1615. The Number field allows you to enter either a message

1590 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Field Description

number, or the term Val. In the last case, the displayed message will be the one whose
value is contained in the variable associated with the object. The Shift field allows you
to enter a value that will be added to the one contained in the variable.
Variable comment If this button is selected and if the text animation condition is met, the comment
associated with the variable is displayed.

Note: This function allows, among other things, to avoid a double entry. Enter the
comment once in the variables editor. This will be used as a message linked to the
variable.
Trend diagram You may use rectangle type objects such as trend diagrams, page 1592. Selecting this
box will give you access to the trend diagram’s parametering box.

Bar chart You may use rectangle type objects such as bar charts, page 1593. Selecting this box
will give you access to the bar chart’s parametering box.

Flashing When this box is selected and if the display condition is met, the background of the
background graphic object flashes according to the user-specified flashing color.

Properties
The table below shows the types of animation that may be associated with the driving
objects.

Object Standard Value Message Trend diagram Bar chart Flashing

Line X - - - - X
Rectangle X - - X X X

Ellipse X - - - - X

Curve X - - - - X
Polygon X - - - - X

Text X X X - - X
Compound X - - - - -
object

Image X - - - - -

Control X - - - - -

Legend:

X: Yes

- : No

33003101.26 1591
 Editing runtime screens

Trend diagrams
At a Glance
A trend diagram allows the graphic representation of a variable status, with the
representative curve moving from right to left.
You are advised to limit the number of trend diagrams on a same page because their display
decreases the system’s performance.
Only rectangular type objects can be used as trend diagrams.

Trend diagram parameter screen

The screen below allows to parameter the animated rectangles of the trend diagram format.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

Attribute Description

Sampling Period in which a new value is added at the end of the diagram and the diagram is
refreshed.

Default value: 1 second.

When the sampling period is given in seconds, values between 1 and 3600 are allowed.
When it is given in milliseconds, the allowed range is 1 to 9999. Sampling periods
below 100 ms produce a lot of windows messages and generate a high CPU load.
Therefore only few diagrams with such small periods should be animated at the same
time and long lasting actions like Build Changes should be avoided while diagrams are
animated (see also the NOTE at the end of the table).

Definition Length of value display. Each new value is represented by a right segment whose
length is fixed by the definition.

1592 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Attribute Description

The definition is expressed in pixels between 1 and 20.

The value by default is 2.

Line color Color of the timing diagram’s right segments

The colors palette contains 16 predefined colors and provides access to the extended
colors, page 1584 parameter screen.

Threshold: Thresholds between which the value representation develops. For binary values, the
minimum and thresholds must be 0 and 1.
maximum
Display period This value is calculated. It depends on the size of the rectangle, the sampling value and
the definition.

The procedure is as follows:

Period = Rectangle size / Definition x Sampling.

NOTE: Internally, for every diagram, a timer is started with the sampling period defined
by the user. When the timer fires, the last value of the corresponding variable
transmitted from the PLC is read and added at the end of the diagram. Such timers may
not always fire exactly in equidistant periods (e.g. they may be delayed when a lot of
tasks run in parallel on the PC). Therefore the displayed values may not represent the
exact values in the PLC at the end of each sampling period.

Bar chart
At a Glance
Bar charts allow the graphic representation, in rectangular format, of the status of a variable.
Only rectangular type objects can be used as bar charts.

33003101.26 1593
 Editing runtime screens

Bar chart parameter screen

The screen below allows parameterizing of animated rectangles in bar chart format.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

1594 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Attribute Description

Type of bar chart 1. The bar chart moves from bottom to top.
2. The bar chart moves from top to bottom.
3. The bar chart moves from left to right.
4. The bar chart moves from right to left.
5. The bar chart moves symmetrically in relation to a horizontal axis corresponding
to the average of the thresholds.
6. The bar chart moves symmetrically in relation to a vertical axis corresponding to
the average of the thresholds.
7. The bar charts grow vertically, by symmetrically filling the gap between the value
of the variable and the average of the thresholds.
8. The bar charts grow horizontally, by symmetrically filling the gap between the
value of the variable and the average of the thresholds.

Thresholds Values indicating the range of status displayed. When the associated variable value is
equal to the minimum threshold value, the bar chart is empty. When this value is equal
to the maximum limit value, the bar chart is full (the rectangle’s color).

By default these values are set to 0 (minimum) and 1000 (maximum).

Default values Values that indicate the thresholds from which the bar chart is displayed with the default
color.

The bar chart uses the default color when the associated variable value is:
• higher than or equal to the maximum value
• lower than or equal to the minimum value
The colors palette contains 16 predefined colors and provides access to the extended
colors, page 1584 parameter screen.

Screen browse tab

At a Glance
The screen browse buttons allow users to browse between screens (move from one screen
to another). The parametering of a button’s attributes links the button to the screen. The
button’s browser attributes allow users to:
• choose the screen to be displayed,
• define the text displayed in the button,

33003101.26 1595
 Editing runtime screens

Screen browse attributes setting screen

The screen below allows users to set the animation attributes of a screen browse button.

Description
The table below describes the different parameters that you may define.

Field Description

Value This field allows entry of the screen that is displayed when you click on the button. Two
cases are possible:
• the value entered is a number that indicates the screen number to display,
• you have entered the term VAL. The screen displayed will be the one whose
number is contained in the animation variable linked to the button object (See
Animation Tab, page 1587).

Name This field indicates the label of the screen you have defined by its number in the Value
field. If you have defined the screen by the term VAL, this field displays the characters
## ? ##.
None If this box is checked, no text is associated with this button.

Screen number If this box is checked, the screen number is displayed on the button.

Screen label If this box is checked, the screen label is displayed on the button.

1596 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Field Description

Number of char.s If the Screen label box is checked, the field allows you to define the number of
characters to display in the button.

Shift If the Screen label box is checked, the field indicates the position (shift) of the first
character of the label to display in the button.

NOTE: Each browser button has a logical number that links it to a screen. If this number
is modified, the button will no longer point on the screen.
NOTE: The software does not take into account the deletion or import of screens.

Control tab
At a Glance
This tab allows you to define the characteristics of a control object:
• to choose a control variable,
• to choose the minimum and maximum values,
• to determine the monitoring style.

33003101.26 1597
 Editing runtime screens

Control attributes setting screen

The screen below allows users to set the control attributes of a command graphic object.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

Field Description

Variable Variable controlled by the graphic object.

Calls the variable selection tool to select the variable to associate with the object.
button
Type Type of variable linked to the object.

Comment Comment of the variable linked to the object.

1598 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Field Description

< = value <= The control object will not exceed these thresholds.

By default, the minimum value is 0 and the maximum value is 100.

If the variable to control is a bit, these fields are not accessible.

Control element Control style which depends on the type of control object. It allows you to modify the
style representation of the graphical object:
• Border displays a boarder around the object,
• Graduation displays color graduations,
• With latching denotes a button with latching,
• Orientation determines the orientation of the object on the screen,
• Text displays the text with the object.

NOTE: If the graphic object is a button, and if the control variable is a word, a double
word or a real word, the maximum threshold becomes a dynamic threshold. It is the
value of this threshold that is sent when you click on the button

Image Tab
At a Glance
This tab allows you to set the attributes of the .BMP, JPG or JPEG format images built into
the operator screens:
• To choose the image to be displayed,
• To integrate the image into the project,
• To query the size of the image (real and visual).

33003101.26 1599
 Editing runtime screens

Image Attributes Setting Screen

The screen below allows you to set the attributes of a bitmap image built into an operator
screen.

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

Field Description

Name This field indicates the name and the access path to the file.

Image copied into When this box is checked, the file is copied and compressed in the project file (.STU or
current space STA for an archive). Loading is faster when using the screens and the image is
exported at the same time as the screen during an export, page 1704.

If the image is already built into the project, this box does not appear.

Size This information, accessible in read only gives information on the original size and the
displayed size of the image. Its is used to know if the image has been modified.

Updating with the When this box is checked, the image changes to its original size.
original size
This box does not appear if the original size and the displayed size of the image are
identical.

1600 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Explicit Exchanges Tab

At a Glance
Some Bits and Words Are Not Implicitly Exchanged (at Each PLC Cycle) Between the
Modules and the PLC Processor. These bits and words are grouped into 3 families:
information on status (STATUS), command (CMD) and parametering (PARAM) and are
explicitly exchanged.
Explicit exchanges are normally made by program, but the user can also initiate such an
exchange by clicking on a button, located in an operator screen.
The explicit exchange tab allows you to define the exchange characteristics:
• to select an explicit exchange instruction,
• to select the text of the button,
• to select the address of the channel to which the exchange will be applied,
• To display the parameters associated with the instruction.
NOTE: Only the exchanges of objects associated with a channel are authorized.

Explicit Exchanges Attributes Setting Screen

The screen below allows you to set the attributes of an explicit exchange object.

33003101.26 1601
 Editing runtime screens

Description
The table below describes the settings that you may define.

Field Description

Instruction Explicit exchange instruction:

• READ_STS: reading of channel status words contained in the module and
updating the data in the PLC.
• WRITE_PARAM: writing of channel parametering words, contained in the module.
• READ_PARAM: reading of channel parametering words, contained in the module.
• SAVE_PARAM: backup in a specific memory space of channel parametering
words, contained in the module.
• RESTORE_PARAM: restoration of values saved by SAVE_PARAM.
• WRITE_CMD: implements the execution of a command on a channel.

Text Text that appears on the button.

Channel address Remote: this box is checked if the module to be interrogated is on a remote station.

In rack: this box is checked if the module to be interrogated is on the rack of the local
station.

Address of the module channel. This address has the form:

• \bus.station\rack.location.channel:
◦ bus: bus number (shaded if local station),
◦ station: number of the device connection point (shaded if local station),
◦ rack: station rack number,
◦ position: position of the module on the rack,
◦ channel: channel number.

NOTE: For Write_Param and for Write_Cmd we have to modified the associated %MW
by animation table or another one (by program, by 'Entry field' through operator screen,
...) before sending the instruction (Write_Param or Write_Cmd) through the Operator
screen.

Information on the objects

At a Glance
The information screen on the objects, accessible via the Edit > Information command
allows the information on each of the objects contained in a screen to be displayed. This
screen is particularly useful for compound objects.

1602 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Information screen on an object

The screen below provides information on a graphic object.

Description
The following table describes the information offered by this screen.

Information Description

Type Type of object. ellipse, button, cursor, object compound, etc.

Position Coordinates of the object’s top left point in pixels.

Size Size of the object in pixels.

33003101.26 1603
 Editing runtime screens

Information Description

Associated variable Variable linked to a simple object or controlled by a simple object. In the case of a
compound object, this field is left blank. The information is placed in the Grouped
object zone.

Grouped object Number of simple animated objects contained in a compound object and the variables
associated with (or controlled by) this compound object. In the case of a simple-type
object, this field is not displayed.

The data selection tool

At a Glance
All the graphic objects (simples or compound) that you create in a screen can be animated,
page 1587. The variables selection tool allows you to associate a variable to animate the
object. Variables that can animate objects include:
• simple variables, (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual)
• the public variables (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and
Structure, Reference Manual)of a function block,
• the parameters (input, output, input/out) (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program
Languages and Structure, Reference Manual)of a function block.

Procedure
The table below presents the procedure for using a variable to animate an object.

Step Action

1 Select to object to parameter in the operator screen.

2 Right click in the contextual menu to select the Properties command.

Result: A dialog box displays the attributes linked to the kind of object chosen.

3 Select the animation tab.

4 Check the Animated Object box.

5
In the Variable field enter the name of the variable or use the button to open the variables
selection tool.

Result: The variables selection tool appears.

1604 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Step Action

6 From the Variables tab or the Function Blocks tab select the variable to be used to animate the
object.

7 Click OK to confirm.

Variables tab
The table below describes the elements of the Variables tab of the data selection tool.

Field Description

Clicking on this button opens a dialog box, page 430 which you can use to refine the filter.
Button

Name Column in which you enter the name (symbol) of the instance or data type that you want to
display. You can use wild cards (* or ?).

EDT Authorizes the display of the Elementary Data Types.

DDT Authorizes the display of Derived Data Types.

IODDT Authorizes the display of the derived data concerning inputs and outputs.

Name Column in which the name (symbol) of the instance or data type is located.

33003101.26 1605
 Editing runtime screens

Field Description

Type Column in which the data type is located.

Comment Column in which the data comment is located.

Function Blocks tab

The table below describes the elements of the Function Blocks tab of the data selection
tool.

Field Description

Clicking on this button opens a dialog box, page 430 which you can use to refine the filter.
Button

Name Column in which you enter the name (symbol) of the instance or data type that you want to
display. You can use wild cards (* or ?).

Named by Authorizes the display of data named by default

default
EFB Authorizes the display of Elementary Function Block data types.

DFB Authorizes the display of Derived FB data types.

Name Column in which the name (symbol) of the instance or data type is located.

Type Column in which the data type is located.

Comment Column in which the data comment is located.

1606 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Manipulation of objects in runtime screens

Subject of this section
This section describes how to manipulate objects in the runtime screens. how to select
objects, move objects, duplicate or delete objects,...

How to select graphic objects

At a Glance
When objects have been created in a screen, you may have to select some of them in order
to position them, regroup them, etc. The selection or de-selection of graphic objects is one
of the basic tasks during the construction of an operator screen.

How to select a single object

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to select an object.

If you want to select Then

an isolated object. validate selection mode then click on the object with the left mouse
button.
an object among several overlaid validate the selection mode, press ALT then right mouse click several
objects. times on the area occupied by the objects.

Result: You select each object one after the other even they are
hidden (in the background).

successive objects on a screen. press the space bar successively.

Result: Each time you press the spacebar, you select the next object
even if it is hidden behind another object.

How to select several objects

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to select several objects at
the same time.

33003101.26 1607
 Editing runtime screens

If you want to select Then

several contiguous objects. frame the objects to be selected by defining a selection zone (this
operate mode is identical to that for the creation of objects).

Result: A rectangle with handles is displayed on the screen. It

regroups all the objects located in the selection zone.

several objects scattered in the press Shift then click on the objects to be selected while keeping the
operator screen. Shift key held down.

Result: A rectangle with handles is displayed on the screen, it groups

all the selected objects.

How to deselect a selected object or a group of objects

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to deselect an object.

Step Action

1 Press Shift and hold down this key.

2 Left click on the selected object that you want to deselect.

Result: The selection handles associated with the object disappear, indicating that the object is
no longer part of the selection.

NOTE: Press ESC to delete the entire active selection. Clicking on the screen
background gives the same results.

How to move and resize objects

Introduction
You may have to move or resize objects created in a screen, if any .

How to use the mouse to move objects

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to move one or several
objects with the mouse.

1608 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Select the object or objects to be moved.

2 Click with the left mouse button on a selected objects or in the rectangle representing the
selection.
3 Keep the button held down.

4 Drag the selected object or the rectangle to the desired position.

Result: the selection is represented by a dotted zone as you move it.

5 Release the mouse button.

Result: the selection is placed in its new location.

How to use the keyboard to move objects

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to move one or several
objects with the keyboard.

If you want to move Then

precisely one or several objects by after having selected one or several objects to move, press as many
using the keyboard times as necessary on the keyboard direction (arrow) keys.

Result: the selection represented by a dotted zone can be moved

pixel by pixel or according to the steps of the grid if it is active.

rapidly one or several objects by using after having selected one or several objects to move, press on the
the keyboard Shift key, then while holding down this key press as many times as
necessary on the keyboard direction (arrow) keys.

Result: the selection represented by a dotted zone can be moved in

10 pixel-steps.

How to resize objects

The following table describes the operations to perform to resize one or several objects.

Step Action

1 Select the object or objects to be modified

2 Drag the handles in the desired directions in order to resize the frame.

Result: the selection represented by a dotted zone is resized as you move the mouse.

33003101.26 1609
 Editing runtime screens

How to delete and copy objects

At a Glance
You may need to delete a graphic object or duplicate the same object in a screen.

How to delete objects

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to delete one or several
objects.

Step Action

1 Select the object or objects to be deleted.

Result: The selection is represented by a frame with handles.

2 Press Delete.

Result: The selected objects are deleted. They are not memorized in the clipboard.

How to use the mouse to copy objects

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to copy one or several
objects with the mouse.

Step Action

1 Select the object or objects to be copied.

2 Click with the left mouse button on one of the selected objects or in the rectangle representing
the selection.
3 Hold down the button and press CTRL.

4 Drag the selected object or the rectangle to the desired position.

Result: The selection is represented by a dotted zone as you move it.

5 Release the mouse button.

Result: The copy of the selection is placed in its chosen location.

1610 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

How to cut, copy or paste objects

The table below indicates the procedures for cutting, copying or pasting one or several
objects.

Step Action

1 Select the object or objects to manipulate.

Result: The selection is represented by a frame with handles.

2 Select the command to execute:

• Edit > Cut
• Edit > Copy
• Edit > Paste
Result: Cut deletes the selected item(s) and memorizes it (them) on the clipboard. Copy
duplicates the selected items in the clipboard and Paste duplicates the clipboard contents on the
screen.

How to position objects

At a Glance
You may have to position an object in relation to another in a screen:
• to align the objects,
• to make objects symmetrical,
• to position the objects in the foreground and the background in relation to the others.

How to align a group of objects

The table below describes the procedure for aligning a group of objects.

33003101.26 1611
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Select the objects to align.

Result: The selection is represented by a frame with handles.

2 Select the command to execute in the toolbar:

• Left alignment,
• Right alignment,
• Upper alignment,
• Lower alignment.
Result: The selected objects are aligned according to what has been chosen.

How to make an object or a group of objects symmetrical

The table below describes the procedure for flipping an object or a group of objects vertically
or horizontally.

Step Action

1 Select the object or objects to be flipped.

Result: The selection is represented by a frame with handles.

2 Select the flip command in the toolbar:

• vertical flip,
• horizontal flip.
Result: The selected object or group of objects is positioned according to the chosen symmetry.

How to put an object in the foreground

The table below describes the procedure for placing an object in the foreground.

Step Action

1 Select the object to place in the foreground.

Result: The selected object is equipped with handles.

2 Select the Foreground command in the toolbar.

Result: The selected object is positioned in the foreground.

1612 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

How to put an object in the background

The table below describes the procedure for placing an object in the background.

Step Action

1 Select the object to place in the background.

Result: The selected object is equipped with handles.

2 Select the Background command in the toolbar.

Result: The selected object is positioned in the background.

How to create compound objects

At a Glance
The objects of a screen are sometimes associated to become a single compound object
(that can be animated). Similarly, you may have to unbind a compound object into several
simple objects, in order to manipulate them individually.

How to Bind a group of objects

The table below describes the procedures for binding a group of objects.

Step Action

1 Select the objects to bind.

Result: The selection is represented by a frame with handles.

2 Activate the Group command.

Result: The objects are grouped in a single compound object. the handles belonging to the
selected objects disappear and a rectangle containing all of the selected objects and
represented by handles is displayed.

How to Unbind a group of objects

The table below describes the operations to perform to unbind a group of objects.

33003101.26 1613
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Select the compound object to unbind.

Result: The selected object is represented by handles.

2 Activate the Ungroup command.

Result: All the objects contained in the compound object are viewed with their handles. If the
object is animated, the animated characteristics are lost.

How to select an element belonging to a compound object

The table below describes the operations to perform to modify the characteristics of an item
belonging to a compound object, without having to ungroup it.

Step Action

1 Select the compound object.

Result: The selected object is represented by handles.

2 Press Alt then right click on the compound object, while holding down the Shift key.

Result: The elements comprising the compound object are selected successively. The selected
object can not be manipulated as a simple object.

1614 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Managing the runtime screens messages editor

Subject of this section
This section describes how to manage the runtime screens messages editor.

Operator screens messages editor

At a Glance
Messages comprise a text and a label. They are memorized in the project and are linked to
objects via their number. In this way, it is not necessary to create a message per object and
duplicate identical messages.
When a project is created, the message list is empty, and the user needs to fill it in: by
creating your own messages or by importing messages from another file or another tool.

Displaying the message list

The following table describes the operations to perform in order to display the message list.

Step Action

1 Select the Operator screens directory from the project browser.

2 Select the Message list > Open command in the contextual menu:
Result: The Message list window appears on the screen.

33003101.26 1615
 Editing runtime screens

Message screen
The screen below presents an example of a message list:

Description
The following table describes the commands accessible from the message screen.

Command Description

Find Allows you to search for a string of characters (or a message number).

Replace Allows you to replace a string of characters (or a message number).

Auto Number Allows automatic dialing of messages.

Renumerate Gives access to a dialog box which allows you to define the first automatic dial number.

1616 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

How to manage messages linked to operator screens

At a Glance
The dialog box for managing messages allows you to create, modify or delete messages in
addition to linking them to a number or a hyperlink.

How to create a message

The table below describes the operations performed to create a message to be used by the
operator screen editor.

Step Action

1 Right click on the Operator Screens directory in the project browser.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

2 Click Messages list > Open.

Result: The messages management dialog box appears.

3 Enter a message number in the No. column If you have checked the Auto number box, the
number will be automatically entered, when the message is validated.

Result: The number entered appears in the list.

4 Enter your message in the Messages column, then press Enter to validate. A maximum of 255
characters can be typed in this field.

Result: Your message and its associated number appear in the list.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4, to enter the other messages on the list. Click OK to confirm the command.

Result: The messages management dialog box closes and the list is memorized.

How to link a hyperlink to a message

The table below describes the operations performed to link a hyperlink to a message.

Step Action

1 Open the message list,

2 Right click on the URL message column.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

3 Activate the Create command.

33003101.26 1617
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

Result: The Insert hyperlink window appears.

4 Enter the name with the document path or the WEB page to link to the message. Or select it with
the Browse button.
5 Click OK to validate the hyperlink.

Result: The hyperlink appears in the URL column.

6 Click OK to confirm the command.

Result: The messages management dialog box closes and the list is memorized.

How to modify a message

The following table describes the operations performed to modify an existing message.

Step Action

1 Right click on the Operator Screens directory in the project browser.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

2 Click Messages list > Open.

Result: The message screen appears.

3 Right click on the message to be modified.

Result: A cursor appears in the text.

4 Move the cursor to where you want to modify your text. To delete a word, double click on it to
select it and press Del. Enter the new text or the new number then Enter to validate.

Result: The message is modified.

5 After you complete modifications, click OK to validate.

Result: The new messages are backed up in the project.

NOTE: Press ESC to delete all the modifications made in the current session.

1618 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Find dialog box

At a Glance
The Find dialog box allows you to find a string of characters or a number in the list of
messages.

Dialog box
The screen below allows users to set the find parameters.

Description
The following table describes the different fields offered by the dialog box.

Field Description

Find Allows you to enter the string of characters (or number) you want to find.

Match case If this box is checked, find will match the case of the entered characters (upper or lower
case).

Direction This field allows you to define the search direction in the list: move up or move down.

Next This command initializes find or starts the next find.

Cancel This command cancels the search.

How to find and replace a string of characters or a number.

Follow the steps below to find or replace a string of characters (or a number) in the list of
messages:

33003101.26 1619
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

1 Right click on the Operator Screens directory in the project browser.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears

2 Click Messages list > Open.

Result: The message manager dialog box appears.

3 Enable the Find command to find a string of characters or Replace to find and replace a string of
characters.

Result: A Find dialog box appears

4 Fill in the different fields proposed by the dialog box and start the find or replace, page 1620 of
the string of characters.

Result: The changes are integrated into the list of messages.

5 After you complete modifications, click OK to validate.

Result: The new messages are backed up in the project.

Replace dialog box

At a Glance
Dialog box Replace allows you to find a string of characters (or a number) in the list of
messages and to replace it with another string of characters (or a number). You may select
the item to replace or replace all.

Dialog box
The screen below allows users define the replace parameters.

1620 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Description
The following table describes the different fields offered by the dialog box.

Field Description

Find Allows you to enter the string of characters (or number) you want to find.

Replace This field allows you to enter the string of characters (or number) you want to replace.

Match case If this box is checked, find will match the case of the entered characters (upper or lower
case).

Next This command initializes find or starts the next find.

Replace This command replaces the string of characters found with the new string of characters
that you defined in the Replace with field.

Replace all This command replaces the string of characters that you defined throughout the list of
messages.

Cancel This command cancels the find/replace command.

Message Renumbering Dialog Box

At a Glance
The renumbering dialog box allows you to change a number of one or several messages in
the list automatically.

How to Modify a Message Number

To modify a message number, you can proceed in the same way as when modifying a
message or use the Renumerate command. The table below describes the procedure for
modifying a message number using the Renumerate command.

Step Action

1 Right click on the Operator Screens folder in the project browser.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

2 Execute the Messages list > Open command.

Result: The message manager dialog box appears.

3 Left click in the number field of the message to be modified.

Result: The field is selected.

33003101.26 1621
 Editing runtime screens

Step Action

4 Activate the Renumerate command.

Result: The following dialog box appears:

5 Enter the new number and confirm with Enter.

Result: The dialog box disappears and the selected message will be renumbered from the
number entered in the From Number field.
6 After you complete modifications, click OK to validate.

Result: The new numbers are backed up in the project.

Message editing and import/export function

At a Glance
The operator screen messages also have edit and import/export functions.

Information on editing functions

The editing functions are accessed by the commands:
• Edit > Cut
• Edit > Copy
• Edit > Paste
• Edit > Delete
NOTE: The paste function also allows messages copied in tools such as Excel or Word
to be pasted directly into the message screen.
They are also accessible via the contextual menu: right click on the message.
There are also other functions in the contextual menu from the messages list.

1622 33003101.26
Editing runtime screens

Function Description

Cancel Cancels the last completed action.

Redo Repeats the last completed action.

Clear message Erases the content of the selected row.

Insert row Inserts a blank row above the selection:

Delete row Deletes the selected row.

You can sort the messages list by:

• the message number (increasing or decreasing order),
• alphabetical order (increasing or decreasing) of messages,
• alphabetical order (increasing or decreasing) of hyperlinks.
To start sorting, just click on the heading of the column you want to sort.

How to import a list of messages

The table below describes the procedure for importing a list of messages.

Step Action

1 Right click on the Operator Screens directory in the project browser.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

2 Execute the Messages list > Import command.

Result: A dialog box is displayed asking you to choose the file to be imported.

3 Select the file to be imported (directory tree and file) then confirm with the Import command.

Result: Another dialog box is displayed asking you to choose the type of import to be made.

4 Check the Replace1 box, or

Check the Merge (Based on new messages)2 box, or

Check the Merge (Based on new numbers)3 box.

5 Click OK to confirm the modifications to the list.

Result: The new messages are backed up in the project.

Note1: All currently defined messages in the project are deleted and then the new messages
are imported.
Note2: The currently defined messages in the project are kept. When one of the new
imported messages has the same message text as a message already existing in the

33003101.26 1623
 Editing runtime screens

project, this message is not imported. All the other imported messages are added at the end
of the current message list of the project.
Note3: The currently defined messages in the project are kept. When one of the new
imported messages has the same message number as a message already existing in the
project, this message is not imported. All the other imported messages are added at the end
of the current message list of the project.
NOTE: To import a list of messages always use the
• Operator Screens > Messages list > Import command
and NOT the
• Operator Screens > Import command.
Otherwise the dialog box for selecting the Import type will not be displayed (see step 3
and 4 in the table above).

How to export a list of messages

The table below describes the procedure for exporting a list of messages.

Step Action

1 Right click on the Operator Screens directory in the project browser.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

2 Execute the Messages list > Export command.

Result: A dialog box appears to allow you to specify the name of the export file.

3 Choose the directory (directory tree) and enter the name of the export file (the extension.XCR is
automatically added). Click on the Export command to confirm.

Result: Messages are exported in a text file, each line containing the number and label of each
message. This file can then be used with any text editor.

1624 33003101.26
33003101.26 1625
 Runtime screens in online mode

Runtime screens in online mode

What’s in This Chapter
Basic functions in online mode .............................................. 1626
How to select an animated object .......................................... 1627
How to use command objects to modify the variables
associated with objects ........................................................ 1628
How to view the variables associated with graphic
objects ................................................................................ 1629
How to modify the variables associated with objects from an
animation table .................................................................... 1630
How to search for cross-references ....................................... 1631
How to manage the display of operator screens ..................... 1632
How to modify screen control ................................................ 1634
How to obtain information on objects when in connected
mode .................................................................................. 1635

Object of this chapter

This chapter describes how the runtime screens editor works in online mode.

Basic functions in online mode

Introduction
After you create your operator screens, you must change to online mode, in order to monitor
and control the automation process.
To do this, enable the relevant icon or PLC > Connect command

Editing online
A screen can only be edited in online mode if you have not given priority, page 594 to the
PLC driver.

1626 33003101.26
Runtime screens in online mode

Display rules for a simple object

Animated objects which make up a screen are displayed when their display condition has
been met.

Display rules for a compound object

When a compound object is animated but its display conditions have not been met, none of
its component items are displayed (even if it is made up of items whose display
requirements have been met).

Basic points about display of related objects

The objects on a page are displayed according to the positioning order assigned to them by
the Foreground or Background commands.
NOTE: Command objects are always positioned above other graphic objects.
To avoid control errors or display problems, we advise you do not overlay command
objects.

How to select an animated object

At a Glance
You may need to select an object in online mode. We advise you to follow the procedure
described below for the process to remain unchanged during the selection.

How to select an animated object

The table below describes the procedure for selecting an object in online mode

33003101.26 1627
 Runtime screens in online mode

If you want to select then

an animated object using the function press F4 or F5.

keys.
Result: The F4 key selects animated objects one after the other in the
order that they were created or repositioned by the user. The F5 key
selects them in the reverse order.
an animated object using the tool bar. click on the next animated object or previous animated object
icons.

Result: It is identical to pressing the F4 and F5 keys.

a control command object. press and hold down the Ctrl key, then left click on the object.

Result: The object is selected. It no longer commands the control and

its properties can be modified.

any object. press the Space bar.

Result: The Space bar selects all the objects one after the other
according to how they were created or repositioned. Simultaneously
press Caps Lock + Space to select them in the reverse order.

How to use command objects to modify the

variables associated with objects
At a Glance
In online mode, you may use the command objects in an operator screen to modify the
variables associated with the animated objects. By default, you cannot modify the command
objects when a screen is being opened. You must use the F7 key or the Services > Enable
Variable Modification command to allow these modifications.

How to use a command object to modify variables

The following table describes the procedures for using a command object to modify
variables.

Step Action

1 Open the operator screen in which the command objects are located.

2 Press the F7 key or select the Services > Enable Variable Modification command.

1628 33003101.26
Runtime screens in online mode

Step Action

3 Give control to the command object that enables the modification of the variable settings.

4 Modify the command object settings.

How to view the variables associated with graphic

objects
At a Glance
In online mode you may view the settings of variables associated with an operator screen in
the Variables Window tool. The Variables Window tool only allows you to view the
variables. You cannot edit them.

How to view the variables associated with graphic

objects
The following table describes the operations necessary to display the variables associated
with the graphic objects.

33003101.26 1629
 Runtime screens in online mode

Step Action

1 Select the operator screen.

2 Select the Tools > Variables Window where the variables you want to view are located.
Result: The Variables Window appears

3 Double click on a variable in the Variables Window.

Result: The object associated with this variable appears in the operator screen, surrounded by a
dotted frame.

How to modify the variables associated with

objects from an animation table
At a Glance
In online mode you may modify the variables associated with the animated objects from an
animation table.

How to modify the variables associated with objects from

an animation table
The table below describes how to modify the variables associated with graphic objects from
an animation table.

1630 33003101.26
Runtime screens in online mode

Step Action

1 Select the objects for which you want to modify the variables.

Result: The selected objects appear with handles and have a dotted frame.

2 Use the Ctrl + T shortcut key or enable the Services > Initialize Animation Table command.
Result: All the variables relating to the selected objects appear in a new animation table. You
can now modify their value.

The diagram below presents an example of an animation table produced by selecting animated
objects.

How to search for cross-references

At a Glance
In connected mode as in local mode, you can search in the project programs for the
variables linked to an animated object. This is known as the cross references search.

How to search for cross references

The table below describes the procedures for searching for cross references in an animated
object.

33003101.26 1631
 Runtime screens in online mode

Step Action

1 Select the object(s) in the operator screen.

Result: The selected objects appear with handles and have a dotted frame.

2 Use the Ctrl + U shortcut or click Services > Initialize Search.

Result: All the variables relating to the selected objects appear in the cross references search
window.

The diagram below is an example of a cross reference search performed by selecting the
animated objects.

How to manage the display of operator screens

At a Glance
You may need to modify the display of screens in connected mode. You may for example:
• Mask the horizontal and vertical scrollbars,
• Go to full screenmode.

1632 33003101.26
Runtime screens in online mode

How to mask the scroll bars

The table below describes the procedure for masking scrollbars displayed by the operator
screens editor.

Step Action

1 Click Tools > Options.

2 Select the operator screen tab.

Result: The editor configuration, page 594 dialog box is displayed.

3 Uncheck the Horizontal scroll bar and Vertical scroll bar and validate with OK.

Result: The graphic editor no longer has vertical and horizontal scrollbars.

How to switch to full screen mode

The table below describes the procedure for switching to full screen mode.

Step Action

1 Click Display > Full screen.

Result: The menu and toolbars disappear.

How to exit a full screen mode.

The table below describes the procedure for switching to full screen mode.

Step Action

1 Press Esc to exit the full screen mode.

Result: The screen changes from full screen mode to window mode.

How to start the operator screens editor automatically

while in full screen mode
The table below describes the procedure for automatically starting the operator screens
editor in full screen.

33003101.26 1633
 Runtime screens in online mode

Step Action

1 Click Tools > Project settings.

2 Select the operator screen tab.

Result: The editor configuration, page 583 dialog box is displayed.

3 Check the Full screen at opening box and validate with OK.

Result: The operator screens editor will be automatically started in full screen mode.

How to modify screen control

At a Glance
The control type is determined by the configuration, page 583 options. It can be modified in
online mode.
NOTE: When the runtime screens are controlled via PLC it is not possible to edit them in
online mode, even if the option Enable Edit in online mode is set via Tools > Options
> Operator Screens tab.

How to set the control type in online mode

The following table describes the procedure for changing the control type for operator
screens.

If you want and if you are then

the screens to be controlled by the in operator control mode, press F2 or click on the PLC
PLC, controlled icon.

the screens to be controlled by the in PLC control mode, press F3 or click on the Operator
operator, controlled icon.

1634 33003101.26
Runtime screens in online mode

How to obtain information on objects when in

connected mode
Introduction
In connected mode, you can obtain two types of information via the mouse:
• Is the object a driving object,
• which variable is associated to this object.

How to ascertain whether an object is a driving object

The table below describes the procedure for ascertaining whether an object is a driving
object.

Step Action

1 Position the mouse cursor on the object.

Result: if the object is a driving object, the cursor takes the shape of a hand.

How to find out the name and the value of a variable

associated with an object
The table describes the procedure for finding out the name and value of a variable
associated with an object.

Step Action

1 Position the mouse cursor on the object.

Result: the name of the variable and its current value in the PLC are displayed.

33003101.26 1635
1636 33003101.26
Runtime screens objects library

Runtime screens objects library

What’s in This Chapter
Managing library objects....................................................... 1637

Object of this chapter

You can access an objects library to create your runtime screens. This chapter presents a
family-specific classification of all these objects: actuators, display panels, automation
components, etc..

Managing library objects

Subject of this section
This section describes how to manage the library graphic objects.

The Objects Library

At a Glance
The objects library provides manufacturer objects which can be inserted into the operator
screens. The objects are arranged in families. The library allows operators to create their
own objects and insert them into a library family.
The library may be opened with the Tools > Operator Screen Library command.

33003101.26 1637
 Runtime screens objects library

The figure below presents the objects library.

The table below provides a description of the objects library.

Number Description

1 The browser displays all the families and objects.

2 The window displays the graphic representation(s) of the selected object.

How to manage the list of graphic items in the library

At a Glance
The library graphical objects are organized in families for optimum management. You cannot
create new objects outside a family.
The main actions that can be performed on objects or object families are described below.

1638 33003101.26
Runtime screens objects library

How to create an object family in the library

The following table describes the steps to be carried out to create a new object family in the
library.

Step Action

1 Execute the Tools > Operator screens library from the main Control Expert menu
Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Right click on the library root.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

3 Enable the command New family.

Result: A new screen family appears in the objects library with a generic name.

How to create an object in the library

The following table describes the operations to be performed in order to create an object in
the library.

Step Action

1 Click Tools > Operator screens library in the toolbar.

Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Click with the right mouse button on an object family or library object.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

3 Enable the New object command.

Result: A new object appears in the objects library with a generic name.

How to rename a library object or object family

The following table describes the operations to be performed in order to rename a library
object family.

33003101.26 1639
 Runtime screens objects library

Step Action

1 Click Tools > Operator screens library in the toolbar.

Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Click with the left mouse button on an object family or library object.

3 Press F2.

Result: The label is highlighted and the text input cursor flashes at the end of the input field.

4 Enter the new name of the object or family using the keyboard.

Result: The object or object family appears with its new name.

How to move an object in the library

The following table describes the operations to be performed in order to move an object
from a family to another family in the library.

Step Action

1 Click Tools > Operator screens library in the toolbar.

Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Left click on the library object to be moved.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

3 Hold down the left mouse button to maintain the selection.

4 Move the object to the desired family while holding down the button.

Result: The object moves at the same time as the mouse cursor.

5 Release the mouse button.

Result: The object appears in the desired family.

NOTE: You may move an object in the same family if the Manual sort, page 1641 option
is checked.

How to open an object in the library

The following table describes the operations to be performed in order to open an object in
the library.

1640 33003101.26
Runtime screens objects library

Step Action

1 Click Tools > Operator screens library in the toolbar.

Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Right click on a library object.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

3 Activate the Open command.

Result: An operator screen window opens. It displays the graphic object or objects contained in
the library object.

Information on editing functions

The editing functions are accessed by the commands:
• Edit > Cut
• Edit > Copy
• Edit > Paste
• Edit > Delete
Commands comply with Windows 32 bit ergonomics and apply to objects or families of
objects in the library.
There is also a function for deleting the last completed action.

Properties of the object library and its elements

At a Glance
The objects library and its elements (family and objects) have properties. They allow the
operator to modify:
• the access pathname of the library file,
• the access pathname of the library images directory,
• the type of family and object sorting in the library browser,
• the type of family and object sorting in the library browser,
• the name of families,
• the name of objects,

33003101.26 1641
 Runtime screens objects library

• the family linked to the object.

Library properties
The table below presents the procedures for accessing the Library Properties dialog box.

Step Action

1 Execute the Tools > Operator screens library from the main Control Expert menu.
Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Select the library root in the browser application.

3 Select the Properties command from the contextual menu.

Result: The Library Properties window appears:

4 The access pathname and the filename (.bib extension) of the library are indicated in the Library
Location field.

The button allows the operator to browse the hard disk to change the pathname and the file.

1642 33003101.26
Runtime screens objects library

Step Action

5 The Picture Directory Location field contains the access pathname and file name (extension .bib)
of the directory where the images used by the library are located.

The button allows the operator to browse the hard disk to change the pathname and the
storage directory name.

6 In the Tree Sorting zone you may choose to sort the families and objects. Sorting can be:
• in alphabetical order, by checking the Alphanumeric Sort box,
• manual (user option), by checking the Manual Sort box.

Library properties
The table below presents the procedures for accessing the Family Properties dialog box.

Step Action

1 Execute the Tools > Object Library command from the Control Expert main menu.
Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Select a family in the library browser application.

3 Select the Properties command from the contextual menu.

Result: The Family Properties window appears:

4 In the Name field, give the family a name. It can be modified and can contain up to 255 characters.

Object properties
The table below presents the procedures for accessing the Object Properties dialog box.

33003101.26 1643
 Runtime screens objects library

Step Action

1 Execute the Tools > Object Library command from the Control Expert main menu.
Result: The object library opens. The browser displays the objects and the families contained in
the library.

2 Select an object in the library browser application.

3 Select the Properties command from the contextual menu.

Result: The Object Properties window appears.

4 In the Name field, give the object a name. It can be modified and can contain up to 255 characters.

5 The Family field displays the family with which the object is associated. Select the arrow on the
right side of the field to associate the object with another family.

Handling the Objects

At a Glance
When you open a library object, Control Expert opens an operator screen window in edit
mode. The operator screen contains the different graphic objects. From the operator screen,
you can
• use all editing functions in the screen
• select and copy a graphic object in another screen
• bind variables to graphic objects

1644 33003101.26
Runtime screens objects library

Edit function
An object’s operator screen editor works in the same way as the project operator screen
editor. It has the same functions: The menu and toolbars, page 1550 are identical.

Copying an object
You can copy graphic objects between the operator screen of an object and:
• another object operator screen,
• a project operator screen.
In both cases the procedures are identical.

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for copying a graphic object in another library
object or in a project operator screen.

Step Action

1 Open, page 1640 a library object.

Result: The operator screen with the graphic objects appears.

2 Right click on a graphic object.

Result: The relevant contextual menu appears.

3 Enable the Copy command.

4 Open a library object or an operator screen in which you want to copy the graphic object.

5 Right mouse click on the background of the operator screen.

6 Activate the Paste command.

Result: The graphic object appears in the operator screen.

Association of variable
Graphic objects are animated with variables that have topological addresses. Simply
replace these variables with your project variables to animate the objects.

33003101.26 1645
 Runtime screens objects library

Procedure
The following table describes the procedure for associating project variables with animation
variables for graphic objects.

Step Action

1 Copy a graphic object from the library into an operator screen, then select it.

2 Select the Tools > Variables Window command.

Result: The Variables Window appears with all the variables of the graphic object

3 Double click on a variable in the Variables Window.

Result: The object associated with this variable appears in the operator screen, surrounded by a
dotted frame.
4 Select the framed object.

5 Select the Properties command from the contextual menu.

Result: The Object Properties window appears.

6 Select the Animation tab.

Result: The variable that you selected initially appears in the Variables field.

7
Click on to open the variables selection tool.

8 Select a project variable and click OK.

Result: The selected variable appears in the Variables field in the Animation tab and in the
variables window.
9 For each of the project variables to be grouped, double-click on the variable in the variables
window and repeat steps 7 and 8.

1646 33003101.26
Runtime screens objects library

Dereferencing in Operator Screens

References
References, with a REF_TO ANY type, cannot be entered in an operator screen:

33003101.26 1647
 Runtime screens objects library

Dereferences
A dereferenced pointer (with the dereferencing operator “^”) can be entered; this is the
actual variable itself:

NOTE: The dereferenced variable must have an Elementary Data Type.

NOTE: Only 1 level of dereferencing is allowed. This is not allowed: Myref^.MyInt^

1648 33003101.26
33003101.26 1649
Documentation, Import/export
What’s in This Part
Documentation .................................................................... 1651
Import / Export ..................................................................... 1677

Object of this part

This part presents the documentation and import/export functions.

1650 33003101.26
Documentation

Documentation
What’s in This Chapter
Creating Project Documentation............................................ 1651
Documentation Structure...................................................... 1652
Topics in Documentation ...................................................... 1654
Creating Project Documentation............................................ 1663
Print Preview ....................................................................... 1666
Page Setup ......................................................................... 1668
Print.................................................................................... 1669
Printout Setup...................................................................... 1672

Overview
This chapter describes how project documentation is created.

Creating Project Documentation

Introduction
Control Expert lets you create the documentation for your project.
The subjects for the documentation are displayed in a tree structure. The structure contains
all the project browser elements that were used. Elements that you have not used in the
project do not appear as subjects in the documentation. The structure also contains some
subjects specific to printing (for example the page title and table of contents).
In the tree structure, you can choose which subjects you want to print or display (print
preview) and which you do not.
For some subject, parameters are available that you can use to define the printout.
For the printout you can choose between the Structural View or the Functional View.
You can print this documentation partially or fully after it has been created.

33003101.26 1651
 Documentation

Displaying the documentation structure

To display the documentation structure in the project browser you can either double-click
Documentation directory, or right-click the Documentation directory and click Open.

Documentation Structure
General Information
The documentation structure, page 1664 can be displayed with one of the two following
views:
• Structural View, page 1653
• Functional view, page 1654

Selecting the Type of Documentation Display

The following options are available to display the documentation structure in the structure
view:
• Select the symbol in the tools list in the documentation structure.

• Select the subject in the documentation structure and execute the menu command
View > Structural View.
The following options are available to display the documentation structure in the functional
view:
• Select the symbol in the tools list in the documentation structure.

• Select the subject in the documentation structure and execute the menu command
View > Functional View.

1652 33003101.26
Documentation

Structural View
The documentation structural view displays the project structure in the form of objects. All
objects are connected to their headings. That means that the sections and events are in the
header program and the animation tables and user windows are in the header animation
table or operator windows.

33003101.26 1653
 Documentation

Functional view
The documentation functional view displays the project structure in the form of functional
units. Each functional unit contains the program, the animation table and the operator
screens assigned to them. The objects that belong to a unit remain assigned to the
appropriate headers in the structural view.

Topics in Documentation
Documentation Topics
The documentation folder of a project can contain the following topics:
• Title page

1654 33003101.26
Documentation

• Contents
• General information
• Configuration
• Derived Data Types
• Derived FB Types
• EFB types
• EF types
• FB variables and instances
• Application structure
• Functional project
• Communication
• Programs
• Animation table
• Operator screen
• Cross-References
• Footer
NOTE: Using the menu commands Edit > Include heading and Edit > Exclude
heading you can define the topics you want to use in your documentation, page 1663.

Title Page
This topic deals with printing the title page.
Topic contents:
• Name of the project
• Name of the designer
• Software version
• Creation date
• Date of last change
• Target PLC
NOTE: In the Title Page area of Printout Setup dialog box you can define the name of
the project and the designer. All other details are automatically generated.

33003101.26 1655
 Documentation

Contents
The contents page is generated automatically according to the topics selected.
When a topic is selected, its corresponding number of pages appears in the contents. If the
topic contains documentation but is not selected, No print job is displayed instead of the
number of pages.
The total number of pages is displayed at the end of the contents.

General Information
This topic deals with printing user content entered in Documentation > General
Information tab of the project browser.
This information can be comments on the project, hyper-links and/or bitmaps.

Configuration
This topic deals with printing the hardware configuration.
Topic contents:
• Bus topology
• Bus parameters (except for the X bus)
• PLC and rack configuration
• Parameterization of the input/output modules and the communication modules.

Derived Data Types

This topic deals with printing the derived datatypes for the project.
Topic contents:
• Names of the data structure and their elements
• Data structure types (for example, structure, array) and element datatypes
• Data structure comments

1656 33003101.26
Documentation

Derived FB Types
This topic deals with printing the DFBs used in the project.
Every DFB has a structure which contains the section of the DFB.
Topic contents:
• Topic Derived FB types
◦ Table of all DFBs used in the project and their properties (name, version, creation /
change date)
• Topic "DFB name"
◦ Type name
◦ Version
◦ Short description of how the DFB work (if available)
◦ Properties of the inputs, outputs, in/outputs and public variables (name, data type,
initial value and comment)
• Topic Sections
◦ Name of the section and the DFB
◦ Section comment
◦ Type of protection
◦ Assigned functional module
◦ Name of the condition for conditional call
◦ Section code (except for the diagnostics DFBs provided by Schneider).
Details on the section documentation can be found in the topic Programs.

EFB (Types)
This topic deals with printing the Elementary Function Block types used in the project.
Topic contents:
• Table of all EFBs used in the project and their properties (name, version, creation /
change date)

33003101.26 1657
 Documentation

• For every EFB type

◦ Type name
◦ Version
◦ Short description of the how the EFB works
◦ Properties of the inputs, outputs, in/outputs and public variables (name, data type,
initial value and comment)

FB (types)
This topic deals with printing the Elementary Function types (FBs) used in the project.
Topic contents:
• Table of all FBs used in the project and their properties (name, version, creation /
change date)
• For every FB type
◦ Type name
◦ Properties of the inputs, outputs, in/outputs and public variables (name, data type,
initial value and comment)

Variables & FB instances

This topic deals with printing the following objects in a tabular format:
• Elementary datatypes (EDTs)
• Derived Data Types (DDTs)
• I/O derived data types (IODDTs)
• Instances of elementary functions
• Instances of elementary functions blocks
• Instances of derived functions blocks
Topic contents:
• Symbolic name (variable name or FB instance name)
• Constants (only for variables)
• Address (only for variables)
• Initial value
• Number of connections

1658 33003101.26
Documentation

• Global file (only for elementary datatypes and FB instances)

• Which attributes, for example, alias of, diag and so on (only if defined)
NOTE: In the Variables & FB-Instances area of Printout Setup dialog box you can
define the attributes printed for the variables and FB instances.

Application Structure
This topic deals with printing the project structure.
Topic contents:
• List of the Program Units and/or program sections:
◦ Release conditions
◦ Comments
◦ Module
◦ Language type
• Sub-programs and macro steps calling tree
Depending on the view selected the documentation is shown in the Structural View or the
Functional View. If the Functional View is chosen the section documentation is sorted
according to the assigned functional module. The documentation of sections not assigned to
any functional module is shown in its own table.

Functional Project
This topic is only available in the Functional View and is used to print the sections assigned
to a functional module.
Sections not assigned to documentation are not documented under the topic Programs.

Communication
This topic deals with printing the networks communication parameters.

Programs
This topic deals with printing the program elements.

33003101.26 1659
 Documentation

Topic contents:
• MAST task
◦ Properties (for example, configuration, configuration task duration, watchdog time)
in the MAST task.
◦ Program Units of the MAST task (Interface & Variables, sections)
◦ Sections of the MAST task
◦ Subroutine section of the MAST task
• FAST task
◦ Properties (for example, configuration, configuration task duration, watchdog time)
in the FAST task.
◦ Program Units of the FAST task (Interface & Variables, sections)
◦ Sections of the FAST task
◦ Subroutine section of the FAST task
• AUX0 and AUX1 tasks when available
• Events
◦ Sections of the Timer Events tasks
◦ Sections of the I/O event tasks
The contents of the section documentation depend on their programming languages.
All sections:
• Name of the sections and the assigned tasks
• Section comment
• Type of protection
• Assigned functional module
• Name of the condition for conditional call
• Section code
FBD sections:
• Component tables with Execution by attribute.
Blocks that have an Execute by reference to another block appear in a table that
shows the instance names and the position of the referenced and referencing blocks.
LD sections:
• Table for all of the object names not fully shown.
Because of the fixed column width it can happen that variable names or block types are
not shown fully. The incomplete object names appear in a table that shows the full
object names and their position(s).

1660 33003101.26
Documentation

• Using the checkbox Mixed Display Mode in the Printout Setup dialog, you can define
whether the documentation in the LD section is displayed in Input mode, page 746 or in
mixed display mode, page 747.
SFC sections:
• Tables for the step / action properties:
◦ Step name
◦ Position of the step object
◦ Minimum and maximum supervision time
◦ Delay Time
◦ Step comment
◦ Identifiers for the action(s)
◦ Time literal / variable for the identifier (if required)
◦ Action name
• Transition properties table:
◦ Name of transition
◦ Type of transition condition
◦ Position of the transition object
◦ Comment
• Jump properties table:
◦ Target step name
◦ Position of the jump object
◦ Comment

Animation Tables
This topic deals with printing the animation tables.
Topic contents:
• Name of the animation table
• Comment
• Functional module
• Name of the object (for example, variable name, EFB/DFB/DDT instance name,
address)
• Type
• Comment

33003101.26 1661
 Documentation

Operator Screen
This topic deals with printing the operator screens.
This heading is used to print the properties of the operator screens, their graphic
representations and the lists of messages associated with each screen.
Topic contents:
• Message lists
• Operator screen
◦ Properties
◦ Graphical representation
◦ List of the animated variables
NOTE: In the Operator Screens area of Printout Setup dialog box you can define the
scope and display of the documentation and the variables and FB instances.

Cross-References
This topic deals with printing the cross-references for the application and the DFBs used.
Every cross-reference can contain the following tables:
• Addresses
• FB variables and instances
• FB objects
• Subroutine
Every table contains the following attributes:
• Name of the object
• Location of the reference (for example, section name, module name)
• Position used (for example, line and column in the section, type of module)

User Objects
This topic deals with printing the properties of the hyperlinks and the user directories.
Contents of the topic Hyperlinks:
• Nodes containing hyperlinks (for example, station\animation tables)
• Comment

1662 33003101.26
Documentation

• Target path
Contents of the topic User directories:
• Nodes containing hyperlinks (for example, station\animation tables)
• Comment

Footer
This topic deals with printing the footer.
Topic contents:
• Bitmap (logo)
• Author
• Dept.
• Target PLC
• Page title
• Two spare fields
• The date of printing
• Page number
NOTE: The target PLC, the page title, the printing date and the page number are
automatically generated. In the Footer area of the Printout Setup dialog box you can
define other attributes.

Creating Project Documentation

Creating Project Documentation
Carry out the following steps to create project documentation:

Step Action

1 Open the documentation structure., page 1664

2 Select the documentation view, page 1664.

3 Select the individual subjects that you want to include or exclude (Include heading or Exclude
heading).

4 Set up the page for printing, page 1668.

33003101.26 1663
 Documentation

Step Action

5 Define the parameters for the printout, page 1672.

6 Prepare the subjects for printing, page 1665.

7 Check the settings with the print preview, page 1666.

8 Select a printer and start printing, page 1669.

Opening the Documentation Structure

To open the documentation structure choose one of the two following options:
• Double-click Documentation directory in the project browser.
• Right-click the Documentation directory and click Open.

Selecting the Documentation View

After opening the documentation structure you can choose between the Structural View,
page 1653 and the Functional View, page 1654.

Including a Subject in the Documentation

You have the following options to include a subject in the documentation:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the subject to include and click Include
heading.
• In the documentation structure, select the subject to include and execute the menu
command Edit > Include heading.
• In the documentation structure, click beside the subject symbol to toggle between
Include heading and Exclude heading.
Subjects included in the documentation are marked with a red symbol in front of the subject.

Excluding a Subject From the Documentation

You have the following options to exclude a subject from the documentation:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the subject to exclude and click Exclude
heading.

1664 33003101.26
Documentation

• In the documentation structure, select the subject to exclude and execute the menu
command Edit > Exclude heading.
• In the documentation structure, click beside the subject symbol to toggle between
Include heading and Exclude heading.

Adding all Subjects in the Documentation

You have the following options to include all the subjects in the documentation:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the project and click Include all headings.
• In the documentation structure, select the project and execute the menu command Edit
> Include all headings.
• In the documentation structure, click beside the project symbol to toggle between
Include all headings and Exclude all headings.
Subjects included in the documentation are marked with a red symbol in front of the subject.

Excluding all Subjects From the Documentation

You have the following options open to exclude all subjects from the documentation:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the project and click Exclude all headings.
• In the documentation structure, select the project and execute the menu command Edit
> Exclude all headings.
• In the documentation structure, click beside the project symbol to toggle between
Include all headings and Exclude all headings.

Updating and Preparing

The documentation is updated dynamically whenever a change is made in the project
directory.
After every update the updated or new subjects are marked with a (?) symbol.
You have the following options to prepare the project for printing:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the project and click Generate Printout.
• In the documentation structure, select the project and execute the menu command Edit
> Generate Printout.
The subjects correctly prepared have the page number (n) displayed after the subject.

33003101.26 1665
 Documentation

NOTE: It is only when the project subject has a page number that all the subjects are
prepared.
NOTE: Printable documents are generated for every subject during preparation for
printing. By default the documentation is not saved, it is deleted at the end of the Control
Expert session and must be generated again in the next Control Expert session. If you
want to use these documents in other sessions, check the Save Generated Printout
checkbox in the Printout Setup dialog box.

Print Preview
Introduction
You can call up a print preview for every subject.
You have the following options to open the print preview:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the desired subject and click View.
• In the documentation structure, select the desired subject and execute the menu
command View > View.

Previous Page
You have the following options to show the previous page:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the displayed page and click Previous Page.
• In the documentation structure, select the desired displayed page and execute the
menu command Edit > Previous Page.

Next Page
You have the following options to show the next page:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the displayed page and click Next Page.
• In the documentation structure, select the desired displayed page and execute the
menu command Edit > Next Page.

1666 33003101.26
Documentation

Expand View
You have the following options to expand the view:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the displayed page and click Zoom In.
• In the documentation structure, select the desired displayed page and execute the
menu command Edit > Zoom In.

Contract View
You have the following options to contract the view:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the displayed page and click Zoom Out.
• In the documentation structure, select the desired displayed page and execute the
menu command Edit > Zoom Out.

View Full Page

You have the following options to show the whole page:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the displayed page and click Zoom to Fit.
• In the documentation structure, select the desired displayed page and execute the
menu command Edit > Zoom to Fit.

Close
You have the following options to close the print preview:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the displayed page and click Close.
• In the documentation structure, select the desired displayed page and execute the
menu command Edit > Close.
• Press the Esc key.

Print
Refer to the print section, page 1669.

33003101.26 1667
 Documentation

Page Setup
Introduction
The following options are available to open the setup dialog box:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the subject to include and click Page
Setup....
• In the documentation structure, select the subject to include and execute the menu
command Edit > Page Setup....

Representation
Representation of the dialog box:

Items
Elements of the dialog box:

1668 33003101.26
Documentation

Element Description

Preview Shows the preview for the documentation using the current settings.

Paper Size:

Shows the paper size (the paper format). This setting depends on the current
printer and cannot be modified here.

Source:

Shows the paper source. This setting depends on the current printer and
cannot be modified here.
Direction Shows the orientation of the document on the page. This setting depends on
the current printer and cannot be modified here.

Borders Left:

Enter the desired border distance from the left-hand edge of the page.

Right:

Enter the desired border width to the right-hand edge of the page.

Top:

Enter the desired border width to the top edge of the page.

Bottom:

Enter the desired border width to the bottom edge of the page.

OK Saves all changes and closes the dialog box.

You are not asked if you want to accept the changes, as this requires a new
generation of documentation, page 1665.

Cancel Cancels all changes and closes the dialog box.

Print
Introduction
The following options are available to open the printer selection dialog box:
• In the documentation structure, right-click the subject to print and click Print.
• In the documentation structure, select the subject to print and execute the menu
command View > Print.
• In the print preview, right-click the preview page and click Print....

33003101.26 1669
 Documentation

• In the documentation structure, select the subject to print and press the key
combination Ctrl+P.

Representation
Representation of the dialog box:

Items
Elements of the dialog box:

1670 33003101.26
Documentation

Element Description

Printer Name

Shows the name of the currently selected printer. You can select a
different printer from the list box.

Status

Shows the status of the currently selected printer.

Type

Shows the type of the currently selected printer.

Position

Shows the path of the currently selected printer if you are connected to a
network printer, or the connection to the computer if you are using a local
printer.

Comment

Shows the comment for the currently selected printer.

Properties

Opens the properties dialog box for the currently selected printer.

Print range Whole documentation

If you click this option button, all the subjects, page 1664 in the document
structure are printed out.

Current heading

If you click this option button, the currently selected subject and all its
sub-sections are printed out. (The header for the current subject is shown
in the text box).

Page range This area is only available when the option button Current heading is
activated.

All

If you click this option button, all the pages in the currently selected
subject and all its sub-sections are printed out.

Currently previewed page

If you click this option button, the page currently showing in the preview is
printed out.

(This option is only available if Print preview, page 1666 is active.)

Pages from / to

If you click this option button, you can set which pages in the currently
selected subject and/or all its sub-sections are printed out.

Copies Number of copies:

33003101.26 1671
 Documentation

Element Description

Here you can enter the number of copies to print.

Collate

If you check this checkbox, when several copies are printed, each set of
document is printed together.

If you uncheck this checkbox, when several copies are printed, several
copies of each page are printed together.

OK Closes the dialog box and starts the printout.

Cancel Closes the dialog box without starting the printout.

Printout Setup
Introduction
The following options are available to open the printing parameters dialog box:
• Right-click Documentation > Title page directory in the project browser and click
Printout Setup...
• In the documentation structure, right-click a subject and click Printout Setup....
• In the documentation structure, select a subject and execute the menu command Edit >
Printout Setup....
NOTE: For the first option, only the title can be modified, if you want to modify the other
parameters, use the second or the third option to open the parameters dialog box.

1672 33003101.26
Documentation

Representation
Representation of the dialog box:

Items
Elements of the dialog box:

Element Description

Station Save Generated Printout

You can save documents that have been prepared, page 1665 between
Control Expert sessions (not saved by default).

If you want to save documents, check the checkbox.

Program (LD) This area is used to define the display for the documentation for the LD
section, page 1659.

Mixed Display Mode

When you activate this checkbox, the documentation for the LD section is
shown in combined display mode, page 747.

33003101.26 1673
 Documentation

Element Description

When you deactivate this checkbox, the documentation for the LD section is
shown in input mode, page 746.

Operator Screens This area is used to define the scope and display for the operating screen
documentation, page 1662.

Screen Properties

When you activate this checkbox, the properties for the operating screens are
documented.

Graphic Screen

When you activate this checkbox, the graphical displays for the operating
screens are documented.

Variables > Variables Used

When you activate this checkbox, the variables used in the operating screens
are documented.

Variables > Sort By Address

If you click this option button, the variables used are sorted according to the
address.

Variables > Sort By Symbol

If you click this option button, the variables used are sorted according to the
symbol.

Title page This area is used to define the title page, page 1655 for the documentation.

Project Name

Enter the name of the project.

Designer

Enter the name of the designer.

Variables & FB-Instances This area is used to define the scope and display for the variables and FB
instances, page 1658.

Sort by > Type

If you click this option button, the variables and FB instances used are sorted
according to type.

Sort by > Icon

If you click this option button, the variables and FB instances used are sorted
according to symbol.

Attributes Profiles > Standard (Symbol, Address, Init Value, Comment)

If you click this option button, only the default attributes for the variables and
FB instances used are documented.

1674 33003101.26
Documentation

Element Description

Attributes Profiles > All Attributes

If you click this option button, all attributes for the variables and FB instances
used are documented.
Footer This area is used to define the footer, page 1663 for the documentation.

Bitmap > Path:

Here you can enter the path for the bitmap file (for example, logo) to appear in
the footer.

Author:

Enter the name of the author.

Dept.:

Enter the name of the department.

Project:

Displays the project name entered in Title Page.

Page title

Automatically generated and contains the title of the subject printed.

Free fields:

You can enter any text here.

Printed on

Automatically generated.

Page:

Automatically generated

OK Saves all changes and closes the dialog box.

NOTE: Subjects whose settings have to be changed, need to be
generated again, page 1665.

Cancel Cancels all changes and closes the dialog box.

33003101.26 1675
1676 33003101.26
Import / Export

Import / Export
What’s in This Chapter
General information on the Import/Export function .................. 1677
Importing/Exporting the various elements of Control
Expert ................................................................................ 1687
Wizard for importing the various elements of Control
Expert ................................................................................ 1717

Subject of chapter
This chapter describes the procedures for importing or exporting the project program or
elements thereof. For example:
• import / export of the inputs / outputs configuration,
• import / export of DFB types,
• import / export of a program section,
• import / export of runtime screens,
• import / export of an animation table, etc.
It is also possible to Import/Export Project settings, page 546 and Import/Export Options,
page 587.

General information on the Import/Export function

Object of this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter presents general information on the Import/Export function available under
Control Expert.

General Information on Import/Export

At a Glance
The import / export functions are accessible from the structural view and the functional view
of the project browser:

33003101.26 1677
 Import / Export

• The import function allows you to retrieve part or all of a project program for use in your
project,
• The export function allows you to copy part or all of your project program to a file. You
can then retrieve this program for use in a new project using the import function.

Export Function
The export function generates a file that contains unprotected data and references to
protected data. You must define the name of this file and its location (directory), the
extension of which is determined by the export type (for example, XDB if you export a DFB
type).

Partial Program Export With File Encryption Active

When file encryption option is enabled, the export of program elements with hardened
encrypted DFB type (such as section, Program unit, task, variable, DFB type, ...), requires
entering the file encryption password.

Import Function
When you perform a partial import, the software asks you if you want to save the current
project. This allows you to have a pre-import version of the project.
If during an import an element with the same name is found in the project, a dialog box
allows you to choose between a number of operating modes:
• Keep: the element that is already present in the project is kept (the element with the
same name is not imported),
• Replace: the element that is already present in the project is replaced by the imported
element with the same name,
• Rename: you can change the name of the element to be imported in order to remove
the conflict.
Which of these three operating modes you choose depends on the element you wish to
import.
Following an import, you need to confirm the imported data (analysis and generation). In
fact, import works like a manual input and is not confirmed automatically.
NOTE: When importing elements with leading digits or unicode characters, adjust
project settings (Tools > Project Settings... > Variables > Allow leading digits and
Tools > Project Settings... > Variables > Character set) to avoid detected errors
during import or at build.

1678 33003101.26
Import / Export

Import / Export Files

At a Glance
The files generated during an export contain unprotected data and/or coded protected
data.
The extension of each file is defined by its content, that is to say by your position in the
directory tree of the project browser at the time of the export.

Import / Export Files

The files generated during an export are as follows:

Element to be exported File type

Inputs/outputs configuration XHW

Inputs/outputs configuration with global DTM configuration ZHW

Program XPG

Program Unit XPU

Section in LD language XLD

Section in IL language XIL

Section in ST language XST

Section in FBD language XBD

Section in SFC language XSF

Segment in LL984 language X9S

Network in LL984 language X9N

DFB type XDB

DDT XDD
Variables SCY / TXT / XSY / XVM

Communication network(s) XCM

Runtime screen(s) XCR

Animation table XTB

Functional module XFM

33003101.26 1679
 Import / Export

Element to be exported File type

Global project XEF

Global project with global DTM configuration ZEF

NOTE: When the first letter of the file extension is ’X’, it means that the file is in XML
format (extensible markup language).

Type of dialog box for the export function

At a Glance
When you select the export function from the Control Expert menu or from an element to be
exported, two types of dialog boxes appear on the screen. These dialog boxes allow you to
define:
• The name of the export file,
• The location of the file,
• The type of file,
• The export options.

Standard dialog box

The following dialog box appears when you export one of the following element types:
• Inputs/outputs configuration, page 1687,
• DFB type, page 1694,
• DDTs, page 1696,
• Communication network, page 1702,
• Operator screen, page 1704,
NOTE: For all these elements to be exported, simply define the name of the export file
and its location. The type of file under which the export is saved cannot be modified.

1680 33003101.26
Import / Export

The following example shows the dialog box for exporting a global project:

Dialog box and options

To export the following elements, you must define the name of the file with its location. You
can choose 1,2 or 3 options:
• Program, Program Unit and section, page 1690,
• Variables, page 1698,
• Animation table, page 1707,
• Functional module, page 1709.
• Global project, page 1711.
The following table describes the available options as a function of the elements to be
exported:

Type of Choice of file Export mode Export mode Export mode Export mode
element to be type with or without with or without with or without with or without
exported DDT option DFB type SR option conf option
option

Program no yes yes yes no

Program Unit no yes yes no no

Section no yes yes yes no

33003101.26 1681
 Import / Export

Type of Choice of file Export mode Export mode Export mode Export mode
element to be type with or without with or without with or without with or without
exported DDT option DFB type SR option conf option
option

Event Section no yes yes no no

Variables yes yes yes no no

Animation no no no no no
table
Functional no yes yes no no
module
Global project no no no no yes

The following example shows the export dialog box for a section element, including the
checkbox options:

1682 33003101.26
Import / Export

Type of dialog boxes for the import function

At a Glance
When you select the import function from the Control Expert menu or from an element to be
imported, various dialog boxes appear on the screen. These dialog boxes allow you to
define:
• The name of the import file,
• The location of the file,
• The type of file,
• The import option,
• The import procedures (Keep, Replace, Rename).

Standard dialog box

The following dialog box appears when you import one of the following element types:
• Inputs/outputs configuration, page 1689,
• DFB type, page 1695,
• DDTs, page 1697,
• Variables, page 1701,
• Communication network, page 1703,
• Animation tables, page 1708,
• Operator screens, page 1705.
NOTE: For all these elements to be imported, simply define the name of the import file
and its location. The type of file under which the import is chosen cannot be modified
except for importing variables.

33003101.26 1683
 Import / Export

The following example describes the dialog box for importing a DFB type:

Dialog box with wizard

In order to facilitate reassignments, you can choose to import the following elements using
wizard, page 1717:
• Global project, page 1713,
• Program Units, page 1692,
• Sections, page 1692,
• Functional modules, page 1710.
NOTE: For all these elements to be imported, simply define the name of the import file
and its location and check the option With wizard.

1684 33003101.26
Import / Export

The following example shows the dialog box for importing a section:

Managing Conflicts
At a Glance
When importing an element with the same name, if it already exists in the project, an Import
problem report dialog box lets you choose from several operating modes, page 1678:
• Keep,
• Replace,
• Rename.
These operating modes depend on the element to be imported. Excluding the global project
import function, all the other elements have these operating modes.

33003101.26 1685
 Import / Export

The following example shows the dialog box with conflicts when importing variables:

How to Manage Conflicts

You should perform the following steps in order to import an element and manage conflicts
during the import process:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the element to be imported.

Result: the element selected appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or from the contextual menu (by clicking the
right mouse button).

Result: a dialog box appears on the screen:

3 Choose the source folder for the import (directory tree) then select the file to be imported. For the
Variables element, the file type can be modified (XSY or TXT).

Result: the name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: if there is no conflict, a progress indicator appears during the import, otherwise the
Import problem report dialog box appears on the screen.

5 If you do not want to import the elements, check the Keep mode.

6 If you want to replace the elements with the imported ones, check the Replace mode. For further
information on the replacement of Function Block (FB) instances see Changing the type of an
instance, page 383.

1686 33003101.26
Import / Export

Step Action

7 If you want to rename the elements, check the Rename mode.

Result: a dialog box appears on the screen where you can enter the name for the element to be
modified.

8 Start the import with your chosen option (Keep, Replace, Rename) using the OK command. If a
conflict still exists, the Import problem report appears on the screen. Repeat steps 5, 6 and 7.

If you want to cancel the import, activate the Cancel command.

Importing/Exporting the various elements of

Control Expert
Object of this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter presents the Import/Export functions that apply to the various elements of
Control Expert.

Export of the input/output configuration

At a Glance
This function can be accessed from the Configuration folder in the project browser. It
allows you to export the complete configuration of the inputs/outputs of an existing project,
that is to say its physical description, in order to be able to use it in a new project. You can,
for example, export:
• the bus parameters
• the racks
• the modules

33003101.26 1687
 Import / Export

• the channel parameters

• the DTM configuration (in .ZHW file type only)
NOTE: Partial configuration export (.XHW) is available for M580 projects so that the .
XHW file can be imported by a CAD electrical drawing software. However, the partial
configuration import (.XHW) remains forbidden.

File generated
When you export the input/output configuration, you copy the entire configuration of the
project to an .XHW or .ZHW file. The .XHW file is in XML format.
File type:
• .XHW: Input/output configuration file
• .ZHW: DTM + input/output configuration file

Exporting the input/output configuration

To export the input/output configuration, perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the Configuration folder.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or from the context-sensitive menu (accessible
with a right-click).

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree).

4 Select the file type (.XHW or .ZHW) and enter the file name.

5 Activate the Export command.

Result: a progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

6 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

1688 33003101.26
Import / Export

Import of the input/output configuration

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Configuration folder in the project browser. It allows
you to import the entire input/output configuration of a project. If you have already
configured your project (for example if you have modified the default configuration), the
software offers you a choice between:
• Replacing your current input/output configuration with the one contained in the import
file.
• Canceling the import in order to keep your current input/output configuration.
File type:
• .XHW: Input/output configuration file
• .ZHW: DTM + input/output configuration file
NOTE: Despite partial configuration export (.XHW) is available for M580 projects so that
the .XHW file can be imported by a CAD electrical drawing software. The partial
configuration import (.XHW) remains forbidden.

Importing the input/output configuration

To import an input/output configuration, perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the Configuration folder.

Result: This folder appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or from the contextual menu (accessible with a
right-click).

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Choose the source directory for the import (directory tree).

4 Choose the file type (.XHW or .ZHW) and select the file to import.

Result: The name of the file appears in the File name field.

5 Activate the Import command.

6 A message tells you that the import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

33003101.26 1689
 Import / Export

I/O Data Type Import Behavior

The imported objects keep their original I/O data type.
The imported object behavior at import depends on its I/O data type:
• Topological I/O data type:
The imported object respects its initial topological addressing.
• Device DDT I/O data type:
◦ There is no variable with the same name in the application.
A device DDT is created with the initial name.
◦ A variable with the same name exists and it is managed in the application.
A device DDT is created with a new name assigned to the object.
◦ A variable with the same name exists but it is not managed in the application.
The existing device DDT is linked to the imported element and becomes managed in
the application.

Exporting the program

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the project browser.
Depending on the element that you have selected in the directory tree of the project
browser, it allows you to export:
• either all the program elements of a sequential task (MAST, FAST, AUX),
• or a Program Unit of a sequential task (excluding the activation conditions),
• or a section of a sequential task (excluding the section activation conditions),
• or a section of a Program Unit (excluding the section activation conditions),
• or an SR program module of a sequential task,
• or Timer or Input/Output event processing.
NOTE: When you export an SFC section, the sections containing the actions and
transitions (whether referenced or not) are also exported.
NOTE: When you export a conditioned section, the conditions are not exported. They
are exported only if you export the complete task.

1690 33003101.26
Import / Export

Options associated with exporting the program

Depending on the program elements you are exporting, you have a choice of 3 options:
• export with or without the content of all the DDTs used in the program element,
• export with or without the content of all the DFB types used in the program element,
• export with or without the content of all the SR program modules called in the program
element.
These 3 Options are selected by default.

Files generated
When you export a set of program elements or event processing elements, the software
generates a .XPG file which contains the following unprotected information: Program
Units, sections, SR program modules, event processing elements, unprotected DFB types
used (if the option is activated), DDTs used (if the option is activated).
When you export a Program Unit, the software generates a .XPU file which contains the
following unprotected information: sections, SR program modules, event processing
elements, unprotected DFB types used (if the option is activated), DDTs used (if the option is
activated).
When you export a section or SR program module or an event processing element, the
software generates a file according to the programming language used:
• .XLD, if the language of the element exported is LD
• .XIL, if the language of the element exported is IL
• .XST, if the language of the element exported is ST
• .XSF, if the language of the element exported is SFC (sections only)
• .XBD, if the language of the element exported is FBD
The file contains the unprotected information: program section, module or current event
processing, unprotected DFB types used (if the option is activated), DDTs used (if the option
is activated), program modules called (if the option is activated).
NOTE: The sections protected (read/write) by the active project protection, page 187
cannot be exported.

Exporting a program from the project browser

To export a program from the project browser, perform the following operations:

33003101.26 1691
 Import / Export

Step Action

1 Select the element to be exported.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 Select export mode: with or without DDT, DFB types, SR called.

Result: when a With option is selected, the corresponding box is checked.

5 Activate the Export command.

Result: a progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

6 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

Importing the Program

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Project Browser. According to the element you selected
in the project browser tree, you can use it to import:
• Either all of the program elements (Program Units, sections and program modules) of a
sequential task (MAST, FAST, AUX). The program elements are created in the same
order as they were when memorized during export.
• One or all of the Program Units of a sequential task. These Program Units are imported
after the program element that already exist in the list.
If you need to perform any reassignments, a wizard is available (except for protected
Program Units which cannot be modified).
• One or all of the sections of a Program Unit. These sections are imported after the
sections that already exist in the list of the Program Unit.
If you need to perform any reassignments, a wizard is available (except for protected
sections which cannot be modified).
• One or all of the sections of a sequential task. These sections are imported after the
sections that already exist in the list.
If you need to perform any reassignments, a wizard is available (except for protected
sections which cannot be modified).
• One or all of the program modules of a sequential task. These modules are imported
after the modules that already exist in the list.

1692 33003101.26
Import / Export

• One or all of the Timer or Input/Output event processing operations. These processing
operations are imported after the event processing operations that already exist in the
list.
If one of the previous elements already exists in the current project, the software asks you to
choose between the following options:
• keep the component of the current project,
• replace the project component by the one from the import file,
• rename the imported element.
NOTE: When importing a program element, if you wish to keep an element which has
the same name in the project (program), then you need to rename the imported element
(the name of an element is unique in a project).
NOTE: If the DDT, DFB types, and SR known as associated were exported (options
selected during export), they are imported with the program element.
NOTE: After importing the Program Unit, section or program module, validate them.

How to Import a Program Element

Perform the following operations to import a program element:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the folder into which you wish to import your program element
(Program Units, sections, SR or events).

Result: this folder appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or from the contextual menu.

Result: a dialog box appears on the screen:

3 Choose the source folder for the import (directory tree) then select the file to be imported (XPG,
XLD, XIL, XST, and so on).

Result: the name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Select the With wizard... option, page 1717 to benefit from various options in reassigning
elements.
5 Activate the Import command.

Result: a progress indicator shows how the import is progressing.

6 A message tells you when the import is complete.

If errors occur during the import, they are indicated by a message in the display window.

33003101.26 1693
 Import / Export

Exporting DFB types

At a Glance
This function is accessible via the Derived FB types folder in the project browser.
Depending on the element that you have selected in the directory tree of the project
browser, it allows you to export:
• either all the DFB types of the current project (even those that have not been used),
• or one DFB type.
NOTE: if you export a DFB type, which uses nested DFBs or DDTs, these are also
exported automatically.

Protected DFB.
A protected DFB type (in write or read/mode) can be exported and keeps the same type of
protection.

File generated during export of all DFBs

When you export all the DFB types of the project, the software generates an .XDB file
containing
• all the unprotected information: unprotected nested DFB types, DDTs used, and
references to the protected DFB types

File generated during export of one DFB type

When you export one DFB type, the software generates an.XDB file containing
• all the unprotected information: current DFB type, nested DFB types, DDTs used, and
references to the protected DFB types.

Exporting one or more DFB type(s) from the project browser

To export one DFB type or all the DFB types of a project, perform the following operations
from the project browser:

1694 33003101.26
Import / Export

Step Action

1 Select the element to be exported.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 Activate the Export command.

Result: a progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

5 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

Importing DFB types

At a Glance
The Derived FB Types Import function allows the user to import one or several DFB types.
The imported DFB can be either write protected or not write protected. If the DFB is write
protected, the DFB elements can only be accessible in read only mode. If the DFB has
version protection, the version number is only accessible as read only. Any nested DFB or
DDT that are used to compose the imported DFB is also be imported.
If the imported DFB type already exists in the application, a pop-up window appears to allow
the user to either:
• keep the element from the current project,
• replace the project element with the one in the import file,
• rename the imported element.

Importing a DFB type

The following steps can be used to import the DFB:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the Derived FB Types folder.

Result: This folder appears in reverse video

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

33003101.26 1695
 Import / Export

Step Action

3 Choose the source directory for the import (directory tree), then select the file to be imported
(XDB).

Result: The name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the import is proceeding or the popup window
appears to choose between keep, replace or rename, in that case, choose and validate by the
OK button.
5 A message tells you that the import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

NOTE: If the imported duplicate DFB is not renamed, the DFB might not function as
expected. Multiple reuse of the same instance of either the imported DFB or copied DFB
is not recommended because it could lead to improper execution of the DFB.

Exporting DDTs
At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Derived Data Types folder in the project browser.
Depending on the element that you have selected in the directory tree of the project
browser, it allows you to export:
• All the current project DDTs (even those that have not been used).
• One DDT.
NOTE: If you export a DDT that uses nested DDTs, these are also exported
automatically.

File generated during export of all DDTs

When you export all the DDTs, the software generates an .XDD file which contains all the
unprotected information for the project DDTs.

File generated during export of one DDT

When you export one DDT, the software generates an .XDD file which contains all the
unprotected information such as the current DDT and DDTs used.

1696 33003101.26
Import / Export

Exporting one or more DDTs from the project browser

To export one DDT, or all the DDTs, of a project, perform the following operations from the
project browser:

Step Action

1 Select the element to be exported.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 Activate the Export command.

Result: a progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

5 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

Importing DDTs
At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Derived Data Types folder in the project browser. It
allows you to import one or several DDTs.
NOTE: If the DDT uses nested DDTs, these are also imported.
If a DDT type already exists in the current project, the software proposes the following
options:
• keep the element from the current project.
• replace the project element with the one in the import file.
• rename the imported element.

Importing a DDT
To import a DDT, perform the following operations:

33003101.26 1697
 Import / Export

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the Derived Data Types folder.

Result: This folder appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Choose the source directory for the import (directory tree), then select the .XDD file to be
imported.

Result: The name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the import is proceeding.

5 A message tells you that the import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

Exporting Variables
At a Glance
This function is accessible from the FB Variables and instances folder in the project
browser.
According to the element you selected in the project browser tree, you can use it to export:
• all the variables of the project (even those that are not used),
• all the variables of a given family: EDT, IODDT, and so on (even those that are not
used).
To export a subset of the variables, see also the sub-section Export of a subset of variables,
page 434.

Excel Tool for Variables Management

An Excel template file is available in Control Expert extra tools to provide parameters
management from files generated in .XSY format. The Excel features allow to create, edit,
sort, or filter Control Expert application variables, and import them back in Control Expert.
The Excel template and its manual are installed with Control Expert: Start > All Programs >
EcoStruxure Control Expert > Extras > Excel Import Export Tool. They are also
available in the Control Expert software DVD (Extras > Excel Import Export Tool).

1698 33003101.26
Import / Export

Format of Variable Files

Variables can be saved:
• either in source format, in an .SCY file compatible with the PL7 program,
• or in text format with tab separators, in a .TXT file,
• or in XML format, in an OFS-compatible .XVM file,
• or in XML format, in an .XSY file.

Options Associated with Exporting Variables

Whatever the variables you export, you can choose two options:
• export with or without the content of all the DDTs used,
• export with or without the content of all the DFB types used.
By default, the two "export with" options are selected.
NOTE: These two options are available only when exporting files to .XSY format.

Purpose of Importing Data

Importing data into a specific format as .XSY, .SCY, .TXT or .XVM can be useful for different
purposes.
Those functionalities are described in the table below:

File type Available for

.XSY Export / Import

.SCY Export / PL7

.TXT Export / Import / Excel

.XVM Export / OFS

Files Structure For .XSY, .SCY, .TXT And .XVM Formats

When importing elementary variables from the data editor screen, the data structure with
extension .XSY, .SCY, .TXT, and .XVM is displayed in the following order: Name, Address,
Type, Comment, and Value.

33003101.26 1699
 Import / Export

NOTE: The structure of imported data from a .XSY file can have additional information.
If the options are set in column configuration screen, the complete structure for this type
of file is the following: Name, Address, Type, Comment, Value, Save, RW Program,
Constant and Custom.

Files Generated In .XSY And .XVM Formats

When you export variables, the program generates an .XSY or an .XVM file containing the
unprotected information, such as the list of current variables, the unprotected DFB types of
which an instance is exported (if the option is set), and the DDTs of which an instance is
exported (if the option is set).

Files Generated In .SCY, .XVM, .TXT Formats

When you export variables, the program generates a .TXT or an .SCY file containing the
unprotected information about current variables.
If you want to use Microsoft Excel to open the exported .TXT file, please follow the steps:
• Open Microsoft Excel
• With Open command of Excel, open the .TXT file by selecting in the open window Text
files as type of file.
• When the Excel file import assistant window opens, select Delimited for the type of file.
Click on the Next button.
• In the next window, check Tab option box as column separator. Click on the Next
button.
• In the next window select in the display the column that contain the values of the
variables and click on the Text option button for the column data format. Doing so
keeps the same values as in the .TXT file. If this format is not used for the column,
positive values will appear as negative when opening the .TXT file in Excel.
NOTE: The variables must not exceed 32 characters in length. Once you have modified
the .TXT file, save it with the tab-separated value option before importing.

How to Export a List of Variables from the Project Browser

Perform the following operations to export all the variables or a family of variables from the
project browser:

1700 33003101.26
Import / Export

Step Action

1 Select the element to be exported in the FB Variables and instances folder.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or from the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen:

3 Select the target folder for the export (directory tree) then enter the file name.

4 Select the export mode. with or without DDT, DFB type.

Result: When a "with" option is selected, the corresponding box is checked.

5 Activate the Export command.

Result: A progress indicator shows how the export is progressing.

6 A message is displayed in the display window to indicate that the export is finished.

Importing Variables
At a Glance
This function is accessible from the FB Variables and instances folder in the project
browser. It enables you to import a list of variables into your project.
NOTE: If the DDTs or associated DFB types have been exported (options selected on
export), they are imported with the list of variables.
If the list of variables already exists in the current project, the software asks you to choose
between the following options:
• keep the component of the current project,
• replace the project component by the one from the import file,
• rename the imported component, allowing you to keep both components.

Excel Tool for Variables Management

An Excel template file is available in Control Expert extra tools to provide parameters
management from files generated in .XSY format. The Excel features allow to create, edit,
sort, or filter Control Expert application variables, and import them back in Control Expert.
The Excel template and its manual are installed with Control Expert: Start > All Programs >
EcoStruxure Control Expert > Extras > Excel Import Export Tool. They are also
available in the Control Expert software DVD (Extras > Excel Import Export Tool).

33003101.26 1701
 Import / Export

How to Import a List of Variables

Perform the following operations to import a list of variables:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the FB Variables and instances folder.

Result: the Variables folder appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or from the contextual menu (by clicking the
right mouse button).

Result: a dialog box appears on the screen:

3 Choose the source folder for the import (directory tree) then select the file to be imported (XSY or
TXT).

Result: the name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: a progress indicator shows how the import is progressing.

5 A message tells you when the import is complete.

If errors occur during the import, they are indicated by a message in the display window.

NOTE: You can only import .XSY or .TXT files. Files in XVM and SCY format cannot be
imported.

Exporting the communication network configuration

Introduction
This function is accessible from the Communication folder of the project browser.
Depending on the element selected in the directory tree of the project browser, it allows you
to export:
• All communication networks with their configurations.
• A specific communication network with its configuration.

File generated during export of networks

When you export one or all of the communication networks, the software generates a .XCM
file containing all the information on each network: common data, bridge.

1702 33003101.26
Import / Export

How to export an operator screen

To export the communication networks, perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 In the Project browser, select the element to be exported.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 Activate the Export command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

5 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

NOTE: If you check the With Conf. option box before the export, the networks are
exported with the links to the modules of the project. When you import the networks in
another project they are automatically linked to the existing modules. This option works
only if the modules of the other project are compatible with those of the previous one
and if they are placed in the same positions in the rack.

Importing the configuration of a communication network

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Communication folder of the project browser.
You can import one or more communication network configurations.
If a communication network already exists in the current project with the same name, the
software proposes the following options:
• keep the element from the current project.
• replace the project element with the one in the import file.
• rename the imported element.

How to import a functional module

To import a communication network, perform the following operations:

33003101.26 1703
 Import / Export

Step Action

1 In the function view of the project browser, select the Communication folder.

Result: This folder appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Choose the source directory for the import (directory tree), then select the file to be imported
(XCM).

Result: The name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the import is proceeding.

5 A message tells you that the import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

Exporting operator screens

Introduction
This function is accessible from the Operator Screens folder in the project browser.
Depending on the element that you have selected in the directory tree of the project
browser, it allows you to export:
• All the operator screens of the project.
• All operator screens in the same family.
• A specific operator screen.
NOTE: The messages associated with the screens are only exported if you export all the
operator screens, page 1705 of the project.

Files generated during the export of an operator screen

When you export one or several operator screens, the software generates an .XCR file for
each family of screens. This file contains all the information relating to the graphic objects
and the reference of the image objects (.bmp, .jpg). The image object references
correspond to their names and their access paths.

1704 33003101.26
Import / Export

How to export an operator screen

To export an operator screen (all screens, a family of screens or a single screen), perform
the following operations:

Step Action

1 In the Project browser, select the element to be exported.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 Activate the Export command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

5 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

Import/Export of messages
The messages associated with the screens are only exported if you export all the operator
screens of the project. If you export a single operator screen or an operator screen family,
the messages are not exported.
That means when you export a single screen from project A and import it to project B, you
need to redefine all messages used inside this screen in the Messages list of Project B.
As a workaround you can export and import all messages as described in Messages editing
and import/export function, page 1622.
Another way to use messages created in project A in screens imported to project B, is to
open project A and project B in parallel and to copy/paste the messages from the Messages
list in project A to the Messages list in project B.
You have to take care that the Message numbers meet the demands of your new project.

Importing operator screens

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Operator Screens folder in the project browser.

33003101.26 1705
 Import / Export

In the Operator Screens folder, if you are importing one or several screens with their
families you can:
• import a family of screens, in which case it is then inserted in the folder. The screens
belonging to this family continue to be located in their families of origin.
• import the screens without families directly in the root of the folder (they do not belong
to a family).
NOTE: If you import a file containing references to images and the access path to these
images is no longer correct, the images do not appear in the imported screen.
NOTE: Screens are only reattached to the functional modules to which they were
attached before export when you import a complete ZEF, XEF or XFM file. If you import
an operator screen in the structural view (XCR file), the attachment between operator
screen and functional module is lost. If you import an operator screen in the functional
view (XCR file), it is attached to the functional module from which the import was
launched.

Import/Export of messages
Please refer to Import/Export of messages, page 1705.

Importing an operator screen

To import an operator screen, perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 In the project browser, select the Operator Screens folder into which you wish to import your
screen or family of screens.

Result: This folder appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Choose the source directory for the import (directory tree), then select the file to be imported (.
XCR).

Result: The name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the import is proceeding.

5 A message tells you that the import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

1706 33003101.26
Import / Export

Exporting animation tables

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Animation Tables folder of the project browser.
Depending on the element that you have selected in the directory tree of the project
browser, it will allow you to export:
• all the animation tables of the project,
• a single animation table.

File generated during export of a single animation table

When you export an animation table, the software generates a .XTB file that contains all the
unprotected information such as the current animation table.

Exporting a single animation table

To export one or all of the animation tables, perform the following operations from the project
browser:

Step Action

1 Select the element to be exported.

Result: The selected element appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: a dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 Activate the Export command.

Result: a progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

5 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

33003101.26 1707
 Import / Export

Importing animation tables

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Animation Tables folder of the project browser. It allows
you to import one or more animation tables into your project.
If an animation table already exists in the current project with the same name, the software
proposes the following options:
• keep the element from the current project,
• replace the project element with the one in the import file,
• rename the imported element.

Importing a single animation table

To import a single animation table, perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 In the project browser select the Animation Tables folder.

Result: This folder appears in reverse video

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: a dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Choose the source directory for the import (directory tree), then select the file to be imported
(XTB).

Result: The name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the import is proceeding.

5 A message tells you that import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

1708 33003101.26
Import / Export

Exporting a functional module

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the function view of the project browser.
It allows you to export all the elements from the functional module selected:
• functional module properties (name, comment),
• Program Units and/or sections (with the variables used, program code, activation
condition),
• event processing,
• functional sub-modules (nested functional modules),
• operator screens,
• animation tables.

Options associated with exporting a functional module

As with the program export procedure, you have the choice of 3 options:
• export with or without definition of all the DDTs used in the functional module,
• export with or without definition of all the DFB types used in the functional module,
• export with or without the content of all the SR program modules called in the program
element.
The 3 "export with" options are selected by default.

Files generated
When you generate a functional module, the software generates a .XFM file. This contains
all the unprotected information such as the sections, event processing, DFB types used (if
the option has been activated), DDTs used (if the option has been activated) and the SR
program modules called (if the option has been activated). It also contains the references of
the operator screen images.

How to export a functional module

To export a functional module, perform the following operations from the function view of the
project browser:

33003101.26 1709
 Import / Export

Step Action

1 Select the functional module to be exported.

Result: the functional module selected appears in reverse video.

2 Activate the Export command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 Select export mode: with or without DDT, DFB types called.

Result: when a "with" option is selected, the corresponding box is checked.

5 Activate the Export command.

Result: a progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

6 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

Importing a functional module

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the functional view of the project browser.
You can import a functional module under:
• the project,
• in the existing module, the new module is then a nested module.
In all cases, the assistant is offered as an option.
NOTE: Screens are only re-attached to the functional modules to which they were
attached before export when you import a complete ZEF, XEF or XFM file. If you import
an operator screen in the structural view (XCR file), the attachment between operator
screen and funtional module is lost. If you import an operator screen in the functional
view (XCR file), it is attached to the functional module from which the import was
launched.

How to import a functional module

To import a functional module, perform the following operations:

1710 33003101.26
Import / Export

Step Action

1 In the function view of the project browser, select the documentation file in which you wish to
import your functional module (station or a functional module).

Result: This folder appears in reverse video

2 Activate the Import command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Choose the source directory for the import (directory tree), then select the file to be imported
(XFM).

Result: The name of the file then appears in the File name field.

4 Activate the Import command.

Result: A progress indicator lets you know how the import is proceeding.

5 A message tells you that import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

Exporting a global project

At a Glance
This function is accessible from the Project folder of the project browser. It allows you to
export the following elements of the project:
• all the DDTs
• all the variables (used and unused)
• all the unprotected DFB types
• the entire program: sections, SR program modules (with execution condition), event
processing
• all the functional modules
• all the operator screens
• all the animation tables
• the project properties
This function optionally allows to export the following elements of the project:
• the input/output configuration
• the communication network configuration
• the global DTMs configuration (DTMs topology tree and device configurations)

33003101.26 1711
 Import / Export

NOTE: The EFs, EFB types, protected DFB types, documentation and user preferences
are not exported.

Files generated
Two formats of export files are available:
• .XEF file to export a global project without global DTMs configuration
• .ZEF file to export a global project with global DTMs configuration
The export file contains all the unprotected information: configuration of the inputs/
outputs, sections, SR program modules, events processing, unprotected DFB types, DDTs,
variables, animation tables, references to the protected DFB types, global DTMs
configuration (ZEF file only).
When exporting protected DFBs, private variables and sections of the DFB are encrypted.
However, the variables of type IN, OUT, IN/OUT and PUBLIC still visible.
NOTE: .XEF or .ZEF file do not contain the configuration of the TSX CPP 110. Do not
forget to backup the .CO file (Sycon) for CANopen after an export of the project.
NOTE: When Exporting a project to a .XEF or a .ZEF file, the application password is
cleared.

Maintain Output Links on Disabled EF

For compatibility of the project setting Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0)
please refer to the respective section, page 574.

How to export a global project

To export a global project, perform the following operations from the project browser:

Step Action

1 Select the Project folder.

Result: This folder appears in reverse video

2 Activate the Export project command from the File menu or the contextual menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the export format from the Type option:

• .ZEF format to export a global project with global DTMs configuration
• .XEF format to export a global project without global DTMs configuration. If the application
contains DTMs, the global DTMs configuration is not exported.

1712 33003101.26
Import / Export

Step Action

4 Select the destination directory for the export (directory tree) and enter the file name.

4 If the ZEF export format is chosen, the option With Encryption is selected by default when
application file encryption is enabled (only for Control Expert 15.0 Service Pack 1 or later).
NOTE: Exporting an unencrypted application file is possible by de-selecting the option With
Encryption. In this case you need to enter encryption file password to perform the export
and the exported file is no longer protected.

5 If the XEF export format is chosen, select the option With Conf to include all data relating to the
hardware configuration in the file.
NOTE: All managed Device DDT become unmanaged if the With Conf option is
unchecked. The user will link manually all the unmanaged Device DDT instances with each
device.
6 Activate the Export command.

Result: a progress indicator lets you know how the export is proceeding.

7 A message in the output window tells you that export is complete.

Importing a global project

At a Glance
This function is accessible only from the File > Open menu of Control Expert.
The following files can be opened:
• .ZEF file (Full Application Exchange Files) to import a global project with global DTMs
configuration
• .XEF file (Application Exchange Files) to import a global project without global DTMs
configuration
Before opening the imported project, Control Expert proposes to save the current project
before closing it.

Libset Version
When importing a .ZEF or .XEF file, the latest Libset version is always selected.

Importing protected elements

If the project you want to import contains protected sections, these are imported and their
content is coded.

33003101.26 1713
 Import / Export

If the project you want to import contains protected DFB types, these are referenced in the .
ZEF or .XEF file but not imported.
NOTE: .ZEF or .XEF files do not contain the configuration of the TSX CPP 110.
If the .CO file (Sycon) does not exist:
• a warning is displayed in the Output Window after the Open command,
• an error is displayed in the Output Window after the Analyze or Generate
command.
In the configuration screen of the TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card, select the required .CO
file to update the CANopen configuration.

Importing operator screens

Screens are only re-attached to the functional modules to which they were attached before
export when you import a complete ZEF, XEF or XFM file.
If you import an operator screen in the structural view (XCR file), the attachment between
operator screen and functional module is lost.
If you import an operator screen in the functional view (XCR file), it is attached to the
functional module from which the import was launched.
The operator screens are imported with the same structure as in the source project. If
families of screens do not exist, they are automatically created.

Maintain Output Links on Disabled EF

For compatibility of the project setting Maintain output links on disabled EF (EN=0)
please refer to the respective section, page 574.

How to import a global project

To import a global project, perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 Activate the Open command from the File menu.

Result: A dialog box appears on the screen.

2 Choose to save or not save your current project.

Result:
• Your project is saved or not saved, according to your selection.

1714 33003101.26
Import / Export

Step Action

• A dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Select the file to be imported (.ZEF or .XEF).

Result: The filename appears in the File name field.

4 Select the Open import File with Wizard option, if you require help reassigning elements.

5 Activate the Open command.

Result:
• Control Expert closes your current project.
• A progress indicator lets you know how the import is proceeding.

6 A message tells you that the import is complete.

If any errors occur during import, you are informed of these by a message in the Output
Window.

Conversion Wizard
To convert a legacy project partially or as a whole you can use the Conversion Wizard.
The Conversion Wizard provides options to remap I/O objects (channels, variables etc.)
during conversion and to adapt the hardware configuration of the new project concurrently in
Control Expert.

Exporting/Importing LL984 Segments/Networks

Introduction
You can export/import LL984 segments and networks from the Structural View of the
Project Browser.

Restrictions
In contrast to the Export dialog for other language sections, the dialog for LL984 segments/
networks does not provide the With SR check box, because the subroutine networks called
in the exported networks are not exported.
This is done because the called subroutine number can be given as a parameter at runtime,
so you do not know in advance which subroutines are really called.

33003101.26 1715
 Import / Export

If you want to use the called subroutines in another application, you must export and re-
import the whole LL984 subroutine segment.

Files Generated
Files with the following extensions are generated during export:
• *.X9S for LL984 segments
• *.X9N for LL984 networks
The created files also include the definitions of variables and variable types used inside the
exported segments and networks.

Exporting LL984 Segments/Networks

Step Action

1 Select the element to be exported (LL984 segment/network).

2 Right-click and select Export from the context menu or use the File > Export menu command.
3 Select the destination directory for the export and enter the file name.

4 Select / deselect the With DDT/With DFB options.

5 Click the Export button.

6 A message in the Import/Export tab of the output window informs you when export is completed.

Importing LL984 Networks

To import a *.X9N file (LL984 network) you have to select an LL984 segment node in the
Structural View of the Project Browser
Right-click and select Import from the context menu or use the File > Import menu
command.
In case of naming conflicts for the network name or the used variables and variable types an
Import Trouble Report dialog will be displayed. Please refer to Managing Conflicts, page
1685.

1716 33003101.26
Import / Export

Importing LL984 Segments

To import a *.X9S file (LL984 segment) you have to select Sections or SR Sections in the
Structural View of the Project Browser.
Right-click and select Import from the context menu or use the File > Import menu
command.
In case of naming conflicts an Import Trouble Report dialog will be displayed.
Importing a *.X9S file to the SR Sections node can end up in the existence of more than
one LL984 segment under SR Sections.
During Analyze this will be checked and will lead to an analyze error.
In this case move the LL984 subroutine networks needed into one LL984 SR segment and
delete the other LL984 SR segments.
Even if the Ladder Logic (LL984) option under Tools > Project Settings > Program >
Languages is not set, *.X9S files can be imported without error messages and the
corresponding segments and networks will be created. But in this case later during Analyze
an incorrect language message will be raised for these segments and networks.
In the context menu of segments the menu entry to import networks is disabled in case the
Ladder Logic (LL984) option is not set.

Wizard for importing the various elements of

Control Expert
Object of this sub-chapter
This sub-chapter presents the functions of the wizard for importing the sections and
functional modules under Control Expert.

Using the assistant

At a Glance
You can select the assistant to import the following elements:
• A global project
• A Program Unit

33003101.26 1717
 Import / Export

• A section
• A functional module
During the import you can use the assistant to facilitate the reassignment of the following
types of element:
• Variables
• DDTs
• DFBs
• Sections (SR, macro SFC)
• Event processing (timer or Input/Output)
• Animation table
• Functional module
To do this, check the With wizard box in the import dialog box.

Description of the wizard

The wizard is accessible via a dialog box. This box contains one or more tabs. Each tab
corresponds to an element to be imported.

1718 33003101.26
Import / Export

The illustration that follows is an example of the dialog box when a functional module is
imported:

The list of elements that cannot be reassigned (shaded columns) and the contextual
functions allowing the reassignments are offered via the following tabs:

Tab Description

DDT Provides a list of the DDTs used. For each DDT, the screen gives the name of the DDT
before and after reassignment, as well as the type of DDT and the comment.

DFB Provides a list of instances of DFBs used. For each instance, the screen gives the name of
the instance before and after reassignment, as well as the DFB type and the comment.

Variables Provides a list of the variables used. For each variable, the screen gives the address and
the symbol (before and after reassignment), as well as the comment.

Sections Provides a list of program modules.

SR Provides a list of SRs.

Macro steps Provides a list of the sequential steps called.

33003101.26 1719
 Import / Export

Tab Description

Events Provides a list of Timer or System event processing elements called.

Animation tables Provides a list of animation tables used.

Functional Provides a list of elements (variables, sections, animation tables) that are in the functional
modules module to be imported.

Common commands
The wizard contains global commands:
• Find global... and Replace Global...
• Load... and Save..., page 1729
A symbol or character string search or replace action can be performed in all the wizard tabs
or in a specific tab:
• To address all tabs shown in the wizard, select Find global or Replace Global.
• To address a specific tab, right-click in the selected tab and choose Find or Replace.
The commands in the dialog box only affect the selected tab.
Dialog box associated with the Replace and Replace Global... commands:

To replace a symbol or character string:

• In the Find What field, enter the symbol or character string to replace.
The Find What command is case-sensitive. The special character * is not allowed in
character strings and does not act as a wildcard character to search any string or part of
string.
• In the Replace with field, enter the new symbol or character string.

1720 33003101.26
Import / Export

• Select Replace Next to replace the occurrences found one by one.

Select Replace All to replace all symbol occurrences in one operation.
NOTE: If the dialog box is opened using the Replace command in a tab, the
Replace All command only affects the selected tab. If the dialog box is opened
using the wizard Replace Global... command, the Replace All command affects all
the tabs.

New addresses reassignment using the wizard

The procedure below explains how to reassign a range of addresses using the import
assistant wizard (only symbolic variables can be modified using the assistant wizard):

Step Action

1 Select the Variable tab from the wizard window.

2 Select the first source address from the range of addresses to re-allocate.

3 Right-click on the first source address.

4 Select Set Low Limit.

Result: In the Address remapping section, the low limit is set.

5 Select the last source address from the range of addresses to re-allocate.

6 Right-click the last source address.

7 Select Set High Limit.

Result: In the Address remapping section, the high limit is set.

8 In the blank field from the Address remapping section:

• Enter the first new remapping address.

9 Click Remapping....

Result:
• The original range of addresses is updated.
• The Target Address column is updated with the new range of addresses.

33003101.26 1721
 Import / Export

Variables tab of the wizard

At a Glance
This tab allows you to edit the name of the symbols or to reassign an object or a group of
objects to be imported.
If you want to import input/output variables, this editing allows you to reassign them in order
to adapt to the new current configuration.

Reassignment of variables
The Remapping command is used to remap a group of variables. For example, you can
remap the objects %M100...%M132 into %M200...%M232:

1722 33003101.26
Import / Export

Sort by type
In the Family field, you can select the type of variables to display in the window.

Modifying a symbol
The Go to variable command allows you to find a symbol or a character string in the
symbols (source or destination):

If you select the Find in comment box, the variable is also searched in the variable
comments.
The Replace target variable command allows you to modify a symbol or replace a
character string in the symbols to be imported:

If you check the Replace in comment box, the variable is also replaced in the variable
comments.

33003101.26 1723
 Import / Export

NOTE: The Find What command is case-sensitive. The special character * is not
allowed in character strings and does not act as a wildcard character to search any
string or part of string.
NOTE: The Find symbol dialog and Replace symbol dialog dialog boxes are also
available using Find global and Replace global buttons.

DFB and DDT Tabs of the Wizard

At a Glance
These Two Tabs Present the DFB or DDT Types to Be Imported.

1724 33003101.26
Import / Export

Modifying an Element Name

To modify the name of an element, you must perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 Double click on the element to be modified.

2 Input the new name of the element.

3 Confirm your input by pressing the Enter button. The Escape button cancels the input.

Elements You May Modify

The various elements that you are able to modify are the following:
• DFB:
◦ Target type enables you to modify the name (Source type) of a DFB type. This
name may contain a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters (‘A’...‘Z’, ‘0’...‘9’ and
underscore character); the first character must be a letter.
◦ The new name of a type must be unique.
◦ The DFB type may not be modified.
◦ Comment enables you to modify comment associated with a selected DFB type.
This comment, written on a single line, may contain a maximum of 1024 characters.
• DDT:
◦ Target type enables you to modify the name (Source type) of a DDT type. This
name may contain a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters (‘A’...‘Z’, ‘0’...‘9’ and
underscore character); the first character must be a letter.
◦ The new type names must be unique.
◦ Comment enables you to modify comment associated with a selected DDT type.
This comment, written on a single line, may contain a maximum of 1024 characters.

SR, Sections, Events and Macro steps tabs of the wizard

At a Glance
These four tabs present the sections, SR program modules, event processing elements and
macro steps to be imported.

33003101.26 1725
 Import / Export

Modifying the name of an element

To modify the name of an element, you must perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 Double click the element to be modified.

2 Enter the new name for the element. You can only modify the name of a program module or of a
macro step and the number of an event processing element.

3 Confirm your input by pressing Enter. Press Esc to cancel the input.

Elements that you can modify

The various elements that you can modify are as follows:
• SR program sections and module
◦ Target Address allows you to modify the name of an SR program section or
module. This name comprises a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters (‘A’...’Z’,
‘0’...’9’ and underscore character); the first character is a letter.
◦ Comment allows you to modify the comment associated with the SR program
section or module. This comment written on a single line may contain a maximum of
512 characters.
◦ The new SR program section or module must be unique.
• Event processing
◦ Target Address allows you to modify the event processing number.
◦ Comment allows you to modify the comment associated with the event processing
element. This comment written on a single line may contain a maximum of 512
characters.
◦ The new event processing must be unique.
• Macro step
◦ Target Address of the Macro allows you to modify the name of a macro step.
◦ Comment allows you to modify the comment associated with the macro step. This
comment written on a single line may contain a maximum of 512 characters.
◦ The new macro step must be unique.

1726 33003101.26
Import / Export

Wizard animation tables tab

At a Glance
This tab presents the animation tables to be imported.

Modifying the name of an element

To modify the name of an element, you must perform the following operations:

Step Action

1 Double click the element to be modified.

2 Enter the new name for the element. You can only modify the name of an animation table.

3 Confirm your input by pressing Enter. Press Esc to cancel the input.

Elements that you can modify

The various elements that you can modify are as follows:
• Animation table
◦ Target address allows you to modify the name of the animation table. This name
comprises a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters (‘A’...’Z’, ‘0’...’9’ and
underscore character); the first character is a letter.
◦ Comment is used to modify the comment associated with the animation table.
◦ The new animation table must be unique.

Wizard functional module tabs

At a Glance
When importing a functional module with the wizard, the dialog box appears with the
following tabs:
• Functional modules,
• Variables, page 1722,
• Sections, page 1725.
• Animation tables, page 1727,

33003101.26 1727
 Import / Export

• etc.
The tab of the element to be imported appears only if this element exists in the functional
module.
The following illustration presents the dialog box when a functional module is imported:

Elements you can modify

The various elements you can modify are as follows:

1728 33003101.26
Import / Export

• Functional module:
◦ Target Address allows you to modify the target name of the functional module. This
name comprises a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters (‘A’...’Z’, ‘0’...’9’ and
underscore character); the first character is a letter.
◦ The new functional module name must be unique.
◦ Comment is used to modify the comment associated with the selected functional
module. This comment written on a single line may contain a maximum of 1024
characters.

Correspondence file
At a Glance
This file in text format contains all the information concerning the modifications or
reassignments made in the various tabs of the wizard: Variables, DFB, DDT, Sections,
Macro steps, etc.

CAUTION
LOSS OF DATA
Save the Correspondence file to disk before launching the import command.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Saving/Restoring modifications
The Load and Save commands allow you to:

33003101.26 1729
 Import / Export

Command Description

Load Allows you to automatically restore the reassignments previously saved to a file.

Save Allows you to save the modifications made, via the wizard, to a correspondence file.

The following dialog box allows you to enter the name of the file:

1730 33003101.26
33003101.26 1731
Conversion Wizard
What’s in This Part
Conversion Wizard............................................................... 1733

Subject of this Part

This part describes the conversion wizard.

1732 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Conversion Wizard
What’s in This Chapter
General Description of the Conversion Wizard ....................... 1733
Structure Tab of the Conversion Wizard ................................. 1739
I/O Remapping Tab of the Conversion Wizard ........................ 1743
CPU Configuration Tab of the Conversion Wizard................... 1761

Overview
This chapter describes the conversion wizard.

General Description of the Conversion Wizard

Overview
This section provides a general description of the conversion wizard and how to access the
wizard.

Introduction
Overview
The conversion wizard is an integrated part of Control Expert.
The conversion wizard is used to:
• convert applications, exported out of legacy applications (PL7 and Concept) to Control
Expert
• convert legacy applications partially or as a whole
• remap I/O objects (channels, variables etc.) during conversion by means of the wizard
• adapt the hardware configuration of the new application concurrently in Control Expert
• modify the amount of used memory in the CPU
The conversion wizard is available if you have chosen to install a converter (e.g. PL7
Application Converter) during the setup of Control Expert.

33003101.26 1733
 Conversion Wizard

Application Conversion as a Whole

To convert an application as a whole, while keeping the same PLC family and selection of
application parts or remapping of I/O objects is not needed, you have to use the specific
converters directly via the Control Expert menu File > Open.
Additional documentation is provided for the specific converters (EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert, Concept Application Converter, User Manual and EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, PL7
Application Converter, User Manual).

Partial Application Conversion

To convert an application partially and/or the PLC family must be changed or remapping of I/
O objects is needed, use the conversion wizard via the Control Expert menu Tools >
Convert Partially.

General Procedure
General procedure to convert a legacy application to Unit Pro

Step Action

1 Export your application out of your legacy programming system (e.g. as an FEF file out of PL7 or an
ASC file out of Concept).

2 Create a new application in Control Expert selecting a CPU with enough memory and the I/O
access capabilities needed (e.g. Modicon M340).

Optionally you can configure the I/O modules expected to be needed but you can modify the
hardware configuration even later (see step 6).

3 Launch the conversion wizard in Control Expert via Tools > Convert Partially.
Result: The conversion wizard asks you to select the exported legacy source file.

4 Select the exported legacy source file.

Result: The converter analyzes the source file and displays the result in the 3 tabs of the
conversion wizard.
5 Select the parts of the application (or the complete application) to be converted in the Structure
tab.
6 Remap the I/O objects for getting them compliant with the new hardware configuration.

Concurrently you can modify the hardware configuration of the new application in Control Expert.

Note: To save a backup file of your intermediate I/O mapping you can use the Save button. With
Load you can reload your latest saved intermediate I/O mapping.

1734 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Step Action

7 After finishing all your selections and manual modifications click OK.

Result: The converter applies the defined remapping to the selected parts of the source file and
imports the results into the opened Control Expert Application (e.g. an application with an Modicon
M340 PLC).

8 Continue working on the opened application, save it or export it as a ZEF or XEF file, page 1712.

Access to Conversion Wizard

Accessing the Wizard
Step Action

1 Create a new application in Control Expert selecting a CPU with enough memory and the I/O
access capabilities needed (e.g. Modicon M340).

2
Launch the conversion wizard in Control Expert via Tools > Convert Partially.

33003101.26 1735
 Conversion Wizard

Step Action

3
A file selection dialog is displayed, offering a choice of exported legacy application files (e.g FEF
files for PL7, ASC files for Concept etc.).

4 Select a file and confirm with Open.

Result: Depending on the kind of file selected the respective converter (PL7, Concept, LL984)
becomes active and analyzes the content of the selected file.

The result of the analysis is displayed in the 3 tabs of the conversion wizard.

Exported Files
Software Extension Exported

PL7 *.fef complete application

Concept *.asc complete application

Concept *.sec user-defined subset of sections

Concept *.txt user-defined subset of variables

Concept *.ccf configuration export to extract communication definitions

ProWORX32 *.pwx complete application

MODSOFT *.cfg complete application

Control Expert *.xpg tasks (without configuration)

1736 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

General Representation
Overview

33003101.26 1737
 Conversion Wizard

Elements of the Wizard

Element Description

tabs The conversion wizard shows 3 tabs:

• Structure
In this tab you can select the parts of the application to be converted.
Please refer to Structure Tab of the Conversion Wizard, page 1739.
• IO Remapping
In this tab you can remap I/O objects before conversion.
Please refer to I/O Remapping Tab of the Conversion Wizard, page 1743.
• CPU configuration
In this tab you can modify the amount of used memory in the CPU.
Please refer to CPU Configuration Tab of the Conversion Wizard, page 1761.

Save... Saves all your input made in the different tabs, as selecting the parts to be converted or
remapping of I/O objects, to a backup file. Each Save... will overwrite your last backup
file.
Load... Restores all input, made in the different tabs, from a backup file.

There is only 1 level of backup file created with your last Save....

OK Starts conversion taking into account all the input made in the different tabs of the
wizard.
Cancel Cancels conversion and closes the wizard.

The content of the tabs may differ depending on the source code that is converted.

Conversion and Result

Starting Conversion
Click the OK button to start converting the already prepared application.

XPG File
An XPG file containing all user corrections is saved during conversion.
• In case of PL7 conversion an XPG file is saved to a user-related directory:
My Documents\PL7 Converter\<app name>\<app name.xpg>
This directory is different from the directory where the input file has been taken from.
This allows to read also from network directories with write-protection.

1738 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

• In case of Concept and LL984 conversion an XPG file is saved to the same directory as
where the source file is located.
NOTE: XPG format is used as output file format because it contains programs only, but
no configuration.

Automatic Import
The import of the converted application into the opened application is automatically
launched to free you from an otherwise additional operation step.

Report File
A report of conversion that gives the list of new mapping, warnings and what is not
converted, accompanies the XPG output file in the same user-related directory.

Application Build
To be able to build the application in Control Expert correct the I/O mapping completely and
remove all other errors displayed during analysis of the application.

Structure Tab of the Conversion Wizard

Overview
This section provides a description of the conversion wizard´s Structure tab and how to
select the parts of the application to be converted.

Introduction
Overview
The Structure tab of the conversion wizard shows the analyzed legacy application in a
browser view.
In this browser you can select all parts of an application that should be converted.

33003101.26 1739
 Conversion Wizard

Selectable Parts
The following parts of an application can be selected for conversion:
• program tasks and sections of programs in all programming languages, subset list of
sections
• subset list of subroutines
• subset list of animation tables
• subset list of DDTs and DFBs
• subset list of events
• subset list of I/O screen families and I/O screens (operator screens)
• variables
Depending on the legacy project, not all parts may exist.
NOTE: By default all parts of an application are selected for conversion.
I/O Screens (operator screens) can not be selected.

Variables
If you select the Variables part for conversion, all the variables that are declared data
(having a symbol or a comment) are taken into account during conversion.
Otherwise only data, called inside the selected sections, subroutines and events, are
converted.

1740 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Browser View

The extension sign (+) in front of a directory indicates that there are selectable
subdirectories.

Selecting Application Parts to be Converted

Overview
The Structure tab of the conversion wizard shows the analyzed legacy application in a
browser view.
In the browser view you can select the parts of an application to be converted.
You can either select single parts or all parts of a directory at once.
You can not select a directory itself.

33003101.26 1741
 Conversion Wizard

Structure Tab

Elements of the Tab

Element Description

checkbox A checkbox with a red checkmark indicates that this part should be converted.

An empty checkbox indicates that this part should not be converted.

Click the checkbox or the icon beside to toggle from checked to unchecked and
vice versa.
Comment Displays the comment of a selected part in the browser view (read only).

1742 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Context Menu
Right click on an application part in the browser view to open a context menu.
This context menu provides the Select All and the Select None items.

Element Description

Select All Click on any part of a directory and then click Select All to select all parts of the
respective directory.

Select None Click on any part of a directory and then click Select None to select all parts of
the respective directory.

I/O Remapping Tab of the Conversion Wizard

Overview
This section provides a description of the conversion wizard´s I/O Remapping tab and how
to remap I/O objects before conversion.

Introduction
Overview
The I/O Remapping tab of the conversion wizard shows the I/O objects of an analyzed
legacy application in a table view.
By means of this table view you can remap I/O objects before conversion.
The I/O Remapping tab provides additional features to ease special remapping operations
(Communication -1, Exclude, Type Restricted).
The I/O Remapping tab is applicable for all applications coming from PL7, Concept or
ProWORX32.

Syntax of I/O Objects

For the detailed syntax of I/O objects and their correspondences in Control Expert please
refer to the specific documentation to be found under:

33003101.26 1743
 Conversion Wizard

• For Concept Converter, refer to chapter System (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Concept Application Converter, User Manual).
• For PL7 Converter, refer to chapter Correspondences between PL7 and Unity Pro:
language objects (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, PL7 Application Converter, User
Manual).

Address Column
Directly addressed I/O variables (topological addresses) are represented in the Address
column of the conversion wizard as shown in the following example.
Please also refer to chapter Topological Addresses of PL7 Micro in the Conversion Wizard
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, PL7 Application Converter, User Manual).
Embedded counter channels of a PL7 TSX Micro CPU

For detailed address description please refer to chapter Direct Addressing Data Instances
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual).

Corrected Column
The addresses in the I/O Remapping tab are formally adapted to Control Expert syntax, but
have the same numerical values as before in PL7.

1744 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

For details please refer to chapter Memory objects (variables and constants) (see
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, PL7 Application Converter, User Manual).
In the Corrected column only direct addresses following the Control Expert syntax may
appear.
If modules do not exist in Control Expert, existing I/O objects have to be mapped manually
to other regular modules of the targeted PLC.

I/O Object Remapping

I/O Remapping is applicable to all selectable source formats and PLC families coming from
PL7, Concept or ProWORX32.

Variable Families
Because applications can have very many variables, the variables are structured into
families.
A variable family is characterized by direct addresses of the same semantically meaning, e.
g. Word addresses or addresses of boolean variables.

33003101.26 1745
 Conversion Wizard

Table View
The names of all variable families are listed in the table view.

If there is no extension sign (+) in front of a variable family, no object of this family is present
in the application.

Remapping Table
Overview
The remapping table shows all variables with direct addresses used in the application
whether they are declared or not.
Even if directly addressed variables appear only in programs, they are detected and
displayed in this table.

1746 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Representation
I/O Remapping tab

Elements of the Remapping Table

To see all columns of the table scroll horizontally.

Element Description

Address Topological or direct variable address

For detailed information please refer to paragraph below.

State RAM This column is only available for Concept, Modsoft, ProWORX32 or
ProWORX Nxt applications with State RAM assignments.

If the State RAM column is visible, the Correction column only accepts
State RAM addresses.

33003101.26 1747
 Conversion Wizard

Element Description

Correction In this column you can enter corrections for the values of the Address
column. Use the same format as in Address column.

Example:

Address: %I\1.1\1.4.1 -Correction: %I\1.1\1.3.1

Origin Source module of the imported legacy application

Section A comma-separated list of section names in which the variable is used or

the description of the hardware module, if available in the application file.

Name Symbolic name

Type Variable type

Comment Variable comment

Apply Starts the defined remapping for the currently selected variables.

Communication -1 Please refer toExclude, Communication -1, Type Restriction, page 1757.
Exclude
Type Restricted

Address
For data that have hierarchical elements, like channels for hardware modules in TSX
Premium and TSX Micro, there is an extension sign (+) to expand the list. For example, an
overview of the channels of the hardware modules is displayed.
The Address column shows the hierarchy of the topological addresses in tree form. The
rows are sorted according to the module addresses (e.g. %CH0.1*), which are shown as:
%CH{\<Bus alias>.<Connection point>\}<Rack>.<Module>.*
The module addresses are derived from the hardware modules present in the configuration
part of the application file.
The addresses are composed with a wildcard character ".*". The wildcard character stands
for all channels of the hardware module (e.g. %CH0.1*).
In the next level (e.g. %CH0.6.1.*), that can be expanded by clicking the extension sign (+)
in front of a module row, the channels of the module are listed.
This is done by additionally showing the channel number, followed by a wildcard character
".*". The wildcard character stands here for the various data of the channel, which can have
more than 1 level.

1748 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Below the Channels item, there are the items for Input and Memory that are both
subdivided into Words and Bits. These 4 groups directly represent the State RAM of the
PLC. They only show those variables that are used in the entire program. Unused I/O
variables are not displayed here.
The 2 Memory groups contain clusters of memory items with consecutive addresses. In
these groups it is allowed to rearrange consecutive areas. This is not allowed in the 2 Input
groups.

Correction
You can define new start addresses for the memory items in the Memory Words and
Memory Bits groups. The new addresses are displayed in the Correction column of the I/O
Remapping tab. For further information on the remapping process, refer to the chapter
Clustering and Remapping of Memory Variables, page 1752.

Section
The Section column shows a comma-separated list of section names in which the variable
is used or the description of the hardware module, if available in the application file.

Remapping Channels, Groups of Channels or Specific I/

O Types
Overview
There are several kinds of objects that are managed in hardware modules, for example %
IW, %QW, %MW, %I, %Q, etc.
By means of the conversion wizard you are able to
• move all objects from one slot to another slot.
This is equivalent to search any kind of objects with e.g. addresses \4.0\2.* and
replace in all kind of objects with \5.2\3.*.
• move a subset of channels from one location to another one.

33003101.26 1749
 Conversion Wizard

Procedure
Step Action

1
Select the rows of the data to be remapped either at the channels level or in levels below.

2
Right click anywhere in the selected area to open the context menu.

3 Select Define Target from the context menu.

The Define Target dialog opens.

1750 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Step Action

4 Enter the address that should be assigned to the first selected row in the remapping table.

5 Click OK to confirm.

Result:

The selected rows are remapped incrementally starting from the new address entered for the first selected
row. Even addresses in levels below are remapped.

The new addresses are displayed in the Corrected column. See example below.

Example
Embedded counter channels of a PL7 TSX Micro CPU moved to a counting module of a Modicon
M340

Validity Check
There is no validity check of the new mapping with the opened application during editing.
The check of consistency is done after converting the application, during the analysis of the
application in Control Expert.

33003101.26 1751
 Conversion Wizard

Clustering and Remapping of Memory Variables

Overview
Not only topological addressed I/O objects, but also directly addressed memory is structured
similarly into clusters.
A cluster is a sequence of memory cells, in which immediate neighbor cells with an address
difference of 1 are collected.

Representation
The graphic below shows a cluster example with %MW1001.

1752 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Remapping
Remapping can be applied to channels and such clusters.
Subsequent sets of clusters, subsequent sets of elements on lower levels, single clusters or
single elements can be selected and remapped by invoking the command from the context
menu. The new address will be displayed in the Correction column.
Alignment of variables with type DINT, UDINT and REAL is automatically performed, if a
Modicon M340 configuration has been initially defined.

Memory Area Tabs of the Conversion Wizard

Overview
The memory area tabs (%M (0x) to %MW (4x)) are only available for Concept, Modsoft,
ProWORX32 or ProWORX Nxt applications with State RAM assignments. They show the
variable allocation in the State RAM of the source application.

33003101.26 1753
 Conversion Wizard

Memory Area Tabs (%M (0x) to %MW (4x))

The memory area tabs (%M (0x) to %MW (4x)) indicate the variable allocation of the State
RAM in the source application.
The elements of the dialog are color-coded as follows:

Element Color
module allocated variables blue
language allocated variables red

1754 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

In this dialog, module allocated variables are dominant. This means that only module
allocation is indicated in the dialog, even if the variable is language accessed.
Select a cell in the table to indicate the topological address of the variable in the upper right
corner of the dialog.
To display different memory areas, select the respective memory area tab (%M (0x), %I
(1x), %IW (3x), %MW (4x)).

Concurrent Editing
Overview
The Conversion Wizard is a modeless window, i.e. you can work either in the Conversion
Wizard or for example in the Control Expert hardware configuration window.
Therefore you can adapt the remapping and modify the hardware configuration concurrently.
• You can adapt the default mapping done by the converter according to the real
hardware.
• You can concurrently modify the configuration of the new Control Expert hardware.
• You can adapt the hardware configuration to the legacy application, while remapping I/
O objects according to the modularity of the modules that may be different to legacy
hardware.

Initial Situation
A new Modicon M340 configuration appears in the Control Expert configuration editor.
The application of which parts have to be added is opened in the Conversion Wizard.
The I/O channels used in the application appear in the I/O Remapping tab.

33003101.26 1755
 Conversion Wizard

Representation

Interactive I/O Remapping

Step Action

1 Select a channel group representing a module, e.g. CH1.1.*

2 Enter the corresponding target module into the configuration editor.

1756 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Step Action

3 Open the target address dialog for the chosen channel group.

4 Enter the new channel assignment.

NOTE: It is required to enter a module to which a correction order refers into

configuration before giving the referring correction command.
The Conversion Wizard checks the Control Expert configuration for the presence of the
module - if it is not there, the correction is not executed, leaving the target field blank.
If the module is present in the configuration, the Conversion Wizard reads out its State
RAM assignments done by the Control Expert configuration and replaces the assignments
in the State RAM column by the new addresses.
Internally it keeps the old addresses and forms correction commands to the Control Expert-
internal correction processor, which replaces all occurrences of the old addresses with the
new addresses, when acknowledgement is given with the OK button.
Corrections for all modules can be collected before acknowledging, giving the ability to
correct also previous corrections.

No Automatic Notification
Even though you can adapt the remapping and modify the hardware configuration
concurrently, there is no automatic notification between hardware configuration and
Conversion Wizard about changes on either side.
NOTE: Following the conversion of the project, some adjustments may be needed
depending on the differences of behavior between the original hardware module and the
selected module in the Control Expert platform.

Exclude, Communication -1, Type Restriction

Overview
The IO Remapping tab provides additional features to ease special remapping operations
(Communication -1, Exclude, Type Restricted).
These operations can be executed by checking the appropriate checkboxes below the
remapping table.

33003101.26 1757
 Conversion Wizard

Representation

Communication -1
Premium or Modicon M340 memory is indexed starting with 0, whereas Compact or
Quantum memory indexing starts with 1.
If an application for the Compact or Quantum family is converted partially into a Premium or
Modicon M340 family application, and if this PLC must communicate through the Modbus
protocol with another PLC, it will be necessary to adapt the addresses during the conversion
to recover consistent exchanges with other PLCs.
The communication software introduces this offset.
To subtract a 1 of all selected addresses, which must be determined to be Modbus
communication related, activate the Communication -1 checkbox.

1758 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Exclude
To exclude I/O objects from conversion proceed as described below.

Step Action

1 Select the I/O objects in the remapping table you want to exclude from conversion.

2 Activate the Exclude checkbox.

3 Click the Apply button.

Result:

An X character is displayed in the Corrected column of the I/O objects excluded from
conversion.

Type Restricted
In some cases not all information of a channel has to be remapped commonly.
To remap variables that match to one type within a selection only, activate the Type
Restricted checkbox. See example below.
Type restriction applies to all kind of directly addressed variables.
%M internal variables

Variable Type

%M bit
%MW word

%MD (for Premium only) double word

%MF (for Premium only) real (floating point)

%K constants

Variable Type

%KW word constant

%KD (for Premium only) double word constant

%KF (for Premium only) real (floating point) constant

%I inputs

33003101.26 1759
 Conversion Wizard

Variable Type

%I BOOL or EBOOL type bit

%IW INT type word

%ID (for Premium only) DINT type double word

%IF (for Premium only) REAL type real (floating point)

%Q outputs

Variable Type

%Q EBOOL type bit

%QW INT type word

%QD (for Premium only) DINT type double word

%QF (for Premium only) REAL type real (floating point)

Type Restricted Example

For example the Type Restricted feature allows to remap all %MW variables at once to a
module in the target family.

Step Action

1
Select the variables to be remapped.

2 Activate the Type Restricted checkbox.

1760 33003101.26
Conversion Wizard

Step Action

3
Select Define Target from the context menu and enter the new address for the first variable to be
remapped.

4
All addresses, which have the same type (e.g. %MW) as the first one selected, are remapped.

CPU Configuration Tab of the Conversion Wizard

Overview
This section provides a description of the conversion wizard´s CPU Configuration tab and
how modify the amount of used memory in the CPU.

33003101.26 1761
 Conversion Wizard

Introduction
Overview
The CPU Configuration tab of the conversion wizard allows to modify the amount of used
memory in the CPU.
The merge of corrected values and original values is put directly to the opened application.
If there is a corrected value, it is used; otherwise the original value is taken.
The limits are check after converting the application, during the analysis of the application in
Control Expert only.
The CPU Configuration tab is available for all PLC families with the exception that the input
for Constant Words is not available for the Quantum family.

CPU Configuration Tab

To modify the values type the new values directly into the respective rows of the Corrected
column.

1762 33003101.26
33003101.26 1763
Appendices
What’s in This Part
Hyperlinks in Control Expert ................................................. 1765
User Interface...................................................................... 1816
Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................. 1848

Subject of this Part

This part presents the hyperlink functions, the ergonomics, and the shortcuts of Control
Expert.

1764 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Hyperlinks in Control Expert

What’s in This Chapter
General............................................................................... 1765
Principles ............................................................................ 1768
Hyperlinks in the project browser........................................... 1777
Hyperlink in the data editor ................................................... 1781
Hyperlinks in the DFB type attributes ..................................... 1787
Hyperlinks in animation tables............................................... 1795
Hyperlinks in runtime screens ............................................... 1799
Hyperlinks in the documentation folder .................................. 1805
Hyperlinks and drag-and-drop............................................... 1810

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter describes how to use hyperlinks (hypertext) in Control Expert.

General
Object of this sub-section
This sub-section provides general information about hyperlinks.

Introduction to Hyperlinks
General
You can use the hyperlink function available in the Control Expert software to create links
between your project and external documents.
Hyperlinks are shortcuts to such documents as:
• installation and wiring diagrams,
• help screens,
• miscellaneous notes,
• images,

33003101.26 1765
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

• web pages,
• etc.
For example, in an operator screen, you can associate an alarm that is displayed on a
variable controller to a hyperlink that opens a document explaining the alarm's
characteristics.

Hyperlinks and Project Browser

You can create hyperlinks in the project browser. They will be managed like shortcut sheets
in a directory.
Example:

NOTE: To drop a hyperlink in a blank user directory, you must press the ‘shift’ key during
drag-and-drop.

Hyperlinks and Comments

You can also create hyperlinks from a comment field. A hyperlink in a comment is used to
extend the comment to other data outside the controller project which can take on all forms
to represent the information.
In the Control Expert functions below, you can create a hyperlink in a comment belonging to:
• data editor variables,
• the animation tables,
• the operator screens,

1766 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

• documentation.
Example:

Representation and opening of a hyperlink

Representation
A hyperlink is represented by an underlined text in blue. When you move the mouse cursor
over the hyperlink, it changes into a hand.

33003101.26 1767
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Opening a link
Right-click on the underlined part to open the linked document.

Principles
Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the main operate-modes and characteristics of hyperlinks.

Definitions
Target document
You CANopen the target document by clicking on the hyperlink. There are no restrictions on
the type of document that can be opened. The system simply has to know the document's
suffix. In other words the application at the origin of the creation of the document or which
can view must exists and be available on the computer.

1768 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Hyperlink target
The hyperlink target is the tool (software) that is used to open the document. For example, if
the document has a .doc extension, the hyperlink target is Microsoft Word.
The table below presents the different hyperlink targets depending on the file extensions.
This list is not exhaustive.

File extensions Hyperlink target

.doc Microsoft Word

.xls Microsoft Excel
.txt NotePad
.htm Microsoft Internet Explorer

.html Netscape

.asp WEB browser

.shtml
.bmp Paint

.jpg Paint shop

.gif

.png Microsoft Photo Editor

Overview of operate-modes
Operate-modes
There are two operate-modes for creating and accessing a hyperlink:
• 1-step, page 1769mode,
• 2-step, page 1771mode.
Each of these modes is applied to specific functions of the Control Expert application.

1-step mode
Principle
The 1-step mode is the mode that is available for most Control Expert functions.

33003101.26 1769
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

It consists of associating a hyperlink with a comment. The principle of the 1-step mode is
that the target document can be accessed directly with a single click from the comment.
Simply click on the underlined comment to open the linked document.

Available functions
You can create a hyperlink in comments and objects that belong to the following functions:
• In the project browser:
◦ directories and sub-directories of the browser,
◦ hyperlink directory.
• In the data editor on:
◦ elementary variable (EDT) comment,
◦ function block (DFB/FB) instance comment,
◦ derived variable (DDT) comment.
• In animation tables on:
◦ variable (EDT/DDT/FB) comment.
• In operator screens on:
◦ text graphical object,
◦ animated text objects with a message.

1770 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

2-step mode
Principle
This mode is described as 2-step because you cannot access the target document directly.
An intermediary window opens (comment editor) before you can access the hyperlink.
NOTE: In 2-step mode, you can create several hyperlinks in the comment editor. You
can therefore have different target documents with one hyperlink source

Accessing the 2-step mode

The table below describes how to access the 2-step mode:

Step Action

1 Use the project browser to select the General Information sub-directory of the Documentation
directory.

2 Select Open in the contextual menu.

Result: The General Information, page 1772 window appears.

3 Click on the underlined comment in blue to open the linked document.

33003101.26 1771
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Available functions
You can create a hyperlink with the 2-step mode in comments and objects that belong to the
following functions:
• In the project folder:
◦ general information about the folder.
• In DFB type attributes.

Description of the Hyperlink Comment Window

Illustration
In 2-step mode, the General Information or DFB type description window is used to enter
the comment on which the hyperlink will be applied.

Illustration
The functions of the icons and elements that make up the window are described in the
paragraphs below.

1772 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Toolbar
The toolbar is made up of different icons.

The table below presents the various functions of the icons.

Icon Shortcut Description

Ctrl + N Creates a new comment by deleting the comment that has already been written.

Ctrl + O Opens the dialog box for opening a .htm file to retrieve a hyperlink text saved on
the hard disk in a HTML page outside the controller project.

Note: You can in this way use a hyperlink that has already been created.

Ctrl + S Saves the comment and the hyperlink(s) to the hard disk in a HTML page
outside the controller project.

Note: You can in this way save a hyperlink to use again later on. This function is
optional. When you save the controller project, the hyperlink comments are also
saved in the .STU project. You therefore do not need to save a specific hyperlink
comment in an .html page, except if you wish to use it again later on.

The hyperlink comments are also saved in the STA archive files.

Ctrl + X Cuts the selected text.

Ctrl + C Copies the selected text.

Ctrl + V Pastes the cut or copied text.

Ctrl + Z Undoes the last action.

Repeats the action made before it was canceled.

Ctrl + K Opens the Insert hyperlink dialog box.

33003101.26 1773
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Icon Shortcut Description

Aligns the text of the status bar to the left.

Aligns the text of the status bar to the right.

Note: When you move the mouse over a hyperlink without clicking on it, the full
path name of the document associated with the hyperlink is displayed in the
status bar. However, if the path name is too long, the status bar will not be large
enough to read the name of the document. The right alignment function can be
useful if you want to view the name of the document associated with a hyperlink.

Cancels and closes the window.

Status Bar
The status bar is made up of different elements.

The table below presents the various functions of these elements.

Element Description

Automatic line skip with a long comment.

Check to validate this function.

Allows the comment to be entered. If you don't check this box, you will not be able to write
or modify the comment.

Check to validate this function.

Confirm the editing of the comment.

Cancel.

1774 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Element Description

Explains the description of checked boxes.

Shows the position of the cursor in the comment entry field (row - column).

Properties
Storage
Comments with hyperlinks, but not the linked documents, are stored in the controller. The
linked documents may be stored on the hard disk of the programming station, on the
Internet, on an operator terminal or other medium.

Operating modes
In the variable editor and folder, you can access the hyperlink in online and offline modes
using the PLC.
You can modify a link while connected to the controller.
In the operator screens, you can create or edit the hyperlink in offline mode and run it in
online mode.

Display
When you open the target document, the application at the origin of the creation of the
document or that is used to view the document becomes active. The Control Expert window
is however not active. The Control Expert application continues to run as a background task.
Your actions on the keyboard will be directed to the document that you have just opened and
not to the Control Expert application.
To make the Control Expert window active again, click on the window or on the icon in the
taskbar.

33003101.26 1775
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Drag / Drop
You can Drag & Drop, page 1810 icons between the file explorer and the hyperlink insertion
windows. You can, for example, insert the full path of the target document.

List of barred characters

Principle
When you enter a comment for a hyperlink in the General Information or DFB type
description,

window, the characters that are allowed are 8-bit characters of the ANSI alphabet.
You can write them in the language of your choice within the limits of the alphabet allowed.

Barred characters
16-bit UNICODE characters outside the ANSI range are not allowed.

1776 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Hyperlinks in the project browser

Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the operate-mode for creating, selecting and deleting a hyperlink
in the project browser.

Creating a hyperlink in the project browser

At a Glance
You can create hyperlinks in all the directories and sub-directories of the project browser.
For example, you can create a hyperlink in the Program directory. You can also create
another hyperlink in the Sections sub-directory of the MAST task directory.

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for creating a hyperlink in the project browser
using an existing directory.

Step Action

1 Select the desired directory in the Project browser:

2 Right-click the selected directory.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

3 Click on Add Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Hyperlink Properties dialog box appears.

33003101.26 1777
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 Enter the name of the hyperlink in the User Name field.

5 In the Target Path field:

• use the button to choose the disk and/or the directory to select the target document
(example: C:\Program Files\Office2000\Office\Example) or
• enter the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

6 If you want to add a comment, select the Comment tab and enter your text in the entry field.

7 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Editing the properties of a hyperlink in the project

browser
Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for editing the properties of a hyperlink in the
project browser.

Step Action

1 Select the hyperlink to be edited in the Project browser.

2 Right-click the selected hyperlink.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

1778 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

3 Click on Properties in the contextual menu.

Result: The Hyperlink Properties dialog box appears.

4 Modify the name of the hyperlink in the User Name field.

5 In the Target Path field:

• use the button to choose the disk and/or the directory to select the target document
(example: c:\Program Files\Schneider Electric\log\example.doc) or
• Change the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

6 If you want to add a comment, select the Comment tab and enter your text in the entry field.

7 Click OK to confirm the changes or Cancel to cancel.

33003101.26 1779
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Opening a hyperlink from the project browser

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for opening a hyperlink from the project browser.

Step Action

1 Select the hyperlink in the Project browser:

2 Double click on the hyperlink represented by Right-click the selected hyperlink.

an icon with the name given to it when it was
Result: The contextual menu appears.
created. example:

3 Select Open in the contextual menu.

4 Result: The external document is launched.

Deleting a hyperlink in the project browser

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for deleting a hyperlink in the project browser.

1780 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

1 Select the hyperlink to be deleted in the Project browser.

2 Right-click the selected hyperlink.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

3 Click Delete in the contextual menu.

Result: The hyperlink disappears.

Hyperlink in the data editor

Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the operate-mode for creating, selecting, editing and deleting a
hyperlink in the data editor.

Creating a hyperlink in the data editor

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for creating a hyperlink in the data editor with a 1-
step mode.

33003101.26 1781
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

1 Open the data editor.

2 Select the comment where you wish to create a hyperlink in the Comment column of the Variables tab.

3 Right-click the selected comment.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

4 Click on Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Edit Hyperlink dialog box appears.

1782 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

5 The selected comment appears in the Text to display field.

In the Enter name of file or Web page field:

• click to select the target document (example: C:\Program Files\Office2000\Office

\Example) or
• enter the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

6 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Editing a hyperlink in the data editor

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for modifying the properties of a hyperlink in the
data editor.

Step Action

1 Open the data editor.

2 Select the hyperlink comment to be edited in the Comment column of the Variables tab.

3 Right-click the selected comment.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

33003101.26 1783
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 Click on Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Edit Hyperlink dialog box appears.

1784 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

5 The selected comment appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the file or Web page name field:

• click to select the target document (example: C:\Program Files\Office2000\Office

\Example) or
• change the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

6 Click OK to confirm the changes or Cancel to cancel.

Selecting a hyperlink in the data editor

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for opening a hyperlink in the data editor.

Step Action

1 Open the data editor.

2 In the Comment column of the Variables tab, click on the required hyperlink (text in blue/mouse
cursor changes to a hand).

33003101.26 1785
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Deleting a hyperlink in the data editor

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for deleting a hyperlink in the data editor.

Step Action

1 Open the data editor.

2 Select the comment to be deleted in the Comment column of the Variables tab.
3 Right-click the selected comment.

Result: The contextual menu appears.

4 Click on Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Edit Hyperlink dialog box appears.

1786 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

5 Click Delete: the text in the Type the file or Web page name field is deleted.

6 Click OK to confirm your choice. The hyperlink is deleted.

Hyperlinks in the DFB type attributes

Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the operate-mode for creating, editing and deleting a hyperlink in
the DFB type attributes.

Creating a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for creating a hyperlink from the attributes, page
1262 of a DFB type with a 2-step mode. For example, you can associate an explanatory text
with the definition of the DFB type.

Step Action

1 Go to the DFB Types, page 1247 tab of the data editor.

2 Right-click the DFB type that you want to use to create a hyperlink.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

3 Choose the Data Properties command.

Result: the corresponding dialog box appears on the screen.

33003101.26 1787
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 Click on the Descriptive form tab, then on the Edit button.

Result: the Descriptive form window appears.

Details of window, page 1772

5 Enter a comment in the entry field.

6 Select one or more words (contiguous) from the comment you have entered and click on the

icon.

1788 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

Result: the Insert hyperlink window appears.

Note: You can create several hyperlinks in this way by selecting different words.

7 The text selected in step 6 appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the filename or Web page name field:

• click to select the target document (example: C:\Program Files

\Office2000\Office\Example) or
• enter the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

8 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Modifying a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for editing the properties of a hyperlink in the
attributes of a DFB type.

Step Action

1 Go to the DFB Types, page 1247 tab of the data editor.

2 Right-click the DFB type whose hyperlink you wish to edit.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

3 Choose the Data Properties command.

Result: the corresponding dialog box appears on the screen.

33003101.26 1789
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 Select the Descriptive form tab, and click on the Edit button.

Result: the Descriptive form window appears.

5 Right click in the entry field, positioning the mouse on the hyperlink to edit.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

6 Click on Edit hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: the Edit hyperlink window appears.

1790 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

7 The name of the hyperlink appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the filename or Web page name field:

• click Browse to select the target document (example: C:\Program Files\Office2000\Office
\Example) or
• change the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

8 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Selecting a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for opening a hyperlink from DFB type attributes.

Step Action

1 Go to the DFB Types, page 1247 tab of the data editor.

2 Right-click the DFB type whose hyperlink you wish to select.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

3 Choose the Data Properties command.

Result: the corresponding dialog box appears on the screen.

33003101.26 1791
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 From the Descriptive form tab, click on the Edit button.

Result: the Descriptive form window appears.

5 In the Descriptive form window, click on the required hyperlink (text underlined in blue/mouse
cursor changes to a hand).

1792 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Deleting a Hyperlink from DFB Type Attributes

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for deleting a hyperlink in the attributes of a DFB
type.

Step Action

1 Go to the DFB Types, page 1247 tab of the data editor.

2 Right-click the DFB type whose hyperlink you wish to delete.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

3 Choose the Data Properties command.

Result: the corresponding dialog box appears on the screen.

4 From the Descriptive form tab, click on the Edit button.

Result: the Descriptive form window appears.

33003101.26 1793
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

Details of window, page 1772

5 Right click in the entry field, positioning the mouse on the hyperlink to be deleted.

Result: the contextual menu appears.

6 Click on Remove hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: the Remove hyperlink window appears.

1794 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

7 You do not have access to the Text to display or Confirm the deletion of this hyperlink entry
fields.
8 Click OK to confirm your choice or click Cancel to cancel.

Hyperlinks in animation tables

Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the operate-modes for accessing a hyperlink in the animation
tables.

Creating a hyperlink in an animation table

Procedure
The following table describes the procedure for creating a hyperlink in a comment for a
variable in an animation table.

Step Action

1 Opening an animation table.

2 Select the variable where the hyperlink is to be created.

3 Select Data Properties from the contextual menu.

Result: The Data Properties dialog box appears.

33003101.26 1795
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 Enter your comment in the comment line in the value column.

5 Select the comment.

6 Select Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Edit Hyperlink window appears.

7 The selected comment appears in the Text to display field.

In the Enter name of file or Web page field:

• click to select the target document (example: C:\Program Files

\Office2000\Office\Example) or
• enter the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

8 Click OK to confirm your choice.

1796 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Editing a hyperlink from an animation table

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for editing the properties of a hyperlink in an
animation table.

Step Action

1 Opening an animation table.

2 Select the variable where the hyperlink is located in the comment.

3 Select Data Properties from the contextual menu.

Result: The corresponding dialog box appears on the screen.

4 Select the comment.

5 Select Edit Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Edit Hyperlink window appears.

33003101.26 1797
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

6 The name of the hyperlink appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the file or Web page name field:

• click Browse to select the target document (example: C:\Program Files\Office2000\Office
\Example) or
• change the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

7 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Selecting a hyperlink from an animation table

Principle
In an animation table, you can open a hyperlink associated with a variable comment.

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for opening a hyperlink in animation tables.

Step Action

1 Open an animation table.

2 In the Comment column, double-click on the hyperlink for the selected variable.

1798 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Deleting a hyperlink from an animation table

Procedure
The following table describes the procedure for deleting a hyperlink in a comment for a
variable in an animation table.
NOTE: This procedure is only possible if the hyperlink was created, page 1795 from the
Data Properties window.

Step Action

1 After creating, page 1795 a hyperlink in a comment for a variable,

the Data Properties window remains open.

2 Select the comment from which the hyperlink is to be deleted.

3 Select Delete Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Hyperlinks in runtime screens

Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the operate-mode for creating, editing and deleting a hyperlink in
runtime screens.

33003101.26 1799
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Creating a hyperlink from operator screens

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for creating a hyperlink in operator screens.

Step Action

1 Open an operator screen.

2 Select a Text object or create one.

3 Select Properties in the contextual menu.

Result: The following window appears.

Click on the icon of the Text tab.

Result: The Insert Hyperlink window appears.

1800 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

5 The text specified in the Text tab appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the file or Web page name field:

• select the target document (C:\Program Files\Office2000\Office\Example) by using the

button or
• enter the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

6 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Editing a hyperlink in the operator screens

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for editing the properties of a hyperlink in an
operator screen object.

Step Action

1 Open the operator screen.

2 Select the Text object to be edited.

3 Select Properties in the contextual menu.

Result: The following window appears.

33003101.26 1801
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

Click on the icon of the Text tab.

Result: The Insert Hyperlink window is displayed.

5 The text of the Text tab appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the filename or web page name field:

• use the button to choose the disk and/or the directory to modify the
target document (example: C:\Program Files\Office2000\Office\Example) or
• change the Internet address (example: https://www.se.com).

6 Click OK to confirm the changes or Cancel to cancel.

1802 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Selecting a hyperlink in an operator screen

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for opening a hyperlink in an operator screen.

Step Action

1 Open an operator screen.

2 Click on the underlined text and the mouse cursor is changed into a thumbnail.

Result: The document associated with the hyperlink is opened.

Deleting a hyperlink in an operator screen

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for deleting a hyperlink in an operator screen.

Step Action

1 Open the operator screen.

2 Select the Text object or hyperlink to be deleted.

3 Select Properties in the contextual menu.

Result: The following window appears.

33003101.26 1803
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

Click on the icon of the Text tab.

Result: The Insert Hyperlink dialog box appears.

5 Click Clear: the text in the Type the file or Web page name field is cleared.

6 Click OK to confirm your choice. The hyperlink is deleted.

1804 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Hyperlinks in the documentation folder

Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the operate-mode for creating, editing and deleting a hyperlink in
the documentation folder of a Control Expert project.

Creating a hyperlink in the general information of the

project folder
Principle
The hyperlink functionality is also used to make links to documents for printing in the
documentation folder of a Control Expert project. For example, they can be used to present
the architecture of a project.
You can in this way create a hyperlink from General Information sections of the
documentation folder. These are image documents (.bmp) and you can print them in the
General Information section of the documentation folder.

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for creating a hyperlink in the documentation folder
with a 2-step mode.

Step Action

1 Use the project browser to select the General Information sub-directory of the Documentation
directory.

2 Select Open in the contextual menu.

Result: The General Information window appears.

33003101.26 1805
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

Details of window, page 1772

3 Enter a comment in the entry field.

4 Select one or more words (contiguous) from the comment you have entered and click on the icon

Result: The Insert Hyperlink window is displayed.

Note: You can create several hyperlinks in this way by selecting different words.

1806 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

5 The text selected in step 4 appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the filename or web page name field, use the button to choose
the disk and/or the directory to select the target document (example: C:\Images\structure1.bmp).

6 Click OK to confirm your choice.

Editing a hyperlink in the documentation folder

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for editing the properties of a hyperlink in the
general information section of the documentation folder.

Step Action

1 Use the project browser to select the General Information sub-directory of the Documentation
directory.

2 Select Open in the contextual menu.

Result: The General Information window appears.

Details of window, page 1772

33003101.26 1807
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

3 Right click in the entry field, positioning the mouse on the hyperlink to edit

Result: The contextual menu appears.

4 Click on Edit Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Edit Hyperlink window appears.

5 The name of the hyperlink appears in the Text to display field.

In the Type the file or Web page name field, use the button to select the
target document (example: C:\Images\structure1.bmp).

6 Click OK to confirm your choice.

1808 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Deleting a hyperlink in the documentation folder

Procedure
The table below describes the procedure for deleting a hyperlink in the general information
section of the documentation folder.

Step Action

1 Use the project browser to select the General Information sub-directory of the Documentation
directory.

2 Select Open in the contextual menu.

Result: The General Information window appears.

Details of window, page 1772

3 Right click in the entry field, positioning the mouse on the hyperlink to be deleted

Result: The contextual menu appears.

33003101.26 1809
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 Click on Delete Hyperlink in the contextual menu.

Result: The Delete Hyperlink window appears.

5 You do not have access to the Text to display or Confirm hyperlink deletion entry fields.

6 Click OK to confirm your choice or click Cancel to cancel.

Hyperlinks and drag-and-drop

Object of this sub-section
This sub-section presents the drag-and-drop function with hyperlinks.

1810 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Drag/drop
Principle
You can use the drag/drop function to create a hyperlink. This function can be used to:
• drag and drop the path name of the target document between the explorer and the
Hyperlink Properties, Edit Hyperlink or Insert Hyperlink dialog boxes,
• drag and drop a word or expression between a text document and the comment in the
General Information window.
NOTE: only paths for .bmp fillies can be used for drag and drop.

Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for dragging/dropping between the explorer and the
Hyperlink Properties, Insert Hyperlink or Edit Hyperlink dialog boxes.

Step Action

1 Locate the target document in the explorer.

2 In Control Expert, open either the Hyperlink Properties, Edit Hyperlink or Insert Hyperlink
dialog box.

33003101.26 1811
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

3 Size and move the Control Expert and explorer windows so they are displayed side by side on the
screen without overlapping.

4 Drag and drop the file representing the target document between the explorer and the Type the file
or Web page name field of the dialog box (image.bmp in our example).

Result: The entire path of the target document appears in the Type the file or Web page name
field.

Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for dragging and dropping between a text file and the
General Information dialog box.

1812 33003101.26
Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

1 In Control Expert, open the General Information window from the Documentation directory.

2 Open the text file.

3 Size the Control Expert and explorer windows to display them side by side on the screen.

33003101.26 1813
 Hyperlinks in Control Expert

Step Action

4 Select the text to be moved in the text file.

5 Drag and drop a word or expression between the General Information window and a word-
processing application.

Result: The text selected appears in the Hyperlink field.

Note: If you press and hold down the Ctrl key, a "+" sign will appear on the mouse cursor. When
you drop the expression or word ("Hyperlink" in this case), it will be copied and not moved from the
word processor to the comment editor.

1814 33003101.26
33003101.26 1815
 User Interface

User Interface
What’s in This Chapter
Window............................................................................... 1816
Anchored window ................................................................ 1818
Menus................................................................................. 1821
Menu commands ................................................................. 1823
Toolbar................................................................................ 1826
Output windows ................................................................... 1832
Status bar ........................................................................... 1834
Directory Structures ............................................................. 1837
Using the Mouse.................................................................. 1838
Using the Keyboard ............................................................. 1839
Data selection boxes............................................................ 1841
Dialog boxes ....................................................................... 1842

Overview
This chapter describes the Control Expert user interface. It provides an overview of the
elements used and how they are used.

Window
Introduction
In Windows there are two types of windows:
• Application windows
• Documentation windows
Windows consist of:
• a title bar to move the window and to change its size
• Buttons to display the window as a symbol, to minimize, maximize and close.
• the actual contents of the window

1816 33003101.26
User Interface

Types of windows:

Application windows
When you start Control Expert, an application window will open on your desktop. You can
place the application window at any location on your desktop. Or you can minimize it so that
it appears in your taskbar.

33003101.26 1817
 User Interface

In this application window you can open or create a project. In the title bar of the application
window the name of the project appears.

Documentation windows
When you open or create a project you can open various documentation windows. For
example, documentation windows are sections, where you create your application or the
documentation window for the Data Editor.
The information contained in documentation windows is separated into different areas. The
different areas in a dialog box can be selected using the F6 key.
If the amount of information contained in a documentation window is too complex to be
displayed in one documentation window, the documentation window is split into several
tabs. The different tabs can be selected using the Ctrl+Tab key combination.
Several documentation windows can be open at the same time, but only one documentation
window can be active. An active documentation window is marked by the color of the title
bar. Depending on the documentation window the menu commands in the pulldown menu,
page 1821 and the toolbar, page 1826 change.
If several windows are open at the same time you can switch between them using the key
combination Ctrl+F6.
An exception to this are anchored windows, page 1818

Anchored window
Introduction
Anchored windows have basically the same function as standard windows with the
difference that they can be anchored in certain positions. Anchored windows can also be
freely positioned on the screen (also outside of the application window).

Build
Anchored windows consist of:
• a title bar to move the window and to change its size
• a button to prevent anchoring ( )

1818 33003101.26
User Interface

• a button to close the window ( x )

• the actual contents of the window

Function
Anchored windows have the following extra functions in comparison to standard windows:
• They can be anchored to the edge of the application window.
• They can be positioned outside of the application window.
• The menu commands in the Window (like e.g. Arrange) do not affect the anchored
window.

33003101.26 1819
 User Interface

Example of use
An example of an anchored window is the project browser:

Anchoring windows
Process the following steps to anchor a window:

1820 33003101.26
User Interface

Step Action

1 Click the title bar of the anchored window and keep the mouse button pressed.

2 Drag the window close to an application window edge.

Result: The window frame displays the future position of the window.

3 Release the mouse button.

Result: The window is anchored to the selected edge.

On the new position, the window is

• anchored
when the new position of the window is on the border or outside of the application window.
• not anchored
when the new position of the window is inside the application window
or
when the new position of the window is on the border or outside of the application window,
but the Ctrl key was held when releasing the mouse button.

Menus
Introduction
There are 3 types of menus:
1. Main or pulldown menus
2. Submenus
3. Shortcut or popup menus

Main or pulldown menus

The titles of the individual menus are displayed in the menu bar. The individual menu
commands, page 1823 are listed in the pulldown menus.
A pulldown menu is opened by left-clicking on the title of the menu or by pressing Alt
+selected letter (underlined letter, page 1824). To go directly to a menu command, drag the
mouse pointer down the menu and then release the mouse button. The menu can be closed
by clicking on the title of the menu or anywhere outside of the menu or by pressing Esc.

33003101.26 1821
 User Interface

Menu bar with pulldown menu:

Submenus
The title of a submenu is a menu command, page 1823 of the menu above it. The individual
menu commands for the submenu are listed in a pulldown menu. Menu commands which
contain a submenu can be recognized by an arrow icon.
You can open a submenu by clicking on the menu title (left mouse button) or by placing the
mouse pointer on the menu title for a short time. The menu can be closed by clicking on the
title of the menu or anywhere outside of the menu or by pressing Esc.
Menu with submenu:

1822 33003101.26
User Interface

Shortcut or popup menus

Shortcut menus are menus which contain menu commands, page 1823 specially for the
selected object.
You can open a shortcut menu by clicking on the object (right mouse button) or selecting the
object and confirming with Shift + F10 or press the key. The menu can be closed by
clicking anywhere outside of the menu or by pressing Esc.
Shortcut menus can also be called if several objects are selected. In this case, the menu
only contains the menu commands which are valid for all objects.
Object with shortcut menu:

Menu commands
Introduction
Menu commands are used to execute commands or to call dialog boxes.

33003101.26 1823
 User Interface

Example of a menu with menu commands:

Keyboard shortcuts or mnemonics

Keyboard shortcuts (underlined letters) in menu commands allow you to select menu
commands using the keyboard. A main menu (menu title) and subsequently a menu
command can be selected by holding down Alt and simultaneously entering the underlined
letter in the menu title and then that of the menu command.
For example, in the File you want to use the menu command Save... you must press Alt+D
to open the menu and then Alt+S to execute the menu command.

Grayed out menu command

If a menu command is not available it is grayed out. One or more other commands must be
executed before the desired menu command can be executed.

Periods () after the menu command

On execution of this menu command a dialog box is opened with options, which must be
selected before execution.

1824 33003101.26
User Interface

Checkmark (√) in front of the menu command

The menu command is enabled. If the menu command is selected, the checkmark
disappears and the menu command is disabled. The checkmark is mostly used to identify
enabled modes (e.g. normal display, dial in mode etc.).

Shortcut keys
Shortcut keys (e.g. F8) or key combinations (e.g. Ctrl+R) after the menu command is a
shortcut way for executing the menu command. You can select the menu command using
this shortcut key or key combination without having to open the menu. For example, Ctrl+S
to execute the menu command Save.

Starting external applications

Process the following steps to launch external applications from Control Expert:

Step Action

1 Open, page 602Tools > Adjust the Tools tab.

2 Click the Add button.
3 In the Menu Text field, enter the name of the menu item to be created (e.g. Motor Variables).

4 In the Command field, enter the path to the program to be launched (e.g. Microsoft Excel).

5 In the Arguments field, enter the name of the file to be opened (e.g. Motor_Variables.xls).

33003101.26 1825
 User Interface

Step Action

6 In the Output Directory field, enter the path to the file to be opened.

Display of the Tools tab:

7 Confirm the entries with OK.

Result: In the main menu Tools a menu command to launch the selected application will be
generated (in this example Motor Variables).

Example:

Toolbar
Introduction
Toolbars allow you to quickly locate and execute frequently used functions.

1826 33003101.26
User Interface

Instead of opening a menu and then selecting the menu command, toolbars allow you to
simply click the respective symbol to execute the desired command.
The software provides you with various standard toolbars. In addition, you can also create
your own toolbar.

Build
Toolbars consist of a row of buttons and combo boxes that call the corresponding functions.
There are several toolbars and they are displayed in a common toolbar.
The individual toolbars are separated using a separator.
For all items in a toolbar a tooltip can be displayed.
Example of a common toolbar:

Available toolbars
Standard toolbars are divided into two groups:
• Main menu toolbars
These toolbars contain the general, i.e. non-context sensitive symbols.
All available main menu toolbars are displayed when starting the software.
• Context sensitive toolbars
These toolbars contain the context sensitive symbols.
The context sensitive toolbars are automatically shown in the active editor.
Depending on the screen resolution it is possible that not all toolbars are visible in the
application window.
In this case you have the option to hide the non-required toolbars, or to reposition the
toolbars.

33003101.26 1827
 User Interface

Main menu toolbars

The following main menu toolbars are available by default:

Name Contained functions

File New project, Open, Save, Print

Edit Copy, Delete, Paste, Undo, Redo, Validate, Minimize, Maximize, Full screen, Go
to
Services Analyse project, Generate project, Re generate entire project, Project browser,
Start search, Type library manager

Api Transfer Project to PLC, Transfer Project from PLC, Connect, Disconnect,
Start, Stop, Start/Stop Animation, Standard mode, Simulation mode

Window Cascade, Tile Horizontally, Tile Vertically

Help Help, What's This

Debug Set Breakpoint, Clear Breakpoint, Start, Step Over, Step Into, Step Out, Show
Current Step, Display call stack

Watchpoint Set Watchpoint, Clear Watchpoint, Show Watchpoint, Synchronize Animation

Table, Refresh counter

Note: This toolbar is only displayed when a programming language editor is active.

Project Browser Structural view, Functional view, Vertical views, Horizontal views, Zoom Out

Showing and hiding

You have three options to hide a toolbar (to close it):
1. Right-click in the common toolbar and deselect the 'undesired' toolbar from the shortcut
menu.
2. Open the Customize dialog box using Tools > Customize and deselect the 'undesired'
toolbar.
3. For non-anchored toolbars with the close symbol ( x ).
You have two options to show a toolbar (to open it):
1. Right-click in the common toolbar and select the 'desired' toolbar from the shortcut
menu.
2. Open the Customize dialog box using Tools > Customize and select the 'desired'
toolbar.

1828 33003101.26
User Interface

Possible positions
Toolbars can be anchored in the common toolbar (standard) or in different positions inside
the application window. Toolbars can also be freely positioned on the screen (also outside of
the application window).
Example of different toolbar positions:

Changing the position of a toolbar

Process the following steps to change the position of a toolbar:

33003101.26 1829
 User Interface

Step Action

1 Click the toolbar separator and hold the mouse button down.

2 Drag the toolbar to the target position inside or outside the common toolbar.

Result: The window frame displays the intended position of the toolbar.

3 Release the mouse button.

Result: The toolbar is moved to the target position.

On the new position, the toolbar is

• anchored, page 1818,
when the new position of the toolbar is on the border or outside of the application window
• not anchored, page 1818,
when the new position of the toolbar is inside the application window
or
when the new position of the toolbar is on the border or outside of the application window,
but the Ctrl key was held when releasing the mouse button

Modifying the contents of a toolbar

Process the following steps to modify the contents of a toolbar:

Step Action

1 Open the Customize dialog box, see also Call the Dialog Box:, page 602.

2 Click the symbol to be moved in the source toolbar and hold the mouse button down.

3 Drag the symbol to the target position within the destination toolbar.

Result: A frame displays the intended position in the toolbar.

4 Release the mouse button.

Result: The symbol is removed from the source toolbar and inserted into the destination toolbar.

5 Click OK to confirm the modification(s).

Note: If symbols are moved from context sensitive toolbars into the main menu toolbar, the
symbols are inactive as long as the respective editor is inactive.

Restoring toolbars
Process the following steps to restore the original state of a toolbar:

1830 33003101.26
User Interface

Step Action

1 Open the Customize dialog box, see also Call the Dialog Box:, page 602.

2 In the Toolbars list box, select the toolbar to be restored.

3 Click the Reset command button.

Result: The original state of the toolbar is restored.

Creating your own toolbars

Process the following steps to create your own toolbars:

Step Action

1 Note: New symbols cannot be created. Only existing symbols can be removed from toolbars and
inserted into new toolbars.

Open the Customize dialog box, see also Call the Dialog Box:, page 602.

2 Click New....

Result: A dialog for defining the toolbar name is opened.

3 Enter a name and confirm with OK.

Result: An empty toolbar is created and the name of the toolbar appears in the toolbar list.

4 Click the symbol to be moved in the source toolbar and hold the mouse button down.

5 Drag the symbol to the target position within the new toolbar.

Result: A frame displays the intended position in the toolbar.

6 Release the mouse button.

Result: The symbol is removed from the source toolbar and inserted into the destination toolbar.

7 Click OK to confirm the modification(s).

Note: If symbols are moved from context sensitive toolbars into the main menu toolbar, the
symbols are inactive as long as the respective editor is inactive.

8 Drag the new toolbar to the target position, see also Changing the position of a toolbar, page
1829.

33003101.26 1831
 User Interface

Output windows
Introduction
The output window displays information about the different processes (generate, import/
export, user error, search/replace).
The output window is an anchored window, page 1818.
The output window is displayed at the bottom of the Control Expert window by default.
If the output window is closed, it can be opened using:
• the View > Output Window menu command
or
• the Alt+0 key combination.

Build
The output window consists of various output sheets. Each sheet corresponds to a tab.
Representation of an output window:

The output sheets display the results of an executed action or error messages.
Double-clicking an error message will open the respective editor and mark the "faulty" entry.
New error entries are displayed in red, already checked errors are displayed in blue.
Available output sheets:

1832 33003101.26
User Interface

Output sheet Function

Analyze and generate Displays analyze and generate errors.

Double-clicking an error entry directly accesses the faulty programming language

section, the faulty configuration or the faulty data.

Import/Export Displays import and export errors

Double-clicking an error entry directly accesses the error in the source file.

User error Displays the user error.

Search/Replace Displays the result of the search and/or replace operation.

Double-clicking an entry directly accesses the searched for entry in the

programming language section, in the configuration or in the data.

Comparison Displays the comparison information.

Every output sheet has a shortcut menu (right-click).

Copy
Copies the selected text to the clipboard.

Delete
Deletes the entire contents of the output sheet.

Go to previous error
Jumps to the previous line and calls the faulty programming language section, the faulty
configuration or the faulty data.
This function can also be accessed pressing the Ctrl+F10 key combination.

Go to next error
Jumps to the next line and calls the faulty programming language section, the faulty
configuration or the faulty data.
This function can also be accessed pressing the F10 key.

33003101.26 1833
 User Interface

Go to error
Calls the faulty programming language section, the faulty configuration or the faulty data as
indicated in the current line.

Print
Prints the contents of the output sheet.

Status bar
Introduction
The status bar displays information about the current project on the PC, about the PLC and
about the software status.

Status Bar Description with Examples

Examples of status bar in various configurations.
Offline status bar:

Online status bar:

Online M580 Safety status bar:

1834 33003101.26
User Interface

Online M580 Hot Standby status bar:

Status bar fields description:

Label Description Values

1 Information area for displaying menu information, FFB instances information Example: Ready
(type and name), variables information (type, name and if available: address,
comment and Alias of).

2 Displays the current HMI access rights. An application can have one of the following modes:

HMI R/W mode

• Human Machine Interface Read/Write mode
This is the default mode when opening an application.

HMI R/O mode

• Human Machine Interface Read only mode.
This mode is active in the following cases:
◦ Applications are opened in Read Only mode by selecting the option
Open the project in read-only mode in the open file window.
◦ Opening an application previously opened in write mode with a
third-party software (using Pserver). A pop-up window alerts the
user at the opening.
This mode does not allow to save the application.
When using third-party application with Pserver, Control Expert can be
launched without the Control Expert graphical interface (called Human
Machine Interface). In this case, a dialog box prompts the user if it
should switch on the current PServer Instance.
3 Link status. OFFLINE, DIFFERENT,
EQUAL

4 An * is displayed when the initial value in the project is different/modified from –, *

the initial value on the CPU.

To remove the * it is advisable to Update Local Init Values with PLC Init
Values, or to Transfer Project from PLC and save (if parameters have been
modified in the adjust screens of specific modules).

5 CPU state. RUN, STOP, NO CONF, ...

6 ETSI information (Empty terminal Support) Example: UPLOAD INFO OK

7 Type of connection and address of the connected CPU. Example: TCPIP:127.0.0.1

8 For M580 Safety platform only: operating mode status. MAINTENANCE, SAFETY

More details on M580 Safety platform operating modes are provided in

Modicon M580, Safety Manual.

33003101.26 1835
 User Interface

Label Description Values

9 For M580 platform only: Hot Standby status and number of changes. Example: A - RUN_PRIMARY
/ B - STOP / DIFFERENT (1/
2)

10 Line and column information (only available in the programming language Example: ln 13, Col 15
editor).

11 Syslog server availability (when configured):

–
• Syslog server available.

SYSLOG
• Syslog server cannot be reached.

12 Memory status:

• Function Pack for Memory is not needed. MEM (green)

• Function Pack for Memory command is recommended. MEM (red)

13 Generate status. BUILT, NOT BUILT

14 In the connected equal mode, a red F displayed indicates that the bits or –, F
words have been forced in the CPU. Click this field to display the animation
table containing the list of variables (bits/words) forced.

15 Event information.

• If a CPU detects an error, click this field for details about the detected
error.

• Icon displayed when the CPU detects a new error.

16 For M580 and M340 platform only, memory backup status:

–
• CPU RAM application equals flash memory and/or SD card content.

• M580 platform only: flash memory backup in progress.

NOTE: Do not click this icon when displayed. If clicked, a popup
proposes to back up the application: do not accept the backup
proposal because a backup is already in progress.

• SD card memory backup in progress.

• No SD card in the CPU or invalid SD card.

17 Indicates whether the insert or overwrite mode is active. INS, OVR

18 Indicates whether the caps lock button is active or not. –, CAPS

– Empty field.

1836 33003101.26
User Interface

Directory Structures
Introduction
Directory structures are used to display and edit hierarchical lists with several columns.
Directory structures are combinations of directory trees and lists.

Example of use
In the Data Editor, directory structures are used to display the hierarchy between variable
instances, variable types, structure elements, etc.

Meaning of the text colors

The text colors have the following meaning:

Text color Meaning

black Information is correct and can be edited

gray Information is correct and write protected

red Information is incorrect

33003101.26 1837
 User Interface

Modes
There are two different modes for directory structures:
• Select mode
One or more lines are selected or a cell is selected.
In this mode, you can move between all lines and cells.
• Edit mode
The current cell is opened for editing.
Texts can be edited.
Switching from the selection mode to the edit mode is done by pressing the Enter key or by
entering a character, see the Open editing session by holding down the character key
check box in the Data and Languages, page 590 dialog box.
Switching from edit mode to selection mode is done by pressing the Enter key or by
pressing an error key.

Using the Mouse

Mouse Functions
The following mouse functions are available:

1838 33003101.26
User Interface

Mouse function In select mode In edit mode

Click on links • Click +/- button: • Click +/- button:
Open/close the substructure. Saves the information entered (if
valid) and opens/closes the
• Click on cell:
substructure.
Selects the lines in the cell clicked
and the cell becomes the current • Click on cell:
cell. Saves the information entered (if
valid) and selects the lines in the
• Click on check box:
cell clicked.
Activate/deactivate the check box
• Click on check box:
• Click on icon:
Saves the information entered (if
- valid) and activates/deactivates the
check box
• Click on icon:
Saves the information entered (if
valid).

Double-click on links • Double-click on names: • Double-click on names:

Selects the lines in the cell clicked Saves the information entered (if
and opens the cell in edit mode. valid) and selects the lines in the
• Double-click on the vertical line in cell clicked und opens the cell in
the column header: edit mode.
• Double-click on the vertical line in
Column width is adjusted to the
current contents. the column header:

• Double-click on the column header Saves the information entered (if

cell: valid) and the column width is
adjusted to the current contents.
Lists are sorted according to
• Double-click on the column header
column contents
cell:
Saves the information entered (if
valid) and lists will be sorted
according to the column contents.

SHIFT+Click on links Selects consecutive elements. Saves the information entered (if valid)
and selects the lines in the cell clicked.
The first and last element selected and
all elements in between are marked.
Right click Opens the shortcut menu (if available) for Saves the information entered (if valid)
the object currently being clicked. and selects the lines in the cell clicked.

Using the Keyboard

Key functions
The following key functions are available:

33003101.26 1839
 User Interface

Key function In select mode In edit mode

Enter Opens the current cell in edit mode Saves the information entered (if valid).

Esc - Ends edit mode without saving.

Up arrow Deselects the current cell and selects the Saves the information entered (if valid),
previous cell (upward). deselects the current cells and selects
the previous cell (upwards).

Cursor down Deselects the current cell and selects the Saves the information entered (if valid),
next cell (downwards). deselects the current cells and selects
the previous cell (downwards).

Left arrow Deselects the current cell and selects the Saves the information entered (if valid),
previous cell (left). deselects the current cells and selects
the previous cell (to the left).

Right arrow Deselects the current cell and selects the Saves the information entered (if valid),
next cell (right). deselects the current cells and selects
the next cell (to the right).

Shift+Up arrow Selects multiple lines in upward direction. -

Shift+Down arrow Selects multiple lines in downward -

direction.
+ Open the substructure. -

- Close the substructure. -

Character Goes to the next lines in which the -

contents begin with that character.
Exceptions: +, - and space.

F2 Opens the current cell in edit mode -

Insert Adds an empty line before the selected -

line.
Home The first cell in the selected line becomes Sets the insertion point at the beginning
the current cell. of the current line.
Ctrl+Home Selects the first line in the table and the Sets the insertion point at the beginning
first cell becomes the current cell. of the first line.
End The last cell in the selected line becomes Sets the insertion point at the end of the
the current cell. current line.
Ctrl+End Selects the last line in the table and the Sets the insertion point at the end of the
first cell becomes the current cell. last line.

1840 33003101.26
User Interface

Data selection boxes

Introduction
Data selection boxes are used to select compatible, already defined data from a list or to
select from a list of previous entries.
In this case, "data" means instances and types of variables and instances and types of
functions and function blocks.

Build
Data selection boxes consist of:
• a combined text selection and text entry field
• a button to open the selection list ( )
• a button to open the data selection dialog box ( ... )
• a button to close the data selection dialog box and delete the ( ) data
• a button to close the data selection dialog box and transfer the ( ) data

Examples of use
In the language editors, data selection boxes are used to select variables with the correct
data type.

Data entry
There are three options for data entry:

33003101.26 1841
 User Interface

1. Enter the name if known or enter the first letter(s) in the text box.
The system works with a context dependent background list which automatically
completes the characters entered with the first compatible name.
2. Selecting the name in the list box.
When entering the first letters of the name being searched in the text box, the list box
receives an alphabetic list of names that correspond to this entry.
Without entering the first letters, the list box contains a list of previous entries.
3. Open the data selection dialog box using the ( ... ).

Accepting data
With the Enter key or the button, the entry is acknowledged and accepted after having
been confirmed successfully.

Cancel
The entry can be canceled using the Esc key or the button.

Dialog boxes
Introduction
Dialog boxes are displayed if additional information is required from you in order to perform
a particular task. Information that you may require is also communicated in this way.
Most dialog boxes contain options which can be selected, text boxes in which text can be
entered, and buttons which can be pressed.
Grayed out options are currently not available. One or more other commands must be
executed, or options selected or deselected, before the desired option can be activated.
The information contained in dialog boxes is separated into different areas. The different
area in a dialog box can be selected using the F6 key.

1842 33003101.26
User Interface

Basic elements of a window:

33003101.26 1843
 User Interface

Tab
If the amount of information contained in a dialog box is too complex to be displayed in one
dialog box, the dialog box is split into several tabs.
The different tabs in a dialog box can be selected using the Ctrl+Tab key combination.

button
buttons are used to initiate actions immediately, e.g. executing or aborting a command.
buttons are e.g. OK, Cancel and Apply.
buttons followed by three dots (...), open another dialog box. A button with a "greater than"
sign (>>) extends the active dialog box.
The default setting is identified by a darker border. This default button can also be selected
by pressing Enter.
If the name of the button contains an underlined letter, the button can be activated from any
position in the dialog box by holding down the Alt key and entering the underlined letter.
To close a dialog box without executing a command, select the Cancel button.

Text box
Information (text) is entered in a text box.
If you go to an empty text box the cursor appears in the far left of the box. The entered text
begins at the cursor position. If text is already present within the respective text box, the text
will be selected and replaced by the new text automatically. The text can, however, also be
deleted by pressing the Del or backspace key.
If the name of the text box contains an underlined letter, the text box can be activated from
any position in the dialog box by holding down the Alt key and entering the underlined letter.

List box
The available options to select are given in list form in a list box. If more options are
available than fit into the list, then the scrollbar or arrow keys can be used to move around
the list.
Normally only a single entry can be chosen form the list. There are, however, some cases in
which several entries can be chosen, e.g. when opening sections.

1844 33003101.26
User Interface

If the name of the list box contains an underlined letter, the list box can be activated from
any position in the dialog box by holding down the Alt key and entering the underlined letter.

Single line list boxes

A single line list box initially appears as a rectangular box, in which the current selection (the
default value) is selected. If the arrow in the right of the box is selected, a list of the available
options to select opens. If more options are available than fit into the list, then the scrollbar
or arrow keys can be used to move around the list.
If the name of the list box contains an underlined letter, the list box can be activated from
any position in the dialog box by holding down the Alt key and entering the underlined letter.

Data selection boxes

See section Data selection boxes, page 1841

Directory structures
See section Directory Structures, page 1837

Option buttons
Option buttons represent mutually exclusive options. In each case only one option can be
chosen.
The selected option button is identified by a black dot.
If the option name contains an underlined letter, the option button can be activated from any
position in the dialog box by holding down the Alt key and entering the underlined letter.

Check boxes
A checkbox next to an option means that the option can be activated or deactivated. Any
number of checkbox options can be activated.

Activated options are identified by an X or a check mark ( √ ).

33003101.26 1845
 User Interface

If the name of the option contains an underlined letter, the checkbox can be activated from
any position in the dialog box by holding down the Alt key and entering the underlined letter.

1846 33003101.26
33003101.26 1847
 Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcuts
What’s in This Chapter
General Keyboard Shortcuts................................................. 1848
Configuring the Project ......................................................... 1851
Creating the Project ............................................................. 1852
Operating the Project ........................................................... 1861
Documenting the Project ...................................................... 1865

Overview
This chapter describes the keyboard shortcuts of the Control Expert program.

General Keyboard Shortcuts

Object of this section
This section provides general information about commonly used keyboard shortcuts. It also
provides information about a widely-used browser, namely the Project Browser.

Bus Editor Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Bus Editor are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Bus Editor keyboard shortcuts.

1848 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Open the New Device windows Edit Ctrl+Enter

Open the PLC Configuration windows Edit Ctrl+Alt+Enter

Control Expert Main Screen and Project Browser

Keyboard Shortcuts
Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Control Expert main screen and in the Project Browser
when a project is opened are described in the table below.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Control Expert main screen and the Project Browser keyboard
shortcuts when a project is opened:

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Create a project File Ctrl+N

Open an existing project File Ctrl+O

Save an existing project File Ctrl+S

Print part of an existing project File Ctrl+P

Display properties Edit Alt+Enter

Display a full screen View Ctrl+F8

Undo the preceeding action Edit Ctrl+Z

Redo the preceeding action Edit Ctrl+Y

Cut an item Edit Ctrl+X

Copy an item Edit Ctrl+C

Select all an item Edit Ctrl+A

Paste an item Edit Ctrl+V
Delete an item Edit Del
Show or hide the ouput windows View Alt+0

33003101.26 1849
 Keyboard Shortcuts

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Animate the project Services Ctrl+J

Initialize Search Services Ctrl+U

Create an animation table Services Ctrl+T
Display the Project Browser Tools Alt+1

Display the Hardware Catalog Tools Alt+2

Display the Types Library Browser Tools Alt+3

Display the Operator Screen Library Tools Alt+4

Search for Cross-References Tools Alt+5

Display the Diagnostic Viewer Tools Alt+6

Display the PLC Screen Tools Alt+7

Display the Variable Window Tools Alt+8

Open the Data Editor Tools Alt+9

Insert Edit Ins

Display the Data Properties Edit Ctrl+Enter

Analyze a Type Build Ctrl+Shift+B

Control the Changes Build Ctrl+B

Connect or disconnect a PLC PLC Ctrl+K

Transfer a project to PLC PLC Ctrl+L

Transfer a project from a PLC PLC Ctrl+Shift+L

Put a Quantum Safety PLC in maintenance or safety mode PLC Ctrl+Shift+M

Run or stop a PLC PLC Ctrl+R

What’s this Help Shift+F1

NOTE: When a project is closed, the Tools and PLC tab shortcuts in the PLC menu are
not available but it is still possible to use the Ctrl+K shortcut. The shortcuts from the File,
View and Help tab shortcuts are available.
NOTE: Commands without shortcuts are not mentionned in this table.

1850 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Configuring the Project

Object of this section
This section provides general information about the keyboard shortcuts used to configure a
project.

PLC Configuration Screen Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the PLC Configuration Screen are described in the table
below. Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General
Keyboard shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the PLC Configuration Screen keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Validate the action Edit Ctrl+W

Copy an input from the list Edit Ctrl+C

Paste an input in the list Edit Ctrl+V

Delete an AS_I Slave Edit Del

Cut an AS_I Slave Edit Ctrl+X

Copy an AS_I Slave Edit Ctrl+C

Paste an AS_I Slave Edit Ctrl+V

Delete a Series 7 module Edit Del

Cut a Series 7 module Edit Ctrl+X
Copy a Series 7 module Edit Ctrl+C

Paste a Series 7 module Edit Ctrl+V

NOTE: The Delete, cut, copy paste AS_I Slave shortcuts are only available with
Premium Communication TSX SAY 100x modules.

33003101.26 1851
 Keyboard Shortcuts

NOTE: The Delete, cut, copy paste Series 7 modules shortcuts are only available with
Premium Communication TSX ESY 007 modules. Furthermore, these shortcuts are
available if the user has specific access rights. Otherwise, the access is denied.

Creating the Project

Object of this section
This section provides information about the keyboard shortcuts used to create a project.

ST/IL Editors Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the ST/IL Editors are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the ST/IL Editors keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Select data from a list Edit Ctrl+D

Select the Function Input Assistant Edit Ctrl+I

Create an IF Statement Edit/New F4

Create a FOR Statement Edit/New F5
Create a WHILE Statement Edit/New F6
Create a REPEAT Statement Edit/New Shift+F6
Create a CASE Statement Edit/New Shift+F4
Create a variable Edit/New Shift+Enter
Edit the selected text in Upper case Edit Shift+Alt+U

Edit the selected text in lowercase Edit ALt+U

1852 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Find the selected text Edit Ctrl+F

Find the next selected occurrence Edit F3
Find the previous selected occurrence Edit Shift+F3

Replace the selected occurrence Edit Ctrl+H

Go to part of the selected project Edit Ctrl+G

Add a bookmark Edit/Bookmark Ctrl+F2

Go to next bookmark Edit/Bookmark F2
Go to previous bookmark Edit/Bookmark Shift+F2

Delete all bookmarks Edit/Bookmark Ctrl+Shift+F2

Display the general attributes of the selected item Edit Ctrl+Enter

Modify the properties of the selected item Edit Alt+Enter

Add a comment Edit/New F8

Open the Inspect window Edit/New F9

Zoom in View/Zoom • Ctrl+Plus (+)

• Ctrl+Rotate the
mouse wheel
Zoom out View/Zoom • Ctrl+Minus (-)

• Ctrl+Rotate the
mouse wheel
Show/Hide the Inspect window View Shift+F8

Go to the previous section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Up

Go to the next section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Dn

Refine an object Services Ctrl+Q

Set breakpoint Debug Ctrl+F11

Clear breakpoint Debug Ctrl+Shift+F11

Go to the selected breakpoint Debug Ctrl+F5

Step over the next action Debug F11

Step into the action Debug F12

Step out the action Debug Shift+F12

Set watchpoint Debug Alt+F11

Clear watchpoint Debug Alt+Shift+F11

33003101.26 1853
 Keyboard Shortcuts

NOTE: The IF, FOR, WHILE, REPEAT, CASE statement shortcuts are only available
with the ST Editor.

FBD Editor Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the FBD Editor are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the FBD Editor keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Select the Function Input Assistant Edit Ctrl+I

Create a variable Edit Shift+Enter

Select data from a list Edit Ctrl+D
Link an item Edit/New F6
Add a comment Edit/New F8

Open the Inspect window Edit/New F9

Select Mode Edit Esc

Add a bookmark Edit/Bookmark Ctrl+F2
Go to next bookmark Edit/Bookmark F2
Go to previous bookmark Edit/Bookmark Shift+F2

Delete all bookmarks Edit/Bookmark Ctrl+Shift+F2

Zoom to fit View/Zoom Ctrl +*

(* = multiplication sign
of numeric pad)

Zoom in View/Zoom • Ctrl+Plus (+)

• Ctrl+Rotate the
mouse wheel
Zoom out View/Zoom • Ctrl+Minus (-)

1854 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

• Ctrl+Rotate the
mouse wheel
Show/Hide the Inspect window View Shift+F8

Go to the previous section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Up

Go to the next section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Dn

Refine an object Services Ctrl+Q

Set breakpoint Debug Ctrl+F11

Clear breakpoint Debug Ctrl+Shift+F11

Go to the selected breakpoint Debug Ctrl+F5

Step over the next action Debug F11

Step into the action Debug F12

Step out the action Debug Shift+F12

Set watchpoint Debug Alt+F11

Clear watchpoint Debug Alt+Shift+F11

Properties Edit Alt+Enter

Data Properties Edit/New Ctrl+Enter

Data Selection Edit/New Ctrl+D

FFB Input Assistant Edit/New Ctrl+I

NOTE: Most of the Edit tab shortcuts are available by selecting Shift+F10.

SFC Editor Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the SFC Editor are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

33003101.26 1855
 Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the STB Editor keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Add a step Edit/New F3

Add a macro step Edit/New Ctrl+F3

Add a transition Edit/New Shift+F3

Add an alternative branch Edit/New F4
Add an alternative joint Edit/New Shift+F4

Add a parallel branch Edit/New F5

Add a parallel joint Edit/New Shift+F5

Add a link Edit/New F6

Add a comment Edit/New F8

Select Mode Edit Esc

Add a bookmark Edit/Bookmark Ctrl+F2
Go to next bookmark Edit/Bookmark F2
Go to previous bookmark Edit/Bookmark Shift+F2

Delete all bookmarks Edit/Bookmark Ctrl+Shift+F2

Zoom to fit View/Zoom Ctrl +*

(* = multiplication sign
of numeric pad)

Zoom in View/Zoom • Ctrl+Plus (+)

• Ctrl+Rotate the
mouse wheel
Zoom out View/Zoom • Ctrl+Minus (-)

• Ctrl+Rotate the
mouse wheel
Expand/come back to the project display View Ctrl+E

Go to the previous section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Up

Go to the next section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Dn

Initialize Animation Table Services Ctrl+T

Initialize Search Services Ctrl+U

1856 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Data Properties Edit/New Ctrl+Enter

Properties Edit Alt+Enter

NOTE: Most of the Edit table shortcuts are available by selecting Shift+F10.

LD Editor Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the LD Editor are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the LD Editor keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menus Keyboard Shortcut

Add a normally open contact • Edit > New F3

• Objects

Add a closed contact • Edit > New Shift+F3

• Objects

Add a positive transition-sensing contact • Edit > New Ctrl+F3

• Objects

Add a negative transition-sensing contact • Edit > New Ctrl+Shift+F3

• Objects

Add a coil • Edit > New F5

• Objects

Add a negated coil • Edit > New Shift+F5

• Objects

Add a set coil • Edit > New Alt+F5

• Objects

Add a reset coil • Edit > New Shift+Alt+F5

33003101.26 1857
 Keyboard Shortcuts

Action Menus Keyboard Shortcut

• Objects

Add a call coil • Edit > New F4

• Objects

Add a boolean connection • Edit > New F7

• Objects

Add a vertical connection • Edit > New Shift+F7

• Objects

Add a boolean link • Edit > New Alt+F6

• Objects

Add a link • Edit > New F6

• Objects

Add an operate block • Edit > New Alt+F7

• Objects

Add a compare block • Edit > New Ctrl+F7

• Objects

Add a comment • Edit > New F8

• Objects

Select mode • Edit Esc

• Objects

Add a bookmark Edit > Bookmark Ctrl+F2

Go to next bookmark Edit > Bookmark F2

Go to previous bookmark Edit > Bookmark Shift+F2

Delete all bookmarks Edit > Bookmark Ctrl+Shift+F2

Modify the properties of the selected item Edit Alt+Enter

Show or hide the status bar View Alt+0

Zoom to fit View > Zoom Ctrl +*

(* = multiplication sign of
numeric pad)

Zoom in View > Zoom • Ctrl+Plus (+)

• Ctrl+Rotate the mouse

wheel
Zoom out View > Zoom • Ctrl+Minus (-)

1858 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Action Menus Keyboard Shortcut

• Ctrl+Rotate the mouse

wheel
Show/Hide the Inspect window View Shift+F8

Display the mixed mode View Ctrl+E

Go to the previous section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Up

Go to the next section View Ctrl+Alt+Pg Dn

Set breakpoint Debug Ctrl+F11

Clear breakpoint Debug Ctrl+Shift+F11

Go to the selected breakpoint Debug Ctrl+F5

Step over the next action Debug F11

Step into the action Debug F12

Step out the action Debug Shift+F12

Set watchpoint Debug Alt+F11

Clear watchpoint Debug Alt+Shift+F11

Inspect Window • Edit F9

• Objects

Data Selection Edit Ctrl+D

FFB Input Assistant Edit Ctrl+I

Properties Edit Alt+Enter

Data Properties Edit > New Ctrl+Enter

Refine Services Ctrl+Q

NOTE: Most of the Edit tab shortcuts are available by selecting Shift+F10.

Data Editor Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Data Editor are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

33003101.26 1859
 Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Data Editor keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Hide the Inspect window View Shift+F8

NOTE: Some shortcuts are not available from the menu bar. Please note the following
shortcuts.
• Select F2 to edit data
• Select Ctrl+ Home to access the first cell in row
• Select Ctrl+ End to access the last cell in row
• Select + on a node to expand it
• Select - on a node to contract it

Type Library Browser Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Type Library Browser are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Type Library Browser keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Refine an object Services Ctrl+Q

Initialize search Services Ctrl+U

1860 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Type Library Manager Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Some actions or commands can be performed with the keyboard. The shortcuts that you
can use in the Type Library Manager are described in the table below. Furthermore, most of
the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard shortcuts, page 1849
map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Type Library Manager keyboard shortcuts.

Action Keyboard Shortcut

Access the first cell in row Home

Access the last cell in row End
Access the next cell up Up

Access the next cell down Down

Access next cell left Left
Access next cell right Right

Expand a node +

Contract a node -

Exit the project Alt+F4/Esc

Delete data Delete

Selected Several EFB Shift+Left

Operating the Project

Object of this section
This section provides information about the keyboard shortcuts used to operate a project.

33003101.26 1861
 Keyboard Shortcuts

Search Replace Tool Screen Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Search Replace Tool Screen are described in the table
below. Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General
Keyboard shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Search Replace Tool Screen keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Find Next item Edit F3

Find Previous item Edit Shift+F3
Replace an item Edit Ctrl+H

NOTE: Most of the Edit tab shortcuts are available by selecting Shift+F10.

Diagnostic Viewer Screen Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
All the shortcuts that you can use in the Diagnostic Viewer Screen are described in the
General Keyboard Shortcut General Keyboard shortcuts, page 1849 map.

PLC Screen Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
All the the shortcuts that you can use in the PLC Screen are described in theGeneral
Keyboard Shortcuts General Keyboard shortcuts, page 1849 map.

1862 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Animation Screen Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Animation Screen are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Animation Screen keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard

Shortcut
Display format in decimal View/Display Format F3

Display format in hexadecimal View/Display Format Ctrl+F3

Display format in binary View/Display Format Shift+F3

Display format in ASCII View/Display Format Alt+F3

Enable Variable Modification Services F7

Enable Variable Forcing Services F6

Set value to 0 Services Shift+F5

Set value to 1 Services F5
Force to 0 Services Shift+F4
Force to 1 Services F4
Unforce Services Shift+F6
Multiple Mode Services Ctrl+F7

Execute Multiple Values Services Alt+F7

Reset Multiple Values Services Shift+F7

Safety/Maintenance PLC Ctrl+Shift+M

NOTE: Most of the Edit tab shortcuts are available by selecting Shift+F10.
NOTE: This shortcut "Ctrl+Shift+M" is only available with XLS

33003101.26 1863
 Keyboard Shortcuts

Operator Screen Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Operator Screen are described in the table below.
Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General Keyboard
shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Operator Screen keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Validate Edit Ctrl +W

Select all Edit Ctrl+A

Enable variation modification Services F7
Go to the previous animated object Services F4

Go to the next animated object Services F5

NOTE: Some shortcuts are not available from the menu bar. Please note the following
shortcuts.
• Select Space to select next item
• Select Shift+ Space to select the previous item
• Select Alt+ Backspace to cancel thelast action
• Select Tab to focus on the next control object in online mode
• Select Shift+ Tab to focus on the previous control object in online mode
• Select Enter to display the properties of a selected object
• Select an Arrow to make a one pixel move in the arrow direction
• Select Shift+ Arrow to make a 10 pixel move in the arrow direction
• Select Page Up/Down to move the vertical scrollbar up or down
• Select Ctrl + Left/Right to move the horizontal scrollbar left or right

1864 33003101.26
Keyboard Shortcuts

Documenting the Project

Object of this section
This section provides information about the keyboard shortcuts used to document a project.

Documentation Screen Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
Numerous actions or commands can be performed with the mouse as well as the keyboard.
The shortcuts that you can use in the Documentation Screen are described in the table
below. Furthermore, most of the general keyboard shortcuts are available in the General
Keyboard shortcuts, page 1849 map.

Keyboard Shortcuts
This table describes the Documentation Screen keyboard shortcuts.

Action Menu Keyboard Shortcut

Validate the action Edit Ctrl+W

NOTE: Some shortcuts are not available from the menu bar. Please note the following
shortcuts.
• Select F5 to refresh a project
• Select Ctrl+Plus (+) to zoom in a project
• Select Ctrl+Plus (-) to zoom out of a project
• Select Ctrl+E to zoom to fit

33003101.26 1865
Glossary
A
ANY:
There is a hierarchy between the different types of data. In the DFB, it is sometimes
possible to declare which variables can contain several types of values. Here, we use
ANY_xxx types.
The following diagram shows the hierarchically-ordered structure:

33003101.26 1867
 B
BCD:
The Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) format is used to represent decimal numbers between 0
and 9 using a group of four bits (half-byte).
In this format, the four bits used to code the decimal numbers have a range of unused
combinations.
Example of BCD coding:
• the number 2450
• is coded: 0010 0100 0101 0000
BOOL:
BOOL is the abbreviation for Boolean type. This is the elementary data item in computing. A
BOOL type variable has a value of either: 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE).
A BOOL type word extract bit, for example: %MW10.4.

C
CPU:
Is the abbreviation for Control Processing Unit.
This is the microprocessor. It is made up of the control unit combined with the arithmetic
unit. The aim of the control unit is to extract the instruction to be executed and the data
needed to execute this instruction from the central memory, to establish electrical
connections in the arithmetic unit and logic, and to run the processing of this data in this
unit. We can sometimes find ROM or RAM memories included in the same chip, or even I/
O interfaces or buffers.

D
DDT:
DDT is the abbreviation for Derived Data Type.
A derived data type is a set of elements of the same type (ARRAY) or of various types
(structure)

1868 33003101.26
 DFB:
DFB is the abbreviation for Derived Function Block.
DFB types are function blocks that can be programmed by the user ST, IL, LD or FBD.
By using DFB types in an application, it is possible to:
• simplify the design and input of the program,
• increase the legibility of the program,
• facilitate the debugging of the program,
• reduce the volume of the generated code.
DINT:
DINT is the abbreviation for Double Integer format (coded on 32 bits).
The lower and upper limits are as follows: -(2 to the power of 31) to (2 to the power of 31) -
1.
Example:
-2147483648, 2147483647, 16#FFFFFFFF.

E
EBOOL:
EBOOL is the abbreviation for Extended Boolean type. A EBOOL type variable brings a
value (0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE) but also rising or falling edges and forcing capabilities.
An EBOOL type variable takes up one byte of memory.
The byte split up into:
• one bit for the value,
• one bit for the history bit (each time the state’s object changes, the value is copied
inside the history bit),
• one bit for the forcing bit (equals to 0 if the object isn’t forced, equal to 1 if the bit is
forced.
The default type value of each bit is 0 (FALSE).

33003101.26 1869
 EDT:
EDT is the abbreviation for Elementary Data Type.
These types are as follows:
• BOOL,
• EBOOL,
• WORD,
• DWORD,
• INT,
• DINT,
• UINT,
• UDINT,
• REAL,
• DATE,
• TOD,
• DT.
EFB:
Is the abbreviation for Elementary Function Block.
This is a block which is used in a program, and which performs a predefined software
function.
EFBs have internal statuses and parameters. Even where the inputs are identical, the
output values may be different. For example, a counter has an output which indicates that
the preselection value has been reached. This output is set to 1 when the current value is
equal to the preselection value.

F
FTP:
FTP is the abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is the web’s file transfer protocol.

H
HTTP:
HTTP is the abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. HTTP is the protocol for the
formatting and transmission of files on the web. HTTP runs on top of TCP/IP (internet)
protocols.

1870 33003101.26
 I
I/O object:
An I/O object is an implicit or explicit language object for an expert function module or a I/O
device on a fieldbus. They are of the following types: %Ch, %I, %IW, %ID, %IF, %Q, %QW,
% QD, QF, %KW, %KD, %KF, %MW, %MD, and %MF.
The objects' topological address depends on the module's position on the rack or the
device's position on the bus.
For Premium/Atrium PLCs double-type instances of located data (%MD<i>, %KD<i>) or
floating (%MF<i>, %KF<i>) should be located by an integer type (%MW<i>, %KW<i>). Only
I/O objects make it possible to locate type instances (%MD<i>, %KD<i>, %QD, %ID, %
MF<i>, %KF<i>, %QF, %IF) by using their topological address (for example %MD0.6.0.11,
%MF0.6.0.31).
For Modicon M340 PLCs, double-type instances of located data (%MD<i>, %KD<i>) or
floating (%MF<i>, %KF<i>) are not available.

INT:
INT is the abbreviation for single integer format (coded on 16 bits).
The lower and upper limits are as follows: -(2 to the power of 31) to (2 to the power of 31) -
1.
Example:
-32768, 32767, 2#1111110001001001, 16#9FA4.

IODDT:
IODDT is the abbreviation for Input/Output Derived Data Type.
The term IODDT designates a structured data type representing a module or a channel of a
PLC module. Each application expert module possesses its own IODDTs.

M
multi task:
Application comprising several tasks (Mast, Fast, Auxiliary, event processing).
The order of priority for the execution of tasks is defined by the operating system of the
PLC.

multiple token:
Operating mode of an SFC. In multitoken mode, the SFC may possess several active steps
at the same time.

33003101.26 1871
 N
naming convention (identifier):
An identifier is a sequence of letters, numbers and underlines beginning with a letter or
underline (e.g., name of a function block type, an instance, a variable or a section). If you
select the Extended option in the Tools > Project Settings... > Variables dialog, letters
from national character sets (e.g., ö, ü, é, õ) can be used. Underlines are significant in
identifiers; e.g., A_BCD and AB_CD are interpreted as different identifiers. Ending
underlines is invalid.
Identifiers cannot contain spaces. Not case sensitive; e.g., ABCD and abcd are interpreted
as the same identifier.
According to IEC 61131-3 leading digits are not allowed in identifiers. Nevertheless, you
can use them if you activate the check box Allow leading digits in the Tools > Project
Settings... > Variables dialog.
According to IEC 61131-3 multiple leading underlines and consecutives underlines are not
allowed in identifiers. Nevertheless, you can use them if you select the Extended option in
the Tools > Project Settings... > Variables > Character set dialog.
Identifiers cannot be keywords.

P
procedure:
Procedures are functions view technically. The only difference to elementary functions is
that procedures can take up more than one output and they support data type VAR_IN_
OUT. To the eye, procedures are no different than elementary functions.
Procedures are a supplement to IEC 61131-3.

Program Unit:
A Program Unit is a part of program with it’s own set of local and public variables. Program
Units allow easy duplication and clear organization of program with local and public
variables. Program Units are compliant with Program Organization Units (POUs) program
as defined in IEC1131-3 standard.

S
section:
Program module belonging to a task which can be written in the language chosen by the
programmer (FBD, LD, ST, IL, or SFC).
A task can be composed of several sections, the order of execution of the sections
corresponding to the order in which they are created, and being modifiable.

1872 33003101.26
 single token:
Operating mode of an SFC chart for which only a single step can be active at any one time.

subroutine:
Program module belonging to a task (MAST, FAST, AUX) which can be written in the
language chosen by the programmer (FBD, LD, ST, or IL).
A subroutine may only be called by a section or by another subroutine belonging to the task
in which it is declared.

T
TIME:
The type TIME expresses a duration in milliseconds. Coded in 32 bits, this type makes it
possible to obtain periods from 0 to (2 to the power of 32)-1 milliseconds.

U
UDINT:
UDINT is the abbreviation for Unsigned Double Integer format (coded on 32 bits) unsigned.
The lower and upper limits are as follows: 0 to (2 to the power of 32) - 1.
Example:
0, 4294967295, 2#11111111111111111111111111111111, 8#37777777777,
16#FFFFFFFF.

UINT:
UINT is the abbreviation for Unsigned integer format (coded on 16 bits). The lower and
upper limits are as follows: 0 to (2 to the power of 16) - 1.
Example:
0, 65535, 2#1111111111111111, 8#177777, 16#FFFF.

33003101.26 1873
Index configuring
project................................................ 1281
configuring networks ................................ 445
configuring X-way .................................... 453
A connecting to PLC......................................85
adding communication parameters .....................95
user directory ....................................... 171 setting address .......................................87
adjusting types of connection .................................92
variables ............................................ 1460 contacts
animation LL984 editor ...............................1113, 1132
animation tables ................................. 1467 Container
inspect window ................................... 1465 FDT ..................................................... 263
PLC screen ........................................ 1448 conversion wizard
program ............................................. 1389 access ............................................... 1735
variables window ................................ 1462 conversion ......................................... 1738
animation tables CPU configuration tab ......................... 1761
hyperlinks........................................... 1795 general procedure............................... 1733
application ............................................... 191 general representation ........................ 1737
protecting ............................................. 174 introduction ........................................ 1733
assistant I/O remapping tab ............................... 1743
calling FFB functions........................... 1192 launch................................................ 1735
import/export ...................................... 1717 results................................................ 1738
type library manager ............................. 323 structure tab ....................................... 1739
creating
derived data types ................................ 352
B EDT/DDT/IODDT/Device DDT
instances............................................ 386
backup project EFB/DFB instances............................... 376
Modicon M340...................................... 118 creating a program
Premium .............................................. 120 LL984 editor ........................................1113
bookmarks current library........................................... 316
graphical languages.............................. 607
browser
DTM .................................................... 279 D
Browser Contextual Menus ....................... 289
Field Bus Discovery .............................. 297 data editor ............................................... 344
browser directories................................... 198 hyperlinks........................................... 1781
budget management ........................................ 421
IO ...................................................... 1332 data storage ............................................ 191
protecting ............................................. 189
DDT (derived data type)............................ 352
C instances ............................................. 386
debugging
coils program ............................................. 1382
LL984 editor ........................................1113 derived data types (DDT) .......................... 352
comparing instances ............................................. 386
project....................................................99 derived function blocks (DFB) ................. 1247
configuration editor................................. 1281 DFB

33003101.26 1875
 hyperlinks........................................... 1787 selecting data ..................................... 1174
DFB (derived function block) ................... 1247 using type library browser.................... 1224
DFB Type .............................................. 1247 FDT container
diagnostics ............................................ 1508 introduction .......................................... 263
diagnostics viewer.................................. 1514 user rights ............................................ 264
documentation ....................................... 1650 FDT Container ......................................... 263
hyperlinks........................................... 1805 FFB library version
DTM properties............................................. 172
add ...................................................... 271 Field Bus Discovery.................................. 297
Browser ............................................... 279 file
DTM hardware catalog ............................. 267 encryption ............................................ 174
DTM Hardware Catalog ............................ 266 file encryption
DTM properties ........................................ 305 partial program export ......................... 1678
DTM services........................................... 291 filtering
data ..................................................... 430
firmware .................................................. 191
E protecting ............................................. 185
forget
EDS file password ............................................. 191
add ...................................................... 272 FTP......................................................... 148
remove ................................................ 274 function blocks
EDT (elementary data type) ...................... 386 LL984 editor ...............................1113, 1147
EFB (elementary function block) functional modules ................................... 232
instances ............................................. 376
elementary data types (EDT)..................... 386
elementary function blocks (EFB)
instances ............................................. 376
G
encryption go to
file ....................................................... 174 project browser..................................... 168
equation network blocks graphical languages
LL984 editor ...............................1113, 1156 bookmarks ........................................... 607
Excel
export ................................................ 1698
import ................................................ 1701 H
export.................................................... 1677
Excel ................................................. 1698 Hardware Catalog
exporting DTM .................................................... 266
exporting with file encryption active ...... 1678 hyperlinks .............................................. 1765

F I
FBD IL
reference data type ............................... 731 reference data type ............................. 1072
FBD editor ............................................... 643 IL editor ................................................. 1044
creating a program................................ 643 other functions.................................... 1009
editing FFBs ......................................... 661 search/replace function ....................... 1232
other functions...................................... 607 selecting data ..................................... 1174
search/replace function ....................... 1232 using type library browser.................... 1224

1876 33003101.26
import.................................................... 1677 upgrade/downgrade .............................. 312
Excel ................................................. 1701 links
import XEF file LL984 editor ...............................1113, 1151
Libset version ..................................... 1713 LL984 editor
import ZEF file assigning variables .....................1113, 1163
Libset version ..................................... 1713 coils...........................................1113, 1139
information contacts .....................................1113, 1132
Libset............................................312, 316 creating a program...............................1113
INIT......................................................... 117 equation network blocks ..............1113, 1156
instruction editor function blocks............................1113, 1147
LL984 editor ....................................... 1495 instruction editor ................................. 1495
I/O objects management......................... 1200 links...........................................1113, 1151
IO network display...........................1113, 1122
budget ............................................... 1332 search/replace function ....................... 1232
IODDT .................................................... 386 subroutines ................................1113, 1166
loss
password ............................................. 191
K
keyboard
shortcut.............................................. 1839
M
maintain output links on disabled EF
project settings ..................................... 574
L memory
pack function ........................................ 145
LD memory card ........................................... 148
reference data type ............................... 874 memory card access
LD editor ................................................. 737 Modicon M340...................................... 147
creating a program................................ 737 memory consumption ............................... 134
other functions...................................... 607 modifying the Libset version...................... 311
search/replace function ....................... 1232
using type library browser.................... 1224
libraries
Libset................................................... 310
N
library content .......................................... 316 network display
library management LL984 editor ...............................1113, 1122
variables and FFB types ........................ 310
library manager........................................ 314
areas ................................................... 315 O
Libset
installation tool...................................... 310 offline mode...............................................68
Libset (set of libraries) .............................. 310 online mode...............................................77
Libset information..............................312, 316 online modifications....................................79
Libset version open project dialog .....................................70
import XEF file.................................... 1713 operator screen...................................... 1545
import ZEF file .................................... 1713 hyperlinks........................................... 1799
modifying ............................................. 311 options .................................................... 546
options...................................................70 Libset version .........................................70
properties............................................. 172 output windows ...................................... 1832

33003101.26 1877
P search/replace function ....................... 1232
selecting data ..................................... 1174
password using type library browser.................... 1224
forget ................................................... 191 ST
loss...................................................... 191
reference data type ..............................1111
section ................................................. 181 ST editor................................................ 1075
Program Unit ........................................... 472 other functions.................................... 1009
creation................................................ 472
search/replace function ....................... 1232
protecting ............................................. 187
selecting data ..................................... 1174
project browser ........................................ 155 using type library browser.................... 1224
hyperlinks........................................... 1777
status bar .............................................. 1834
project settings
STOP...................................................... 117
maintain output links on disabled EF ...... 574 structural view.......................................... 198
properties structure (DDT) ........................................ 352
FFB library version................................ 172
instances ............................................. 386
Libset version ....................................... 172 subroutines
protecting LL984 editor ...............................1113, 1166
application............................................ 174
summary
data storage ......................................... 189
configuration ........................................ 266
firmware............................................... 185 connections.......................................... 266
Program Unit ........................................ 187
section ................................................. 187
purge of data ........................................... 436
T
tasks ....................................................... 469
R time out
FTP ..................................................... 148
Ready ..................................................... 285
transferring
RUN........................................................ 117 data ..................................................... 122
project.................................................. 112
type library
S update ................................................. 332
safe area type library browser ................................ 1224
password ............................................. 181 type library manager..........................310, 314
search/replace function .......................... 1232 areas ................................................... 315
section description ........................................... 317
protecting ............................................. 187
sections................................................... 499
security editor ............................................65 U
selecting
updating
data ................................................... 1174 initial values ......................................... 134
settings upgrade/downgrade the Libset version ...... 312
Control Expert ...................................... 587
upload information.................................... 116
project.................................................. 546
toolbar/menu ........................................ 602
SFC editor ............................................... 882
creating a program................................ 882
V
other functions...................................... 607 variables (EDT)........................................ 386

1878 33003101.26
variables assignment
LL984 editor ...............................1113, 1163

Z
zoom..............................................613, 1016
project browser..................................... 160

33003101.26 1879
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison
France
+ 33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
www.se.com

As standards, specifications, and design change from time to

time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in
this publication.

© 2022 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

33003101.26